JP2021164738A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine characterized in display means.SOLUTION: A game machine includes display means and operation means. When the operation means is operated during the display of performance adjustment display, the performance adjustment can be performed. When a first performance setting display related to the performance setting is displayed during the display of the performance adjustment display, the performance adjustment cannot be performed even if the operation means is operated, and when variation display is started, the performance adjustment display is deleted.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 33

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Conventionally, a game table provided with a display means such as a liquid crystal display device is widely known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-200320

However, there is room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

The game console according to the present invention is a game console including a display means and an operation means, the display means is a means capable of displaying the first effect setting display, and the display means is an effect. It is a means capable of displaying the adjustment display, and the first effect setting display is a display related to the effect setting, and if the operation means is operated during the display of the effect adjustment display, the effect adjustment is possible. In some cases, the first effect setting display is displayed during the display of the effect adjustment display (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), and the operation means is operated in the first case. However, the effect adjustment display is impossible, and when the variation display is started in the first case, the effect adjustment display is erased.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative pattern is shown. (C) An example of a stop symbol mode of a normal figure is shown. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is a figure which showed an example of an item. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 1 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 2 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 3 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 4 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 5 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 6 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 7 in chronological order. It is a transition diagram which showed an example of the transition of the screen in the pachinko machine 100. It is the figure which showed an example of the real screen transition in time series. It is a figure which showed an example of the screen transition when various menus are selected in a menu screen. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 8 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 9 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 10 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 11 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 12 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 13 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 14 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 15 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 16 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 17 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on Example 18 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on modification 1 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on modification 2 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item addition effect which concerns on modification 3 in time series. It is a figure which showed various displays including the setting reflection display which concerns on Example 1 in time series. It is a figure which showed various displays including the setting reflection display which concerns on Example 2 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed various displays including the setting reflection display which concerns on the modification of Example 2 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed various displays including the setting reflection display which concerns on Example 3 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed various displays including the setting reflection display which concerns on Example 4 in time series. It is a figure which showed various displays including the setting reflection display which concerns on Example 5 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed various displays including the setting reflection display which concerns on the modification of Example 5 in time series. It is a figure which shows one example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 42. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 45. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the pseudo-continuous production step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 49. It is a figure which shows the other example of a pseudo-continuous production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a button continuous press operation effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a button continuous press operation effect step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise an example of the hold consecutive villa notice production which is executed during a big hit game. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the hold consecutive villa notice production executed during a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the hold consecutive villa notice production executed during a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a button continuous press operation effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 65. (A) is a diagram showing another example of the decorative symbol, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a combination of symbols that is a chance of pre-reading notice. It is a figure which shows stepwise an example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 68. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 71. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 72. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a pseudo-continuous production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. (A) is a diagram showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and (B) is a pseudo-continuous effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of. It is a figure which shows an example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure explaining the mode of change of the remaining time display meter in a button effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure which shows some example that the navigation character YM of a character of a lord is taking an action with respect to a variable icon h0. It is a figure which shows some examples in which the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is taking action against the variable icon h0. It is a figure which shows some example that the display mode of an icon changes even if the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows some example in which a navigation character YM takes action a plurality of times with respect to a variation icon h0 in one variation display of a decorative symbol. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 166, in which the navigation character YM takes an action a plurality of times with respect to the variation icon h0 in one variation display of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows two examples of the icon change effect. It is a figure which shows some example that a navigator character YM takes a plurality of actions with respect to a hold icon in one variation display of a decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows some example in which a navigator character YM takes an action a plurality of times with respect to a hold icon in a plurality of variable displays of a decorative symbol. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 171 in which the navigation character YM takes an action on the hold icon a plurality of times in a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows two examples of the icon change animation. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the variation display of a decorative pattern executed in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which the ninja navigation character NJ of the default display mode takes an action with respect to the hold icon. It is a figure which shows the example which the navigation character NJ of a red ninja is taking an action with respect to a hold icon. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of the icon change notice display and mode change. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in the 3rd column and after from the left in FIG. 177, and still another example of the change effect of a navigation character. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in the 3rd column and after from the left in FIG. 178, and other production example. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in the 3rd column and after from the left in FIG. 179. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the movable body 90, and the production example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the structure 247. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using the hold icon and the variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the balloon display. It is a figure explaining the effect example using a variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using a variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using a variable icon. It is a figure explaining the effect example using a variable icon. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the effect example in which a timer notice effect and a frame change animation are performed. It is a figure explaining the effect example in which a timer notice effect and a frame change animation are performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the machine 2000 of the holding, (b) shows the mobile phone 3000 which has the storage part which stores the electronic data which realizes this invention. , (C) show a portable game machine 4000 including a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) includes a storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. A home-use video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

Hereinafter, the game console according to the first embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 and a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<< Embodiment 1 >>
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface thereof. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The game area 124 is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 by the operation of the player, a chance button lamp 138 that emits the chance button 136, and a game store. A ball lending operation button 140 that gives an instruction to lend a ball to the installed card unit (CR unit), a return operation button 142 that gives an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, and a player's balance and a card. It is provided with a ball rental display unit 144 that displays the state of the unit. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged. The payout device 152 is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate the sprocket by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls, and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk. Power is supplied to the payout board case 172 that houses the payout board 170 including 168, the launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to the launch of the game ball, and various electrical game devices. A power supply board including a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating 182 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are arranged.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

A decorative symbol display device 208 having a display area R1 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. The display area R1 may be the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, but is a part of the display area in the present embodiment. In the lower right area of the game board 200, there are a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol hold lamp 218. A second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The display area R1 is divided into four display areas of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c, and the effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol are divided into four display areas. The display area 208c can display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d can display an image used for the effect.

Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, it does not have to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro Liquid Crystal) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of, for example, 7-segment LEDs.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure changing games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure changing game is performed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high-probability state, and the gaming state is from a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

In the game area 124, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a meter increasing entrance 227, a normal drawing starting port 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, and a second special drawing starting port 231 and 232 and variable winning openings 234 and 235 are arranged. In the case of the present embodiment, the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 231 are provided in the start port unit U1. The start port unit U1 constitutes a passage unit that distributes the game ball that has entered from above to the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 231. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 and 235 are provided in the variable winning opening unit U2. The number, position, and the like of the meter increasing entrance 227 according to the present embodiment are not limited to this example, and for example, two or more meter increasing entrances 227 may be provided. It may be arranged in another place in the game area 124, or may be placed in a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234, 235) or a starting opening (first special drawing starting port 230, second special drawing starting port 231). 232) may have the same function as the meter increasing entrance 227.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). (When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Then, it is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. The ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 230, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls on the upper plate 126. At the same time as discharging, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The second special figure start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in this embodiment, only one is arranged below the normal figure start port 228. The second special figure start port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the right, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed. When the 210 hits and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times.

When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 231 or 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate 126. At the same time as discharging, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 231 or 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called large winning openings or attackers. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member 234a is closed. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The variable winning opening 235 also has a mechanism that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for the ball to enter the ball while it is closed. For example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds) and closed. As a result, a V prize may be awarded.

Further, in the game area 124, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged, and any winning opening or starting is provided at the lowermost portion of the inner rail 204. An out port 240 is provided for guiding the ball that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146. And, by the launching mallet 148, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed and launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning openings (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234, 235) and the like. Win a prize at the start port (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 231, 232), without winning any prize port or start port, or just pass through the normal figure start port 228. To reach the out port 240.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted. It is mainly composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and data temporarily. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 has a random number value generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit has two built-in random number value generation circuits). ) And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a clock sensor and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random number value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the normal figure display device 210. , A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of various status display units 328 (for example, the clock holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that open and close a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the like is connected.

The random number value generation circuit 318 generates a random number value used in the basic circuit 302. There are roughly two types of random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to perform an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of a random number, and derive the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number. The random number value generation circuit 318 acquires irregular values by using white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number value generation circuit 318 is used as an initial value of a counter for counting up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. ..

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. The random number value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It is stored in the random number value storage register corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is also the same. The value in the above is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 built in the random number value generation circuit 318.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 issues commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured so that signals can be transmitted, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. It is equipped with a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, and the like. The ROM 406 in which is stored is connected.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the sensor 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a cloaking device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a cloaking device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the cloaking device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, a cloaking device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor. The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404, and the like are read out, and the work area of the VRAM 436 is used to generate a display image for decoration. A VDP434 (video display processor) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208 is connected to the symbol display device 208.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program, data, and an image display for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500. A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.
Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. 518, a sensor circuit 518 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game board frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542. A circuit 540, a serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout is completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to the 630, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained. FIG. 3A shows an example of a stop symbol mode of the special figure.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first special figure start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232. 2 The variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". conduct. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variable display of the symbol according to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of No. 2 (which also corresponds to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variation display of the special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, or after the start of the "variation display of the special figure 2", the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 is displayed. The period up to the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, and hereinafter, the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of displays up to is called the symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be performed a plurality of times in succession. In FIG. 6A, 10 types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display. In the figure (a), the white part in the figure shows the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black part shows the location of the segment that is turned on.

"Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the time is shortened. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state, and the state of not shifting to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "special figure A" is in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "special figure B" is in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. These "special figure A" and "special figure B" are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively large amount of profit.

"Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure C" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure D" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure B" which is 15R.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Both "Special Figure E" and "Special Figure F" are 2R and do not shift to the time saving state.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, and "special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit without 2R time reduction. That is, the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", but the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is different between the two, and even in the same state, the "special figure" is intentionally displayed. By providing "G", "Special Figure H" and "Special Figure F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

Further, "special figure I" is a first out-of-order symbol, and "special figure J" is a second out-of-line symbol, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "Special Figure A" is also prepared as a 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special symbol starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208. In each symbol display area of area 208c, "decoration 1"-> "decoration 2"-> "decoration 3"-> ... "decoration 9"-> "decoration 10"-> "decoration 1"-> ... is displayed in this order. Perform "variable display of decorative pattern" to switch. Then, in the case of notifying the 15R jackpot of "special figure B", a symbol combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") 1 ”and“ Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", a combination of three patterns of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" "Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the 2R jackpot called "Hidden Probability Change" of "Special Figure E", the sudden 2R jackpot called "Special Figure F", or the first small hit of "Special Figure G", "Special Figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying the 2R jackpot called "special figure C" sudden change or the 2R jackpot called "special figure D" sudden time reduction, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is used. Stop display. On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of the "special figure I" and the second deviation of the "special figure J", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in the figure (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

In FIG. 3C, there are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol “Public figure A” and a missed symbol “Public figure B”. Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "variable display of general map". Then, "Fu-zu A" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the Furu-zu fluctuating game, and "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed when notifying the deviation of the Furu-zu fluctuating game. Also in this figure (c), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step SA01, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT314 is set. Allow the operation of and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step SA03, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step SA05, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step SA03, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step SA03. Proceed to SA07. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step SA03, and step SA05 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step SA07, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step SA09, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step SA13).

Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of a game store is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step SA13 in order to put the basic circuit 302 in the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step SA13 to initialize the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step SA11 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step SA13 to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step SA13.

In step SA11, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step SA15) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step SA11, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step SB33 in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step SA13, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step SA13) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step SA15, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, there are two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter, the normal figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer. Update the two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step SB07, which will be described later.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step SA15 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step SB01, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step SB03, the WDT is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step SB05, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full tank sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I / O 310. It is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step SB05 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is judged that there was a passage of. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226 and 234 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next to determine whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step SB07 and step SB09, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step SA15 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

In step SB11, the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step SB13, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for counting, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for counting the time for changing / stopping the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time , Update various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step SB15, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning in the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228, the winning ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step SB17, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In this prize acceptance process, it is determined whether or not the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the normal figure start port 228, and the variable winning port 234 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not the information matches the winning determination pattern information in step SB03. When the first special figure start port 230 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage of the random number value generation circuit 318 corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. The value is acquired from the register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 1 winning random number value, and the value is acquired from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation. The processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. When the second special figure start port 232 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230 of the random number value generation circuit 318. The value is acquired from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 winning random number value, and the value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number counter for generating the random number value. Then, the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

In step SB19, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step SB21, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display the out-of-line symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (c)) and the off symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. do. Further, if the result of the normal-figure variable game is out of order, the non-normal-figure flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this out-of-normal flag is on, even in the normal-figure state update process at the end of the predetermined stop display period described above (the timing when the value of the normal-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step SB23 without doing anything.

In step SB23, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step SB25). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a general drawing Probability fluctuation flags Each flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation. When the flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 5 (a) are on, the special figure probability change flag is off, and the normal figure probability change flag is on. Is the special figure B, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the normal figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure Special figure F when the probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure F when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also off, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, and special figure H when the second small hit flag is on. , The 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 so as to be in the special figure I when the first loss flag is on and in the special figure I when the second loss flag is on. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability change symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time saving symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation symbol (special symbol E), sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), first small hit symbol (special symbol G), second small hit symbol (special symbol H), first missed symbol (special symbol) Confirmation display of any one of I) and the second outlier symbol (special symbol J) is performed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, the player waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the door member 234a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 until a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are won in the variable winning opening 234. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process which repeats the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the effect waiting period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number of times 100 times is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot is shortened. When this time saving flag is set to on, it is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, there is a higher possibility of hitting the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special-figure variable game are shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state. Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of games will be played in the variable winning opening 234 during the jackpot game, and many games will be played in the second special figure starting opening 232 until the game ball enters. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases due to the ball entering the ball and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is different, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step SB27 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step SB27). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step SB25 and step SB27 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step SB29), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step SB31). Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure start port 232. However, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special figure start port 230 is notified with priority.

In step SB33, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off by the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the special figure The value of the probability fluctuation flag is included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure start port 230 has been won, whether or not the second special figure start port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 has been won. Including presence / absence.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related, which are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned prize-winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the prize-winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. Further, in this step SB33, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step SB35, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step SB37, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step SB05 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. , When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display are displayed via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step SB19) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

In step SB39, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step SB43, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step SB41.

In step SB41, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step SB01 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step SB43, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit described above.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step SC01 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step SC01. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step SC03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05. In step SC05, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step SC07, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In step SC09, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step SC07, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step SC11, when the press of the chance button is detected, the effect data updated in step SC09 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button. In step SC13, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step SC09, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

In step SC15, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step SC09, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. In step SC17, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step SC09, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step SC19, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step SC09, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step SC21, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step SC09, the setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step SC03.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step SD01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step SE01 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step SC03 in the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step SC03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step SE03 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step SC19, an effect random value value update process, and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step SC13 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step SF01, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step SF03, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP434 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF05. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step SF05, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step SF01, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP434. The VDP434 sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step SF07, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step SF09, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP434 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF11. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered. In step SF11, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step SG01 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step SG01. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step SG03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SG05. In step SG05, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step SG07, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. In step SG09, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step SG07, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step SG11, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step SG13, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516 and the process returns to step SG03.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step SH01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step SI01 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step SG03 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step SG03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step SI03 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

<Item type>
Next, the types of items included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an item.

Here, the item is a general term for benefits, equipment, functions, etc. that can be given to the player by the pachinko machine 100, and the items related to this embodiment are roughly divided into two types, a custom item and a non-custom item. Can be separated. Custom items are items that allow players to modify (customize) the display, sound, functions, various probabilities, etc. of pachinko machines according to their own tastes. Further, the non-custom item is an item in which the display, sound, function, various probabilities, etc. of the pachinko machine 100 cannot be modified (customized), but a predetermined profit is given to the player.

The pachinko machine 100 is configured to grant the item to the player when the item granting condition set for each item is satisfied. When a custom item is assigned, the player can display the pachinko machine 100 by performing a setting operation of the assigned custom item using the effect customization screen (see FIG. 19 (q), etc.) described later. , Voice, function, various probabilities, etc. can be modified (customized) according to one's taste. Further, when a non-custom item is given, the player can obtain a predetermined profit (for example, a profit advantageous to the player such as a notice, a look-ahead notice, a tutorial display, etc.) through the item.

In the example shown in FIG. 10, for example, the item granting condition of item A (normal BGM custom 1), item B (normal BGM custom 2), or item C (normal BGM custom 3) is satisfied, and the item is granted. In this case, it is possible to modify (customize) the background sound (BGM) during the normal game of the pachinko machine 100 according to one's own preference. In addition, when the item granting condition of item D (holding pedestal custom 1), item E (holding pedestal custom 2), or item F (holding pedestal custom 3) is satisfied and the item is granted, the pachinko machine It is possible to modify (customize) a part of the display of the hold icon (hold display) in 100 (in this example, the image of the pedestal displayed under the hold icon) according to one's preference.

In addition, when the item granting condition of "heat" is satisfied and the item is granted, the player is given a notice 1 indicating that the result of the fluctuation is "hot (high expectation)". Can obtain information on the winning result of the variation (for example, information that the winning result of the special figure variation game is a hit or the possibility of winning is high). In addition, when the item granting condition of "super heat" is satisfied and the item is granted, a notice 2 indicating that the result of the fluctuation is "super heat (extremely high expectation)" is given. As a result, the player can obtain information on the winning result of the variation (for example, information that the winning result of the special figure variation game is a big hit or the possibility of a big hit is high).

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect will be described. Here, the meter increase effect is an effect executed in connection with the entry of the ball into the meter increase entrance 227 described with reference to FIG. 3, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number (in this example, the meter increase effect). A meter with gauges (scales) of 10) is displayed, and one ball is displayed at the entrance for increasing the meter 227, and the gauge of the meter is turned off (reduced) by one each time it enters (for details, see See below).

By executing such a meter increase effect, the player can determine the number of balls that have entered the meter increase entrance 227 and whether or not the meter gauge is full (determined at the meter increase entrance 227). It is possible to grasp whether or not a number (10 in this example) of balls has entered. The mode of the meter increase effect is not limited to this example, and for example, even if one ball is displayed at the meter increase entrance 227 and one meter gauge is lit (increased) each time the ball enters. good.

Further, the item granting effect is an effect executed in connection with the item granting, and in the present embodiment, when the gauge of the meter is full (a predetermined number at the entrance for increasing the meter 227 (this example). Then, when 10) balls enter), it is determined that the item granting condition is satisfied, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display that the item has been granted, the type of the item, and the like. (Details will be described later). By executing such an item granting effect, the player can grasp that the item has been granted, the type of the item, and the like. The item granting conditions and the mode of the item granting effect are not limited to this example. For example, the number and types of items that have already been acquired may be displayed, and the items are special (rare items). There is) may be displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 1>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the first embodiment in chronological order.

The first embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during the symbol variation. The game state shown in FIG. 11A is a state in which the variable game of the special figure is being executed (during the symbol change). Further, in this example, there is a reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is 3 and the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 3. , It is shown numerically that the number of pending games of the normal map fluctuation game is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 6 due to the display of 6 hold icon PIs. 9 gauges were turned off and 1 gauge GG was turned on. 9 balls entered the meter increase entrance 227 due to the meter increase effect (1 more ball). If you enter, the gauge will be full). Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of "item not set".

During such a symbol variation, when one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 11B, it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 11C1. After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, the character display CD2 of "full tank" is performed instead of the meter display as shown in FIG. 11 (d). By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition has been satisfied.

The state shown in FIG. 11 (e) that follows is a state in which the item granting effect has been started. In the item granting effect according to this example, when the item granting condition is satisfied, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIGS. 11 (e) to 11 (g). While enlarging the display, an animation display is performed to move the decorative symbol display device 208 from the lower display area to the center, and as shown in FIG. 11 (h), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG imitating the capsule. After performing the animation display, as shown in FIG. 11 (i), as information about the item, the item name (item A in this example) IN display and the item description IT (item A description in this example). (The content is omitted in the figure)) is displayed.

In this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the variable display of the decorative symbol, at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect is displayed at least one of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It overlaps the part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering it.

The state shown in FIG. 11 (j) that follows is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item grant effect. In this example, when the information about the item (in this example, the item name and the description of the item) is displayed in the item granting effect, the button is displayed over the period shown in FIGS. 11 (j) to 11 (m). Perform the production.

In this example, by displaying the display related to the button effect in front of the display related to the item addition effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol, at least a part of the display related to the button effect is related to the item addition effect. It overlaps at least a part of the display and the variable display of the decorative pattern. With such a configuration, the visibility of the button effect is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately informed of the operation by the operating means and the effective time thereof, and the variable display of the decorative pattern and the item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the effect.

In this button effect, the appearance of the selection display SG that allows a specific selection (in this example, selection of whether to set the acquired item or not) from a plurality of options and the chance button 136 in which the reception of the operation is effective is imitated. Of the button image BG1 including the image and the character string (PUSH in this example) that prompts the pressing operation of the chance button 136, and the up / down / left / right direction keys (not shown), the appearance of the left / right key for which operation reception is effective is imitated. The operation valid period display TG is displayed, which consists of the button image BG2 and the meter display indicating the period during which the reception of the operation by the operating means (chance button 136 and the left and right keys in this example) is valid.

As shown in FIG. 11 (l), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted with the "Yes" option temporarily selected during such a button effect, as shown in FIG. 11 (m). , By highlighting the "Yes" option, it is notified that the "Yes" selection has been confirmed (the selection to set the acquired item has been made).

The following state shown in FIG. 11 (n) is a state in which the button effect is finished and the item grant effect is resumed. In the item granting effect after resumption, FIGS. 11 (n) to FIG. 11 (p) are triggered by a specific selection (in this example, the selection to set the acquired item) from a plurality of options in the button effect. After performing an animation display that moves the image including the item name from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while gradually reducing the image for the period shown in (1), the item is not set. It is shown that the item A is set as a custom item by the player by performing the character display CD3 of "item A is being set" instead of the character display CD1.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 2>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second embodiment in chronological order.

The second embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during the SP (super) reach fluctuation. In the second embodiment, the variable game of the special figure develops from the normal symbol variation to the SP reach variation over the period shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (b), followed by FIGS. 12 (c) to 12 (b). During the period shown in FIG. 6 (r), the SP reach effect is executed in addition to the SP reach fluctuation.

During such SP reach fluctuation, when one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 12 (d), it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 12 (e). After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 12 (f), the character display CD2 of "full tank" is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition has been satisfied.

Since the subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the SP reach is fluctuating, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description thereof is omitted, the item is given by displaying the display related to the item giving effect in front of the display related to the SP reach effect and the meter over the period shown in FIGS. 12 (h) to 12 (q). At least a part of the display related to the effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect and the meter. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the SP reach effect and the visibility of the meter can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering it.

Further, by displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol in front of the display related to the item granting effect over the period shown in FIGS. 12 (k) to 12 (o), at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect. With such a configuration, the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately notified of the progress of the variable game, and the visibility of the item granting effect is temporarily suspended. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by lowering the effect.

Further, over the period shown in FIGS. 12 (l) to 12 (o), the display related to the button effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol are displayed in front of the display related to the SP reach effect and the item giving effect. As a result, at least a part of the display related to the button effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect and the item grant effect. With such a configuration, the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern and the button effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately notified of the progress of the variable game, the operation by the operating means, and the effective time thereof. In addition to being able to do so, there are cases where the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the SP reach effect and the item giving effect.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 3>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the third embodiment in chronological order.

The third embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the symbol is changing (while the symbol is stopped and displayed). The gaming state shown in FIG. 13A is a state in which the variable game of the special figure is not executed (during non-symbol change). In this example, there is no reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is 0, the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 0, and the number is normal. Figure It is shown numerically that the number of pending games is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 0 by not displaying the hold icon PI. As shown, nine gauges have been turned off and one gauge GG has been turned on. Due to the meter increase effect, nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball has entered). If you do, the gauge will be full). Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of "item not set".

During such non-symbol variation, when one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 13 (b), it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 13 (c). After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 13 (d), the character display CD2 of "full tank" is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition has been satisfied.

Since the subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the SP reach is fluctuating, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description thereof will be omitted, the item is given by displaying the display related to the item giving effect in front of the stop display of the decorative symbol over the period shown in FIGS. 13 (j) to 13 (m). At least a part of the display related to the effect is overlapped with at least a part of the stop display of the decorative pattern. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the change stop of the decorative pattern can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering it.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 4>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the fourth embodiment in chronological order.

In the fourth embodiment, the item granting effect is started during the symbol fluctuation based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during the non-symbol change (while the symbol is stopped and displayed). This is an example of During the non-symbol change shown in FIG. 14 (a), as shown in FIG. 14 (b), one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227, and in the following FIG. 14 (c), it was lit. A meter increase effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, during the non-symbol change shown in FIG. 14 (c), as shown in FIG. 14 (d), based on the ball entering the starting port (in this example, the first special drawing starting port 230). Then, in FIG. 14 (e), the symbol variation display is started.

During such a symbol variation, when one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 14 (f), it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 14 (g) 1 After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, the character display CD2 of "full tank" is performed instead of the meter display as shown in FIG. 14 (h). By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition has been satisfied.

The state shown in FIG. 14 (e) that follows is a state in which the item granting effect has been started. In the item granting effect according to this example, when the item granting condition is satisfied, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIGS. 14 (i) to 14 (k). While enlarging the display, an animation display is performed to move the decorative symbol display device 208 from the lower display area to the center, and as shown in FIG. 14 (l), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule. After displaying the animation, the item image IG including the character display of "heat" is displayed as shown in FIG. 14 (m). In this item image IG, the item granting condition of "heat", which is a non-custom item, is satisfied, and the result of the special figure variable game is "hot (high expectation)" (the winning result of the special figure variable game is high). It indicates that it is a hit or that there is a high possibility of a hit).

In this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the variable display of the decorative symbol, at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect is displayed at least one of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It overlaps the part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering it.

In the state shown in FIG. 14 (n) that follows, the item granting effect is finished and the SP reach is started. In this way, if the display related to the item granting effect is erased before the start of the SP reach, the visibility of the SP reach is not impaired, so that the player can accurately follow the progress of the variable game. You may be able to inform.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 5>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifth embodiment in chronological order.

In the fifth embodiment, the item granting condition is satisfied after shifting to the increase mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 during the symbol fluctuation in the state where the number of reservations is full. This is an example of starting the item granting effect based on what has been done (the gauge of the meter is full).

The gaming state shown in FIG. 15A is a state in which the variable game of the special figure is being executed (during symbol variation). In this example, there is a reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is 3, the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 4, and the number is normal. Figure It is shown numerically that the number of pending games is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 7 due to the display of 7 hold icon PIs. Is shown, 6 gauges are turned off, and 4 gauges GG are turned on. Due to the meter increase effect, 6 balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (4 more balls are left). If you enter, the gauge will be full). Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of "item not set".

During such a symbol variation, when one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 15 (b), it was lit as shown in the following FIG. 15 (c) 4 A meter increase effect is performed to turn off one of the gauges. Subsequently, during the symbol variation shown in FIG. 15 (c), as shown in FIG. 15 (d), a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special drawing starting port 230), followed by FIG. As shown in (e), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is numerically indicated that the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games has increased from 3 to 4, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is also shown. In the lower display area, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is increased from 7 to 8 by displaying 8 hold icon PIs, and the tank is full. It is shown that

In this example, when the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is full (8 in this example), the meter increase effect shifts to the increase mode. It is configured. Here, the increase mode of the meter increase effect is a mode in which the gauge of the meter is advanced by N times (N is a positive integer of 2 or more) each time one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227. Therefore, in this example, N is set to 2 and it is called a double mode.

The state shown in FIG. 15 (f) is a state in which the meter increase effect has shifted to the increase mode (double mode). In this increase mode, as shown in FIG. 15 (g), when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, the three lights are lit as shown in the following FIG. 15 (h). Performs a meter increase effect that turns off two of the gauges. Further, as shown in FIG. 15 (i), when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227, one gauge that was lit is turned off as shown in FIG. 15 (j). By doing so, the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off is executed, and the right to erase the other gauge can be carried over to the next game or later. Subsequent meter increase effects, item grant effects, and button effects are the same as in the first embodiment except that the meter increase effect is an increase mode (double mode), and thus are the same in FIG. The reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this example, an example is shown in which the mode shifts to the increase mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 during the symbol fluctuation in the state where the number of holdings is full. The mode may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the above condition is satisfied, and the increase mode is not limited to the double mode. In addition, when the item grant condition is satisfied (when the gauge of the meter is full), the right to erase the gauge of the meter is configured to be carried over to the next game or later, but it is configured so that it cannot be carried over. Alternatively, the number of games that can be carried over may be variable.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 6>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the sixth embodiment in chronological order.

In the sixth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol variation, and a plurality of items (this example) are started in this item granting effect. Then, it is an example of giving two kinds of custom items). Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are given in the item giving effect, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. At the same time, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the item giving effect according to this example, as shown in FIG. 16 (h), after performing an animation display in which information on two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule, FIG. 16 (i) shows. As shown, as information on two types of items, display of item names (item A and item B in this example) IN1 and IN2 and description of the item (in this example, description of item A and item B (contents in the figure). Is omitted)) IT1 and IT2 are displayed. In addition, the item to be given in the item giving effect may be 3 or more types.

The state shown in FIG. 16 (j) that follows is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item grant effect. In the button effect related to this example, the selection display SG that allows a specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, selection of whether to set the acquired item A or item B) and the reception of the operation are effective. Of the button image BG1 including an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string (PUSH in this example) that prompts the pressing operation of the chance button 136, and the up / down / left / right direction keys (not shown), the reception of the operation is effective. The operation validity period display TG is displayed, which consists of a button image BG2 that imitates the appearance of the left and right keys, and a meter display that indicates the period during which the reception of operations by the operation means (chance button 136 and the left and right keys in this example) is valid. ..

As shown in FIG. 16 (l), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted with the option of "item A" temporarily selected during such a button effect, as shown in FIG. 16 (m). By highlighting the option of "Item A", the selection of "Item A" is confirmed (among the acquired item A and item B, the item A is selected to be set) is notified. do.

The following state shown in FIG. 16 (n) is a state in which the button effect is finished and the item grant effect is resumed. In the item granting effect after resumption, FIG. 16 takes the opportunity of making a specific selection from a plurality of options in the button effect (in this example, selecting to set item A from the acquired item A and item B). Over the period shown in (n) to (p), an animation display is displayed in which the image including the item name is gradually reduced and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is moved from the center to the lower display area. After that, by performing the character display CD3 of "item A being set" instead of the character display CD1 of "item not set", it is shown that the item A is set as a custom item by the player.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 7>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the seventh embodiment in chronological order.

In the seventh embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol variation, and a plurality of items (this example) are started in this item granting effect. Is an example of assigning a custom item and a non-custom item). Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are given in the item giving effect, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. At the same time, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the item giving effect according to this example, as shown in FIG. 17 (h), after performing an animation display in which information on two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating a capsule, FIG. 17 (i) shows. As shown, as information on two types of items, the item name (item A in this example) IN display and item description (in this example, item A description (contents omitted)) IT1 display and " Display the item image IG including the character display of "heat". The non-custom item given in the item giving effect may be another non-custom item described with reference to FIG. 10 (for example, pending change, model description 1-3, loss, etc.).

The state shown in FIG. 17 (j) that follows is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item grant effect. Since the subsequent item-giving effect and button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 17, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Demo screen>
Next, a demo screen in the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. FIG. 18 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transitions in the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of screen transitions in chronological order, and FIG. 20 is a diagram in which various menus are selected on the menu screen. It is a figure which showed an example of the screen transition when it is done.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to display at least a demo screen, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, a brightness adjustment screen, and a symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 18A. It is configured to be possible. The demo screen is a screen that starts to be displayed when the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected during non-symbol fluctuation. In this example, the menu screen, volume adjustment screen, or brightness adjustment is performed. Display the top menu screen that can be changed to the screen. When the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted during the display of this demo screen, the display of the menu screen on which various menus can be selected is started.

If the operation of the second operation means (right key in this example) or the third operation means (left key in this example) is accepted while the demo screen (or brightness adjustment screen) is displayed. , The display of the volume adjustment screen capable of adjusting the volume of the speaker 120, etc. is started, and while the demo screen (or the volume adjustment screen) is being displayed, the fourth operating means (up key in this example) or the fifth operation means. When the operation of the operation means (lower key in this example) is accepted, the display of the brightness adjustment screen capable of adjusting the brightness of various lamps 418, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the like is started.

In addition, when the operation of the second operation means (right key in this example) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, a meter display indicating that the volume is raised by one step and the volume is raised by one step is displayed. If the operation of the third operation means (left key in this example) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the volume is lowered by one step and the meter display suggests that the volume is lowered by one step. To execute. When the operation of the fourth operation means (up key in this example) is accepted while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is increased by one step and the meter display suggesting that the brightness is increased by one step is executed. , When the operation of the fifth operation means (down key in this example) is accepted while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is lowered by one step and the meter display suggesting that the brightness is lowered by one step is executed. do.

Furthermore, when the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected during the display of these menu screens, volume adjustment screens, or brightness adjustment screens, the demo screen is started to be displayed, and the symbol variation display is displayed. When the start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is started.

<Demo screen / Menu screen>
FIG. 18B is a transition diagram showing an example of the transition of the menu screen. The menu screen according to this example is composed of four menus: production customization, mobile terminal interlocking service, initialization, and return to the demo screen. When each menu is selected, the production customization screen and mobile terminal It is configured to transition to the linked service screen, initialization confirmation screen, and demo screen.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) was detected during the non-symbol change shown in FIG. 19 (a), the demo screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 19 (b) was displayed. Since the display was started and the operation of the fifth operation means (down key 161d in this example) was accepted while the demo screen was being displayed, as shown in FIG. 19 (c), FIG. 19 (d). The display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in is started.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 19 (e), the operation of the fifth operation means (down key 161d in this example) was accepted during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, so that FIG. 19 (f) shows. As shown, the brightness is lowered by one step and a meter display suggesting that the brightness is lowered by one step is executed, and as shown in FIG. 19 (g) following, the fourth operating means (in this example, the upper key 161c) is executed. ) Has been accepted, and as shown in FIG. 19 (h), the meter display indicating that the brightness has been increased by one step and the brightness has been increased by one step is being executed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 19 (i), the operation of the second operation means (right key 161a in this example) was accepted while the brightness adjustment screen was displayed, so that the brightness adjustment screen was replaced. , The display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 19 (j) has started. Further, as shown in FIG. 19 (k), the operation of the second operating means (right key 161a in this example) was accepted during the display of the volume adjustment screen, and thus is shown in FIG. 19 (l). As described above, the meter display suggesting that the volume is raised by one step and the volume is lowered by one step is executed.

Subsequently, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) was detected while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 19 (l) was being displayed, the demo screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 19 (m) was started to be displayed. As shown in FIG. 19 (n), since the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136 in this example) was accepted during the display of this demo screen, the menu screen shown in FIG. 19 (o). Is starting to be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 19 (p), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) was accepted with the effect customization menu temporarily selected on this menu screen. , The display of the production customization screen has started. Further, as shown in FIG. 19 (r), the operation of the second operation means (right key 161a in this example) was accepted during the display of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 19 (q). The light display is displayed to move to the next selectable item (item P in this example), and with the item P temporarily selected, the first operation is performed as shown in FIG. 19 (t). Since the operation of the means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted, the customization corresponding to the item P is enabled, and the character "Item P is being set" is displayed in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208. It is shown that the item P is set as a custom item by the player.

<Demo screen / Menu screen / Mobile terminal interlocking service screen>
FIG. 18C is a transition diagram showing an example of the transition of the mobile terminal interlocking service screen. The mobile terminal interlocking service screen according to this example is composed of six menus: trial play, password input, data storage, data clear, quick start, and return to the menu screen.

For example, when the menu of the mobile terminal interlocking service is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 20 (b), the display of the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 20 (b1) is started, and the mobile terminal interlocking service is started. When the trial play menu is selected on the screen, when new registration is selected on this trial play screen after starting the display of the trial play screen shown in FIG. 20 (b1-1). The display of the new registration screen shown in FIG. 20 (b1-2) is started.

Further, when the password input menu is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 20 (b2), the password as shown in FIGS. 20 (b2-1) and 20 (b2-1-1). The display of the input screen is started, and when an incorrect password is input on this password input screen, a screen for notifying the password input error is displayed as shown in FIG. 20 (b2-1-2). On the other hand, when the correct password is input, the display of the screen notifying the completion of the password input is started as shown in FIG. 20 (b2-1-3).

Further, when the data save menu is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 20 (b3), the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b3-1) is started to be displayed, and this confirmation screen is started. When "Yes" is selected in the above, the display of the two-dimensional code display screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b3-2) is started, and "End" is selected during the display of the two-dimensional code display screen. In that case, the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b3-2-1) is started.

Further, when the data clear menu is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 20 (b4), the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b4-1) is started to be displayed, and this confirmation screen is started. When "Yes" is selected in the above, the display of the completion screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b4-1-1) is started. Further, when the quick start menu is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 20 (b5), the display of the start screen as shown in FIG. 20 (b5-1) is started, and FIG. 20 (b5) When the menu of "Return to menu screen" is selected on the mobile terminal interlocking service screen shown in b6), the display of the top menu is started.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 8>
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighth embodiment in chronological order.

In the eighth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the demo screen (top menu screen) is being displayed. The gaming state shown in FIG. 21A is a state in which the demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed during non-symbol variation. Further, in this example, there is no reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is 0 and the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 0. , It is shown numerically that the number of pending games of the normal map fluctuation game is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 0 by not displaying the hold icon PI. As shown, nine gauges have been turned off and one gauge GG has been turned on. Due to the meter increase effect, nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball has entered). If you do, the gauge will be full). Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of "item not set".

While displaying such a demo screen (top menu screen), as shown in FIG. 21 (b), when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227, as shown in the following FIG. 21 (c). After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge that was lit, as shown in FIG. 21 (d), "full tank" is used instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect of performing the character display CD2, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item granting condition has been satisfied.

The subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and button effect are the same as in the first embodiment except that the demo screen (top menu screen) is being displayed, and thus are the same in FIG. 21. The display related to the item addition effect is before the display related to the demo screen (top menu screen) over the period shown in FIGS. 21 (e) to 21 (n), although the description thereof will be omitted. By displaying in, at least a part of the display related to the item addition effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the demo effect (top menu screen). With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately notified that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the demo screen (top menu screen).

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the demo screen (top menu screen). , Operations related to button effects (in this example, setting of items acquired by the player) rather than operations related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, operations for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment). It is configured to give priority to accepting operations).

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the demo screen (top menu screen)), the operation related to the button effect (this example). Then, assuming that the player has accepted the operation for setting the acquired item), the corresponding process is performed, but the timing shown in FIG. 21 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the demo screen (top menu screen) ) Is displayed), when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted, the operation related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, the operation for selecting the menu, adjusting the volume, or adjusting the brightness). Is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even if the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the demo screen (top menu screen)), the demo screen (top menu screen). ) (In this example, an operation for selecting a menu, adjusting the volume, or adjusting the brightness) may be accepted, and the corresponding processing may be performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 9>
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the ninth embodiment in chronological order.

In the ninth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during the display of the menu screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. This is an example. Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the menu screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 22 and the same reference numerals are given. Although the description is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item addition effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen for the period shown in FIGS. 22 (e) to 22 (n). At least a part of the display related to the item addition effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the menu screen. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately notified that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the menu screen.

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen, the menu screen is related. The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is prioritized over the operation (in this example, the operation for selecting the menu of the mobile terminal interlocking service, etc.). It is configured as follows.

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player). The corresponding process is performed assuming that the operation for setting the acquired item) is accepted, but the timing shown in FIG. 22 (n) (the timing when the button effect is not displayed and the menu screen is displayed). When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted in, it is assumed that the operation related to the menu screen (in this example, the operation for selecting the menu of the mobile terminal interlocking service or the like) is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the menu screen (in this example, An operation for selecting a menu of a mobile terminal interlocking service or the like) may be accepted, and the corresponding processing may be performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 10>
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the tenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the tenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during the display of the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. This is an example of Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the volume adjustment is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 23, and the same reference numerals are given. Although the description is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item addition effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment for the period shown in FIGS. 23 (e) to 23 (n). At least a part of the display related to the item addition effect overlaps with at least a part of the display related to the volume adjustment. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately notified that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the volume adjustment.

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment, the volume adjustment is related. It is configured to preferentially accept operations related to button effects (in this example, operations for setting items acquired by the player) rather than operations (in this example, operations for adjusting the volume). ..

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player). The corresponding process is performed assuming that the operation for setting the acquired item) is accepted, but the timing shown in FIG. 23 (n) (the timing when the button effect is not displayed and the volume adjustment is displayed). When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted in, it is assumed that the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, the operation for adjusting the volume) is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, The operation for adjusting the volume) may be accepted, and the corresponding processing may be performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 11>
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the eleventh embodiment in chronological order.

In the eleventh embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during the display of the two-dimensional code display screen described with reference to FIG. This is an example. Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the two-dimensional code display screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 24. In this example, the display related to the item granting effect is before the display related to the two-dimensional code display screen for the period shown in FIGS. 24 (g) to 24 (n). By displaying at, at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect is overlapped with at least a part of the two-dimensional code. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately notified that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the two-dimensional code.

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code, the two-dimensional code is related. The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is given priority over the operation (in this example, the operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen). It is configured.

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the game). Assuming that the person has accepted the operation for setting the acquired item), the corresponding process is performed, but the timing (button effect is not displayed and the two-dimensional code is displayed) shown in FIG. 24 (n). When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing), it is assumed that the operation related to the two-dimensional code (in this example, the operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code display screen), the operation related to the two-dimensional code ( In this example, it may be configured to perform the corresponding processing on the assumption that the operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) has been accepted.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 12>
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the twelfth embodiment in chronological order.

In the twelfth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 is displayed. This is an example of setting an item using the effect customization screen. Since the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the button effect are the same as in the eighth embodiment except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description thereof is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item addition effect is displayed in front of the display related to the effect customization screen for the period shown in FIGS. 25 (e) to 25 (o). So, at least a part of the display related to the item addition effect is overlapped with at least a part of the effect customization screen. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately notified that the item has been granted and information about the granted item. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the effect customization screen.

Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen, the effect customization screen is related. The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is prioritized over the operation (in this example, the operation for determining the item to be set on the effect customization screen). It is configured in.

Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the game). Assuming that the person has accepted the operation for setting the acquired item), the corresponding process is performed, but the timing shown in FIG. 25 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the effect customization screen is displayed). When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing), it is assumed that the operation related to the effect customization screen (in this example, the operation of determining the item to be set on the effect customization screen) is accepted, and the corresponding processing is performed. Even if the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), the operation related to the effect customization screen (this example). Then, on the effect customization screen, the operation of determining the item to be set) may be accepted, and the corresponding process may be performed.

Further, in this example, with the "Yes" option temporarily selected during the button production, as shown in FIG. 25 (l), the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, and as shown in FIG. 25 (m). Even when the "Yes" option is highlighted, the acquired item is not set immediately, and the menu screen is displayed again as shown in FIGS. 25 (q) to 25 (u). When the mobile terminal interlocking service screen is selected and the effect customization screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 25 (v), the item acquired in the item grant effect (item A in this example) can be set. It is configured as follows.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 13>
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the thirteenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 is displayed. This is an example of setting an item immediately by operating the button effect.

Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as those in the twelfth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 26, and the description thereof will be omitted. j) -When the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 26 (l) with the "Yes" option temporarily selected during the button production shown in FIG. 26 (k), FIG. 26 As shown in (m), by highlighting the "Yes" option, it is notified that the selection of "Yes" has been confirmed (the selection to set the acquired item A has been made). When an item is acquired while the effect customization screen is displayed, item A is additionally displayed as a selectable item on the display effect customization screen as shown in FIG. 26 (i).

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 14>
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the 14th embodiment will be described. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the fourteenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the 14th embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 is displayed. After that, the point of setting the item using the effect customization screen is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment described with reference to FIG. By displaying, at least a part of the effect customization screen is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item grant effect (in this example, all gauges of the meter).

With such a configuration, the visibility of the effect customization effect is not hindered, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the item grant effect is temporarily increased. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by reducing the amount to. It should be noted that at least a part of the effect customization screen may be configured so as not to overlap with at least a part of the display related to the item grant effect.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 15>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifteenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the 15th embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 is displayed. This is an example of continuing the item granting effect even when the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect customization screen. Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as those in the above-described 12 except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 28, and the same reference numerals are given. The description thereof will be omitted.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 28 (l), the ball entered the starting port (in this example, the first special drawing starting port 230) during the item giving effect shown in FIG. 28 (k). , In the following FIG. 28 (m), the symbol variation display is started, but the item granting effect is continued. With such a configuration, the item granting effect is not stopped at an unexpected timing of the player, and the player's willingness to play is not hindered.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 16>
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the 16th embodiment will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the 16th embodiment in chronological order.

In the 16th embodiment, the point that the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol variation is the embodiment described with reference to FIG. Same as 1, but in this example, the item is displayed across two fluctuations, the fluctuation and the next fluctuation.

Specifically, after the fluctuation ends during the execution of the item granting effect shown in FIG. 29 (k) and the symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 29 (l), the special figure 2 is held. A new variable game has been started based on. Then, the button effect is continued even in the next symbol change following the symbol change in which the item grant condition is satisfied, and as shown in FIG. 29 (m), the button effect is based on the acceptance of the pressing operation of the chance button 136. Is finished, the item granting effect is resumed, and the items acquired by the player are displayed. If the item can be displayed across a plurality of symbol fluctuations as in this example, the item granting effect will not be interrupted when the symbol fluctuation is stopped or started, and the player's willingness to play the game. May be sustainable. The symbol variation that continues to display the item is not limited to two times, and may be three or more times, or may not be a continuous symbol variation.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 17>
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the 17th embodiment will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the seventeenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the 17th embodiment, the point that the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the symbol variation is the embodiment described with reference to FIG. Same as 1, but in this example, the entry of the ball into the meter increase entrance 227 can be detected even during the execution of the item granting effect, and when the entry of the ball is detected, the meter increase effect is executed. ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (k), the entry of the ball into the meter increasing entrance 227 was detected during the execution of the item granting effect shown in FIG. 29 (j). ), The meter increase effect of advancing the meter gauge is started while the item is displayed by the item grant effect. If the meter can be increased while the item is displayed as in this example, the player's motivation to play may be further increased. In addition to making it possible to increase the meter while the item is being displayed, it may be possible to satisfy the item grant condition (the meter gauge may be full). In this case, the right to grant the item may be configured so that it can be carried over to the next game or later.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 18>
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the eighteenth embodiment in chronological order.

In the 18th embodiment, the mini-game is executed based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), and the item granting effect is started after the mini-game is completed. do. FIG. 31 (e) shows a state in which the mini game is started. In this example, the display area for displaying the gauge of the meter is expanded, and the Amidakuji is executed in the enlarged display area. Needless to say, the mini game may be another type of game.

The start position of the character in the Amidakuji of this example may be a predetermined position, may be determined by lottery, may be determined based on the player's selection operation, or may be determined based on the player's selection operation. Regardless, the result may be predetermined. In addition, the sign of "x" in the result of Amidakuji is off, the image imitating the capsule means the acquisition of the item, the letter E means the acquisition of the item E, and when the letter E is reached. Is configured to announce the items to be acquired. If the pattern or color of the image that imitates the capsule is different from the usual one, the appearance rate of a specific item may be high, there may be multiple types of mini games, and the item may be different depending on the type of mini game. The ease of acquisition and the appearance rate of specific items may differ.

In this example, since the result of the mini-game (Amidakuji) is an image imitating a capsule, the item giving effect using the image is started, and the items acquired by the player are displayed. With a configuration like this example, it may be possible to entertain the player without getting bored with the period from the establishment of the item granting condition to the display of the item.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Modification example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the first modification will be described. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the modified example 1 in chronological order.

In the above embodiment, "the entry of the ball into the meter increasing entrance 227" is used as an opportunity for the meter increasing effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "the meter increasing entrance 227" is used. Conditions other than "ball entry" may be used as an opportunity to increase the meter. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (b), the meter increases when a ball enters the start port (in this example, the first special figure start port 230) during non-symbol variation. The effect may be executed, or as shown in FIGS. 32 (c) to 32 (e), a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special drawing starting port 230) during the symbol variation. In some cases, a meter increase effect may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 32 (e) to 32 (g), the hold icon PI1 in the first display mode is changed to the hold icon PI2 in the second display mode based on the look-ahead result of the variable game. In some cases, the meter increase effect may be executed, or as shown in FIGS. 32 (i) to 32 (l), the meter increase effect may be executed when the pseudo-ream is executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 32 (m) to 32 (o), even if the meter increase effect is executed when the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted during the execution of the button effect. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 32 (p), the meter increase effect may be executed when the reach is executed, or when the SP reach or SP reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 32 (q). The meter increase effect may be executed, or as shown in FIG. 32 (r), the meter increase effect may be executed when the notice display (display of the character image of the princess in this example) is executed. ..

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Modification example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second modification will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the second modification in chronological order.

The point of starting the item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during the display of the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 is shown in FIG. 23. It is the same as the tenth embodiment described with reference to, but in this example, even when the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect, the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example). , The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is prioritized over the operation for adjusting the volume).

Specifically, while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 33 (c) is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227, the following FIG. 33 ( As shown in e), after performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge that was lit, the meter is displayed as shown in FIG. 33 (f). Instead, by executing the meter increase effect of displaying the character "full tank" CD2, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls entered the meter increase entrance 227, and the item granting condition was satisfied. Is notified.

The state shown in FIG. 33 (g) that follows is a state in which the item granting effect has been started. In the item granting effect according to this example, when the item granting condition is satisfied, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIGS. 33 (g) to 33 (i). While enlarging the display, an animation display is performed to move the decorative symbol display device 208 from the lower display area to the center, and as shown in FIG. 33 (j), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG imitating the capsule. After performing the animation display, as shown in FIG. 33 (k), as information about the item, the item name (item A in this example) IN display and the item description IT (item A description in this example). (Details omitted)) is displayed.

In this example, by displaying the display related to the item addition effect on the back side of the display on the volume adjustment screen, at least a part of the display on the volume adjustment screen is displayed at least on the display related to the item addition effect. It overlaps a part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the volume adjustment screen is not impaired, so that the player can be accurately informed of the information regarding the volume adjustment, and the visibility of the item giving effect is temporarily increased. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by lowering it.

Further, in this example, the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect, but as shown in FIG. 33 (n), the second operating means (in this example, the right key 161a). When the operation of is accepted, the display for switching the temporary selection of "Yes" and "No" is executed during the button production without executing the process of raising the volume by one step, and the third operation means (this example). Then, when the operation of the left key 161b) is accepted, the display for switching the temporary selection of "Yes" and "No" is executed during the button production without executing the process of lowering the volume by one step.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (r), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted with the "Yes" option temporarily selected during the button effect, after the button effect is completed, FIG. 33 (r) s) To the period shown in the figure (u), the item name is gradually reduced and displayed, and an animation display is performed to move the item name from the center to the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Instead of the character display CD1 of "item not set", the character display CD3 of "item A being set" is performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Modification example 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the third modification will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect according to the modified example 3 in chronological order.

In the above embodiment, "the entry of the ball into the meter increasing entrance 227" is set as the condition for establishing the item grant, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "the meter increasing entrance 227" is used. Conditions other than "ball entry" may be used as the conditions for establishing the item grant. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c), the cumulative number of balls that have entered the variable winning opening 234 (for example, the cumulative number of balls acquired during the jackpot game) is a predetermined number (in this example). An item may be given when the number exceeds 10,000 balls), or when a specific operation is accepted by the operation means as shown in FIGS. 34 (d) to 34 (h) (in this example, the above). An item may be given to the key (when the operation is accepted in the order of key 161c → right key 161a → down key 161d → left key 161b).

<Setting reflection display (Example 1)>
Next, the setting reflection display according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing various displays including the setting reflection display according to the first embodiment in chronological order. In FIGS. 35 to 41 used in the following description, various displays are shown in alphabetical order ((a), (b), (c), ...) In chronological order, but the time between the various displays is shown. The intervals are not constant.

In this example, during the period when the effect customization screen CD is displayed in the first game state, after the item grant condition is satisfied and the item is given to the player, the effect after the display is switched (after the screen transition) is performed. By displaying the setting reflection display HD indicating the item that can be newly set on the customization screen CD, the player can confirm that the setting is surely reflected (the new setting is accepted by the game console). This is an example of notifying.

Here, as the "first game state", when the game table is a pachinko machine, a normal state, a demonstration production, a non-electric support, a non-time saving state, a non-probability change state, a non-big hit state, etc. are mentioned. When the game console is a slot machine, examples thereof include a normal state, a demo production, a non-AT, a non-BB, a non-RB, a non-RT, a non-CT, and a low probability state. In this example, the game console is a pachinko machine, and the setting reflection display HD is displayed during non-time reduction. In the second gaming state (details will be described later in <Setting reflection display (Example 2)>), which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the same setting reflection display HD as in this example is performed. May be good.

Further, as the "item granting condition", the gauge GG of the meter is full due to the ball entering the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 35 (b), and other conditions are met. With the establishment, the gauge GG of the meter is full, a predetermined special effect has been executed a specified number of times, and a predetermined mission (for example, double reach, triple reach, mini game) Victory, etc.), one, more, or all of the multiple types of item granting conditions have been met, a lottery using random values has been won, and game balls and game medals It can be said that the number of payouts has reached a predetermined number, that if the game console is a slot machine, a specific combination of symbols has been prepared, and that a specific role has been internally won (or won). (The same applies to the subsequent examples). In this example, the game table is a pachinko machine, and an item is given to the player when the gauge GG of the meter is full due to the ball entering the entrance for increasing the meter 227.

More specifically, this example will be described. During the period shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (d), the meter increase effect is performed. In this meter increase effect, the gauge GG is turned off one by one each time a ball enters the meter increase entrance 227.

Further, in the following period from FIG. 35 (e) to FIG. 35 (g), an image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge GG of the meter is full). After performing an animation display that moves from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center while gradually enlarging the display, as shown in FIG. After performing an animation display in which information about the item appears from, as shown in Fig. (I), as information about the item, the display IN of the item name (item J in this example) and the description of the item (in this example). , Display IT of the description of item J (contents are omitted in the figure).

Further, during the period shown in FIGS. 35 (j) to 35 (m), the button effect is performed. In this button effect, the appearance of the selection display SG that allows a specific selection (in this example, selection of whether to set the acquired item or not) from a plurality of options and the chance button 136 in which the reception of the operation is effective is imitated. Of the button image BG1 including the image and the character string (PUSH in this example) that prompts the pressing operation of the chance button 136, and the up / down / left / right direction keys (not shown), the appearance of the left / right button for which operation reception is effective is imitated. The operation valid period display TG including the button image BG2 and the meter display indicating the period during which the reception of the operation by the operating means (chance button 136 and the left and right buttons in this example) is valid is displayed.

During such a button effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (k), when the pressing operation of the right button 161a is accepted, the option of "No" is tentatively selected. Further, in the state of this provisional selection, when the pressing operation of the enter button (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted as shown in FIG. 35 (l), as shown in FIG. 35 (m), "No". By highlighting (highlighting) the option of "", it is notified that the selection of "No" is confirmed (the selection is made not to set (set) the given item).

In the following period from FIG. 35 (n) to FIG. 35 (p), after the button effect is completed based on the acceptance of the press operation of the enter button (chance button 136), as shown in FIG. When the right button 161a is pressed twice, the display of the effect customization screen CD is switched (screen transition). At this time, as shown in FIG. 35 (p), the setting reflection display indicating the item (item J in this example) that can be newly set on the effect customization screen CD after the display switching (after the screen transition). By displaying HD (in this example, the item name "Item J" and the character string "NEW" are displayed), the settings are surely reflected (new settings are accepted by the game console). Notify the player that the number of items that can be set has increased.

As in this example, the part corresponding to the item name display IN setting reflected on the production customization screen CD (setting reflection display HD) should be configured to be displayed after the production customization screen CD is transition-displayed. For example, it may be possible to confirm that the settings have been reflected after the transition is displayed, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. By reflecting the settings, it is possible to notify the player that the settings have been reliably reflected, give the player a sense of security, and in some cases, the player's willingness to play can be maintained. be.

The display mode of the setting reflection display HD is not limited to this example, and for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (p'), the setting reflection display may be decorated by enclosing the display of the item name with an effect image. Alternatively, as shown in the figure (p ″), the setting reflection display may be decorated by shading the item name.

<Setting reflection display (Example 2)>
Next, the setting reflection display according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing various displays including the setting reflection display according to the second embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, during the period in which the effect customization screen CD is displayed in the second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state described above, the item granting condition is satisfied and the item is granted to the player. After that, the setting was surely reflected by displaying the setting reflection display HD indicating the item that can be newly set over multiple times of the symbol variation display (new setting by the game console). Is accepted) is an example of notifying the player.

In this example, an example of displaying the setting reflection display "over a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays" will be described, but the setting reflection display may be displayed "over a plurality of rounds during a big hit game". When the game console is a slot machine, for example, the setting reflection display may be displayed "over a plurality of games". Further, even when the setting reflection display is displayed "over a plurality of symbol variation displays", there may be a period during which the setting reflection display is not displayed (for example, an execution period of the SP reach effect).

Here, as the "second game state", when the game table is a pachinko machine, there are electric support, time saving, probability change state, jackpot state, etc., and when the game table is a slot machine, , AT, BB, RB, RT, CT, high probability state and the like. In this example, the game console is a pachinko machine, and the setting reflection display HD is displayed during a short time. In the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state, the setting reflection display HD similar to this example may be performed.

In this example, the effect customization screen CD that allows the player to select a music that can be set during the entire period of the second gaming state shown in FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (l) is displayed. When the up button 161c or the down button 161d is pressed while the effect customization screen CD is being displayed, the music can be switched, and the player can set from a plurality of types of music that can be set. You can select your favorite song. When performing a special effect (for example, SP reach effect) or display (for example, error display) in the second game state, the effect customization screen CD may be temporarily hidden. Further, the number of songs that can be set by the player is not limited to a plurality of songs, and may be only one song, or only a specific song may be selected according to the game state.

The state shown in FIG. 36A is a state in which the music B is selected by the player and the BGM corresponding to the music B is output from the speaker. In this state, for example, when the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is accepted as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the next music C displayed below the music B as shown in FIG. 36 (c). Is selected and highlighted, and the BGM corresponding to the music C is output from the speaker. When the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is accepted, the display of the music B may be immediately switched to the display of the music C, or the display of the music C may be performed after the movement animation for moving the display of the music B upward is performed. You may switch to.

In the following period from FIG. 36 (d) to FIG. 36 (e), since the mission (double reach) predetermined during the display of the production customization screen CD was achieved, the display MC (in this example, indicating the achievement of the mission) is notified. , Display the image including the character string of "Double reach achieved") and display IN of the item name to be given (in this example, display the image including the character string of "Music D") and the item (this example) Then, the music D) is given to the player.

During the period shown in FIGS. 36 (f) to 36 (g), the display IN of the item name is gradually reduced and displayed from the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the effect customization screen CD at the lower right. After performing the animation display to move, as shown in the figure (g), on the production customization screen CD, instead of displaying the music A, the setting reflection display HD indicating the music D that can be newly set ( In this example, by displaying the music "Music D" and the character string "NEW"), the settings are surely reflected (new settings are accepted by the game console) and can be set. Notify the player that the number of items has increased.

As in this example, if the effect customization screen CD may be displayed in a certain state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the effect setting in the certain state can be customized to perform the effect in the certain state. It can be an intended production, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, by reflecting the settings, it is possible to notify the player that the settings have been reliably reflected, give the player a sense of security, and maintain the player's willingness to play. In some cases.

In this example, the setting reflection display is performed by switching the display of the music A to the display of the music D that can be newly set, but the animation that gradually erases the display of the music A , The movement animation for moving the display of the music D from the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the effect customization screen CD may be performed at the same time. By performing such an animation, it is possible for the player to easily confirm that the setting has been reflected, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

FIG. 36 (i) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is stopped, and FIG. 36 (j) shows a state in which the next symbol variation display is started. In this example, the effect customization screen CD is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, and for example, as shown in the figure (k), when the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is accepted, the lower part of the music C is displayed. The next music D displayed in is selected and highlighted, and the BGM corresponding to the music D is output from the speaker.

If the effect customization screen CD is displayed over a plurality of continuous variation displays as in this example, the effect setting can be customized over a plurality of variations to improve convenience and improve the interest of the player. You may be able to.

<Setting reflection display (modification example of Example 2)>
Next, the setting reflection display according to the modified example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing various displays including the setting reflection display according to the modified example of the second embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, the point of displaying a non-settable display (in this example, the “?” Symbol) indicating that there is a song that cannot be selected (set) by the player is different from that of the second embodiment described with reference to FIG. It's different. The "non-settable display" is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a symbol such as "x" or "***", or a combination of a character string such as "music *" and a symbol. There may be.

Specifically, the state shown in FIG. 37A is a state in which the music B is selected by the player and the BGM corresponding to the music B is output from the speaker. In this state, for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), when the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is accepted, the non-settable display (“?”) Displayed below the music B on the production customization screen CD. (Display including symbols) is selected and highlighted, but since a song that cannot be set is selected, the song is not changed and the BGM corresponding to the previous song B is continuously output from the speaker. ..

In the following period from FIG. 37 (d) to FIG. 37 (e), since the mission (double reach) predetermined during the display of the production customization screen CD was achieved, the display MC (in this example, indicating the achievement of the mission) is notified. , Display the image including the character string of "Double reach achieved") and display IN of the item name to be given (in this example, display the image including the character string of "Music D") and the item (this example) Then, the music D) is given to the player.

As a result of the item (music D) being added, as shown in FIG. 37 (g), the music D that can be newly set is replaced with the display including the "?" Symbol on the production customization screen CD. By displaying the setting reflection display HD (in this example, the display of the music "Music D" and the display of the character string "NEW"), the settings are surely reflected (new settings are accepted by the game console). ), Notify the player that the number of items that can be set has increased.

As in this example, if the effect customization screen CD may be displayed in a certain state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the effect setting in the certain state can be customized to perform the effect in the certain state. It can be an intended production, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, by reflecting the settings, it is possible to notify the player that the settings have been reliably reflected, give the player a sense of security, and maintain the player's willingness to play. In some cases.

FIG. 37 (i) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is stopped, and FIG. 37 (j) shows a state in which the next symbol variation display is started. In this example, when the effect customization screen CD is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays and, for example, as shown in the figure (k), when the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is accepted, "?" Is displayed. The next music D displayed below the display including the symbol is selected and highlighted, and the BGM corresponding to the music D is output from the speaker.

If the effect customization screen CD is displayed over a plurality of continuous variation displays as in this example, the effect setting can be customized over a plurality of variations to improve convenience and improve the interest of the player. You may be able to. Further, if the non-settable display is displayed over a plurality of continuous variable displays, the set state can always be confirmed, and the convenience of the player may be improved.

<Setting reflection display (Example 3)>
Next, the setting reflection display according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing various displays including the setting reflection display according to the third embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, the point of displaying a non-settable display (in this example, the “?” Symbol) indicating that there is a song that cannot be selected (set) by the player is described in the second embodiment with reference to FIG. 37. Same as the modified example, but the song given when the item grant condition is satisfied (in this example, the mission is achieved) matches the song highlighted at the time of item grant. Is different in that the setting reflection display HD that displays the music as a newly set music is performed.

Specifically, the state shown in FIG. 38A is a state in which the music B is selected by the player and the BGM corresponding to the music B is output from the speaker. In this state, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), when the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is accepted, the non-settable display (“?”) Displayed below the music B on the production customization screen CD. (Display including symbols) is selected and highlighted, but since a song that cannot be set is selected, the song is not changed and the BGM corresponding to the previous song B is continuously output from the speaker. ..

In the following period from FIG. 38 (d) to FIG. 38 (e), since the mission (triple reach) predetermined during the display of the production customization screen CD was achieved, the display MC (in this example, indicating the achievement of the mission) is notified. , Display the image including the character string of "Triple reach achieved") and display IN of the item name to be given (in this example, display the image including the character string of "Music C") and the item (this example). Then, the music C) is given to the player.

As a result of the item (music C) being added, as shown in FIG. 38 (g), the highlighted music is displayed on the production customization screen CD (in this example, the non-settable display including the "?" Symbol is displayed. ), By displaying the setting reflection display HD (in this example, the display of the music "Music C" and the display of the character string "NEW") indicating the music C that can be newly set. , The setting is surely reflected (new setting is accepted by the game console), the player is notified that the number of items that can be set has increased, and the BGM corresponding to the music C is output from the speaker.

As in this example, if the display of the highlighted music on the production customization screen CD becomes the setting reflection display HD indicating that the setting has been reflected, it is easy for the player to confirm that the setting has been reflected. It may be possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, by reflecting the settings, it is possible to notify the player that the settings have been reliably reflected, give the player a sense of security, and maintain the player's willingness to play. In some cases.

<Setting reflection display (Example 4)>
Next, the setting reflection display according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing various displays including the setting reflection display according to the fourth embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, during the period in which the effect customization screen CD is displayed in the second game state, after the item granting condition is satisfied and the item is granted to the player, the symbol variation display is performed a plurality of times. The point of displaying the effect customization screen CD is the same as that of the second embodiment described with reference to FIG. 36, but the item that can be newly set in the effect customization screen CD after the display is switched (after the screen transition). The difference is that the setting reflection display HD indicating is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 39A is a state in which the music B is selected by the player and the BGM corresponding to the music B is output from the speaker. In this state, for example, when the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is accepted as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the next music C displayed below the music B as shown in FIG. 39 (c). Is selected and highlighted, and the BGM corresponding to the music C is output from the speaker.

In the following period from FIG. 39 (d) to FIG. 39 (e), since the mission (SP reach) predetermined during the display of the production customization screen CD was achieved, the display MC (in this example, indicating the achievement of the mission) is notified. , Display the image including the character string of "SP reach achievement") and display IN of the item name to be given (in this example, display the image including the character string of "Music E") and the item (this example). Then, the music E) is given to the player.

During the period shown in FIGS. 39 (f) to 39 (g), the display IN of the item name is gradually reduced and displayed from the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the effect customization screen CD at the lower right. An animation display to move is performed, but here, as shown in the figure (h), the setting reflection display indicating the newly settable music E is not displayed on the production customization screen CD. There is.

The following FIG. 39 (i) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is stopped, and FIG. 39 (j) shows a state in which the next symbol variation display is started. In this example, when the effect customization screen CD is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays and, for example, as shown in the figure (k), the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is accepted, the figure (l). ), The non-settable display (display including the "?" Symbol) displayed below the music C is selected and highlighted, and the non-settable display (including the "?" Symbol) is included. Below the display), display the setting reflection display HD (in this example, the display of the music "Music E" and the display of the character string "NEW") indicating the music E that can be newly set. Then, the setting is surely reflected (new setting is accepted by the game console), and the player is notified that the number of items that can be set has increased.

As in this example, the part corresponding to the item name display IN setting reflected on the production customization screen CD (setting reflection display HD) should be configured to be displayed after the production customization screen CD is transition-displayed. For example, it may be possible to confirm that the settings have been reflected after the transition is displayed, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. By reflecting the settings, it is possible to notify the player that the settings have been reliably reflected, give the player a sense of security, and in some cases, the player's willingness to play can be maintained. be.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 39 (m), when the pressing operation of the lower button 161d is further accepted, as shown in FIG. The next song E displayed in is selected, and the setting reflection display HD indicating the song E that can be newly set (in this example, the display of the song "music E" and the character string "NEW" Is highlighted, and the BGM corresponding to the music E is output from the speaker.

<Setting reflection display (Example 5)>
Next, the setting reflection display according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing various displays including the setting reflection display according to the fifth embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, during the period when the effect customization screen CD is displayed in the second game state, the item that can be newly set after the item grant condition is satisfied and the item is granted to the player. The point of displaying the setting reflection display HD shown is the same as that of the second embodiment described with reference to FIG. 36, but the main liquid crystal (first display means) 209a and the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209b are provided. , The main liquid crystal (first display means) 209a displays the display MC for notifying the achievement of the mission and the item name to be given IN, and the effect customization screen CD displayed on the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209b. The difference is that the setting reflection display HD indicating the item that can be newly set is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 40 (a), the music B is selected by the player using the effect customization screen CD displayed on the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209b, and the BGM corresponding to the music B is transmitted from the speaker. It is in the output state. During the period shown in FIGS. 40 (b) to 40 (c), the main liquid crystal (first display means) 209a was achieved because a predetermined mission (double reach) was achieved during the display of the production customization screen CD. In, the display MC notifying the achievement of the mission (in this example, the display of the image including the character string of "double reach achievement") and the display IN of the item name to be given (in this example, the character string of "music D" is included). (Display an image) and give an item (in this example, music D) to the player.

In the following period from FIG. 40 (d) to FIG. 40 (e), the display IN of the item name is gradually reduced and displayed from the display area of the main liquid crystal (first display means) 209a to the sub liquid crystal (second). (Display means) After performing an animation display to move to the display area of 209b, as shown in FIGS. (E) to (g), the effect customization displayed on the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209b. Setting by displaying the setting reflection display (in this example, the display of the music "Music D" and the display of the character string "NEW") indicating the music D that can be newly set on the screen CD. Is surely reflected (new settings are accepted by the game console), and the player is notified that the number of items that can be set has increased.

As in this example, if the effect customization screen CD is displayed on at least one of the main liquid crystal (first display means) 209a and the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209b, the effect is produced on one of the two displays. By displaying the setting display, it is possible to make the effect setting display easier to see and set, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the animation for moving the display IN of the item name, as shown in FIG. 40 (d), the display IN of the item name is the display area of the main liquid crystal (first display means) 209a and the sub liquid crystal (second display means). (Display means) By displaying the display so as to straddle the display area of 209b, the player can be more noticed by the setting reflection display.

<Setting reflection display (modification example of Example 5)>
Next, the setting reflection display according to the modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing various displays including the setting reflection display according to the modified example of the fifth embodiment in chronological order.

This example is the same as Example 5 described with reference to FIG. 40 in that the main liquid crystal (first display means) 209a and the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209b are provided, but the sub liquid crystal (first display means) is provided. (Second display means) On the production customization screen CD displayed on 209b, a display MC for notifying the achievement of the mission and a display IN for the item name to be given are displayed, and a setting reflection display indicating the item that can be newly set is displayed. The point of display is different.

Specifically, during the period shown in FIGS. 41 (b) to 41 (c), the sub-liquid crystal (second) was achieved because a predetermined mission (double reach) was achieved while the production customization screen CD was displayed. Display means) On the production customization screen CD displayed on 209b, the display MC (in this example, the display of the image including the character string "double reach achieved") indicating the achievement of the mission and the display IN of the item name to be given (book). In the example, an image including the character string of "music D" is displayed), and an item (in this example, music D) is given to the player.

In the following period from FIG. 40 (d) to FIG. 40 (e), an animation in which the display IN of the item name is gradually reduced and displayed on the effect customization screen CD displayed on the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209b. After the display, as shown in FIGS. (E) to (g), the setting reflection display indicating the newly setable music D (in this example, the display of the music "Music D"). By displaying (displaying the character string "NEW"), the player is notified that the number of items that can be set has increased.

As in this example, if the effect customization screen CD is displayed on at least one of the main liquid crystal (first display means) 209a and the sub liquid crystal (second display means) 209b, the effect is produced on one of the two displays. By displaying the setting display, it is possible to make the effect setting display easier to see and set, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41 (d) to 41 (e), if the part overlapping the display IN of the item name on the effect customization screen CD becomes the setting reflection display HD indicating that the item name is reflected. , It is possible for the player to easily confirm that the setting has been reflected, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, by reflecting the settings, it is possible to notify the player that the settings have been reliably reflected, give the player a sense of security, and maintain the player's willingness to play. In some cases.

<Invention 1 of the present application>
As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 and the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming table provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). The display means is a means capable of displaying the first effect setting display, and the display means is a means capable of displaying the second effect setting display, and is the same as the first effect setting display. Is a display including one or a plurality of settings (for example, the effect customization screen CD shown in FIGS. 36 and 37), and the second effect setting display is a display including one setting (for example, FIG. It is the display IN (music D) of the item name indicating that the item has been given, as shown in 36 (e) and FIG. 37 (e), and when the second effect setting display is displayed, The setting of the second effect setting display is reflected in the first effect setting display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36 (g) and 37 (g), the music D that can be newly set is displayed. The setting reflection display HD is displayed), normal state (for example, when the game table is a pachinko machine, during demonstration production, non-electric support, non-time saving, non-probability change state, non-big hit state, etc. In the case of a slot machine, there is a certain state (for example, a game table) that is more advantageous than a state during demonstration production, non-AT, non-BB, non-RB, non-RT, non-CT, low probability state, etc. In the case of a pachinko machine, it is in an electric support, in a short time, in a probabilistic state, in a big hit state, etc. Etc.), the first effect setting display may be displayed (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1”).

According to the game console according to the invention 1 of the present application, the setting of the second effect setting display is reflected in the first effect setting display, so that the player can be notified that the setting is surely reflected. , It is possible to give a sense of security to the player and to maintain the player's willingness to play. In addition, it is possible to customize the effect setting in a certain state so that the effect in a certain state can be the effect intended by the player, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, the setting of the first effect setting display may be a setting that can be selected in the certain state (for example, BGM that can be selected in a short time). With such a configuration, the player can experience a special feeling in a certain state, and the player's interest may be further improved.

<Invention 2 of the present application>
As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 and the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming table provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). The display means is a means capable of displaying the first effect setting display, and the display means is a means capable of displaying the second effect setting display, and is the same as the first effect setting display. Is a display including one or a plurality of settings (for example, the effect customization screen CD shown in FIGS. 36 and 37), and the second effect setting display is a display including one setting (for example, FIG. It is the display IN (music D) of the item name indicating that the item has been given, as shown in 36 (e) and FIG. 37 (e), and when the second effect setting display is displayed, The setting of the second effect setting display is reflected in the first effect setting display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36 (g) and 37 (g), the music D that can be newly set is displayed. The game table (hereinafter, "Invention 2 of the present application") is characterized in that the first effect setting display may be displayed over a plurality of continuous variable displays (the setting reflection display HD shown) is displayed. In some cases).

According to the game console according to the invention 2 of the present application, the setting of the second effect setting display is reflected in the first effect setting display, so that the player can be notified that the setting is surely reflected. , It is possible to give a sense of security to the player and to maintain the player's willingness to play. In addition, it may be possible to improve the convenience by making it possible to customize the effect setting over a plurality of fluctuations, and to improve the interest of the player.

Further, the setting of the second effect setting display reflected in the first effect setting display may be a setting that can be selected in the variable display from the next time onward. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game after the variable display, and it may be possible to further improve the interest of the player.

<Invention 3 of the present application>
As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 and the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming table provided with a display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). The display means is a means capable of displaying the first effect setting display, and the display means is a means capable of displaying the second effect setting display, and is the same as the first effect setting display. Is a display including one or more settings (for example, the effect customization screen CD shown in FIGS. 40 and 41), and the second effect setting display is a display including one setting (for example, FIG. It is the display IN (music D) of the item name indicating that the item has been given, as shown in 40 (c) and FIG. 41 (c), and when the second effect setting display is displayed, The setting of the second effect setting display is reflected in the first effect setting display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40 (e) and 41 (e), the music D that can be newly set is displayed. The setting reflection display HD shown is displayed), and the display means includes a first display (for example, the main liquid crystal display (first display means) 209a shown in FIGS. 40 and 41) and a second display (for example, FIG. 40). And the sub liquid crystal display (second display means) 209b) shown in FIG. 41, and the first effect setting display is displayed on at least one of the first display and the second display. (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "the present invention 3").

According to the game console according to the invention 3 of the present application, the setting of the second effect setting display is reflected in the first effect setting display, so that the player can be notified that the setting is surely reflected. , It is possible to give a sense of security to the player and to maintain the player's willingness to play. In addition, since the first effect setting display is displayed on one of the two displays, the first effect setting display can be easily seen and set, which can improve the interest of the player. You may be able to do it.

Further, the second effect setting display may be moved and displayed from one of the first display and the second display to the other. With such a configuration, by paying the player attention to the second effect setting display, it is possible for the player to easily confirm that the setting has been reflected, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. You may be able to do it.

<Invention 4 of the present application>
As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 and the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming table provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). The display means is a means capable of displaying the first effect setting display, and the display means is a means capable of displaying the second effect setting display, and is the same as the first effect setting display. Is a display including one or more settings (for example, the effect customization screen CD shown in FIGS. 35 and 39), and the second effect setting display is a display including one setting (for example, FIG. It is the display IN (item J and music E) of the item name indicating that the item has been given, as shown in 35 (i) and FIG. 39 (e), and the second effect setting display is displayed. In this case, the setting of the second effect setting display is reflected in the first effect setting display (for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (p), the setting reflection indicating the item J that can be newly set is reflected. The display HD is displayed, or as shown in FIGS. 37 (l) and (n), the setting reflection display HD indicating the newly settable music E is displayed), and the first effect is described above. The part corresponding to the setting of the second effect setting display reflected in the setting display may be displayed after the transition display of the first effect setting display (hereinafter referred to as a game table). , "Invention 4 of the present application").

According to the game console according to the invention 4 of the present application, the setting of the second effect setting display is reflected in the first effect setting display, so that the player can be notified that the setting is surely reflected. , It is possible to give a sense of security to the player and to maintain the player's willingness to play. In addition, it may be possible to confirm that the settings have been reflected after the transition is displayed, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, the part corresponding to the setting of the second effect setting display reflected in the first effect setting display is a display mode in which it can be identified that the setting of the second effect setting display is newly reflected. (For example, the display of the item "item J" and the display of the character string "NEW" shown in FIG. 35 (p) may be displayed. With such a configuration, even after the transition display of the first effect setting display, the newly reflected setting can be immediately grasped, and the convenience of the player may be improved. be.

<Invention 5 of the present application>
As described above, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100 and the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment includes a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3) and an operation means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208). For example, it is a game table provided with a chance button 136) shown in FIGS. 11 (l) and 35 (l), and the display means is a means capable of displaying the first effect setting display. The display means is a means capable of displaying the effect adjustment display (for example, the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 26, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 23, the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 19), and is the same as the first effect setting display. Is a display related to the effect setting (for example, the display of the item name indicating that the item A has been added, which is shown in FIGS. 33 (k) to 33 (s)), and is displayed during the display of the effect adjustment display. When the operating means is operated, the effect adjustment is possible, and the first effect setting display may be displayed during the display of the effect adjustment display (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"). Even if the operating means is operated in the first case, the effect adjustment is impossible, and when the variation display is started in the first case, the effect adjustment display is deleted. It is a featured game console.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when the first effect setting display is displayed during the display of the effect adjustment display, the effect adjustment is impossible and the variable display is started even if the operation means is operated. When this is done, the effect adjustment display is erased, so that the effect setting corresponding to the first effect setting display can be preferentially executed before the effect adjustment is executed.

The effect adjustment display may be a display related to volume adjustment (for example, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 23). Further, the effect adjustment display may be a display related to brightness adjustment (for example, the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 19). Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying the second effect setting display, and the second effect setting display is a display related to a plurality of the effect settings (for example, the effect customization shown in FIGS. 36 and 37). Screen CD), and when the first effect setting display is displayed on the display means, a setting that can be selected in the second effect setting display after the first effect setting display is erased. May increase.

In addition, the setting of the second effect setting display is in a normal state (for example, when the game console is a pachinko machine, during a demonstration effect, during non-electric support, during non-time saving, non-probability change state, non-big hit state, etc. , When the game console is a slot machine, it is more advantageous than a certain state (for example, during demonstration production, non-AT, non-BB, non-RB, non-RT, non-CT, low probability state, etc.). When the game table is a pachinko machine, it is in the electric support, during the time saving, in the probability change state, in the big hit state, etc. When the game table is a slot machine, it is in AT, BB, RB, RT, CT, etc. It may be a setting that can be selected in a high probability state, etc.).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41 (d) to 41 (e), a part of the first effect setting display overlapped with the second effect setting display is the second effect setting display. It may change to a part corresponding to the setting. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily confirm that the setting has been reflected, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

The "settings" according to the inventions 1 to 5 of the present application are not limited to the settings related to items and music, and may be settings related to various effects. Therefore, for example, volume, amount of light, brightness, type of sound effect, movement of movable body, display / non-display switching of various displays, output / non-output switching of various sounds, switching of presence / absence of automatic operation, etc. May be good.

Further, a new invention may be constructed by combining any one, a plurality, or all of the invention-specific matters of the present inventions 1 to 5. Further, the invention of the subordinate concept may be constructed by combining one, a plurality, or all of the invention-specific items of the modified examples described below. The second effect setting display may be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the number of settings included in the second effect setting display will increase in an easy-to-understand manner, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, a count display means (for example, the gauge GG of the meter shown in FIGS. 11A and 35) capable of displaying a display in which the number or amount increases or decreases is provided, and the display of the count display means is a certain count display. (Hereinafter referred to as "first count display". For example, a display in which all 10 gauges are turned off as shown in FIGS. 11 (c) and 35 (c), and a "full display" shown in FIG. 11 (d) and the like. When the character display CD2) of "tan" is displayed, the second effect setting display may be displayed on the display means, and the display by the count display means can be changed during the non-symbol variation display period. It may be a display. With such a configuration, the display of the count display means changes during the non-symbol variation display, so that the player may be able to play without getting bored. In addition, the player may not be awakened even if the hold of the variable game is removed.

Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the notice display (for example, the display of the item image IG including the character display of "heat" shown in FIG. 14 (m) or the like) is described. It may be displayed on the display means. With such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player by displaying a display other than the effect setting display.

Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the second effect setting display is displayed on the display means after the mini game (for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 31) is executed. It may be displayed. With such a configuration, the player may be able to entertain the period until the second effect setting display is displayed.

Further, the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIGS. 11 (l) and 35 (l)) is provided, and the display means displays the operation means (for example, during the display of the second effect setting display). Hereinafter, it is referred to as “first operation display”. For example, the button effect shown in FIGS. 11 (j) and 35 (j) can be displayed, and the first operation display is the means of the operation means. The display may include a valid period display (for example, an operation valid period display TG including a meter display). With such a configuration, the player can participate by operating the operating means even while the second effect setting display is displayed, the degree of intervention of the player can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved. You may be able to do it.

Further, when the second effect setting display is displayed on the display means, a setting that can be selected in the first effect setting display after the second effect setting display is erased (for example, in FIG. 25). The setting of the item to be shown) may be increased. With such a configuration, the choices by the player can be increased, and the player's motivation to play may be increased.

In addition, the animation display (for example, the display IN of the item name shown in FIGS. 36 (f) to 36 (g)) shows that the setting of the second effect setting display is reflected in the first effect setting display. It may be executed in the animation display) that moves from the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the effect customization screen CD while gradually reducing the display. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily confirm that the setting has been reflected, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, the game table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a game table provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3), and the display means is , The effect setting display (for example, the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 26, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 23, the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 19) is a means capable of displaying the effect setting display. It is a display including settings (for example, item setting shown in FIG. 25, volume setting shown in FIG. 22, brightness setting shown in FIG. 19), and the effect being displayed during the display of the effect setting display. Aside from the setting display, a display including one setting (for example, the setting of item A shown in FIG. 26) (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”. For example, it is suggested that the item shown in FIG. 26 has been added. The display (display of item name IN and display of item description IT) can be displayed on the display means, and when the first display is displayed on the display means, in the effect setting display being displayed, the display is displayed. The gaming table is characterized in that the setting of 1 included in the first display may be displayed.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, in the display of the effect setting display in which the setting of 1 may be displayed, the first display including the setting of 1 is displayed separately from the effect setting display being displayed. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to expect the player to increase the number of settings included in the effect setting display by displaying the first display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. be.

Further, a count display means (for example, a meter gauge GG shown in FIG. 11A or the like) capable of displaying a display in which the number or amount increases or decreases is provided, and the display of the count display means is a certain count display (hereinafter, , "First count display". For example, a display in which all 10 gauges are turned off as shown in FIG. 11 (c) and the like, and a character display of "full tank" shown in FIG. 11 (d) and the like CD2). In the case of, the first display may be displayed on the display means, and the display by the count display means may be a display that can be changed during the non-symbol variation display period.

With such a configuration, the display of the count display means changes during the non-symbol variation display, so that the player may be able to play without getting bored. In addition, the player may not be awakened even if the hold of the variable game is removed.

Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, a second display may be displayed on the display means instead of the first display, and the second display may be displayed. May be a display indicating a notice (for example, a display of an item image IG including a character display of "heat" shown in FIG. 14 (m) or the like).

With such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player by displaying a display other than the display including the setting.

Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the first display is displayed on the display means after the mini game (for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 31) is executed. You may.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to entertain the player for the period until the first display is displayed.

Further, the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 11 (l) or the like) is provided, and the display means displays the operation means during the display of the first display (hereinafter, "first operation". "Display". For example, the means capable of displaying the button effect shown in FIG. 11 (j) and the like, and the first operation display is a display of the validity period of the operation means (for example, FIG. 11 (j) and the like). The display may include the operation validity period display TG) shown in.

With such a configuration, the player can participate by operating the operating means even while the first display is displayed, the degree of intervention of the player can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved. There is.

Further, when the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect setting display and the display of the first display, the effect setting display may be deleted.

With such a configuration, the first display can be displayed longer than the effect setting display to appeal to the player, and the player's motivation to play may be enhanced.

Further, when the first display is displayed on the display means, the settings that can be selected in the effect setting display after the first display is erased (for example, the setting of the item shown in FIG. 25) increase. It may be something to do.

With such a configuration, the choices by the player can be increased, and the player's motivation to play may be increased.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 34 (o) to 34 (r), when the ball enters a predetermined game area during the display of the effect setting display (for example, the effect customization screen) (for example, for increasing the meter). When a ball enters the entrance, when the ball enters the starting port or the winning opening, the first display (for example, the player displays item A) is displayed separately from the effect setting display being displayed. The display suggesting that the item has been acquired) can be displayed on the display means, and a setting (for example, item A) corresponding to the first display is added to one or more settings in the effect setting display. It may be displayable on the display means.

The configuration of the game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment. For example, the symbol variation starts while the item appearing during the non-symbol variation is displayed. In some cases, the item does not have to be erased. Further, even if the symbol changes during the display of the custom display and the item, only the custom display may be deleted without deleting the item. Further, even if the meter is difficult to see (or cannot be seen) while the custom display is displayed, an item may appear when the meter is full. Also, the item may appear after the meter is full during non-symbol fluctuation.

In addition, an item indicating reliability may appear after the meter, which is partially stored during non-symbol variation, fills up during symbol variation. In addition, an item indicating reliability (heat, intense heat, etc.) may or may not appear when the symbol changes, or may not appear when the symbol changes. Further, the button effectiveness meter (operation effective period display) may be displayed during non-symbol fluctuation. You can also cancel (or not cancel) the display of the demo screen to display the item, cancel the menu display (or do not cancel), or display the item. You may cancel (or do not cancel) the display of the 2D code to display the item.

In addition, the meter may be accumulated at a moment other than the passing of the ball. In addition, there may be an increase mode in which the amount of increase in the meter increases more than usual. Further, in this case, it may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the hold is full or the electric support ends. Also, the item may appear after the mini-game when the meter is full. In addition, the item may appear even during SP reach. Further, the period of the reach button effect and the period of the customizable button effect may overlap, and the button may be effective for the other effect rather than one. In addition, the items that appear may change depending on the game state, each stage, and the timing.

In addition, when an item appears while the customization screen is displayed, the display of "?" On the customization screen may be changed (additional display of the item), or when the customization screen is redisplayed without changing it. In addition, the display of "?" On the customize screen may be changed. Further, the item to appear may be announced, and if the color of the meter is different from the normal time, a specific item may easily appear, or the color may be changed with the passage of time. Further, the item may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, the meter may be accumulated during the display of the item, or the meter may be configured to fill up with one type of trigger.

In addition, other display devices other than the decorative pattern display device 208 (for example, another liquid crystal display device, one or more single-color or full-color LEDs, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, The meter display may be performed only by the reel (drum) type display device, the leaf type display device, the plasma display, or the projector), or the meter display may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and other display devices, respectively (for example). , When the ball enters the meter increase entrance 227, the meter display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the meter display of the other display device increase by the same amount of increase), one for the decorative symbol display device 208 and the other display device. It may be used as a count display means for displaying a meter.

The game console according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine. For example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel. A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means for determining whether or not the internal winning of a plurality of types of combinations is won or not, and a reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for controlling the stop related to the stop of the reel and the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the internally won combination. A slot machine provided with a determination means for determining whether or not, and a payout control means for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined winning mode. It is also suitable for such as.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

<< Embodiment 2 >>
Next, the game console according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 79. The effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far.

42 to 66 are diagrams showing stepwise effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, FIGS. 42 to 66 show the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220. Although it is shown in the figure, the drawing of the normal drawing display device 210 and the general drawing holding lamp 216 is omitted. In FIGS. 42 to 66, the types of special figures to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are the same as the stop symbol modes shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b). Has been done. Further, in FIGS. 42 to 66, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 42. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not shown, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not shown, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed.

The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are symbols for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped). In the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, while the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the symbol of "x" corresponding to the result of the loss or the symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol in the special figure 1 is displayed, and the symbol of the special figure 1 is displayed. During the fluctuation, the "-" symbol is blinking. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2, while the symbol in the special figure 2 is stopped, the symbol of "x" corresponding to the result of the loss or the symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol in the special figure 2 is displayed, and the symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed. During the fluctuation, the "-" symbol is blinking. As described above, the fourth symbol is not only different in the display position from the decorative symbol, but also in the display mode (here, the shape), so that the player can distinguish it at a glance. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, a pre-reading notice or a notice regarding the symbol variation display may be given. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the lower left corner of the display screen.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 42 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). On the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, the hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state.

The number of holds of special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. The hold icons of the special figure 1 are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the left side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 42 (1), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the three special figures 1 are displayed, and all of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the three special figures 1 have a default display mode (round shape). It is displayed in a non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 42 is the non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because there is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. .. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is hidden as shown in FIG. 42 (1). When the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is hidden.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in Special Figure 2 is also a round, unpatterned and white display mode, but the display position is different from that of the hold icon in Special Figure 1. Alternatively, the display mode (here, the shape) may be different. By doing so, it may be possible for the player to make a distinction at a glance.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of the variation start in the special symbol display device → the blinking start or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → the movement animation start of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. , This order may change.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. , Displayed as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (3), it is shown that the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, and the hold notice has been started. That is, the display mode of Sabohani is the display mode of the look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (4), a button operation effect requesting the operation of the effect button 136 has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (4), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The display state of the button reception time meter MT changes in a manner in which the gauge in the rectangular frame decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. This button reception time meter MT is a display indicating the maximum time that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received after the operation validity period starts. Here, the button image 136a is displayed overlapping (overlapping) on the front side of the middle symbol of the decorative symbol, but is arranged on the rear side of the decorative symbol and overlapped (overlapped) by the decorative symbol. ) May be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (4), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (5), the step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 42 (6). NS. At this time, the button reception time meter MT is erased together with the button image 136a. The step-up notice is a notice that the switching display is performed by a plurality of steps, and is a notice that suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is high as the steps progress. The step-up notice in this effect example is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display, but may be executed as a look-ahead notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (6), the display SU1 of step 1 in the step-up notice is displayed. The display SU1 in step 1 is a display represented by the face of the character of the chief. In this effect example, the case where the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed and then the display of step 2 is performed is more than the case where the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed and then the display of step 2 is not performed. Is also configured so that it is easy to get a big hit (the big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed). Although the display SU1 in step 1 is displayed overlapping on the front side of the middle symbol of the decorative symbol, it may be arranged on the rear side of the decorative symbol and displayed so as to be superimposed by the decorative symbol. Further, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the step-up notice may not be started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the step-up notice has been completed, and the display SU1 in step 1 has been deleted. That is, in this step-up notice, the display SU1 in step 1 ends.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (8), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (9), a third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 42 (10). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed by the “special figure I” which is a lost symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (11), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area 280 without changing the display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (12), the button operation effect is started, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed as shown in FIG. 42 (4) as described above. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (12), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (13), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (14), FIG. 42 (15) shows. As shown, the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Here, the decreasing speed of the gauge may be faster, the same, or slower than the decreasing speed of the gauge displayed before the effect button 136 is operated. Further, on the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of Bancho mini-character BCHs composed of the Bancho's face (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (15)) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. There is. The number of mini-characters BCH of the number length displayed on the button reception time meter MT is a number corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge (time after the operation valid period is started). In this production example, the mini character BCH of the chief is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, which functions as a notice display suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. When the effect button 136 is operated, the display of the mini character BCH of the chief in the button reception time meter MT (notice display using the button reception time meter MT) starts after the display of the step-up notice is started. The step-up notice display may be started after the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is started, or the step-up notice display start and the button may be started. The start of the notice display using the reception time meter MT may be the same timing. This also applies to the following description. Further, the notice display using this button reception time meter MT is performed from the start of the operation valid period until the time corresponding to the maximum time of the operation valid period elapses, but ends at an earlier timing. It may end at a late timing. Even if the effect button 136 is operated, the mini character BCH of the chief may not be displayed on the button reception time meter MT. That is, in this production example, the case where the mini character BCH of the chief is displayed on the button reception time meter MT is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini character BCH of the chief is not displayed on the button reception time meter MT. It is configured in. In addition, a mini-character different from the Bancho mini-character BCH (for example, a princess mini-character) may be displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the displayed mini-character. Further, after the mini-character BCH of the Bancho is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, a step-up notice that the displayed mini-character changes may be given. For example, the display mode of the mini-character BCH of the Bancho changes. The more likely it is to be a big hit. In this production example, the reliability of the jackpot is the same regardless of the number of the mini character BCH of the Bancho displayed, but the reliability of the jackpot depends on the number of the mini character BCH of the Bancho displayed. May be different. For example, the greater the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of the Bancho, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a may be displayed in a display mode other than the default (for example, a display mode of the deca button, a display mode in which the button vibrates and rotates, etc.), and for example, a display mode of the deca button. When the button image 136a is displayed in the button image 136a, when the effect button 136 is operated, the princess mini-character may easily appear in the button reception time meter MT, and the princess mini-character may appear in the appearing mini-character. When it is included, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when only the mini character BCH of the chief appears.

On the other hand, when the button image 163a is displayed in the default display mode, only the mini character BCH of the Bancho may be likely to appear. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated after the operation valid period starts, a notice is displayed in such a manner that the mini character BCH of the chief is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. The notice may be displayed by changing the color of the gauge of the reception time meter MT (for example, changing from blue to red, etc.), or the notice may be displayed by changing the shape of the button reception time meter MT. You may do so. Further, in this effect example, the type of notice display on the button reception time meter MT may differ depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated after the operation valid period starts. For example, the operation valid period starts. If the effect button 136 is operated at an early timing, the mini character BCH of the Bancho is likely to be displayed, and if the effect button 136 is operated at a later timing after the operation validity period starts, the timer is displayed. A notice may be given. Further, the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is performed by a display means other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a sub display device, a front door frame 106, a display device provided on the door 108 with a ball storage plate, etc.). You may do so.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (16), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. The display SU2 in step 2 is a display represented by the whole body of the character of the Bancho. That is, in this production example, it is suggested that the display SU2 of step 2 is displayed in the step-up notice, so that the display is more likely to be a big hit than the display SU1 of step 1 ends. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of Bancho decreases according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number is three at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (16).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (17), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU2 in step 2 is changed to the display SU3 in step 3. The display SU3 in step 3 is a display showing how the character of the Bancho is tearing his clothes. Further, along with the display of the display SU3 in step 3, the characters "It's super hot" are displayed above the display SU3 in step 3, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high. That is, in this production example, it is suggested that the display SU3 of step 3 is displayed in the step-up notice, so that the display is more likely to be a big hit than the display SU2 of step 2 ends. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of Bancho decreases according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number is one at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (17). The button reception time meter MT may be deleted (that is, the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is terminated) before the display SU2 in step 2 is changed to the display SU3 in step 3. The button reception time meter MT may be deleted at the timing when the display SU2 in step 2 changes to the display SU3 in step 3. Further, in this effect example, no effect is performed even when the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is exhausted, but a notice may be given when the remaining amount of the gauge is exhausted.

Further, in this production example, the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT and the number of steps executed in the step-up notice are not related, but for example, the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT. If the mini character of the princess is included in, the display SU3 in step 3 may be easily displayed, or conversely, the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT is only the mini character BCH of the chief. When the display SU3 of step 3 is difficult to be displayed, the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2 may easily end the step-up notice. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a may be a display mode other than the default display mode (for example, a display mode of a big button, a vibration and rotation display mode, etc.), and for example, the button image 136a. When the display mode is the display mode of the big button, the display SU3 in step 3 is more likely to be displayed than in the case of the default display mode, and when the display mode of the button image 136a is the default display mode. May end the step-up notice more easily in the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2 than in the case of the display mode of the big button.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (18), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the step-up notice has ended, and the button reception time meter MT has also been deleted. Here, the step-up notice may be continued until the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is exhausted, or may be terminated before the remaining amount of the gauge is exhausted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (19) following FIG. 42 (18), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "extremely hot", notifies that the reach state has been reached, and suggests that the reliability of the jackpot in this reach is high. Normally, when a reach state is formed, "reach" is displayed to notify that the reach state has been reached. That is, it can be said that when a reach state is formed and "extremely hot" is displayed, it is more likely to be a big hit than when "reach" is displayed. On the other hand, in the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how it has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, a small decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed in which the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (21), the button notice effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (22), as shown in FIG. A cut-in image including a balloon image with the characters "Ja" is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, nine) of the faces of the bancho are arranged around the characters of "game" in the balloon, and the weak cut-in image CI1b is It suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when it is displayed. When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be a big hit (so that the big hit symbol is finally confirmed and displayed).

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5", FIG. 43 (26). ), The decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special figure A is a big hit is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed in the mode of the jackpot symbol of "special figure A".

FIG. 44 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (1), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed.

The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 44 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). Therefore, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

In FIG. 44 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and among them, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani (pre-reading notice), and the first The second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 44 (3), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (4), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (5), FIG. 44 (6) shows. As shown, the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, and the timer notice display TM is displayed instead of the button reception time meter MT. Timer notice display The timer display in the TM displays the time corresponding to the time from the start of the operation valid period (that is, the remaining amount of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated). At the timing shown in FIG. 44 (6), "03.87" indicating 3.87 seconds is displayed as the timer display in the timer notice display TM. That is, the timer display indicates the timing at which the advance notice effect performed by the completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM is executed, and the time indicated by the timer display at the time when the timer display starts to be displayed is the time indicated by the timer display. It depends on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated after the operation valid period is started. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the timer advance notice is performed by the timer advance notice display TM displayed in place of the button reception time meter MT. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM is displayed by operating the effect button 136, but the timer notice display TM may not be displayed in some cases. Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, the timer notice display TM may not be displayed, or the timer notice display TM may be displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM, the time in the timer display is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the timing shown in FIG. 44 (7) is 2.49 seconds. "02.49" indicating that is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 44 (8), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM becomes “00.00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 44 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 , The display SU2 in step 2 changes to the display SU3 in step 3. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM changes the display color to red and is shown in bold to notify that a notice has occurred due to the completion of the countdown. The change from the display SU2 in step 2 to the display SU3 in step 3 is a notice display performed by counting up the timer display in the timer notice display TM. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the reliability of the step-up notice is further increased by the result of the timer notice being performed with respect to the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect. In other words, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice given as a result of the timer notice countdown are interrelated. From another point of view, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice given as a result of the timer notice countdown are separate notices. In this effect example, the effect content of the step-up notice may be changed according to the remaining time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display TM. For example, the remaining time indicated by the timer display when the timer notice is started. When the time is long (for example, 5 seconds), the display SU3 of step 3 is performed from the display SU1 of step 1 through the display SU2 of step 2, but the remaining time indicated by the timer display when the timer notice is started is performed. When the number is small (for example, 1 second), after the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed, the display SU2 of step 2 is not displayed in time, so that the display SU2 of step 2 is not displayed and the display of step 3 is displayed. SU3 may be displayed. Alternatively, the display SU3 of step 3 may be displayed without displaying the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2.

Further, in this production example, the timer display on the timer notice display TM is set from the time corresponding to the operation valid period (for example, 5 seconds) to the time from the start of the operation valid period (for example, 1.13 seconds). When the deducted remaining time is 3.87 seconds, "03.87" indicating this is displayed, but it corresponds to the remaining gauge of the button reception time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated. The initial value of the timer may be displayed, and the display SU3 of step 3 may be displayed at the timing when the timer counts down from the displayed initial value of the timer to become "00.00". .. Specifically, for example, in the period within 1 second (first period) after the operation valid period is started, "04.00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer, and within 2 seconds after exceeding 1 second. In the period (second period), "03.00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer ... In the period (fourth period) within 4 seconds after exceeding 3 seconds, "01" is displayed as the initial value of the timer. ".00" may be displayed. Further, if a certain period is exceeded after the operation valid period is started, the timer advance notice may not be started.

After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 44 (10) to (18) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 44 (10) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 42 (18) to 43 (25), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 45. .. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 45 (1) to 45 (5) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 44 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (5) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (4), as shown in FIG. 45 (6). The step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, on the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of Bancho mini-characters BCHs composed of the Bancho's face (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (6)) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. There is. That is, the notice display is performed by displaying the mini character BCH of the Bancho. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (6), the timer notice display TM is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and in the timer notice display TM, the timer notice display TM is predetermined regardless of the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. (For example, in the timer notice display TM shown in FIG. 45 (6), the display of "30.00" indicating 30 seconds) is performed.

At this time, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display TM may be different depending on the time when the operation valid period is started so that the timing at which the countdown ends is the same, for example. , The timing at which the countdown ends may be adjusted by changing the time between the start of the reach effect and the transition from the normal reach to the super reach and the time for displaying the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the shaking. Further, the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM when the timer notice is started may be set to display the time corresponding to the time from the start of the operation valid period. As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the notice by the display of the mini character BCH of the chief of the button reception time meter MT and the timer notice by the timer notice display TM are integrated into one notice display. In other words, in this production example, at least the remaining time at the time when the production button 136 is operated out of the time set as the operation valid period is notified by the button reception time meter MT, and some kind of notice (bancho mini) is given. It can be said that the character BCH is displayed and the timer is announced).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of Bancho decreases according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number is three at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (7). Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM is counted down according to the time from the start of the timer notice, and at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (7), it is "28.50" indicating 28.50 seconds. Is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (8), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU2 in step 2 is changed to the display SU3 in step 3. Further, along with the display of the display SU3 in step 3, the characters "It's super hot" are displayed above the display SU3 in step 3, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of Bancho decreases according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number is one at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (8). Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM is counted down according to the time from the start of the timer notice, and at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (8), it is "26.00" indicating 26.00 seconds. Is displayed. In this production example, unlike the production example shown in FIG. 44, the countdown due to the timer notice does not affect the step-up notice, and the countdown still continues in FIG. 45 (8). ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the step-up notice is finished and the button reception time meter MT is also erased, but the timer notice is continuously performed, and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is progressing. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer notice is continuously performed even after the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed and the step-up notice is completed. Further, the period during which the timer display on the timer notice display TM is displayed is from the period from the start of the operation valid period to the start of the gauge on the button reception time meter MT until the remaining amount of the gauge becomes 0. Can also be said to be a long period. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 45 (10) to (13) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 45 (10) to 43 (13) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 43 (19) to 43 (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45 (12), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (13) after the button advance notice effect is started, the decorative symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 45 (14). In the device 208, a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters "game" are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with a close-up image of the character of the lord. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the chief is not displayed around the characters "game" in the balloon, and is a big hit than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Although the reliability of is low, it suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the cut-in image is not displayed. At this time as well, the timer advance notice is continuously performed, and the timer display countdown in the timer advance notice display TM is progressing. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (14), "10.50" is displayed, which indicates that the timer display in the timer notice display TM has 10.50 seconds remaining.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the middle. The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the timer advance notice is continuously performed at this time as well, and the timer display countdown in the timer advance notice display TM is progressing. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (15), "05.50" indicating that the timer display in the timer notice display TM has 5.50 seconds remaining is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 45 (16) to 45 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". The timer notice is continuously performed, and when the timer display on the timer notice display TM becomes "00.00" at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (17) and the countdown is completed, the timer is shown in FIG. 45 (18). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character BC of the bancho appears backward, and in the timer notice display TM, the character "revival" is displayed to notify that the resurrection effect is performed. That is, it is notified that the jackpot is confirmed. In addition, in the revival effect, an effect that fails to revive may be performed, and the result of the loss may be derived.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (19) following FIG. 45 (18), the character BC of the Bancho, who was facing backward, faces the front and the decorative symbol of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". The combination of is displayed, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. In addition, the timer notice display TM also displays the characters "Congratulations", indicating that it is congratulating the big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5", FIG. 46 (21). ), The decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special figure A has become a big hit is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed in the mode of the jackpot symbol of the special figure A.

FIG. 47 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 47 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 44 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. Then, it is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. In this production example, the icon of the chief and the icon of the panda are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT. The button reception time meter MT in this production example is different from the above-described aspect, and as shown in FIGS. 47 (3) to 47 (7), it corresponds to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Therefore, the display mode is changed so as to be gradually shortened. Further, in response to the button reception time meter MT becoming shorter, the panda icon arranged at the right end of the button reception time meter MT also moves so as to follow the right end of the button reception time meter MT. At this time, the position of the Bancho icon arranged at the left end of the button reception time meter MT is fixed and does not move. In the following description, an icon that is placed at the left end of the button reception time meter MT and whose position does not change regardless of the decrease display of the button reception time meter MT is called a fixing icon, and is placed at the right end of the button reception time meter MT. An icon that is displaced according to the decrease display of the button reception time meter MT may be called a movement icon. Therefore, as time goes by, the panda icon is displayed as if it approaches the Bancho icon. In this production example, it is predicted that something will happen when the panda bites the bancho, that is, it can be said that the display itself of the button reception time meter MT functions as a notice display.

From another point of view, by displaying the button reception time meter MT, the advance notice display by the button reception time meter MT is started before the operation of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is performed. It can also be said that there is. In this production example, a step-up notice may be given in which the icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT change according to the time from the start of the operation validity period. For example, the operation validity period may be given. When the button starts, two panda icons are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT, and as time passes, the panda icon changes to the chief icon one by one, and the more the icon changes, the more reliable the jackpot. The notice with a high degree may be easily displayed, or the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed as the icon changes. Further, in this production example, the notice display is performed in such a manner that the character icon is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. For example, the notice display is displayed by changing the color of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT. It may be performed, or the notice display may be performed by changing the display mode of the button reception time meter MT.

FIG. 47 (4) shows how the button reception time meter MT is shortened with the passage of time after the operation valid period is started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (5), the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 47 (6). At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode is such that the button reception time meter MT is gradually shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Change. At this time, a mini character (for example, a mini character BCH of a bancho, a mini character of a princess, etc.) may be displayed on the button reception time meter MT to display a notice. In this case, for example, when the two icons attached to the button reception time meter MT are both the icons of the bancho, the mini character of the princess is easily displayed and is added to the button reception time meter MT2. When one icon is a combination of the Bancho icon and the panda icon, the Bancho mini character BCH may be easily displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time from the start of the operation validity period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (7), the panda icon approaches the Bancho icon, and " By displaying the word "gabutsu", it is shown that the panda is biting the bancho. This can make the player expect something to happen, and as a result, give him a sense of anticipation for the jackpot. In this production example, the advance notice is displayed by the button reception time meter MT within the range of the period from the start of the operation valid period to the elapse of the time corresponding to the operation valid period.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (8), the display SU2 in step 2 is covered with the symbols of a large number of stars in a manner that is difficult to see. At this time, the decorative design is displayed small in the upper left corner. This effect is performed when the panda bites the bancho, that is, the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT affects the step-up notice (the notice started by the operation of the effect button 136). It can be said that it is something to give. As a result, it may be possible to expect that the step-up notice will change. In addition, since the step-up notice is further developed by pretending that the step-up notice has ended, it may be possible to give the step-up notice a surprise. In this production example, the time from the start of the operation valid period to the start of displaying the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is determined. Therefore, the effect is performed after the operation valid period is started. The earlier the timing until the button 136 is operated, the longer the execution time of the step-up notice becomes. Further, in this effect example, if the effect button is not operated during the operation valid period, the step-up notice is not started, and the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, instead of the display SU2 in step 2, the princess character HM is displayed together with the character display of "Premier", and the big hit is confirmed. The state of being notified is shown. That is, the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT shifts from the step-up notice to the premier notice. If the effect button 136 is not operated in the above-mentioned button operation effect, the step-up notice will not be started, and therefore the premier notice will not be given. However, even if the step-up notice is not given, the premier notice will be given. It may be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (10), it is notified that the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", FIG. 47 (12) ), The decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special figure A has become a big hit is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed in the mode of the jackpot symbol of the special figure A.

FIG. 48 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, a state of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect is shown. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 48 (1) to (3) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 44 (1) to (3), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 48 (4) shows a state after the button operation effect is started and the operation valid period is started. After that, as shown in FIGS. 48 (4) to (6), when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, the step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 48 (7). Display of step 1 SU1 is displayed. In this effect example, even if the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, the step-up notice is started after the operation valid period has elapsed. In this case, since the button reception time meter MT is deleted as the operation valid period elapses, the advance notice display using the button reception time meter MT is not performed. Further, when the auto button mode is set as described above, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated in a pseudo manner at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the operation valid period is started. Along with the start of the step-up notice, the notice display using the button reception time meter MT may be performed, only the step-up notice is performed, and the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is not performed. Alternatively, only the notice using the button reception time meter MT is given, and the step-up notice does not have to be given. After the step-up notice is started at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (7), the step-up notice develops in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 48 (8) to (9).

In this case, the display SU3 of step 3 may not be displayed and the step-up notice may end at the display SU2 of step 2, or the display SU2 of step 2 may not be displayed and the display SU1 of step 1 may be terminated. The step-up notice may end at. The effects shown in FIGS. 48 (8) to (9) are the same as those in FIGS. 42 (16) to (17) except that the button reception time meter MT is not displayed. Is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (10), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (11), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "extremely hot", notifies that the reach state has been reached, and suggests that the reliability of the jackpot in this reach is high. On the other hand, in the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, after the reach effect as described above is performed, in the case of a big hit, after the temporary stop display due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, as shown in FIG. 48 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 uses the decorative symbol display device 208. It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special figure A has become a big hit is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed in the mode of the jackpot symbol of the special figure A.

FIG. 49 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 49. Since the effect shown in FIG. 49 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 44 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Further, in this effect example, a character display "If three people are gathered, it is a pseudo-ream" is displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, foretelling that the pseudo-ream effect will be performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. The button reception time meter MT in this production example is the same as that shown in FIG. 47 (3) and described above, and the display mode changes as the button reception time meter MT itself becomes shorter with the passage of time. In this button operation effect, the effect button 136 is operated multiple times (three times in this effect example) to display the desired display result (Echigoya character ECG, lord character YSM, and princess character HME. By displaying), it is foretold that a pseudo-ream will be performed. When the pseudo-ream is not performed, the three characters are not displayed.

In this production example, one character is displayed for each operation, but the number of characters may be increased by one depending on the amount of long press operation, or depending on the number of repeated hit operations. The characters may be incremented by one. Further, two or more characters may be displayed at the same time by one operation. Further, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) by the time the operation valid period elapses, the pseudo-ream may not be performed, or the pseudo-ream is performed. You may.

After that, when the operation valid period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (4), as shown in FIG. 49 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Character ECG is displayed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (5), as shown in FIG. 49 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM of the lord is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character ECG of Echigoya. Further, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (6), as shown in FIG. 49 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (8), the icon of the bancho and the icon of the panda displayed attached to the button reception time meter MT are separated from each other, and the character "all gathered" is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. Is displayed, and it is announced that a pseudo-ream will be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (9), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7" is displayed, and it is shown that the temporary stop is performed by the shaking fluctuation display. , It is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed. That is, in this production example, the replay symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-ream is performed. In this production example, "decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed at the same time, but it may be stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol> right symbol> middle symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (10), it is shown that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. In addition, a character display "If three people are gathered, it is a pseudo-ream" is displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, foretelling that the second pseudo-ream effect will be performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (11), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (11), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is also a notice effect regarding the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. The button reception time meter MT in this production example is the same as that shown in FIG. 47 (3) and described above, but in the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 49 (11), the icon of the chief is displayed at both ends. It is displayed. In this production example, pseudo-ream is more likely to occur when two Bancho icons are displayed than when the Bancho icon and the panda icon are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. When two icons of are displayed, the pseudo-ream may be performed without fail. When two icons of the chief are displayed on the button reception time meter MT, the button image 136a is displayed in a display mode other than the default (for example, a display mode of a big button, a vibration and a rotating display mode, etc.). On the contrary, when the button image 136a is displayed in a display mode other than the default display mode, it may be easy to display two icons of the chief of the button reception time meter MT. ..

After that, when the operation valid period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (12), as shown in FIG. 49 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Character ECG is displayed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (13), as shown in FIG. 49 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM of the lord is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character ECG of Echigoya. Further, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (14), as shown in FIG. 49 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (8) and as described above, the pair of bancho icons displayed attached to the button reception time meter MT are separated from each other, and the button reception time meter MT is set to "all gathered". The characters are displayed and it is announced that the second pseudo-ream will be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (16), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7" is displayed, and it is shown that the temporary stop is performed by the shaking fluctuation display. It is notified that the second pseudo-ream will be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (17), it is shown that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x3" indicating the number of times that the third variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a character display saying "If three people are gathered, it is extremely hot" is displayed, foretelling that a highly reliable notice of the big hit will be made.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (18) following FIG. 49 (17), the button operation effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (18), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect relating to a certain advance notice effect being performed. In the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 50 (18), the icon of the chief is displayed at both ends. In this production example, a highly reliable notice is more likely to occur when two Bancho icons are displayed than when the Bancho icon and the Panda icon are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. , It is easy to get a big hit by displaying two icons of Bancho (the big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed).

After that, when the operation valid period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (19), as shown in FIG. Character ECG is displayed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (20), as shown in FIG. 50 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM of the lord is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character ECG of Echigoya. Further, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (21), as shown in FIG. 50 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (23), "decoration 7" is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to form a reach state. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character ECG of Echigoya, the character TSM of the lord, and the character HME of the princess are arranged so as to overlap the front side of the middle symbol. The word "super hot" is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot is highly reliable.

After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (subjugation reach). The effects shown in FIGS. 50 (24) to 50 (30) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 43 (20) to (26) except that the decorative symbols constituting the reach state are different, and thus the description thereof is omitted. do.

FIG. 51 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the pseudo-continuous effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this production example, it is shown that three characters are not aligned in the button operation production and the pseudo-ream is not performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 51 (1) to 51 (6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (6), a button operation effect is performed, and as a result of pressing the effect button 136 twice, the character ECG of Echigoya and the character YSM of the lord are displayed. It is shown. Then, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 51 (6), as shown in FIG. 51 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the princess character HME. An "x" indicating that the princess character HME did not appear is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (8), the icon of the bancho and the icon of the panda displayed attached to the button reception time meter MT are separated from each other, and the character "sorry" is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. It is displayed, and it is notified that the button operation effect fails and the pseudo-ream is not performed. In addition, even though three characters are not displayed and the character "sorry" is displayed, a pseudo-ream may be performed. In this case, for example, as a premium effect of breaking the law, a big hit may be confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 51 (9) to 51 (12), the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol> middle symbol> right symbol, and the decorative symbols lost in "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2" are displayed. The combination is confirmed and displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 51 (9) to 51 (12) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 42 (7) to (10), the description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in this production example, the icons displayed along with the button reception time meter MT are the bancho icon and the panda icon, and the two bancho icons in the production examples shown in FIGS. 49 to 50 are It is more difficult for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed than when it is displayed.

FIG. 52 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, a state of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is operated at a timing close to the end of the operation valid period in the button operation effect is shown. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 52 (1) to 52 (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 42 (10) to (13), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (5) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (4), as shown in FIG. 52 (6). The step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 52 (5), the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated is later than the timing shown in FIG. 42 (14), and is slightly before the end of the operation valid period. It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (6), the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is small, and the number of mini-characters BCH of the number length displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge is only one.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. On the other hand, in the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. The step-up notice ends at a timing before the left symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, since the timing at which the step-up notice ends is predetermined (for example, in this effect example, the timing before the left symbol is stopped and displayed), the effect button is displayed during the period when the step-up notice can be executed. It will fluctuate depending on the timing when 136 is operated. Therefore, the later the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated, the shorter the execution time of the step-up notice. In this effect example, since the effect button 136 was operated at a timing shortly before the end of the operation valid period, the step-up notice was started, the display SU1 of step 1 was started, and then the display SU3 of step 3 was started. Although there was not enough time to perform the development effect and it was planned to display up to the display SU3 in step 3, the step-up notice will end at the display SU1 in step 1. In addition, the display of the step-up to start the display may be determined according to the time when the step-up notice can be executed. For example, as in this production example, the execution time of the step-up notice is short. In this case, the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2 may not be displayed, and the display may be started from the display SU3 of step 3.

After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 52 (8) to 52 (15) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 52 (7) to 52 (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 42 (18) to 43 (26), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 53 (1) to 53 (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 42 (10) to (13), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (5) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (4), as shown in FIG. 53 (6). In addition, the step-up notice will start. In this production example, when the step-up notice is started, the display is not started from the display SU1 in step 1, the display is started from the display SU2 in step 2, and then, as shown in FIG. 53 (7), the step Display of 3 SU3 is displayed. This is because, as shown in FIG. 53 (5), the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated is later than the timing shown in FIG. 42 (14). Since it is shorter than the execution time of the effect scheduled to be executed in the up notice, when the display is started from the display SU1 in step 1, the display SU2 in step 2 and the display SU3 in step 3 cannot be sufficiently displayed. .. Therefore, in this effect example, the display of the step to start the display is determined in the step-up notice from the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, and the step-up notice is performed based on this. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (5), it is determined to start the display from the display SU2 in step 2 so that the display SU3 in step 3 is displayed. .. As a result, for example, when the display SU3 in step 3 is scheduled to be displayed, it may not be impossible to see the display SU3 due to the delay in the operation of the effect button 136.

In this effect example, the above-mentioned character icons may be added to both ends of the button reception time meter MT. For example, when the Bancho icon and the Panda icon are displayed, the effect button 136 is operated. Then, the mini character BCH of the Bancho is likely to appear on the button reception time meter MT, and when the icons of the two Bancho are displayed, the mini character of the princess is more likely to appear than the mini character BCH of the Bancho. When the mini character of the princess appears, it may be easier to get a big hit (the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed) than when the mini character BCH of the Bancho appears.

After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 53 (8) to (16) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 53 (8) to 43 (16) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 42 (18) to 43 (26), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 54 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 54 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 44 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, but the button reception time meter MT as described above is not displayed. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (4), "5.00 seconds left" indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. The display of the remaining time is displayed so that the numerical value gradually decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period by the countdown method. The display of this countdown may be such that the countdown progresses according to the passage of the actual time, the countdown may proceed faster than the passage of the actual time, or the countdown progresses later than the passage of the actual time. You may try to do it. In this production example, the display of the remaining time is started at the timing when the operation valid period is started, but the display of the remaining time may be started at the timing after the operation valid period is started. For example, the operation is valid. When the maximum time of the period is 5 seconds, after the operation valid period starts, when the remaining 3 seconds are reached, "3.00 seconds left" is displayed, and the display of the remaining time is started. May be good.

After that, the timing shown in FIG. 54 (5) (for example, in this production example, 2 seconds have passed since the operation valid period was started, and the remaining time is displayed as "3.00 seconds left"). Then, when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 54 (6), the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the countdown display is deleted together with the button image 136a.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (7), the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 47 (3) is displayed below the display SU1 in step 1. The button reception time meter MT starts displaying with the same length regardless of the timing from the start of the operation valid period to the operation of the effect button 136. On the other hand, since the execution period of the step-up notice depends on the timing from the start of the operation valid period to the operation of the effect button 136, the period during which the button reception time meter MT is displayed is also different. Therefore, the speed at which the button reception time meter MT is shortened differs depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated. For example, the earlier the effect button 136 is operated after the operation validity period is started, the earlier the button reception time meter is operated. The speed at which MT becomes shorter becomes slower.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 54 (8), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is shortened according to the time from the start of display of the button reception time meter MT, and at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (8), the panda icon is close to the Bancho icon. , By displaying the letters "Gabutsu", it is shown that the panda is biting the bancho. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 54 (9) to (13) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 54 to 13 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 47 (8) to (12), the description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in this effect example, in the button operation effect, the display related to the operation validity period (display of the remaining time and display of the button reception time meter MT) changes before and after the operation of the effect button 136. There is.

FIG. 55 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 55 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 44 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, but the button reception time meter MT as described above is not displayed. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 55 (4), "5 seconds left" indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. The display of the remaining time is displayed so that the numerical value decreases by the countdown method according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In this effect example, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 54, since there is no display of less than 1 second, it can be said that the remaining time is roughly displayed. The display of this countdown may be such that the countdown progresses according to the passage of the actual time, the countdown may proceed faster than the passage of the actual time, or the countdown progresses later than the passage of the actual time. You may try to do it.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 55 (5) (for example, in this production example, 1 second has passed since the operation valid period was started, and the remaining time is displayed as "4 seconds left"). When the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 55 (6), the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the countdown display is still displayed, and the countdown is also continuously performed. Also, at this time, the "after" part of the countdown display has been erased, indicating that the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period has been switched to the display as a timer notice until a certain effect is performed. ing.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 55 (7) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the countdown as a timer notice. At this time, the display of the numerical value part of the countdown display changes to multiple colors (for example, 7 colors), suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. When the display of the numerical value part of the countdown display changes to multiple colors, the big hit may be confirmed. Further, the numerical value portion of the countdown display may be displayed in another one color, and for example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the display color. Further, for example, the typeface of the numerical part of the countdown display may be changed so that the displayed typeface suggests the reliability of the jackpot. Further, in the step-up notice, the development from step 1 is not performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 remains.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (10), the countdown display becomes "0 seconds", and when the countdown is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays step 1 as shown in FIG. 55 (11). The display changes from SU1 to the display SU3 in step 3. Also, the countdown display has been erased. The change from the display SU1 in step 1 to the display SU3 in step 3 is a notice display performed when the countdown as a timer notice is completed. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the reliability of the step-up notice is further increased by the result of the timer notice being performed with respect to the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect. In other words, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice given as a result of the timer notice countdown are interrelated. From another point of view, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice given as a result of the timer notice countdown are separate notices.

After that, for example, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 42 (18) to (19) to reach the reach state, and then the effects shown in FIGS. 55 (12) to (18) are shown. Is done. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 55 (12) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 43 (20) to (26), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 56 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 44 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Further, in this production example, the character display "If three people are gathered, it is a chance" is displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, suggesting that the reliability of the big hit is high if three characters appear. Has been done.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The button reception time meter MT in this production example is the same as that shown in FIG. 47 (3) and described above, and the display mode changes as the button reception time meter MT itself becomes shorter with the passage of time. In this button operation effect, the effect button 136 is operated multiple times (three times in this effect example) to display the desired display result (Echigoya character ECG, lord character YSM, and princess character HME. By displaying), it is notified that a notice with high reliability of the jackpot will be given. That is, when all three characters are displayed, the notice is more likely to be displayed than when all three characters are not displayed. In this production example, one character is displayed for each operation, but the number of characters may be increased by one depending on the amount of long press operation, or depending on the number of repeated hit operations. The characters may be incremented by one. Further, two or more characters may be displayed at the same time by one operation.

After that, when the operation valid period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (4), as shown in FIG. 56 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Character ECG is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the operation validity period continues. That is, it is shown that the hidden button effect that accepts the operation of the effect button 136 is performed without displaying the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 136. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (5), as shown in FIG. 56 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM of the lord is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character ECG of Echigoya. That is, it is shown that the character YSM of the lord appears by operating the hidden button. Further, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (6), as shown in FIG. 56 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed. That is, it is shown that the princess character HME appears by operating the hidden button. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the hidden button effect is performed during the execution of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT.

Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (8), the icon of the bancho and the icon of the panda, which are displayed along with the button reception time meter MT, are separated from each other, and the character "all gathered" is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. Is displayed, and it is notified that a notice display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is high will be displayed after that.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (9), "decoration 7" is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to form a reach state. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character ECG of Echigoya, the character YSM of the lord, and the character HME of the princess are arranged so as to overlap (overlap) the front side of the middle symbol, and the button reception displayed below them. On the time meter MT, the characters "chance" are displayed, and a notice display suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high is performed. In the button operation effect, when the effect button 136 is not operated enough times and three characters are not displayed, or when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, for example, any one of the three characters If the above characters do not appear, the characters "chance" may be replaced with, for example, "sorry" to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is low. Further, when the reach is reached by a specific symbol (for example, "decoration 7"), the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the reach is reached by another symbol.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the development of the above-mentioned subjugation reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (11), the button notice effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (12), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 56 (13).

After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the middle. The "decoration 6" scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", FIG. 56 (16). ), The decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed by the “special figure I” which is a lost symbol.

FIG. 57 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 57 (1) to 57 (3) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 44 (1) to (3), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 57 (3), after the button operation effect is started, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (4), the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character "continuous hit" is displayed on the screen, and it is notified that the step is advanced in the step-up notice by the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136.

After that, when the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (5), as shown in FIG. 57 (6), a step-up notice is given in response to the first operation of the effect button 136. It is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, at this timing, in the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of mini-character BCHs of the number length (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (6)) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. .. Also in this production example, the mini character BCH of the chief is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, which functions as a notice display suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. At the timing shown in FIG. 57 (6), the player continuously hits the effect button 136. In this effect example, the step-up notice is started by one operation of the effect button 136, but the step-up is performed when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit a predetermined number of times after the operation valid period is started. The notice may be started. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the advance notice display is performed by the button reception time meter MT while the effect of the continuous striking operation by the effect button 136 is being executed.

After that, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, and when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 57 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 steps from the display SU1 in step 1. Step up to the display SU2 of 2. As described above, in this effect example, the display may be stepped up in the step-up notice on condition that the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed. In other words, the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient. If so, step-up is not performed. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of the Bancho is also decreasing according to the remaining amount of the gauge.

After that, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, and when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 57 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 steps from the display SU2 in step 2. Display of 3 Step up to SU3. That is, in this production example, it is suggested that the display SU3 of step 3 is displayed in the step-up notice, so that the display is more likely to be a big hit than the display SU2 of step 2 ends. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of the Bancho is also decreasing according to the remaining amount of the gauge.

After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 57 (9) to 57 (17) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 57 (9) to 57 (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 42 (18) to 43 (26), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a button continuous press operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 58 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 44 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (3), it is shown that the button repeated pressing operation effect is started. Specifically, the character BC1 of the Bancho is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the characters "Awaken the Bancho by repeated hits" are displayed. That is, in this button continuous striking operation effect, it can be said that the mission effect is intended to display the mode in which the clothes of the bancho are torn within a predetermined time by repeatedly striking the effect button 136.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (4), it is shown that the operation valid period in the button continuous press operation effect has started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of "Awaken the Bancho by repeated hits" displayed on the right side of the character BC1 of the Bancho is changed to the character display of "Start of repeated hits" and "Continuous hits". Below the character display of "Start", the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits is displayed. The button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits has a different display mode from the button reception time meter MT described above, and is composed of an indicator composed of a plurality of blocks (nine in the production example shown in FIG. 58 (4)). There is. Then, the display mode of the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits changes in such a manner that it is erased one by one from the rightmost block according to the time from the start of the operation valid period.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 58 (5) to 58 (7), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, the number of star symbols displayed overlaid on the Bancho character BC1 increases as the number of operations increases. It will increase.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 58 (8), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a mode in which the character of the bancho is breaking clothes (final form). The character BC2 of the Bancho is displayed), and the characters "Awakening" are displayed to notify that the purpose (mission) of the button repeated operation effect has been achieved.

At this time, the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits is not erased, and the displayed blocks are displayed in a manner of changing to multiple colors (for example, 7 colors), suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. .. In this production example, it can be said that the notice display is performed by changing the display mode of the button reception time meter RMT for continuous hitting. It should be noted that the display mode of the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT does not change, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is low, or the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT is deleted when the mission is achieved. However, the notice may not be displayed. Further, the display color of the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits may be changed to any one of a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the changed display color. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display using the button reception time meter RMT for continuous striking is performed after the purpose of the button continuous striking operation effect is achieved. It should be noted that, in the button repeated pressing operation effect, the number of operations of the effect button 136 is increased during the operation valid period even though it is determined in advance that the mission will not be achieved or the mission will be achieved in advance. If the number of times required to complete the mission is not reached, the character of the bancho will not be displayed in the final form (that is, the character BC2 of the bancho in the final form will not be displayed), and the button for repeated hits will be displayed. Since all the blocks of the reception time meter RMT are also erased, the notice display using the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits is not performed.

If it is determined in advance that the mission will be achieved, even if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the number of times required to complete the mission during the operation validity period, the chief character BC1 will be used. The final form may be displayed. Even in this case, since all the blocks of the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT have been erased, the notice display using the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT will not be performed. Further, after the operation valid period starts, the number of operations of the effect button 136 becomes the number of times required for the mission to be achieved, but for example, since the predetermined period has not elapsed since the operation valid period started. If the conditions for accomplishing the mission are not satisfied, the mission may not be achieved unless the effect button 136 is continuously pressed until the predetermined period has elapsed. Further, in the button continuous pressing operation effect, the mission may be achieved by one operation of the effect button 136 after the operation valid period has started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (9), it is shown that the blocks are erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the number of remaining blocks is four. Has been done. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (9), the first stop is performed, and the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (10), it is shown that the blocks are erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the number of remaining blocks is one. Has been done. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (10), the second stop is performed, the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol (corresponding to the right symbol in the normal display state), and the reach state is formed. In the right symbol (corresponding to the medium symbol in the normal display state), the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (11), the decorative symbol is set to the normal display state, and the decorative symbol of "decoration 7" forming the reach state for each of the left symbol and the right symbol is stopped and displayed. , It is shown that the middle symbol is displayed in a variable display mode. Then, the character BC2, which is the chief of the final form, moves to a position where it overlaps on the front side of the middle symbol, the character "SP" is displayed, and it is notified that the character BC2 shifts to super reach.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 58 (12) to 58 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the super reach (subjugation reach), and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 58 (12) to 58 (18) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 50 (24) to (30), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 59 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a button continuous press operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 59 (1) to 59 (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 58 (1) to (4), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 59 (4), after the operation valid period in the button continuous striking operation effect is started, when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed as shown in FIGS. 59 (5) to (6), As the number of operations increases, the number of star symbols displayed on the Bancho character BC1 increases.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 59 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character BC2 of the bancho of the final form, and at the same time, " The words "Awakening" will be displayed to inform you that the mission has been completed. At this time, the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits is not erased, and the displayed blocks are displayed in a manner of changing to multiple colors (for example, 7 colors), suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. .. In this production example, as compared with the production example shown in FIG. 58, the continuous hitting of the effect button 136 is faster and the number of operations per hour is larger, so that the number of blocks of the continuous button reception time meter RMT remains large. The mission has been completed with (7 remaining). After that, the blocks are deleted one by one according to the time from the start of the operation validity period.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (8), it is shown that the mini character YM of the lord is displayed in the margin portion formed by erasing the block in the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits. There is. This lord's mini character YM appears when the time from the start of the operation validity period to the completion of the mission is early (when the mission is completed within the predetermined first mission achievement time). It can be said that this is an example of a notice display using the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT along with the change in the display mode of the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT. That is, it can be said that the mode of the notice using the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT differs depending on the time from the start of the operation valid period to the achievement of the mission. In this way, by displaying the notice using the margin portion formed by erasing the block in the button reception time meter RMT for continuous hitting, the effect of the effect may be improved and the interest may be improved. In addition, when the mission is completed, the mini character YM of this lord may be displayed without fail regardless of the time from the start of the operation validity period to the completion of the mission. Even if the time from the start of the operation validity period to the completion of the mission is early, it may not be displayed. In addition, when the mini character YM of this lord appears, the big hit may be confirmed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (9), it is shown that two more blocks are erased according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the number of remaining blocks is three. ing. In addition, in the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits, it is also shown that the mini character YM of the lord is moving to the left side as the margin portion where the block is erased expands. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (9), it is shown that the characters “large board” appear in association with the mini character YM of the lord. In this production example, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed by the appearance of the characters "large board behavior". Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (10), it is shown that the blocks are erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the number of remaining blocks is one. Has been done. At this time, the display of the characters "Large board behavior" that is attached to the mini character YM of the lord is completely displayed. In this production example, only the "large board" of the "large board behavior" may appear, and the characters "behavior" may not appear. In this case, the entire characters of the "large board behavior" may appear. It may be possible to make it more difficult for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed than when is displayed. By doing so, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the big hit is a highly reliable notice until the character YM of the lord is completely displayed. In addition, it may be displayed that characters different from "behavior" appear. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (10), the second stop is performed, the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol (corresponding to the right symbol in the normal display state), and the reach state is formed. In the right symbol (corresponding to the medium symbol in the normal display state), the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 59 (11) to 59 (18) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 59 (11) to 59 (18) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 58 (11) to (18), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 60 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a reserved consecutive villa notice effect executed during a jackpot game. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

In FIG. 60, a state of the effect movable body 224 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220. Is also illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 60 (1), in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed by the “special figure I” which is a lost symbol, and in the second special figure display device 214, the jackpot symbol “ It is stopped and displayed in "Special Figure a", and in this production example, it is shown that a big hit was made in Special Figure 2. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special diagram 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special diagram 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special diagram 1 fourth symbol t1 is lost due to "special symbol I". It is stopped and displayed by the symbol of "x" indicating that it has become, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is stopped and displayed by the symbol of "A" indicating that it was a big hit in "special symbol a". There is.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 60, since the big hit was made in the electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. In FIG. 60 (1), the four hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed, and all of the hold icons h21 to h24 of the four special figures 2 have default display modes (1). It is displayed in a round, unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 2 is a round hold icon. On the other hand, the number of holds of special figure 1 is 0, and no hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. In this production example, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed in the electric support state, but the hold icon may be displayed when the number of holds of the special figure 1 is 1 or more. good.

Further, in the effect movable body 224, both the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b are set to the initial positions, that is, they are not movable.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (2), it is shown that the big hit game is started and the big hit start effect is being performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol displayed by the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" displayed at the time of the jackpot is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. It is displayed in the corner, and in the center of the display screen, a character of Copanda with a fan is shown celebrating the big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (3), it is shown that the jackpot start effect is completed and the first round is started. In addition, in the production during the big hit game, the number of consecutive villas of the big hit, the number of balls obtained during the current big hit, and the number of balls obtained during the consecutive villa may be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (4), it is shown that the seventh round has started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (5), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "super hot when the arm comes out with the button" are displayed on the right side of the character of Copanda, and the effect movable body 224 is operated by operating the effect button 136. In the case, it is explained that it is notified that the reserved symbol variation display is likely to include a big hit symbol variation display (that is, there is a high possibility that a reserved consecutive villa will occur). It is done.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (6), the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button effect can be said to be an example of a look-ahead notice effect during a big hit game. At the timing shown in FIG. 60 (6), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (7), as shown in FIG. 60 (8), the forearm portion of the effect movable body 224. The 224b operates and moves to a position where it overlaps the front side of the right end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a plurality of star symbols in response to the operation of the effect movable body 224, and the effect display as if the forearm portion 224b affects the decorative symbol display device 208. Is being done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (9), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that it is confirmed that the reserved consecutive villa will occur. "Holding consecutive villas confirmed" is displayed. In this production example, when the effect movable body 224 operates, the hold consecutive villa is always generated, but even if the effect movable body 224 operates, the hold villa may not occur. good.

FIG. 61 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the reserved consecutive villa notice effect executed during the jackpot game. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 61 (1) to 61 (6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 60 (1) to (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 61 (7) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is started, the effect movable body 224 is used as shown in FIG. 61 (8). No operation is performed, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the character "chance" that gives an expectation as to whether or not a reserved consecutive villa will occur. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, in the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of panda mini-character PNDs composed of panda faces (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (8)) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. The number of panda mini-character PNDs displayed on the button reception time meter MT is a number corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge (time after the operation valid period is started). In this production example, the panda's mini-character PND is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, which functions as a notice display suggesting that the expectation that a reserved consecutive villa will occur is not so high. Even if the effect button 136 is operated, the panda mini-character PND may not be displayed on the button reception time meter MT. That is, when the panda mini-character PND is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, the hold-up villa is more likely to occur than when the panda mini-character PND is not displayed on the button reception time meter MT. It may be configured. In addition, a mini-character different from the panda's mini-character PND may be displayed, and the degree of expectation that a reserved consecutive villa may occur may differ depending on the displayed mini-character. In addition, a plurality of types of mini characters may be mixed and displayed. In this production example, regardless of the number of panda mini-character PNDs displayed, the expectation that a reserved villa will occur is the same, but depending on the number of panda mini-character PNDs displayed. The expectation that the reserved villa may occur may be different. For example, the larger the number of panda mini-character PNDs displayed, the higher the expectation that the reserved villa may occur.

Further, the type of the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT may be changed depending on the timing after the operation valid period starts. For example, the operation timing of the effect button 136 may be the operation valid period. If the timing is early after the start of, the mini-characters other than the panda's mini-character (for example, the mini-character of the bancho) may be easily displayed. Further, in this effect example, the character display of "chance" is displayed by operating the effect button 136, and then, the panda's mini character PND in the button reception time meter MT is displayed without operating the effect button 136. Although the display is performed, for example, the character display of "chance" and the display of the panda's mini character PND on the button reception time meter MT may be performed at the same time triggered by the operation of the effect button 136. That is, in this effect example, the target displayed by the operation of the effect button 136 is the display of "chance", and the display of the panda mini-character PND in the button reception time meter MT is displayed by the operation of the effect button 136. An example that is not a thing is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (9), the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of panda mini-character PNDs displayed decreases according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number is two at the timing shown in FIG. 61 (9).

FIG. 61 (10) shows how the eighth round has started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (10), it is shown that the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT has become zero. That is, it is shown that the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed since the operation valid period was started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays only one star figure, while the effect movable body 224 does not operate, and then is shown in FIG. 61 (12). As described above, the character "sorry" is displayed, and it is notified that the button operation effect fails and the possibility that the reserved villa will occur is low. In this production example, even if a reserved villa is scheduled to occur, the button operation effect may fail, and such a configuration may impair expectations for the reserved villa. May be reduced.

FIG. 62 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the reserved consecutive villa notice effect executed during the jackpot game. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 62 (1) to 62 (7) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 61 (1) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (7) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 62 (8), the effect is also produced in this effect example. Although the movable body 224 does not operate, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character "hot" that gives an expectation as to whether or not a reserved consecutive villa will occur. When the characters "hot" are displayed, the effect movable body 224 is more likely to operate than when the characters "chance" are displayed, that is, there is a high possibility that a reserved consecutive villa will occur. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, in this production example, the remaining display portion of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT has a plurality of Bancho mini-characters BCH consisting of Bancho's face and panda mini-character PNDs (decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 62 (8)). In the device 208, two mini-character BCHs of Bancho and three mini-character PNDs of pandas are arranged side by side. In this production example, a pending villa is more likely to occur when the Bancho's mini character BCH is displayed than when only the panda's mini character PND is displayed (a big hit in the reserved symbol variation display). The design is easy to confirm). In other words, when a reserved villa is scheduled to occur, the mini character BCH of the Bancho is likely to be displayed. The mini-character BCH of the bancho is arranged on the right side of the mini-character PND of the panda, and the mini-character BCH of the bancho is erased earlier than the mini-character PND of the panda as the remaining amount of the gauge decreases. Therefore, the player may be able to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the button reception time meter MT in order to confirm the mini character BCH of the chief.

Further, since the number of mini-characters displayed on the button reception time meter MT is the number corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge (time after the operation valid period is started), the operation valid period is started. If the operation timing of the effect button 136 is late and the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is less than the space for arranging the mini character BCH of the chief, only the mini character PND of the panda is displayed. The mini character BCH of the chief may not be displayed. Therefore, the player may be able to improve his / her motivation to press the effect button 136 quickly because he / she wants to confirm the mini character BCH of the chief. In this production example, the expectation that the effect movable body 224 operates is the same regardless of the number of the Bancho mini-characters BCH displayed, but it depends on the number of the Bancho mini-characters BCH displayed. The expected degree of operation of the effect movable body 224 may be different. For example, the larger the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of the Bancho, the easier the effect movable body 224 may operate. Further, the button image 136a displayed in FIG. 62 (6) may be displayed in the display mode of the big button, the vibration and the rotating display mode, and when such a display mode is displayed. May make it easier for the Bancho mini-character BCH to be displayed than when it is displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (9), the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, all the mini character BCH of the bancho is erased according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and only the mini character PND of the panda is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (9), two panda mini-character PNDs are displayed.

FIG. 62 (10) shows how the eighth round has started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 62 (10), the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed since the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT became 0 and the operation valid period was started. The situation is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (11), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 operates and moves to a position overlapping the front side of the right end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of star symbols are displayed in response to the operation of the effect movable body 224, and the effect as if the forearm portion 224b affects the decorative symbol display device 208. The display is being made. As described above, in this effect example, the effect movable body 224 does not operate immediately in response to the effect button 136 being pressed, and operates only when the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT becomes 0. An example of the production to be performed is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (12), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that it is confirmed that the reserved consecutive villa will occur. "Holding consecutive villas confirmed" is displayed.

FIG. 63 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (1), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed.

The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 63 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). Therefore, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 63 (1), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the three special figures 1 are displayed, and the hold icons h11 to h13 of the three special figures 1 are all default. It is displayed in a display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display positions of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, and are displayed as the variable icon h0. Is displayed as a hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT in this production example is the above-described mode shown in FIG. 47 (3), in which the chief icon and the panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT.

FIG. 63 (4) shows how the button reception time meter MT is shortened with the passage of time after the operation valid period is started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (5), the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 63 (6). At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode is such that the button reception time meter MT is gradually shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Change.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time from the start of the operation validity period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (7), the panda icon approaches the Bancho icon, and " By displaying the word "gabutsu", it is shown that the panda is biting the bancho. This can make the player expect something to happen, and as a result, give him a sense of anticipation for the jackpot.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (8), after the icon of the number length displayed at the left end of the button reception time meter MT changes to the panda icon, the pair of panda icons are separated from each other. , The character "icon change" is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, and it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged from the display SU2 in step 2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (9), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, and the notice of the symbol variation display is given. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged from the display SU2 in step 2 here as well. As described above, in this effect example, even if the step-up notice does not become the display SU3 of step 3, the change icon changes to the notice display mode by the notice effect using the button reception time meter MT. , It may be possible to maintain a sense of expectation for a big hit. In this effect, the displayability of the display SU3 in step 3 may differ depending on the characters displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT. For example, the icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter may be displayed. In the case of the bancho icon and the panda icon, the display SU3 of step 3 is difficult to be displayed, and the step-up notice is likely to be completed by the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2, and the button reception time meter When the icons displayed at both ends are icons of two lengths, the display SU3 in step 3 may be easily displayed.

After that, when the first stop and the second stop of the decorative symbol are performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed, the decorative symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 63 (10). The device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 63 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the above-mentioned subjugation reach has been developed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 63 (12), the button notice effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (13), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 63 (14).

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the middle. The "decoration 6" scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.
After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5", FIG. 63 (17). ), The decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed by the “special figure I” which is a lost symbol.

FIG. 64 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a button continuous press operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 64 (1) to (6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 63 (1) to (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 64 (5), the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 64 (6), FIG. 64 (7) shows. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, the step-up notice is continuously performed, but the display SU1 in step 1 does not change to the display SU2 in step 2, and the display SU1 in step 1 remains. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time from the start of the operation validity period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 64 (7), the panda icon approaches the Bancho icon, and the panda Tryes to bite the bancho, but the words "return" are displayed, showing that the panda is struck back by the bancho, as shown in FIG. 64 (8). In this production example, when the panda returns to the bancho and is struck down, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end than when the panda bites the bancho. In the production example, as will be described later, the reserved symbol variation display tends to be a big hit).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (9), the panda icon displayed at the right end of the button reception time meter MT changes to the Bancho icon, and then the pair of Bancho icons are separated from each other. , The character of "icon change" is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, and it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged from the display SU1 in step 1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (10), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the lord, and the hold notice is given. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged from the display SU1 in step 1 here as well. As described above, in this production example, even if the result of the step-up notice in the symbol variation display is such that the big hit cannot be expected, the pre-reading notice using the button reception time meter MT may be performed. By doing so, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation that the pending symbol variation display will be a big hit. Further, in this effect example, as a result of the advance notice effect by the button reception time meter MT in the same display mode, either the variable icon h0 or the hold icon h11 to h14 changes. It can be said that at least a part of the effects of the look-ahead notice is performed in the same manner, and thus the expectation can be maintained until the variable icon h0 or the hold icons h11 to h14 change. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (11), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (12), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 64 (13), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 64 (14). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed by the “special figure I” which is a lost symbol.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 65. .. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (1), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed.

The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 65 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). Therefore, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 65 (1), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are displayed, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both the default display modes. It is displayed in.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (3), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (4) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, the button image 136a is erased as shown in FIG. 65 (5). At the same time, the button reception time meter MT is enlarged and displayed, and the mini game is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (5) displays the characters “stock chance” and “press at the right time”, and the enlarged button reception time meter MT displays the operation validity period. Depending on the time since the start of, the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases. At this time, the decorative symbol has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, on the button reception time meter MT, three treasure chests (treasure chests TR1, TR2, TR3) are arranged side by side in the remaining display part of the gauge, and the right end of the gauge that is displayed decreasing with the passage of time. It is suggested that something will appear by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the player passes through the center of each treasure chest. That is, it is notified that the timing push mini-game is started. In this production example, the mini-game by the button reception time meter MT may not be performed, and the advance notice production using the button reception time meter MT described above may be performed. Further, the number of treasure chests to be displayed may differ depending on the remaining amount of the gauge displayed according to the time from the start of the operation valid period when the effect button 136 is operated. For example, the effect button. The earlier the operation timing of 136 is from the start of the operation validity period, the larger the remaining amount of the gauge. Therefore, the number of treasure chests may be increased accordingly, and the later the operation timing of the effect button 136 is, the more The number of treasure chests to be displayed may be reduced.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (6), the effect button 136 is pressed at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT becomes approximately the center of the treasure box TR1 arranged on the rightmost side of the three treasure boxes. When operated, as shown in FIG. 65 (7), the treasure chest TR1 may move upward, and the treasure chest TR1 may be opened and the Sabohani notice icon I71 with the word "change" added may appear. .. The notice icon I71 of Sabohani is one aspect of the look-ahead notice, and when the notice icon I71 of Sabohani is stocked, it is announced that the variable icon or the hold icon will change to the notice display mode. As described above, in this production example, the production button 136 is operated in a timely manner when the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is approximately the center of the treasure box arranged on the button reception time meter MT. Notice icons may be stocked. Here, the notice icon may be a notice item or a mini item. Even if the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT becomes substantially the center of the treasure box TR1, the notice icon may not appear. In addition, something other than the notice icon may appear. For example, a notice character may appear to give a notice of the symbol variation display or a look-ahead notice, or a mere effect display without a notice (for example, an explanation display, etc.). May be done. Further, even if the notice icon I71 of Sabohani is stocked, the display mode of the variable icon or the hold icon may not change.

As shown in FIG. 65 (7), when the Sabohani notice icon I71 appears from the treasure box TR1, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (8), the Sabohani notice icon that appears in the upper right corner of the display screen. I71 is displayed, indicating that the notice icon has been stocked.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (9), the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT became approximately the center of the treasure chest TR2 arranged on the right side of the remaining two treasure chests (treasure chests TR2 and TR3). When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing, as shown in FIG. 65 (10), the treasure chest TR2 moves upward, and the treasure chest TR2 is opened and the word "subjugation" is added to the notice icon I72 of the lord. May appear. This lord's notice icon I72 is an aspect of the look-ahead notice, and by stocking the lord's notice icon I72, a strong cut-in CI1a is set in the subjugation reach that is scheduled to be executed in the pending symbol variation display. It is announced that it will appear. That is, by stocking the notice icon I71 of the lord, a look-ahead notice that the subjugation reach will be performed in the reserved symbol change display and a look-ahead notice that the strong cut-in CI1a will appear are performed. It can be said. Even if the notice icon I72 of the lord is stocked, the strong cut-in CI1a may not appear, or the strong cut-in CI1a may always appear.

As shown in FIG. 65 (10), when the notice icon I72 of the lord appears from the treasure box TR, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (11), the notice icon of the lord that appears in the upper right corner of the display screen. I72 is displayed, indicating that the notice icon has been stocked.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (12), when the effect button 136 is operated at a timing significantly delayed from the timing at which the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT becomes approximately the center of the remaining one treasure box TR3. , As shown in FIG. 65 (13), the treasure chest TR3 moves upward but is not opened, and the word “failure” is displayed, indicating that the timing push has failed. Therefore, the contents of the treasure chest TR3 are not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 65 (14), the treasure chest TR3 is deleted as it is. If the timing push fails, the contents of the treasure box will be displayed, but if the contents of the treasure box is a notice icon, it may not be stocked. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is enabled for the auto button function, the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is an abbreviation for each treasure box even if the effect button 136 is not operated. Each treasure chest may be opened as if the effect button 136 was operated at the central timing, or the auto button function may be disabled in this timing-pressed mini-game.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (15), it is shown that the button reception time meter MT is erased and the mini game using the button reception time meter MT is completed. The notice icon I71 of Sabohani and the notice icon I72 of the lord are continuously displayed.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol> right symbol> middle symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (16) shakes with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2". Temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed by the “special figure I” which is a lost symbol. Further, in this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, the decorative symbol is not displayed in the default display mode, but is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button reception time meter MT It is shown that the notice display using is affecting the subsequent decorative pattern variation display.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65 (18), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. And it is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The notice icon I71 of Sabohani and the notice icon I72 of the lord are continuously displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (19) following FIG. 65 (18), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (20), the notice icon I71 of Sabohani moves to substantially the center of the display screen while being enlarged and displayed, and the notice icon I71 of Sabohani is digested. ..

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (21), the variable icon h0 of the default display mode displayed in the variable icon display area 280 is changed to the display mode of Sabohani, and the notice display by the variable icon h0 is performed. Is shown. When the notice icon I71 of Sabohani is digested, the display mode of the hold icon may change.

As shown in FIG. 66 (21), after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, the enlarged display of the Sabohani notice icon I71 is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 66 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (24), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (25), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "It's super hot" to notify that it is in the reach state, and the reliability of the jackpot in this reach is high. It is suggested that it is high. On the other hand, in the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (27), it is shown that the normal reach effect is being performed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (28), the notice icon I72 of the lord is enlarged and moved to the substantially center of the display screen, and the notice icon I72 of the lord is digested. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that it has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, a small decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed in which the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (30), the button notice effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 66 (31), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 66 (32). As shown in FIG. 66 (28), this strong cut-in image CI1a appears when the notice icon I72 of the lord is digested. If the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the button notice effect, the strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period. Even if this is not the case, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed after the valid period of the operation has elapsed. Further, in the above-mentioned mini-game, the notice icon I72 of the lord was scheduled to appear, but if the timing press of the effect button 136 fails and the notice icon I72 of the lord does not appear, the strong cut-in image CI1a The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed more easily than the weak cut-in image CI1b.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (34), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5", FIG. 66 (35). ), The decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special figure A has become a big hit is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed in the mode of the jackpot symbol of the special figure A.

In this production example, as a result of the mini-game, a notice icon indicating that the button operation effect for displaying the notice using the button reception time meter MT described above may be executed may be stocked. That is, a pre-reading notice of the notice display using the button reception time meter MT may be performed.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 79. In addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, FIGS. 68 to 79 show the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220. Although it is shown in the figure, the drawing of the normal drawing display device 210 and the general drawing holding lamp 216 is omitted. Also in FIGS. 68 to 79, the types of special figures to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are the same as the stop symbol modes shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b). Has been done. Further, in FIGS. 68 to 79, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, it goes without saying that the display mode of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 68 to 79 can be applied as it is or by appropriately changing the display mode of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 42 to 66. Nor.

First, with reference to FIG. 67, the types of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described. Here, FIG. 67 (a) is a diagram showing another example of the decorative symbol, and FIG. 67 (b) is a diagram for explaining a combination of symbols that is a chance of pre-reading notice.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the decorative symbols of the present embodiment include 10 types of decorative symbols "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" and two special "special 1" and "special 2". Decorative designs are also available. The decorative symbol of "special 1" may be referred to as a replay symbol, and for example, a predetermined display mode including this (for example, a mode in which "special 1" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, or "special 1" is displayed in all symbols. It is a decorative pattern in which a pseudo-continuous effect is performed when the mode (such as a stop display mode) is set. The decorative symbol of "Special 2" may be referred to as a chance button symbol, and is a display mode in which the button is simply represented, and the display mode is different from the button image 136a as described above displayed in the button operation effect. There is. The decorative symbol of "special 2" includes, for example, a predetermined display mode including this (for example, a mode in which "special 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, a mode in which "special 2" is stopped and displayed in all symbols, etc.). It is a decorative pattern in which a button operation effect is performed when the situation is met. It should be noted that "special 1" and "special 2" are not always included in the variable display of the decorative symbol, but appear as needed, but they are always included in the variable display of the decorative symbol. It may be included.

Further, "Special 1" and "Special 2" are not fixedly displayed by the combination of decorative symbols including them, and function as a notice display for notifying the content of the effect to be performed after that. In addition, it will be confirmed and displayed by the combination of decorative symbols including the decorative symbols of "Special 1" or "Special 2", and will function as a pre-reading notice that the production corresponding to "Special 1" or "Special 2" will be performed. It may be. Further, although one type of symbol corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect and one type of symbol corresponding to the button operation effect are prepared, there may be two or more types of each. Further, in the present embodiment, a "special 1" decorative symbol corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect and a "special 2" decorative symbol related to the button operation effect are prepared. In addition to these, for example, a variable icon is prepared. A special decorative symbol corresponding to an effect in which the display mode of the or hold icon changes to the display mode of the notice, a special decorative symbol that specifically suggests the content of the subsequent effect, or the like may be prepared. In this case, at least a part of the display mode of these special decorative symbols and the display mode of the image displayed when the corresponding effect is performed may be different or the same.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), in the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols consisting only of "decoration 7" and "decoration 3" is lost except for the combination constituting the reach and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols. It is configured so that the look-ahead notice can be displayed by confirming the combination of the decorative symbols (sometimes called "chance eyes"). Specifically, the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 7", the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7", and the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 3" By confirming the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 3" and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 3", there is a high possibility that the pending symbol variation display will be a big hit. It is notified that the variable display is included.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 68. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 6-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not shown, for example, a default background image is displayed.

The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In both the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2, the symbol of "x" corresponding to the result of the loss is displayed.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the lower left corner of the display screen.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 68 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. The hold icon of the special figure 1 represents the number of holds of the special figure 1 according to the displayed number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. The hold icons of the special figure 1 are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the left side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 68 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed, and both of these hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 have a default display mode (no round shape). It is displayed in a pattern and white display mode). On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 68 is the non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because there is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. .. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is hidden as shown in FIG. 68 (1). When the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is hidden.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in Special Figure 2 is also a round, unpatterned and white display mode, but the display position is different from that of the hold icon in Special Figure 1. Alternatively, the display mode (here, the shape) may be different. By doing so, it may be possible for the player to make a distinction at a glance.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of the variation start in the special symbol display device → the blinking start or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → the movement animation start of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. , This order may change.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. Then, it is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (3), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (4), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (5), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol of "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol of "decoration 3-special 2-decoration 4" is displayed. The combination causes a temporary stop display (temporary stop display). Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button operation effect requesting the operation of the effect button 136 is started. That is, in this effect example, when the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, it is notified that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is erased, and a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode in place of the decorative symbol of "Special 2", together with this button image 136a. The button reception time meter MT is also displayed. In addition, the characters "press the chance button" are also displayed above the button image 136a, facilitating the operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the middle symbol may remain erased or may be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the button image 136a may be displayed by a predetermined animation (for example, an animation in which the button moves up and down). As described above, the decorative design of "Special 2" is displayed in a simplified display mode of the button as described above, whereas the button image 136a is displayed in a display mode imitating the effect button 136. At the same time, it is accompanied by the display of the button reception time meter MT, and it can be said that these are displayed in different modes. The decorative symbol of "Special 2" is not animated at least when it is stopped and displayed, but it may be animated while it is stopped and displayed.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (7), as shown in FIG. 68 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 , Button reception time meter MT is erased, and a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to cover the front side of the middle symbol and the right symbol, and the display is performed so as to affect them.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (9), after the slip fluctuation display in which the middle symbol and the right symbol fluctuate at high speed is performed, as shown in FIG. 68 (10), the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed. "Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on each of the symbols, and a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed. It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed by the “special figure I” which is a lost symbol. As described above, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is an opportunity, and includes a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit in the pending symbol variation display. It functions as a look-ahead notice to notify that. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 68 (11), it is foretold that the hold of the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 68 (10), when temporarily stopped at the chance eye, the characters "Change" are displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance eye is displayed. Notifies that the pre-reading notice has been made by.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (12), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. It is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. That is, the symbol variation display, which is the target of the pre-reading notice, has started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (13) shows that the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (13), the characters "mini game" and "press at the right time" are displayed, and a band-shaped timing meter is displayed, which is substantially in the center of the timing meter. It is shown that the treasure chest TR is arranged in. At this time, the decorative symbol has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of this timing meter changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. In this mini-game, it is suggested that something appears by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the right end of the gauge, which is displayed to decrease with the passage of time, passes through the center of the treasure chest TR.

FIG. 68 (14) shows the state after the mini game is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (15), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter becomes substantially the center of the treasure box TR, the treasure box is operated as shown in FIG. 68 (16). The TR is enlarged and moved above the timing meter, and the replay icon RP appears from the treasure chest TR. The icon RP of this replay displays a display in which a question mark is added to the character "continue", and notifies that a pseudo-ream may be performed in the symbol variation display. That is, it can be said that the icon RP of the replay functions as a notice of the pseudo-continuous production in the symbol variation display. That is, in this production example, it is configured so that the pseudo-ream is more likely to be started when the replay icon RP appears than when it does not appear. Here, the replay icon RP does not appear, for example, the button icon may appear, and when the button icon appears, the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display. , It may be notified that the button operation effect may be performed.

Here, when the button icon appears, the decorative symbol of "Special 2" may be displayed and the button operation effect may be started more easily than when the button icon does not appear. In addition, the timing meter is still displayed, and the bancho icon is displayed on the left and right ends of the gauge. The Bancho icon displayed on the right side follows the decrease display of the gauge, and moves toward the Bancho icon displayed on the left side. When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is approximately in the center of the treasure box TR1, something other than the replay icon RP may appear. For example, the button icon may appear. By appearing, it may be foretold that a button operation effect may be performed in the symbol variation display. That is, it may be configured so that the button operation effect is more likely to be started when the button icon appears than when it does not appear. Further, even if the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is substantially at the center of the treasure box TR1, nothing may appear.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (17), the treasure chest TR is erased, the replay icon RP is displayed substantially in the center, and a fanning effect of whether or not pseudo-ream is performed is performed. This fanning effect is continued from the start of the operation valid period until the time corresponding to the operation valid period elapses. Until then, the timing meter will continue to display the gauge decrease.

After that, when the time corresponding to the operation validity period elapses from the start of the operation validity period and the remaining amount of the gauge in the timing meter becomes 0, the decorative symbol protection display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (18) is replayed. The display of the question mark on the icon RP has been changed to an exclamation mark, and the timing meter displays the characters "I'm still going on", informing me that a pseudo-ream will be performed. As described above, in this production example, the pseudo-ream effect is performed by displaying the icon related to the pseudo-ream effect (replay icon RP) before the decorative symbol of "Special 1" is stopped and displayed. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation for the icon at an early stage.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (19) following FIG. 68 (18), it is shown that the mini game is finished and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (20), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (21), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (22), after the decorative symbol of “special 1” appears in the middle symbol and scrolls downward, “special 1” is shown as shown in FIG. 69 (23). The decorative symbol of is stopped and displayed, and temporarily stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Special 1-Decoration 4". The decorative pattern of this "Special 1" is a pattern in which the characters "Replay" are displayed on a substantially elliptical figure with a moon pattern, and the figure is different from the replay icon RP that appears as a result of the mini game. They are common in that they are the same, but the displayed characters are different.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (23), the decorative symbol of "Special 1" which is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is enlarged and displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. The appearance of the decorative symbol of "Special 1" is an effect performed by the appearance of the replay icon RP as a result of the mini-games shown in FIGS. 68 (13) to (18). Can be done. If the above-mentioned mini-game fails, the pseudo-ream may not be performed, or even if the mini-game fails, the pseudo-ream may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (25), it is shown that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (26), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (27), the second stop is performed, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 69 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how it has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, a small decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed in which the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other. At this time, the display of "Change" notifying that the chance eye has appeared is deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (29), it is shown that the button notice effect is started. In this button notice effect, a big button image 136aL is displayed instead of the button image 136a in the default mode. The deca button image 136aL is an image imitating the effect button 136, but has a display mode larger than that of the button image 136a in the default mode. Further, the display mode of the deca button image 136aL is the display mode of the "special 2" decorative symbol shown in FIG. 68 (5), which was displayed in the previous symbol variation display (that is, displayed in a different decorative symbol variation display). Is also different. As described above, in this effect example, a plurality of types of button images are prepared as the button images displayed in the button operation effect, and the display pattern of the button image (decorative pattern of "Special 2") displayed as the decorative pattern. It can be said that it has more display patterns. In addition, the button image 136a in the default mode may be displayed instead of the deca button image 136aL. In this case, when the deca button image 136aL is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (30), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 69 (31).

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3", FIG. ), The decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special figure A has become a big hit is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed in the mode of the jackpot symbol of the special figure A. As shown in FIG. 69 (33), when the decorative symbol becomes the default display mode, the display of the character "Change" for notifying that the chance eye is displayed is resumed, but it is displayed. It does not have to be.

In this effect example, when the decorative symbol of the third stop is "Special 1" or "Special 2", the button operation effect or pseudo-ream is performed, but "Special 1" or "Special 2" When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop or the first stop, the button operation effect or the pseudo-ream may be performed. Further, when two of the three decorative symbols of "Special 1" or "Special 2" are included, the button operation effect or the pseudo-ream may be performed.

Further, in this effect example, the description has been made in comparison with the button image displayed in the button operation effect in which the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is displayed and executed in one decorative symbol variation display, but one decoration. The present invention also includes a comparison between the "special 2" decorative symbol displayed in the symbol variation display and the button image displayed in the button operation effect unrelated to the display of the "special 2" decorative symbol. It can be applied as a concept.

FIG. 70 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 70, the button operation effect is performed when three "special 2" decorative symbols are aligned, but the button operation effect is not started because the three "special 2" decorative symbols are not aligned. It shows how the production is being performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 70 (1) to 70 (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 68 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 70 (2), after the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (3) is first stopped, and the left symbol is "special 2". Is stopped and displayed. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (4), the second stop is performed, and "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Here, when "Special 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, "Special 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol more easily than when "Special 2" is not stopped and displayed on the left symbol. May be good. This makes it difficult for the player to give up early on the start of the button operation effect, and the expectation that the button operation effect will be performed can be expected until the timing when the third stop of the decorative symbol is performed. You may be able to do it. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (5), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol of "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol of "special 2-decoration 4-special 2" is displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in combination, and it is notified that three "special 2" are not aligned and the button operation effect is not started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the left symbol and the right symbol are variablely displayed at high speed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 3" is displayed on the right symbol as shown in FIG. 70 (6). Is stopped and displayed, and a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation with the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 3", and then, as shown in FIG. 70 (7), "Decoration 4" -Decoration 4-Decoration 3 "is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decoration patterns. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed by the “special figure I” which is a lost symbol.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 71. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific production example shown in FIG. 72. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed when three decorative symbols of "Special 1" are aligned, and a button operation effect is performed when three decorative symbols of "Special 2" are aligned. It is shown how it will be done. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 70 (1) to (4), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 71 (4), after the second stop is performed and "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (5) makes a third stop. Therefore, the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop is displayed in a mode in which three "Special 2" are aligned.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (6), the decorative symbol starts the variable display again, and the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (6), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV showing how the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating is displayed, and the button reception time meter MT is displayed together with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV. Is also displayed. At this time, the effect button 136 also starts the vibration and the rotation operation of the internal mechanism. When the effect button 136 vibrates and the internal mechanism is rotated, the effect button 136 is more likely to be a big hit than when the effect button 136 is not vibrated and the internal mechanism is rotated (the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed). ) Is configured. It can be said that this button operation effect is a notice effect in which a chance eye appears in the symbol change display, and is a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the reserved symbol change display. It can be said that. Instead of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, the button image 136a in the default display mode described above may be displayed. In this case, for example, the display color of the button image 136a may be changed, the button image 136a may be blinked, or the button image 136a may be displayed by a special animation. Further, instead of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, it may be displayed in another display mode (for example, a display mode of a big button). At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (6), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

As described above, in this effect example, in the button operation effect, it is possible to display the button image corresponding to the state of the effect button 136 (at least one of vibration and rotation), and the display mode of "Special 2" Can be said to have different displays. In this effect example, the effect button 136 may only vibrate and display a button image showing how the effect button 136 vibrates in response to the vibration, or only the rotation operation of the internal mechanism of the effect button 136. Is performed, and a button image showing the state of rotation corresponding to this may be displayed. Further, the button image 136a in the default display mode may be displayed in a normal state in which the effect button 136 does not perform any vibration or rotation operation. Further, a button image other than the button image corresponding to the state of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, when the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating, the button image 136a in the default display mode may be displayed. May be displayed. On the contrary, the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is displayed, but the effect button 136 may take a default state in which neither vibration nor rotation operation is performed.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (7), the decorative symbol is displayed as the default as shown in FIG. 71 (8). In addition to the variable display being performed as a mode, a plurality of star symbols are displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner, and the decorative symbol being displayed in the variable display is displayed in such a way that the decorative symbol is affected. Will be

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (9), after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 7-Decoration 7", FIG. 71 (10) It is confirmed and displayed as shown in. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed by the “special figure I” which is a lost symbol. As described above, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is an opportunity, and includes a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit in the pending symbol variation display. It functions as a look-ahead notice to notify that. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 71 (10), it is foretold that the hold of the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 71 (9), when temporarily stopped at the chance eye, the characters "Change" are displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance eye is displayed. Notifies that the pre-reading notice has been made by.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (11), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. It is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. That is, the symbol variation display, which is the target of the pre-reading notice, has started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (12) shows that the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (12), the characters "mini game" and "press at the right time" are displayed, and a band-shaped timing meter is displayed, which is substantially in the center of the timing meter. It is shown that the treasure chest TR is arranged in. At this time, the decorative symbol has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of this timing meter changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. In this mini-game, it is suggested that something appears by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the right end of the gauge, which is displayed to decrease with the passage of time, passes through the center of the treasure chest TR.

FIG. 71 (13) shows the state after the mini game is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (14), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter becomes substantially the center of the treasure box TR, the treasure box is operated as shown in FIG. 71 (15). Switches to the display showing how the BF of the face of the Bancho appears. Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (16), after the character "continue" is displayed, the character "continue" is added to the variable icon h0 as shown in FIG. 71 (17), and the symbol variable display is displayed. It will be announced in advance that a pseudo-ream will be performed. The variable icon h0 to which the character "sequel" is added can also be said to be an example of the display mode of the design for the effect for notifying that the pseudo-ream is performed. In this way, a plurality of types of notification modes for performing pseudo-ream may be prepared.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (18), it is shown that the mini-game is finished and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (19) following FIG. 71 (18), the first stop is performed, and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (20), the second stop is performed, and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (21), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and once three "special 1" are arranged. Stop display (temporary stop display) is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (22), the character of Copanda appears, the character "one more time" is displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In this way, the decorative symbol for notifying that the pseudo-ream is performed has one type of display mode (decorative symbol of "special 1"), but the design for the effect for notifying the pseudo-ream is performed. There are multiple types of display modes, and there are many variations.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (23), it is shown that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (24), it is shown that the selection effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (24), two boxes BXL and BXR are arranged side by side, and a button reception time meter MT is shown below the two boxes BXL and BXR. Here, the box arranged on the left side may be referred to as a left box BXL, and the box arranged on the right side may be referred to as a right box BXR. Further, above the two boxes BXL and BXR, an operation key image 137p schematically showing the operation key unit 137 is displayed in a mode in which the left and right button portions are highlighted, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is performed. The characters "Choose" are displayed to encourage the user. Further, the left box BXL of the two boxes BXL and BXL is displayed in a mode surrounded by the cursor CSL. That is, in this effect example, the cursor CSL is moved by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d of the operation key unit 137 from the start of the operation valid period to the end of the operation valid period. It is shown that when either one of the boxes BXL and BXL is selected, the effect corresponding to the selected box is performed. The operation key image 137p is an image that is displayed only when the selection effect is performed, and is not prepared as a decorative pattern for notifying that the selection effect is performed. That is, there is no special symbol for notifying that the operation effect will be performed. An image imitating the operation key unit 137 may be separately prepared as a special symbol for notifying that the operation effect will be performed.

After that, after the operation acceptance period of the operation key unit 137 is started, when the right key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (25), as shown in FIG. 72 (26). The cursor CSL that surrounds the left box BXL moves to surround the right box BXL.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (27), when the operation acceptance period elapses and the remaining amount of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT is exhausted, it is not selected in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (28). The left box BXL is erased, only the selected right box BXR is displayed, the right box BXR is opened, and the replay icon RP appears in the vicinity with a question mark. That is, the icon RP of this replay is different from the display mode of the decorative symbol of "Special 1" in that a question mark is added. As a result, it is notified that the second pseudo-ream may be performed in the symbol variation display. In this production example, since the question mark is added to the icon RP of the replay, it is not guaranteed that the pseudo-ream will always be performed. Therefore, the pseudo-ream is not performed, and it may end in a mess. In addition, there may be a case where the question mark is not attached and the pseudo-ream is displayed in a manner that guarantees that the pseudo-ream is always performed, and when the replay icon RP appears from the box, the pseudo-ream is always performed. You may do so.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (29), the character "continuation" is added to the variable icon h0, and the variable icon display area 280 corresponds to the display of the question mark added to the replay icon RP. A question mark is also displayed above, which also informs that there is a possibility that a pseudo-ream will be performed in the symbol variation display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (30), it is shown that the selection effect is completed and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (31), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (32), the second stop is performed, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (33), the enlarged decorative symbol of "Special 1" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. At this time, the decorative symbol of "Special 1" may be stopped and displayed without the reach effect being performed, or the decorative symbol of "Special 1" may be stopped and displayed after the reach effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (34), the characters "one more time" are displayed below the decorative symbol of "special 1", and the question mark displayed above the variable icon display area 280 is displayed. It will be changed to an exclamation mark, and it will be notified that a pseudo-ream will be performed. As described above, in this production example, the decorative symbol of "Special 1" may be stopped and displayed after the reach state is reached, and the pseudo-ream may be started. If the pseudo-ream is not performed, the decorative symbol of "Special 1" may be scrolled out downward without stopping, and then the reach effect may be performed, or the reach effect may not be performed. Any decorative symbol other than the special symbol may be stopped and displayed on the symbol so that a combination of lost decorative symbols or a combination of jackpot decorative symbols can be derived.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (35), it is shown that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x3" indicating the number of times that the third variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (36), the symbols of a plurality of stars are displayed so as to overlap each other on the front side of the variable icon h0, and the display is performed as if affecting the variable icon h0. The situation is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (37) following FIG. 72 (36), the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani. That is, the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed to the display mode of the notice. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 (36) to 73 (37), when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may change instead of the variable icon h0.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (38), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (39), the second stop is performed, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "super hot", notifies that the reach state has been reached, and suggests that the reliability of the jackpot in this reach is high. On the other hand, in the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 73 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, a small decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed in which the main character, the lord, and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (41), the button notice effect has been started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 73 (41), instead of the button image 136a, a protruding button image 136aS schematically showing an aspect in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward is displayed. It is suggested that the jackpot is more likely to be obtained (that is, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed) than when the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed. In the protruding button image 136aS, the character of the grandfather is added to the front side, and the character "press" is displayed below the character, prompting the operation of the effect button 136. In this production example, since the effect button 136 is not equipped with the function of projecting upward, the state of the effect button 136 does not correspond to the display mode of the projecting button image 136aS. The 136 may be equipped with a function capable of projecting upward. In this case, the effect button 136 may or may not project upward according to the display of the projecting button image 136aS. .. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (42), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 73 (43).

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (44), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (45), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3", FIG. 73 (46). ), The decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special figure A has become a big hit is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed in the mode of the jackpot symbol of the special figure A.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 42 (4) to 42 (6), when the effect button 136 is operated, the button reception time is not given when the button reception time meter MT is not used. Although the meter MT is erased, for example, the button reception time meter MT may continue to be displayed even if the effect button 136 is operated, and the effect display may be performed using the remaining display portion of the gauge. This effect display may be a notice display, or may be an effect display that is not a notice display.

FIG. 74 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 74 (1) to 74 (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 68 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 74 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (3), "decoration 3" is displayed on the left symbol from above the display screen. It is shown scrolling in and moving downwards. At this time, "decoration 3" is moving at a low speed. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner at high speed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (4), the “decoration 3” of the left symbol moves at an ultra-low speed immediately before the stop display is performed, and at this time, it moves to the front side of the “decoration 3” of the left symbol. A plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap each other, and an effect display is performed as if affecting the "decoration 3" of the left symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (5), after the "decoration 3" of the left symbol is changed to the decorative symbol of "special 2", the display is stopped. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the decorative symbol is changed to the "special 2" symbol that simply represents the effect button 136 immediately before the display is stopped. Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (6), it is shown that "decoration 1" is scrolled in from the upper part of the display screen and is moving downward in the right symbol. .. At this time, "decoration 1" is moving at a low speed. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner at high speed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (7), the “decoration 1” of the right symbol moves at an ultra-low speed immediately before the stop display is performed, and at this time, it moves to the front side of the “decoration 1” of the right symbol. A plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap each other, and an effect display is performed as if affecting the "decoration 1" of the right symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (8), after the "decoration 1" of the right symbol is changed to the decorative symbol of "special 2", the display is stopped. Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (9), it is shown that "decoration 6" scrolls in from the upper part of the display screen and moves downward in the middle symbol. At this time, "decoration 6" is moving at a low speed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (10), the “decoration 6” of the middle symbol moves at an ultra-low speed immediately before the stop display is performed, and at this time, the “decoration 6” of the middle symbol moves to the front side of the “decoration 6”. A plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap each other, and an effect display is performed as if affecting the "decoration 6" of the middle symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (11), after the "decoration 6" of the middle symbol is changed to the decorative symbol of "special 2", it is stopped and displayed, and temporarily stopped in a mode in which three "special 2" are aligned. It is displayed (temporary stop display).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (12), the decorative symbol starts the variable display again, and the button operation effect is started. Since the effect shown in FIG. 74 (12) is the same as that shown in FIG. 71 (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, it is shown that the decorative pattern is changed to the "special 2" decorative pattern that simply imitates the effect button 136 and is stopped and displayed immediately before the decorative pattern is stopped. For example, the decorative pattern is stopped. Immediately before the operation, the "special 2" is interrupted in the order of the decorative symbols, and the "special 2" may be stopped and displayed. For example, in the case where the decorative symbol is varied and displayed in the order of "decoration 1"> "decoration 2"> ...> "decoration 10", "decoration 1" and "decoration 1" and "decoration 1" are displayed immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbol of "special 2" may be inserted between "decoration 2", and the "special 2" may be stopped and displayed.

FIG. 75 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 75 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 68 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (3) is first stopped, and the left symbol is "decoration 3". Is stopped and displayed. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (4), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (5), it is shown that the decorative symbol of "Special 2" appears in the middle symbol and scrolls downward. The decorative pattern of "Special 2" is an oversized display mode in which the size is larger than the normal display mode. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (6), the left symbol and the right symbol are erased, and only the decorative symbol of "special 2", which is the middle symbol, is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped). It is shown. As described above, in this effect example, the stop display mode may be displayed by one decorative symbol instead of the stop display mode by the combination of the three decorative symbols.

Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (7), a simplified button image 136aX imitating the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT. That is, in the simplified button image 136aX, the display portion of the button is the same as the decorative symbol of "special 2", but at least the decorative symbol of "special 2" is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT. It can be said that the display mode is different from that of. The display mode of the simplified button image 136aX may be a form in which the character display of "Change" is omitted from the display mode of the decorative symbol of "Special 2". In this case, the shape of the button is common, but the character display is performed. It can be said that the display mode of the simplified button image 136aX and the display mode of the decorative symbol of "Special 2" are different depending on the presence or absence. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (7), the decorative symbol is not displayed, but for example, it may be displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen.

On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (5), the decorative symbol of "Special 2" appears in the middle symbol and is shown to be scrolling downward, but the button operation effect is performed. If not, for example, the decorative symbol of "Special 2" scrolls out downward without displaying the stop, and then, as shown in FIG. 75 (6'), "Decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. After the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, the display may be confirmed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 6-Decoration 1".

FIG. 76 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the pseudo-continuous production performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 76 (1) to (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 68 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 76 (2), after the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (3) is first stopped, and the left symbol is "special 1". Is stopped and displayed. Characters for notifying the number of pseudo-reams are added to the decorative symbol of "special 1" in this production example. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (3), the decorative symbol of "special 1" is added. Is added with the character "x1" informing that the first pseudo-ream may be performed. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (4), the second stop is performed, and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. The character "x1" is added to the "special 1" in the right symbol to notify that the first pseudo-ream may be performed. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (5), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and three "special 1" are provisionally arranged. Stop is displayed. Here, too, the character "x1" is added to notify that the first pseudo-ream may be performed for "special 1" in the middle symbol.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (6), the decorative symbol in which three "special 1" are aligned is erased, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of "special 1", which is an oversized display mode, is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. As a result, it is notified that the first pseudo-ream will be performed. As described above, in this effect example, the stop display mode may be displayed by one decorative symbol instead of the stop display mode by the combination of the three decorative symbols.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (7), it is shown that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (8), the first stop is performed, and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. The decorative symbol of "Special 1" shown in FIG. 76 (8) also has a character for notifying the number of pseudo-reams, and "x2" for notifying that a second pseudo-ream may be performed. Character is added. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (9), the second stop is performed, and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. The character "x2" is added to the "special 1" in the right symbol to notify that the second pseudo-ream may be performed. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (10), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and three "special 1" are provisionally arranged. Stop is displayed. Here, too, the character "x2" is added to notify that the second pseudo-ream may be performed for "special 1" in the middle symbol.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (11), the decorative symbol in which three "special 1" are aligned is erased, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of "special 1", which is an oversized display mode, is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. As a result, it is notified that the second pseudo-ream will be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (12), it is shown that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x3" indicating the number of times that the third variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

As described above, in this production example, the number of pseudo-reams is displayed on the decorative symbol of "Special 1", but the display mode of the decorative symbol of "Special 1" itself is changed according to the number of pseudo-reams. You may do so. As a result, the player may be able to easily recognize the number of pseudo-reams.

FIG. 77 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 77 (1) to 77 (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 68 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 77 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (3) is first stopped, and the left symbol is "special 2". Is stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern of "Special 2" in this production example is displayed in a mode in which the mini character BCH of the Bancho is added. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (4), the second stop is performed, and "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. The decorative symbol of "Special 2" in the right symbol is displayed in a mode in which a panda mini-character PND is added, unlike the decorative symbol of "Special 2" which is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In this production example, even if the same "special 2" decorative symbol is used, the added symbol is different, so that it may be possible to prevent misidentification that reach has occurred. In the middle design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (5), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. The decorative symbol of "Special 2" in the middle symbol is displayed in a manner in which the mini-character BCH of the Bancho is added, which is the same as the decorative symbol of "Special 2" which is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. As a result, the temporary stop is displayed in a mode in which three "special 2" are aligned, but in this production example, the type of the mini character added to the "special 2" that is stopped and displayed in the right symbol is different. .. That is, in this production example, even when three "special 2" are arranged, the display mode of at least one of the "special 2" is different from the display mode of the other "special 2", so that the design is different. It may be possible to prevent the misidentification that a big hit has occurred. In this production example, the display mode of "Special 2" stopped and displayed on the right symbol and the display mode of "Special 2" stopped and displayed on the middle symbol are the same, but three "Special 2" All of the display modes may be different. In addition, the types of mini characters added to each of the three "special 2" may be the same (for example, the mini character BCH of the chief is added to all of the three "special 2". In this case, the reliability of the jackpot is higher (the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed) than when the types of mini characters added to each of the three "special 2" are not the same. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (6), it is shown that the button operation effect is started by stopping and displaying all three decorative symbols of "Special 2". In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (6), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV showing how the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating is displayed, and the button reception time meter MT is displayed together with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV. Is also displayed. Further, the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is provided with a mini character BCH having a number length, and in this respect, it can be said that the display mode is the same as that of the above-mentioned "special 2" decorative symbol. At this time, the effect button 136 is not vibrated or rotated and is in a normal state, but the vibration and the rotation operation of the internal mechanism may be started. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The mini-character added to the vibration / rotation button image 136aV may be a mini-character other than the longest mini-character BCH (for example, a panda mini-character PND or the like). At this time, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the additionally displayed mini-character. For example, the mini-character BCH of the chief is displayed more than when the panda's mini-character PND is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot may be higher in the case. Further, as in the production example shown in FIG. 74 (12), the mini character may not be additionally displayed, and when the mini character is additionally displayed, it is a big hit as compared with the case where the mini character is not additionally displayed. The reliability of the jackpot symbol may be high (the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed). Further, instead of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, the button image 136a in the default display mode described above may be displayed. At this time, the longest mini-character BCH or the panda mini-character PND may be added to the button image 136a. At the timing shown in FIG. 77 (6), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (7), as shown in FIG. 77 (8), the character "x1" is displayed. The decorative symbols of "Special 1" to which are added are stopped and displayed in a manner in which three are aligned, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. The above-mentioned mini-character may be added to the decorative symbol of "special 1" and displayed. In this case, at least one mini-character of the three "special 1" decorative symbols is the other "special 1". It may be different from the mini character of the decorative pattern of "" to prevent misidentification of the jackpot and the reach state.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (9), the decorative symbol in which three "special 1" are aligned is erased, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of "special 1", which is an oversized display mode, is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. As a result, it is notified that the first pseudo-ream will be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (10), it is shown that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

FIG. 78 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 78 (1) to 78 (7) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 68 (1) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (7) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, as shown in FIG. 78 (8), the button is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are erased, and a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to cover the second hold icon h12, and the display is performed so as to affect them. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, it is shown that "decoration 4" scrolls in from the upper part of the display screen and moves toward the stop position of the middle symbol due to low-speed fluctuation.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (9), it is shown that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button notice display mode. That is, the display mode of this button notice is the display mode of the look-ahead notice. The display mode of this button notice is different from the display mode of the decorative symbol of "Special 2" in that the characters "Change" are not displayed and an animation prompting the button operation is displayed. .. The medium design continues to fluctuate at low speed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (10), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then the decoration is performed as shown in FIG. 78 (11). In the symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed by the “special figure I” which is a lost symbol. The second hold icon h12, which has changed to a button image, has not changed yet.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (12), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. Then, it is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The second hold icon h12, which was the display mode of the button notice, continues to be the display mode of the button notice even after moving to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and being displayed as the first hold icon h11. Will be done.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (13), as shown in FIG. 78 (14), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the button notice to the display of Sabohani. It is changed to the aspect. This suggests that the first reserved symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit.

FIG. 79 (A) is a diagram showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 79 (B) is a diagram showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of a continuous production.

FIGS. 79 (A1) to 79 (A2) show how the decorative design of "Special 2" suggests the content of the button operation effect. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, respectively. In this effect example, the display mode of "Special 2" which is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is different from the display mode of "Special 2" which is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and imitates the effect button 136. It is said that this is the mode. Then, in the "special 2" of this middle symbol, the character "hold change" is displayed on the upper surface thereof, and when the effect button 136 is operated in the button operation effect, the hold icon (or variable icon) is displayed. It has been notified in advance that the display mode may change. That is, the decorative symbol of the "special 2" of the middle symbol can be said to be a dedicated display mode for notifying that the change notice of the hold icon is performed by holding the button.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (A2), it is shown that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, when the button operation effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the decorative symbol in which three "special 2" are aligned, and instead displays the button image 136a represented by an oversized size. It is shown how it is done. The characters "hold change" are displayed on the upper surface of the button image 136a, and it is notified that the change notice of the hold icon due to the button hold is being performed. This button image 136a is different from the dedicated display mode "Special 2" in that the display mode is the same, but the animation for promoting the button operation is performed. That is, it can be said that a part of the display mode is common to the button image 136a shown in FIG. 79 (A2) and the decorative symbol of the dedicated display mode "special 2" shown in FIG. 79 (A1). On the other hand, the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. The hold icon h11 in the button hold display mode has the character "push" displayed on its upper surface, prompting the operation of the effect button 136. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated, the button image 136a is erased, and the hold icon h11 in the button hold display mode changes to another display mode (for example, the display mode of Sabohani, the default display mode, etc.). ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (B), a notice icon of a pseudo-ream acquired and stocked in a mini game or the like is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. The notice icon of this pseudo-ren is a notice icon displayed in a manner in which the characters "pseudo-ren" are added to the character of the lord, and may be displayed in both the pre-reading notice and the notice in the symbol variation display. However, the display mode may be different between the pre-reading notice and the symbol variation display. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (B), it is shown that three decorative symbols of "Special 1" are aligned to generate a pseudo-ream. In FIG. 79 (B), the pseudo-ream notice icon displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen is not related to the display in which the three decorative symbols of "Special 1" are aligned. Both may be related. Here, when the display mode of the pseudo-ream notice icon and the display mode of the decorative symbol of "Special 1" are different, and the player can clearly distinguish between the notice icon and the decorative symbol. There is.

In the embodiments described so far, the configuration may include a main display device having a large screen size and one or a plurality of sub display devices having a screen size smaller than that of the main display device. In this case, the configuration may be provided. For example, a symbol displayed on a sub display device whose screen size is smaller than that of the main display device (decorative symbol, button image, various icons, characters, etc.) displayed on the main display device having a large screen size. The one may be displayed larger.

<< Embodiment 3 >>
Next, the game console according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 108. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

In FIG. 80, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (2), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer advance notice effect is started. "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect will be started when 10 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. In this production example, the countdown is started when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is started, but after the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. 80 (3)). You may want to start the countdown (after that).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 80 (3) to 80 (7), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 80 (8), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display with "attention" to call attention to the notice. Character is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 80 (11), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and then shown in FIG. 80 (12). In this way, a cut-in display consisting of the character of the lord and the character display of "continue" is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a variation display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times in one variation display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the more likely it is to become a big hit. In addition, there may be a case where the pseudo-ream symbol is framed out downward without stopping and displaying, and when the pseudo-ream symbol is framed out downward, the pseudo-ream is not started and the decorative symbol of the loss is lost as it is. The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be reached and the reach effect may be started. As described above, in this production example, the timer is announced to announce that the pseudo-ream will be started after the countdown is completed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the variable display of the first decorative symbol. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (14), the display of "x2" is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

FIG. 80 (3a) shows another production example following FIG. 80 (2). In this production example, "20:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIGS. 80 (10a) to (11a), the first pseudo-ream is performed as described above. After that, as shown in FIG. 12 (14a), the second variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Note that FIGS. 80 (10a), FIG. (11a) and FIG. (14a) are effects corresponding to FIGS. 80 (10), (11) and (14), respectively.

Then, after "decoration 7" and "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, 20 seconds have passed since the timer advance notice effect was started, as shown in FIG. 80 (15a), and the timer When the timer display of the notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 80 (16a), in the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the character "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, the design on the right has changed from "decoration 6" to "decoration 7". It should be noted that the design on the right may remain as "decoration 6" so as not to change. Then, as shown in FIGS. 80 (16a) to 80 (17a), the second pseudo-ream is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo-ream. As described above, the timer advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 80 (3a) to 80 (17a) foretell that the second pseudo-ream will be started. In addition, foretelling the start of the second pseudo-ream means that the start of the first pseudo-ream is also foretold. It can be said that the start of the first and second pseudo-reams has been announced. In the timer notice in this production example, the start of the second pseudo-ream is announced, but other types of notice and the occurrence of the effect may be announced.

FIG. 80 (7b) shows another production example following FIG. 80 (6). It should be noted that FIGS. 80 (7b) to (11b) correspond to FIGS. 80 (7) to (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (7b), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (8b-1), the face image of the character of the lord with the balloon line "Ikuze" added instead of the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1. YMF is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (8b-2), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. In this way, a display other than the timer notice display TM1 may be used to attract attention to the notice. The means for attracting attention to the notice after the countdown in the timer notice effect is completed is not limited to the display, but may be performed by voice or a lamp, or by combining two or more of the display, voice, and lamp. You may do so.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (9b), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying that the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (10b), the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously performed, and the face image YMF of the character of the lord is erased, as shown in FIG. 80 (11b). After the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 80 (12), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed.

In this effect example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the corresponding effect (pseudo-ream) is started, but the timer display becomes "00:00". However, there may be cases where the corresponding effect is not performed.

Further, another notice may be given while the timer display is being counted down on the timer notice display TM1. In this case, this notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect, or may be a notice unrelated to the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

FIG. 81 (a1) shows another production example following FIG. 80 (7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 81 (a1), the timer notice display TM1 instead of the timer display calls attention to the notice. Is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (a2), the navigation character YM is displayed to face the variable icon h0 and point the sword. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (a3), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigator character YM toward the variable icon h0 is displayed, and then shown in FIG. 81 (a5). As described above, the notice display in which the character "heat" is added to the variable icon h0 is performed. The look-ahead notice display may be performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the variable icon h0. After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, a reach state by the “decoration 7” occurs as shown in FIG. 81 (a7). As described above, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect in this effect example is an effect of notifying that the advance notice will be performed.

FIG. 81 (b1) shows a state after the timer advance notice effect has started. In the timer advance notice effect in this effect example, the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is started at "30:00", that is, a certain advance notice effect 30 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Suggests that is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 81 (b1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "29:69". In this way, a plurality of types of countdown times for the timer advance notice effect may be prepared. For example, the longer the countdown time, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or the countdown time may be set. The shorter the value, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or the reliability of the jackpot may be the same regardless of the countdown time.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (b2), about 8 seconds have passed since the countdown started, and in the first decorative symbol, the reach effect by "decoration 7" has started. It is shown.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 81 (b3), the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is left and displayed in the first UI unit 280. Along with frame-out at the bottom of the screen, the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out.

After that, FIG. 81 (b4) shows how it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (b4), the image of the swordsman of the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 81 (b5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character and the enemy role are displayed. Animation display of the duel scene with the swordsman begins. During this period, the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (b5), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 81 (b6), the timer notice display TM1 gives a notice instead of the timer display. The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (b7), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the characters "heat" are added to the variable icon h0. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is continued even after the timer advance notice effect shifts to the reach state.

FIG. 81 (b4'-2) shows another production example following FIG. 81 (b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (b4'-2), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "02:37" after the animation display of the duel scene is started. There is. That is, the state when about 27 seconds have passed since the countdown by the timer advance notice effect was started is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (b4'-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to show that the button effect is started. It should be noted that this button effect is different from the effect announced by the timer advance notice effect. After that, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. 81 (b5'), the timer display is changed to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as shown in FIG. 81 (b6'). The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (b7'), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the characters "heat" are added to the variable icon h0. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display (or effect) performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is being performed during the execution of the button effect.

In the above-mentioned production example, as an effect performed as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect, an example in which a change display of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b7 ″), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may change to give a notice.

FIG. 81 (b6 ″ ″) shows another production example following FIG. 81 (b5). When the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 81 (b6 ""), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character display is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (b6 ″ ″ -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to perform a notice display, and the animation display of the duel scene is a big hit. It is shown that the cut-in display is switched to indicate that the degree is extremely high. In this cut-in display, the princess character is displayed large on the right side of the display screen, and the characters "Suddenly hot" suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high are displayed. In addition, this cut-in display may be a notice display in which the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that two or more notices are displayed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect. The display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and only the cut-in display may be performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 81 (c1) to 81 (c2) show how the lever effect starts as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00" during the execution of the animation display of the duel scene, and the timer display is changed to the timer display to call attention to the notice. It is shown that the "attention" character of is displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 in this production example, a production lever 136V is provided in addition to the production button 136 as an operation means for the production.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (c2), a lever image 136V imitating the effect lever 136V and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, indicating that the lever effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (c3), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the lever effect starts as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect, but the above-mentioned button effect may be performed instead of the lever effect.

There may be a plurality of types of button effects depending on the degree of expectation for the jackpot (for example, the button image 136a in the default mode, and the color is different from the default mode (for example, red or gold)). , Button image 136a with character notation (for example, "super heat", "expected large", etc.) and characters added to the default mode, button image 136a with a size different from the default mode (for example, big button effect and mini button) (Production), the number of button images 136a displayed is larger than the default mode (for example, when three button images 136a are displayed, the same number of operations as the number of button images 136a (for example, three times) is performed). The operation may be performed a number of times different from the number of the button images 136a (for example, once or twice, four times, etc.), and the response according to the operation of the effect button 136 may be performed. As the display, a number corresponding to the number of button images 136a may be displayed, and a number different from the number of button images 136a may be displayed.)).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 81 (d1) to 81 (d4) show how the effect movable body operates as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 81 (d1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the reach is achieved by "decoration 7" in the first decorative symbol, and the reach effect is performed. In the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left and the frame is out downward, and the hold icon displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out downward. Further, a timer notice effect is also performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 81 (d1), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00". After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (d2), on the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the character "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (d3), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (d4), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this production example, as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice production, it is shown that the first large board behavior character Ga to the fourth large board behavior character Gd as the production movable body operate. The object 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H may operate, and two or more of the 1st large board behavior accessory Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory Gd, the family crest accessory 224E, and the Senryobako accessory 224H operate. You may.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 82 (1), the timer advance notice effect described above has been started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 82 (1), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (2), it is shown that the timer addition effect is performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer advance notice effect is extended. It should be noted that, for example, a button effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a chance-up notice, a look-ahead notice, or the like may be given between the start of the timer advance notice effect and the start of the timer addition effect. ..

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 82 (3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed, and the time to be added is notified.
Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (4), the time is added by the display of the count-up animation in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 fluctuates at high speed. It is not necessary to display the count-up animation. Further, instead of displaying the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 82 (4a), the effect images may be overlapped in a manner in which the display state of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is difficult to see. After displaying the effect image shown in FIG. 82 (4a), the count-up animation shown in FIG. 82 (4) may be displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (5), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. That is, it can be said that the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of adding the timer. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (6), when the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased and a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after the timer addition effect is completed) elapses, the first pseudo continuous effect is performed. Is started, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (7), and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed.

In this production example, when the timer addition effect is performed and the time is added to the timer display, it is easier to make a big hit than when the time is not added, but the reliability of the big hit is increased. There may be no change, or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 82 (1b) to 82 (6b) show a state in which the timer addition effect is performed by the conversation notice instead of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (1b), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (1b), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 82 (1b), the timer advance notice effect described above has been started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 82 (1b), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69". Further, in FIG. 82 (1b), the conversation notice has started, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord, in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord, is displayed. The timing at which the timer notice effect is started and the timing at which the conversation notice is started may be the same, the conversation notice may be started after the timer notice effect is started, or the conversation notice may be started. The timer notice effect may be started after the start. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (2b), the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed, and the character of the grandfather moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather with the character display "It is an addition of 10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed. As a result, it is notified that a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM. The timer display countdown in the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather also partially overlaps the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather.

Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (4b), the time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above.

After that, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 82 (6b), the count-up animation display ends and the timer display on the timer notice display TM changes. It is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display. In this production example, the count-up animation display ends after the conversation notice ends. For example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (4b'-1) to FIG. 82 (4b'-2). The conversation notice may be continuously performed until the count-up animation display is completed. Further, the timing at which the conversation notice ends and the timing at which the count-up animation display ends may be the same.

The production example shown in FIGS. 82 (1c) to 82 (6c) shows another example of the timer addition effect by the conversation notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (1c), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (1c), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 82 (1c), the timer advance notice effect described above has been started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 82 (1c), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69". Further, in FIG. 82 (1c), the conversation notice has started, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord, in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord, is displayed. The conversation image CI1 of the lord is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (2c-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. The conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the above-mentioned operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the character of. At the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2c-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. In addition, even during the execution of the conversation notice, the countdown by the timer notice effect is continuously performed.

After that, the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2c-2). FIG. 82 (2c-3) shows that about 1.5 seconds have passed since the operation valid period was started, and the length of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT corresponds to the elapsed time. It has decreased so much. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the operation of the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 82 (2c-4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears, and the player is notified to that effect. NS. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (3c), the display of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is changed to the character display of "10 seconds is added" indicating the time to be added from the operation promotion notification image, and the timer notice display TM is displayed. It is notified that a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display. If the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, the time may not be added in the timer display. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the gauge on the remaining time display meter MT may be temporarily erased, and then the character display may be changed to "Add 10 seconds." The remaining time display meter MT may be changed to the character display of "Add 10 seconds" without displaying that the gauge disappears. Further, on condition that the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the characters "10 seconds are added" may be displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, 10 seconds may be added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. That is, a display may be performed in which 10 seconds are added to the remaining time at the time when the effect button 136 is pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (4c), the time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may end after the conversation notice ends, the conversation notice may continue until the count-up animation display ends, or the conversation notice may end. The timing at which the count-up animation display ends may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display ends.

After that, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 82 (6c), the count-up animation display ends and the timer display on the timer notice display TM changes. It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. At the timing shown in FIG. 82 (6c), it is shown that the timer display counts down to "09:85" after 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2c-2) to (2c-4), the countdown in the timer advance notice production is continuously displayed even during the operation valid period. After the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 82 (2c-3'), the countdown update display in the timer advance notice effect is not performed during the operation valid period. (Leave the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as "06: 00"), time the timer internally, and at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 82 (2c-4'), inside. The timing result (for example, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2c-4'), the remaining 2.00 seconds) may be reflected in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 to restart the countdown update display.

Further, for example, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 82 (2c-3 ″), the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is updated during the operation valid period. Without displaying (keeping the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as "06: 00"), the time is measured internally, and as shown in FIG. 82 (2c-4 ″), the operation valid period has elapsed. However, it does not reflect the internal timekeeping result, and as shown in FIG. 82 (3c ″), the display of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 indicates the time to be added from the operation promotion notification image. At the timing changed to the character display, the internal timekeeping result (for example, 1.23 seconds remaining at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (3c ″)) is reflected in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown update display is displayed. May be restarted.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

83 (1d) to FIG. (2d) show another production example of FIGS. 82 (1b) to (2b). In FIG. 83 (1d), the character display displayed in the conversation image CI1 of the lord is "attention to the timer notice". As a result, it may be possible to pay attention to the effect (notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 being "00:00". That is, it can be said that the advance notice is given by the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord in FIG. 83 (1d).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (2d), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. In 2b), the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather described above is displayed. In this way, after paying attention to the timer advance notice effect, it may be notified that the timer display changes.

FIG. 83 (1e) shows another production example of FIG. 83 (1d). In FIG. 83 (1e), instead of the conversation image CI1 of the lord, the timer display is set to "00" by performing the scroll display SC1 that scrolls from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the timer notice display TM1. You may want to pay attention to the effect that is performed as a result of ": 00". That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 83 (1e), the characters "attention to timer notice" are scrolled in a loop from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

The production example shown in FIGS. 83 (1f) to 83 (6f) is another example of the timer addition effect, and shows how the added time is counted down by a display different from the timer notice display TM1. Shown. FIG. 83 (1f) is an production example following FIG. 82 (3), in which the additional timer display TM2 is displayed below the timer notice display TM1 on the display screen after the addition time is notified by the balloon of the navigation character YM. It is shown that the frame is in from the right end. In this addition timer display TM2, "10:00" indicating the time to be added is displayed. Here, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is performed while the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted. The additional timer display TM2 overlaps with the balloon of the navigation character YM, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM.

FIG. 83 (2f) shows how the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. Here, after the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be deleted, or after the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted, the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 may be deleted. Animation may be completed, or the timing at which the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. In FIG. 83 (2f), the additional timer display TM2 is arranged below the timer notice display TM1, but the timer advance display TM1 and the additional timer display TM2 may be arranged so as to overlap each other, for example. , As shown in FIG. 83 (2f ′), the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the timer advance notice display TM1, or as shown in FIG. 83 (2f ″), the timer advance notice display TM1 may be overlapped. The additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 83 (2f) to 83 (4f), the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (5f), the countdown of the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is framed out to the right end of the display screen. .. Here, after the timer display countdown on the additional timer display TM2 is started, the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 may be started, or the timing at which the timer display countdown on the additional timer display TM2 is started. , The timing at which the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts may be the same. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 83 (5f), the timer notice display TM1 is framed out when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, but the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (5f'), the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed with the character "attention" to attract attention to the notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (6f), a pseudo-ream symbol may appear in the middle symbol and the pseudo-ream may be performed in response to the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. This is suggested, and the additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. The pseudo-continuous symbol may not appear when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may appear when the countdown of the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 is completed. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the added time is not added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, but is displayed on the additional timer display TM2 separate from the timer notice display TM1 to perform the countdown. ing. The notification of the time to be added may be the notification of the total value of a plurality of timer notice displays. For example, the value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and the remaining timer display TM2 is displayed. A value with 7 seconds added may be displayed. The additional timer display TM2 here may be a timer notice newly displayed with the addition of the timer, or may be a timer notice originally displayed before the addition of the timer.

FIGS. 83 (3fa) to 83 (8fa) are still another example of the timer addition effect, in which the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display countdown on the addition timer display TM2 are performed at the same time. It shows the situation. FIG. 83 (3fa) is an production example following FIG. 83 (2f). After the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 counts down together with the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. It is shown that the timer is starting. That is, in this production example, the time to be added is notified as 10 seconds, but the addition of 5 seconds is substantially performed. It should be noted that the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 may be the time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 to the additional time of 10 seconds so that the addition of 10 seconds is substantially performed. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 83 (3fa), "15:00" may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

After that, the countdown is continued as shown in FIGS. 83 (3f) to 83 (6f), and in FIG. 83 (7fa), the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-ream is performed. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (8fa), it is shown that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted and the first pseudo-ream is performed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed below the second decorative symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (8fa), the countdown of the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 is completed, and instead of the timer display, the character "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is displayed is displayed. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (9fa), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-ream symbol on the middle symbol, and notifies that the second pseudo-ream is started. .. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 83 (9fa'), the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to give a notice. Further, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed after the pine pattern CC is stopped and displayed. In this way, as the effect performed as a result of the countdown by the timer advance notice effect, it may be suggested that the advance notice effect or the big hit is performed in addition to the pseudo-ren. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC overlap with the additional timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is increased as one mode of the change of the display mode of the timer display. The timer display may be split.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 2, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed, and in the second hold number display. , "2" indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (2), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed overlapping the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a look-ahead notice, and is a notice that time will be added in the timer notice effect. It should be noted that the timer advance notice effect may be announced. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed may be the same, or the clock notice icon MI1 may be displayed after the left symbol has stopped. The left symbol may be stopped after the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed. The display timing of the stocked notice icon is not limited to the case where the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed along with the decorative design, and various types such as temporary stop of the notice icon symbol, navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. It may be performed at any timing, such as a notice or hold on the symbol variation display due to the effect, or a look-ahead notice due to various effects such as the navigation character YM.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (3), the first UI unit 280 shows that the table on which the navigation character YM stands rises and the notice icon display area 285 is formed. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and the areas in which the notice icons are displayed are arranged side by side in the row direction. The number of areas configured in the notice icon display area 285 can be arbitrarily set.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (4), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is moved to the notice icon display area 285 and is shown to be stocked. In the first decorative symbol, it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Here, the timing at which the right symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 starts moving may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol has stopped. , The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (5), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is reduced and displayed, stored in the leftmost area of the notice icon display area 285, and the state in which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked is shown. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (5), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are a combination of lost decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown that the confirmation is displayed with. The timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stored in the notice icon display area 285 and the timing at which the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed may be the same, and the notice icon MI1 of the clock is set in the notice icon display area 285. After being stored, the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed, or after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be stored in the notice icon display area 285.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (6), it is shown that one hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is performed. Further, the timer notice effect has also started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (6), the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69", and the countdown is performed. It should be noted that there may be an effect display (for example, a navigation character YM) that overlaps with the timer advance display only during execution of a certain effect (for example, a stock effect of a notice icon). On the contrary, there may be an effect display that overlaps the timer notice only during the execution of a certain effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (7), an effect is displayed around the notice icon MI1 of the clock stored in the notice icon display area 285, foretelling that the notice icon MI1 of the clock will be used. .. In addition, "07:31" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (8), the notice icon MI1 of the clock pops out from the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed at substantially the center of the display screen. Although the effect is still displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it may be deleted at the timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock jumps out of the notice icon display area 285.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (9), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased, and the display of the count-up animation is started. The timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is erased and the timing at which the count-up animation display is started may be the same, or the count-up animation is displayed after the clock notice icon MI1 is erased. It may be started, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be erased after the display of the count-up animation is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (10), the notice icon display area 285 is framed out downward.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 85 (A1) to 85 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A2), it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. Further, the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 has been completed, and the timer display is "00:00".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A3), a balloon displaying the characters “additional” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. Even if the character "addition" is displayed, the timer display time may not be added, or other effects may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (A3a-1), after displaying the character "attention" to encourage attention to the notice instead of the timer display, as shown in FIG. 85 (A3a-2). The balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added may be displayed on the balloon to notify the time to be added. In this effect example, the effect to be displayed as "attention" is not a notice display but an additional time of 10 seconds. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (A3b-1), instead of the timer display, the character "still" indicating that the timer notice effect is continued is displayed, and then the display of the timer notice display TM1 is added. It is also possible to switch to the display of "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added and notify the time to be added. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 85 (A3b-1), after displaying the character "still" on the timer notice display TM1, a balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and "+10" indicating the time to be added to the balloon is displayed. You may want to display "seconds". Further, after the display shown in FIG. 85 (A3), the display as shown in FIG. 85 (A3b-2) may be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (A4), a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to "10:00", and the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is restarted. .. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A4), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol in response to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 being performed to "00:00". It is shown that it is. The timing at which the timer display is updated and the timing at which the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed may be the same, or the pseudo-continuous symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display is updated. The timer display may be updated after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 85 (B1) to 85 (B5) show an effect example in which the timer is shortened in the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, "06:99" is displayed and a countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (B1), a balloon displaying the characters “subtraction” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time is subtracted from the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time for which the timer advance notice effect is performed is shortened by a predetermined time.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (B2), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display shows "05:89". In addition, the balloon display of the navigation character YM is changed to the character display of "subtraction" and is set to "-3 seconds" indicating the shortened time. That is, it may be recognized that the timer advance notice effect is shortened by 3 seconds, and the period until the countdown is completed is shorter than the initially displayed time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (B3), the time is shortened by displaying the shortened animation in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 fluctuates at high speed (timer shortening effect). It is not necessary to display the shortened animation. Further, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to see.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (B4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "02:00", and it is shown that the time in the timer display is shortened (subtracted) by 3 seconds. ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of shortening the timer. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer shortening effect is being performed.

After that, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 85 (B5), the character "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display to call attention to the notice, and then the middle A notice is displayed by stopping and displaying the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol on the symbol. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 85 (B5'), the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-ream symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-ream is started. The timing at which the character "attention" on the timer notice display TM1 starts to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, or the character "attention" may be displayed. The pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed after the display starts, or the character "attention" may be displayed after the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed. May start displaying. Note that the appearance rate of the content of the effect performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change or changes in the timer advance notice effect. For example, the timer may change during the execution of the timer advance notice effect. If there is no change in the display, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and the pseudo-ream notification is likely to be performed. However, if the timer display changes during the execution of the timer advance notice effect, the above-mentioned pine symbol CC, etc. It may be easy to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. Further, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-ream may be notified earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 85 (C1) to 85 (C2) show another effect example in which the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes in the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (C1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, "06:99" is displayed and a countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (C1), a balloon displaying the characters "timer notice level UP" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the reliability of the jackpot for the timer notice display TM1 is increased. It is suggested that there is a possibility of improvement.

Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (C2), the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 changes from white to red, for example, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot of the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display, it is notified that a notice with extremely high reliability may be given as a notice to be executed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 85 (D1) to 85 (D5) show an effect example in which the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted and restarted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (D1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (D1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, the timer advance notice effect is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (D1), and "06:99" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (D1), a balloon in which the characters “stop” are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted. The timing at which the balloon with the character "stop" starts to be displayed and the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted may be the same, or the balloon with the character "stop" starts to be displayed. Later, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or the balloon with the characters "stop" may be started to be displayed after the countdown of the timer display is interrupted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (D2), the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is shown that the pseudo-ream is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 85 (D2), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 remains "06:99".

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (D3), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol again, and shows that the second decorative symbol variable display is performed by the pseudo-ream. Has been done. In addition, below the second decorative symbol, "x2" indicating that the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (D3), a balloon in which the characters "restart" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the timer display countdown is restarted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (D4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is restarted, and then, as shown in FIG. 85 (D5), the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while a predetermined effect such as pseudo-ream is being performed, and the countdown can be restarted after the effect is completed. Has been done.

As an example of the change in the display mode of the timer notice display TM1, the number of timer notice display TM1 may change (increase or decrease) as compared with that before the change. For example, if one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change and it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, the timer notice display TM1 may increase to 2 or more, and conversely, the timer. When three notice display TM1s are displayed and it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced to 2 or less. Here, when the number of timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed separately from the time notified by the originally displayed timer notice display TM1. The displayed timer notice display TM1 may be increased as it is (for example, if there is one timer timer notice display TM1 that notifies 10 seconds, and the two timer notice display TM1 are increased, 10 There are two timer notice display TM1s that notify the seconds). Further, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 is reduced, the total value of the times notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed may be displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced as it is. (For example, assuming that there are two timer notice display TM1s that notify 10 seconds, if the number is reduced to one, the timer notice display TM1 that notifies 10 seconds becomes one). Further, when there are a plurality of timer notice display TM1s that have changed due to an increase or decrease, the countdown of the timer notice display TM1 may be started at the same timing or at different timings.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise. In the production example shown in FIG. 86, in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest accessory 224E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 (A1) to 86 (A6) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 86 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:89” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (A1), a balloon in which the characters "+10 seconds" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S, and the timer is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. The time to be added is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and the upper right corner thereof overlaps with the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (A3), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts the effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding the time.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (A4), the sub-display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (A5), in the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. It is shown. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (A6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased in the sub display device 208S. In this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 86 (B1) to 86 (B7) shows another example of the timer addition effect using the sub-display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 86 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:54” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, in the sub-display device 208S shown in FIG. 86 (B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icon is switched to the display of the characters "+10 seconds", and the timer is added to the timer display in the notice display TM1. The time to be done is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps with the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the count-up animation display is started on the timer notice display TM1. The time is added to the production. It should be noted that at least a part of the timer advance notice display TM1 overlaps with the sub display device 208S, and it is said that it is more difficult to see than in the case where it is not overlapped. Further, the timing at which the sub display device 208S is located on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display starts, and the sub display device 208S may display the decorative symbol. The count-up animation display may start after being located on the front side of the substantially center of the device 208, or the count-up may be started before the sub-display device 208S is located on the front side of the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation display may start.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 86 (B4) to 86 (B5), the sub-display device 208S performs a countdown display of the additional time. More specifically, the addition time displayed on the sub display device 208S is reduced by 1 second, while the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added by 1 second. .. In this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted while the countdown display of the additional time is being performed, but the countdown may be continued without being interrupted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S becomes "0 seconds", the timer display time on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reached. It will be updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the sub display device 208S, and it is difficult to specify the timer display time on the timer notice display TM1, but the timer display time is set to be identifiable. May be good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (B6), the sub-display device 208S switches from the display of the additional time to the display of "Restart" indicating that the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is restarted. The sub-display device 208S starts descending toward the initial position.

FIG. 86 (B7) shows a state in which the sub-display device 208S is lowered and returned to the initial position. Further, in the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is restarted, and the timer display is "14:23" at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (B7). After that, the display of "Restart" displayed on the sub-display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 86 (B1). Here, the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes and the timing at which the sub-display device 208S starts descending may be the same, or after the timer display countdown resumes, the sub-display device 208S starts descending. Alternatively, the timer display countdown may be restarted after the sub-display device 208S starts descending. Further, the timing at which the display of "Restart" is started on the sub-display device 208S may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is restarted, or after the display of "Restart" is started on the sub-display device 208S. Then, the countdown of the timer display may be restarted, or the display of "Restart" may be started on the sub-display device 208S after the countdown of the timer display is restarted. Further, the timing at which the sub-display device 208S returns to the initial position and the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes may be the same, and after the sub-display device 208S returns to the initial position, the timer display countdown resumes. Alternatively, the sub-display device 208S may return to the initial position after the timer display countdown is resumed.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 86 (C1) to 86 (C6) shows another example of the timer addition effect using the sub-display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 86 (C1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:89” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (C1), a balloon in which the characters "+10 seconds" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S, and the timer is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. The time to be added is notified. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (C1), the timer notice display TM1 has started to display a suction animation for sucking the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S, and sucks from the timer notice display TM1. An effect image showing how it is doing is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (C2), the sub-display device 208S moves upward, and a part of the display area of the sub-display device 208S overlaps with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. , The display mode of the character "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM extends toward the timer notice display TM1 and is displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Navi character YM has a surprised expression on the appearance.

FIG. 86 (C3) shows how the sucking animation is still displayed. Specifically, the display of "+10 seconds" sucked by the timer notice display TM1 by the sucking animation further moves toward the timer notice display TM1, and the display of this "+10 seconds" continues to be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Is displayed across the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, on the timer advance notice display TM1, the display of the above-mentioned count-up animation has started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "+10 seconds" absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is shown that the timer is heading toward the timer notice display TM1 while shrinking. When the sucking animation is displayed, the navigation character YM performs a surprising animation (animation accompanying the sucking animation) by seeing the sucking animation, but it is not necessary to perform the animation in particular. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (C5), when the display of "+10 seconds" is completely sucked by the timer notice display TM1, the sucking animation display is completed, and then, as shown in FIG. 86 (C6), the timer. In the notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed. When a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer advance notice effect may be performed by only one decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 87 (A1) to 87 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the production example shown in FIGS. 87 (A1) to 87 (A4), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) will be used for explanation. However, in order to facilitate the explanation, the family crest accessory 224E, No. A part of 1 large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and Senryobako accessory 224H will be described without illustration.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:99” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (A2), the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb and the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (A3), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts the effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding the time.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In this production example, the timer display is displayed by operating the 2nd large board behavioral character 224Gb and the 4th large board behavioral character 224Gd out of the 1st large board behavioral character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral character 224Gd. Although it is notified that the second is added, the addition time may be different depending on the number of operating accessories among the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, for example. When all of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are activated, 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. Further, in this production example, it is notified that the timer display is added with 10 seconds by operating the second large board behavioral accessory 224Gb and the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd only once, but the operation is performed. The time to be added may be different depending on the number of times. For example, when the 2nd large board behavior accessory 224Gb and the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated 3 times, the timer display is added by 30 seconds. You may.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 87 (B1) to 87 (B4) show an example of a timer addition effect using the family crest accessory 224E. In the production example shown in FIGS. 87 (B1) to 87 (B4), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) will be used for explanation. The illustrations of the 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “06:99” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (B2), the family crest accessory 224E operates, rises to the front side slightly below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, and moves up and down at that position. Move in the direction. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of times and displayed around the overlapping family crest accessory 224E. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest accessory 224E, whereby the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It is notified that 10 seconds will be added to the timer display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (B3), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts the effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding the time.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In this production example, it is notified that the family crest accessory 224E operates only once to add 10 seconds to the timer display, but the addition time may differ depending on the number of operations. Often, for example, when the family crest accessory 224E is operated three times, 30 seconds may be added to the timer display.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 87 (C1) to 87 (C6) show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 87 (C1) to 87 (C6), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 87 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (C1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is in the hold display area in the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and in the second hold number display arranged in the upper right corner of the display area, "1" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. Further, a first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed on the first UI unit 280.

Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer advance notice effect is performed, and a timer display countdown is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 87 (C1), "05:00" is displayed as the timer display. In this production example, when the timer display becomes "05:00", the countdown is interrupted and "05:00" is displayed. The display is maintained. The countdown may be continued without interrupting the countdown.

Further, the character "additional 10 seconds" is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the time to be added to the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is notified.
After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 87 (C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest positions. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (C4), the display of "15:00" indicating the time in which 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed in the second position. It is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (C5), the display of "15:00" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the timer display is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. 2 The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timing of starting the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same as the timing of starting the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decoration After the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving, the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. NS. It should be noted that the timer display countdown in a state where the display of "15:00" is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N (for example, the state shown in FIG. 87 (C4)). May be restarted. A case where the timer display is displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than a case where the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device. The susceptibility to a big hit may be the same, or it may be configured so as not to be a big hit.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 88 (A1) to 88 (A4) shows another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 88 (A1) to 88 (A4), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 88 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer advance notice effect has been started, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this production example, two timer notice effects are performed. In this production example, the timer advance notice effect performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M is set as the first timer advance notice effect, and the timer advance notice effect performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N is used as the second timer advance notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 88 (A1), "05:89" is displayed as the timer display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and "15:89" is displayed as the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Has been done.

After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this production example, even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, the timer display countdown is continuously performed, but may be interrupted. Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest positions, as shown in FIG. 88 (A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device The time indicated by the timer display displayed on each of the 208Ns is added up, and the display of "20:00" indicating the result is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. NS. At this time, the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, but it does not have to be interrupted. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L also displays a timer of "20:00" at a position corresponding to the display of "20:00" displayed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap each other, making it difficult to see. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 88 (A3) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions. Here, the timer display of "20:00" displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. According to the movement of 208N, each scroll is displayed while maintaining the displayed coordinates. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of "20:00" to the right in response to the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scrolls the display to the right in response to the movement to the initial position. Scroll the display of "20:00" to the left. In the process of moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of "20:00" is the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decoration. When "20:00" displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, FIG. 88 (A3) shows. As shown, the display of "20:00" will be displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (A4), the timer display of "20:00" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. The countdown may be started while the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 88 (A3)). Here, the likelihood of a big hit may differ depending on the decorative symbol display device on which the timer display is displayed (in this production example, the case where the timer display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first. It is more likely to be a big hit than the two decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed separately, but the big hits may be the same or less likely to be big hits).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 88 (B1) to 88 (B3) show an example of a timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, in the production example shown in FIGS. 88 (B1) to (B3), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14A is applied, but in this production example, instead of the family crest accessory 224E, FIG. The POV display 224I described above is provided with reference to. In addition, in the production example shown in FIGS. 88 (B1) to 88 (B3), in order to facilitate the explanation, about a part of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H. The description will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:71” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 88 (B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotation speed and is rotating at a constant speed. Then, the characters "+10" are displayed by the simple display by the lighting control of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, and the time to be added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 88 (B1), due to the rotation of the LED array of the POV display 224I, all of the first decorative symbol and the variable icon h0, the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are removed. It overlaps the rotation area and is difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (B2), the character "+10" displayed on the POV display 224I moves in the lower right direction, and the display of "+10" previously displayed only on the POV display 224I is displayed. Will also be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the character "+10" is displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the character "+10" may be a decorated display mode. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "+10" are displayed so as to match the display of the characters "+10" on the POV display 224I. As a result, it may be possible to display a sense of unity between the display of "+10" on the POV display 224I and the display of the characters "+10" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this production example, the font of the numbers displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the font of the numbers displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be the same.

Then, after the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I decreases, the display stops in the initial posture as shown in FIG. 88 (B3). At this time, the display of the character "+10" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to see than the state in which the LED array is rotating. In this production example, after that, 10 seconds are added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 88 (C1) to 88 (C5) show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices (decorative symbol display device 208 and POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the production example shown in FIGS. 88 (C1) to 88 (C5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 88 (B1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:87” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 88 (C1), the POV display 224I is raised from the initial position to a position on the front side at the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture, and is not rotating. It should be noted that all of the variable icon h0, the first decorative symbol, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 overlap with the POV display 224I, and it is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate, reaches a constant rotation speed, and is set to a constant speed rotation, as shown in FIG. 88 (C2), the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is "05:17", and the countdown is continuing. Further, at this time, it is shown that the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of times and displayed around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest accessory 224E, whereby the timer display is displayed for 10 seconds. It is notified that the addition will be performed.

After that, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 88 (C3), an effect that the timer display bursts is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 88 (C4), the timer display after being added is "15:00". Is displayed. In this production example, when "15:00" is displayed, the countdown is interrupted, but it may be continued.

After that, the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I is started to decrease, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed again on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (C5), the vehicle stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer notice display TM1 is "15:00", and then the countdown is restarted. The countdown may be restarted while the timer display is displayed as it is on the POV display 224I. Here, the case where the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the timer display is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is easy to be a big hit. May be the same, or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

In the timer advance notice effect described so far, when the timer is added, shortened, interrupted, etc. in the timer display, the countdown from the beginning to the end of the countdown after the change is internally performed. The total time may be counted down. Also, internally, the time until the change may be counted down before the change, and the time until the change may be counted down after the change (for example, if the change occurs 10 seconds after the start of the countdown). If you count down 10 seconds and display "Attention" 5 seconds after the change, count down another 5 seconds, etc.). Moreover, the display of the countdown and the time for internally counting down may match.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 89, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in this effect example, the effect lever 136V described above is further provided.

FIG. 89 (1) shows another production example following FIG. 17 (25). FIG. 89 (1) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (1), the swordsman of the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance-up meter CMT is, for example, a meter that shows the progress of the reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current progress of the reach effect is outlined according to the position. Is informed. Here, the progress speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the production, but it may be constant. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 89 (2), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a specific notice may occur. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of how the super reach has been developed as shown in FIG. 89 (1) is started. The display may be started at the same timing, the display may be started when the reach state is reached, the display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative symbol may be changed. The display may be started when the display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (3), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the starting point SP.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (4), at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of Boy's character BOY. It can be said that this Boy's character BOY functions as a chance-up character.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (5), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a notice is given by displaying the character of chance up. I am informing you that. The timing at which the boy character BOY starts to be displayed and the timing at which the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts to be displayed may be the same, or the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed after the boy character BOY starts displaying. It may be displayed, or the character BOY of Boy may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. The Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the announcement by displaying the Boy character BOY is given, but it may not stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (6), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed. Further, in this production example, when the Sabohani character SBH approaches the checkpoint, the chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed. In this case, the entire chance-up meter CMT may be enlarged or displayed, or only the relevant checkpoint portion may be enlarged. This is also applicable in the following description.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (7), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible.

After that, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (8), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (9). It is displayed and the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (10), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. Here, the Sabohani character SBH is stopped at the second checkpoint CP2 until the player operates the button or the operation valid period elapses, but the character SBH may not be stopped.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 89 (11), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (12), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 89 (13), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed, and a notice effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. .. In this production example, the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is surrounded by a golden frame, and is a cut-in image of a special display mode showing a state of riding a large motorcycle while wearing sunglasses and smoking a cigar. It informs that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically high. Instead of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord shown in FIG. 89 (13), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord (see FIG. 17 (32)) having a lower reliability than the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed. You may. The cut-in image CI1 of this lord shown in FIG. 89 (13) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the effect button 136 may be operated. It may be displayed whenever it is operated within the period. Further, the cut-in image CI1 of this lord shown in FIG. 89 (13) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, or the effect button may be displayed. It may be always displayed when the operation valid period elapses without operating 136, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (14), a balloon with the characters “Chance up gold cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and the cut-in is surrounded by a golden frame. Notifies that a notice has been given by displaying an image. The timing at which the cut-in image CI3 of the lord starts to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the character SBH of the lord starts to be displayed, or the character of the sabohani after the cut-in image CI3 of the lord starts to be displayed. The balloon of SBH may be displayed, or the cut-in image CI3 of the lord may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. The Sabohani character SBH stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, but it may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 and the timing at which the button effect is started may be the same, and the Sabohani character SBH becomes the second checkpoint CP2. The button effect may be started after the button effect is reached, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint CP2 after the button effect is started.

It should be noted that even if the effect button 136 is not operated when the effect button 136 is configured so that the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is not displayed when the operation valid period elapses without being operated, the effect button 136 is not operated. It is possible to notify that a chance-up notice has occurred in the same manner as when 136 is operated, or it is not necessary to notify that a chance-up notice has occurred, and a chance-up notice is given. Only a part of the occurrence may be notified (for example, only the character "UP" is displayed without displaying the balloon).

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (15), the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (16), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible.

After that, when the character SBH of the balloon reaches the third checkpoint CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (18) displays the lever image 136V and the balloon. A balloon with the characters "Chance Up Lever" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH to notify that the notice by lever production has started. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (19), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

The operation valid period of the effect lever 136V may be started while the balloon with the characters "chance up lever" is displayed. The remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (plastic card) of the chance up meter CMT, but the whole may overlap, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. It may be displayed so as not to overlap a part or all of the chance up meter CMT while the remaining time display meter MT is being displayed. The up meter CMT may overlap a part or all m part of the remaining time display meter MT, and a part or all of the remaining time display meter MT may be overlapped during the display of the chance up meter CMT. May be good.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V starts at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (20), the player can accept the operation of the effect lever 136V. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. The character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third checkpoint CP3 until the lever is operated by the player or the operation valid period has elapsed.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 89 (21), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (22) within the above operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 89 (23), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth The large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are activated, the light guide plate IL is emitted, and the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is notified that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, but may be displayed. It should be noted that the effect performed when the effect lever 126V shown in FIG. 89 (23) is operated (1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and Senryobako accessory 224H are activated, and the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is emitted. The effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208) and the effect performed when the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 17 (40) is operated are the same, but may be different. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is terminated, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H return to their initial positions, respectively, and the decorative design is displayed. The effect image fades out on the display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. The chance up meter CMT also fades in with the duel scene animation display fade-in, but the chance up meter CMT may be redisplayed after the duel scene animation display fade-in is completed. .. The operations of FIGS. 89 (23) to (24) are performed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 (38) to (44) and as described above.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (25), it is shown that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and restarted. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the swordsman who plays the enemy role shows an expression of faint in agony, and it seems that he is about to lose. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, and the placard shows the letter "V" indicating that it is a big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (26), it is notified that the main character, the lord, defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol to be a big hit. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 88 (28), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. Although the chance up meter CMT is hidden, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is completed. Further, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, the character SBH of Sabohani and the placard) may be displayed.

In the effect using the chance-up meter CMT described above, the chance-up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. In this case, the case where the chance up meter CMT is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where it is not displayed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may not be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT is displayed or not.

In addition, there may be a notice of chance up that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

In addition, there may be a notice of chance up that appears regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

Further, the position of the checkpoint may be moved or the checkpoint may be deleted during the execution of the effect on the chance up meter CMT.

In addition, during the execution of the effect on the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH indicating the current position returns to the position before the current position (the position indicating the past) or the position ahead (indicating the future). You may move to position).

Further, the effect itself in the chance-up meter CMT may be a mini-game. For example, when the effect is performed at the position indicated by the checkpoint, the effect may be performed to increase the chance. Further, for example, an enemy character may be placed at the checkpoint, and an effect may be provided in which the chance is increased when the enemy character fights against the ally character and wins.

Further, as an effect of increasing the chance during the execution of the jackpot game (for example, rank-up bonus, probabilistic promotion, promotion to a jackpot game with more balls, etc.), an effect using the chance-up meter CMT may be performed.

Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be hidden by the power interruption and recovery. Further, the chance-up meter CMT itself may return to the display, but the history of the checkpoint timing and the occurrence of the chance-up effect before the power failure may be hidden.

Further, the effect displayed after the countdown of the count display in the timer advance notice effect becomes 0 may or may not be notified by the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 90 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 90 (3a) is another production example following FIG. 89 (2), and the same production as in FIG. 89 (3) is performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (4a), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, but no notice is given. That is, it is shown that even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the chance-up notice is not given. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90 (5a), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 90 (5a) to (7a), the Sabohani character SBH is the first checkpoint. It passes through CP1 as it is, and the marking and the character "UP" at the first checkpoint CP1 are not displayed. As a result, at the first checkpoint CP1, it may be possible to recognize that the occurrence of the notice has ended unexploded. If the chance-up notice is not given at the first checkpoint CP1, for example, as shown in FIG. 90 (7a'), the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may be deleted. Also, as shown in FIG. 90 (7a ″), instead of the character “UP” displayed at the first checkpoint CP1, an “x” indicating that the chance-up notice was not given was displayed. May be done. In addition, even if the chance-up notice is not actually given, it is assumed that the chance-up notice has been given after the Sabohani character SBH has passed the checkpoint, and the marking or "UP" at the checkpoint is assumed. The characters may be displayed. For example, after marking at the checkpoint or hiding the characters of "UP", the markings or the characters of "UP" may be displayed. The Sabohani character SBH may return to the checkpoint to give a notice of chance up and display markings and the characters "UP". In addition, for example, an effect of rewinding the reach effect to the beginning or halfway is performed, and then when the Sabohani character SBH passes the checkpoint, a chance-up effect is performed, and marking or the characters "UP" are performed. May be displayed.

FIG. 90 (17b) is another production example following FIG. 89 (16), and the same production as in FIG. 89 (17) is performed. In addition, at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the placard is a question mark display, and when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, some event may occur. Is suggested.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (18b), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136V, and the lever effect as a notice of chance up is not started. It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90 (19b), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 90 (17b) to (20b), the Sabohani character SBH is the third checkpoint. It passes through CP3 as it is, and the marking and the character "UP" at the third checkpoint CP3 are not displayed. Note that FIG. 90 (19b) shows that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 90 (20b) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (21b) within the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (22b) shows the character of the lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. However, along with the line "Did you remove it ...", the appearance that the victory or defeat is not decided is displayed. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character "development" is displayed on the placard at the final point GP, and it is notified that the reach effect will be developed.

After that, after the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the character of the lord shown in FIG. 90 (23b), the effect that the panda character appears as a helper in the swordsman reach as shown in FIG. 90 (24b). Is started. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH rides on a flying carpet and heads toward the starting point SP.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 90 (25b) to (29b), on the way to the starting point SP, the Sabohani character SBH is displayed to change the chance up meter CMT while overlapping with the Sabohani character SBH. conduct. Therefore, due to the movement of the Sabohani character SBH, for example, as shown in FIGS. 90 (26b) to (27b), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the fifth checkpoint CP5 appears. , As shown in FIGS. 90 (28b) to (29b), the fourth checkpoint CP4 appears.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (29b), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is located at the starting point SP again. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display state before the change of the 4th checkpoint CP4 and the 5th checkpoint CP5 (the state where the red marking is not attached and the character "UP" is not displayed). It has become. Then, in the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the Sabohani character SBH is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (30b), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach in which the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 90 (30b), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach in that the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, but he follows the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (30b), the Copanda cheering party KPD composed of three Copanda characters cheers at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4. A notice is displayed to show that the player is in the game, and it is informed that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach jackpot has increased dramatically. It can be said that this Copanda cheering party KPD is functioning as a character for increasing chances. The Copanda cheering party KPD may or may not appear in the SP swordsman reach.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (31b), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Copanda Cheering Party" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and a notice is given by displaying the chance up character. I am informing you that I have been damaged. The timing at which the Copanda cheering party KPD starts to display and the timing at which the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts to be displayed may be the same, or the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may start displaying after the Copanda cheering party KPD starts displaying. It may be displayed, or the Copanda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed. The character SBH of Sabohani stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the notice is given by the display of the Copanda cheering party KPD, but it may not stop.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (32b), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the fifth checkpoint CP5. Then, the display of "collaboration deadly" to the effect that the chance-up effect is performed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 90 (33b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the lever image 136V together with the display of "blow". Will be done. Further, on the chance-up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters "chance-up lever" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the advance notice by the lever effect has started. Here, the lever effect, which is a chance-up effect, may not be performed, and the button effect, which is an effect of operating the effect button 136, may be performed. In addition, the lever effect may be always performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (34b), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the fifth checkpoint CP5 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. After that, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, the effect is performed in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 89 (24) to (28), and it is notified that a big hit will occur.

FIG. 90 (23c) is another example of the effect following FIG. 89 (22). In the lever effect shown in FIGS. 89 (18) to (22), the player operated the effect lever 136V. It is shown that the production failed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard is shown with the letter "x" indicating that it will be lost, and the Sabohani character SBH looks disappointed. ing.

FIG. 90 (5d) is a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 89 (5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (5d), a large number of Boy character BOYs (boy groups) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. .. That is, it is shown that a notice is being given by the appearance of the Boy group. When this Boy character appears in a group, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the Boy character BOY appears alone. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT displays a balloon with the characters "chance-up BOY group" in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and notifies that a notice has been given by displaying the character of chance-up. In this way, even if the chance-up points are the same, different chance-up effects may be performed, or the same effects may be performed at the same chance-up points.

FIG. 91 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 91 (7e) is another production example following FIG. 89 (6), and the same production as in FIG. 89 (7) is performed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 91 (8e) to 91 (9e), in the chance-up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH jumps over the second checkpoint CP2 and reaches just before the third checkpoint CP3, and the third checkpoint CP3 is reached. Wait at that location until the chance-up notice corresponding to checkpoint CP3 is given. It should be noted that while the effect of the Sabohani character SBH jumping over the second checkpoint CP2 and reaching the third checkpoint CP3 is being performed, the effect corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 (for example, FIGS. 89 (9) to 9). The button effect and the like described above as shown in FIG. 15 may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second checkpoint CP2 may be marked in red and the characters "UP" may be displayed as if the effect was performed.

FIG. 91 (2f) is another production example following FIG. 89 (1). In the production example shown in FIG. 91 (2f), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from the production example shown in FIG. 89. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT is configured in the shape of a green bar, and instead of the Sabohani character SBH, the current progress of the reach effect is roughly notified by the position of the marker MRK. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the progress speed of the marker MRK is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the effect, but it may be constant. In addition, the display mode of the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 is represented by a question mark so as to give a sense of expectation that a notice of chance up will be given. Also, the start and end points are indicated by the start and end of the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT.

In FIG. 91 (3f) following FIG. 91 (2f), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (4f), the boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side at the timing when the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1. It is shown.
Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (5f), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" was displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and a notice was given by displaying the character of the chance up. Is being notified. As shown in FIGS. 91 (5f) to 91 (6f), the marker MRK stands by at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 91 (7f-1) to (7f-2), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move. At this time, instead of displaying the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. The Boy character BOY is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (7f-2).

FIG. 91 (4g') shows an example of an effect in which the boy character BOY does not appear even if the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1 after the effect shown in FIG. 91 (3f) is performed. Has been done. Specifically, when the Boy character BOY does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (4f), as shown in FIG. 91 (4g'), the chance-up meter CMT at the first checkpoint CP1. Instead of displaying the question mark, an "x" indicating that the notice did not appear is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 91 (4 g ″), the display of the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1 may be erased so that no display is performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 91 (4 g ″ ″), the display mode may not be changed while the question mark is displayed at the first checkpoint CP1.

FIG. 91 (2h) is yet another production example following FIG. 89 (1). In the production example shown in FIG. 91 (2h), the display mode is the same as that of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 91 (2f), but the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are hidden. It differs in that. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the chance-up notice, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to when the chance-up notice will start.

At the timing shown in FIG. 91 (5h), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up BOY Passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to notify that a notice has been given by displaying the character of the chance up. At this time, a part of the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice has appeared.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 91 (6h) to 91 (7h), as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the hidden characters "UP" appear. Appear.

FIG. 92 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 92 (A1) to 92 (A11) show that the chance-up meter CMT notifies the timing at which the pseudo-ream occurs and the number of times the pseudo-ream occurs during the execution of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A2), the characters "Secure Echigoya" are displayed, and it is shown that the chasing effect as an example of the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

After that, FIG. 92 (A3) shows how the chasing effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the main character, the lord, chases the unscrupulous merchant, is started. Further, below the second decorative symbol, the chance-up meter CMT of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 91 (2f) is displayed. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 92 (A3), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a pseudo-ream may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the markers MRK reach the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a pseudo-ream may occur. In addition, it is suggested that by reaching the final point, the unscrupulous merchant will be captured and it will be easier to shift to a highly reliable reach production. In this production example, the more pseudo-reams occur, the more likely it is to become a big hit. When the pseudo-ream occurs four times (that is, when the pseudo-ream occurs when the final point is reached), the big hit is confirmed. It should be noted that the jackpot may be confirmed when the number of pseudo-reams is other than four, and for example, when the number of pseudo-reams is 1 and 4, the jackpot may be confirmed. The number of pseudo-reams for which a big hit is confirmed is less likely to occur than the number of pseudo-reams for other pseudo-reams.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A4), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A5), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (A6), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. The state is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode. Even if the display of the main character chasing the unscrupulous merchant and the timing of displaying the characters "continue" and the timing of switching the display of the first checkpoint CP1 from the question mark to the display of the characters "continue" are the same. Alternatively, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may be switched from the question mark to the display of the character "continue" after the character "continue" is displayed together with the display that the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant. After the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continue", the characters "continue" may be displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A7), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A7), it is shown that the distance between the hero's lord and the unscrupulous merchant is shortened.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A8), the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the second pseudo-ream will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second checkpoint CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A9), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third checkpoint CP3. In addition, the angle showing how the hero's lord is chasing the villainous merchant has been changed, and the expression of the villainous merchant who has been able to afford it has become impatient.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (A10), the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the third pseudo-ream will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third checkpoint CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (A11), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "secured" and the state in which the main character, the lord, has captured the unscrupulous merchant. At this time, the chance-up meter CMT indicates that the marker MRK has reached the final point, and thus the pseudo-ream has been performed three times in total in the symbol variation display this time. Further, at this time, in the first decorative pattern, the reach state is reached with "decoration 7", and the reach effect is started.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 92 (B1) to 92 (B14), the chance-up meter CMT is displayed during the fluctuation display of the normal decorative symbol, and the appearance of notifying the timing when the notice of chance-up occurs is shown. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (B2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance up meter CMT of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 91 (2f) is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 92 (B2), the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 and second checkpoint CP2 indicate that a notice of chance up may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (B3), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point. In addition, a balloon displaying the characters "opportunity" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigator character YM, and the navigator character YM gives a notice of the navigator character. In this production example, the notice by the balloon of the character "opportunity" of the navigation character YM is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but is a chance that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of up.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (B4), the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1. Then, the characters displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM are changed from "opportunity" to "no". In response to this, a balloon with the characters "Chance up or not" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, notifying that the navigation character YM has given notice of the chance up. The marker MRK is waiting at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the conversation notice has also started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The conversation image CI1 of this lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The conversation image CI1 of this lord is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a chance-up notice that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (B5), in the chance-up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT changes, the hidden character "UP" appears. The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of a chance-up notice. In addition, the characters displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM have been changed from "No" to "Intense heat". In this production example, the notice by the balloon of the characters "super heat" of the navigation character YM is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the second decorative pattern. The conversation image CI1 of the lord is also overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (B6), the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. Then, as a continuation of the conversation notice, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 16 (10) is displayed is displayed together with the character of the grandfather. The conversation image CI2 of this grandfather is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a chance-up notice that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (B6), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative pattern is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (B6), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is partially overlapped by the balloon of the navigation character YM and the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the marker MRK that has reached the second checkpoint CP2 is in a standby state.

After that, the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (B7). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 92 (B7).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 92 (B8) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses. At the timing shown in FIG. 92 (B8), the navigation character notice has ended, and the balloon of the navigation character YM has been deleted. After that, when the player presses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (B9), as shown in FIG. 92 (B10), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, instead of the operation promotion notification image, "super heat" The text "It's right" may be displayed. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. Further, in this production example, the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is a display mode emphasized by a thick golden line, and it is more likely to be a big hit than the case of the normal display mode of the outer frame. Is being notified. In addition, in the chance-up meter CMT, in response to the change in the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather to gold, a balloon with the characters "chance-up gold frame" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK. , Notifies that the notice of chance up in the conversation notice has been made. The marker MRK is waiting at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. If the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the old man's conversation image CI2 may or may not be displayed. When the old man's conversation image CI2 is not displayed, it is not necessary to notify that the chance up notice has occurred in the chance up meter CMT, or it may be notified, or only a part thereof may be notified. (For example, displaying only the characters "UP").

The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 92 (B11) shows how the position of the balloon has changed. At this time, the balloon overlaps with the grandfather's conversation image CI2, and the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The position of the balloon may not change from the position shown in FIG. 92 (B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position shown in FIG. 92 (B11) from the beginning.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (B12), in the chance-up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT changes, the hidden character "UP" appears. The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of a chance-up notice. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed on the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also completed. The display of the balloon may be deleted at the timing when the conversation notice ends, or may be deleted after the conversation notice ends. Further, the conversation notice may end after the display of the balloon is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92 (B13), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is in the reach state in the “decoration 7”. At this time, it is shown that the marker MRK of the chance-up meter CMT has reached the final point and the effect by the chance-up meter CMT has been completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (B14), the reach effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance up meter CMT is erased. The timing at which the reach effect is started and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is erased may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may be erased after the reach effect is started. The reach effect may be started after the upmeter CMT is erased.

In addition, although the production by the chance up meter CMT in this production example is terminated when it reaches the reach state, the production may continue even if it is in the reach state, and it continues even if it shifts to the super reach state. You may do so. Further, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variation display is completed. At this time, for example, when the super reach starts, an effect by the chance up meter CMT, which is different from the effect by the chance up meter CMT that is continuously being executed, may be started. Further, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not always start during the normal symbol variation display. Further, in the normal symbol variation display, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not start, but in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may always start. Further, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is possible, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be started when the effect button 136 is operated. In this case, for example, a display to that effect may be displayed so that the player can recognize it.

FIG. 93 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 93, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 93 (A1) to 93 (A5), the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, but it is shown that the effect is erased in the middle.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 93 (A1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. Although the 1st checkpoint CP1 and the 2nd checkpoint CP2 were reached respectively, the display of the 1st checkpoint CP1 and the 2nd checkpoint CP2 was erased because the notice of the chance up corresponding to them did not occur. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (A1) shows that the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A2) displays a cut-in indicating that the character of the grandfather holding the energy drink is speaking "fight". The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect of promoting the super reach being executed, and when this cut-in is displayed, it is more likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. Further, the display of this cut-in may be a premier notice, and when it is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. Also, when this cut-in is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the production by the chance up meter CMT is completed because the notice that the chance up is likely to be a big hit is given rather than the notice of the chance up related to the chance up meter CMT is given. There is. The display of this cut-in is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance-up that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the production by the chance up meter CMT ends before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that it is shown that the production by the chance up meter CMT ends before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint.

In this production example, the chance-up meter CMT may always end in the middle, or the chance-up meter CMT may or may not end in the middle. At this time, for example, the content of the subsequent effect may be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle or does not end, or the same content may be performed. .. Further, the case where the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot when the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle is the same as when the chance up notice occurs at all the checkpoints and the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle. It may be. Alternatively, the case where the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed together with the character display of "blow" to show that the button effect is started. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance up related to the chance up meter CMT.

After that, when the operation valid period is started and the effect button 136 is operated by the player or the operation valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 93 (A4), "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol, and "decoration 7" is displayed. It is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" will be a big hit. In the case of loss, as shown in FIG. 93 (A4'), "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Will be done.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A5), the animation display of the duel scene fades in, and it is shown that the hero's lord has defeated the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. ..

FIG. 93 (A2a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 93 (A1). Specifically, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A2a) displays a cut-in indicating that the princess character is saying, "I will rewrite the reach." The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the jackpot by assuming that the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display is produced with other contents. When this cut-in display is made, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The display of this cut-in is also a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance-up that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. As described above, also in this production example, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the chance-up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A2a), the variable icon h0 is also erased, but it may not be erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A3a), the state after the reach effect is rewritten is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 93 (A3a), the erased chance-up meter CMT is displayed again. In this chance-up meter CMT, the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 appear, and they are red respectively. In addition to being marked with, the characters "UP" are displayed. That is, in reality, the notice of chance up corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1 and the notice of chance up corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 were not given, but both are expressed as if they were done and a big hit. It is shown that the reliability of is improving.

FIG. 93 (A3a'-1) shows another production example following FIG. 93 (A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A3a'-1), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach described above with reference to FIG. 90 (30b) instead of the swordsman reach. SP Swordsman Reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than Swordsman Reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A3a'-1), the chance to show that the child panda cheering party KPD is cheering at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3 is increased. A notice is displayed to inform that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach jackpot has increased dramatically. The child panda cheering party KPD may or may not appear. Further, in FIG. 93 (A3a'-1), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but the display mode thereof is the same as the display mode before the chance up meter CMT is erased.

FIG. 93 (A3a'-2) is an effect example following FIG. 93 (A2a), and shows an effect example different from that of FIG. 93 (A3a'-1). In the production example shown in FIG. 93 (A3a'-2), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from that in FIG. 93 (A3a'-1). That is, the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (A3a'-2) is a chance-up meter different from the chance-up meter CMT before the cut-in of the princess character is displayed. As shown in 90 (30b) and described above, it is a chance-up meter CMT displayed when the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach. That is, according to the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (A3a'-2), it is shown that the Copanda cheering party KPD appeared at the fourth checkpoint CP4 that passed after shifting to the SP swordsman reach. Therefore, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the Copanda cheering party KPD is displayed, indicating that the chance up is announced. When the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH may be located at the starting point SP and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, or the Sabohani character SBH may be the final point GP. It may be located in and start from the end of the SP swordsman reach.

FIG. 93 (A3a ″) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 93 (A2a). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A3a ″) shows how the full rotation reach starts. The full rotation reach is a reach in which a big hit is confirmed, and since it is not necessary to give the player a feeling of expectation any more, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed again, but FIG. 93 (A3a ″ ″ ), The chance up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that it is notified that the big hit will be confirmed when the full rotation reach starts, so the position of the Sabohani character SBH is changed to the final point GP without passing through the 5th checkpoint CP5. , The placard may be labeled with a "V" indicating that it will be a big hit. The timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP may be the same, or the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP after the full rotation reach starts. Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Further, the timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT displays again may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may display again after the full rotation reach starts. Then, the full rotation reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT is displayed again.

FIGS. 93 (A2b) to 93 (A3b) show another production example following FIG. 93 (A1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (A2b), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. After that, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and they overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. It should be noted that the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and the overlapping effects on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 are completed. Then, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 93 (B1) to (B4), the production by the chance up meter CMT was started, but the production by the chance up meter CMT was completed because the result of the loss was displayed in the middle. It is shown.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (B1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 93 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. Although the 1st checkpoint CP1 was reached, the red marking and "UP" were not displayed on the 1st checkpoint CP1 because the corresponding chance-up notice did not occur. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 93 (B1) shows that the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the first checkpoint CP1.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (B2), the cut-in image CI5 of the swordsman is displayed, indicating that there is a high possibility of loss. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (B3), it is notified that the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, resulting in a loss. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT displays that the Sabohani character SBH is lost and shows a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 93 (B3'), although "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol and it is notified that the character will be lost, the character SBH of Sabohani is finally set in the chance up meter CMT. The state of proceeding as it is toward the point GP may be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (B4), the first decorative symbol is shaken and changed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", and then the display is stopped.

FIG. 94 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.
In FIG. 94, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 94 (A1) to 94 (A5), the chance-up meter CMT is temporarily erased during the production by the chance-up meter CMT, and then displayed again.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 94 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. The character SBH of Sabohani is shown to have started moving from the starting point SP.

After that, FIG. 94 (A2) shows that the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light emission of the light guide plate IL is a notice of an increase in chance corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1. At this time, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display is dimmed to make the pattern on the light guide plate IL easier to see. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (A3), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene whose display was interrupted due to the darkening display is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also restarted. Further, in the chance-up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters "chance-up illumination emission" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify that the chance-up notice has been given. The light emitting of the light guide plate IL continues.

FIG. 94 (A4) shows that the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is finished and the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is continued. In addition, the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown.

FIG. 94 (A5) shows how the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move.

In this production example, the light emitting of the light guide plate IL was performed as a notice of the chance increase in the reach production, but the effect is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It may be applied in the production of reaching and inciting whether it is a big hit or a loss. In addition to the production that incites whether it is a big hit or a loss, it is also applied in the production that incites whether it will be a big hit or something else (for example, the production develops or a loss is displayed). You may. Even in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the production by the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 94 (B1) to 94 (B6) show how the chance up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the operation of the player.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (B1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 94 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen, and moves toward the right side. Is shown, and it is shown that a notice of chance up is being made. Further, in this production example, a guidance display is performed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, an icon indicating the up key and the down key of the operation key unit 137 and the character "Hide the meter by operating the arrow keys" are displayed, and the player can display the operation key unit 137. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the swordsman reach starts, but it may be displayed by a display operation by the player after the swordsman reach starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (B2), a balloon with the characters “Chance up BOY passing” was displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a notice was given by displaying the character of chance up. Is being notified.

Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 94 (B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 94 (B4). .. After that, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again at the timing shown in FIG. 94 (B5), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again as shown in FIG. 94 (B6). At this time, the character SBH of Sabohani is in the position where it should be located when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed. In this case, for example, the balloon shown in FIG. 94 (B2) may not be displayed, and the effect of the chance up meter CMT may be restarted from a good point. Further, as shown in FIG. 94 (B6'), when the effect between the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 is omitted and the chance up meter CMT display is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH May be located in front of the second checkpoint CP2 and wait at that position until the timing corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 is given. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIGS. 94 (B6) and 94 (B6'), the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red due to the appearance of the Boy character BOY, and the "UP" is displayed. The letters are displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 94 (B6), the characters "UP" overlap with the Sabohani character SBH, making it difficult to see.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 94 (B1) to 94 (B6), the display / non-display of the chance up meter CMT can be switched as many times as necessary according to the operation of the player. After being displayed and then hidden by the player's operation, the chance-up meter CMT may not be displayed until the next production by the chance-up meter CMT is performed.

Further, in this production example, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be displayed first, but as shown in FIG. 94 (B4), for example, the chance up meter CMT is first hidden. It may be configured to be in the state of being.

FIG. 95 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter. FIG. 95 shows an example of an effect in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed.

In FIG. 95, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 95 (A1) to 95 (A2) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb display the same contents.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A1), two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variable icon h0 in between. In this production example, the chance up meter arranged on the left side is referred to as a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter arranged on the right side is referred to as a second chance up meter CMTb. The chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb are shown in FIG. 91 (2f) and have the same display mode as those described above. In the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 95 (A1), the first checkpoints CP1a and CP1b, the second checkpoints CP2a and CP2b, and the third checkpoints CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. These first checkpoints CP1a (CP1b) to third checkpoints CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks to give a sense of expectation that a notice of chance up will be given. Here, the checkpoint indicated by the first chance-up meter CMTa and the checkpoint indicated by the second chance-up meter CMTb are intended for the same chance-up notice.

In this production example, two chance up meters are displayed, but only one may be displayed. For example, two chance up meters may be displayed as compared with the case where only one chance up meter is displayed. The case where it is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit, or the ease of being a big hit (reliability) may be the same. Further, when the effect is performed by the chance up meter, two chance up meters may be displayed without fail. Further, three or more chance up meters may be displayed. Further, in this production example, the traveling speeds of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are the same, but they may be different. For example, the traveling speed of the second chance up meter CMTb is higher. However, it may be faster than the traveling speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A2), in response to the fact that the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first checkpoints CP1a and CP1b and the boy character BOY appears, " A balloon with the words "Chance up BOY passed" is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and it is notified that the chance up notice has been given by the character display.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 95 (A2'), the first chance-up meter CMTa displays the characters "Chance-up BOY passage" in the balloon, and the reliability of the balloon of the second chance-up meter CMTb. May be displayed to notify the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the character BOY of the balloon.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 95 (A2 ″), when the appearance of the Boy character BOY and the appearance of the Boy character BOY singing a speech bubble are displayed as a rare notice, the first chance The characters "Chance Up BOY Passed" are displayed on the balloon of the upmeter CMTa, and the characters "Chance Up Nose" indicating that a rare notice has occurred are displayed on the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb. May be good.

In this production example, the traveling speeds of the markers MRKa and MRKb are the same for the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but they may proceed at different speeds. Further, in this production example, the balloon is displayed by both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but only one of them may be displayed.

FIGS. 95 (A2a-1) to 95 (A2a-2) show another production example following FIG. 95 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A2a-1) following FIG. 95 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb and the boy character BOY appears. Then, a balloon with the characters "Chance Up BOY Passing" is displayed near the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the 1st chance up meter CMTa and the 2nd chance up meter CMTb, and the character display gives a notice of chance up. It is informed that it has been done.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is erased from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter CMTa is erased. Only CMTb is displayed. In this way, after displaying the two chance up meters, one of them may be erased. For example, if one of the two chance up meters is erased, it is not erased. It may be more likely to be a big hit than it is, or it may be more likely to be a big hit when it is not erased. Further, the reliability may differ depending on the erased chance up meter. Also, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

FIGS. 95 (A2b-1) to 95 (A2b-2) show still another production example following FIG. 95 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A2b-1) following FIG. 95 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reached the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb, and the boy character BOY appeared. Then, a balloon with the characters "Chance Up BOY Passing" is displayed near the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the 1st chance up meter CMTa and the 2nd chance up meter CMTb, and the character display gives a notice of chance up. It is informed that it has been done. At this time, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a thick red line, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is further improved. That is, in the display mode of the balloon of the first chance up meter CMTa and the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is the display of the notice with higher reliability of the jackpot. It can be said to be an aspect. It should be noted that the change in the display mode of the balloon may be performed by only one of the two chance up meters, or may be performed by both.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (A2b-2), the first chance up meter CMTa displaying a balloon having a low reliability from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. Only the second chance up meter CMTb, which is erased and displays a highly reliable balloon, is displayed. In this way, after displaying the two chance-up meters, the display of the chance-up meter on which the highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance-up meter may be erased. Further, after displaying the two chance-up meters, the display of the chance-up meter on which the balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance-up meter may be erased. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 95 (B1) to 95 (B2) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance-up notices.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side with the variable icon h0 in between, at the bottom of the display screen. Of the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 95 (B1), the first chance-up meter CMTa has three checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1a, second checkpoint CP2a, third checkpoint CP3a). Have been placed. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two checkpoints (fourth checkpoint CP4b and fifth checkpoint CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth checkpoint CP4b and the fifth checkpoint CP5b are the first checkpoints. The timing of the chance-up notice and start corresponding to any of CP1a to the third checkpoint CP3a is different. In this production example, when the arrival timings of the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first checkpoint CP1a, the second checkpoint CP2a, the third checkpoint CP3a, the fourth checkpoint CP4b, and the fifth checkpoint CP5b are arranged in chronological order. , 1st checkpoint CP1a, 4th checkpoint CP4b, 2nd checkpoint CP2a, 5th checkpoint CP5b, 3rd checkpoint CP3a.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a and the character BOY of the boy appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb appears. It is shown that the MRKb has reached the fourth checkpoint CP4b and the Boy character BOY has begun humming. In response to this, the second chance-up meter CMTb displays a balloon with the characters "chance-up humming" in the vicinity of the marker MRKb, informing that the chance-up notice has been given.

In this production example, both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, if one of the first chance-up meter CMTa and the second chance-up meter CMTb is not displayed, the chance-up notice corresponding to the checkpoint in the non-displayed chance-up meter is given. It may not be performed, or a chance-up notice corresponding to a checkpoint on a chance-up meter that is not displayed may be given. Further, there may be a checkpoint that does not notify when one of the first chance-up meter CMTa and the second chance-up meter CMTb is not displayed, or even if the checkpoint is notified. good.
The production examples shown in FIGS. 95 (C1) to 95 (C4) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance-up notices.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (C1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side with the variable icon h0 in between, at the bottom of the display screen. Of the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 95 (C1), the second chance-up meter CMTa is a meter that shows the progress of the entire reach effect, and one checkpoint (development point CPA) is arranged. Has been done. This development point CPA indicates the point at which the reach production may develop. On the other hand, the first chance up meter CMTa indicates the period from the start point to the checkpoint, the period from the checkpoint to the checkpoint, or the period from the checkpoint to the final point in the second chance up meter CMTb. When the period in the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to the display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this production example, the period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as the first period, and the period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as the second period.

Further, in this production example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that shown in FIG. 91 (2f) and described above. The second chance up meter CMTb has a display mode similar to that shown in FIG. 89 (2) and described above. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa is set to the display mode corresponding to the first period, and three checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1, second checkpoint CP2, The third checkpoint CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that a notice of chance up may occur when the marker MRK reaches each checkpoint. Further, the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMTb are also starting points.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (C2), it is shown that the button effect is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 95 (C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation valid period started. In addition, on the first chance-up meter CMTa, the characters "UP" indicating that a chance-up notice has occurred at the first checkpoint CP1 are displayed, and the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. It is shown. The second checkpoint CP2 corresponds to, for example, a notice of a certain chance up that appears as a result of the button effect. In addition, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the Sabohani character SBH is progressing toward the development point CPA.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first checkpoint CP1 and the Sabohani character SBH reaches the development point CPA at the second chance up meter CMTb. , It is shown that the cut-in is displayed to show that the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach". At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is erased. When the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased, only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased, or the first chance up meter CMTb may be erased. Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (C4), a cut-in image of the panda is displayed and a state of shifting to the SP swordsman reach is shown. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second period, and two checkpoints (fourth checkpoint CP4 and fifth checkpoint CP5) are arranged, and each check is performed. It has been shown that a chance-up notice may occur when the marker MRK reaches the point. In addition, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the Sabohani character SBH is advancing from the development point CPA toward the final point GP.

FIG. 96 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 96 (A1) to 96 (A7) show that the chance-up meter CMT notifies the timing at which the pseudo-ream occurs and the number of times the pseudo-ream occurs during the execution of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A1), the characters "Secure Echigoya" are displayed, and it is shown that the chasing effect as an example of the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A2), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, a chance-up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged in this chance-up meter CMT. , It is informed that pseudo-ream may occur at each checkpoint. Then, in this chance up meter CMT, it is shown that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (A3), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. The state is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A4), it is shown that the first decorative symbol variation display (that is, the second variation display of the decorative symbol) is performed by the first pseudo-ream. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (A5), the unscrupulous merchant missed it, but it is shown that it develops into reach by recovering the Senryobako. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2, and the display of the second checkpoint CP2 is indicated by the letter "R" indicating that the question mark has changed to the reach state. It has switched to the display. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect is terminated in the middle, and as shown in FIG. 96 (A6), the display of the pseudo-continuous effect fades out together with the chance up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (A7), when the reach effect is started, the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is left in the first UI unit 280. The frame is out below the display area, and the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is erased when the fade-out of the display of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed. In this way, it may be configured so that the chance up meter CMT can reach the end is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the checkpoint is completed in the middle. In addition, the susceptibility to big hits may differ depending on the checkpoint reached.

Further, as an example of the effect of hiding the chance up meter CMT, it may be performed as shown in FIGS. 96 (A6a-1) to (A6a-2). Specifically, in FIG. 96 (A5), when the pseudo-continuous production is terminated in the middle, as shown in FIGS. 96 (A6a-1) to 96 (A6a-2), the chance-up meter CMT The chance up meter CMT may be hidden by frame-out outside the display screen.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 96 (B1) to 96 (B7) show that the chance up meter CMT is used between the start of the reach production and the development of the super reach. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (B1), it is shown that the reach effect of “decoration 7” has been changed to reach. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Then, in this effect example, when the reach effect is started, the chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the effect using the chance up meter CMT is performed. The effect using this chance up meter CMT is performed until the shift to the super reach or the loss is displayed without shifting to the super reach. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 96 (B1), when the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 in the reach production, a notice of chance up corresponding to each checkpoint is given. Is being performed, and the characters "UP" to that effect are displayed. Further, the chance up meter CMT overlaps a part of the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and in the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left below the display area. At the same time as the frame is out, it is shown that the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third checkpoint CP3. The chance-up meter CMT overlaps the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after movement, and the left symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (B3), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. Further, in this production example, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. ing.

In this production example, the marker MRK continues to progress while the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd are operating, but the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board The progress of the marker MRK may be stopped while the behavioral object 224Gd is operating. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be hidden while the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operating. Further, in the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 96 (B3), a balloon with the characters "chance-up large board behavior" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior role. It is informing that the notice of chance up by the thing 224Gd has been made.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT overlaps the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 96 (B6), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position. At the timing when the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, the marker MRK has reached the final point in the chance up meter CMT, but the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished after the marker MRK reaches the final point. Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Further, in this production example, after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the left of the first decorative symbol. The design overlaps with the chance up meter CMT, but before the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the 1st decorative symbol is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first is After the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the 1st decorative symbol is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the 1st decorative symbol is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT. You may do so. Further, the context of the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMT may not be changed before and after the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. The chance up meter CMT is erased after the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd have returned to the initial positions. After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (B7), it develops into super reach.

FIG. 97 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 97 (A1) to 97 (A5), other effects unrelated to the chance-up meter CMT overlap with the chance-up meter CMT during the execution of the production using the chance-up meter CMT. It is shown how it is done. Here, another effect may overlap only a part of the chance up meter CMT, or another effect may overlap the entire chance up meter CMT.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (A1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect depends on the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (A1), the marker MRK becomes the first checkpoint CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding notice of chance up occurs, and at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (A1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (A2), the treasure chest BX is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, the chance-up meter CMT is more difficult to see than the case where the treasure box BX does not overlap with the chance-up meter CMT. The treasure chest BX is a notice production that has nothing to do with the chance up notice corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, the marker MRK does not stop even while the treasure box BX is displayed, and continues to progress.

In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second checkpoint CP2, a corresponding chance-up notice is generated, and the second checkpoint CP2 notifies that fact. Is displayed. The treasure chest BX still overlaps with the chance up meter CMT.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (A4), the treasure box BX is opened, and the characters "extreme heat" appear from the inside. This character display of "super heat" is also a notice production that has nothing to do with the notice of chance up corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, it may be a notice of chance up corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (A5), the treasure chest BX displayed overlapping with the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the chance up meter CMT becomes easily visible.

FIG. 97 (B1) shows how other effects unrelated to the chance-up meter CMT are overlapped with the chance-up meter CMT during the execution of the effect using the chance-up meter CMT. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (B1), the wipe is made so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT during the execution of the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and it is shown that a simultaneous effect is being performed on this wipe screen WP. Here, the simultaneous production means, for example, using an RTC (Real Time Clock) as a timekeeping means or a built-in timer, the same model of pachinko machine 100 mounted on the same game island, and the same production content is the same. It is a production performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when the simultaneous effect starts, and is erased when the simultaneous effect ends. Further, the wipe screen WP may be displayed even when an effect other than the simultaneous effect is performed.

FIGS. 97 (C1) to 97 (C2) show how an error display is displayed during the execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT.

The decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 97 (C1) shows that the display device has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (C1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect depends on the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (C1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (C1), the marker MRK becomes the first checkpoint CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding notice of chance up occurs, and at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (C1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, for example, a radio wave detection provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 indicates that a radio device such as a transceiver outputs a strong radio wave that causes fluctuations in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100. When it is detected by means, as shown in FIG. 97 (C2), an error display is performed by displaying the characters "Radio wave detected" to that effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 97 (C2), this error display does not overlap with the chance up meter CMT and does not affect the visibility of the chance up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors, for example, a ball removal error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 1) is full, or a front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). It can also be applied to a door opening error that occurs when it is detected that the door member has been opened, such as (see 1). Further, depending on the type of error, the error display may not be performed, or the error notification may be performed by voice or a lamp.

FIG. 97 (C2a), FIG. (C2b) and FIG. (C2c) show other display examples of the error display. For example, as shown in FIG. 97 (C2a), the error display is a chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 97 (C2b), a plurality of error displays can be displayed at the same time, and when an error occurs, the error is displayed vertically from the upper left side of the display screen. There is. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, the fourth error is displayed so as to overlap the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 97 (C2c), it is shown that the error display is performed on the entire display screen. Specifically, it was detected by, for example, a magnetic force detecting means provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 that strong magnetism was emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 100. In this case, as shown in FIG. 97 (C2c), an error display is performed over the entire display screen by displaying the characters "Magnetism detected" to that effect. As a result, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, and other effects are also hidden. When such an error is detected, the game may not proceed by not performing a part of the processing in the main control unit 300 until the power is cut off, for example, not performing the big hit determination. .. If the power is cut off while the error is displayed and the power supply is restored after that, the symbol fluctuation stop command is issued after the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display that was being executed when the power was cut off has elapsed. For example, "preparing" may be displayed over the entire display screen until it is output to the first sub-control unit 400.

FIGS. 97 (D1) to 97 (D2) show how the chance-up meter CMT overlaps with other display devices. In the production example shown in FIGS. 97 (D1) to 97 (D2), in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S replaces the family crest accessory 224E with the decorative symbol display device 208. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (D1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, a chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is shown that the effect by the chance-up meter CMT is being performed. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (D1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect depends on the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (D1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (D1), the marker MRK becomes the first checkpoint CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding notice of chance up occurs, and at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 97 (D1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2. Further, on the sub-display device 208S, the characters "vs swordsman" indicating that the swordsman reach has been developed are displayed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

FIG. 97 (D2) shows that the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 208S overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been done. At this time, at least a part of the chance-up meter CMT is overlapped with the sub-display device 208S, and the chance-up meter CMT is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the sub-display device 208S displays a cut-in image of the main character, who has a balloon with the characters "Game".

In this production example, the chance-up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub-display device 208S as an example of the display means, but the chance-up meter CMT may be overlapped by another display means. For example, a display means composed of a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, a 7-segment display, a dot matrix, a lamp, or the like can be applied.

Further, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (E1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the sub display device 208S. It may be. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

In this production example, an example in which the chance up meter CMT overlaps with another display has been described, but it is also applied to the case where the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with another display instead of the chance up meter CMT. can do.

FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating an mode of change of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

In FIG. 98, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 98 (A1) to 98 (A9), the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed by the navigation character YM and the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed in the conversation notice. Is shown to be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A1), the button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A2), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. The operation validity period in the button effect by the navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 98 (A3) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (A3), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the button effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of this lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (A4), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is composed of a button image 136a2 that imitates the effect button 136a, and a remaining time display meter MT2 that indicates the remaining time of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A4), the operation valid period in the conversation notice has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation valid period has started, when the effect button 136 is operated, an effect corresponding to this may be performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (A4), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather partially overlaps with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

After that, the operation valid period in the conversation notice is started at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A5). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A5). The operation valid period of the button effect by the conversation notice is, for example, 5 seconds, which is shorter than the operation valid period of the button effect by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 98 (A5) to 98 (A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is more than the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM decreases. The rate at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A8), as shown in FIG. 98 (A9), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, instead of the operation promotion notification image, "it is intense heat. The characters "Zo" may be displayed. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. On the other hand, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM on which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 were displayed changes to the character display of "super heat", and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is considerably high. ing. That is, in this production example, it is shown that a single production button operation is performed according to the button operation result for both the button production in the conversation notice and the button production by the navigation character YM. ing. In addition, the character display of "It's intense heat" displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather and the character display of "Intense heat" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM are displayed even when the operation validity period has passed. However, it does not have to be displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (A9a-1), the operation corresponding to the button effect started earlier. The production may be performed according to the result. That is, in this production example, the button production by the navigation character YM was started before the button production in the conversation notice. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98 (A9a-1), the production button 136 in the button production by the navigation character YM. Only the effect according to the operation of (the character display of "super heat" in the balloon of the navigation character YM) is performed, and the effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the conversation notice (displayed on the old man's conversation image CI2). "It's intense heat" is not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (A9a-2), when the player operates the effect button 136 for the second time, as shown in FIG. 88 (A9a-3), it corresponds to the button effect started later. The effect is performed according to the operation result. That is, the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the conversation notice (the character display of "It's intense heat" in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather) is performed.

In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated when the operation valid period is started in each of the two button effects, the button effect in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter decreases at a high speed is prioritized and produced. The effect may be performed according to the operation of the button 136, or the effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 may be performed by giving priority to the button effect in which the gauge decreasing speed in the remaining time display meter is small. May be good.

Further, in this production example, the change speeds of the display modes of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 are different. The speed is the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the blowout of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may be changed when a certain time is reached. ..

Further, in this production example, the operation valid period related to the grandfather's preview image CI2 is set to 5 seconds. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation valid period is 10 seconds, the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM is the same. In this case, the case where the operation valid period related to the grandfather's notice image CI2 is selected to be 5 seconds may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the operation valid period is selected to be 10 seconds.

In addition, in this production example, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather whose extension was started later is "super heat" than the case where "super heat" is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose production was displayed earlier. Is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher, so that the notice display displayed later is more likely to be displayed at the time of the jackpot, and the notice display displayed later is the one that is displayed later. It may be possible to surprise the player by displaying the image while the attention level is relatively lowered. In addition, "It's intense heat" was displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather whose extension was started later than when "Intense heat" was displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose effect was displayed earlier. In the case, the reliability of the jackpot may be lower, or the reliability of the jackpot may be the same.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 98 (B1) to 98 (B11) show that both the timer advance effect and the effect using the chance up meter are performed at the same time.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 98 (B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 98 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. It has been shown that when the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, so that the player has a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B2), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the starting point SP.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, and the timer notice effect is started. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the start of the timer advance notice effect functions as a notice of increasing the chance. Further, "10:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B4), a balloon with the characters "chance up timer notice" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, indicating that the chance up notice has been given. I am informing you. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down, and "09:17" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (B4).
After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (B5), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “08:81” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (B5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B6), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “08:31” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (B6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B7), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the second checkpoint CP2. In this production example, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2, a notice of chance up (for example, occurrence of a cut-in) is given, and the second checkpoint CP2 is marked in red. At the same time, the letters "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice are displayed above the notice, indicating the history of the notice. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “04:14” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (B7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B8), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the third checkpoint CP3. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (B9), on the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, a character of "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed. According to this production example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started later is higher than the rate (speed) of the change in the display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time from the start to the end of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 started later than the time from the start point SP to the final point GP of the Sabohani character SBH by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. Can be said to be faster.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the characters “chance up lever” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and the lever is displayed. It informs that the notice by the production has started. The display of the lever image 136Va in this lever effect is a notice of chance up displayed in response to reaching the third checkpoint CP3, and at the same time, it is a notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown of the timer notice effect. .. That is, it can be said that the target of the advance notice of the chance up shown in the effect of the chance up meter CMT and the object of the advance notice performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect are the same. Alternatively, it can be said that the notice of chance up when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the third checkpoint CP3 and the notice indicated by the character "attention" shown on the timer notice display TM1 are the same. The target of the chance-up notice shown in the production by the chance-up meter CMT and the target of the notice performed as a result of the timer notice production may be different. For example, in the production by the chance-up meter CMT, the third check The notice of chance up when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the point CP3 is the lever image 136Va, and the notice given as a result of the timer notice effect shows the display mode of the appearing lever image 136Va with higher reliability. It may change to (for example, change from red to gold, etc.).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing another example of the button effect step by step.

In FIG. 99, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (2), it is shown that the button effect is started. In this production example, six sets of operation promotion notification images including a combination of a button image and a remaining time display meter are displayed. Specifically, the first operation promotion notification image composed of the first button image 136a1 and the first remaining time display meter MT1 is arranged at the upper left of the display screen, and the second button image 136a2 and the second remaining time A second operation promotion notification image composed of the display meter MT2 is arranged in the upper center of the display screen, and a third operation promotion notification image composed of the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. The fourth operation promotion notification image, which is arranged in the upper right and consists of the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is arranged in the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth remaining. A fifth operation promotion notification image composed of the time display meter MT5 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen, and a sixth operation promotion notification image composed of the sixth button image 136a6 and the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 is displayed on the display screen. It is located at the bottom right of. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (4), it is shown that the gauges of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 are decreasing after the operation validity period is started. Has been done. In this production example, of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation validity period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation validity period for the other operation promotion notification images. It is shorter than the above, and the operation validity period elapses earlier. In this production example, the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image all have the same length of operation validity period. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (5), as shown in FIG. 99 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation promotion notification image is the character of the copanda. It has changed to KP, and it is shown that a notice is being given. The second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image have not changed. That is, in this effect example, only one operation promotion notification image out of the plurality of operation promotion notification images is changed by one operation of the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, and the fifth operation promotion are performed. The display mode is changed one by one with priority given to the notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image. The order of the operation promotion notification images that change the display mode is not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by one operation of the effect button 136.

In this effect example, the first remaining time display meter MT1 (remaining time display meter corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes with the highest priority when the effect button 136 is operated). The gauge is reduced faster than the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6. For example, as shown in FIG. 99 (4a), when the third remaining time display meter MT3 (effect button 136 is operated). The other remaining time display meter MT1 including the first remaining time display meter MT1 has a decrease in the gauge of the third operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes with the third priority. , MT2, MT4, MT5, MT6 may be faster or slower. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (4b), the sixth operation promotion notification has the lowest priority for changing the display mode when the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (effect button 136 is operated). The gauge of the remaining time display meter (corresponding to the image) may decrease faster or slower than the other remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Further, the remaining time display meter for accelerating the decrease of the gauge is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set to an appropriate one.

Further, in this effect example, the button images 136a to 136a6 are configured in each of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, but the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth For any one or two or more of the operation promotion notification images, another image may be displayed instead of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (4c), as an image constituting the sixth operation promotion notification image, a sixth button image 136a6 is used instead of the sixth button image 136a6 to promote the operation of the effect lever 136V. The lever image 136Va6 of the above may be displayed. In this case, any of the remaining time display meters of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image may have the same rate at which the gauge decreases, and as shown in FIG. 99 (4c), the sixth operation promotion notification image. The speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation promotion notification image constituting the lever image 136Va6 of the above decreases is made faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to other operation promotion notification images. It may be slowed down. With this configuration, for example, when the button effect is started and the display as shown in FIG. 99 (4c) is performed, it is promoted to operate the effect lever 136V once after operating the effect button 136 five times. You may be able to.

Further, in this effect example, the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image decreases is displayed as the remaining time in the other operation promotion notification image. Although it is made different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (4d), there may be two or more different gauges of the remaining time display meter. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 99 (4d), the decreasing speed of the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT3 and MT5 of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image is the other operation promotion notification. The fifth remaining time display meter MT1, MT2, MT4, MT6 of the image is different from the third operation promotion notification image corresponding to the fifth operation promotion notification image than the third remaining time display meter MT3 corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image. The remaining time display meter MT5 may decrease the gauge at a higher speed.

FIG. 100 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 100, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 100 (A1) to 100 (A6) show that a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed at the same time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 100 (A1), it is shown that the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 and TM2 frame in from the right side of the display area, the timer notice effect is started respectively. "10:00" is displayed on both timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2, suggesting that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this production example, as will be described later, the countdown speed of the timer display on one timer notice display is faster than the countdown speed of the timer display on the other timer notice display, so that the time until the countdown is completed is faster. It's different. In this production example, of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed above is referred to as the first timer notice display TM1, and the one displayed below is referred to as the second timer notice display TM2. be.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (A2), it is shown that the frame-in of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. After that, each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 starts the timer display countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (A3), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed on each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. In this production example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that of the first timer notice display TM1. The first timer notice display TM1 counts down according to the actual passage of time, but the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 100 (A3), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "09:73", and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is "06:73". It has become. The countdown speed is not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is set to a speed that matches the passage of the actual time. The countdown speed of the timer advance notice display TM2 of 1 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer advance notice display TM2.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (A4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is set to "00:00" and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "06:00", that is, the state when 4 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer notice display started is shown. Can be done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (A5), in the second timer notice display TM2, the character "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed instead of the timer display. On the other hand, the countdown of the first timer notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display is "05:87" at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (A5). After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 may be given. After the countdown is completed, the second timer notice display TM2 is deleted by, for example, frame-out.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (A6), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is set to “00:00” and the countdown is completed. After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 may be given. After that, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, frame-out after the countdown is completed.

In this production example, the case where the two timer notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer notice effect started earlier may be used. The countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display may be faster or slower than the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 100 (B1) to 100 (B4), a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed is added to one of the timer advance notice effects. Shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 100 (B1), it is shown that the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, when the timer notice display (first timer notice display TM1 and second timer notice display TM2) is framed in from the right side of the display area, the timer notice effect is started respectively. "10:00" is displayed on both timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2, suggesting that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this production example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display is the same.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (B2), it is shown that the frame-in of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. After that, each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 starts the timer display countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (B3), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed on each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. Both the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 count down according to the lapse of the actual time. At the timing shown in FIG. 100 (B3), both the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are "09:73". The countdown speed is not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed may be slower or faster than the actual passage of time. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (B3), it is shown that the timer addition effect is performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time to be added is notified.
Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (B4), the timer display on the first timer notice display TM1 is updated to "19:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1. The state is shown. At this time, since the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is not added, the difference of 10 seconds between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2. Is occurring. Therefore, although the two timer advance notice effects have been started, the timing at which the countdown ends is different because the time is added to one of the timer displays in the middle.

In this production example, the time is added to the timer display of one of the two timer notice displays, but the time may be shortened (subtracted) or during the execution of the timer notice effect. The countdown of either one of the timer displays may be paused so that the time until the countdown is completed is different.

Further, in this effect example, the case where the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer advance notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer advance notice started earlier may be started. The time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to the effect, and after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later is completed, the timer notice effect started earlier is added. The countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display may be completed. In addition, the time is shortened with respect to the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later, and before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later may be completed.

Further, in this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed while the two timer notice effects are being performed, the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to one of the timer notice effects. However, by adding time (or shortening the time, pausing the countdown, etc.) to the timer display in the timer notice display related to any timer notice effect, the display mode of any timer notice display can be changed. It may be changed.

In addition, after the two timer advance notice effects are started, two timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to each timer advance notice effect are performed, whereby the timer advance notice related to the timer advance notice effect is performed. The time may be added to the timer display in the display for each of them.

Further, after the two timer advance notice effects are started, three timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) are performed, for example, for one of the two timer advance notice effects. The timer display may be changed by two timer addition effects or the like, and the timer display may be changed by the remaining one timer addition effect or the like with respect to the other timer advance notice effect. Further, three timer addition effects and the like are performed, and for example, the timer display may be changed only by two of the three timer addition effects and the like, or only by one of the three timer addition effects and the like. The timer display may be changed, or the timer display may not be changed by any of the three timer addition effects.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 100 (C1) to 100 (C4), in the effect of urging the operation of any of the plurality of operating means, the remaining time display timer indicating the operation valid period for each of the plurality of operating means is set. The state of being displayed is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (C1), the button effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side. Corresponding to the left door image DRL, the left key image 137aL imitating the left key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping with the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL. , The remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. Further, corresponding to the right door image DRR, the right key image 137aR imitating the right key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping with the right door image DRR, and is displayed below the right key image 137aR. The remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed in. After that, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 by the player can be accepted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (C2), the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are reduced after the operation validity period is started. The situation is shown. In this production example, the operation valid period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation valid period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL, so that the operation valid period elapses earlier. It has become. Therefore, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

FIG. 100 (C3) shows a state in which the left key is operated by the player to select the left door image DRL. Specifically, the left door image DRL is moved to the center of the display screen and enlarged and displayed, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are erased. Further, the right door image DRR is erased together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. As a result, it is notified that the left door image DRL has been selected.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the door of the left door image DRL opens, and shows how the replay symbol RP appears. As a result, for example, it is foretold that a pseudo-ream will be performed.

On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 100 (C2), when the right key is operated and the right door image DRR is selected, as shown in FIG. 100 (C4a), the decorative symbol display device 208 has the right door image. The door of DRR may open and a pine pattern CC may appear. The word "Gekiatsu" is added to this pine pattern CC, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot has increased dramatically.

As described above, in this production example, when the one with the faster gauge decrease is selected from the two remaining time display meters, the notice display with higher reliability is performed, but eventually. You may select to display the same display. Further, when the one with the slower gauge decrease is selected from the two remaining time display meters, the notice display with higher reliability may be performed.

Further, in this production example, the operation valid period of the left door image DRL is shorter than the operation valid period of the right door image DRR, but the length of the operation valid period may be the same. For example, even if the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, wait until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0, and operate the right key. It may be enabled, or the right key operation may be disabled while waiting.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 101, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 101 (A1) to 101 (A12) show that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 101 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and when the timer notice effect is started and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it is displayed in a small size. .. Here, when the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started, the size may be at least small. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 is large before the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in a size, may be displayed in another size, or may be displayed in a different display mode itself.

In the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 101 (A2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (A3), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also decorated. It is changed to substantially the center of the symbol display device 208. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The first decorative symbol may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 which is enlarged and displayed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the enlarged display animation is being performed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may not change, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged. Further, in this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is always enlarged and displayed when the timer display becomes "03:00", but it may not be enlarged. For example, the timer notice may not be displayed. When the display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be easier to win a big hit than when the display TM1 is not enlarged. Further, in this effect example, the display position is changed when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the display position may not be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A4) to 101 (A7), the countdown in the enlarged timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes "0:00". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (A5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (A6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to see due to the enlarged timer notice display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 101 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 instead of the timer display calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed. The characters "attention" are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. After the timer display becomes "00:00", the character "attention" may not be displayed, or no effect may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). The timer notice display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being reduced and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (A10), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A11), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 101 (A12), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that the pseudo-ream is executed.

In this effect example, in the timer notice effect, when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the timer notice display TM1 is reduced. It may be displayed, the color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (numerical part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice may be changed. The orientation of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from landscape to portrait), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer may be changed. Other elements such as characters and symbols may be added to the notice display TM1, the time may be added to the timer display, the time may be shortened to the timer display, and the timer display may be added. The countdown of the timer may be stopped, the countdown speed of the timer display may be increased, the timer display may be counted up (rewind), or the timer notice display TM1 may be split and newly added. The timer notice display may be displayed, or when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed, these timer notice displays may be integrated and changed to one timer notice display.

Further, in this production example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes, a small size and a large size, but it may be changed to three or more sizes, for example, a timer display or the like. When displaying the character display of "attention" in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in medium size, and when displaying the timer display or the character display of "attention" in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in large size. It may be displayed in size. Thereby, for example, the display mode may be changed according to the reliability of the jackpot.

Further, in this production example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from a small size to a large size, but for example, the size may be changed from a small size to a medium size and then to a large size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "05:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a medium size, and when it becomes "03:00", the size changes from a medium size to a large size. It may be changed to the size. Further, although it changes from a small size to a medium size, it may not change to a large size.

Further, in this production example, when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, for example. When the remaining time in the timer display becomes "0:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a large size, or when the character "attention" is displayed, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The size may be changed to a large size.
Further, in this effect example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the frame of the timer notice display TM1 and the background color (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold>red>green> blue). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the size of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

Further, for example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the color of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 or the character display of "attention" (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue, etc.). ). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the size of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the character display of "attention" (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size, etc. ). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the character display of "attention".

Further, a certain effect may be likely to appear when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. For example, when the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, the pseudo-continuous symbol is likely to stop. You may do so.

Further, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, a specific effect is performed, but even if the countdown is completed, no effect may be performed. You may. Here, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be easily performed when the countdown is completed, and a big hit may be easily performed.

Further, in this production example, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 starts, the timer notice display TM1 is set to a small size display mode, but at the start of the countdown or the display start of the timer notice display TM1. It may be a large size display mode.

Further, in this production example, when the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the timer display also changes to a large size, but only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, and the timer display You may not change the size of. Further, the size of the timer display may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a small size. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the color of the frame portion or the background of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, although the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may not change. Further, although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, although the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. Further, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.
Further, the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by animation. In this case, for example, when the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes its form due to the animation, the form of the timer display may also change due to the animation. Further, although the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes due to the animation, the timer display may not change. Further, although the form of the timer display changes depending on the animation, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 101 (B1) to 101 (B4) shows another example in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 101 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "00:31" and counting down the timer display. Further, in the first decorative symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are being displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 101 (B2) to 101 (B3), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes "00:00". Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (B2), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, but it is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 101 (B4), the timer notice display TM1 instead of the timer display calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.
The characters "attention" are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. After the timer display becomes "00:00", the character "attention" may not be displayed, or no effect may be performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In this way, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed not only during the countdown of the timer display but also when the character "attention" is displayed. Further, when the timer display becomes "00:00", the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

The production example shown in FIGS. 102 (A1) to 102 (A3) is an example of displaying the timer notice display TM1 after the change in the display mode on another display means when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. Shown. In the production example shown in FIGS. 102 (A1) to 102 (A3), in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S replaces the family crest accessory 224E with the decorative symbol display device 208. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the sub-display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. At the timing shown in FIG. 102 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 102 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and the timer notice display TM1 is arranged in the upper center of the sub display device 208. On the timer notice display TM1, "09:69" is displayed as a timer display, and the countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size on the sub display device 208S. When the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a small size.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (A2), the decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the sub-display device 208S, the timer display countdown continues on the timer notice display TM1, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (A3), when the timer display has 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S moves to the decorative symbol display device 208, and further. Timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. When the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208, or the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed from the sub display device 208S as a decorative symbol. The enlarged display may be performed while moving across the display device 208, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed before straddling the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The countdown continues while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and enlarged display animations are being performed.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 102 (B1) to 102 (B3) is another example of displaying the timer notice display TM1 after the change of the display mode on another display means when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. An example is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the sub-display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. At the timing shown in FIG. 102 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, "09:69" is displayed as a timer display and a countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (B2), the decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (B2). Further, at this time, the sub display device 208S is operating, rises along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, is located on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is located on the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps with the displayed decorative design and timer notice display TM1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, while the sub-display device 208S is rising, the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S are erased. The variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S may be deleted before the sub-display device 208S starts moving, or the sub-display device 208S completes the movement. It may be erased at the timing when the sub-display device 208S starts moving, or it may be erased at the timing when the sub-display device 208S completes the movement. Further, only one of the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. Further, the display positions of the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed to the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (B3), when the timer display has 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the sub display device 208S, and further, Timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. When the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 208S, or the timer notice display TM1 may be sub-displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208. The enlarged display may be performed while moving across the display device 208S, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed before straddling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. The countdown continues while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and enlarged display animations are being performed. In this production example, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer notice display TM1 is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S, but the decorative symbol display device 208 is used. May continue to display the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced for display. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer display on these timer notice display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. ..

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 102 (C1) to 102 (C9) show another example of the display mode after the change of the timer notice display TM1. At the timing shown in FIG. 102 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

In the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 102 (C2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (C2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (C3), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. The timer notice display TM1a after the change has a mode in which the timer display is arranged inside the circular meter. As shown in FIGS. 102 (C3) to 102 (C6), the display state of this circular meter unit changes in a manner in which the gauge decreases clockwise from the 12 o'clock position with the passage of time. Although a part of the timer notice display TM1a after the change in the display mode overlaps with the variable icon h0, the variable icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a. Further, the timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed, but the size may be changed depending on the remaining time, for example, the circular meter portion is enlarged when the remaining 1 second is reached. It may be displayed. Further, the timer notice display TM1a after the display mode is changed may be composed of only a circular meter unit so that the timer display is not performed. Further, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the timer notice display TM1a after the display mode is changed, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The first decorative symbol may overlap with the timer notice display TM1a whose display mode has changed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the change display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the change display animation is being performed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed and displayed, the timer display portion may not be changed, but only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 102 (C4) to 102 (C6), the countdown and the gauge decrease display on the timer notice display TM1a are continuously performed until the timer display becomes "00:00". In this production example, the countdown effect is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the decrease display of the gauge of the circular meter unit. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (C5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (C6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to see due to the timer notice display TM1a. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1a.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1a becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 102 (C7), the timer notice display TM1a "continues" to the effect that a pseudo continuous effect is performed instead of the timer display. Character is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production is performed. In addition, characters other than "continue" may be displayed. For example, when the timer display countdown is completed and the process shifts to SP reach, "SP reach" or the like is displayed and SP reach is displayed. You may notify that the transition will occur. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, "attention" may be displayed in order to pay attention to the occurrence of the notice.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased, and then, as shown in FIG. 102 (A9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol. The display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved from the top to the bottom at a low speed is started. After that, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-ream is executed.

In this production example, the character "continue" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. The display may be performed so that the effect may not be performed. Further, in such a case, for example, when a pseudo-continuous production is performed, the big hit may be determined.

Further, in this effect example, when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed for the same effect, one of the timer notice displays may be displayed in a large size, or both. The timer notice display may be displayed in a large size. Further, one timer notice display is displayed with a timer of "03:00", and the other timer notice display is roughly displayed with, for example, "3 seconds left". A countdown may be displayed.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 103, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 103 (A1) to 103 (A8) show that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 103 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (A2), it is shown that the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. You will be notified that it will be done. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer advance notice effect is extended.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed, and the time to be added is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "05:00" indicating that the timer display has 5 seconds remaining, and the display position is also a decorative symbol display. It is changed to approximately the center of device 208. In this production example, the countdown is temporarily interrupted at "05:00", but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this production example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the timer advance notice display TM1 is added to the timer display. Is enlarged and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (A4), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the balloon of the navigation character YM, but the timer notice display in which the balloon of the navigation character YM is enlarged is displayed. It may be overlapped with TM1. Further, the condition for enlarging the timer notice display TM1 is not limited to the addition of time in the timer display, and when the timer display changes, for example, when the time in the timer display is shortened, the countdown is stopped, or the like. The timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 103 (A5), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 displays a count-up animation, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (A6), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size. And the display position is also changed to the original position. After that, the timer display countdown is restarted.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 103 (B1) to 103 (B7), the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed when the timer display time is added in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 103 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol, the left symbol shows that "decoration 7" is stopped, and the right symbol shows that "decoration 7" is stopped. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown display of the timer display is completed, and "00:00" is displayed. There is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "attention" to attract attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (B3), when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and "00:00" is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol is displayed to move at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. The pseudo-ream effect by the pseudo-ream pattern is continuously performed from FIGS. 103 (B3) to (B7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (B4), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 displays a count-up animation, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (B5), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 15 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (B6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown is restarted thereafter. The timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in its original size without being reduced. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped at the middle symbol, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (B7), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed, and then the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down, and the timer display is "14:92" at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (B7).

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 104, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 104 (A1) to 104 (A8) show that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the display mode of the timer notice display changes and the rank of the notice is increased. ing. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A1), the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that the swordsman has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "20:35" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A2), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the main character, the lord, has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (A2).

FIG. 104 (A3) shows how the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (A3).

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and the timer notice display TM1 The color of the frame has been changed from white to red, and "LvUP" is added to indicate that the reliability of the jackpot has increased. Then, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 has been upgraded. Although the timer display countdown is continuously performed, the countdown may be temporarily interrupted while the enlarged display is displayed. Here, in this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a display with high reliability of the jackpot. The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed by changing the mode.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). At this time, the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of "LvUP" is erased. The timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in its original size without being reduced.

As shown in FIG. 104 (A6), the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", and when the countdown is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is replaced with the timer display as shown in FIG. 104 (A7). The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice.

Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (A7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. In this cut-in display, along with the character of the princess, the characters "Suddenly hot" suggesting that the jackpot is highly reliable are displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A7), in response to the timer advance notice display TM1 being ranked up, the character display of "expected large" is added. As a result, it is easier to win a big hit than when a cut-in display without the character display of "expected large" is displayed. The character display of "expected large" may or may not be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up. Further, the character display of "expected large" may be displayed on the condition that the timer notice display TM1 is ramped up, or may be displayed even if the timer notice display TM1 is not ranked up. You may. In this production example, the character display of "expected large" is more likely to be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up than when it is not ranked up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (A7), the display of the variable icon h0 is also changed to display the notice. The change in the display of the variable icon h0 may be performed as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect, or may be performed regardless of the timer advance notice effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice given by the timer notice effect may be given.

As described above, in this effect example, the rank-up of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be a notification indicating that the advance notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is promoted, or the timer advance notice. The rank-up of the display TM1 itself may function as a notice of chance-up. Further, by increasing the rank of the timer notice display TM1, it may be notified in advance that the expectation that a notice with high reliability of the big hit is displayed has increased.

Further, in this effect example, the rank-up of the timer notice display TM1 suggests that the notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer notice effect may be promoted. It may suggest that the design of the reach in is likely to be promoted. Specifically, for example, when the reach is produced by "decoration 2" in which the probability change jackpot is not confirmed, the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, and if the jackpot is reached, the probability variation jackpot is achieved. May change to the reach of "decoration 7", which is likely to be a big hit.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 104 (B1) to 104 (B7) show how the effect using the chance-up meter is started when the timer advance notice effect is being performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (B1), the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that the swordsman has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "20:35" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (B2), an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy has started to be displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (B2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 104 (B2), in addition to the start point SP and the final point GP, the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (B2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (B3), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the starting point SP. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (B3).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (B4), at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice of chance up due to the appearance of Boy's character BOY is being given. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (B4), when the Boy character BOY appears, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed so that the Boy character BOY stands out. That is, by reducing the timer notice display TM1 to display, it may be possible to prevent the display of the Boy character BOY from being disturbed, and that the Boy character BOY has given notice of a chance increase. It may be easily recognizable. Even if the timer notice display TM1 is reduced in size, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (B4). The timer display countdown may be interrupted while the reduced display is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 104 (B4) to 104 (B6), the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1 is maintained until the notice of chance up by the Boy character BOY is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (B7), when the notice of chance up by the boy character BOY is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

In this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced in size while the chance-up notice is being given to notify that the chance-up notice is being given. The purpose may be achieved by changing the display mode. For example, in addition to the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1, the enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1, the change in the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 or the timer display itself, the change in the display position of the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by changing the shape of the display TM1 or the like.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 105, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 105 (A1) to 105 (A3) show a state in which the display position of the timer notice display displayed at the time of transition to the super reach is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 105 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of holds, "1" indicating that the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (A1) shows a transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (A1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "21:37" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (A3), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. The timer notice display TM1 changes the display position when the animation display of the duel scene is started. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed in the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 105 (A3'), the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed to make the super reach effect stand out.

In this production example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts, but when the production shift to the super reach shown in FIG. 105 (A1) is performed. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the title of the super reach shown in FIG. 105 (A2) is displayed. May be good. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be configured to move to the original position again at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or when it becomes 0, the chance of the timer notice display TM1 is increased, etc.). It may be displayed as it is. Further, even when the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed, it is enlarged (for example, displayed first) at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or when it becomes 0, the chance of the timer notice display TM1 is increased, etc.). The size may be displayed or displayed larger than the size initially displayed).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 105 (B1) to 105 (B7) show how to change the display position of the timer notice display displayed when the effect movable body operates. At the timing shown in FIG. 105 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of holds, "1" indicating that the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (B1) shows a transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "27:37" and counting down the timer display.

FIG. 105 (B2) shows that the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "25:34" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (B2). Here, the timer notice display TM1 has at least a part overlapped by the second large board behavior accessory 224 Gb and the fourth large board behavior accessory 224 Gd, and the timer notice display is more than in the non-overlapping state. It is said that TM1 is difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (B3), the timer advance notice display TM1 changes the display position to a position where it does not overlap with the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed in the center portion of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper end portion of the center of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. If the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate, the display position may not be changed, but the display position may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the effect image that appears when the light guide plate IL emits light is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, but the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is not changed accordingly. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the light guide plate IL emits light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 105 (B6), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (B7), the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (center portion at the right end of the display screen). In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "21:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (B7). The timing at which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position. , The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position, or the timer notice display TM1 may be moved. After starting the movement to the original position, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may start the operation of returning to the initial position.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 105 (C1) to 105 (C5) show how the positional relationship between the timer notice display and the decorative symbol is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 105 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, "29:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Further, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (C2), it is shown that the “decoration 7” is stopped in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and is in the reach state. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "22:04" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (C2). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (C3), the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is displayed. , Navi character YM and hold icon h11 are framed out and hidden. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "21:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol, and the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the right symbol of the first decorative symbol. The timer notice display TM1 may overlap with the first decorative symbol.
The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (C4) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (C4), the title of the super reach in which the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (C5), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-mentioned chance up meter CMT is displayed, and an effect using the chance up meter is performed.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 106, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 106 (A1) to 106 (A10) show how the display position of the timer notice display is changed by the operation of the player. At the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second holding number display, “1” indicating that the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (A1) shows a transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “21:37” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (A3), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the main character, the lord, has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A3). Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guide display is performed in which the characters "reduce timer" are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player can lower it. It has been notified that the timer notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed by operating the key. In this production example, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but it may be displayed from the time when the timer notice production is started, or when the reach state is reached. It may be displayed in.

After that, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed and its display position is displayed as shown in FIG. 106 (A5). change. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed in the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper part of the guide display. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while being reduced may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be reduced in size after the display position is changed, or may be reduced in size and then the display position may be changed. Further, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A5). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 106 (A5), the characters "enlarge timer" are displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the upper key to enlarge the timer notice display TM1. Then, it is displayed in the original size, and it is notified that the display position also returns to the original position.

After that, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A6), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed and returns to the original size as shown in FIG. 106 (A7). , The display position also returns to the original position. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "17:81" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A7). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 106 (A7), the guide display is performed in which the characters “reduce timer” are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the lower key. As a result, it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 106 (A3), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display size and the default display position, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, The timer notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (A8) shows that the animation display of the duel scene is continuing. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (A8).

Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (A9), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is deleted. , It is shown that the display position (display size) of the timer notice display TM1 cannot be changed. The display position and display size of the timer notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. If the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed when the timer display becomes "03:00" and the timer display is reduced, the display size returns to the default display position at this timing. Alternatively, the display may remain reduced at the changed display position.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (A10), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is set to “00:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 106 (B1) to 106 (B9) show that the timer notice display is divided and displayed during the execution of the timer notice effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (B1), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “20:35” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (B2), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the main character, the lord, has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (B2).

FIG. 106 (B3) shows how the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (B3).

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (B4), an effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and then FIG. 106. As shown in (B5), the timer notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays may be referred to as the left timer notice display TM1L, and the timer notice display displayed on the right side may be referred to as the right timer notice display TM2R. The timer displays on these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R each indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (B5), they indicate "13:56", respectively. In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number of divisions of the timer notice display is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The larger the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Further, in these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the color of the frame is changed to red, but the color of the frame does not have to be changed, and the case where the color of the frame is changed to red is the case of the frame. It may be easier to make a big hit than when the color does not change. Further, only the color of one of the frames of the timer notice display TM1L and TM1R may be changed to red.

After that, when the timer display on the timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. 106 (B6), the timer display on the timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R as shown in FIG. 106 (B7). Instead, the word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (B8), it is shown that the decorative pattern display device 208 is displaying a cut-in indicating that the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach". There is. This cut-in display is an effect performed when the countdown of the timer display on one of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the left timer notice display TM1L) is completed, and the reliability of the jackpot is high. It notifies that it will be promoted to a higher reach production. It should be noted that the effect may be performed when the countdown of the timer display in both of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is completed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (B9), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach in which the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 106 (B9), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach in that the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, but he follows the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (B9), a notice display showing how the Copanda cheering party KPD composed of three Copanda characters is cheering is performed, and the SP swordsman reach It informs that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically increased. This Copanda cheering party KPD is a notice character displayed when the countdown of the timer display on the other timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) is completed.

In this production example, the chance-up notice and reach production are developed corresponding to each of the two timer notice displays, but one production (development of reach production) is provided corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can also be said that the chance-up production is being performed even in the developed reach production.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 107, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 107 (A1) to 107 (A5) show a timer advance notice effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 107 (A1) to 107 (A5), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 107 (A1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed, which has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). .. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 107 (A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. The indicated "1" is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer advance notice effect is performed, "15:47" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (A2), the animation of the duel scene is continuously performed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (A2).

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (A3), a predetermined effect is applied to the display area in the vicinity of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the display area in the vicinity of the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "14:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (A3).

Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (A4), it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N reciprocate left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, it is shown that the timer notice display is divided into two. After the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed, the timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N each indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (A4), "13: 56 ”is shown. Although the timer display countdown continues even during the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. May interrupt the countdown of the timer display. In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number of divisions of the timer notice display is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The larger the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. For example, in addition to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the timer display may be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each return to their initial positions. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "12:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (A5).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 107 (B1) to 107 (B5) show a timer advance notice effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the production example shown in FIGS. 107 (B1) to 107 (B5), a mini display device 208P is provided in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. The mini display device 208P is provided at an appropriate position such as the game board 200 or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). In this production example, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full-color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as an LCD, an EL, a 7-segment display, a lamp, and a drum may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and the mini display device 208P can be changed between an easy-to-see state and a difficult-to-see state by driving the shutter member.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (B1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "18:19" and counting down the timer display. In addition, the timer advance notice effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, "6:19" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the two timer advance notice effects are performed in parallel, and the timer display is set to "0" in the timer advance notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In that case, an effect such as a chance-up notice may be performed, and even if the timer display becomes "0" in the timer advance effect on the mini display device 208P, an effect such as a chance-up notice is performed. In some cases.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (B2), the timer notice display is displayed at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has 15 seconds remaining. The effect image is displayed around TM1 and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, even in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing of "3:00" indicating that the timer display has 3 seconds remaining.

Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the timer display time indicated by the mini display device 208P is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a timer notice display. The character "UP" indicating that the timer is added to the timer display of TM1 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (B4), a time of 3 seconds is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the time is updated to "18:00".

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (B5), the timer advance notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the countdown of the timer display. At the timing shown in FIG. 107 (B5), the timer display is "17:99". On the other hand, in the mini display device 208P, the display screen is difficult to see due to the shutter member. In this effect example, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added with time, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P is terminated, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even if time is added to the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM in the device 208, the timer effect in the mini display device 208P may not be completed, and then the timer display may be counted down.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 108, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

An example of the effect shown in FIGS. 108 (A1) to 108 (A10) is a state in which the timer advance notice effect is notified by displaying that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared before the start. Shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 3, the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the second hold icon h13 is displayed. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A2), it is shown that the timer advance notice preparation effect has started. Specifically, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer advance notice preparation effect is started. The timer advance notice preparation effect is intended to give the player a sense of expectation by displaying that the preparation is in progress until the timer advance notice effect starts. At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A2), nothing is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. In addition, for example, the display of "STANDBY" described later may be performed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A3) shows that the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 to notify the fact. That is, in this production example, it is a production performed as one mode of the look-ahead notice for notifying that the timer notice production will be performed in the hold. It should be noted that the change notice may be used to give notice that the timer notice effect will be performed in the changing symbol display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display unit. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced in size and becomes a mini size display size. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while being reduced may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be reduced in size after the display position is changed, or may be reduced in size and then the display position may be changed. Further, the timer notice display TM1 does not have to be reduced and displayed, and the display position does not have to be changed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A5), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 9-Decoration 1". At this time, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A6), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer advance notice display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display unit. As described above, it can be said that the timer advance notice preparation effect is an effect that may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A7), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A8), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer advance notice display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display unit. The symbol variation display this time corresponds to the hold that was the target of pre-reading.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed and returns to the original size, and the display position also returns to the original position, and the timer is displayed from the display of "STANDBY". It is shown that the display is switched to "10:00". As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect has been started. When changing the display position of the timer notice display TM1, the animation that the timer notice display TM1 moves while expanding may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed and then enlarged and displayed, or the enlarged display and then the display position may be changed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. The display of may be switched to the timer display. Further, the timing at which the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display may be the same as the timing at which the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A10), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has started.

After that, for example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes a display at a specific time (for example, "03:00") or when the display mode changes, the display size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. You may change from a small size to a large size.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 108 (B1) to 108 (B8), a plurality of clock warning icons MI1 that function as pre-reading notices are stocked, and timer warning production is performed for the number of stocked clock warning icons MI1. Is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 3, the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the second hold icon h13 is displayed. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B2), a state in which "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. A clock notice icon MI1 is added to this "decoration 3", indicating that one clock notice icon MI1 is stocked. In addition, the notice icon MI1 of two or more clocks may be stocked at one time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B3), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 9-Decoration 1". Further, below the second decorative symbol, a timer notice stock display area TMst indicating the number of stocks of the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, "timer notice stock x 1" indicating that one clock notice icon MI1 is stocked is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is performed at least once during the hold. It should be noted that the time may be added to the timer display in the timer notice effect by the number of stocks of the clock notice icon MI1. Further, the remaining time to be displayed on the timer display when the timer notice effect is started may be determined according to the number of stocks of the clock notice icon MI1. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the number of stocks is added each time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B4), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In addition, it is shown that the navigation character notice is being given by the navigation character YM. This navigation character notice is performed by displaying a balloon in which the characters "get" are displayed together with the clock icon in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The navigation character notice in this production example functions as a pre-reading notice that the timer notice production is performed in the hold. As described above, the number of clock notice icons MI1 stocked in one symbol variation display is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, there may be a plurality of types of effects performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. Further, in the effect performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked, the number of the notice icons MI1 of the clock to be stocked is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B5), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". Further, in the timer notice stock display area TMst, "timer notice stock x 3" indicating that the notice icons MI1 of the three clocks are stocked is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is performed at least three times during the hold.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B6), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B7), it is shown that one of the three stocked notice icons MI1 of the clock is digested and the timer notice effect is started. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, and it is suggested that the chance-up notice may be given 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Further, in this production example, one clock notice icon MI1 is digested to start one timer notice effect, but two clock notice icons MI1 are digested and two timer notice effects are performed in parallel. You may do it. Further, in this production example, one timer notice icon MI1 is digested to start one timer notice effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 108 (B7'), the clock notice icon MI1 is used. The timer notice effect may be started without digestion.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (B8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position to the substantially right center of the display screen, and the timer display countdown is started. At this time, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by a movement animation. When the notice icon MI1 of the clock is digested and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may not be displayed in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed in the center of the right end of the display screen from the beginning. ..

In the above description, "display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol". A game table equipped with a display device 208N, a mini display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.], and one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the timer shown in FIG. 82 (1). Notice display TM1 timer notice effect, etc.], and the first display is a certain effect [for example, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 80 (11) to (12) and the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 81 (a5). Decorative symbol display device 208, such as a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, a lever effect shown in FIG. 81 (c2), a notice by a stop display of the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol shown in FIG. , Sub-display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, effect display using mini display device 208P] is a display that notifies the timing of execution. , One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to (5)], and the second display is the above-mentioned display. It is a display for notifying that the timing at which a certain effect is started changes [for example, "for example," displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM in the timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to (5). "Addition" or "+10 seconds" display, etc.], the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to (5). In addition, when the timer advance notice effect on the timer advance notice display TM1 is being performed, the timer addition effect is being performed, etc.]. ] Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, even if the first display notifies the time until a certain effect is started, the second display foretells that the time notified will change. Don't just wait for the time to start a certain production, but also enjoy the first display with the expectation that the time may change. You may be able to.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. .. Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may notify a timing other than the timing at which a certain effect is performed. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing when a certain effect is performed.

In addition, the second display may only foretell that the timing at which a certain effect is started changes, and also foretells other than the change in the timing at which a certain effect is started. It may be a thing. In addition, the second display may always give a notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started will change, or may not give a notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started will change. It may be a thing.

Further, even if only the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or a display other than the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display. good. Further, the second display may always be displayed during the display of the first display, or the second display may not be displayed during the display of the first display.

The start of the timer notice display may be the start of the display of the first display or the start of the display of the countdown display (for example, when a number is displayed). (Start, etc.), and the countdown of the countdown display may have started. Further, the end of the timer notice display may mean that the first display is hidden, or the countdown display is hidden (for example, the number is erased and "attention" is displayed. It may be (including the displayed state), it may be that the countdown by the countdown display is completed (for example, 0 is displayed), and the display displayed on the first display after the countdown is completed. (For example, the character display of "attention") may be hidden.

Further, "It is configured so that the display mode of the first display changes after the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to (5). After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated, the time is added on the timer display, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the first display.

Here, the display mode of the first display may be changed only after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed. The display mode of the display other than the above may also be configured to change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be configured to change after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display may change after the second display is displayed. It may be configured so that it may not change.

Even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change, and the display mode of the first display changes only when the second display is displayed. It may change.

Further, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means, and one of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]. One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a sub-display device 208S or the like], and the first display is a display displayed on the first display means. The game table is characterized in that the second display is a display displayed on the second display means. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player's line of sight may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is completed, but by displaying the second display on the second display means as well. , It may be possible to focus on both of the two display means without focusing the line of sight only on the first display means.

Here, the display means may be composed of only the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured to include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means. May be good.

Further, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed on a display other than the first display means. Further, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, or may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be always displayed on the second display means, or may not be displayed on the second display means.

Further, "The second display means is arranged on the front side of the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (A1), the sub display device 208S is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Located on the side, etc.],
The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A2) to (A3). , The decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with the sub display device 208S on which the timer is added.] ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, the second display means may overlap with the first display means while displaying the second display, so that the second display is noticed and a certain effect is started. It may be possible to make it easier to recognize that the time to reach may change.

Here, the second display means on which the second display is displayed may overlap only the first display means, or the second display means on which the second display is displayed may overlap. Depending on the display means, display means other than the first display means may also overlap. Further, the first display means may always overlap with the second display means on which the second display is displayed, and the second display means on which the second display is displayed may cause the first display means to overlap. One display means may not overlap.

Further, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means on which the second display is displayed, or the second display on which the second display is displayed may overlap. The first display means may be overlapped by the display means other than the means.

Further, "the first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 86 (B1)] and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 86 (B3) is a decorative symbol display device]. The second display means is configured to be movable between positions that overlap with the front side in the substantially center of 208].
The second display means is a display means that overlaps the first display means at the second position [for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device. A game table characterized in that the sub display device 208S overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 at a position overlapping the front side at the substantially center of 208]. ] Was also explained.

Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means of the above may also be configured to be movable. Further, the second display means may be configured to always move between the first position and the second position, or the second display means may move between the first position and the second position. It may be configured so that it may not move.

Further, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, and the second display means may be configured to be movable other than between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

Further, the second display means may overlap with the first display means only at the second position, or may overlap with the first display means at positions other than the second position. It may be anything. Further, the second display means may always overlap the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap the first display means at the second position. May be good.

Further, "the first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 80 (2) to (7)].
The countdown display is a display in which the timing until the certain effect is performed is performed by the countdown [for example, as shown in FIGS. 80 (2) to 80 (7), the timer of the timer advance notice display TM1. A game table characterized by the fact that the countdown on the display informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

Here, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may always include the countdown display, or may not include the countdown display.

Further, the countdown display may be such that only the timing until a certain effect is performed is performed by the countdown, or the timing other than the timing until a certain effect is performed may also be performed by the countdown. .. Further, the countdown display may be such that the timing until a certain effect is performed is always performed by the countdown, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be performed by the countdown. good.

Further, "a game table characterized in that the countdown by the countdown display is continued even when the second display is displayed. ] Was also explained.

Here, even when the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, and even when the second display is displayed, the countdown other than the countdown by the countdown display is continued. There may be something. Further, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued, and even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not continue. May be good.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only in the state where the second display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display is continued even in the state other than the state where the second display is displayed. May be good.

Further, "a game table characterized in that the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted during the display of the second display. ] Was also explained.

Here, during the display of the second display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, or during the display of the second display, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted without fail during the display of the second display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the second display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the second display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the second display is not being displayed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a display of the character" attention "in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 80 (8)", and the third display. The display is a display different from the first display, the third display is a display different from the second display, and the third display is not included in the certain effect. It is a display, and when the first display becomes a display indicating 0, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 80 (7) to (8), a timer notice is given. When the timer display on the display TM1 becomes 0, the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, the countdown by the first display may further enhance the expectation for the third display.

Here, when the first display shows 0, only the third display may be displayed, and when the first display shows 0, the third display may be displayed. Display other than may be displayed. Further, when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display may be displayed without fail, and when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display is displayed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the first display indicates 0, and the third display may be displayed except when the first display indicates 0. The display of three may be displayed.

Further, "a game table characterized in that the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the second display is displayed than when the second display is not displayed. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation by displaying the second display.

In addition, when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed. There may be.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 80 (9) to (12)], and the certain effect is A game table characterized in that the effect includes the fourth display, and the fourth display is an effect display. ] Was also explained.

Here, a certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include a display other than the fourth display. Further, a certain effect may always include the fourth display, or may not include the fourth display.

In addition, "the effect movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements [for example, family crest accessory 224E, Senryobako accessory 224H, 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M" , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub-display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.], and one of the plurality of types of operations is the first operation [for example, the third operation shown in FIG. 81 (d3). 1 operation of the large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd], the certain effect is an effect including the first operation, and the first operation is an effect operation. A game table characterized by being. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect movable means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of actions, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of actions. Further, the effect capable means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

Further, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of executing an operation other than the first operation. Further, the effect movable means may be one that always executes the first operation, or may not execute the first operation.

Further, a certain effect may include only the first operation, or may include an operation other than the first operation. Further, a certain effect may always include the first operation, or may not include the first operation.

In addition, "when the certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the certain effect is not performed [for example, FIGS. 80 (11) to 80 (11) to FIG. A game table characterized in that, when the pseudo-ream shown in 12) is started, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the pseudo-ream is not started]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that a certain effect will be performed.

In addition, when a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed. May be good.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 16 (9) to (14) and the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 80 (9) to (12). The pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 89 and the notice display for increasing the chance shown in FIGS. 89 (4) and (13)] In the period until the above, the fifth display may be started to be displayed, the fifth display is a notice display, and the case where the fifth display is displayed is the fifth display. It is easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the display is not displayed. [For example, when the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 16 (9) to 16 (14) is given, the conversation notice is given. It is easier to get a big hit than when there is no such thing]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the fifth display will be displayed in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display. be.

Here, in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, only the fifth display may be started to be displayed, or the first display may be displayed. In the period from the start of the display to the start of the display, the display other than the fifth display may also be started. Further, in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, the fifth display may always be started, or after the first display is started to be displayed. In the period until the second display is started, the fifth display may not be started.

Further, the fifth display may be started only in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, or the first display may be displayed. The fifth display may be started in a period other than the period from the start to the start of the display.

In addition, when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed. There may be.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.]." ] Was also explained. Further, "the game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like]. ] Was also explained.

Further, in the above description, "display means capable of displaying several types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decoration". A game table equipped with a symbol display device 208N, a mini display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.], and one of the plurality of types of displays is a period display [for example, a chance increase shown in FIG. 93 (A1). Meter CMT display, etc.], and the period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 89, a chance. The upmeter CMT may be displayed during the period when the swordsman reach is being performed, etc.], and one of the plurality of types of displays is shown in the first effect display [for example, FIG. 89 (18). , Notice by lever effect, etc.], and the period display notifies the first timing [for example, the timing shown at the checkpoint CP3, which is shown in FIG. 89 (18), at which the notice by lever effect is started]. It is a display, and the first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started, and the first timing after the display of the period display is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 93 (A1) to 93 (A2), before the timing shown by the checkpoint CP3 is reached, the period display may be erased in FIG. 93 (A2). When the indicated cut-in is displayed, the chance-up meter CMT is erased, etc.]. ] Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, since the first timing of the period display is known during the display of the period display, there is a possibility that the display means will not be seen until the first timing is near. Here, the period display may be hidden before the first timing is reached. Even at the timing before the first timing comes, the line of sight can be directed to the display means to see the period display. In some cases.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to draw in the game from the time when the period display is displayed until the first timing is reached.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, a plurality of types of displays may be always displayed, or a plurality of types of displays may not be displayed.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the period display and the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the period display and the first effect display, or may not display the period display and the first display.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the period display may be for notifying only the first timing, or may be for notifying other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

In addition, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. Previously, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be deleted without fail before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the period is before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started. The display may not be erased.

Further, the period display may be deleted only before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. In addition to the previous period display, the period display may be deleted. The period during which the period display is displayed may be during the symbol variation display, the jackpot game, the demo display, the symbol stop display, etc., regardless of the reach.

Further, the period display may be displayed during the execution of all reach, or may be displayed only during the execution of a specific reach, and may not be displayed during the execution of other reach effects. good. For example, the period display may not be displayed at the time of long reach and may be displayed at the time of SP reach. Further, it may not be displayed in the first half of the SP reach, but may be displayed in the latter half of the SP reach. Further, it may be displayed in the first half of the SP reach and not displayed in the latter half of the SP reach.

Further, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the chance up meter is started to be displayed, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is finished. good. Further, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing at which an effect such as a reach effect in which the period is displayed is started, and the end of the period display is the timing at which the effect is ended. It does not matter whether the chance up meter is actually displayed or not. Further, the start of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or the marker on the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or the marker on the chance up meter is finished. There may be. Further, when the chance up meter can be displayed / hidden by the operating means, the start of the period display is the timing when the chance up meter is started to be displayed by the operating means, and the period display is started. The end may be a timing at which the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operating means.

Further, the start of the period display means from the start of the period display effect (for example, a display suggesting that the chance up meter can be displayed) to the end of the period display effect (for example, the chance up meter). It may be until the display suggesting that can be displayed is hidden, or until the chance up meter is hidden). Further, the period display includes not only the one displayed until the first timing is reached, but also the one that is erased before the first timing is reached.

Further, for a certain period, there may be two or more in the period during which the reach effect display is performed. At this time, the period display may be started and ended at certain periods, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display starts and ends, the period display itself is continuously displayed, and when the second certain period starts, a new period is started. The second period display as a display may start and end.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second effect display [for example, display of the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 93 (A2), display of the effect image shown in FIG. 93 (A2b), etc.] The second effect display is different from the first effect display, and the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing is reached [for example, FIG. As shown in FIGS. 93 (A1) to 93 (A2) and 93 (A2b), in the production by the chance-up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani is shown in FIG. 93 (A2) before reaching the third checkpoint CP3. The cut-in of the grandfather shown may be displayed, the effect image shown in FIG. 93 (A2b) may be displayed, etc.], and the period display does not notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 93 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b), in the production by the chance up meter CMT, the display timing of the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 93 (A2) The display of the effect image shown in FIG. 93 (A2b) is not notified], and the period display is deleted during the display of the second effect display [for example, FIGS. 93 (A1) to 93 (A2). ) And the effect image shown in FIG. 93 (A2b), the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc. ], A game table featuring that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display that is not notified by the period display is displayed, the second effect display may be displayed even before the first timing, so before the first timing comes. May also have expectations.

Here, only the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, or the effect display other than the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing. There may be cases. Further, the second effect display may always be displayed before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing, or when the second effect display is displayed other than before the first timing. There may be. Further, the period display may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. You may. Further, the period display may not always notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. good.

Further, only the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display, or the display other than the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display. Further, the period display may always be deleted during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be deleted during the display of the second effect display. Further, the period display may be deleted only during the display of the second effect display, and the period display may be deleted other than during the display of the second effect display.

In addition, instead of the effect display, it may be a notification other than an error such as an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a firing position, or a notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card. Further, as the mode of the effect display, the display may be displayed by light emission by the LED, operation by the effect movable means, or light emission by the light guide plate.

Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may be notified by the period display. Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

In addition, "the second effect display is a second notice display [for example, a notice display by displaying the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 93 (A2) or displaying an effect image shown in FIG. 93 (A2b)]. A game table characterized by being. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display of the second effect display is displayed before the first timing, which suggests that there is a possibility of a big hit without waiting for the first timing. In some cases, the player can be expected even during the period until the first timing comes.

In addition, "a game table characterized in that the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the second effect display is displayed than when the second effect display is not displayed. ] Was also explained.

When the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. It may not be done. In addition, "the effect movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements [for example, family crest accessory 224E, Senryobako accessory 224H, 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M" , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub-display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.], and one of the plurality of types of operations is the second operation [for example, the third operation shown in FIG. 93 (A3b). 1 large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd operation, etc.], and the second operation is an effect operation, and the second effect display [for example, the effect shown in FIG. 93 (A2b)). A game table characterized in that the second operation may be performed during the display of [display of an image, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect movable means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of actions, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of actions. Further, the effect movable means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

Further, during the display of the second effect display, only the second operation may be performed, or during the display of the second effect display, an operation other than the second operation may be performed. You may. Further, the second operation may always be performed during the display of the second effect display, or the second operation may not be performed during the display of the second effect display.

Further, "One of the plurality of types of operations is the first operation [for example, the operation of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIGS. 15 (E1) to 15 (E2) and the operation shown in FIG. 15 (F1). The operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "the period display is configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 93 (A2a) to (A3a), the character of the princess. After the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have expectations about the redisplay of the period display.

Here, after the period display is deleted, only the period display may be displayed again, or after the period display is deleted, the display other than the period display is displayed again. It may be configured. In addition, the period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is deleted, or the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is deleted. You may.

Further, the period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display is deleted, or the period display may be displayed again even after the period display is deleted. May be good.

Further, "after the period display is erased, the period display is not displayed until the certain period elapses [for example, as shown in FIGS. 93 (A2) to (A5). In addition, after the chance-up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in of the grandfather character, the chance-up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

Here, after the period display is deleted, only the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is deleted, until a certain period elapses. It may be configured so that a display other than the period display is not displayed. Further, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses after the period display is deleted, or a period until a certain period elapses after the period display is deleted. The display may be configured to be displayed. Further, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses only after the period display is deleted, or a certain period elapses even after the period display is deleted. The period display may be configured not to be displayed until.

In addition, when there are a plurality of certain periods in the period in which the reach effect display is performed, after the period display is deleted in the first certain period, the period display is displayed in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be visible when a second period after the first period is started. Further, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period, or the symbol may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed until the variable display ends.

In addition, "the game table is characterized in that the certain period is a period during which super reach is being executed. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third effect display [for example, a notice of champ-up by displaying the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 89 (4), the lord shown in FIG. 89 (13). The notice of chance up by displaying the cut-in image CI3, etc.], the third effect display is different from the first effect display, and the period display is the second timing [for example, The timing indicated by the checkpoint CP1 at which the announcement of the champ-up by the display of the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 89 (4) is started, and the announcement of the chance increase by the display of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord shown in FIG. 89 (13). The timing indicated by the checkpoint CP2 at which is started] is also displayed, and the second timing is the timing at which the display of the third effect display may be started. A game table characterized by being. ] Was also explained.

Here, the period display may notify only the second timing, or may also notify timings other than the second timing. Further, the period display may always notify the second timing, or may not notify the second timing.

Further, the second timing may be such that only the display of the third effect display may be started, or the display other than the display of the third effect display may be started. It may be a thing. Further, the second timing may be such that the display of the third effect display is always started, or the display of the third effect display may not be started.

The timing displayed by the period display may be 3 or more.

In addition, the place where the effect display is performed corresponding to the reach may be fixed, such that when a certain reach occurs, the effect display is always performed three times, and when another reach occurs, the effect display is always performed twice. Even if the reach is the same, the effect display may be changed so that the effect display is performed three times and the effect display is performed only once at other times. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of "not notifying too much", and conversely, it may be more likely to come off. Further, the susceptibility to a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of notified timings. In addition, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the easier it is to win a big hit.

Further, the second timing may be the timing after the first timing, the second timing may be the timing before the first timing, and the first timing and the second timing may be used. The two timings may be the same.

Further, the game table is characterized in that "the first effect display is a first notice display [for example, a notice by the lever effect shown in FIG. 89 (18)]. ] Was also explained.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "a display of one type out of a plurality of types of displays is a third display, and" when at least a part of the first display becomes difficult to see "means" the third display. A game table characterized in that "when at least a part of the first display is overlapped by". ] Was also explained.

Further, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means, the display means is a first display means, and the first display means may display the period display. It is a means, the second display means is a means that may perform an effect operation, and the second display means may overlap at least a part of the period display. A featured game console. ] Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be composed of only a plurality of display means, or may be composed of other than the plurality of display means. Further, the display means may be always composed of a plurality of display means, or may not be composed of a plurality of display means.

Further, the first display means may display only the period display, or may display a display other than the period display. Further, the first display means may always display the period display, or may not display the period display.

Further, the second display means may be one that may perform only the effect operation, or may be one that may perform an operation other than the effect operation. In addition, the second display means may be one that always performs the effect operation, or may not perform the effect operation.

Further, the second display means may overlap at least a part of the period display, or the second display means may overlap at least a part of the period display. There may be. Further, the second display means may always overlap at least a part of the period display, and the second display means may not overlap at least a part of the period display. May be good.

Further, in the above description, "display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third A game table equipped with a decorative symbol display device 208N, a mini display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.], and one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, FIGS. 98 (A1) to 98 (A1) to FIG. The effect by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. (A9)], and one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display [for example, the conversation shown in FIGS. 98 (A4) to 98 (A9)]. The display of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 in the notice], the first display and the second display are different displays, and at least a part of the display modes of the first display [for example, FIG. 98]. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in (A1)] may change at the first speed [for example, the speed at which the gauge disappears in 10 seconds]. At least a part of the display mode of the second display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather shown in FIG. 98 (A4)] has the second speed [for example, the gauge disappears in 5 seconds]. The game table is characterized in that the first speed and the second speed are different speeds, which may change depending on the speed and the like. ] Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In recent years, many displays have been displayed on the display means, and there has been a problem that a player who is unfamiliar with the game or a player who plays the model for the first time does not know where to pay attention. In this game table, by making the first speed different from the second speed, the player naturally guides the line of sight to the fast (slow) display in which the display mode changes, and the player having the above problem. May also be able to entertain the production.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the period display may be for notifying only the first timing, or may be for notifying other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

In addition, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. Previously, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be deleted without fail before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. Previously, the period display may not be erased.

Further, the period display may be deleted only before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. In addition to the previous period display, the period display may be deleted.

Further, "the first display is a display including a time display [for example, a gauge display on the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 98 (A1)], and the second display is the time display [ For example, it is a display including a gauge display on the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 98 (A4)], and the time display is displayed according to the passage of time in a certain period [for example, an operation valid period]. [For example, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 98 (A1) and the remaining time meter MT2 shown in FIG. 98 (A4) are gauged according to the time from the start of the operation effective period. , Etc.], a game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize the speed of change of the display mode.

Here, the first display may include only the time display or may include other than the time display. Further, the first display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the second display may include only the time display or may include other than the time display. Further, the second display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the time display may change the display mode only according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may change according to other than the passage of time in a certain period. You may. Further, the time display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change according to the passage of time in a certain period. There may be.

Further, "In some cases, both the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 98 (A4) to 98 (A7), a button is displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM. Both the effect display on which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed and the operation promotion notification image displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather in the conversation notice are displayed]. I also explained about it.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the production lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

Here, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, or the display may be other than both the first display and the second display. May be good. Further, both the first display and the second display may always be displayed, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of" intense heat "in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 98 (A9)", and the plurality of types are described. One of the displays of is the fourth display [for example, the character display of "It's intense heat" in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather shown in FIG. 98 (A9)], and the third display and the above. The fourth display is another display, and the first display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until the first time [for example, 10 seconds, etc.] elapses. The second display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until the second time [for example, 5 seconds, etc.] elapses, and the first time after the first display starts to be displayed. When the lapse of time, the third display may be displayed, and when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed, the fourth display may be displayed. A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be such that only a part of the display mode can be changed until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode may be changed until the first time elapses. Other display modes may also be changeable. Further, the first display may always change at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the first time elapses. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the second display may be such that at least a part of the display mode can be changed until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode is not changed until the second time elapses. The display mode of is also changeable. Further, the second display may always change at least a part of the display mode until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the second time elapses. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may be displayed after the first display starts to be displayed. Over time, displays other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed, the third display may always be displayed, or when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed. , The third display may not be displayed.

Further, when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed, only the fourth display may be displayed, or the second display may be displayed after the second display starts to be displayed. As time passes, displays other than the fourth display may be displayed. Further, when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed, the fourth display may always be displayed, or when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed. , The fourth display may not be displayed. The third display and the fourth display may have the same display mode or different display modes.

Further, in the third display and the fourth display, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher or lower in the fourth display. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be the same in the third display and the fourth display.

Further, "the first display is a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 100 (A1)], and the second display is the countdown. It is a display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 100 (A1)], and the countdown display is a certain effect [for example, a display of a pseudo continuous effect]. It is a display that notifies the timing until it is performed. [For example, the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 100 (A1) count down the time until the pseudo-ream occurs. A game table characterized by the fact that it is notified by display, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify a timing other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. Further, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be notified without fail, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be notified.

Further, "the operation means [for example, the effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player is provided, the first display is the operation valid period display, and the second display is the operation valid period display. The game table is characterized in that the operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid. ] Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that has an aunt who is not operated by the player.

Further, the operation valid period display may indicate only the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or may indicate a period other than the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The operation valid period display may always indicate the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or may not indicate the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid.

Further, "the first display is a period display [for example, the first chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 95 (A1)], and the second display is the period display [for example, FIG. 95 (A1)]. ) Is the second chance up meter CMTb, etc.], and the period display is the first timing [for example, the timing at which the notice of chance up by the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 95 (A2) is started]. The first timing is during the first period [for example, the period during which the duel scene is animated in the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 95 (A1) to 95 (A2)]. This is the timing at which there is a possibility that the production [for example, the display of the notice of chance up by the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 95 (A2)] will be performed, and will end after the first period starts. A game table characterized in that the first timing is notified in the meantime. ] Was also explained.

Here, the period display may be one that notifies only the first timing, or may be one that notifies other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

Further, the first timing may be such that only the sixth display may be started to be displayed in the first period, or the display other than the sixth display may be started to be displayed in the first period. It may be something that can be done. Further, the first timing may be such that the sixth display is always started to be displayed in the first period, or the sixth display may not be started to be displayed in the first period. You may.

Further, only the first timing may be notified between the start and the end of the first period, and the first period may be notified between the start and the end of the first period. Other than the timing may be notified. Further, the first timing may be notified without fail between the start and the end of the first period, and the first period is between the start and the end of the first period. The timing may not be notified.

Further, the first timing may be notified only during the period from the start to the end of the first period, and the first timing may be notified other than the period from the start to the end of the first period. One timing may be notified.

Further, "a game table characterized in that at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change at the first speed depending on the passage of time. ] Was also explained.

Here, with the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change only at the first speed, or with the passage of time, the display mode of the second display may change. At least a part of the display mode may change at a speed other than the first speed. Further, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may always change at the first speed according to the passage of time, and at least a part of the second display may change with the passage of time. The display mode may not change at the first speed.

Also, with the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change at the first speed, or at least a part of the second display may change with the passage of time. Other than some display modes may change at the first rate.
In addition, "when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed than when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the first speed". The game table is characterized by the fact that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end. ] Was also explained.

When at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed, the jackpot symbol may be finally fixedly displayed, or at least a part of the second display may be displayed. Even if the mode changes at the second speed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

Further, the game table is characterized in that "the first display is an effect display [for example, an effect display by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 98 (A1) to 98 (A9)]. ] Was also explained.

Further, the game table is characterized in that "the second display is an effect display [for example, a display of a conversation image CI2 of an old man in a conversation notice shown in FIGS. 98 (A4) to 98 (A9)]". .. ] Was also explained.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]. ] Was also explained. Further, "the game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like]. ] Was also explained.

Further, in the above description, "display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third A game table equipped with a decorative symbol display device 208N, a mini display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.], and one of the plurality of types of displays is shown in the first display [for example, FIG. 101 (A1). Shown timer notice display TM1 and the like], and the first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 101 (A1)], and the countdown. The display is a display that notifies the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown [for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A1) to 101 (A7), the timer notice display TM1. The timing at which the pseudo-ream is performed is notified by the countdown in the timer display], and during the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display is the first display mode [for example, FIG. 101 (A1)). The small size display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 101] may change to the second display mode [for example, the large size display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 101 (A3)]. A game table characterized in that the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes. ] Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, since the variation of the effect is increased by changing the display mode of the countdown display, it may be possible to entertain the player until a certain effect is performed.

Further, according to this game table, the countdown display itself may be attracting attention by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may always include the countdown display, or may not include the countdown display. Further, the first display may be a countdown display, and the first display may not be a countdown display.

Further, the countdown display may be notified only by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may be notified by other than counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed. It may be something to do. Further, the countdown display may always notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown, or may not notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown. There may be one.

Further, the display mode of the first display may change only from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the first display mode may be changed during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the display mode of the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the display of the first display may be displayed during the display of the countdown display. The mode may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

Further, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display, and other than during the display of the countdown display, the first display mode may be changed. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode. The countdown display may be a timer display.

Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is ended. You may. Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the countdown ends. good.

Further, "The countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is terminated by the end of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 80 (1) to (7)). , Timer notice display The countdown display in the timer display of TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display and ends during the symbol variation display]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, the countdown display for notifying the timing until a certain effect is performed is completed during the execution of one symbol variation display, so that the effect may not be redundant.

Here, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and only the countdown display may be terminated by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display. Display other than the countdown display may be completed by the time the symbol variation display is completed. Further, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be always terminated by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol is concerned. The countdown display may not end by the time the variable display ends.

Further, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be terminated only until the symbol variation display is completed, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol is concerned. The countdown display may end other than until the variation display ends.

Further, "The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size [for example, small size, etc.], and the second display mode is , The first display is a display mode in which the second display size [for example, large size, etc.] is displayed, and the first display size and the second display size are the second. A game table characterized by a larger display size. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, by increasing the display size of the countdown display, it may be possible to change the degree of expectation for the countdown display (attention is paid to the countdown display in which the display size is increased).

Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. It may be the display mode that is displayed. Further, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the first display size. There may be a display mode.

Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display may be displayed in a display size other than the second display size. It may be the display mode shown. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the second display size. There may be a display mode. The size of the display size may be the same. For example, the display size may be the same, but the color and shape of the frame, characters, and the like may be different.

Further, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

Further, "when the display of the countdown display is started [for example, when the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 80 (3)", the first item is described. A game table characterized in that the display is displayed in the first display mode. ] Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first display. It may be displayed in a display mode other than one display mode. Further, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may always be displayed in the first display mode, and when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first. There may be cases where it is not displayed in the display mode of.

Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, and the first display may be displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, "when the display of the first display is started [for example, when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 80 (2)", the first display is displayed. A game table characterized in that it is displayed in the first display mode. ] Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. May be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the first display is started, and the first display may be displayed in the first display mode other than when the display of the first display is started. One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, "During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, FIGS. 101 (A2) to (A3) show. As described above, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are displayed during the display of the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1, the timer notice display TM1 Is changing from a small size to a large size, etc.], a game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to expect that the display mode will change during the countdown display.

Here, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode, and during the display of the countdown display, the first display is the first. The display mode of the above may be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode without fail. Further, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

Further, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display, and the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode other than the countdown display. The display mode may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail.

In addition, "the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, as compared with the case where the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. A game table characterized in that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end when it is done. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first display will change to the second display mode.

When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally fixedly displayed, and the first display is the first display mode. Even when the display mode is changed from the above to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

Further, "The first display is a display in which the display position may change. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A2) to (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device. The display position has changed from approximately the center on the right side of the display screen of 208 to approximately the center]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, by changing the display position of the first display, a visual change may be given and the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the display position may change, or one in which something other than the display position may change. Further, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or one in which the display position may not change.

Further, "When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIGS. 101 (A2) to 101 (A3). ), When the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a large size, the display position changes from the substantially right center to the substantially center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208], A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, it may be possible to draw more attention to the first display.

Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display changes from the first display mode. When the display mode is changed to the second display mode, a display position other than the display position of the first display may be changed. Further, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may always change, and the first display changes from the first display mode to the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the first display is the first display mode. The display position of the first display may be changed even in cases other than the case where the display mode is changed from the first display to the second display mode.

In addition, "the first display is a display in which a movement display [for example, an animation display of an enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1] may be performed. By performing the movement display, the first display is performed. The display position of the display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A2) to 101 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed by the animation of the enlarged display, and the display position also changes, etc.], A game table featuring that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, a visual change can be given by the moving display of the first display, so that the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the movement display is performed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, the movement display may change only the display position of the first display, or the movement display may change the display position of something other than the display position of the first display. May be good. Further, the display position of the first display may always change due to the movement display, or the display position of the first display may not change due to the movement display. ..

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, or the display position of the first display may change due to something other than the movement display. good.

Further, "a game table characterized in that the countdown by the countdown display proceeds even while the movement display is displayed. ] Was also explained.

Here, while the movement display is being displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or while the movement display is being displayed, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be continued. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued even while the movement display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued even while the movement display is being displayed.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only while the movement display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be continued other than while the movement display is being displayed.

In addition, "During the display of the movement display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

Here, while the movement display is being displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, or while the movement display is being displayed, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted without fail during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the movement display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the movement display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the movement display is not displayed.

Further, "The countdown display is a display that counts down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A2) to 101 (A7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1. A game table characterized by the fact that the countdown on the display informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may only count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may perform a countdown other than the time until a certain effect is performed. Further, the countdown display may always count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not count down the time until a certain effect is performed.

In addition, "By displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it is notified that it is time to perform the certain effect [for example, FIGS. 101 (A7) to 101 (A8) show. As described above, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

Here, by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified only that it is the timing when a certain effect is performed, or by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. , It may be notified that it is not the timing when a certain effect is performed. Further, by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect, and by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified. It may not be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

Further, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect only by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, and other than displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. Also, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

In addition, "the countdown display is configured to be erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A7) to (A11). After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is deleted, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, the production may not be redundant by deleting the countdown display when the countdown is completed.

Here, it may be configured so that only the countdown display is deleted after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, other than the countdown display. The display of may also be configured to be erased. Further, the countdown display may be configured to be always deleted after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the countdown display may be deleted after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, the countdown display may be configured to be deleted only after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the countdown display may be displayed other than after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be configured to be erased.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a display of the character" attention "in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 101 (A8)", and the second display. The display is a display that is not included in the certain effect, and when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is deleted after the second display is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A7) to 101 (A11), after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is replaced with the timer display. The character "Attention" is displayed, and then the timer notice display TM1 is deleted, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, when the countdown display is erased, the second display is displayed, so that the effect of the effect on the erasure of the countdown display may be improved.

Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in an effect other than a certain effect. Further, the second display may not always be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. Further, the second display may be included in a certain effect.

Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be deleted after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. Is displayed, after the second display is displayed, the display other than the countdown display may be deleted. Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be configured to be always deleted after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. May be configured so that the countdown display may not be cleared after the second display is displayed when is displayed.

Further, the countdown display may be configured to be deleted after the second display is displayed only when the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. In addition to the case where is displayed, the countdown display may be configured to disappear after the second display is displayed. Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be configured to be deleted only after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. May be configured so that the countdown display is cleared even after the second display is displayed when is displayed.

Further, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means, and one of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a sub-display device 208S or the like]. One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like], and when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the display means. The first display is displayed on the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 102 (A1), a small size timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S, etc.]. A featured game console. ] Was also explained.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. Is displayed, the first display may be displayed on a display means other than the first display means. Further, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. When displayed, the first display may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, the first display may be displayed on the first display means only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. The first display may be displayed on the first display means in cases other than the above.

In addition, "when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display changes to the second display. It may be displayed on the means [For example, as shown in FIGS. 102 (A2) to 102 (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a large size, the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol. It is displayed on the display device 208, etc.], which is a game table. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display means to be displayed when the display mode of the first display changes is changed, it may be visually interesting and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display means. In some cases, the first display means the second display means when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode. It may be displayed on a display means other than the above. Further, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is always displayed on the second display means. When the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display becomes the second display means. It may not be displayed.

Further, when the first display is displayed on the second display means only when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode. The first display is the second display even when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means is not changed to the second display mode. It may be displayed on the display means of.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]. ] Was also explained. Further, "the game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like]. ] Was also explained.

The countdown display described so far may be a display performed only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be performed as a look-ahead notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display also functions as a notice of the symbol variation display and may also function as a look-ahead notice. Here, it may be performed only as a look-ahead notice.

Further, when the countdown display is performed as a look-ahead notice, the countdown display may be displayed in the period between the symbol variation display and the next symbol variation display. In that case, the time notification by the countdown display may be stopped / interrupted / stopped during the symbol stop display (for example, the time of the timing of the final stop of the symbol is also displayed during the symbol stop display (however, the countdown). (Not done) or the time notation may be stopped. The time notification by the countdown display may be continued even during the symbol stop display. Also, the countdown may be performed internally even during the symbol stop display. However, the countdown may be stopped internally while the symbol stop is displayed.

In addition, when displaying the countdown display as a look-ahead notice, if there is a hold in which the fluctuation time changes depending on the number of holds (for example, a hold with an indefinite fluctuation time), the countdown display is not performed. May be good. This is because if the symbol variation display time is indefinite, it may not be possible to know when the countdown will be 0, so for example, it is necessary to match the occurrence timing (pseudo-ream or reach). In the case of development, etc.), it is preferable to perform only in the symbol variation display.

On the other hand, the countdown display may be performed even when the hold with an indefinite fluctuation time is in the hold. In this case, for example, an effect that does not cause a problem even if it occurs suddenly (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, an effect such as a round promotion during a big hit, a telop display such as "super hot approaching", etc. It can be applied in cases where it is sufficient if the timer countdown is completed by the end of the subject's hold digestion. In addition, a timing that is also when an effect that requires timing adjustment occurs (for example, the start of a pending symbol variation display that is a look-ahead target) n The effect is such that the time is forcibly adjusted. May be good.

In addition, the countdown display may be displayed during the jackpot. In this case, the display may be continued across the interval between rounds. Here, since the period of one round is indefinite during the jackpot game, it is preferable to set the countdown time appropriately. For example, the countdown display may not occur in the final round, or during the jackpot end interval (final). When the jackpot end display period ends after the round ends, and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, 4ms), or when a certain round is reached, the book is forcibly booked. The combined time (for example, "00:00" may be forcibly displayed even if it is not 0 in the countdown display to generate an effect, etc.) may be displayed.

In addition, the time until the simultaneous production, the production by the RTC, or the like starts may be notified by a countdown display.

Further, the display device may be composed of a transmissive liquid crystal display, and further, a directing means such as an effect movable means and a decorative member, and other display devices such as a drum and an LCD are arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display. They may be configured to be visible via. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal display may be configured to be switchable between a state in which the back side can be visually recognized and a state in which the back side is difficult to see by the liquid crystal shutter.

Further, the operation mode of the effect movable means such as the accessory may be changed or the light emission mode of the lamp may be changed according to the notification of the time by the countdown display.

In addition, a display foretelling that the countdown display itself may be affected (for example, timer addition / subtraction, interruption, fast forward / rewind, enlargement / reduction of the countdown display, change in color or shape, etc.). (For example, a production that incites that something may occur due to the mini character, etc.) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may happen to the countdown display (when nothing is actually done or when something is done), and when another character appears, something is always done. Or you may perform an effect that always does something when another character appears. At this time, for example, the larger the number of characters appearing, the easier it is to win a big hit.

Further, when the number of countdown displays is large, it may be easy to make a big hit in the end, or when a notice of chance up is given, it may be easy to make a big hit in the end.

In addition, even if a part or all of the chance-up meter is enlarged / reduced, or a promotion effect (for example, the color or shape changes, the character or marker indicating the current position changes, etc.) is performed. good.

<< Embodiment 4 >>
Next, the game console according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 162. FIG. 109 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2.

FIG. 109A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial positions above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps with the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light in various light emitting patterns according to the effect. FIG. 109A shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the display area for the variable icon display.

The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area includes a hold icon ab1 in the character mode of a merchant, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a look-ahead notice. Further, the right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the hold icon ac1 of the default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. In FIGS. 109 to 111, when the light emitting means provided in the movable bodies 1 and 2 is emitting light, the light emitting means is shown in light black color, and when the light emitting means is not emitting light, the light emitting means is shown in white.

The display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In the front layer, the ball removal error display h111 by the character string "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer where the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer where the ball-out error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 are indicated by a gauge. The display h112 and the notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by the balloon of "Chance when reaching" and the "Den" character are displayed.

FIG. 109 (b) following FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are still in the initial positions and the respective light emitting means are emitting light.

Following FIG. 109 (b), FIG. 109 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1 moves from the initial position substantially forward in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 2 is located at the initial position. There is. Since the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 is a part of the decorative symbol, the number of reserved symbols aa5, a part of the fourth symbol aa6 of the tutorial, and the button notice display h110. It overlaps with a part of the ball removal error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a part of the notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Since the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays, or any one of these displays may be overlapped. It may not overlap with the display of.

Following FIG. 109 (c), FIG. 109 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is in the process of being deformed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 is moved downward.

FIG. 109 (e), which follows FIG. 109 (d), shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is completed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 is moved downward. When the movable body 1 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the variable icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal error display are newly displayed. The other part of h111 and the like are overlapped by the movable body 1. The movable body 1 may be deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays, or any of these displays. It may not overlap with the display of one.

In FIG. 109 (f) following FIG. 109 (e), the movable body 1 moves to the initial position after performing an operation of returning to the shape before deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. Indicates the state.

As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at the positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position, only the movable body 1 on the front side falls in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which the operation of transforming is performed. This production example may be performed as a look-ahead notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed.

FIG. 110 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2.

FIG. 110A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial positions above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps with the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light in various light emitting patterns according to the effect. FIG. 110A shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the display area for the variable icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area includes a hold icon ab1 in the character mode of a merchant, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a look-ahead notice. Further, the right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the hold icon ac1 of the default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

The display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In the front layer, the ball removal error display h111 by the character string "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer where the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer where the ball-out error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 are indicated by a gauge. The display h112 and the notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by the balloon of "Chance when reaching" and the "Den" character are displayed.

FIG. 110 (b) following FIG. 110 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are still in the initial positions and the respective light emitting means are emitting light.

Following FIG. 110 (b), FIG. 110 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 2 moves from the initial position to substantially the front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1 is located at the initial position. There is. By locating the movable body 2 substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 is a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, and the button notice. It overlaps a part of the display h110, a ball removal error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a part of the notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Since the movable body 2 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays, or any one of these displays may be overlapped. It may not overlap with the display of.

FIG. 110 (d), which follows FIG. 110 (c), shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is being performed. Each of the pair of movable portions 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated clockwise by about 70 ° from the initial posture.

FIG. 110 (e), which follows FIG. 110 (d), shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is completed. Each of the pair of movable portions 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated clockwise by about 90 ° from the initial posture. As the movable body 2 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 and ab2 and another part of the button notice display h110 are newly overlapped by the movable body 2. The movable body 2 may be deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays, or any of these displays. It may not overlap with the display of one.

In FIG. 110 (f) following FIG. 110 (e), the movable body 2 moves to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. Indicates the state.

As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at the positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position, only the movable body 2 on the rear side is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which the operation of dropping and deforming is performed. This production example may be performed as a look-ahead notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily than when the effect example shown in FIG. 109 is performed. In some cases, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 109 is performed than in the case where the effect is shown.

FIG. 111 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2.

FIG. 111A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial positions above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps with the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light in various light emitting patterns according to the effect. FIG. 111A shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the display area for the variable icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area includes a hold icon ab1 in the character mode of a merchant, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a look-ahead notice. Further, the right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the hold icon ac1 of the default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

The display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In the front layer, the ball removal error display h111 by the character string "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer where the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer where the ball-out error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 are indicated by a gauge. The display h112 and the notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by the balloon of "Chance when reaching" and the "Den" character are displayed.

FIG. 111 (b) following FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are still in the initial positions and the respective light emitting means are emitting light.

Following FIG. 111 (b), FIG. 111 (c) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously start moving from the initial position and are simultaneously positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 hold number aa3, and the second of the special figure 2. 4 symbol aa4, number of reserved symbols aa5, part of fourth symbol aa6 of ordinary diagram, part of button notice display h110, ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and notice display (or tutorial display) h113 It overlaps with a part of. Further, since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays, and these displays may be overlapped. It may not overlap with the display of any one of them. The timing of the start of movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different. Further, even if the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are different, the movement end timings may be the same, or the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. However, the timing of the end of movement may be different.

Following FIG. 111 (c), FIG. 111 (d) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 is moved downward, and the pair of the movable body 2 is paired. Each of the movable parts 23 of the above is rotated clockwise by about 70 ° from the initial posture. The timing of starting the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

Following FIG. 111 (d), FIG. 111 (e) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is completed at the same time. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 is moved downward, and the pair of the movable body 2 is paired. Each of the movable parts 23 of the above is rotated clockwise by about 90 ° from the initial posture. By deforming the movable bodies 1 and 2, a part of the hold icon ab1 to ab3, a part of the variable icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal The other part of the error display h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. Further, the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with the display other than these. It may not overlap with the display of any one of the displays of. The timing of the end of the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

In FIG. 111 (f) following FIG. 111 (e), after the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously perform the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation, the movable body 1 starts and ends moving to the initial position at the same time. It shows a state in which each of the light emitting means of 2 and 2 is turned off at the same time. The operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 returning to the shape before the deformation may be started at different timings or may be ended at different timings. Further, even if the start timing of the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 is different, the end timing may be the same, or the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. Even if the start timing of the operation of returning to the previous shape is the same, the end timing may be different. Further, the timing of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different, or the timing of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different. May be good. Further, even if the timing of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position is different, the timing of the end of the movement may be the same, or to the initial position of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. Even if the movement start timing is the same, the movement end timing may be different. The light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be turned off at different timings.

As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at the positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position, both movable bodies are simultaneously dropped in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which the operation of deforming at the same time is performed. This production example may be performed as a look-ahead notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the effect example shown in FIG. 109 or the effect example shown in FIG. 110 is performed. It is preferable that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the effect example shown in FIG. 109 and the effect example shown in FIG. 110 are performed than when the present effect example is performed. There may be cases.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 120, a movable body 90 and an example of an effect using the movable body 90 will be described. The movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 112. 112 (a) is a schematic front view of the movable body 90, and FIG. 112 (b) is a schematic left side view of the movable body 90.

The movable body 90 includes the movable body 90a, the movable body 90b provided at the lower left of the movable body 90a, the motor m1 and the rotating shaft d1 for operating the movable body 90b, and the movable body 90c provided at the lower right of the movable body 90a. , And a motor m2 and a rotation shaft d2 for operating the movable body 90c. The movable body 90a has a plate-shaped horizontally long rectangular substrate mounting base portion 90a1, an LED substrate 90a2, and a cover portion 90a3. The movable body 90b has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90b1, an LED substrate 90b2, and a cover portion 90b3, and the movable body 90c has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90c1, an LED substrate 90c2, and a cover portion. It has 90c3.

The LED substrates 90a2 of the movable body 90a are provided with light emitting diodes a11 to a35 arranged in an array of 3 rows and 6 columns (however, 2 rows and 1 column, 3 rows and 1 column, and 2 rows and 6 columns). , And no light emitting diode is provided in the 3rd row and 6th column). The LED substrate 90b2 of the movable body 90b is provided with light emitting diodes b1 to b4 along the outer circumference of the arc portion, and the LED substrate 90c2 of the movable body 90c is provided with the light emitting diodes c1 along the outer circumference of the arc portion. ~ C4 is provided. The light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) may be composed of light emitting diodes of all monochromatic colors (same color or different colors), or may be partly monochromatic light emitting diodes and some other full color LEDs. , All may be composed of full color LEDs. Further, a light source other than the light emitting diode may be used for the light emitting diode (a11 to c4) mounted on the movable body 90a.

The initial operation of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIGS. 113A to 113G show step by step the initial operation of the movable body 90 performed when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on or the like. In FIGS. 113 to 119, the case where the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off is shown in white, and the case where they are turned on is shown in light black. Further, in FIGS. 113 to 119, the cover portions 90a3, 90b3, and 90c3 are not shown.

FIG. 113A shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The movable body 90 can be moved in the vertical direction by arm portions provided at both ends. The arm portions provided at both ends of the movable body 90 may be transparent, translucent, or colored, or may be capable of emitting light by arranging a light emitting die. A cable connected to the movable body 90 may be arranged behind the arm portion so as not to be visible to the player. Further, the character string "preparing" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 113 (a), FIG. 113 (b) shows that the movable body 90 is moved and located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c. It shows the state where the light emitting diode is lit. Further, the display of the character string "preparing" is overlapped by the movable body 90.

FIG. 113 (c) following FIG. 113 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °, and the movable body 90c is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting died overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 113 (d) following FIG. 113 (c) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 are each rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 113 (e) following FIG. 113 (d), all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are rotated to return to their original postures. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated clockwise by about 30 ° from the posture shown in FIG. 113 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated counterclockwise by about 30 ° from the posture shown in FIG. 113 (d).

FIG. 113 (f) following FIG. 113 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to its original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 113 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 113 (d).

FIG. 113 (g) following FIG. 113 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

An example of the effect of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (n) show a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 90.

FIG. 114A shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

In FIG. 114 (b) following FIG. 114 (a), after the movable body 90 has moved and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 have been removed. It shows the lit state. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

FIG. 114 (c) following FIG. 114 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 are each rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °, and the movable body 90c is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting died overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 114 (d) following FIG. 114 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 114 (e) following FIG. 114 (d), all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 114 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 114 (d).

FIG. 114 (f) following FIG. 114 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to its original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 114 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 114 (d).

FIG. 114 (g) following FIG. 114 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

Following FIG. 114 (g), FIG. 114 (h) shows that the movable body 90 is moved from the initial position and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 is emitted. It shows the state where the diode is lit. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

In FIG. 114 (i) following FIG. 114 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90b, the light of a part of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) overlapped by the movable body 90b becomes visible.

In FIG. 114 (j) following FIG. 114 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90b, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b becomes visible.

In FIG. 114 (k) following FIG. 114 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 114 (l) following FIG. 114 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90c, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a25, a34, a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c becomes visible, and the movable body 90 becomes visible. The light of all the light emitting diodes provided is visible.

FIG. 114 (m) following FIG. 114 (l) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off and then the movable bodies 90b and 90c are returned to their original postures at the same time. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 114 (l), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 114 (l). After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 114 (i) to 114 (l).

FIG. 114 (n), which follows FIG. 114 (m), shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position. It may be started after moving to.

As described above, although this production example is a production used as a notice of the change, it may also be used as a pre-reading notice. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 115 to 118 is performed.

An example of an effect example using a modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIGS. 115A to 115N show stepwise production examples using a modified example of the movable body 90. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are configured to move in the vertical direction in the movable body 90a.

FIG. 115A shows a modified example of the movable body 90 located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

In FIG. 115 (b) following FIG. 115 (a), after the movable body 90 has moved and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 have been moved. It shows the lit state. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

FIG. 115 (c) following FIG. 115 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 are simultaneously moved upward. By moving the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting died overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may move at different timings.

Following FIG. 115 (c), FIG. 115 (d) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 move further upward at the same time and stop at a target position. When the movable bodies 90b and 90c move upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a22 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped. The light of ~ a35 is visible.

Following FIG. 115 (d), FIG. 115 (e) shows a state in which all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 are turned off and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are moving downward at the same time. There is. By moving the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light emitting diodes a22 to a25 are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a13 and a14 are visible.

FIG. 115 (f) following FIG. 115 (e) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c are returned to their original positions at the same time. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to their original positions at different timings.

FIG. 115 (g) following FIG. 115 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

Following FIG. 115 (g), in FIG. 115 (h), the movable body 90 is moved from the initial position and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 is emitted. It shows the state where the diode is lit. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

Following FIG. 115 (h), FIG. 115 (i) shows a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b by moving only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 upward. The light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) becomes visible, and the light emitting diodes a11 and a12 are overlapped by the movable body 90b.

FIG. 115 (j) following FIG. 115 (i) shows a state in which only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at a target position. When the movable body 90bc moves upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a13 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90b, and the light of the light emitting diodes a22 and a23 mounted on the movable body 90a is lighted. Is visible.

Following FIG. 115 (j), FIG. 115 (k) shows a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c by moving only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 upward. The light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) becomes visible, and the light emitting diodes a15 and a16 are overlapped by the movable body 90c.

Following FIG. 115 (k), FIG. 115 (l) shows a state in which only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at a target position. When the movable body 90c moves upward, the light emitting diodes a14 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90c, and the light of the light emitting diodes a24 and a25 mounted on the movable body 90a is lighted. Is visible.

FIG. 115 (m) following FIG. 115 (l) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off and then the movable bodies 90b and 90c are returned to their original positions at the same time. ing. After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to their original positions at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be returned to their original positions. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original position so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 115 (i) to 115 (l).

FIG. 115 (n), which follows FIG. 115 (m), shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position. It may be started after moving to.

As described above, although this production example is a production used as a notice of the change, it may also be used as a pre-reading notice. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 118 is performed.

An example of an effect example using a modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIGS. 116 (a) to 116 (n) show step by step an effect example using a modified example of the movable body 90. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are provided on the rear side of the movable body 90a.

FIG. 116A shows a modified example of the movable body 90 located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

In FIG. 116 (b) following FIG. 116 (a), after the movable body 90 has moved and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 have been moved. It shows the lit state. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b3, c1 to c3) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

FIG. 116 (c) following FIG. 116 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 are each rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °, and the movable body 90c is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1, b2, c1 and c2) of the light emitting diodes of the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 116 (d) following FIG. 116 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 116 (e) following FIG. 116 (d), all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 114 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 116 (d).

FIG. 116 (f) following FIG. 116 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to its original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 114 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 116 (d).

FIG. 116 (g) following FIG. 116 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

Following FIG. 116 (g), in FIG. 116 (h), the movable body 90 is moved from the initial position and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 is emitted. It shows the state where the diode is lit. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may light up before the movable body 90 moves, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b4, c1 to c4) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

In FIG. 116 (i) following FIG. 116 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90b, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 116 (j) following FIG. 116 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90b, the light of all the light emitting diodes b1 to b3 among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 116 (k) following FIG. 116 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 116 (l) following FIG. 116 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90c, the light of all the light emitting dides c1 to c3 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 116 (l), FIG. 116 (m) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off and then the movable bodies 90b and 90c each return to their original postures at the same time. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 116 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 116 (d). After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 116 (i) to 116 (l).

Following FIG. 116 (m), FIG. 116 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position. It may be started after moving to.

As described above, although this production example is a production used as a notice of the change, it may also be used as a pre-reading notice. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 118 is performed.

An example of the effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIGS. 117 (a) to 117 (l) show an example of production using the movable body 90.

In FIG. 117 (a), the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the hold icon a1 in the default mode, a part of the hold icon a2 in the look-ahead notice mode, and a part of the variable icon ad1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 117 (b) following FIG. 117 (a), the definite display of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the hold icon a2 in the look-ahead notice mode, and a part of the variable icon ad2 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 117 (c) following FIG. 117 (b), the decorative symbol variation display due to the digestion of the hold icon a2 in the look-ahead notice mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative pattern display device 208, a part of the character string display of "press the button!", The button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, and the button operation notice effect is performed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the variation icon ad3 of the character mode of the merchant, a part of the character string display of "press the button!", The button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed by the movable body 90. It is overlapped.

In FIG. 117 (d) following FIG. 117 (c), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the sun's image is displayed. The image is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the variable icon ad1 of the merchant character aspect, and a part of the image of the sun are overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 117 (e) following FIG. 117 (d), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach effect is produced. Has been started. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative pattern and a part of the variable icon ad1 of the character aspect of the merchant are overlapped by the movable body 90.

Following FIG. 117 (e), in FIG. 117 (f), the SP reach effect display by the character display of the palace displaying the character string "Game!" Is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the SP reach effect display by the character display of the palace is overlapped by the movable body 90.

Following FIG. 117 (f), FIG. 117 (g) shows the decoration of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the SP reach effect is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The combination of symbols is reduced and a temporary stop display is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the character string of "winning" and the confrontation scene between the character of the palace and the enemy character are completed, and the effect display that the character of the palace wins is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the production display that the character of the lord won is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 117 (h) following FIG. 117 (g), "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern is overlapped by the movable body 90.

Following FIG. 117 (h), FIG. 117 (i) shows the 1R jackpot game effect display of the 15R special jackpot game on the decorative symbol display device 208. The jackpot stop symbol "decoration 7" is displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character string "1R" indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper right, and the payout during the jackpot game is displayed on the left. The character string of "80 balls" indicating the total number and the character string of "number of big hits: 1" indicating the number of big hits are displayed in the lower right. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the 1R jackpot game effect display is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 117 (j) following FIG. 117 (i), the character string "Dito" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the 15R special jackpot game is completed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the character string of "Dito" is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 117 (k) following FIG. 117 (j), the state shifts to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variable display, a character string of "Right-handed!", A pattern indicating that right-handed is to be right-handed, a variable icon ad4, and a special figure 2 hold icon ac1 are displayed. .. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern variation display, a part of the character string "Right-handed!" A part of the icon ac1 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 117 (l) following FIG. 117 (k), the electric support state continues. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display, the character string of "door opening error", the character string of "ball full tank error", the variation icon ad5, and the special figure 2 hold icon ac2 of the look-ahead notice mode are displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative symbol variation display, a part of the character string of "door opening error", a part of the character string of "ball full tank error", a part of the variation icon ad5, and a special figure 2 hold icon of the look-ahead notice mode. A part of ac2 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

As shown in this effect example, the movable body 90 may be located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in various effects and gaming states. The movable body 90 may overlap all of the displays shown above, or the display overlapped by the movable body 90 may not overlap.

An example of the effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 118.

FIG. 118A shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 for the advance notice effect of the button operation, so that the advance notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 114 is performed. Shown. Even if the player does not operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the advance notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 114 may be performed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. .. The series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (a) may be used as a notice of the change or as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (a) is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (a) is not performed. May be done. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 118 is performed.

FIG. 118 (b) shows a state in which the advance notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 114 is performed after the end of the countdown by the advance notice effect of the countdown. The series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (b) may be used as a notice of the change or as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (b) is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (b) is not performed. When the series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (b) is performed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (a) is performed. When the series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (a) is performed, the jackpot symbol is finally determined as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 118 (b) is performed. It may be configured to be easily displayed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 114 to 118 is performed.

An example of modification of the appearance of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 112 at the initial position will be described with reference to FIG. 119. The movable body 90 is located behind the game plate 125 having the game nails.

FIG. 119 (a) shows an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30a in the initial position. The structure 30a has a flat plate shape, and has a horizontally long rectangular opening at a substantially central portion. The structure 30a is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 can be visually recognized through the opening of the structure 30a. It is possible. In some cases, a part of the movable body of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. In some cases, a part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

FIG. 119 (b) shows an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30b at the initial position. The structure 30b has a flat plate shape, and is provided with a vertically long rectangular notch in a substantially central portion. The structure 30b is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 are formed through the cutout portion of the structure 30b. It is visible. In some cases, a part of the movable body of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. In some cases, a part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

FIG. 119 (c) shows an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30c at the initial position. The structure 30c is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, the movable body 90 is invisible to the player because it overlaps with the structure 30c. By arranging the transmissive liquid crystal device in the structure 30c, the movable body 90 located behind the structure 30c may be easily visually recognized during non-display rather than during display in the transmissive liquid crystal device.

A modified example of the position and moving motion of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 120.

FIG. 120A is a schematic view of the liquid crystal display device a208, the movable body 90, and the light emitting panel unit 919 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction in front of the liquid crystal display device a208 and behind the light emitting panel unit 919. The liquid crystal display device a208 and the light emitting panel unit 919 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be rotatable.

FIG. 120B is a schematic view of the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. This example is an example in which the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208. The transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be rotatable.

FIG. 120 (c) is a schematic view of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. This example is an example in which the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction in the rear and front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208. The figure on the left side in FIG. 120 (c) shows the moving direction of the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial positions, the movable body 90 is located behind the movable liquid crystal display device c208, and the movable body 90 can move only in the vertical direction. The middle figure in FIG. 120 (c) shows a state in which the movable liquid crystal display device c208 is moved downward. The figure on the right side in FIG. 120 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 90 moves to the front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 after the movable liquid crystal display device c208 moves downward. When the movable body 90 is located in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208, the movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction. The movable liquid crystal display device c208 may be movable in the left-right direction or may be rotatable.

Next, an example of production using the structure 247 will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 131. The structure 247 used in the production examples of FIGS. 121 to 131 is a structure having a substantially circular shape on the front surface and a family crest pattern on the surface thereof, and can be moved in the vertical direction. Further, in FIGS. 121 to 130, the left side view shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 247, and the middle figure shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state of the left side figure, and the structure 247. It shows the case of seeing through. The figure on the right is an outline for determining whether or not a predetermined character display (for example, Sabohani's character display SB or sun display su1) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible depending on the angle of the player's line of sight. It is a figure. In the figure, the line of sight in which the player can visually recognize the predetermined character display is indicated by ◯, and the line of sight in which the player cannot visually recognize the predetermined character display is indicated by x. The shape and arrangement position of the structure 247 in this example are such that a predetermined character displayed behind the structure 247 has a predetermined line-of-sight angle (for example, a general sitting height (for example, a sitting height of 70 cm to 100 cm)). The angle of the line of sight in the player's normal gaming posture) may be calculated and designed so that it cannot be visually recognized. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 used in this example may be a movable liquid crystal display device or a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

FIG. 121 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 121A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 121A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 121 (a), in FIG. 121 (b), during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208, the Sabohani character display SB is displayed on the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 121 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. A part of the display SB can be visually recognized. In this example and the description of the player's line of sight in the example shown below, the term "substantially front" is defined as "substantially front" when the angle of the line of sight is within ± about 10 ° when the horizontal direction is 0 °. , Approximately diagonally above is defined as approximately diagonally above when the line-of-sight angle is + about 20 ° or more, and substantially diagonally below is defined as approximately diagonally below when the line-of-sight angle is −about 20 ° or less. Is not necessarily limited to these. In the explanation of the player's line of sight, substantially diagonally above means that the position of the line of sight is higher than substantially the front, and substantially diagonally below means that the position of the line of sight is lower than that of substantially the front.

In FIG. 121 (c) following FIG. 121 (b), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state of FIG. 121 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 121 (c), FIG. 121 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves upward. The upper body portion of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the state of FIG. 121 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is displaying the character of Sabohani. The entire SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 121 (d), FIG. 121 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

As described above, this example is an example in which the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved and displayed from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 122 to 130 is performed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol display device 208 does not move and display the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is at least one of upward, downward, left, right, and rotation. One or more movements may allow the player looking substantially from the front to see at least a portion of the Sabohani character display SB, which overlaps the structure 247. While moving and displaying the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position, the decorative symbol display device 208 moves at least one or more of upward, downward, left, right, and rotation. As a result, the player who is looking from substantially the front may be able to see at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani.

FIG. 122 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 122A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 122A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 122 (a), FIG. 122 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 122 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 122 (b), FIG. 122 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 122 (c), FIG. 122 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the state of FIG. 122 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is displaying the character of Sabohani. The entire SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 122 (d), FIG. 122 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 122 (e), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved and displayed from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, and then it overlaps with the structure 247 again. This is an example of moving the display to the position where it is to be displayed. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 130 is performed.

FIG. 123 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247 and the structure 50t. The structure 50t is a structure composed of an opaque thin plate, and the title of the game table is displayed on the surface. The figure on the left side of FIG. 123A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 123A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 123 (a), FIG. 123 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 123 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 123 (b), FIG. 123 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

FIG. 123 (d), which follows FIG. 123 (c), shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 123 (d), FIG. 123 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern. In the state of FIG. 123 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 50t from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player who is looking from substantially diagonally below is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved and displayed from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, and then overlaps with the structure 50t. This is an example of moving to a position. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 124 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 124A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 124 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 124 (a), FIG. 124 (b) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. There is. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable icon ad1.

Following FIG. 124 (b), FIG. 124 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The lower right part of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247.

Following FIG. 124 (c), FIG. 124 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 124 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 124 (d), FIG. 124 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247.

As described above, in this example, the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved from the position where it does not overlap with the structure 247 to the position where it overlaps, and then the position where it does not overlap with the structure 247. This is an example of moving display to. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 125 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 125A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 125A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 125 (a), FIG. 125 (b) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. There is. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable icon ad1. Further, the character display SB of the Sabohani in this example is a display larger than the character display SB of the Sabohani shown in FIG. 124 and the like.

Following FIG. 125 (b), FIG. 125 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The lower right part of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at the position where it overlaps with the structure 247, and the substantially upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 hold icon a3. ing.

Following FIG. 125 (c), FIG. 125 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The substantially lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 125 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize the substantially upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 125 (d), FIG. 125 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247.

As described above, in this example, the movement display is performed from the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change does not overlap with the structure 247 to the position where a part of the character display SB of Sabohani overlaps. This is an example of later performing a movement display at a position that does not overlap with the structure 247, and a part of the character display SB of Sabohani is an production example that is always visible to the player from a substantially front line of sight. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 126 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 126 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 126 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 126 (a), FIG. 126 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 126 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 126 (b), FIG. 126 (c) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire sun display su1 appears from the bottom of the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247. ing. The display su1 of the sun is a display used as a notice of the fluctuation. In the state of FIG. 126 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the sun display su1 and the character display SB of Sabohani, whereas the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above. Can visually recognize at least a part of the sun display su1 and at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

Following FIG. 126 (c), FIG. 126 (d) shows an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani throws the sun display su1 upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sun display su1 moves upward. Indicates the state in which the animation display is displayed. The substantially upper half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 hold icon a3.

Following FIG. 126 (d), FIG. 126 (e) shows the sun display su1 upward while the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the animation display that moves to is displayed. The sun display su1 is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

As described above, in this example, after the character display SB of Sabohani and the sun display su1 used for the advance notice of the fluctuation are displayed at the positions where they overlap with the structure 247, only the sun display su1 is displayed at the structure 247. This is an example of moving the display to a position that does not overlap with. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 127 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 127A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 127A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 127 (a), FIG. 127 (b) shows the entire Sabohani character display SB and the sun at a position overlapping the structure 247 during display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Display The entire su1 is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun are displays used as a notice of the fluctuation. In the state of FIG. 127 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun, whereas the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above. Can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani and at least a part of the display su1 of the sun.

Following FIG. 127 (b), FIG. 127 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the sun display su1 move upward. The character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun are displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 127 (c), FIG. 127 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which only the sun display su1 moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially lower half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon a3. In the state of FIG. 127 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the sun display su1, and a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above can see the sun display su1. The whole can be seen.

In FIG. 127 (e) following FIG. 127 (d), the sun display su1 is further lowered while the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the animation display that moves to is displayed. The sun display su1 is displayed at a position that overlaps the structure 247. A player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the sun display su1, whereas a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above can see at least a part of the sun display su1. ..

As described above, in this example, after the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun used for the advance notice of the fluctuation are displayed at the positions where they overlap with the structure 247, the character display SB of Sabohani and the display of the sun are displayed. This is an example in which the movement display is performed at a position where su1 does not overlap with the structure 247, and then the movement display is performed at a position where only the sun display su1 overlaps with the structure 247. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 128 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 128A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 128A, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to radiate out from the structure 247. The effect image ef1 is an effect image that covers the character display SB of Sabohani used as a notice of the fluctuation, and is a display accompanying the character display SB of Sabohani.

Following FIG. 128 (a), FIG. 128 (b) shows approximately the upper half of the Sabohani character display SB at a position overlapping the structure 247 during display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. However, it is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and the effect image ef1 is moved and displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the state of FIG. 128 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, but can see a part of the effect image ef1, but from substantially diagonally above. The viewing player can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani and a part of the effect image ef1.

In FIG. 128 (c) following FIG. 128 (b), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect image ef1 is displayed on the screen. It is displayed moving upward so that it appears from the bottom. In the state of FIG. 128 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 128 (c), FIG. 128 (d) shows a state in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves upward are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially upper body portion of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the state of FIG. 121 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is displaying the character of Sabohani. The entire SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 128 (d), FIG. 128 (e) shows a state in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves further upward are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The character display SB of Sabohani and the effect image ef1 are displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved and displayed from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, but the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed. Is displayed at a position where is not overlapped with the structure 247, and the effect image ef1 accompanying the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where is not overlapped with the structure 247. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 129 shows three production examples using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 129 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol, and the character display h113 of the palace and the balloon display h114 of the character string “Chance if you find a character!” Are the decorative symbols. It is displayed so that it partially overlaps. The balloon display h114 of the character string "If you find a character, chance!" Is a display for notifying the appearance of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change.

Following FIG. 129 (a), FIG. 129 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. Further, the character string "Character is appearing!" Is displayed on the balloon display h114. The character string "Character is appearing!" May be displayed before the appearance of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed at the same time as the appearance, or may be displayed after the appearance. In the state of FIG. 129 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 129 (b), FIG. 129 (c) is an enlarged display of the Sabohani character display SB displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the character string "Character is expanding!" Is displayed on the balloon display h114. The character string "Character is being expanded!" May be displayed before the start of enlargement of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed at the same time as the start of enlargement, or may be displayed after the start of enlargement. In the state of FIG. 128 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani.

As described above, in this example, before the character display SB of Sabohani used for the notice of the fluctuation is displayed at the position overlapping with the structure 247, the display for notifying that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed is displayed. After displaying the character display SB of Sabohani at the position where it overlaps with the structure 247, a display is performed to notify that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed, and the position where it overlaps with the structure 247. This is an example in which the character display SB of Sabohani displayed in is enlarged and displayed, and a display is performed to inform that the character display SB of Sabohani is enlarged and displayed. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. May be good. Further, the larger the size of the enlarged Sabohani character display SB, the easier it is to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol.

The figure on the left side of FIG. 129 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 129 (A) shows the character display SB1 and the Sabohani 2 of the Sabohani 1 which is a notice display of the change at a position where the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the structure 247. The character display SB2 is displayed. In the state of FIG. 129 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2, whereas the player is viewed from substantially diagonally above. The player is able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and at least a part of the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change are displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. be. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. May be good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapping the structure 247, the easier it is to finally confirm the jackpot symbol.

The figure on the left side of FIG. 129 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In FIG. 129 (A), the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1, which is a notice display of the variation, is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. At a position overlapping the structure 50t, the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2 which is a notice display of the change is displayed. In the state of FIG. 129 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2, whereas the player is viewed from substantially diagonally above. A player who is present can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1, and a player who is looking from substantially diagonally below can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change is structured. This is an example of displaying at a position overlapping the body 50t. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. May be good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapping the plurality of structures, the easier it is to finally confirm the jackpot symbol.

FIG. 130 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 130A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 130A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 130 (a), FIG. 130 (b) shows that the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 during display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 130 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 130 (b), FIG. 130 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 130 (c), FIG. 130 (d) shows a state in which the structure 247 moves upward and is positioned so as to overlap the character display SB of Sabohani displayed in the substantially center of the screen. Is shown. In the state of FIG. 130 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, but the player who is looking from substantially diagonally below is the character display SB of Sabohani. At least part of it is visible.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247, then moved and displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247, and then the structure is displayed. This is an example in which the character display SB of Sabohani is overlapped by the structure 247 by moving the body 247. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 131 is performed. May be good. In this example, the structure 247 is moved after the movement display of the Sabohani character display SB, which is the notice display, but the Sabohani character display SB is always displayed in accordance with the movement display of the Sabohani character display SB. The structure 247 may be moved so as to overlap, or the structure 247 may be moved first, and the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohani may be performed later.

FIG. 131 shows an example of effect using the structure 247. FIG. 131A shows a state in which the effect image ef1 and the character display SB of Sabohani are displayed at positions where they overlap with the structure 247. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In FIG. 131 (b), the structure 247 is visually recognized from diagonally upper left to lower right. The player who visually recognizes the structure 247 from the front can visually recognize a part of the effect image ef1, but cannot visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), the player who visually recognizes the structure 247 from diagonally upper left to lower right can visually recognize a part of the effect image ef1 and substantially the entire character display SB of Sabohani. is made of. By displaying the effect image ef1 in this way, it is possible to change the line of sight of the player who is visually recognizing from the front. In addition, the production of this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 121 to 130 is performed. May be good.

Next, an example of the effect using the hold icon and the variable icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 to 141. The arrows in the drawings of FIGS. 132 to 141 are for explaining the locus and the moving direction of the hold icon and the variable icon, but the locus and the movement of the hold icon and the variable icon on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be displayed as a display indicating the direction of.

FIG. 132 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. 132 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 132 (h) and (i) are produced after FIGS. 132 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 132 (j) after FIGS. 132 (a) to 132 (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 (a) to 132 (i). In FIG. 132 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 132A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 132 (b), which follows FIG. 132 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 132 (b), FIG. 132 (c) shows, in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 132 (d) following FIG. 132 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 132 (e), which follows FIG. 132 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 132 (f) following FIG. 132 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be. Further, the notice display m1 may be a notice display for notifying that the operation effect display will be performed, or may be a notice display for notifying that the SP reach effect will be performed.

In FIG. 132 (g) following FIG. 132 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 132 (g), in FIG. 132 (h), a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 132 (h), FIG. 132 (i) shows a state in which the advance notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation for returning to the position before the movement is completed. ..

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 (j) and 132 (k).

In FIG. 132 (j) following FIGS. 132 (a) to (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 132 (g) ends in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. Then, the hold icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the notice display m1 is erased, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is erased. Alternatively, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

In FIG. 132 (k) following FIG. 132 (j), the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the pseudo continuous advance notice in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated is performed. Is. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed. When the hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.

FIG. 133 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. FIG. 133 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 133 (h) to (j) are produced after FIGS. 133 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 133 (k) to 133 (k) after FIGS. 133 (a) to (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (m) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 (a) to 133 (j). FIG. 133 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 133A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 133 (b), which follows FIG. 133 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 133 (b), FIG. 133 (c) shows, in parallel with the end of the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 133 (d), which follows FIG. 133 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 133 (e), which follows FIG. 133 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 133 (f) following FIG. 133 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. The pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 most recently has a vertically long rectangular hold icon (hereinafter, "going out hold icon") in which the character string "going out" is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3. "Is sometimes called.) Is displayed. In addition, instead of the hold icon while going out, a lighter-colored hold icon with a default shape may be used.

In FIG. 133 (g) following FIG. 133 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 133 (g), in FIG. 133 (h), a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 4- It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 133 (h), in FIG. 133 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation of returning to the pedestal before the movement is completed, and the pedestal is displayed on the pedestal. , The hold icon in the same mode as the notice display m1 is displayed so as to overlap with the hold icon while going out.

In FIG. 133 (j) following FIG. 133 (i), the on-going hold icon is erased on the decorative symbol display device 208.
<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 (k) to 133 (m).

In FIG. 133 (k) following FIGS. 133 (a) to (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 133 (g) is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. Will be done. On the pedestal on which the on-going hold icon is displayed, a hold icon re-appearance animation is displayed in which the hold icon in the mode (default mode) of the notice display m1 overlaps with the out-of-home hold icon and reappears. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the notice display m1 is erased, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed before the notice display m1 is erased. Alternatively, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed after the notice display m1 is deleted.

In FIG. 133 (l) following FIG. 133 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is before moving. It shows the state displayed on the pedestal. FIG. 133 (m) shows a state in which the on-going hold icon is deleted.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the notice display during the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol, the pseudo continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated is performed. In this example, a hold icon of another mode is temporarily displayed in place of the hold icon being moved. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed.

FIG. 134 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. FIG. 134 shows an example of the pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 134 (h) and (i) are performed after FIGS. 134 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 134 (j) after FIGS. 134 (a) to (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (i). FIG. 134 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 134A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 134 (b), which follows FIG. 134 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 134 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 134 (d), which follows FIG. 134 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 134 (e), which follows FIG. 134 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 134 (f) following FIG. 134 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, a temporary movement animation of the hold icon is displayed, in which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 temporarily moves to the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed. Further, in this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that the pseudo continuous notice is performed, or is used as a notice of the change. It may be a display that is displayed.

In FIG. 134 (g) following FIG. 134 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed most recently. It is displayed in. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 134 (g), FIG. 134 (h) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is moved to the original pedestal. Further, in the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

In FIG. 134 (i) following FIG. 134 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed, and the special figure 1 is shown. The hold icon a3 indicates the state displayed at the position before the movement. Further, the temporary movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 (j) and 134 (k).

In FIG. 134 (j) following FIGS. 134 (a) to (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 134 (g) is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. The special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed on the pedestal, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears. The hold icon reappearance animation and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 move toward the original pedestal. The icon temporary movement animation is displayed. In this example, the hold icon that appears in the hold icon reappearance animation is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3, but the special figure 2 hold icon b3 becomes the hold icon that appears in the hold icon reappearance animation. It may appear to overlap. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the notice display m1 is erased, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is erased. Alternatively, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

In FIG. 134 (k) following FIG. 134 (j), the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. Then, the temporary movement animation of the hold icon b3 of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 ends, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the pseudo continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated is performed. In this example, the hold icon on the right side is temporarily displayed instead of the hold icon being moved, and when the hold icon being moved returns to the original position, the temporarily displayed hold icon returns to the original position. .. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed.

FIG. 135 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. FIG. 135 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 132 (h) and (i) are produced after FIGS. 135 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 132 (j) after FIGS. 135 (a) to (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (i). In FIG. 135 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 135A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 135 (b), which follows FIG. 135 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 135 (b), FIG. 135 (c) shows the default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 135 (d), which follows FIG. 135 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 135 (e), which follows FIG. 135 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 135 (f) following FIG. 135 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display of Gase.

In FIG. 135 (g) following FIG. 135 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 135 (g), FIG. 135 (h) displays a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string "preparing" is still displayed.

Following FIG. 135 (h), FIG. 135 (i) shows a state in which the advance notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed. ..

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 (j) and 135 (k).

In FIG. 135 (j) following FIGS. 135 (a) to (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 135 (g) ends in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. Recently, the hold icon re-appearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. Further, the stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character string "preparing" is still displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

In FIG. 135 (k) following FIG. 135 (j), the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the false notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the pseudo continuous advance notice that the decorative symbol variation display changes again is performed. There is no example.

FIG. 136 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the hold icon.

In FIG. 136 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 136A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 136 (a), FIG. 136 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 136 (b), FIG. 136 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 136 (d) following FIG. 136 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 136 (e), which follows FIG. 136 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 136 (f) following FIG. 136 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

In FIG. 136 (g) following FIG. 136 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 136 (g), FIG. 136 (h) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 136 (h), FIG. 136 (i) shows a state in which the advance notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement is completed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

FIG. 136 (j), which follows FIG. 136 (i), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 136 (k) following FIG. 136 (j), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

Following FIG. 136 (k), in FIG. 136 (l), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 136 (l), in FIG. 136 (m), a re-movement animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x3" indicating that the third pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 136 (m), FIG. 136 (n) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the re-movement animation is completed. There is.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the notice display during the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol, the pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display changes again is repeated a plurality of times. This is an example of doing so. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed. When the hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.

FIG. 137 shows a stepwise example of the effect using the hold icon.

FIG. 137 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 137 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 137 (a), FIG. 137 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 137 (b), FIG. 137 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 137 (d), which follows FIG. 137 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 137 (d), FIG. 137 (e) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 137 (f) following FIG. 137 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

In FIG. 137 (g) following FIG. 137 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 137 (g), FIG. 137 (h) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 137 (h), FIG. 137 (i) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement is completed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

FIG. 137 (j), which follows FIG. 137 (i), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 137 (k) following FIG. 137 (j), the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

Following FIG. 137 (k), in FIG. 137 (l), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 137 (l), in FIG. 137 (m), a re-movement animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 2 hold icon b3 was displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x3" indicating that the third pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 137 (m), FIG. 137 (n) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the re-movement animation is completed. There is.

As described above, this example is an example in which pseudo continuous notice using two different hold icons as the notice display m1 is performed a plurality of times in one fluctuation. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed. If the hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is insufficient, the variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.

FIG. 138 shows a stepwise example of the effect using the hold icon.

FIG. 138 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 138 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 138 (a), FIG. 138 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 138 (b), FIG. 138 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 138 (d), which follows FIG. 138 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 138 (e), which follows FIG. 138 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 138 (f) following FIG. 138 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

In FIG. 138 (g) following FIG. 138 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 138 (g), FIG. 138 (h) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string "preparing" is still displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 138 (h), FIG. 138 (i) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement is completed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

In FIG. 138 (j) following FIG. 138 (i), the reach effect by the "decoration 4" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The character string "reach!" Is displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated and the reach effect is started. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed.

FIG. 139 shows a stepwise example of the effect using the variable icon.

FIG. 139 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 139 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 139 (a), FIG. 139 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 139 (b), FIG. 139 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 139 (d), which follows FIG. 139 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 139 (e), which follows FIG. 139 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 139 (e), in FIG. 139 (f), the variable icon ad1 is changed from the variable icon display area 280 during the display of the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a moving animation that pops out and moves as a notice display m2 is displayed. The notice display m2 and the special variation icon ad1 have the same display mode. Further, the variable icon is not displayed on the pedestal of the variable icon display area 280. In this example, the notice display m2 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a look-ahead notice. You may.

Following FIG. 139 (f), in FIG. 139 (g), the notice display m2 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m2 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 139 (g), in FIG. 139 (h), a moving animation of the notice display m2 returning to the position (pedestal) of the variable icon display area 280 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 4-decoration 4” is displayed. -It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m2, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 139 (h), FIG. 139 (i) shows a state in which the movement animation in which the notice display m2 returns to the position of the variable icon display area 280 as the variable icon ad1 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

In this way, in this example, when the variable icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol, the pseudo continuous advance notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates. .. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed. In addition, not only the variable icon of the default mode but also the variable icon of the mode other than the default mode may be used as the notice display m2 of this example. FIG. 140 shows a stepwise production example using the hold icon. Shown.

In FIG. 140 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special drawing 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special drawing 2 holding number aa3, and the special drawing 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 140A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 140 (b), which follows FIG. 140 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 140 (b), FIG. 140 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 140 (d) following FIG. 140 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 140 (e), which follows FIG. 140 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 140 (f) following FIG. 140 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a display used as a look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 140 (g) following FIG. 140 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 140 (g), FIG. 140 (h) displays a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is displayed.

Following FIG. 140 (h), FIG. 140 (i) shows a state in which the advance notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed. ..

FIG. 140 (j) following FIG. 140 (i) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the hold icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the left and the hold icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208 are completed. ..

FIG. 140 (k), which follows FIG. 140 (j), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 140 (l) following FIG. 140 (k), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

In FIG. 140 (m) following FIG. 140 (l), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 2" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 140 (m), FIG. 140 (n) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the stop display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is displayed.

Following FIG. 140 (n), FIG. 140 (o) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement is completed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

FIG. 140 (p) following FIG. 140 (o) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, the hold icon moves to the left, the hold icon moves animation, and the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208. The hold / change icon movement animation ends. There is.

FIG. 140 (q), which follows FIG. 140 (p), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 140 (r) following FIG. 140 (q), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode and are used as a notice of the change. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

In FIG. 140 (s) following FIG. 140 (r), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with the "decoration 7" temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 7" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 8" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 140 (s), FIG. 140 (t) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is finished and the decorative pattern variation display is displayed.

In FIG. 140 (u) following FIG. 140 (t), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed, and the “decoration 7” is shown. Reach production is done.

In this way, this example is an example in which a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display while the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol is displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the reach effect is developed. be. The notice display that appears the first time and the second time in this example is used as a look-ahead notice, and the notice display that appears the third time is used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 141 is performed.

FIG. 141 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the hold icon. FIG. 141 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. Further, the special figure 2 hold icon b2 is a hold icon in the form of a character of the palace. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 141A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, the hold icon in the form of the character of the palace may be used as a look-ahead notice.

Following FIG. 141 (a), FIG. 141 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the form of the character of the palace is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 141 (b), FIG. 141 (c) shows the appearance of the character of the palace in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates a state in which the increasing animation of the hold icon b3 is displayed.

FIG. 141 (d) following FIG. 141 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 141 (e) following FIG. 141 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 141 (f) following FIG. 141 (e), while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 2 hold icon b2 is a special figure. 1 and 2 Hold icon display area 280ab jumps out and moves as notice display c1, special figure 1 hold icon a3 jumps out of special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as notice display c2, and special figure 2 hold icon A movement animation is displayed in which b3 jumps out of the special drawings 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display c3. The notice displays c1 to c3, the special figure 2 hold icons b2 and b3, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 all have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b2, b3 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice displays c1 to c3 are displays used as a notice of the change, but may be a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed. It may be a notice display, or it may also be used as a look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 141 (g) following FIG. 141 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 changes to the notice display c1', the notice display c2 changes to the notice display c2', and the notice display c3 changes to the notice display c2'. The notice display c3'indicates the changed state. The notice displays c1'to c3' are all in the same display mode, and are in a display mode in which the large-displayed character of the palace is fighting by pulling out the Japanese sword. In the decorative symbol display measure 208, while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed, the notice display c1'fights against the "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. A battle animation in which the notice display c2'fights the "decoration 4" that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208b, and the notice display c3'fights the "decoration 5" that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed.

In FIG. 141 (h) following FIG. 141 (g), the notice display c1'changes to c1, the notice display c2' changes to c2, and the notice display c3' changes to c3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice display c3 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b3 at the position where the display c1 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b2, and the notice display c2 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b3 at the position where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. The movement animations of the notice displays c1 to c3 that return to the position are displayed, and the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed.

In FIG. 141 (i) following FIG. 141 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b2, and the notice display c2 is the special figure 1 hold icon a3. The movement animation is completed, in which the notice display c3 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b3. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the reach effect of "decoration 7" is executed.

In this way, in this example, when a plurality of hold icons collide with a plurality of decorative symbols as a plurality of notice displays during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated and the reach effect is started. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 132 to 140 is performed. If the number of hold icons used as the notice display in this example is insufficient, the variable icon may be used as the notice display.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 162. FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (c) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 142 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 138 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 142 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace is displayed in the substantially center of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 142 (b) following FIG. 142 (a), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 142 (c) following FIG. 142 (b), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed above the balloon display f1. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The width of the balloon display f1 and the width of the balloon display f2 are the same, and the height of the balloon display f1 and the height of the balloon display f2 are the same, but the width and the height are different. It may be different, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 and f2 in the following description.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 143 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 143 (a), FIG. 143 (b) is displayed so that the balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is also overlapped with the number of reserved symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary diagram.

Following FIG. 143 (b), FIG. 143 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left edge of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Shows the displayed state. The balloon display f1 does not display the character string displayed in the balloon part and the pattern of the clear mark until the state immediately before the stop display is displayed in the center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon part is displayed). So, after stopping and displaying at the center of the screen, the character string and the pattern of the sunny mark may be displayed in order from the beginning of the character string, or even if the character string and the pattern of the sunny mark are all displayed at once. good. Further, other balloon displays may have the same configuration.

In FIG. 143 (d) following FIG. 143 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 143 (e) following FIG. 143 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the grandfather's character is displayed so as to appear from the right edge of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon display f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. In this example, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark on the balloon display f1 may overlap with the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but a part other than the pattern of the sunny mark may overlap with the balloon display f2. ..

FIG. 143 (e) shows a state in which the balloon display f1 is moved upward due to the appearance of the balloon display f2. In this example, the balloon display f1 is simultaneously moved to move upward and the balloon display f2 is moved to the left at the same time.

Following FIG. 143 (e), in FIG. 143 (f), a movement animation is performed in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the right edge of the screen moves to the left, is displayed substantially in the center of the screen, and the balloon f1 moves upward. A moving animation is performed to show the state displayed at the upper center of the screen.

Following FIG. 143 (f), FIG. 143 (g) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 143 (h) following FIG. 143 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon display f3 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2. In this example, the character string of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 may overlap with the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, but the portion other than the character string of the balloon portion may overlap with the balloon display f3. The width of the balloon display f3 is the same as the width of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and the height of the balloon display f3 is the same as the height of the balloon displays f1 and f2, but the width and the height are different. It may be different, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 to f3 in the following description.

Further, FIG. 143 (h) shows a state in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 are moved upward due to the appearance of the balloon display f3, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. Is shown. In this example, a movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 moves to the right are performed at the same time.

Following FIG. 143 (h), in FIG. 143 (i), a movement animation is performed in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the left edge of the screen moves to the right, is displayed substantially in the center of the screen, and the balloon f2 moves upward. The movement animation is performed, and it is displayed at the upper part of the center of the screen, and the balloon display f1 shows the state of being erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, after this frame, in the balloon display f2 of the grandfather character and the balloon display f3 of the princess character, the balloon display f3 may be erased after the balloon display f2 is erased, and the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 are displayed. It may be erased at the same time, or the balloon display f2 may be erased after the balloon display f3 is erased. Further, at least one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased before the reach symbol in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or the nth time of the pseudo continuous display (n is an arbitrary number). ) May be erased before the start, or may be erased before the temporary stop display is displayed. The balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased immediately on the spot, or may be erased so as to gradually become thinner and fade out on the spot, and are the same as the balloon display f1 of the character of the palace. After displaying the moving animation moving upward, it may be erased so as to come out from the upper edge of the screen, or it may be erased so as to come out from the direction at the time of each appearance. The same may apply to the balloon display described in the following drawings.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed. The balloon display described in this example and the following drawings includes a pattern of each configuration of the balloon display (weather mark (sunny mark, cloudy mark, rain mark), character string display, frame, character name display, character. In each of the facial images), at least a part of each configuration may be animated, only a part may be animated, or the whole may be animated. For example, an animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates may be displayed, an animation display in which the display of the character string blinks may be displayed, or an animation display in which the character makes a mouthful may be displayed. , The entire balloon display may be moved while displaying one or more of the animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates, the animation display in which the character string display blinks, and the animation display in which the character flutters. Further, the display of the character string may be displayed in order from the first character, and an animation display in which the character is lip-synching may be displayed during the period when the number of characters displayed in the character string is increasing. The animation display of each configuration of the balloon display may be a repeatable animation display in which the operations from the beginning to the end of the animation display are connected. For example, one animation display that rotates and returns to the original posture may be repeated, one animation display that returns to the original size after enlarging or reducing may be repeated, or the original animation display may be repeated after moving the position. One animation display returning to the position may be repeated, one blinking animation display may be repeated, or one animation display in which the gloss display moves or changes may be repeated. Further, a part of at least one animation display in each configuration of the balloon display may overlap with a part of other animations in each configuration of the balloon display. Further, the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each configuration of the balloon display may be transparent or translucent, only a part may be transparent or translucent, or the whole may be translucent.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (m) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 144 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 144 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 144 (a), FIG. 144 (b) is displayed so that the balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is also overlapped with the number of reserved symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary diagram.

Following FIG. 144 (b), FIG. 144 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left edge of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Shows the displayed state.

In FIG. 144 (d) following FIG. 144 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 144 (e) following FIG. 144 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started.

In FIG. 144 (f) following FIG. 144 (e), the movement animation moving above the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen.

Following FIG. 144 (f), FIG. 144 (g) is displayed so that the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character appears from the right edge of the screen after the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is interrupted. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 144 (g), FIG. 144 (h) shows a state in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved to the left by performing a movement animation and is displayed in the substantially center of the screen.

Following FIG. 144 (h), FIG. 144 (i) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 144 (j) following FIG. 144 (i), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon displays f1 and f2 show a state in which a movement animation is being performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

In FIG. 144 (k) following FIG. 144 (j), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the movement animation moving above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen. Has been done.

Following FIG. 144 (k), FIG. 144 (l) is displayed so that the balloon display f3 by the character of the princess appears from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part.

Following FIG. 144 (l), FIG. 144 (m) shows a state in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the left edge of the screen is moved to the right by performing a movement animation and is displayed in the substantially center of the screen.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (m) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 145 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 145 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 145 (a), FIG. 145 (b) is displayed so that the balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is also overlapped with the number of reserved symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary diagram.

Following FIG. 145 (b), FIG. 145 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left edge of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Shows the displayed state.

In FIG. 145 (d) following FIG. 145 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 145 (e) following FIG. 145 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the grandfather's character is displayed so as to appear from the right edge of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon display f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 145 (e), FIG. 145 (f) shows a state in which a balloon display f2 appearing from the right edge of the screen is moved to the left by a moving animation, and is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. .. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 1. Since the balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1, the character string of "morning weather is" displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the pattern of the sunny mark and the frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but the face image of the character of the palace and the character image of "Den" are not hidden in the balloon display f2.

In FIG. 145 (g) following FIG. 145 (f), after the movement animation for moving the balloon display f2 to the left is completed, the movement animation for moving the balloon display f1 upward is started. In FIG. 145 (g), when the balloon display f1 moves upward, the character string “morning weather” hidden by the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, the pattern of the sunny mark, and the frame portion of the balloon portion are shown. Approximately the upper half of is visible. At a certain timing between FIGS. 145 (f) and 145 (g), a part of the pattern of the sunny mark is displayed in the balloon portion of the balloon display f1, and the character string is not displayed. Become.

In FIG. 145 (h) following FIG. 145 (g), the movement animation moving above the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen.

Following FIG. 145 (h), FIG. 145 (i) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 145 (j) following FIG. 145 (i), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon display f2 and f3 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

Following FIG. 145 (j), FIG. 145 (k) shows a state in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the left edge of the screen is moved to the right by performing a movement animation, and is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. .. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon portion of the balloon display f3 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 2. Since the balloon display f3 has priority over the balloon display f2, the character string of "morning weather is" displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f2, the pattern of the cloudy mark, and the frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, but the face image of the old man's character and the character image of the "old man" are not hidden in the balloon display f3.

Following FIG. 145 (k), FIG. 145 (l) shows a state in which a movement animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed. In FIG. 145 (l), when the balloon display f2 moves upward, the character string “morning weather” hidden by the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, the pattern of the cloudy mark, and the frame portion of the balloon portion are shown. Approximately the upper half of is visible. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

In FIG. 144 (m) following FIG. 145 (l), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the movement animation moving above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the upper part of the screen. Has been done.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

Next, two examples of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 146. 146 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 146 (n) to 146 (q) are produced after FIGS. 146 (a) to 146 (m), and FIGS. 146 (r) to 146 (r) after FIGS. 146 (a) to 146 (m). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (t) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
FIG. 146 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 146 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 146 (a), in FIG. 146 (b), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 146 (b), FIG. 146 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

Following FIG. 146 (c), in FIG. 146 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 146 (e) following FIG. 146 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 146 (e), in FIG. 146 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

Following FIG. 146 (f), FIG. 146 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 146 (h) following FIG. 146 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

Following FIG. 146 (h), in FIG. 146 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

Following FIG. 146 (i), FIG. 146 (j) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 146 (k) following FIG. 146 (j), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f4 by the character of Sabohani is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f4 is a character image of "honey" displayed at a position where the character image of Sabohani and the character image of Sabohani overlap, and a character string and a pattern of "Lance when reaching reach" are displayed. It is a display including a blowout part. Further, the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f4 is configured to be substantially half of the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the like.

FIG. 146 (l) following FIG. 146 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is temporarily interrupted. The balloon part f4 that appeared from the lower part of the screen is stopped and displayed at the position where it has fully appeared, and the movement to the upper part of the balloon display f3 is also temporarily interrupted and stopped and displayed. Further, substantially the lower half of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper end of the screen.

Following FIG. 146 (l), in FIG. 146 (m), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping the balloon display f2 on the decorative symbol display device 208. , Indicates a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

Following FIG. 146 (m), FIG. 146 (n) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f2 to f4 is restarted and the balloon display f5 appears from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f5 is a balloon portion in which the character image of "Gale" and the character string and pattern of "Gale" are displayed on the face image of the character of Gale and the face image of the character of Gale. It is a display that includes. Further, the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f5 is configured to be substantially twice that of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the like.

In FIG. 146 (o) following FIG. 146 (n), the balloon displays f3 to f5 are scrolled and erased so that the balloon display f3 comes out from the upper end of the screen.

In FIG. 146 (p) following FIG. 146 (o), the balloon displays f4 and f5 are scrolled, and the balloon display f4 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

FIG. 146 (q), which follows FIG. 146 (p), shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated, and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The entire balloon display f5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.
<Example of pattern 2>
Following FIGS. 146 (a) to 146 (m), FIG. 146 (r) is displayed so that the balloon display f5 appears from the left edge of the screen, and the balloon display f2 to stop displayed in FIG. 146 (m). It shows a state in which a movement animation for moving f3 to the right at the same time is displayed. That is, in this example, after the effect of scrolling the balloon displays f1 to f4 upward in order, the effect of scrolling the balloon displays f2 to f5 to the right is performed.

In FIG. 146 (s) following FIG. 146 (r), the balloon display f2 to f5 is scrolled to the right, and the balloon displays f2 to f3 are erased so as to come out from the right edge of the screen at the same time. ..

FIG. 146 (t), which follows FIG. 146 (s), shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated, and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The entire balloon display f5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of pattern 2 of the above is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed.

Next, two examples of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 147. 147 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 147 (k) and 147 (l) are produced after FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (j), and FIGS. 147 (m) after 147 (a) to (j). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (n) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
FIG. 147 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 147 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 147 (b) following FIG. 147 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 147 (b), FIG. 147 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 147 (d) following FIG. 147 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 147 (e) following FIG. 147 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 147 (e), in FIG. 147 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

Following FIG. 147 (f), FIG. 147 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 147 (h) following FIG. 147 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

Following FIG. 147 (h), in FIG. 147 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

Following FIG. 147 (i), FIG. 147 (j) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 147 (k) following FIG. 147 (j), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled downward.

FIG. 147 (l) following FIG. 147 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1 that reappears from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. After that, the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
Following FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (j), FIG. 147 (m) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. Is deleted, and the balloon display f1'appears from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1', f2, and f3 are scrolled downward. The balloon display f1'is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo-ream chance!". It is a display including a part.

FIG. 147 (n) following FIG. 147 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1'and f2 is temporarily interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1'appearing from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially above the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. After that, the balloon displays f1'and f2 may be erased, and a pseudo continuous advance notice effect or reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. good.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of pattern 2 of the above is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIGS. 148 (a) to 148 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 148 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 148 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 148 (a), in FIG. 148 (b), a balloon display f1'by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed in. The balloon display f1'is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo-ream chance!". It is a display including a part. The balloon display f1'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 148 (b), FIG. 148 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

Following FIG. 148 (c), in FIG. 148 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1'on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game is played. It shows a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge a person to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 148 (e) following FIG. 148 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1'moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 148 (e), in FIG. 148 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. Is performed, the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1'has stopped and displayed before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1'and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 148 (g) following FIG. 148 (f), the scroll display of the balloon display f1'and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1'and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at the positions to be displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 148 (h) following FIG. 148 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. While the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed, the movement animation in which f2 moves upward is performed, and at the same time, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f2 is not displayed and is erased above the position where the balloon display f1'is displayed. Further, by displaying the balloon display f1'with priority over the balloon display f2, when the balloon display f2 is moving behind the balloon display f1 in a scroll display, the balloon display f1 of the balloon display f2 is displayed. It may be configured so that the overlapping part of'is not displayed. In this case, since the face image of the grandfather character and the character image of the grandfather in the balloon display f2 do not overlap with the balloon display f1', they are scrolled to the position of the upper end of the screen. In this way, in this example, when a balloon display with high jackpot reliability appears, the balloon with low jackpot reliability is prioritized and deleted so that the balloon display with high reliability is left on the screen. It is configured.

Following FIG. 148 (h), in FIG. 148 (i), a movement animation is performed in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward while the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed. f3 indicates a state in which the display is stopped at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. After that, the balloon displays f1'and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIGS. 149 (a) to 149 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 149 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 149 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 149 (a), in FIG. 149 (b), a balloon display f1'by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed in. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 149 (b), FIG. 149 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 149 (d) following FIG. 149 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 149 (e) following FIG. 149 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. After the balloon display f2 by the old character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. In this example, since the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen and then the balloon display f1 moves upward, the balloon display f2 is substantially below the balloon display f1. Appears to overlap in half.

Following FIG. 149 (e), FIG. 149 (f) shows a movement animation in which substantially the lower half of the balloon display f1 overlaps with the balloon display f2, and both move upward. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

Following FIG. 149 (f), FIG. 149 (g) shows a chance at a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 149 (h) following FIG. 149 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are stopped and displayed. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap substantially the lower half of the balloon display f2. In this example, a part of the balloon part of the balloon display 1 (the character string of "Today's weather is", the pattern of the sunny mark, and the frame part of the balloon part) is the balloon part of the balloon display f2 ("Today's weather is"). Overlapping a part of the character string or the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame part of the balloon part, the balloon part of the balloon display 2 (the character string of "Today's weather" or the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame part of the balloon part) ) Is configured to overlap a part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 (the character string of "Today's weather", the pattern of the rain mark, and the frame part of the balloon part), but other than this. There may be cases. For example, the face images of the characters may overlap, the character images of the names of the characters may overlap, or the face images of the characters may overlap in the balloon part. There may be cases where the balloon portion overlaps with the character's face image, and there may be cases where the character image of the character's name overlaps with the balloon portion.

Following FIG. 149 (h), FIG. 149 (i) shows a position where a movement animation of moving the balloon displays f1 to f3 upward is performed and the upper end of the balloon portion f1 and the lower end of the balloon portion f3 fit on the screen. Indicates a state in which the movement animation of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is interrupted or ended. After that, the balloon displays f1 to f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. Further, in this example, two balloon displays are overlapped, but two or more balloon displays may be overlapped. For example, the larger the number of overlapped balloon displays, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. It may be. Further, in this example, the overlapping degree of each balloon display is configured to be equal, but the overlapping condition of each balloon display may not be equal. For example, the overlapping area of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be smaller or larger than the overlapping area of the balloon displays f2 and f3. Further, the balloon displays f1 and f2 may overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may not overlap, or the balloon displays f1 and f2 may not overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may overlap.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIGS. 150 (a) to 150 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 150 (a), in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 150A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 150 (b) following FIG. 150 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the lord appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 150 (c) following FIG. 150 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 150 (d) following FIG. 150 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 150 (e) following FIG. 150 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the old character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 is reduced and then moved upward is displayed. Further, the balloon display f1 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The reduction of the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each configuration of the balloon display (weather pattern, character, frame, character name, character face image) may be reduced. Only a part may be reduced, the whole may be reduced, or the reduction ratio may be different for each configuration.

Following FIG. 150 (e), in FIG. 150 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 150 (g) following FIG. 150 (f), the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and there is a chance at a position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 150 (h) following FIG. 150 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 move upward is displayed. Further, although the balloon display f2 is configured to be reduced before moving upward, the balloon display f2 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The reduction degree of the balloon display f2 may be the same as or different from the reduction degree of the balloon display f1. Further, either one of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be reduced to be larger or smaller than the other, or the structure for reducing the balloon display f1 and f2 may be different from each other.

Following FIG. 150 (h), FIG. 150 (i) shows a state in which the animation of moving toward the balloon displays f2 and f3 is interrupted or terminated and the stop display is displayed. After that, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIGS. 151 (a) to 151 (k) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 151 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 151A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 151 (b) following FIG. 151 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 151 (b), FIG. 151 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 151 (d) following FIG. 151 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 151 (e) following FIG. 151 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f1'by the character of the palace is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f1'is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo-ream chance!". It is a display including a part.

Following FIG. 151 (e), in FIG. 151 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. Is performed, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f1'indicates a state in which the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f1'are the same, they may be configured differently. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

FIG. 151 (g), which follows FIG. 151 (f), shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f1'is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f1'. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 151 (h) following FIG. 151 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , An animation in which only the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, an animation is performed in which the balloon display f1'changes to the balloon display f1a. In the animation, as the balloon part of the balloon display f1'expands and the character string of the balloon part gradually disappears, the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a appears instead. .. In addition, the balloon display f1a is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the character string and the pattern of "SP reach confirmed". It is a display including a part. The height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a is approximately twice the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1. In this example, the old balloon display f1 is configured to move upward and be erased in response to a change in the new balloon display f1', but for example, it is moved to either the left or right direction and erased. It may be overlapped by the balloon display f1a that has changed without moving, or it may be erased so as to fade out on the spot.

Following FIG. 151 (h), FIG. 151 (i) is stopped and displayed so that the balloon display f1a fits within the frame of the screen.

In FIG. 151 (j) following FIG. 151 (i), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping the balloon display f1a on the decorative symbol display device 208. , Indicates a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 151 (k) following FIG. 151 (j), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The character string of "SP reach confirmed" is deleted and the character string of "full rotation reach confirmed" is displayed. The character string of "full rotation reach confirmation" is displayed so as to protrude from the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a. The character string of "full rotation reach confirmed" includes decorative symbols, character images of the palace, hold icons, variable icons, special figure 1 hold number aa1, special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, special figure 2 hold number aa3, and special figure. There may be a case where the display of the fourth symbol aa4 of 2 or the number of reserved symbols aa5, the display of the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure, the display of the character string in the tutorial display area tu1, or the display other than these is overlapped.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed. After that, the balloon display f1a may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIGS. 152 (a) to 152 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 152 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 152A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 152 (b) following FIG. 152 (a), the balloon display f1 by the character of the lord appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, the character display m3 of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen. The character display m3 of the princess overlaps with the fourth symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure. There is.

Following FIG. 152 (b), FIG. 152 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation moving to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the character in the palace of the balloon display f1.

In FIG. 152 (d) following FIG. 152 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed. In addition, an animation is displayed in which the princess character m3 moves to the right, and the princess character m3 overlaps substantially the entire face image of the character in the balloon display f1 and the character image of "Den". It is displayed to do. If the balloon display f1 is stopped until the player presses the chance button 136, the princess character m3 may also be configured to stop moving in the right direction.

In FIG. 152 (e) following FIG. 152 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. In addition, an animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 is displayed on the left character part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the left character part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to overlap.

Following FIG. 152 (e), in FIG. 152 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, the animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 overlaps the character part in the middle part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the character part in the middle part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to do.

FIG. 152 (g), which follows FIG. 152 (f), shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation that moves to the right, and the princess character m3 is the character part on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, the pattern part of the sunny mark, and the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap the character part on the right side and the pattern part of the cloudy mark. Further, the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the button notice display h110 and a part of the operation expiration date display h112.

In FIG. 152 (h) following FIG. 152 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, the animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 has a cloudy mark pattern on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f2 and rain on the right part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3. It is displayed so as to overlap the pattern part of the mark and a part of the face image of the grandfather character.

Following FIG. 152 (h), in FIG. 152 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation moving to the right, and is erased so as to come out from the right edge of the screen. A part of the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the grandfather character. After that, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 153 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 153 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 153 (b) following FIG. 153 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, it shows a state in which the structure 247 has moved substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to see the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 153 (b), FIG. 153 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 153 (c), in FIG. 153 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player In FIG. 153 (e), following FIG. 153 (d), which shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. By pressing, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character appears from the bottom of the screen. It is displayed to do. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 153 (e), in FIG. 153 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark.

Following FIG. 153 (f), FIG. 153 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

In FIG. 153 (h) following FIG. 153 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f2, the character string portion, a part of the cloudy mark pattern, and a part of the frame portion of the balloon display f3.

Following FIG. 153 (h), in FIG. 153 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and the rain mark of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

In this example, the balloon display is configured to move while the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but while the structure 247 is located at the initial position. The balloon display may be configured to move, or the balloon display may be configured to move while the structure 247 overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIGS. 154 (a) to 154 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 154 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 154 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 154 (b) following FIG. 154 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays light emitting a smiling character. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

In FIG. 154 (c) following FIG. 154 (b), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

In FIG. 154 (d) following FIG. 154 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are difficult to see.

In FIG. 154 (e) following FIG. 154 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the sunny mark, and the cloudy mark of the balloon displays f1 and f2.

Following FIG. 154 (e), in FIG. 154 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the sunny mark, and the cloudy mark of the balloon displays f1 and f2.

Following FIG. 154 (f), FIG. 154 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, the frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are difficult to see.

In FIG. 154 (h) following FIG. 154 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, the frame portion of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, a part of the rain mark pattern, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are difficult to see.

Following FIG. 154 (h), in FIG. 154 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and the rain mark of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the light emitting panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying light emission, but only while the light emitting panel is not displaying light emission. , The balloon display may be configured to move.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 155 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 155 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 155 (a), in FIG. 155 (b), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display overlaps the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 155 (b), in FIG. 155 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is over a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, the whole character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, and all the characters of "the lord". I'm wrapping.

Following FIG. 155 (c), in FIG. 155 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is over a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, the whole character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, and all the characters of "the lord". I'm wrapping.

In FIG. 155 (e) following FIG. 155 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display overlaps almost all of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, a part of the character of "Den", and a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2. ..

Following FIG. 155 (e), in FIG. 155 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, almost the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, the face of the grandfather character. It overlaps a part of the image.

Following FIG. 155 (f), FIG. 155 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, almost the entire part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the grandfather character, and the button notice display. It overlaps with all of h110 and operation expiration date display h112.

In FIG. 155 (h) following FIG. 155 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display overlaps with almost the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the old character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, and a part of the character image of "princess". There is.

Following FIG. 155 (h), in FIG. 155 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2, a part of the cloudy mark pattern, a part of the face image of the grandfather character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, the entire character string, and the rain mark. A part of the picture of the princess, a part of the face image of the princess character, and a part of the character image of "princess" overlap.

In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the first display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display is displayed only while the first display is not displayed. May be configured to move. In addition, the first display is hold display, hold icon, variable icon, notice icon, icon area display, decorative symbol, fourth symbol, mini decorative symbol, notice display, look-ahead notice display, tutorial display, pseudo-continuous display, reach. Display, right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, jackpot display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, number of consecutive villas display, number of acquired balls display, number of acquired sheets display, volume adjustment display, It may be at least one of a light amount adjustment display, a button press display, an error display, a ball removal display, a door open display, and an abnormality occurrence display.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIGS. 156 (a) to 156 (h) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 156 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 156 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 156 (a), in FIG. 156 (b), a balloon display f1'by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed in. The balloon display f1'displays the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo-ream chance!". It is a display including a blowout part. The balloon display f1'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 156 (b), FIG. 156 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon a4 is newly displayed in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

Following FIG. 156 (c), in FIG. 156 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1'on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game is played. It shows a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge a person to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 156 (e) following FIG. 156 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2'by the old character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1'moves upward is displayed. In the balloon display f2', the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man character and the face image of the old man character, the character string of "pending change", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part.

Following FIG. 156 (e), in FIG. 156 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. Animation is performed, the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2'is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2'is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1'was stopped before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1'and the moving speed of the balloon display f2' are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

Following FIG. 156 (f), FIG. 156 (g) shows a state in which the cloudy mark pattern displayed on the balloon display f2'is moving toward the special FIGS. 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. There is.

Following FIG. 156 (g), in FIG. 156 (h), the cloudy mark pattern displayed on the balloon display f2'is replaced with the special figure 1 hold icon a4 in the default mode and displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a4. Has been done. After that, the balloon displays f1'and f2' may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or the hold icon or the variable icon may be changed by the animation. May be good.

The production of this example is an example in which continuous advance notice is performed by the balloon display f1'and the balloon display f2'. The balloon display f1'is used for the notice of the change, and the balloon display f2'is used for the look-ahead notice. Further, in this example, the pattern of the cloudy mark displayed inside the balloon part of the balloon display is moved and displayed as a hold icon. The notice icon used may be moved to the inside of the balloon part and displayed, or the icon displayed inside the balloon part may be overwritten with the notice icon. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 157. FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display. Further, in FIGS. 157 to 159, the sub liquid crystal a208 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub liquid crystal b208 is provided on the right side.

In FIG. 157 (a), the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, and a normal figure hold number aa5. The fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 157 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 157 (a), FIG. 157 (b) is a balloon display by the character of the palace from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). At the same time that a part of f1 appears, it blows out from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal a208 (the part at the same height as the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed so that another part of the display f1 appears. A part of the balloon display f1 is a balloon part in which the character string "Morning weather is" and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f1 is the face image of the character of the palace and the palace. The character image of "Den" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon part are applicable.

Following FIG. 157 (b), in FIG. 157 (c), a part of the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and another part of the balloon display f1 in the sub liquid crystal a208 are simultaneously turned upward. A moving animation is displayed, indicating a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub liquid crystal a208 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen.

Following FIG. 157 (c), in FIG. 157 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

Following FIG. 157 (d), in FIG. 157 (e), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation are valid on the decorative symbol display device 208. By erasing the deadline display h112, a part of the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 appears from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (the portion having the same height as the boundary portion between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed to do. A part of the balloon display f2 is a balloon part in which the character string "Morning weather is" and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f2 is the face image of the grandfather character and the grandfather. The character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon part correspond to it.

Following FIG. 157 (e), in FIG. 157 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 that appears from the lower part of the screen is performed. A movement animation is performed in which a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal a208, a movement animation in which the other part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed to stop and display at the upper part of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal b208, the other part of the balloon display f2 is displayed. A movement animation that moves upward is performed and a stop display is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Following FIG. 157 (f), FIG. 157 (g) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 at positions overlapping a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed.

Following FIG. 157 (g), in FIG. 157 (h), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation are valid on the decorative symbol display device 208. By erasing the deadline display h112, an animation is displayed in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a part of the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, the other part of the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, on the sub liquid crystal c208, an animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. A part of the balloon display f3 is a balloon part in which the character string "Afternoon weather is" and a picture of a rain mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f3 is a face image of a princess character and a princess. The character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon part correspond to it.

Following FIG. 157 (h), in FIG. 157 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f3 that appears from the lower part of the screen is performed. A movement animation is performed in which a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, a movement animation in which the other part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed to stop and display at the upper part of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal a208, the other part of the balloon display f3 is displayed. A movement animation that moves upward is performed, and the display is stopped at the center of the screen.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 158. FIGS. 158 (a) to 158 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 158 (a), the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, and a normal figure hold number aa5. The fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 158 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 158 (a), FIG. 158 (b) is a balloon display by the character of the palace from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed that f1 appears. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 158 (b), FIG. 158 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

Following FIG. 158 (c), in FIG. 158 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 158 (e) following FIG. 158 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the old character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed.

Following FIG. 158 (e), in FIG. 158 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is moved upward. A movement animation of moving toward is performed, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 158 (f), FIG. 158 (g) temporarily interrupts the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping the above, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 158 (h) following FIG. 158 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation are valid on the decorative symbol display device 208. By erasing the deadline display h112, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. Further, from the upper end of the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 that has already been erased is displayed so as to appear reduced according to the size of the sub liquid crystal b208.

Following FIG. 158 (h), in FIG. 158 (i), the animation of moving toward the balloon displays f2 and f3 is continuously performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 is performed on the sub liquid crystal b208. Is animated to move downward, and the balloon display is displayed at the bottom of the sub liquid crystal b208 so as to be accumulated. As described above, the effect of this example is an effect of storing the balloon display erased by the decorative symbol display device 208 in the sub liquid crystal b208. When the sub liquid crystal b208 is full of balloon displays, the old balloon display may be deleted, the new balloon display may be deleted, or all the balloon displays may be deleted. You may want to erase half of the balloon display.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed. Further, in this example, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is configured to be smaller than the balloon display f1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is decorated. It may be configured to be larger than the balloon display f1 displayed on the symbol display device 208, or may be configured to have the same size.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 159.

FIGS. 159 (a) to 159 (m) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 159 (a), the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, and a normal figure hold number aa5. The fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 159 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 159 (a), FIG. 159 (b) is based on the character of the palace from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (at the same height as the boundary between the reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area in Special Figures 1 and 2). The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 159 (b), FIG. 159 (c) shows a state in which a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208.

FIG. 159 (d), which follows FIG. 159 (c), shows a state in which "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, while the stop display is being displayed, the movement of the balloon display f1 of the sub liquid crystal b208 is also stopped.

In FIG. 159 (e) following FIG. 159 (d), the next variation is started, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is started.

In FIG. 159 (f) following FIG. 159 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed on the sub liquid crystal b208, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen faces upward. A moving animation is being performed. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 159 (g) following FIG. 159 (f), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208.

In FIG. 159 (h) following FIG. 159 (g), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208.

Following FIG. 159 (h), FIG. 159 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 9" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 159 (h), even during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the balloon display f1 and f2 are continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208, and the balloon display f3 appears from the lower part of the screen. ..

In FIG. 159 (j) following FIG. 159 (i), the next variation is started, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208. Is continuing.

In FIG. 159 (k) following FIG. 159 (j), the balloon display f1 to f3 is continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208, and the balloon display f6 appears from the lower part of the screen. There is. The balloon display f6 is the character image of "Chibihime" displayed on the face image of the character of Chibihime and the character image of "Princess Chibi" and the character strings of "Evening weather" and "Is it reach?" It is a display including a balloon part in which a picture of a clear mark is displayed. The balloon display f6 of this example is a display used as a notice that reach will be performed in the fluctuation.

In FIG. 159 (l) following FIG. 159 (k), the balloon displays f1 to f3 and f6 are continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the lower part of the screen is erased. At the stage when the entire balloon display f6 that appeared from is displayed, the scroll display of the balloon displays f2, f3, and f6 is interrupted or terminated.

FIG. 159 (m), which follows FIG. 159 (l), shows a state in which the reach effect of "decoration 4" is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this way, this example is an example in which the balloon display continues to be displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. Further, even during the stop display of the decorative pattern, the effect of the balloon display may be continuously performed by the sub liquid crystal.

The production of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

FIG. 160 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. FIG. 160 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 160 (i) to 160 (k) are produced after FIGS. 160 (a) to 160 (h), and FIGS. 160 (i') after FIGS. 160 (a) to 160 (h). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of ~ (l') is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 (a) to 160 (k).

FIG. 160A shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 160A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 160 (b) following FIG. 160 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the lord appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 160 (c) following FIG. 160 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 160 (d) following FIG. 160 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 160 (e) following FIG. 160 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. Second, the second balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the two balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed. In addition, there may be a case where three or more same balloon displays are continuous.

Following FIG. 160 (e), FIG. 160 (f) shows a movement animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 160 (g) following FIG. 160 (f), the scroll display of both balloon displays f1 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button 136 is imitated at a position overlapping with both balloon displays f1. The button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating that the notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 160 (h) following FIG. 160 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , An animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed, and just before both balloon displays f1 are erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, the balloon display f1b is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f1b shows the face image of the character of the palace, the character image of "Den" displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and "when all are on people, it is foolish but wisdom." What you can see and underneath is a display that includes a balloon that displays the character string and pattern of "It is wise but foolish to see." Further, the balloon portion of the balloon display f1b has a size that does not fit on one screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 160 (i) following FIG. 160 (h) shows a state in which the upper end of the balloon display f1b is located at the upper end of the screen.

FIG. 160 (j) following FIG. 160 (i) shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is scrolled.

FIG. 160 (k) following FIG. 160 (j) shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is scrolled until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 (i') to 160 (l').

FIG. 160 (i'), which follows FIGS. 160 (a) to 160 (h), shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon portion f1b is temporarily stopped. The scroll display of the balloon portion f1b may be stopped once or a plurality of times.

Following FIG. 160 (i'), FIG. 160 (j') shows on the decorative symbol display device 208 the operation expiration date display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. The state in which h112 is displayed is shown.

In FIG. 160 (k') following FIG. 160 (j'), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the scroll display of the balloon portion f1b that has been stopped is restarted. NS.

Following FIG. 160 (k'), FIG. 160 (l') shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is scrolled until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized. After that, the balloon display f1b may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. Further, the button notice effect may be performed every time the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is stopped, or the button notice effect may not be performed. In the scroll display of the balloon display f1b, all of the character strings of "When all of them are on top of a person, they look stupid and wisdom, and what is below are wisdom and wisdom." May be scrolled or not all scrolled. When all the character strings are scroll-displayed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where all the character strings are not scroll-displayed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 161.

FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (g) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 161 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 161A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 161 (a), FIG. 161 (b) is displayed so that two balloon displays f1 appear at the same time from the upper right and lower right of the screen, and an animation of moving to the left at the same speed is displayed. .. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, three or more same balloon displays may appear at the same time.

Following FIG. 161 (b), FIG. 161 (c) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that balloon displays f2 and f3 appear at the same time from the right edge of the screen, and an animation of moving to the left at the same speed is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, two or more different balloon displays may appear at the same time. In addition, the balloon display f1 above and below has started an animation of moving to the left at the same speed.

Following FIG. 161 (c), FIG. 161 (d) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 161 (d), FIG. 161 (e) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 161 (e), in FIG. 161 (f), an animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 exit from the left end in the order of appearance. It is the state just before being erased. Further, in this example, an animation is performed in which all the balloon displays move in the same direction at the same speed, but an animation in which each of the balloon displays moves in a different direction at a different speed may be performed. In addition, the balloon display used for the notice of the change or the look-ahead notice may be moved in a different direction from the notice not used for the notice of the change or the look-ahead notice, or may be moved at a different speed. There may be cases.

Following FIG. 161 (f), FIG. 161 (g) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and exits from the left end in the order of appearance. It shows the state after being erased. After that, the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. In this example, the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 that started to be displayed at the same time are displayed at the same time, but one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 precedes the other. The display may end at, or one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 may move faster than the other. Further, although the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 that started to be displayed at the same time are displayed at the same time, one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be displayed before the other, or the balloon may be displayed. One of the display f2 and the balloon display f3 may move faster than the other.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 142 to 162 is performed.

Next, two examples of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162A is an example of an effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed while the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 162A is an example in which the balloon display f1 is not moved when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. In this example, since the balloon display f1 overlaps with the balloon display f2, the dialogue of the character displayed on the balloon display f1 and the dialogue of the character displayed on the balloon display f2 cannot be visually recognized at the same time.

FIG. 162 (b) is an example of an effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed while the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 162 (b) is an example of moving the balloon display f1 upward when displaying the balloon display f2 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. By moving the balloon display f1 upward, the dialogue of the character displayed on the balloon display f1 and the dialogue of the character displayed on the balloon display f2 may be visually recognized at the same time.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment will be described again with reference to FIGS. 1 to 162.

(E1) First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, see FIG. 112), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and (for example, see FIG. 112), first light emitting means. (For example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, see FIG. 112), second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 112). In the game table, the first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 112), and the first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means. (For example, see FIG. 112), the first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 112), and in the first state, with the first light emitting means. One of the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)), and in the second state, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means Both do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113D), and the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means is the same in both the first state and the second state. It is an embodiment (see, for example, FIGS. 113 (b) and 113 (d)), and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state (for example,). , FIG. 113 (b), (d)).

The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(E2) The game console according to e1, in which the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 113B), and in the first state, the above. A game table characterized in that the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)).

(E3) The game console according to e1 or e2, wherein the first light emitting means is a means that may overlap with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 119 (c). )), A game table characterized by that.

(E4) The game console according to any one of e1 to e3, in which the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means in the initial state (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)). A game table characterized by that.

(E5) The game console according to any one of e1 to e4, wherein the first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from an initial state to the second state through at least the first state. A game table characterized in that there is (for example, see FIGS. 113 (a) to 113 (d)).

(E6) The game console according to any one of e1 to e5, wherein the first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34). The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, a movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 112), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third. (For example, see FIG. 113 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 113 (d)). A game table characterized by that.

(E7) The game console according to any one of e1 to e6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (see, for example, FIG. 112). A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)).

(E8) The gaming table according to e7, characterized in that, in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 113 (d)). A game table to play.

(E9) The game console according to any one of e1 to e8, wherein the first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3) (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)). ), The game table is characterized in that, in the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the cover (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)).

(E10) The game console according to any one of e1 to e9, and the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example,). A game table characterized in that (see FIG. 113 (b)).

(E11) The game console according to any one of e1 to e10, and the second state is a state during non-operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 113 (c)). ~ (E)), a game table characterized by this.

(E12) The game console according to any one of e1 to e11, comprising a substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)), wherein the substrate emits the first light emission. It is a substrate having both the means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)), and the first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)). ), A game table featuring that.

(E13) The game table according to any one of e1 to e12, comprising a game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125), and the first movable means is more than the game board. A game table characterized in that it is a means capable of operating rearward (see, for example, FIG. 119).

(E14) The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e13, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(E15) The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e13, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the first state and the second light emitting mode. The same light emission mode may be used in both states. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered with the first cover. -In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting. -The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one of them may be non-light emitting. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered with separate covers. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided by the second movable means. -The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means. -The second light emitting means may be a means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be monochromatic LEDs, one may be a monochromatic LED and the other may be a full-color LED, and one may be. A high-brightness LED and the other may be an ordinary LED. -A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display means after the display means has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device is provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count of the count notice. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may move according to the digestion of the hold icon suggesting the movement of the movable object. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the notice suggesting the operation of the movable object. -The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice or as a look-ahead notice. good.

(F1) First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, see FIG. 112), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and (for example, see FIG. 112), first light emitting means. (For example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, see FIG. 112), second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 112). In the game table, the first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 112), and the first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means. (For example, see FIG. 112), the first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 112), and in the first state, with the first light emitting means. One of the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)), and in the second state, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means Both do not overlap with the second movable means (see, eg, FIG. 113 (d)), and the first light emitting means is a means covered by a first cover (eg, cover portion 90a3) (eg, cover portion 90a3). (See FIG. 112 (b)), the second light emitting means is a means covered with the first cover (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)).

The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(F2) The game console according to f1, in which the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 113B), and in the first state, the above. A game table characterized in that the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)).

(F3) The game console according to f1 or f2, wherein the first light emitting means is a means that may overlap with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 119 (c). )), A game table characterized by that.

(F4) The game console according to any one of f1 to f3, in which the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means in the initial state (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)). A game table characterized by that.

(F5) The game console according to any one of f1 to f4, wherein the first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from an initial state to the second state through at least the first state. A game table characterized in that there is (for example, see FIGS. 113 (a) to 113 (d)).

(F6) The game console according to any one of f1 to f5, wherein the first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34). The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, a movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 112), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third. (For example, see FIG. 113 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 113 (d)). A game table characterized by that.

(F7) The game console according to any one of f1 to f6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (see, for example, FIG. 112). A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)).

(F8) The gaming table according to f7, characterized in that, in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 113 (d)). A game table to play.

(F9) The game console according to any one of f1 to f8, wherein the first movable means is a means having a second cover (for example, a cover portion 90b3) (for example, FIG. 112 (for example, FIG. 112). b)), the game table is characterized in that, in the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second cover (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)).

(F10) The game console according to any one of f1 to f9, wherein the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example,). A game table characterized in that (see FIG. 113 (b)).

(F11) The game console according to any one of f1 to f10, and the second state is a state during non-operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 113 (c)). ~ (E)), a game table characterized by this.

(F12) The game console according to any one of f1 to f11, comprising a substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)), wherein the substrate emits the first light emission. It is a substrate having both the means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)), and the first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)). ), A game table featuring that.

(F13) The game table according to any one of f1 to f12, comprising a game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125), and the first movable means is rearward of the game board. A game table characterized in that it is a means capable of operating in (for example, see FIG. 119).

(F14) The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f13, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(F15) The game table according to any one of f1 to f13, wherein the game table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the first state and the second light emitting mode. The same light emission mode may be used in both states. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered with the first cover. -In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting. -The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one of them may be non-light emitting. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered with separate covers. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided by the second movable means. -The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means. -The second light emitting means may be a means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be monochromatic LEDs, one may be a monochromatic LED and the other may be a full-color LED, and one may be. A high-brightness LED and the other may be an ordinary LED. -A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display means after the display means has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device is provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count of the count notice. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may move according to the digestion of the hold icon suggesting the movement of the movable object. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the notice suggesting the operation of the movable object. -The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice or as a look-ahead notice. good.

(G1) A game table including a first movable means (for example, a movable body 1) and a second movable means (for example, a movable body 1), wherein the first movable means is the first. (For example, an operation of moving downward) is a means capable of carrying out the operation (for example, an operation of moving downward) (see, for example, FIG. 109 (c)), and the second movable means is a second operation (for example, an operation of moving downward). Is a viable means (see, eg, FIG. 110 (c)), the initial position of the second movable means is located behind the initial position of the first movable means (eg, FIG. 109 (a). ), The position of the second movable means that executed the second operation is located behind the first movable means that executed the first operation (see, for example, FIG. 111 (c)). ), A game table featuring that.

The appearance of the second movable means can be changed depending on the positional relationship with the first movable means, and the player's interest may be improved.

(G2) In the game table according to g1, the direction in which the first movable means moves in the first operation is the same as the direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation. (For example, see FIG. 111 (c)).

It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means even during the execution of the second operation.

(G3) In the game table according to g1 or g2, in a state where at least a part of the first movable means and a part of the second movable means are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the second movable means. A game table characterized in that the other part is visible from the front.

It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means.

(G4) The game console according to any one of g1 to g3, provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the position of the display means is the position where the second operation is executed. A game table characterized in that it is located behind the position of the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 111 (c)).

It may be possible to change the appearance of the display means.

(G5) The game console according to g4, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a first error display (for example, display of a character string of "please pull out the ball") (for example, FIG. 111 (b)), at least a portion of the first error display may be overlapped by at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means (eg, FIG. 111 (c)). )), A game table characterized by that.

It may be possible to change the appearance of the first error display.

(G6) The game table according to g5, wherein the first error display is a ball-less display (see, for example, FIG. 111 (b)).

It may be possible to change the appearance of the ball-less display.

(G7) The gaming table according to any one of g1 to g6, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(G8) The game table according to any one of g1 to g5, wherein the game table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

-The direction in which the first movable means moves in the first movement may be upward, left, right, or downward, and the first movement may be a fall, which is a component in the front-rear direction or a left-right direction. The orientation may include at least one of the components of the above and the components in the vertical direction. -The direction in which the second movable means moves in the second movement may be upward, left, right, or downward, and the first movement may be a fall, which is a component in the front-rear direction or a left-right direction. The orientation may include at least one of the components of the above and the components in the vertical direction. -Both the first operation and the second operation may be executed at the same time, one may be executed after the other is executed, or only one or the other may be executed. • After both the first and second movements have been performed, both the first and second movable means may return to their initial position at the same time, one returning and then the other. May be good. -While one of the first movable means and the second movable means operates and returns to the initial position, the other may operate. -During the first operation, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emitting effect, or may perform the same light emitting effect as the LED of the first movable means. -During the second operation, the LED of the first movable means may perform a light emitting effect, or may perform the same light emitting effect as the LED of the second movable means. -Even if the first movable means is located in front of the second movable means, the LED of the second movable means may give a light emitting effect, or may give the same light emitting effect as the LED of the first movable means. good.

(H1) First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, see FIG. 112), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and (for example, see FIG. 112), first light emitting means. (For example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, see FIG. 112), second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 112). In the game table, the first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 112), and the first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means. (For example, see FIG. 112), the first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 112), and in the first state, with the first light emitting means. One of the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)), and in the second state, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means Both do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (d)), and in the initial state, at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means has a structure. A game table characterized in that it overlaps a body (eg, structure 30a) (see, eg, FIG. 119 (a)).

The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(H2) The game console according to h1, in which the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)), and in the first state, the above. A game table characterized in that the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 113 (b)).

(H3) The game console according to h1 or h2, wherein the first light emitting means is a means that may overlap with a structure (for example, a structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 119 (c). )), A game table characterized by that.

(H4) The game console according to any one of h1 to h3, in which the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means in the initial state (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)). A game table characterized by that.

(H5) The game console according to any one of h1 to h4, wherein the first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from an initial state to the second state through at least the first state. A game table, characterized in that there is (for example, see FIGS. 113 (a) to 113 (d)).

(H6) The game console according to any one of h1 to h5, wherein the first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34). The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, a movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 112), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third. (For example, see FIG. 113 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 113 (d)). A game table characterized by that.

(H7) The game console according to any one of h1 to h6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (see, for example, FIG. 112). A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)).

(H8) The gaming table according to h7, characterized in that, in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 113 (d)). A game table to play.

(H9) The game console according to any one of h1 to h8, wherein the first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3), and in an initial state, the first movable means. A game table characterized in that the light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the cover (see, for example, FIG. 113 (a)).

(H10) The game console according to any one of h1 to h9, wherein the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example,). (See FIG. 113 (b)),
A game table characterized by that.

(H11) The game console according to any one of h1 to h10, and the second state is a state during non-operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 113 (c)). ~ (E)), a game table characterized by this.

(H12) The game console according to any one of h1 to h11, comprising a substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)), wherein the substrate emits the first light emission. It is a substrate having both the means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)), and the first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 112 (b)). ), A game table featuring that.

(H13) The game table according to any one of h1 to h12, comprising a game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125), and the first movable means is rearward of the game board. A game table characterized in that it is a means that can be operated with (for example, see FIG. 119).

(H14) The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h13, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
(H15) The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h13, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the first state and the second light emitting mode. The same light emission mode may be used in both states. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered with the first cover. -In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting. -The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one of them may be non-light emitting. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered with separate covers. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided by the second movable means. -The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means. -The second light emitting means may be a means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be monochromatic LEDs, one may be a monochromatic LED and the other may be a full-color LED, and one may be. A high-brightness LED and the other may be an ordinary LED. -A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display means after the display means has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device is provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count of the count notice. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may move according to the digestion of the hold icon suggesting the movement of the movable object. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the notice suggesting the operation of the movable object. -The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice or as a look-ahead notice. good.

(I1) A game table including a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) and a structure (for example, a structure 247), and the display means is a first position (for example, a display area). The first display (for example, the character display SB of Sabohani) can be displayed on the lower center of the structure (see, for example, FIG. 121 (c)), and at least a part of the structure is one of the display means. The first display, which is located at a position that overlaps the portions (see, for example, FIG. 121) and is displayed at the first position, is a display that may overlap the structure (for example,). A game table characterized in that (see FIG. 121 (c)).

It may be possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of playing by changing the direction in which the game table is viewed, and to improve the interest of the player.

(I2) The game console according to i1, wherein the structure is a movable structure (see, for example, FIG. 130), and the first display displayed at the first position is the same. A game table characterized in that the display does not overlap with the structure after the structure is moved.

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I3) The game console according to i1 or i2, wherein the display means is a movable display means (see, for example, FIGS. 455 to 461), and the first position displayed at the first position. The display of the game table is a display that does not overlap with the structure after the display means is moved.

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I4) The game console according to any one of i1 to i3, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying the first display at a second position (for example, a central portion of a display area). The game table is characterized in that the first display displayed at the second position is a display that does not overlap with the structure (see, for example, FIG. 121 (e)).

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I5) In the game table according to i4, the first display may be displayed at the first position and then displayed at the second position (see, for example, FIG. 121). A game table featuring.

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I6) The game console according to any one of i1 to i5, wherein the first display is a notice display (see, for example, FIG. 121).

The appearance of the notice display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I7) The gaming table according to any one of i1 to i6, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(I8) The game console according to any one of i1 to i6, wherein the game console is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
-The first display may be a look-ahead notice display, a display including characters, an icon display, a hold icon display, or a variable icon display. It may be a character display, or it may be an error display. -The first display displayed at the second position may overlap with the structure. -The first display displayed at the second position may overlap with the structure after the display means is moved. -The structure may be provided with display means, may be provided with an LED substrate, and may be movable. -The display means may be movable. -The structure may be a transmissive liquid crystal display, and the first display may be performed at the rear while the transmissive liquid crystal display is being displayed. -The structure may be a light emitting panel, and the first display may be made at the rear during the light emitting display of the light emitting panel.

(Drawing) -Example of moving the notice display from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it does not overlap-The notice display does not overlap from the first position where it overlaps the structure. Example of moving to the second position and then moving to the first position-The notice display overlaps with the structure. It does not overlap from the first position. After moving to the second position, it overlaps with the other structure. Move to 3rd position / Notice display does not overlap with structure Example / Notice display always overlaps from 4th position Moves to 1st position and then moves to 5th position Visible example-The notice display is displayed in the first position where it overlaps the structure, and the other notice display moves to the second position where it does not overlap.-The notice display is displayed in the second position, etc. Example of moving the notice display to the first position-Example of moving the notice display from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it does not overlap, and the effect display can be seen first-The notice display An example of giving a notice of the notice display before it is displayed at the first position that overlaps the structure, an example of the notice display appearing enlarged ・ The notice display is displayed at the second position, and the structure is moved or Example in which the notice display of the second position is hidden by the movement of the display means (j1) A game table provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display, wherein the display means is , A means capable of displaying a plurality of icons, one of the plurality of icons is a hold icon, and during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation by the icon (hereinafter, "first animation"). (For example, a moving animation of the notice display m1)), and after the display of the first animation, the first effect display (for example, the effect of pseudo continuous variation) in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed. A game console characterized in that it may be performed (see, eg, FIG. 132).

It may be possible to attract the player's attention to the decorative pattern variation display and improve the player's interest.

(J2) The game console according to j1, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon as a variable icon.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of hold icons and variable icons.

(J3) The game console according to j1 or j2, the first animation is an animation including a change display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 141 (f) and 141 (g)). A game table characterized by that.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J4) The game console according to any one of j1 to j3, and the first animation is an animation including a movement display of the icon (for example, FIGS. 132 (f) to 132 (f) to (j4). i) Refer to), a game table characterized by.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J5) The game console according to any one of j1 to j4, and the first animation is an animation including a reduction display of the icon (for example, FIGS. 132 (f), (f), g)), a game table characterized by this.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J6) The game console according to any one of j1 to j5, and the first animation is an animation including an increase display of the icon (for example, FIGS. 132 (j), (j), k)), a game table characterized by this.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J7) The game console according to j6, wherein the increase display in one icon may be displayed a plurality of times (see, for example, FIG. 136).

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of one icon more.

(J8) The game console according to any one of j1 to j7, and the first effect display is a pseudo continuous variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (for example, FIG. 132 (h). )), A game table characterized by that.

In some cases, the decorative pattern variation display can attract the attention of the player.

(J9) The game console according to any one of j1 to j8, and the first effect display is a reach variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (for example, FIG. 138 (j)). reference),
A game table characterized by that.

In some cases, the decorative pattern variation display can attract the attention of the player.

(J10) The game console according to any one of j1 to j9, wherein the first effect display is an operation effect display in the decorative symbol variation display. ..

In some cases, the decorative pattern variation display can attract the attention of the player.

(J11) The first game table according to any one of j1 to j10, when the icon is displayed in the icon display area (for example, special figures 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab). Animation is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 133 (f)), and during at least a part of the display period of the first animation, another display (for example, a character string of "preparing") is displayed in the icon display area. An icon) may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 133 (g)).

In some cases, the display of the icon display area can attract the attention of the player.

(J12) The game console according to any one of j1 to j11, and during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, animation by two or more of the icons (hereinafter, referred to as "second animation"). It may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 141 (f)), and the first effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the display of the second animation (for example, FIG. 141 (h)). (See), a game table characterized by that.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of two or more icons more.

(J13) The gaming table according to any one of j1 to j12, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

-The icon does not have to be moved and nothing is displayed in the original icon display area, the temporary icon display may be displayed instead, or other icons are moved (packed) and displayed. You may. -If the icon is moved and then displayed again (returned) in the original icon display area, it may be displayed in an increased manner, may be displayed so as to overlap with another icon display, or may be displayed in another icon. May be displayed to dismiss. -The decorative symbol may change after the first animation, it may be erased (destroyed), it may shift from the shaking fluctuation display to the fluctuation display, or the special symbol may be temporarily stopped in the middle symbol. May be good. -The first effect display does not have to be performed after the first animation. -The first animation may be performed multiple times during one decorative symbol variation display. -The first animation may be performed multiple times with one icon during a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays. -An icon with a high degree of expectation may be easier to perform the first animation than an icon with a low degree of expectation, or vice versa. -The first animation may be easier to perform in the case of the hold full tank than in the case of the hold non-full tank, or vice versa. -A notice may be displayed suggesting that the first animation will be performed. -A count notice display (timer effect) suggesting the start time of the first animation may be performed. -The first animation may be performed when an icon (mini item) different from the hold icon or variable icon is digested. -The first animation may be performed when the result of the mini game is the first result.

(Drawing) -FIGS. 132 to 141 are examples in which the hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol during the shaking fluctuation of the out-of-order symbol, and the decorative symbol variation display re-variates (pseudo-ream). FIG. 133 is an example of displaying a temporary icon on the hold pedestal while the hold icon is moving. -Fig. 134 is an example of returning to the original position when the hold icon behind is packed and returned while the hold icon is moving. -Fig. 135 is an example of a ghost effect that does not develop even if the hold icon collides. -Fig. 136 is an example in which the same hold icon performs the first animation a plurality of times with one fluctuation. -Fig. 137 is an example in which different hold icons perform the first animation in one fluctuation. FIG. 138 is an example of reaching after the first animation of the hold icon. -Fig. 139 is an example in which the variable icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol. -Fig. 140 is an example in which the same hold icon collides with each other over a plurality of fluctuations and develops into reach. -Fig. 141 is an example in which a plurality of hold icons collide with a decorative symbol at the same time to reach.

(K1) A game table provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays, and one of the plurality of displays is displayed. , A first balloon display (for example, a balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 143 (f)), and one of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, a balloon display f2). (For example, see FIG. 143 (f)), and while the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (for example, FIG. 143 (for example). e)), at least a part of the first display area and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (see, for example, FIG. 143 (e)).

Since the player can visually recognize the second balloon display without changing the line of sight, he / she can concentrate on the game and improve the interest of the player.

(K2) The game console according to k1, the display means means the movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as "first movement animation" (for example, upward movement animation)). It is a displayable means (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (d) and 143 (e)), and the first movement animation is displayed after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area. A game table characterized in that there are cases (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (d) and (e)).

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(K3) The game console according to k2, the display means is referred to as a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter, "second movement animation" (for example, a movement animation moving to the left). ) Is displayed, and the second balloon display is displayed after the second movement animation is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 143 (f)).

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(K4) The game console according to k2 or k3, which is referred to as another movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as a "third movement animation" (for example, a movement animation moving to the right)). The first balloon display is displayed in the first display area (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (b) and 143 (c)), and the first movement animation and the third movement animation are the first movement animation. A game table characterized in that the direction in which one balloon display moves may be different (see, for example, FIG. 143).

It may be possible to raise the player's expectation by changing the direction of movement by the movement animation.

(K5) In the game console according to any one of k1 to k4, at least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (for example, FIG. 143 (e)), a game table characterized by the above.

In some cases, both the first balloon display and the second balloon display can attract the player's interest.

(K6) In the game console according to any one of k1 to k5, at least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (k6). For example, (see FIG. 143 (e)), a game table characterized by the above.

In some cases, the second balloon display in the foreground can attract the player's interest.

(K7) The game console according to any one of k1 to k6, the first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace), and the second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace). It is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace), and the character of the first balloon display and the character of the second balloon display may be the same (see, for example, FIGS. 160 (f) and 160 (g)). , A game table featuring that.

The balloon display of the same character may be continuously displayed to increase the player's expectation.

(K8) The game console according to any one of k1 to k7, provided with operating means (for example, chance button 136), and the operating means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed. In some cases, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (d) and 143 (e)).

It may be possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game.

(K9) The gaming table according to any one of k1 to k8, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(K10) The game console according to any one of k1 to k8, wherein the game console is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

-The balloon display may be moved or disappeared while being overlapped with other displays (for example, notice, error display, ball-out display). -A part of the balloon display may disappear after the movement display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be heard at the same time or in order. -The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half. -It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played in reverse or the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed). -A part of the redisplayed balloon display may have changed (the color may change to red, gold, or rainbow, or the characters may change to characters with high expectations). -When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with high expectation may remain and the other balloon display (balloon display with low expectation) may disappear preferentially. -The balloon display may be enlarged, or the characters in the balloon display may be displayed outside the frame of the balloon display. -The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means. -Character animation may be performed during the movement animation of the balloon display. -The balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations. -A balloon display may be used to give a pre-reading notice. -A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means is used as the other. The balloon display may be moved to, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

(Drawing) FIG. 142 is an example of a conversation notice. FIG. 143 shows an example of a conversation notice, the appearance animation moves horizontally, and the animation when a new balloon appears moves vertically (the animation of the new balloon and the animation of the old balloon move at the same time). FIG. 144 is an example of a conversation notice, the appearance animation moves horizontally, and the animation when a new balloon appears is an example of vertical movement (an example of timing modification, an animation of a new balloon after an animation of an old balloon). FIG. 145 is an example of a conversation notice / appearance animation moving horizontally, and an animation at the time of appearance of a new balloon is an example of vertical movement (example of timing modification / animation of an old balloon after animation of a new balloon). FIG. 146 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example of the appearance animation moving vertically, and an example in which the size of the balloon is different from normal, half, and double. FIG. 147 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which a disappeared character returns, and an example in which the content changes when the character returns. FIG. 148 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a specific speech bubble (for example, a speech bubble with a high degree of expectation) is not deleted. FIG. 149 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which balloons overlap. FIG. 150 shows an example of a conversation notice and an example in which an old speech bubble is reduced. FIG. 151 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which balloons of the same character are continuous, an example in which the balloon is enlarged, and an example in which the content of the balloon protrudes from the balloon. FIG. 152 shows an example of a conversation notice / an example in which the balloon moves while the notice character is moving. FIG. 153 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which the balloon moves while the movable body is in operation. FIG. 154 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which the balloon moves while the light emitting panel in front of the display device emits light. FIG. 155 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which the balloon moves while the first display is displayed. FIG. 156 is an example of a conversation notice / balloon is a look-ahead notice (the hold icon changes to a look-ahead icon). FIG. 157 is an example of a conversation notice, an example in which a character and a balloon are displayed on separate display means. FIG. 158 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a balloon moves to another display means. FIG. 159 is an example of a conversation notice / an example in which a balloon is displayed over a plurality of fluctuations.

(L1) A game table provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays, and one of the plurality of displays is displayed. , A first balloon display (for example, a balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 143 (f)), and one of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, a balloon display f2). (For example, see FIG. 143 (f)), and while the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (for example, FIG. 143 (for example). e)), while the second balloon display is being displayed, the first balloon display may be displayed in the second display area (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (e) and 143 (f)). A game table characterized by that.

By displaying the first balloon display in a different display area even while the second balloon display is being displayed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the relationship between the two balloon displays, so that the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the player's interests. Can be improved.

(L2) The game console according to l1, the display means means the movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as "first movement animation" (for example, upward movement animation)). It is a displayable means (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (d) and 143 (e)), and the first movement animation is displayed after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area. A game table characterized in that there are cases (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (d) and (e)).

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(L3) The game console according to l1 or l2, wherein the display means is a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter, "second movement animation" (for example, a movement animation moving to the left)). The second movement animation is displayed, and then the second balloon display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 143 (f)). The stand.

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(L4) In the game console according to any one of l1 to l3, at least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (for example, FIG. 143 (e)), a game table characterized by the above.

In some cases, both the first balloon display and the second balloon display can attract the player's interest.

(L5) In the game console according to any one of l1 to l4, at least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (l5). For example, (see FIG. 143 (e)), a game table characterized by the above.

In some cases, the second balloon display in the foreground can attract the player's interest.

(L6) The game console according to any one of l1 to l5, the first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace), and the second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace). It is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace), and the character of the first balloon display and the character of the second balloon display may be the same (see, for example, FIGS. 160 (f) and 160 (g)). , A game table featuring that.

The balloon display of the same character may be continuously displayed to increase the player's expectation.

(L7) The game console according to any one of l1 to l6, provided with operating means (for example, chance button 136), and the operating means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed. In some cases, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 143 (d) and 143 (e)).

It may be possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game.

(L8) The game console according to any one of l1 to l7, and one of the plurality of displays is a third balloon display (for example, balloon display f5) (for example, FIG. 146 (q)), while the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the third balloon display may start to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 146 (n)). The width of the first balloon display and the width of the second balloon display are the same, and the width of the first balloon display and the width of the third balloon display are different (see, for example, FIG. 146 (q)). ), A game table featuring that.

By changing the width of the balloon display, it may be possible to increase the player's expectation.

(L9) The gaming table according to any one of l1 to l8, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(L10) The game console according to any one of l1 to l8, wherein the game console is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

-The balloon display may be moved or disappeared while being overlapped with other displays (for example, notice, error display, ball-out display). -A part of the balloon display may disappear after the movement display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be heard at the same time or in order. -The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half. -It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played in reverse or the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed). -A part of the redisplayed balloon display may have changed (the color may change to red, gold, or rainbow, or the characters may change to characters with high expectations). -When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with high expectation may remain and the other balloon display (balloon display with low expectation) may disappear preferentially. -The balloon display may be enlarged, or the characters in the balloon display may be displayed outside the frame of the balloon display. -The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means. -Character animation may be performed during the movement animation of the balloon display. -The balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations. -A balloon display may be used to give a pre-reading notice. -A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means is used as the other. The balloon display may be moved to, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

163 to 173 are diagrams showing stepwise change effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 163 to 173 are examples of effects executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machines 100 capable of executing the effect examples shown in FIGS. 163 to 173 are shown in other drawings. Various effects can also be performed. Further, in FIGS. 163 to 173, the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N may be used instead of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, the second decorative symbol display device 208L may be used. The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown. Further, in FIGS. 163 to 173, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 163 to 173 represent common components when the same reference numerals as those used so far are used. Moreover, even if different codes are used, they may be common in terms of technical ideas. That is, as a technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 14 to 19 and the technical idea shown in other drawings to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 163 to 173, and the technical idea thereof. On the contrary, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 163 to 173 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 192 to 193 and other technical ideas shown in the drawings. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

Although the description in FIGS. 163 to 173 can be applied to any of the production examples in this specification, it is preferably applied to the production examples described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM of the character of the lord as an effect icon is taking an action on the variable icon h0.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 163, first, in FIG. 163, the decorative symbol display device 208 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”). -"Decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. The second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (a).

Further, the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (a). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord is displayed on the right base icon bIr in FIG. 163 (a). In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 163 (a) is displayed in a display mode wearing a blue kimono. That is, at least part of it is displayed in blue. In other words, the whole may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, the part of the kimono) may be displayed in blue. This navigation character YM is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. This point will be described in detail later.

Further, in FIG. 163 (a), the number of hold icons of the special figure 1 is 4, and the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, the third hold icon h13, and the fourth hold icon h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. ing. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. That is, at least a part of each hold icon is displayed in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that.

Further, FIG. 163 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 remains displayed. be. The variable icon h0 disappears at the timing when the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. The display of the navigation character YM does not disappear even at the timing of the final display, and the navigation character YM continues to be displayed even during the final display.

In FIG. 163 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the first hold icon so far is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. The icon that was the hold icon h11 is displayed as the variable icon h0. Both the hold icons h1 to h3 and the variable icons h0 are the default (white) display modes. This variable icon is also displayed in white, at least in part. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed, and the navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. become. The navigation character YM has been displayed in the initial posture facing the front. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In FIG. 163 (c), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces the variable icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 163 (d), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM of the lord, and in the same figure (e), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, and the variable icon h0. Is more difficult to see than it was before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 163 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed. Further, the effect image Eh0 shown in FIG. 163 (e) has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variable icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 163 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 163 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 163 (f). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 163 (c) and ended immediately before the figure (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating (the figure). It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (d) to the figure (e)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (h). In, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation icon h0 whose display mode has changed is still displayed, and the navigation character YM is also continuously displayed. The variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier when it is a false notice than when it is a true notice.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 163 described above, the Ath effect icon (the icon of the navigation character YM of the lord) of the Ath color (blue) changes the default display mode variation icon to the Ath color. This is an example of changing with the frequency (probability) of the first A.

Subsequently, the second example from the left in FIG. 163 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 163, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the following description, the description overlapping with the example shown at the left end of FIG. 163 may be omitted, but the explanation in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 163 applies. In the second example from the left in FIG. 163, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those in FIGS. (a) to (d) described above, and the blue kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the wearing display mode changes to the pose of pulling out the sword and swinging it toward the variable icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 163 (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a red smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 163 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to a mode. At least a part of the variable icon h0 changed to the red display mode is displayed in red. In other words, the whole may be displayed in red, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in red. The variable icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0, and the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. On the other hand, the mode of the variable icon h0 after the change (red mode) is different from the kimono mode (blue mode) of the navigation character YM. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (H), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is The normal notice by the changed variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the second example from the left in FIG. 163 described above, the first effect icon (the icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the first color (blue) is the variable icon of the default display mode, and the second B. This is an example of changing the color (red) of (red) with the second frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the frequency A and the frequency B in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 163 may be higher in the frequency A than in the frequency B, or in the A. The frequency of the second B may be higher than the frequency, and the frequency of the first A and the frequency of the B may be the same.

Subsequently, the third example from the left in FIG. 163 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 163, and overlapping description may be omitted. Even in the third example from the left in FIG. 163, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those in FIGS. (a) to (d) described above, and the blue kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the wearing display mode changes to the pose of pulling out the sword and swinging it toward the variable icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 163 (e), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is the same blue smoke image as the kimono of the navigator character YM, and the variable icon h0 is more visible than before it was covered. It's getting harder. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 163 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and the variable icon h0 remains in the default (white) display mode. In this way, even if the icon is covered with the effect image Eh0, it may not only change but may not change. Among the icon change animations, an animation in which the icon display mode changes can be classified as a success animation, and an animation in which the icon display mode does not change can be classified as a failure animation. However, when the icon is covered by the effect image Eh0, the display mode of the covered icon may be changed without fail. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (c), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the variable icon h0 has not been given, and when the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. 163 (f), the player's expectation for a big hit Is low. However, even if the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

Subsequently, the example shown in the upper half of the right end of FIG. 163 may be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left end of FIG. 163, and duplicate explanations may be omitted. In FIG. 163 (c) shown at the left end, the variable icon h0 is the default (white) display mode, but it may be the blue display mode. In this example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 163 (c) is a blue display mode, and in FIG. 163 (d1), the navigation of the display mode wearing a blue kimono. The character YM swings his sword toward the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode, and waves are oscillated from the sword. That is, at least a part of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 163 (d1) is displayed in blue. In other words, the whole may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in blue. Subsequently, in FIG. 163 (e1), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is an effect image Eh0 which is a blue smoke image which is the same as the kimono mode of the navigator character YM and also the display mode of the variable icon h0. The covered and variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than it was before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 163 (f1), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was displayed in blue before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to a red display mode. That is, the variable icon h0 has changed to a mode different from the effect image Eh0 and the kimono mode (blue mode) of the navigation character YM. In this example as well, after that, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice.

Subsequently, the example shown in the lower half of the right end of FIG. 163 may be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left end of FIG. 163, and duplicate explanations may be omitted. In FIG. 163 (c) shown at the left end, the variable icon h0 is the default (white) display mode, but it may be the blue display mode. In addition, although the navigation character YM of the lord was in a display mode wearing a blue kimono, it may be in a display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 163 (c) is a blue display mode, and the display mode of the navigator character YM of the lord is a display mode in which the navigator character YM wears a red kimono. In (d2), the navigator character YM of the display mode wearing a red kimono swings a sword toward the variable icon h0 of the blue display mode, and waves are oscillated from the sword. That is, at least a part of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 163 (d2) is displayed in red. In other words, the whole may be displayed in red, or only a part (for example, the part of the kimono) may be displayed in red. Subsequently, in FIG. 163 (e2), at least a part of the fluctuating icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a blue smoke image similar to the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0, and the fluctuating icon h0 is covered from before being covered. It is difficult to see. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 163 (f2), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and the variable icon h0 remains in the blue display mode. The variable icon h0 has the same mode as the effect image Eh0, and the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) that the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change.

As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 163 are examples in which the variable icon h0 is targeted, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is targeted.

Further, as the embodiment, white, blue, and red have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. That is, a plurality of types of modes are prepared as modes for expressing the player's advantage and the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, the lowest aspect is the white or unpatterned aspect (A aspect), the blue or diagonal line pattern aspect (B aspect), the green or diamond pattern aspect (C aspect), the red or the like. The pattern becomes higher in the order of the lattice pattern (D), the golden or vertical line pattern (E), and the iridescent or horizontal line pattern (F) becomes the highest. .. A plurality of types of modes are prepared for each of the variable icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0, but each mode is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. 163. That is, the white color in the example described with reference to FIG. 163 may be replaced with blue color. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a blue display mode or a green display mode. Furthermore, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the blue color in the example described with reference to FIG. 163 may be replaced with white or green. For example, the navigator character YM of the lord who was wearing a blue kimono may be displayed in a white kimono, may be in a green kimono, or may be in a blue color. The effect image Eh0, which is the display mode of the above, may be a white display mode or a green display mode. Alternatively, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a blue kimono may be a display mode wearing a red kimono, or may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono. The effect image Eh0, which may have a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono or a blue display mode, may have a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow. It may be a color display mode. The modes can be broadly divided into green and diamond-shaped patterns (the first aspect) and the following aspects (the first group, which is a group of the A aspect, the B aspect, and the C aspect), and red and red. It can be divided into the above-mentioned aspect (the second group which is a group of the D aspect, the E aspect, and the F aspect) of the lattice pattern (the D aspect). Here, the mode belonging to the first group cannot be changed to the mode belonging to the second group, and the mode belonging to the second group cannot be changed to the mode belonging to the first group. On the other hand, it may be possible to switch the modes within the first group and also to switch the modes within the second group. Further, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's advantage and the expectation of the big hit may be expressed by the difference in size and number. Further, the advantage of the player is that it is easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state), that the premier production is likely to be started, or that the jackpot confirmation production is started. It may be easy. It also includes the fact that it is easy to perform an effect that indirectly connects to the jackpot without directly connecting to the jackpot. For example, the SP reach effect with high reliability of the jackpot may be started, or another notice with high reliability of the jackpot may easily appear. The matters relating to the embodiments described in this paragraph are the same in the previous examples and in the subsequent examples.

Further, the mode of each icon may be the mode of the entire icon (entire area) or the mode of only a part (partial area) of the icon.

Further, in each of the examples described with reference to FIG. 163, the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed was a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice.

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is taking an action on the variable icon h0.

The example shown at the left end of FIG. 164 will be described mainly on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 163, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the effect icon display area DIS of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (a), the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed.

In FIG. 164 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 164 (c), the navigator character YM, which had been in the initial posture until then, faces the variable icon h0 in the white display mode. It changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 164 (d), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM of the lord, and in the following figure (e), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the blue smoke image and fluctuates. The icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 164 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is displayed in blue, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to a mode. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, after that, the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice. It means that there was.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 164 described above, the first effect icon (icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the second color (red) is the variable icon of the default display mode, and the first color (red). This is an example of changing to blue) with the Cth frequency (probability).

Subsequently, the second example from the left in FIG. 164 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 164, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the second example from the left in FIG. 164, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those in FIGS. (a) to (d) described above, and the blue kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the wearing display mode changes to the pose of pulling out the sword and swinging it toward the variable icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 164 (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a red smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 164 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to the red display mode. That is, the variable icon h0 has changed to the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and also has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (H), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is The normal notice by the changed variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the second example from the left in FIG. 164 described above, the first effect icon (the icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the second color (red) is the variable icon of the default display mode. This is an example of changing the color (red) of (red) with the D-th frequency (probability). It should be noted that, for example, the variable icon h0 in the green display mode may be used instead of the variable icon h0 in the default display mode. In this case, the first effect icon (the icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the second color (red) is the variable icon of the display mode of the third color (green), and the third color (red). ) Is an example of changing with the D-th frequency (probability).

Subsequently, the third example from the left in FIG. 164 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 164, and overlapping description may be omitted. Even in the third example from the left in FIG. 164, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those in FIGS. (a) to (d) described above, and the red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the wearing display mode changes to the pose of pulling out the sword and swinging it toward the variable icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 164 (e), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 164 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, has the same display mode as the effect image Eh0, which is a gold display mode. It has changed to. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (H), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is The normal notice by the changed variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the third example from the left in FIG. 164 described above, the first effect icon (the icon of the navigator character YM of the lord) of the second color (red) is the variable icon of the default display mode, and the third C. This is an example of changing the color (gold) of E with the frequency (probability) of E. Here, the relationship between the frequency C in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 164, the frequency D in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 164, and the frequency E is the frequency D. The relationship may be> E-th frequency> C-th frequency. Alternatively, the frequency of the D may be less than the frequency of the E, or the frequency of the D may be equal to the frequency of the E. Further, the frequency of the Cth may be 0.

Further, the frequency D may be the frequency B in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 163, or the frequency A in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 163> the frequency C. There may be.

Next, the example shown at the right end of FIG. 164 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 164, and overlapping description may be omitted. Even in the example shown at the right end of FIG. 164, FIGS. (A) to (E) are the same as those of FIGS. The navigator character YM of the mode lord turns to the variable icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 164 (O), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a red smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 164 (or), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (ku), the combination of lost decorative icons (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the variable icon h0 has not been given, and when the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. Is low. However, even if the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 164 are examples in which the variable icon h0 is targeted, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is targeted. Further, as the embodiment, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the variable icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIG. 164. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold color. It may be a display mode of, or it may be a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 164, the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed was a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing some examples in which the display mode of the icon changes even if the navigation character YM is not displayed.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 165, first, in the same figure (a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 165 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to.

In FIG. 165 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, only the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon h1 and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. No icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 165 (c), the icon change animation is started, at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the blue effect image Eh0, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0.

In FIG. 165 (d), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is displayed in blue, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to a mode. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (e), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example shown at the left end of FIG. 165 described above, the variation icon of the default display mode changes to the first color (blue) with the fifth frequency (probability).

Subsequently, the second example from the left in FIG. 165 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 165, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the second example from the left in FIG. 165, FIGS. (A) to (B) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (b) described above, and the default (white). The variation icon h0 of the display mode of is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 165 (C), the icon change animation is started in a state where no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and at least a part of the variable icon h0 is an effect image which is a red smoke image. Covered by Eh0, the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than it was before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 165 (D), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to a mode. In this example as well, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (E), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode has changed. The normal notice by the variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the second example from the left in FIG. 165 described above, the variation icon of the default display mode changes to the Bth color (red) with the Gth frequency (probability).

Next, an example shown below will be described. In FIG. 165 (B'), the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed, and in FIG. 165 (C'), the icon change animation is started, and at least a part of the variable icon h0 is red. It is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a smoke image of the above, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 165 (D'), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was displayed in blue before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to a red display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It's changing. In this example as well, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. In this example as well, after that, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice.

Subsequently, the third example from the left in FIG. 165 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 165, and overlapping description may be omitted. Even in the third example from the left in FIG. 165, FIGS. (A) to (B) are the same as those in FIGS. (a) to (b) described above, and the default (white). The variation icon h0 of the display mode of is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 165 (c), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 165 (d), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is displayed in gold, which is the same display mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to. In this example as well, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (e), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode has changed. The normal notice by the variable icon h0 is a false notice.

In the third example from the left in FIG. 165 described above, the variation icon of the default display mode changes to the third color (gold) with the H frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the frequency of the F in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 165, the frequency of the G in the example shown second from the left in FIG. 165, and the frequency of the H is the frequency of the F. There may be a relationship of> G-th frequency> H-th frequency.

Next, the example shown at the right end of FIG. 165 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown at the left end of FIG. 165, and overlapping description may be omitted. Even in the example shown at the right end of FIG. 165, FIGS. (A) to (I) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (c) described above, and the default (white) display mode is used. Fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 165 (c), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 165 (e), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (O), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the variable icon h0 has not been given, and when the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. Is low. However, even if the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 165 are examples in which the variable icon h0 is targeted, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is targeted. Further, as the embodiment, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, each mode of the variable icon and the effect image Eh0 is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. 165. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a blue display mode, may be a green display mode, a white display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a display mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the effect image Eh0 which was the display mode of gold may be the display mode of rainbow color, and in this case, the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change may be the display mode of gold. However, it may be displayed in rainbow colors. Further, the effect image Eh0, which has been displayed in gold, may have a red display mode, a white display mode, a blue display mode, or a green display mode. It may be.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 165, the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed was a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice.

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM takes an action a plurality of times with respect to the variation icon h0 in one variation display of the decorative symbol.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 166, first, in FIG. 6A, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. The number of hold icons of the special figure 1 is 4, and the four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 166 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 166 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In FIG. 166 (c), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces the variable icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 166 (d), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM of the lord, and in the following figure (e), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the red smoke image and fluctuates. The icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 166 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is red, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed. That is, the effect image Eh0 shown in FIG. 166 (e) has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the variable icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 166 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 166 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 166 (f). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 166 (c) and ended immediately before the figure (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating (the figure). It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (d) to the figure (e)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (h), the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is first stopped, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has begun to sway and fluctuate. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (i), the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is secondly stopped, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. , In the following figure (j), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is still displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 166 (k), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigator character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings his sword toward the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. , In the figure (l), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 166 (m), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 166 (n), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was displayed in red before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to a golden display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0 this time. doing. Even in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the variable icon h0 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 166 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

The second icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 166 (k) and ended immediately before FIG. 166 (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating. It may be regarded as an animation performed only (the figure (l) to the figure (m)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example described above, the first icon change animation is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the reach state is reached, or before the first stop is performed, and the second icon change animation is It is started after reaching the reach state, that is, during the reach state. The start timing of the icon change animation, that is, the start timing of the icon change effect is not limited to this example, and may be the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display indicating the pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous pattern) is displayed. It may be time, it may be when the timer of the timer notice becomes 0, it may be when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated, and the variation display of the decorative icon is finished. It may be the time (when the stop is displayed). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during fluctuations of the three decorative symbols, and the start of operation effects (button effects, etc.) using operation means such as the chance button 136. Later, during or after the operation of the effect movable means such as the family crest character 224E, the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, and the Senryobako character 224H. The start timing of the icon change effect described here is the same for the icon change effect described before, and the same applies to the icon change effect described later.

Further, in the example shown in the left half of FIG. 166, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the icon display mode changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the icon changed. That is, it was an example in which successful animations were continuous in one variable display of a decorative pattern.

Further, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation described here is not twice but once. That is, it can be considered that the start is started from FIG. 166 (c) and is finished immediately before the figure (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture). The navigation character YM may disappear once between FIGS. 166 (g) and FIG. 166 (j). For example, the navigation character YM disappears once in FIG. 166 (g), disappears immediately after the figure (g), is redisplayed immediately before the figure (k), or is redisplayed in the figure (k). In this case, the delimiter between the two icon change animations becomes clear.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 166 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of the same figure, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 166, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to the pose of pulling out the sword and swinging it toward the variable icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, and the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. .. Subsequently, in FIG. 166 (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 166 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 166 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

FIGS. 166 (H) to 166 (L) have been described above, except that the display mode of the variable icon h0 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. Same as in Fig. (L), after reaching the reach state, the navigator character YM of the display mode wearing a red kimono faces the variable icon h0 of the white display mode and pulls out the sword. The pose changes to a swinging pose, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 166 (M), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is again covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 166 (N), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but again, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 166 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, a normal notice using the display mode of the variable icon h0 has not been given. However, even if the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

Both of the two icon change animations described above were failed animations in which the icon display mode did not change. That is, it was an example in which failed animations continued in one variable display of a decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

FIG. 167 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 166, in which the navigation character YM takes an action a plurality of times with respect to the variation icon h0 in one variation display of the decorative symbol. ..

The example shown in the left half of FIG. 167 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 166, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 167, FIGS. 166 (a) to (d) are the same as those of FIGS. 166 (a) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to the pose of pulling out the sword and swinging it toward the variable icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, and the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. .. Subsequently, in FIG. 167 (e), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 167 (f), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and the variable icon h0 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

FIGS. 167 (h) to 167 (l) have been described above, except that the display mode of the variable icon h0 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. Same as in Fig. (L), after reaching the reach state, the navigator character YM of the display mode wearing a red kimono faces the variable icon h0 of the white display mode and pulls out the sword. The pose changes to a swinging pose, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 167 (m), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 167 (n), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to the golden display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It's changing. In this second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, blue or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a failed animation in which the icon display mode did not change, whereas the second icon change animation changed the icon display mode. It was a successful animation. That is, it was an example in which the failed animation was displayed first and then the successful animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 167 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of the same figure, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 167, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to the pose of pulling out the sword and swinging it toward the variable icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, and the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. .. Subsequently, in FIG. 167 (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a red smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 167 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to the red display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It's changing. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow color, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

FIGS. 167 (H) to 167 (L) are the same as those of FIGS. (H) to (l) described above, and the display mode in which the red kimono is worn after the reach state is reached. The navigator character YM of the lord of the palace turns to the variable icon h0 of the red display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 167 (M), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is again covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a white smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 167 (N), the effect image Eh0 disappears, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and the variable icon h0 remains in the red display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. The normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose mode has changed is a false notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a successful animation in which the icon display mode changed, whereas the second icon change animation changed the icon display mode. It was a failure animation that did not. That is, it was an example in which the successful animation was displayed first and then the failed animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, white, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the variable icon, the navigator character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a display mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167, the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed was a false notice, but even if it is a big hit and is a true notice. good. Here, to summarize the examples described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167, an example in which successful animations are continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. "Continuous success example"), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 166, an example in which failed animations are continuous (hereinafter referred to as "continuous failure example"), an example shown in the left half of FIG. An example in which a successful animation is displayed after a failed animation is displayed in (hereinafter referred to as a "failed successful example"), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 167, in which a successful animation is displayed first and then fails. There is an example in which an animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success / failure example"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, is highest when continuous success cases are performed. High, followed by successful and unsuccessful cases, then successful and unsuccessful cases, and lowest consecutive unsuccessful cases (successful and unsuccessful cases> successful and unsuccessful cases) Example> Continuous failure example). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may be lost (the jackpot probability is 0%), or it may be a jackpot (the jackpot probability is higher than 0%).

Further, in each of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167, the icon change animation is performed only twice in one variation display of the decorative symbol, but the one variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Inside, the icon change animation may be performed three or more times.

Further, if the change in the display mode fails, the effect image Eh0 of the white smoke image, which is the default color, may always be displayed, or conversely, the effect image Eh0 of the white smoke image may be displayed. It may be possible to succeed in changing the display mode.

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing two examples of the icon change effect.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 168, the icon change effect performed even when the navigation character YM is not displayed and the icon change effect using the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 165 are 1 of the decorative symbols. This is an example performed in the variable display of times.

First, in FIG. 168 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 2 in the state where the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. , The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 168 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to.

In FIG. 168 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, only the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon h1 and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. No icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 168 (c), the icon change animation is started, at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the red effect image Eh0, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0.

In FIG. 168 (d), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to a mode. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or gold). In this example, no icon is displayed and the navigation character YM is not displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, but even when the navigation character YM is displayed, the decorative pattern fluctuates. A certain period during display (for example, a period during super reach, a period during dark display when the display screen goes black, and a period during which the display of the navigation character YM overlaps with other displays (notice display or error display). ), The navigation character YM may be hidden or invisible, and even in such a case, the icon change animation as shown in FIG. 168 (c) may be executed.

In FIG. 168 (e), there is one ball entering the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (f), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the second hold icon h12 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0.

In FIG. 168 (g), there is one more ball entering the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (h), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, in this example, the navigation character YM appears or disappears depending on the number of reservations. That is, when the number of holds is N (here, N = 3), the navigator character YM appears (display starts), and when the number of holds is M (here, M = 2), the navigator character YM disappears (display ends). do). The relationship between N and M in this condition of the navigation character YM may be N> M, and may be N = 4, M = 1, and the like. It should be noted that this condition can be applied to the previous examples, and this condition can be applied to the subsequent examples, but it does not have to be applied. In FIG. 168 (h), the navigation character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono appears in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Then, the navigation character YM is provided with a balloon indication that "one more is on hold and the tank is full". Further, in FIG. 168 (h), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped. The navigator character YM may appear in response to the first stop of the decorative symbol, or may appear in response to the second stop. Furthermore, the navigation character YM appears after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the reach state is reached, or before the first stop is performed, or after the reach state is reached, that is, during the reach state. You may. Further, it may appear at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, it may appear when the display indicating the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed, or when the timer of the timer notice becomes 0. It may appear when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated, or it may appear when the variable display of the decorative symbol ends (when the stop display is displayed). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during fluctuations of the three decorative symbols, and the start of operation effects (button effects, etc.) using operation means such as the chance button 136. It may appear later, during or after the operation of the effect movable means such as the family crest character 224E, the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, and the Senryobako character 224H. The appearance timing of the navigation character YM described here can be applied to the examples described before, and can also be applied to the examples described thereafter.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (i), the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is secondly stopped, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. , In the following figure (j), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 168 (k), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigator character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings his sword toward the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. , In the figure (l), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 168 (m), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 168 (n), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was displayed in red before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to a golden display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0 this time. doing. Even in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the variable icon h0 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 168 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 168, the icon change effect performed even when the navigation character YM is not displayed is changed only once, but even if the change is performed a plurality of times. Often, even in the icon change effect using the navigation character YM, only one change is made, but a plurality of changes may be made.

In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 168, the icon change animation using the navigation character YM is performed twice in one variable display of the decorative symbol, but in the first and second times, the navigation character YM is used. This is an example in which the display mode is different.

First, in FIG. 168 (A), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 4 in the state where the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. Four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (A), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 168 (A) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 168 (B), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (B), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In FIG. 168 (C), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces the variable icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 168 (D), waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM, and in the following figure (E), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is a blue smoke image similar to the kimono of the navigator character YM. The effect image Eh0 is covered, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 168 (F), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed. The variable icon h0 also changes in the same manner as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 168 (G) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 168 (F), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 168 (F). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 168 (C) and ended immediately before FIG. 168 (G) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating (FIG. FIG. It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (D) to the figure (E)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (H), the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is first stopped, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has begun to sway and fluctuate. In FIG. 168 (H), the navigation character YM is covered with the effect image EYM, which is a red smoke image, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The navigation character YM0 may be partially covered by the effect image EYM, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EYM. In FIG. 168 (I), the effect image EYM disappears, and the navigation character YM, which was a display mode wearing a blue kimono before being covered with the effect image EYM, has a red display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. It has changed to. The change effect of the navigation character YM, which is an effect icon, may be started in response to the first stop of the decorative symbol, or may be started in response to the second stop. Further, the change effect is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the reach state, or before the first stop is performed, or after the reach state is reached, that is, during the reach state. May be done. Further, it may be started at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, it may be started when the display indicating the pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous symbol) is displayed, or the timer of the timer notice becomes 0. It may be started at times, it may be started when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated, or it may be started when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished (at the time of stop display). In addition, during the period when the character display of "reach" is displayed, during super reach, during fluctuations of the three decorative symbols, and the start of operation effects (button effects, etc.) using operation means such as the chance button 136. It may be started later, during or after the operation of the effect movable means such as the family crest character 224E, the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, and the Senryobako character 224H. The start timing of the change effect of the effect icon (navigation character YM in this case) described here can be applied to the examples described before, and can also be applied to the examples described thereafter.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (I), the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is secondly stopped, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. In the following figure (J), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM that has changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 168 (K), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigator character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings his sword toward the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode. , In the figure (L), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 168 (M), at least a part of the fluctuating icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is the same red smoke image as the changed mode of the kimono of the navigator character YM, and the fluctuating icon h0 is before being covered. It is more difficult to see. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 168 (N), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was displayed in blue before being covered by the effect image Eh0, is changed to a red display mode, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. It's changing. The variable icon h0 also changes in the same manner as the effect image Eh0. Even in this second time, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the variable icon h0 before the change (blue in this case)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 168 (O) has returned to the initial posture.

The second icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 168 (K) and ended immediately before FIG. 168 (O) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating. It may be regarded as an animation performed only (the figure (L) to the figure (M)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

It should be noted that the effect icon (here, the navigation character YM) is changed, and when the display mode of the effect icon is changed, the change effect of the display mode of the variable icon h0 (or the hold icon) is always performed. You may. Further, the display mode of the variable icon h0 (or the hold icon) may be changed to the same display mode as the display mode of the changed effect icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (P), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example described above, the icon change effect by the effect icon of the first display mode and the icon change effect by the effect icon of the B display mode are performed in one variable display of the decorative symbol. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 168, the icon change effect by the effect icon of the first display mode is changed only once, but may be changed a plurality of times. In the icon change effect by the effect icon of the second display mode, only one change is performed, but a plurality of changes may be performed.

The example described with reference to FIG. 168 was an example targeting the variable icon h0, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon is targeted. Further, as the embodiment, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the variable icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIG. 168. For example, the variable icon h0, which was a white display mode, may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a display mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a blue kimono may be a display mode wearing a white kimono, or may be a display mode wearing a green kimono. Alternatively, it may be a display mode wearing a red kimono, a display mode wearing a golden kimono, or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM takes actions on the hold icon a plurality of times in one variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 169, first, in the same figure (a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 4, and the four holding icons h11 to h14 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 169 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 169 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In FIG. 169 (c), the navigator character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, turns to the left side, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 169 (d), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM of the lord. This wave passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 169 (e), at least a part of the first variable icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 of the red smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 169 (f), the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed to red. It should be noted that the first hold icon h11 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh1. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 169 (f). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh1 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 169 (c) and ended immediately before the figure (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating (the figure). It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (d) to the figure (e)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh1 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (h), the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is first stopped, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped. That is, "decoration 4" has begun to sway and fluctuate. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (i), the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is secondly stopped, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. , In the following figure (j), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is still displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 169 (k), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings the sword toward the left side, and in FIG. , Waves are oscillating from the sword. The wave motion here also passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 169 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 169 (n), the effect image Eh1 disappears, and the first hold icon h11, which was displayed in red before being covered by the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1 this time. It has changed to. Even in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the first reserved icon h11 before the change (here, red)). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

The second icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 169 (k) and ended immediately before FIG. 169 (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating. It may be regarded as an animation performed only (the figure (l) to the figure (m)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh1 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 169, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changed. That is, it was an example in which successful animations were continuous in one variable display of a decorative pattern.

Further, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation described here is not twice but once. That is, it can be considered that the start is started from FIG. 169 (c) and is finished immediately before the figure (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture). The navigation character YM may disappear once between FIGS. 169 (g) and FIG. 169 (j). For example, the navigation character YM disappears once in FIG. 169 (g), disappears immediately after the figure (g), is redisplayed immediately before the figure (k), or is redisplayed in the figure (k). In this case, the delimiter between the two icon change animations becomes clear.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 169 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of the same figure, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 169, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and they wore a red kimono. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left and swings with the sword pulled out, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. This wave passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 169 (E), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 169 (F), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

FIGS. 169 (H) to 169 (L) have been described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. -Same as in the figure (l), after reaching the reach state, the navigator character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono changes to a pose that turns to the left, pulls out the sword and swings. , Waves are oscillating from the sword of the navigation character YM. The wave motion here also passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 169 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is again covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 becomes more difficult to see than before being covered. ing. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 169 (N), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but again, there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. 1 The variable display of the decorative symbol performed after the hold is exhausted (the variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next) may be lost or may be a big hit. However, since the display mode has not changed from the default display mode, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 has not been performed, and in the next variable display of the decorative symbol, it is possible to lose more than a big hit. Highly sexual.

Both of the two icon change animations described above were failed animations in which the display mode of the hold icon did not change. That is, it was an example in which failed animations continued in one variable display of a decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 169, in which the navigator character YM takes a plurality of actions on the hold icon in one variable display of the decorative symbol.

The example shown in the left half of FIG. 170 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 169, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 170, FIGS. 169 (a) to 169 (d) are the same as those of FIGS. 169 (a) to 169 (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left, pulls out the sword and swings, and extends from the sword of the navigator character YM to the front of the first hold icon h11 through the variable icon h0. Waves are oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (e), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 170 (f), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 170 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

From FIG. 170 (h) to FIG. 170 (l), FIG. 169 (h) described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. -Same as in the figure (l), after reaching the reach state, the navigator character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono changes to a pose that turns to the left, pulls out the sword and swings. , The wave motion that passes from the sword of the navigation character YM, passes through the variable icon h0, and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 170 (n), the effect image Eh1 disappears, and the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1. It has changed to a mode. In this second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, blue or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 170 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a failure animation in which the display mode of the hold icon did not change, whereas the second icon change animation was the display mode of the hold icon. Was a successful animation that changed. That is, it was an example in which the failed animation was displayed first and then the successful animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 170 will be mainly described with differences from the example shown in the left half of the figure, and duplicated description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 170, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left, pulls out the sword and swings, and extends from the sword of the navigator character YM to the front of the first hold icon h11 through the variable icon h0. Waves are oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (E), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a red smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 170 (F), the effect image Eh1 disappears, and the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh1, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1. It has changed to a mode. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow color, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 170 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

FIGS. 170 (H) to 170 (L) are the same as those of FIGS. 170 (h) to (l) described above, and the display mode in which the red kimono is worn after the reach state is reached. The navigator character YM of Noden-sama turns to the left and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung, and the wave motion that extends from the sword of the navigator character YM to the front of the first hold icon h11 through the variable icon h0. It is oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is again covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 becomes more difficult to see than before being covered. ing. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 170 (N), although the effect image Eh1 disappears, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the red display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 170 (O) has returned to the initial posture. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (P), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next) performed after the first hold is digested. That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changed, whereas the second icon change animation was the display mode of the hold icon. Was a failed animation that did not change. That is, it was an example in which the successful animation was displayed first and then the failed animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern. Also here, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, it can be considered that the icon change animation is performed once instead of twice.

As described above, in FIGS. 169 and 170, as the embodiment, white, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh1 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170. For example, the hold icon that was in the white display mode may be in the blue display mode, the green display mode, the red display mode, or the gold display mode. It may be a mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono. Further, the hold icon is not limited to the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12, the third hold icon h13, and the fourth hold icon h14 may change. Furthermore, the display mode of the plurality of hold icons, the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the display mode of one or more hold icons may change.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170, the look-ahead notice by the hold icon whose display mode has changed may be a false notice or a true notice. Here, to summarize the examples described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170, an example in which successful animations are continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. 169, in one variable display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter, "Continuous success example"), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 169, an example in which failed animations are continuous (hereinafter referred to as "continuous failure example"), an example shown in the left half of FIG. 170, the above. An example in which a successful animation is displayed after the failed animation is displayed in (hereinafter referred to as "failed successful example"), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 171. There is an example in which an animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success / failure example"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, is highest when continuous success cases are performed. High, then failure success cases are high, then success failure cases are high, and consecutive failure cases are the lowest (successful success cases> failure success cases> success failure cases) Example> Continuous failure example). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may be lost (the jackpot probability is 0%), or it may be a jackpot (the jackpot probability is higher than 0%).

Further, in each of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170, the icon change animation is performed only twice in one variation display of the decorative symbol, but the one variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Inside, the icon change animation may be performed three times or more.

FIG. 171 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM takes an action on the hold icon a plurality of times in a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 171, first, in FIG. 171 (a), the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. The number of hold icons of the special figure 1 is 4, and the four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 171 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 171 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In FIG. 171 (c), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, turns to the left side, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 171 (d), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM of the lord. This wave passes through the variable icon h0, further passes through the first hold icon h11, and extends to the front of the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 171 (e), at least a part of the second variable icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 of the red smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. Further, the effect image Eh2 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon). In FIG. 171 (f), the effect image Eh2 disappears, and the second hold icon h12, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh2, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed to red. The second hold icon h12 also changes to the same mode as the effect image Eh2. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh2 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh2 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 171 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 171 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 171 (f). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh2 disappears).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 171 (c) and ended immediately before FIG. 171 (g) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave motion is oscillating (the figure). It may be regarded as an animation performed only while (d) to the figure (e)), or it may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (h), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 171 (i), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two hold icons such as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (i), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. When the number of holds becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears. No icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 171 (i).

From FIG. 171 (j) to FIG. 171 (l), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues, and in FIG. 171 (m), the second icon change animation is performed with the display of the navigation character YM disappearing. It has been started. In FIG. 171 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the red display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 171 (n), the first hold icon h11, which was displayed in red before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered by the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1 this time. It has changed to. Even in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode as the display mode of the first reserved icon h11 before the change (here, red)). As shown in FIG. 171 (o), the variable display of the decorative design continues for a while.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 171, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changed. That is, it was an example in which successful animations were continuous in a plurality of variable displays of decorative patterns. Further, the hold icon whose display mode is changed by the icon change animation is a hold icon representing the same hold, but may be a hold icon representing a different hold (the same applies to the following examples). For example, in the second icon change animation, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 171 (f), which was the third hold icon h12 in FIG. 171 (f), may be changed.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 171 will be described mainly on the differences from the example shown in the left half of the same figure, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 171, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left and swings with the sword pulled out, and waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. The wave motion here also passes through the variable icon h0, further passes through the first hold icon h11, and extends to the front of the second hold icon h12. Subsequently, in FIG. 171 (E), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a white smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 171 (F), the effect image Eh2 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the second hold icon h12 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 171 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (H), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 171 (I), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two hold icons, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the two hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 171 (I).

FIGS. 171 (J) to 171 (L) have been described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. ~ Same as in the figure (l), the variation display of the decorative symbol continues in the state where the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and in FIG. 171 (M), the icon changes for the second time in that state. The animation has started. In FIG. 171 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the white display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 171 (N), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but again, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. As shown in FIG. 171 (O), the variable display of the decorative design continues for a while.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (P), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the first hold is exhausted. The variable display of the decorative pattern to be performed (the variable display of the decorative pattern to be started next) may be a loss or a big hit. However, since the display mode has not changed from the default display mode, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 has not been performed, and in the next variable display of the decorative symbol, it is possible to lose more than a big hit. Highly sexual.

Both of the two icon change animations described above were failed animations in which the display mode of the hold icon did not change. That is, it was an example in which failed animations continued in one variable display of a decorative pattern.

FIG. 172 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 171 in which the navigator character YM takes an action on the hold icon a plurality of times in a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.

The example shown in the left half of FIG. 172 will be described mainly on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 171, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 172, FIGS. 171 (a) to (d) are the same as those of FIGS. 171 (a) to 171 (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left, pulls out the sword and swings, and from the sword of the navigator character YM, passes through the variable icon h0 and also passes through the first hold icon h11. 2 A wave motion extending to the front of the hold icon h12 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 172 (e), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a white smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 172 (f), the effect image Eh2 disappears, but in this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the second hold icon h12 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 172 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (h), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 172 (i), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two hold icons, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the two hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 171 (I).

From FIGS. 172 (j) to 172 (l), FIG. 171 (i) described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. )-Same as the figure (l), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues with the display of the navigation character YM disappeared, and in FIG. 172 (m), the second icon remains in that state. The change animation has started. In FIG. 172 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the white display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 172 (n), the effect image Eh1 disappears, and the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1. It has changed to a mode. In this second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, blue or red). As shown in FIG. 172 (o), the variable display of the decorative design continues for a while.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a failure animation in which the display mode of the hold icon did not change, whereas the second icon change animation was the display mode of the hold icon. Was a successful animation that changed. That is, it was an example in which the failed animation was displayed first and then the successful animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern.

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 172 will be described mainly on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 171, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 172, FIGS. 171 (A) to (D) are the same as those of FIGS. 171 (a) to 171 (d) described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigator character YM of the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigator character YM faces to the left, pulls out the sword and swings, and from the sword of the navigator character YM, passes through the variable icon h0 and also passes through the first hold icon h11. 2 A wave motion extending to the front of the hold icon h12 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 172 (E), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a red smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 172 (F), the effect image Eh2 disappears, and the second hold icon h12, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh2, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh2. It has changed to a mode. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh2 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh2 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow color, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 172 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (H), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 172 (I), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, two hold icons, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 172 (I).

The following FIGS. 172 (J) to 172 (L) are the same as those of FIGS. 171 (i) to 171 (l) described above, and the decorative symbol fluctuates with the display of the navigation character YM disappeared. The display continues, and in FIG. 172 (M), the second icon change animation is started in that state. In FIG. 172 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the red display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered. It has become. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 172 (N), the effect image Eh1 disappears, but here, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. As shown in FIG. 172 (O), the variable display of the decorative design continues for a while.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changed, whereas the second icon change animation was the display mode of the hold icon. Was a failed animation that did not change. That is, it was an example in which the successful animation was displayed first and then the failed animation was displayed in one variable display of the decorative pattern.

As described above, in FIGS. 171 and 172, white, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh1 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172. For example, the hold icon that was in the white display mode may be in the blue display mode, the green display mode, the red display mode, or the gold display mode. It may be a mode or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the display mode of the lord who was wearing a red kimono may be a display mode wearing a golden kimono or a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. , Or a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono. Further, the hold icon is not limited to the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12, the third hold icon h13, and the fourth hold icon h14 may change. Furthermore, the display mode of the plurality of hold icons, the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the display mode of one or more hold icons may change.

Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172, the look-ahead notice by the hold icon whose display mode has changed may be a false notice or a true notice. Here, to summarize the examples described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172, an example in which successful animations are continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. 171 in a plurality of variable displays of a decorative symbol (hereinafter, "Continuous success example"), an example shown in the right half of FIG. 171, an example in which failed animations are continuous (hereinafter referred to as "continuous failure example"), an example shown in the left half of FIG. 172, the above. An example in which a successful animation is displayed after a failed animation is displayed in (hereinafter referred to as a "failed successful example"), and an example shown in the right half of FIG. 172, in which a successful animation is displayed first and then fails. There is an example in which an animation is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success / failure example"), and the ease of jackpot, that is, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, is highest when continuous success cases are performed. High, followed by successful and unsuccessful cases, then successful and unsuccessful cases, and lowest consecutive unsuccessful cases (successful and unsuccessful cases> successful and unsuccessful cases) Example> Continuous failure example). In addition, when a continuous failure example is performed, it may be lost (the jackpot probability is 0%), or it may be a jackpot (the jackpot probability is higher than 0%).

Further, in each of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172, the icon change animation is performed only once in the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, but the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Inside, the icon change animation may be performed multiple times. That is, even if the icon change animation is performed a plurality of times in one variable display of the decorative symbol, and further, the icon change animation may be performed a plurality of times in the multiple variable display of the decorative symbol. good.

FIG. 173 is a diagram showing two examples of icon change animation.

The example shown in the left half of FIG. 173 is an example in which the icon to be changed in the icon change animation is easily recognized.

First, in FIG. 173 (a), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 4 in the state where the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. , The four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 173 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 173 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (b), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation). In FIG. 173 (c), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, turns to the left side, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 173 (d), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono. The wave motion here extends to the front of the second hold icon h12 so as to avoid the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11. Further, an arrow extends from the tip of the sword toward the second hold icon h12. Since the wave motion shown in FIG. 171 (d) passes through the variable icon h0 and also passes through the first hold icon h11, the variable icon h0 can be seen as a change target, and the first hold icon h11 can also be seen as a change target. .. On the other hand, the wave motion shown in FIG. 173 (d) does not occur because the fluctuation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are avoided, and the second hold icon h12 is the change target by the display of the arrow. It is clearer that there is.

In FIG. 173 (e), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 of the red smoke image, and the second variable icon h12 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The second hold icon h12 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh2. Further, the effect image Eh2 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon).

In FIG. 173 (f), the effect image Eh2 disappears, and the second hold icon h12, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh2, is red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh2. The display mode has changed. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh2 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh2 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or gold). After that, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 173 (f), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 173 (f). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh2 disappears).

In FIG. 173 (g), there is one ball entering the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (h), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the fourth hold icon h14 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (h), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 173 (i), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Has been done. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done.

In FIG. 173 (j), the variable display of the decorative pattern continues, and in FIG. 173 (k), the second icon change animation is started, and the navigator character YM, which was in the initial posture, turns to the left and pulls out the sword. It changes to a swinging pose. In the following FIG. 173 (l), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono. The wave motion here extends to the front of the first hold icon h11 so as to avoid the variable icon h0. Further, an arrow extends from the tip of the sword toward the first hold icon h11. Since the wave motion shown in FIG. 173 (l) also avoids the variable icon h0, the variable icon h0 is not considered to be the change target, and the first hold icon h11 is the change target by the display of the arrow. Has become clearer.

In FIG. 173 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 of the golden smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1 or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon).

In FIG. 173 (n), the first hold icon h11, which was displayed in red before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in gold, which is the same mode as that of the effect image Eh1. It has changed to. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 173 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (p), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. There is a case where a big hit is made in the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next). That is, the look-ahead notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 173, the effect icon (navigation character YM) of the first display mode (display mode wearing a blue kimono) is the display mode B (red kimono) shown in FIG. 171 and the like. This is an example in which it is easier to recognize the icon to be changed than the effect icon (navigation character YM) of the display mode (display mode wearing).

The example shown in the right half of FIG. 173 is an example in which the hold icon whose display mode has changed becomes a variable icon and the display mode changes again.

First, in FIG. 173 (A), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 4 in the state where the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed. , The four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that. Further, FIG. 173 (A) shows a state immediately after the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

In FIG. 173 (B), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. It is displayed. Both the three hold icons and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (B), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In FIG. 173 (C), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, turns to the left side, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. In the following FIG. 173 (D), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono. The wave motion here passes through the variable icon h0 and extends to the front of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 173 (E), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 of the red smoke image, and the first variable icon h11 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of other icons (variable icon and other hold icon).

In FIG. 173 (F), the first hold icon h11, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. The display mode has changed to red. It should be noted that the first hold icon h11 is also changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh1. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white, blue, gold, etc.). After that, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 173 (F), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM has the timing (effect image) of FIG. 173 (F). It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh1 disappears).

In FIG. 173 (G), there is one ball entering the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (H), the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the fourth hold icon h14 is additionally displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (H), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

In the following FIG. 173 (I), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons such as the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Has been done. The variable icon h0 is an icon in which the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed due to the previous fluctuation has changed, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and this navigation character YM is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. It will be done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (J), a reach state is formed, and the character display of “reach” is displayed. That is, the front side (player) is in the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the "decoration 4" that is shaking and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each symbol display area 208a to c is more difficult to see than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. .. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM that has changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 173 (K), the second icon change animation is started in the reach state, and the navigator character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono swings his sword toward the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. , In the figure (L), the wave motion is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 173 (M), at least a part of the variable icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0, which is a golden smoke image, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The variable icon h0 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 173 (N), the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the variable icon h0, which was displayed in red before being covered by the effect image Eh0, changes to a golden display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. doing. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 173 (O) has returned to the initial posture.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (P), the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 173, the icon change effect is performed only once for the hold icon, but may be performed a plurality of times. Further, the icon change effect is performed only once for the variable icon, but may be performed a plurality of times. That is, after the icon change effect is performed once or a plurality of times for a certain hold icon, the hold icon becomes a variable icon, and the icon change effect may be performed once or a plurality of times for the variable icon as well. You may.

In the above explanation, the navigator character YM appears when the number of holds is N (here, N = 3) and disappears when the number of holds is M (here, M = 2). , It may be always displayed. However, although it is always displayed, the navigation character YM may disappear or disappear for a certain period during the variable display of the decorative pattern. For example, during the period during super reach, during the period when the display screen is blackened, and during the period when the display of the navigation character YM overlaps with other displays (notice display and error display), the navigation character YM is used. It may disappear or disappear. Further, it may be displayed during the big hit game, or may not be displayed during the big hit game. Further, when the number of reserved special symbols is 0 and the symbol variation display (variation display of decorative symbols) is completed, a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as “demo display”) is displayed. That is, the demo display is a display in which the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display may be displayed in a stopped display state. Examples of the demo display include a symbol demo display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a video demo display in which an animation including the title of the game console is displayed. The still image demo display may be displayed instead of the moving image demo display. The navigation character YM may also be displayed in these demo displays. Further, during the display period of the demo display, the navigation character YM in all display modes may be displayed, or only the navigation character YM in the display mode belonging to the first group may be displayed. That is, only the white, blue, and green display modes of the navigation character YM may be displayed. Alternatively, during the display period of the demo display, only the navigation character YM in the white display mode may be displayed, only the navigation character YM in the blue display mode may be displayed, or the navigation in the green display mode may be displayed. Only the character YM may be displayed. Furthermore, only the navigation character YM in the red display mode may be displayed.

Further, although the description is limited to the production example using the navigation character YM of the character of the lord as the production icon, the production icon is not limited to the navigation character YM of the character of the lord, and the bomber icon I3 shown in FIG. 106 and the like. Further, it may be an icon of various icon change notices shown in FIG. 119 (b).

Further, the icon to be changed may be a variable icon or a hold icon. When it is a hold icon, it may be a first hold icon, a second hold icon, a third hold icon, or a fourth hold icon. .. Further, the type of the mode of the icon to be changed may be the type of the hold icon or the variable icon shown in FIG. 119 (a).

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, second display device. 208S, etc.], the display means is a means in which a certain icon [for example, variable icon h0 or hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed, and the certain icon is , An icon relating to a symbol variation display, the certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode], and the certain icon is a second display mode. It is an icon that may be displayed in the display mode [for example, a red display mode], and the case where a certain icon in the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed is the first. The jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed [for example, the expectation of the jackpot is higher] than when a certain icon of one display mode [for example, a blue display mode] is displayed. , The effect icon may be displayed, the effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM, etc.], and the effect icon is a fourth display. It is an icon that may be displayed in a mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a red kimono], and an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode by the effect icon of the fourth display mode. When the above is performed, there is a case where the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 168 (N)], and the effect icon of the fourth display mode is a certain mode [ For example, an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in [red], and a certain icon in the second display mode is an area [for example, red] displayed in the certain aspect [for example, red]. , Area inside the edge line], and even if an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the effect of the certain icon is performed. A game table characterized in that there is also a case where the display mode does not change to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 163 (f2)]. ] Was explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player by displaying a result different from the prediction of the player who predicts that the display mode will change to the second display mode.

Here, one embodiment may be only one of a color, a pattern, a size, a shape, a type of character, all or a part of a character, or a combination of all of them. , It may be a partial combination.

Further, the effect icon of the fourth display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain aspect, or the whole area may be displayed in the certain aspect.

In addition, the icon in the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or the entire area may be displayed in the certain mode.

The display means may be a means on which a certain icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means on which the effect icon is always displayed. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good.

In the above description, the display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). A game console provided with a second display device 208S, etc.], the display means is a means on which a certain icon [for example, variable icon h0 or hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed. The icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display, the certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode], and the certain icon is , An icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode], and a case where a certain icon in the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed. However, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, the blue display mode] is displayed [for example, the expectation of the jackpot is high]. The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed, the effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.], and the effect icon is An icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a red kimono], and an icon having the first display mode by the effect icon of the fourth display mode. When the effect of changing the above is performed, there is a case where the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 168 (N)], and the effect icon of the fourth display mode is An icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red], and an icon in the second display aspect is displayed in the certain aspect [for example, red]. It is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line], and when an effect in which a certain icon of the first display mode is changed is performed during a period in which the effect icon is not displayed, the effect is performed. A game table characterized in that there is a case where the display mode of the icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 165 (D')]. ] Was explained.

According to this game table, a certain icon of the second display mode may be displayed even if the change effect by the effect icon is not performed, and the player's interest may be improved.

Here, one embodiment may be only one of a color, a pattern, a size, a shape, a type of character, all or a part of a character, or a combination of all of them. , It may be a partial combination.

The display means may be a means on which a certain icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means on which the effect icon is always displayed. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good. Further, if an effect of changing a certain icon in the first display mode is performed during a period in which the effect icon is not displayed, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good.

In addition, "the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a blue kimono], and the certain icon is a default display mode [for example. , White display mode], the default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode, and the default display mode is the second display mode. The display mode is different from the mode, and the default display mode is the display mode most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the certain icon, and the effect of the third display mode. When an effect of changing an icon of the default display mode is performed by the icon, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the first display mode with a first frequency [for example, a first frequency (for example, a first frequency (A)). [For example, FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (h)], the effect icon of the third display mode changes an icon of the default display mode. Then, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode with a second frequency [for example, a second frequency (a third probability)] [for example, FIGS. 163 (A) to FIG. H)], a game table characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the second frequency. ] Was also explained.

The frequency referred to here may be a probability (hereinafter, the same applies).

In the above description, the display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). A game console provided with a second display device 208S, etc.], the display means is a means on which a certain icon [for example, variable icon h0 or hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed. The icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display, the certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode], and the certain icon is , An icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode], and a case where a certain icon in the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed. However, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, the blue display mode] is displayed [for example, the expectation of the jackpot is high]. The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed, the effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.], and the effect icon is It is an icon that may be displayed in the third display mode [for example, the display mode of the lord wearing a blue kimono], and the effect icon is the fourth display mode [for example, the lord wearing a red kimono]. Is an icon that may be displayed in [Display mode], the third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes, and the first display is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode. There is a case [for example, FIG. 168 (N)] in which the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode when an effect of changing a certain icon of the mode is performed, and the fourth display mode is described. The effect icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red], and a certain icon of the second display mode is the above-mentioned certain aspect [for example, a kimono area]. It is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside the edge line] displayed in [red], and an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode by the effect icon of the third display mode is performed. Then, there is a case where the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 163 (f1)]. ] Was explained.

According to this game table, a certain icon of the second display mode may be displayed even from the change effect by the effect icon of the third display mode, so that the player's interest can be improved. There is.

Further, in some embodiments, only one of the color, pattern, size, shape, character type, and all or part of the character may be used, or a combination of all of these may be used. It may be a combination of some.

The display means may be a means on which a certain icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means on which the effect icon is always displayed. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. May be good.

Further, the certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, a white display mode], and the default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode. Yes, the default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode, and the default display mode is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the certain icon. It is a high display mode, and when an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the first display mode. It changes with the first frequency [for example, the frequency of the first (probability of the A)] [for example, FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (h)], and the default by the effect icon of the third display mode. When an effect of changing a certain icon of the display mode is performed, the display mode of the certain icon is changed to the second display mode at a second frequency [for example, a second frequency (bth probability)]. A game table that changes [for example, FIGS. 163 (A) to (H)], wherein the first frequency is higher than the second frequency. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "the icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and is a case where a certain icon in the fifth display mode [for example, a golden display mode] is displayed. However, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, the red display mode] is displayed [for example, the expectation of the jackpot is high]. When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the first display mode with a third frequency [for example, , Cth frequency (third probability)] [for example, FIGS. 164 (a) to 164 (h)], and the effect icon of the fourth display mode provides the default display mode. When the effect of changing the icon is performed, the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode with a fourth frequency [for example, a first frequency (d. D probability)] [for example, FIG. 164 (A) to FIG. (H)], when an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is described. To the fifth display mode, the fifth frequency [for example, the fifth frequency (third probability)] changes [for example, FIGS. 164 (a) to (c)], and the frequency is higher than the third frequency. A game table characterized in that the fifth frequency is higher and the fourth frequency is higher than the fifth frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "A game table characterized in that the third frequency is 0. ] Was also explained.

Further, "a game table characterized in that the fourth frequency is higher than the second frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "a game table characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the third frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "For the certain icon, even if the effect icon is not displayed, the sixth frequency from the default display mode to the first display mode [for example, the fifth frequency (the third probability). [For example, FIGS. 165 (a) to 165 (e)], the certain icon changes from the default display mode to the second display mode even if the effect icon is not displayed. The seventh frequency [for example, the frequency of the G (probability of the G)] changes [for example, FIGS. 165 (A) to 165 (E)], and the effect icon is displayed on the certain icon. Even if it is not present, the display mode changes from the default display mode to the fifth display mode with an eighth frequency [for example, a fifth frequency (probability of H)] [for example, FIGS. 165 (a) to 165 (a) to FIG. E)], the seventh frequency is higher than the eighth frequency, and the sixth frequency is higher than the seventh frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in plurality [for example, hold icons h11 to h14], and in the effect of changing the certain icon by the effect icon, the plurality of the certain icons are displayed. When this is done, the effect icon of the third display mode is changed rather than the effect of changing the display mode of a certain icon to be changed and changing the certain icon by the effect icon of the fourth display mode. It is easier to recognize which of the plurality of displayed icons the certain icon to be changed is a certain icon in the effect of changing the certain icon. A game table characterized by α11 (d) and the wave motion and icon shown in the figure (l)]. ] Was also explained.

Here, the certain icon to be changed may be one or a plurality.

Further, "The display means is a means in which a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as" demo display ") may be displayed, and the demo display is a special symbol display in which the number of holds is 0 [. For example, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214] may be displayed in a stopped display state, and the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed. A game table characterized in that it may be displayed during the display period of the demo display. ] Was also explained.

Here, examples of the demo display include a symbol demo display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a video demo display in which an animation including the title of the game console is displayed. The still image demo display may be displayed instead of the moving image demo display.

Further, the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is not due to the difference in the displayed dialogue, but the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is the difference in the dialogue. It does not have to be the difference with or without.

Well, the display means may be a means for always displaying a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as "demo display"). Further, the demo display may be a display in which the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display is always displayed in a stopped display state. Further, the effect icon of the third display mode may be always displayed during the display period of the demo display.

In addition, "The display means is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda," navigation character changes "by the old man's character. It is a means that may be displayed, and the change effect display may be displayed after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, and during the display of the effect icon of the third display mode. When the first change animation using the change effect display is performed, the effect icon changes to the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 75 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6-1). ), FIG. 76 (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 83 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure (K 1-3-4), and FIG. 91. Meter effect, FIG. 89 (2-2-1) to FIG. (2-2-3)], the second display using the change effect display while displaying the effect icon of the third display mode. When the change animation is performed, the display mode of the effect icon does not change [for example, FIG. 75 (A 3-2-1) to FIG. (A 3-2-2), FIG. 83 (K 1-3-1). ) ~ The same figure (ku 1-3-3b2)]. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the change effect display. Further, the change effect display may be always displayed after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed.

In addition, "During the display of the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon is changed one or more times by the effect of the effect icon of the third display mode, and the variable display is being displayed. In addition, the display mode of the certain icon may be changed one or more times depending on the effect of the effect icon of the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 168 (A) to (P)]. A featured game console. ] Was also explained.

Further, "During the display of the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon may be changed a plurality of times by the effect of the effect icon [for example, FIGS. 166 (a) to 166 (a) to FIG. p)], a game console characterized by this. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "While displaying the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, while the effect icon is displayed, the change in the display mode of the certain icon succeeds both the first time and the second time, and the variation display is displayed. There is a case where it ends (hereinafter, referred to as "first case") [for example, FIG. 166 (a) to FIG. 166 (p)], and the effect icon is displayed while the decorative symbol is displayed once in a variable manner. In the displayed state, there is a case where the change of the display mode of the certain icon fails the first time and succeeds the second time, and the variation display ends (hereinafter, referred to as "second case"). [For example, FIGS. 167 (a) to 167 (p)], while the effect icon is being displayed while the decorative symbol is being displayed once, the display mode of the icon is changed. In some cases, the first success is successful and the second failure, and the variation display ends (hereinafter, referred to as "third case") [for example, FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (P)], decoration. When the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the symbol, the change of the display mode of the certain icon fails both the first time and the second time, and the variation display ends ( Hereinafter, there is also a "fourth case") [for example, FIGS. 166 (A) to (P)], and the third case is finally a big hit than the fourth case. The symbol aspect is easily fixedly displayed [for example, it is easy to make a big hit in the variable display or the subsequent variable display], and in the second case, the big hit symbol form is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the third case. It is easy to be easily [for example, it is easy to make a big hit in the fluctuation display or the subsequent fluctuation display], and in the first case, the big hit symbol mode is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than in the second case [for example. It is easy to make a big hit with the fluctuation display or the subsequent fluctuation display]. ] Was also explained.

The description of the game table here is when the display mode of a certain icon is changed only twice while the effect icon is displayed while the decorative symbol is displayed once. It will be a limitation on the ease of jackpot.

In addition, "While displaying the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the certain icon changes one or more times while the effect icon is displayed, and the variable display is displayed. A game table characterized in that the display mode of a certain icon may be changed once or a plurality of times in a state where the effect icon is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (p)]. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The certain aspect means a certain color [for example, red], and the effect icon of the fourth display aspect is an area displayed in the certain color [for example, a kimono area]. An icon including, and a certain icon in the second display mode is an icon including an area displayed in the certain color [for example, an area inside the edge line]. The stand. ] Was also explained.

Here, the effect icon of the fourth display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or the entire area may be displayed in the certain color. Further, the certain icon of the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or may be the whole area displayed in the certain color.

In addition, "the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed over a continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 77 (I1) to FIG. (I12), an example shown in FIG. 173, etc.]. A featured game console. ] Was also explained. The effect icon may be an icon that is always displayed over a continuous symbol variation display.

Further, "The display means is a means in which a third change animation may be displayed, and the third change animation is a treasure box icon shown in another icon [for example, FIG. 78 (U17)). It is an animation that changes the display mode of the effect icon without being accompanied by the effect by [I1], and the third change animation is an effect image [for example, smoke image] of the certain aspect [for example, red]. ] Is at least an animation [for example, FIG. 79 (E2) to FIG. 79 (E3-2)]. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the third change animation is always displayed. Further, the third change animation may be an animation in which only the effect image of the certain aspect is displayed, or an animation in which an image or the like is displayed in addition to the effect image of the certain aspect. You may.

Further, "The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the sixth display mode [for example, the green display mode], and the fourth display mode [for example, the lord wearing a red kimono]. When an effect of changing a certain icon of the sixth display mode is performed by an effect icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM] displayed in [Display mode], the display mode of the certain icon is the second. [For example, FIG. 164 (F)], which may change to the display mode [for example, the display mode of red]. ] Was also explained.

When an effect of changing a certain icon of the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon displayed in the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always shifts to the second display mode. It may change.

Further, "The display means is a means in which a fourth change animation may be displayed, and the fourth change animation is an animation that changes the display mode of the certain icon [for example, FIG. 77 (I 9) to the same figure (I 11), FIG. 163 (c) to the same figure (f), FIG. 163 (C) to the same figure (F), etc.] The invariant animation is a means that may be displayed, and the invariant animation is an animation that does not change the display mode of the certain icon [for example, FIGS. 77 (I 4-1) to (I) 6). 163 (c) -figure (f), etc.]. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the fourth change animation is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means for always displaying the invariant animation.

Further, "The display means is a means in which a variation icon [for example, variation icon h0] may be displayed, and the variation icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display being executed. The icon is a game table characterized by being the variable icon. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the variable icon is always displayed.

Further, "The display means is a means in which a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14] may be displayed, and the hold icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display to be started later. The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds, and the certain icon is the hold icon. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the hold icon is always displayed.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100]. ] Was also explained.

In the above description, "display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). , Second display device 208S, etc.], the display means is a means in which a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0] may be displayed, and the display means is a hold icon [ For example, the hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed, the variation icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed, and the hold icon is a symbol variation to be started later. The display-related icon, the hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds, and the variable icon is displayed in the first display mode [for example, a blue display mode]. The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode], and the variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display mode [for example, a red display mode]. When the variable icon of [Aspect] is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the variable icon of the first display mode [for example, blue display mode] is displayed. [For example, the expectation of a big hit is high], the display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed, and the effect icon is an icon different from the variable icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM. Etc.], the effect icon is an icon different from the hold icon, and the effect icon is displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of the lord wearing a red kimono]. When an effect of changing the variable icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon changes to the second display mode. There is a case [for example, FIG. 168 (N)], and the effect icon of the fourth display aspect is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain aspect [for example, red]. The variable icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a region inside the edge line] displayed in the certain mode [for example, red], and is an effect of the fourth display mode. When the effect of changing the hold icon by the icon is performed, the display mode of the hold icon is displayed in the certain mode. A game table characterized in that there is a case where the display mode includes a region [for example, FIG. 169 (f)]. ] Was explained.

According to this game table, after the change of the hold icon, the hold icon of the display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode may be displayed, and the player's interest may be improved. ..

Here, one embodiment may be only one of a color, a pattern, a size, a shape, a type of character, all or a part of a character, or a combination of all of them. , It may be a partial combination.

The display means may be a means on which the variable icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means in which the hold icon is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means on which the effect icon is always displayed. Further, when the effect of changing the variable icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon may be changed to the second display mode without fail. .. Further, when the effect of changing the hold icon is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, even if the display mode of the hold icon is always changed to the display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode. good.

Further, "the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a blue kimono], and the variable icon is a default display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a blue kimono]. It is an icon that may be displayed in a white display mode], the default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode, and the default display mode is the second display mode. The default display mode is the display mode most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the variable icon, and the effect icon of the third display mode is used. When the effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed, the display mode of the variable icon changes to the first display mode with the first frequency [for example, the frequency A (probability of A)]. [For example, FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (h)], when an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the variable icon is performed. The display mode of the above changes to the second display mode with a second frequency [for example, a second frequency (first probability of B)] [for example, FIGS. 163 (A) to 163 (H)]. A game table characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the second frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and the case where the variable icon in the fifth display mode [for example, the golden display mode] is displayed is better. The jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed [for example, the expectation of the jackpot is higher] than when the variable icon of the second display mode [for example, the red display mode] is displayed. When an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the display mode of, the display mode of the variable icon changes to the first display mode with a third frequency [for example, a third frequency]. (C)] [for example, FIGS. 164 (a) to 164 (h)], the effect icon of the fourth display mode changes the variable icon of the default display mode. When this is done, the display mode of the variable icon changes to the second display mode at a fourth frequency [for example, a first frequency (first probability of D)] [for example, FIGS. 164 (A) to FIG. (H)], when an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon is changed to the fifth display mode. It changes with the frequency [for example, the E-th frequency (E-probability)] [for example, FIGS. 164 (a) to (c)], and the fifth frequency is higher than the third frequency. A game table characterized in that the fourth frequency is higher than the fifth frequency. ] Was also explained.

The game table is characterized in that the third frequency is 0. ] Was also explained.

Further, "a game table characterized in that the fourth frequency is higher than the second frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "a game table characterized in that the first frequency is higher than the third frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The variable icon has a sixth frequency from the default display mode to the first display mode even if the effect icon is not displayed [for example, a third frequency (fth probability)]. [For example, FIGS. 165 (a) to 165 (e)], the variable icon changes from the default display mode to the second display mode even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, the frequency of the Gth (probability of the Gth)] changes [for example, FIGS. , The default display mode changes to the fifth display mode with an eighth frequency [for example, a fifth frequency (probability of H)] [for example, FIGS. 165 (a) to (e)]. A game table characterized in that the seventh frequency is higher than the eighth frequency, and the sixth frequency is higher than the seventh frequency. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in plurality [for example, hold icons h11 to h14], and in the effect of changing the variable icon by the effect icon, a plurality of the variable icon is displayed. In this case, rather than changing the display mode of the variable icon to be changed and changing the variable icon by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the variable icon is displayed by the effect icon of the third display mode. It is easier to recognize which of the plurality of displayed variable icons the variable icon to be changed is the variable icon in the effect of changing [for example, FIG. α11 (d) and FIG. ) Shows the wave motion and the icon], which is a game table. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The display means is a means in which a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as" demo display ") may be displayed, and the demo display is a special symbol display in which the number of holds is 0 [. For example, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214] may be displayed in a stopped display state, and the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed. A game table characterized in that it may be displayed during the display period of the demo display. ] Was also explained.

Here, examples of the demo display include a symbol demo display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a video demo display in which an animation including the title of the game console is displayed. The still image demo display may be displayed instead of the moving image demo display.

Further, the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is not due to the difference in the displayed dialogue, but the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is the difference in the dialogue. It does not have to be the difference with or without.

Well, the display means may be a means for always displaying a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as "demo display"). Further, the demo display may be a display in which the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display is always displayed in a stopped display state. Further, the effect icon of the third display mode may be always displayed during the display period of the demo display.

In addition, "The display means is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda," navigation character changes "by the old man's character. It is a means that may be displayed, and the change effect display may be displayed after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, and during the display of the effect icon of the third display mode. When the first change animation using the change effect display is performed, the effect icon changes to the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 75 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6-1). ), FIG. 76 (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 83 (K 1-3-1) to the same figure (K 1-3-4), and FIG. 91. Meter effect, FIG. 89 (2-2-1) to FIG. (2-2-3)], the second display using the change effect display while displaying the effect icon of the third display mode. When the change animation is performed, the display mode of the effect icon does not change [for example, FIG. 75 (A 3-2-1) to FIG. (A 3-2-2), FIG. 83 (K 1-3-1). ) ~ The same figure (ku 1-3-3b2)]. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the change effect display. Further, the change effect display may be always displayed after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed.

Further, "During the display of the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the variable icon is changed one or more times by the effect of the effect icon of the third display mode, and the variable display is displayed. The display mode of the variable icon may change one or more times depending on the effect of the effect icon of the fourth display mode [for example, FIGS. 168 (A) to (P)]. Game table to play. ] Was also explained.

Further, "During the display of the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the variable icon may be changed a plurality of times due to the effect of the effect icon [for example, FIGS. 166 (a) to 166 (p). )], A game console characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "While displaying the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, while the effect icon is displayed, the change of the display mode of the variation icon succeeds both the first time and the second time, and the variation display ends. In some cases (hereinafter referred to as "first case") [for example, FIGS. 166 (a) to 166 (p)], the effect icon is displayed while the decorative symbol is displayed once in a variable manner. In this state, there is a case where the change of the display mode of the variation icon fails the first time and succeeds the second time, and the variation display ends (hereinafter, referred to as "second case") [for example, , FIGS. 167 (a) to 167 (p)], while the effect icon is being displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the first change in the display mode of the variation icon. In some cases, the second time is successful and the variable display ends (hereinafter, referred to as "third case") [for example, FIG. 167 (A) to FIG. (P)], one of the decorative symbols. When the effect icon is displayed during the display of the variation display of the times, and the change of the display mode of the variation icon fails both the first time and the second time, and the variation display ends (hereinafter, "the first". (For example, FIG. 166 (A) to FIG. (P)], the jackpot symbol mode is finally determined in the third case than in the fourth case. It is easy to display [for example, it is easy to make a big hit in the fluctuation display or the subsequent fluctuation display], and in the second case, the big hit symbol mode is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than in the third case [for example. , It is easy to make a big hit in the fluctuation display or the subsequent fluctuation display], in the first case, it is easier to finally confirm the big hit symbol mode than in the second case [for example, the fluctuation display or It is easy to make a big hit with the subsequent variable display]. ] Was also explained.

The description of the game table here is when the display mode of the variable icon is changed only twice while the effect icon is displayed while the decorative symbol is displayed once. It will be a limitation on the ease of jackpot.

In addition, "While displaying the one-time variation display of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the variation icon changes one or more times while the effect icon is displayed, and the effect is displayed while the variation display is displayed. A game table characterized in that the display mode of the variable icon may change once or a plurality of times in a state where the icon is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (p)]. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The certain aspect means a certain color [for example, red], and the effect icon of the fourth display aspect is an area displayed in the certain color [for example, a kimono area]. The changing icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area displayed in a certain color [for example, an area inside the edge line]. .. ] Was also explained.

Here, the effect icon of the fourth display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or the entire area may be displayed in the certain color. Further, the variable icon of the second display mode may be a part of the area displayed in the certain color, or may be the area displayed in the certain color in its entirety.

Further, the certain aspect may be a display aspect using a certain character, or may be a display aspect using a certain kind of pattern.

In addition, "the effect icon is an icon that may be displayed over a continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 77 (I1) to FIG. (I12), an example shown in FIG. 173, etc.]. A featured game console. ] Was also explained.

The effect icon may be an icon that is always displayed over a continuous symbol variation display.

Further, "The display means is a means in which a third change animation may be displayed, and the third change animation is a treasure box icon shown in another icon [for example, FIG. 78 (U17)). It is an animation that changes the display mode of the effect icon without being accompanied by the effect by [I1], and the third change animation is an effect image [for example, smoke image] of the certain aspect [for example, red]. ] Is at least an animation [for example, FIG. 79 (E2) to FIG. 79 (E3-2)]. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the third change animation is always displayed. Further, the third change animation may be an animation in which only the effect image of the certain aspect is displayed, or an animation in which an image or the like is displayed in addition to the effect image of the certain aspect. You may.

Further, "The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in the sixth display mode [for example, the green display mode], and the fourth display mode [for example, the display of the lord wearing a red kimono]. When an effect of changing the variable icon of the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] displayed in [Aspect], the display mode of the variable icon is the second display mode. A game table characterized in that it may change to [for example, a red display mode] [for example, FIG. 164 (F)]. ] Was also explained.

When an effect of changing the variable icon of the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon displayed in the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon always changes to the second display mode. You may.

Further, "The display means is a means in which a fourth change animation may be displayed, and the fourth change animation is an animation that changes the display mode of the change icon [for example, FIG. 77]. (I 9) to the same figure (I 11), FIG. 163 (c) to the same figure (f), FIG. 163 (C) to the same figure (F), etc.], and the display means displays an invariant animation. The invariant animation is an animation that does not change the display mode of the variable icon [for example, FIGS. 77 (I 4-1) to (I) 6), FIG. 163 ( C) -The same figure (f), etc.]. ] Was also explained.

The display means may be a means on which the fourth change animation is always displayed. Further, the display means may be a means for always displaying the invariant animation.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100]. ] Was also explained.

Next, the icon change effect will be further described. The icon change effect referred to here changes the hold icon, the variable icon, the icon of the mini item displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, the notice icon, the mini game icon, and the icon change notice icon. It is a production.

FIG. 174 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 174 is a flow of the variable display of the decorative symbol that is lost without reaching the reach state. FIG. 3B is a timing chart for explaining the flow of variable display of a decorative symbol that becomes a big hit or a miss after reaching a reach state.

In FIG. 174 (a), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (start of fluctuation), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped after the first stop of the decorative symbol, the second stop of the decorative symbol, and the third stop of the decorative symbol. It shows the flow. In the following description, the order of stopping the decorative symbols is, in principle, the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but the order is not limited to this. In addition, there may be cases where the first stop and the second stop are performed at the same time depending on the notice (the change notice or the look-ahead notice), the production of the mini game, the pseudo-ream, etc., or the number of holds, or the first stop. , The second stop and the third stop may be performed at the same time. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the final stop are set to "((. It may be expressed by the period of "11)". In the following description, regarding the production performed in the production example in which the product is not in the reach state, the branch numbers in the drawing are "Fig. XX (11) -1", "Fig. XX (11) -2", ... Etc. may be used, and the examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. Further, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 174 (a), the effects that can be combined as various effects may be performed during the period shown in "(11)" (for example, a notice of disappointment). In addition, during the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the final stop, a pseudo-ream ghost effect and a chance announcement (pre-reading notice) by stopping the same color (same type) symbol, etc. shall be performed. May also be possible. This is a concept that can be applied to each of the production examples of the embodiments described so far.

In FIG. 174 (b), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (start of fluctuation), the decorative symbol comes off or is a big hit after the formation of the reach state, the transition to the super reach (SP reach), and the derivation of the result of the reach effect. The flow from the fixed stop to the end of the big hit game is shown. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the formation of the reach state is represented by the period of "(1)", and the period from the formation of the reach state to the transition to SP reach is represented by the period of "(2)". The period from the transition to SP reach to the derivation of the result of the reach effect is represented by the period of "(3)", and the period from the derivation of the result of the reach effect to the definite stop is "(4)". , And the period from the fixed stop to the end of the jackpot game may be represented by the period of “(5)”. In the following description, regarding the production performed in the production example in which the jackpot or the miss is reached after the reach state is reached, the branch numbers in the drawings are "Fig. XX (2) -1", "Fig. XX (2) -2", and so on. "Fig. XX (3) -1", "Fig. XX (3) -2", etc. may be used, and the examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. Further, in the explanation in the present embodiment, in the period of "(1)", various notices including a mini-game and a look-ahead notice, and a pseudo-ream may be produced, and in the period of "(2)". , A notice or group notice by displaying a normal reach or cut-in image may be given, and during the period of "(3)", a notice of chance up during SP reach or a notice by displaying a cut-in image may be given. In the period of "(4)", shaking fluctuation, revival jackpot production, wipe display, etc. may be performed, and in the period of "(5)", the production during the jackpot game is performed, and the jackpot is also performed. Probability change notification, hold consecutive villa notification, etc. may be performed during the game. In addition, in the above-described embodiment and the embodiment described below, each notice or effect executed may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice or effect is executed. Further, it may be configured so that these notices and effects may be combined, and in this case, even if one notice (effect) may overlap with the other notice (effect). good. Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, the parts described by the same branch number can be appropriately replaced.

FIGS. 175 to 180 are diagrams showing stepwise change effects centered on the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The change effects shown in FIGS. 175 to 180 are effects executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machines 100 capable of executing the change effects shown in FIGS. 175 to 180 are various types shown in other drawings. The production is also feasible. Further, in FIGS. 175 to 180, although the second decorative symbol display device 208LM and the third decorative symbol display device 208LN are also provided, these are not shown, but are shown in FIGS. 175 to 180. The production example may be a production example in the pachinko machine 100 in which the second decorative symbol display device 208LM and the third decorative symbol display device 208LN are not provided. Further, in FIGS. 175 to 180, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 175 to 180 represent common components when the same reference numerals as those used so far are used. Moreover, even if different codes are used, they may be common in terms of technical ideas. That is, as a technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 14 to 174 and the technical idea shown in other drawings to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 175 to 180, and the technical idea thereof. Conversely, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 175 to 180 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 174 and other technical ideas shown in the drawings. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

Although the description in FIGS. 174 to 180 can be applied to any of the production examples in this specification, it is preferably applied to the production examples described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 174.

FIG. 175 is a diagram showing an example in which the ninja navigation character NJ in the default display mode is taking an action on the hold icon.

First, in FIG. 175 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 7”) is completed. It is displayed as stopped. Although the second decorative symbol is not displayed on the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. α (a), it may be displayed.

Further, the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 175 (a). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and various displays such as icons and mini items are performed on the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 175 (a), the ninja navigation is performed. The character NJ is displayed. The navigation character is also a kind of display of the effect icon, and is also a kind of icon change notice display. The navigator character is also a display for notifying that one of the icons may change, and the animation using this navigator character may actually change one of the icons.

The ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 175 (a) is displayed in the default display mode, and may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays. Ninja navigation character NJ has a plurality of types of display modes, and the default display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. Here, the default display mode is a white display mode, and may be hereinafter referred to as a white display mode. Further, as the above-mentioned plurality of types of display modes, white or unpatterned mode (A mode) and blue or diagonal line pattern mode (B mode) are used to represent the player's advantage and the expectation of a big hit. ), Green or diamond pattern (C), Red or checkered pattern (D), Golden or vertical line pattern (E), Rainbow or horizontal line pattern (E) Fifth aspect) is prepared. Among these aspects, the aspect in which the player's advantage and the expectation of a big hit are the lowest is the aspect A, and the aspect B, the aspect C, the aspect D, and the aspect E. The number increases in order, and the fifth aspect becomes the aspect in which the player's advantage and the expectation of a big hit are the highest. It should be noted that the player's advantage referred to here is that it is easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state), that a premier production is likely to be started, or that a big hit confirmation production is performed. May be easy to get started. It also includes the fact that it is easy to perform an effect that indirectly connects to the jackpot without directly connecting to the jackpot. For example, the SP reach effect with high reliability of the jackpot may be started, or another notice with high reliability of the jackpot may easily appear. Further, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's advantage and the expectation of the big hit may be expressed by the difference in size and number.

Further, the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ may change while the display continues. This point will be described in detail later.

Further, in FIG. 175 (a), neither the hold number of the special figure 1 nor the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0, and neither the hold icon nor the variable icon is displayed. Therefore, the white ninja navigation character NJ may be displayed even during the period when the decorative pattern is not displayed in a variable manner, and may be displayed even during the period when the number of holds is 0. be. In addition, even if it is a ninja navigation character NJ in another display mode (for example, a red display mode, etc.), it may be displayed during the period when the decorative pattern is not variablely displayed, and the number of holds may be increased. It may be displayed in the period of 0. Alternatively, only the white ninja navigation character NJ, which is the default display mode, may be displayed during the period when the number of holds is 0. In this case, during the period when the number of holds is 1 or more and the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (the period of stop display or confirmation display), the ninja navigation character NJ in a display mode other than the default display mode. May also be displayed. Further, during the period when the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, it may be displayed only in the white ninja navigation character NJ, which is the default display mode, regardless of the number of reservations.

Further, a second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 175 (0) -1, and the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 are 0. It has been notified that there is.

In FIG. 175 (11) -1, one ball enters the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 is increased by one. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 175 (11) -1, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the first hold icon h11 in the default (white) display mode is displayed for a moment. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 1 for a moment. In FIG. 175 (11) -2, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the number of holds is 0, the message display "Welcome" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ, and the start of the fluctuation is celebrated. Further, in FIG. 175 (11) -2, the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed, and the icon which was the first hold icon h11 displayed for a moment earlier is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. It is displayed as a variable icon h0. This variable icon h0 is also a default (white) display mode.

In FIG. 175 (11) -3, one ball enters the special drawing 1 starting port 230 again, and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 increases by one. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 175 (11) -3, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Special Figure 1 is 1. During the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol started in FIG. 175 (11) -2, the ball enters the special drawing 1 starting port 230 continuously, and the first decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 175 (11) -4. In the device 208L, the increase animation of the hold icon is completed, four hold icons (first hold icon h11 to fourth hold icon h14) are displayed, and in the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number of special figure 1 is displayed. It is 4. Further, the message display "Hold MAX" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ. All four hold icons are hold icons in the default (white) display mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 175 (11) -5, the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is first stopped, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped. That is, the "decoration 7" has begun to sway and fluctuate. The white ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 175 (11) -6, the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is secondly stopped, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and the reach state is changed. In the following figure (11) -7, which is not formed, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 175 (11) -8, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

In the following FIG. 175 (11) -1, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. doing. As a result, three hold icons, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the first hold icon so far is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. The icon that was the hold icon h11 is displayed as the variable icon h0. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the variable icons h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, the white ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and this navigation character is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. Until now, the ninja navigation character NJ has been displayed in the initial posture facing the front, but the ninja navigation character NJ may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In the following FIG. 175 (11) -2, the message display "Attention to me" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ, and the icon change effect is started. That is, the start timing of the icon change effect here is after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, but may be the same as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, it can be said that it is after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the first stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the start of the reach effect. .. This icon change effect is an animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ. In the following FIG. 175 (11) -3, the white ninja navigation character NJ that has been displayed in the effect icon display area DIS until then. However, it moves to the upper left corner, and in the following figure (11) -4, the white ninja navigator character NJ is throwing three shurikens toward the production display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken is different from the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ, but may be the same mode (white in this case). In FIGS. 175 (11) -5, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before they were covered. The three hold icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, white). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the hold icon display area HIS but also the variable icon display area CIS, and even the variable icon h0 may be difficult to see. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the variable icon h0. In FIG. 175 (11) -6, the effect image EHI disappears, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of any of the three hold icons h11 to h13, and the three hold icons h11. ~ H13 all remain in the default (white) display mode. In this way, even if the icon is covered with the effect image EHI, it may not only change but may not change. Among the icon change animations, an animation in which the icon display mode changes can be classified as a success animation, and an animation in which the icon display mode does not change can be classified as a failure animation. However, when the icon is covered by the effect image EHI, the display mode of the covered icon may be changed without fail. Further, even if the shuriken flies to a completely misplaced place, disappears in the middle, or reaches the effect display area 208d, the effect image EHI may not occur. In this case, Will also be a failed anime. However, the icon may change even if it is not covered by the effect image EHI, and if the icon changes, it becomes a successful animation.

In FIG. 175 (11) -7, the white ninja navigation character NJ, which had been moved to the upper left corner, has returned to the production icon display area DIS, and is said to be "sorry" on the right base icon bIr. A failure message display has been added. The icon change effect (animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ) is an effect performed in the period of FIGS. 175 (11) -2 to 175 (11) -7, but is moved from the effect icon display area DIS. It can be regarded as a production that is performed only while it is being performed (Fig. (11) -3 to Fig. (11) -6), or from the time the shuriken is thrown until the effect image EHI disappears (Fig. It may be regarded as an effect performed only (11) -4 to immediately before (11) -6 in the same figure), or it may be regarded as an effect performed only while the effect image EHI is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 175 (11) -8, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 11) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -6, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here either. In (11) -7, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 175 (11) -11, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

In the following FIG. 175 (1) -1, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is Completed. As a result, two hold icons, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 and the variable icon h0 are the default (white) display modes. In the second hold number display on the upper right, it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, the white ninja navigation character NJ is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 175 (1) -2, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 1) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -3, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. The message display "reach" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 175 (2) -1.

However, as shown in FIG. 175 (4) -1, in the third stop, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped instead of "decoration 2", and "decoration 2"-"decoration 3" which is a combination of lost decorative symbols "-" Decoration 2 "is shaking and fluctuating. Then, in FIG. 175 (4) -2, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2" is performed.

Here, the hold icon also has a plurality of types of display modes similar to the Ninja navigation character NJ, and the default (white) display mode is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. This is a display mode. Further, as a plurality of types of display modes in the hold icon, as the display mode of the look-ahead notice, a white or non-patterned mode (A mode), a blue or diagonal line pattern mode (B mode), a green or diamond pattern pattern. (C), red or checkered pattern (D), golden or vertical line pattern (E), iridescent or horizontal line pattern (F) It is prepared. Among these modes, the mode with the lowest expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is the aspect A, which is higher in the order of the second aspect, the C aspect, the D aspect, and the E aspect. Then, the fifth aspect becomes the aspect in which the expectation of the big hit is the highest (for example, the aspect in which the big hit is confirmed).

FIG. (11) -6'shown at the right end of FIG. 175 is a different example from FIG. (11) -6 after the effect image EHI shown in FIG. Of the two hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default (white) display mode to the blue display mode. That is, the example shown in FIG. 175 (11) -6'is an example of a successful animation, but the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is lower than that in the case where the display mode is changed to red.

Further, both the figure (11) -6'' shown at the right end of FIG. 175 and the figure (11) -6 after the effect image EHI shown in the figure (11) -5 disappears are also shown in the figure (11). ) -6'is another example, and of the three hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. That is, the example shown in FIG. 175 (11) -6'' is also an example of a successful animation, and the expectation of a big hit is higher than the case where the display mode is changed to blue (in the case of FIG. 175 (11) -6'). The degree (reliability) is high, but not 100%.

As described above, the icon change effect, which is an animation using the ninja navigation character NJ in the default display mode, may succeed in changing the icon or may fail. The icon change effect, which is an animation using the blue (second aspect) ninja navigation character NJ, is more than the icon change effect, which is an animation using the white (Ath aspect) ninja navigation character NJ. , The probability of succeeding in changing the icon increases, and in the icon change production, which is an animation using the green (Cth aspect) ninja navigation character NJ, the blue (Bth aspect) ninja navigation character NJ is used. The probability of succeeding in changing the icon is even higher than that of the icon change effect that is the animation used.

Similarly, the variable icon h0 is provided with the same plurality of types of display modes as those in the aspect A to the aspect E. Even in the display mode of the variable icon h0, the default (white) display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. In addition, each display mode is a display mode of a notice (so-called normal notice) regarding a big hit in the variable display currently being performed, and represents the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit. That is, the mode in which the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is the lowest is the mode A, and the mode increases in the order of the Bth mode, the Cth mode, the Dth mode, and the Eth mode. The mode of F is the mode in which the expectation of the big hit is the highest (for example, the mode in which the big hit is confirmed).

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example in which the red ninja navigation character NJ is taking an action on the hold icon.

Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 175 will be mainly described, and duplicate description may be omitted.

176 (0) -1 to (11) -3 in the second column from the left in FIG. 176 (0) -1 to FIG. Same as up to -3, all three hold icons h11 to h13 are in the default (white) display mode, and the variable icon h0 is also in the default (white) display mode. Further, in FIG. 176 (11) -2, the message display "Attention to me" is added to the white ninja navigation character NJ, and the icon change effect is started. In the following FIG. 176 (11) -3, the white color is displayed. Ninja navigation character NJ has moved to the upper left corner.

In FIG. 176 (11) -4, at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is covered by the effect image EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before it was covered. Only a part of the navigation character may be covered with the effect image EIH, or the entire navigation character may be covered with the effect image EIH. In FIG. 176 (11) -5, the effect image EIH disappears, and the ninja navigation character NJ, which had been displayed in white before being covered by the effect image EIH, has changed to a red display mode. The mode of the effect image EIH is different from the display mode of the navigator character NJ after the change, but it may be the same mode (here, red).

In the following FIG. 176 (11) -6, the red ninja navigation character NJ is throwing three shurikens toward the production display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). In FIGS. 176 (11) -7, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before they were covered. The three hold icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI is different from the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ, but may be the same mode (here, red). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the hold icon display area HIS but also the variable icon display area CIS, and even the variable icon h0 may be difficult to see. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the variable icon h0. In FIGS. 176 (11) -8, the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. .. That is, the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation. The animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation that always changes one or more of the hold icon and the variable icon. Here, the mode to be changed (the mode after the change) may be the same mode as the navigation character NJ, that is, the mode may be predetermined in red, or the mode after the change may not be predetermined. However, the mode is changed so that the reliability of the jackpot is increased. Therefore, it may be changed to a rainbow-colored mode in which the jackpot is confirmed. Further, in the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ, the mode may be changed to the same mode as the effect image EHI covering the icon. Even if the animation uses the red ninja navigation character NJ, it may be intentionally provided in the case where the animation fails (the mode of the icon does not change).

In FIG. 176 (11) -9, the red ninja navigation character NJ, which had been moved to the upper left corner, has returned to the production icon display area DIS, and "I did it" on the right base icon bIr. The display of the success message is added. In this example, the navigation character change effect is also performed in the icon change effect. It is also possible to consider the icon change effect and the navigation character change effect separately. In this case, the navigation character change effect is shown in FIGS. 176 (11) -3 to (11) -5. , The icon change effect is shown in FIGS. 176 (11) -6 to (11) -9. Further, the change effect of the navigation character may be performed in the effect icon display area DIS, or conversely, may not be performed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIGS. 176 (11) -10 to (11) -13, the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ is red, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is also red. Except for this, it is the same as Fig. 175 (11) -8 to Fig. (11) -11 described above, and is a combination of lost decorative patterns "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 2"-"Decoration 2". Is confirmed and displayed.

In the following FIG. 176 (1) -1, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is Completed. As a result, the hold icon display area HIS displays two hold icons, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, and the variable icon display area CIS has been the red first hold icon h11. The icon is displayed as the variable icon h0. Although the red variation icon h0 is displayed in FIG. 176 (1) -1, the red variation icon h0 is larger than the variation icon h0 of the default display mode shown in FIG. 175 (1) -1. , Larger than the hold icon. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default (white) display modes. In addition, the red ninja navigation character NJ is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 176 (1) -2, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 11) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -3, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped to form a reach state. The red ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 175 (2) -1 is provided with a red message display of "super heat" instead of a message display of "reach".

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 176 (2) -2, the Sabohani group notice is started, and at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the effect icon display area DIS is displayed. , Sabohani overlap. It should be noted that the navigator character does not overlap with the navigator character, and the navigator character may overlap with at least a part of the navigator character. Further, the Sabohani may overlap at least a part of the "super heat" message display, and conversely, the "super heat" message display may overlap at least a part of the Sabohani. In the following FIG. 176 (2) -3, a red message display "SP development" is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, and it is notified that the red ninja will develop into super reach. In addition, when the Sabohani group notice is started, the display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed below the second reserved number display. In this example, even if the Sabohani group notice is started, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the navigation character remain, but when the Sabohani group notice is started, the first stage hs1 to the fourth stage hs4 At the same time, the display of the hold icon disappears, and the variable icon h0 may disappear together with the pedestal hs0. In addition, the navigation character may also disappear. Furthermore, even if the hold icon or the like disappears, only the navigation character may be continuously displayed.

Subsequently, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 176 (3) -1 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. In addition, the message display "Swordsman Reach" is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ. Although at least a part of the swordsman of the enemy role overlaps with the red ninja navigator character NJ, at least a part of the navigator character NJ may overlap with the swordsman of the enemy role.

With the development of super reach, as shown in FIG. 176 (3) -2, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a deca button image 136ab, which is a large image imitating the chance button 136. This big button image 136ab overlaps all of Yoshimune and the swordsman who face each other, which is displayed as a production display of Super Reach, and Yoshimune and the swordsman are not visible. Further, the big button image 136ab also overlaps with at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before the overlap. Further, the deca button image 136ab also overlaps at least a part of the red variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before the overlap. Further, in the deca button image 136ab, the character of "push" that promotes the operation is displayed in a large size according to the size of the deca button image 136ab. Furthermore, the red ninja navigation character NJ has a message display of "It's a big button" instead of the message display of "Swordsman Reach".

In FIG. 176 (3) -3, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (3) -4, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca button image 136ab disappears and the display is switched to the strong cut-in image CIs. The strong cut-in image CIs also overlaps at least a part of the red ninja navigator character NJ, and the navigator character NJ is more difficult to see than before the overlap. Further, the strong cut-in image CIs also overlaps at least a part of the red variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 is more difficult to see than before the overlap. In addition, the red ninja navigation character NJ has a message display of "strong cut-in" instead of the message display of "big button", but the message display of "swordsman reach" has been added again. May be good.

Normally, an operation valid period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is provided, and the response effect (here, the display of the strong cut-in image CIs) is performed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. ) May be performed, or even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect is performed after the operation valid period elapses. It may be.

After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (3) -5, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the scene in which the main character Yoshimune defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role is displayed with the characters "win", and the first decoration is displayed. In the substantially center of the symbol display device 208L, "decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is planned to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". Is notified.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 176 (4) -1, the display of the decorative symbol, which has been reduced and displayed under the second hold number display, is restored and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is displayed in a state of temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation. .. Although no message display is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, a message display saying "It's a big hit" may be added. If the hold icon or variable icon has disappeared, it will be restored and displayed at this timing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 176 (4) -2, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. The red variation icon h0 is erased at the timing of this confirmation display. The red variable icon h0 is a true notice. Further, the red ninja navigation character NJ has returned to the white ninja navigation character NJ. That is, in this example, until the variation display started in FIG. 176 (1) -1 is completed, which corresponds to the icon whose display mode has changed (the first hold icon h11 at the timing of FIG. 176 (11) -8). , The red ninja navigator character NJ continues to be displayed, and when the corresponding variation display ends and is confirmed and displayed, the red ninja navigator character NJ returns to the default display mode.

FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an example of selection of the icon change notice display and mode change.

The example shown at the left end of FIG. 177 is an example of selecting the type of the icon change notice display from the demo display. In FIG. Is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. Further, the navigation character YM of the lord is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 177 (0) -1. The navigation character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 177 (0) -1 is displayed in the default display mode.

If a new symbol variation display is not started within a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed while the special symbol is held at 0, the first decorative symbol is displayed. A demonstration display is displayed on the device 208L. In the demonstration display, the symbol demo display in which the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed continues to be displayed while the background screen in which the symbol variation was displayed disappears, and the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed disappears and the symbol variation is displayed. There is an animation demo display that switches from the background screen and displays a dedicated animation. In addition, the design demo display or the dedicated background screen may be displayed. Although the animation demo display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 177 (0) -2, the animation demo display may be displayed via the symbol demo display, or the symbol demo display may be displayed. The animation demo display may be displayed without going through. In the animation demo display shown in FIG. 177 (0) -2, an animation in which the model title of the pachinko machine is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is notified that the menu screen is displayed when the chance button 136 is operated at the lower part. There is.

In FIG. 177 (0) -3, the chance button 136 is operated, and the menu screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This menu screen is the same as the option menu screen shown in FIG. 65 (15). In FIG. 177 (0) -3, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the effect customization icon is lit in red while the other icons are displayed in white. .. Further, on the option menu screen, a picture of an operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, among the operation key units 137, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Further, among the chance button 136 and the cross keys, the designs of the cursor icon cs and the up / down keys 137u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. For the decision operation, the decision key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the decision key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

When the down key 137d is operated once while the menu screen is displayed, the cursor icon cs that was previously displayed on the effect customization icon moves down by one, as shown in Fig. 177 (0) -4. Then, this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon lights up in red. When the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, the character selection screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as shown in FIGS. 177 (0) -5. Is displayed. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 177 (0) -5, the character of the lord, the character of the bancho, and the character of the ninja are all displayed in the default display mode, and the currently selected character of the lord is displayed. , The selection frame CF is displayed. When the right key 137r is operated twice, the selection frame CF moves and the selection frame CF is displayed on the ninja character. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 177 (0) -7, the character selection determination screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character selection determination screen is displayed in FIG. 177 (0) -6. Of the three characters shown in (1), only the ninja character is displayed in a large size, and a large message display of "Leave it to me" is added. After that, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L returns to the screen before the animation demo display is displayed, and is placed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIGS. 177 (0) -8. Is displayed with the white ninja navigation character NJ added with the message "Thank you".

In the selection of characters by the player, the type of character can be selected, but the display mode of each character cannot be selected, and the display mode of each character becomes the default display mode. However, on the character selection screen shown in FIG. 177 (0) -5, a character having a mode different from the default display mode is automatically displayed, and when that character is selected, the character is selected from the beginning in a mode different from the default display mode. It may be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, or when the character that was the default display mode on the character selection screen is switched to the character selection determination screen shown in FIGS. 177 (0) -7, the default display is displayed. The character may be automatically changed to a character having a mode different from the mode, and may be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the beginning in a mode different from the default display mode, or the default display up to the character selection determination screen. When the character in the mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, the character may be automatically changed to a character in a mode different from the default display mode. In these cases, the display mode is internally determined by the lottery regarding the production.

The second example from the left in FIG. 177 is an example in which the type of the icon change notice display is selected from the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is completed when the number of holdings is 0, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. Further, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. The second row (0) -1 to (11) -2 in FIG. 177 are the same as those in FIG. 175 (0) -1 to FIG. There is, and the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 177 (11) -2, a tutorial display indicating that the character of the navigation character can be changed by operating the cross key is displayed.

In FIG. 177 (11) -3, the cross key is operated, and the navigator character BC of the default display mode is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the character of the Bancho is determined as the navigation character, and the message display of "Yosha" is added to the navigation character BC of the Bancho.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 177 (11) -4, the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is first stopped, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped. In this example, the character of the navigation character can be changed by operating the cross key during the fluctuation until the first stop is performed in the variable display of the decorative symbol. Until then, the above tutorial display is displayed, but the first When stopped, the above tutorial display disappears. It should be noted that the character change of the navigation character by the cross key operation during the fluctuation may be possible until the second stop is performed, or until the transition to the reach state is performed, or from the start of the fluctuation display. It may be possible for a certain period of time, or it may be possible until the variable display of the decorative pattern is completed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 177 (11) -5, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here either. In the following figure (11) -6, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 177 (11) -7, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

The examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 177 are diagrams showing an example of a change effect of the navigation character. In this example as well, the variable display of the decorative symbol ends when the number of reserved special symbols is 0, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. There is. Further, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. The third column (0) -1 in FIG. 177 to (11) -10 in the fourth column (right end) in the same figure are (0) -1 to the second column (11) in the same figure. Same as up to -2, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed once, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In each case, the three hold icons h11 to h13 in the default (white) display mode are displayed. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 177 (11) -10, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and a message display "Attention to me" is added. Here, instead of the icon change effect targeting the hold icon and the variable icon, the change effect targeting the ninja navigation character NJ has been started.

In FIGS. 177 (11) -11, the white ninja navigation character NJ does not move to the upper left corner, and at least a part of the ninja navigation character NJ is on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Covered by the effect image EIH, the navigation character NJ is more difficult to see than it was before it was covered. The navigation character NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIGS. 177 (11) -12, the effect image EIH disappears, and the ninja navigation character NJ, which was displayed in white before being covered by the effect image EIH, is displayed above the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. The display mode has changed to red. The mode of the effect image EIH may be the same as the display mode of the navigator character NJ after the change (here, red). A message display such as "hot" is added to the navigation character NJ that has changed to the red display mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 177 (11) to 13, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 11) In -14, the second stop is performed, in the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here either. In the following figure (11) -15, the third stop is performed. The stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 177 (11) -16, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed. In this example, in the variable display in which the change effect for the navigation character is performed, the icon change effect for the hold icon and the variable icon is not started.

In the following FIG. 177 (1) -1, the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is performed. Completed. As a result, two hold icons, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Whether the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, or the variable icon h0, the display mode is the default (white) display mode. In addition, the red ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

FIG. 178 is a diagram showing a continuation of the examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 177, and still another example of the change effect of the navigation character.

In FIG. 178 (1) -2, which continues from FIG. 177 (1) -1, the icon change effect is started, and in the following FIG. 176 (11) -3, the red ninja navigation character NJ is displayed in the effect icon display area. Moving from DIS to the upper left corner.

In FIG. 178 (1) -4, the red ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left throws three shurikens toward the production display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). In FIG. 178 (1) -4, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and at least a part of each of the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. Flash effect image Covered by EHI. As a result, at least a part of each of the two hold icons h11 to h13 and the variable icon h0 is covered by the flash effect image EHI, and the respective icons h11, h12, and h0 are more difficult to see than before they were covered. ing. Only a part of these three icons h11, h12, and h0 may be covered with the effect image EHI, or all of them may be covered with the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). The flash effect image EHI covers only the variable icon display area CIS of the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS, and only the variable icon h0 may be difficult to see. In FIGS. 178 (1) -5, the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three icons h11, h12, and h0, only the variable icon h0 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode, and the size is also increased. It's getting bigger. It should be noted that the size may be the same and only the color may be changed, or conversely, the color may be the same and the size may be increased. The animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ here is a successful animation. In FIG. 178 (1) -6, the red ninja navigation character NJ, which had been moved to the upper left corner, has returned to the production icon display area DIS, and "I did it" on the right base icon bIr. The display of the success message is added.

Fig. 178 (1) 7-10 to Fig. (4) -2 are the same as those of Fig. 176 (1) -2 to Fig. (4) -2 described above. A group notice was given, then a super reach was developed and a big button production was performed during the swordsman reach, and finally, "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" which is a combination of jackpot decorative patterns. Is confirmed and displayed. The ninja navigation character NJ, which was in the red display mode, returns to the white display mode at the timing of this definite display.

The examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 178 are diagrams showing other examples of the change effect of the navigation character. In this example as well, the variable display of the decorative symbol ends when the number of reserved special symbols is 0, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. There is. Further, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. The third row (0) -1 in FIG. 178 to (11) -4 in the fourth row (right end) in the same figure are shown in FIGS. 176 (0) -1 to the second row (11) in the same figure. Same as up to -4, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed once, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In each case, the three hold icons h11 to h13 in the default (white) display mode are displayed. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 178 (11) -2, only the white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and the message "Attention to me" is added. There is. Subsequently, in FIG. 178 (11) -3, the one-piece white ninja navigation character NJ is moved from the effect icon display area DIS to the upper left corner.

In FIG. 178 (11) -4, at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is covered by the three effect images EIH, and the navigation character NJ is more difficult to see than before it was covered. .. The navigation character NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 178 (11) -5, the three effect images EIH disappear, and the ninja navigation character NJ, which had been displayed in one white color before being covered by the effect image EIH, has the same white color. It is increasing in the body. That is, the same number of white ninja navigation characters NJ as the number of reserved special figures are displayed. The number of effect image EIHs is the same as the number of pending special figures.

In the following FIG. 178 (11) -6, each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ throws one shuriken toward the production display area 208d, and a total of three shurikens fly toward the production display area 208d. I'm going at. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, white). In FIG. 178 (11) -7, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before they were covered. The three hold icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, white). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers not only the hold icon display area HIS but also the variable icon display area CIS, and even the variable icon h0 may be difficult to see. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the variable icon h0.

In FIGS. 178 (11) -8, the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. .. That is, the animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation. Further, in FIG. 178 (11) -8, at least a part of each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ is covered by a large number of three or more effect images EIH, and the three white ninja navigation characters are covered. Each of the NJs is more difficult to see than before it was covered. In addition, each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 178 (11) -9, many effect images EIH disappeared, the three white ninja navigator characters NJ displayed in the upper left corner disappeared, and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS became A white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed, and a success message "I did it" is added on the right base icon bIr. Of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ, only one may be the red ninja navigation character NJ. Moreover, the position of the red ninja navigation character NJ may be the right end according to the position of the changed hold icon, and by doing so, the icon to be changed depending on the mode and display position of the navigation character NJ and the icon to be changed. The display mode after the change can be suggested (notified) by the navigation character NJ.

In this example as well, the navigation character change effect is also performed in the icon change effect, and the icon change effect and the navigation character change effect can be considered separately. In this case, the navigation character change effect. The effects are shown in FIGS. 178 (11) -3 to (11) -5, and the icon change effects are shown in FIGS. 178 (11) -6 to (11) -9. Further, in this example, in FIG. 178 (11) -9, the three white ninja navigation characters NJ are returned to the one white ninja navigation character NJ, but the three white ninja navigation characters are returned. The NJ may continue to be displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS as it is.

FIG. 179 is a diagram showing a continuation of the examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 178, and other production examples.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (11) -10 following FIG. 178 (11) -9, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 7" is performed. Is temporarily stopped, the second stop is performed in the figure (11) -11, and the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is not formed here either. In (11) -12, the third stop is performed, and "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 179 (11) -13, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed. In this example, in the variable display in which the change effect for the navigation character is performed, the icon change effect for the hold icon and the variable icon is also performed.

The example shown in the second column from the left in FIG. 179 is a diagram showing another example of the change effect of the navigation character. FIG. 179 (11) -4'is an example different from FIG. 178 (11) -4, which continues from FIG. 178 (11) -3, and at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ moved to the upper left is , Covered by a plurality of effect images EIH, the navigator is more difficult to see than before it was covered. Only a part of the navigation character may be covered with the effect image EIH, or the entire navigation character may be covered with the effect image EIH. In FIG. 179 (11) -5', all of the plurality of effect images EIH disappear, and the navigation character whose display mode is changed to red and whose display size is also increased is displayed. Here, although the plurality of modes (color and size) are changing at the same time, the plurality of modes (color and size) may change at different timings. Further, the ninja navigation character NJ may remain white and only the display size may change significantly. Further, the size of the display size corresponds to the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot, and the larger the display size, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot.

In the following FIG. 179 (11) -6', a large red ninja navigation character NJ is throwing a shuriken toward the production display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). In FIG. 179 (11) -7, the three shurikens reach the hold icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area HIS is covered with the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three hold icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to see than before they were covered. The three hold icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered by the effect image EHI, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red).

In FIG. 179 (11) -8', the effect image EHI disappears, and of the three hold icons h11 to h13, only the first hold icon h11 displays the ninja navigation character NJ from the default (white) display mode. It has changed to the same red display mode as the mode. Further, in FIG. 179 (11) -8, the large red ninja navigation character NJ is covered with a large number of effect images EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to see than before it was covered. The large red ninja navigation character NJ may be partially covered with the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered with the effect image EIH. In FIG. 179 (11) -9', many effect images EIH disappeared, the large red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the upper left corner disappeared, and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS was the original. The white ninja navigation character NJ, which has returned to the size of, is displayed, and a success message "I did it" is added on the right base icon bIr.

The examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 179 are diagrams showing an example of a preview animation using a navigation character. From (11) -1 to (1) -3 in the third column from the left in FIG. 179, the number of holds in FIG. 1 does not decrease from 4 to 3, but decreases from 3 to 2. Except for the points, it is the same as (11) -8 at the lower end of the third row in FIG. 178 to (11) -2 in the fourth row in FIG. 178, and the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 179 (1) -1. In the display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and two hold icons h11 and h12 in the default (white) display mode are displayed. Further, in FIG. 179 (1) -2, a white ninja navigation character NJ with a message display "Attention to me" is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. ..

In the following FIG. 179 (1) -3, the white ninja navigation character NJ moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the upper left corner, and in FIG. 179 (1) -4, the mini game is started. That is, a large message display indicating that there is a high possibility of a big hit is added to the white ninja navigation character NJ that has moved to the upper left corner when the chance button 136 is pressed and a 3 roll is rolled. Subsequently, in FIG. 179 (1) -5, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are displayed, and the button effect is started. .. Further, the white ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 179 (1) -5 is provided with a "press" message display prompting the press of the chance button 136. Then, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 179 (1) -6, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (1) -7, the image of the third roll of the dice is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed as "Yoshia". The message display is added first, and then the message display of "extreme heat" is added (Fig. 179 (1) -8). In this example, you're hitting a mini-game. In FIGS. 179 (11) -9, the image of the third roll of the dice disappears, and the white ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the upper left corner returns to the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. .. The message display of "super heat" is added to the ninja navigation character NJ that has returned to the effect icon display area DIS. The animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ from Fig. 179 (1) -4 to Fig. (1) -9 described above is not an animation that changes the icon, but an animation that is currently being performed. This is a preview animation about the big hit in the variable display. Here, the display of the third image of the dice indicates that the possibility of a big hit is high, and this is a preview animation by a mini game.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (1) -10, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the same figure ( 1) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -11, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped to form a reach state.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (2) -2, the Sabohani group notice is started. Before the start of the Sabohani group notice, or at the same time as the start of the Sabohani group notice, and after the start of the Sabohani group notice, the change effect of the navigation character is performed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. The ninja navigation character NJ, which had been displayed in white until now, has changed to a red display. The change of the navigator character may be performed when hit in the mini game, or may be performed regardless of the result of the mini game. In addition, the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode until then, has also changed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. Has changed to a combined display mode. The change in the display mode of the variable icon may also be performed when the mini-game is hit, or may be performed regardless of the result of the mini-game. Further, in FIG. 179 (2) -2, a red message display "icon change" is added on the right base icon bIr. The change timing of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is after the end of the change effect of the navigation character, but may be before the start of the change effect of the navigation character, or even during the execution of the change effect of the navigation character. good.

As shown in FIG. 179 (2) -2, Sabohani overlaps at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It should be noted that the navigator character does not overlap with the navigator character, and the navigator character may overlap with at least a part of the navigator character. Further, the message display of "icon change" overlaps with at least a part of the message display of "icon change", but conversely, the message display of "icon change" may overlap with at least a part of the message display of "icon change". Further, although the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed and the Sabohani do not overlap, the Sabohani may overlap at least a part of the variable icon h0, and conversely, the variable icon h0 may overlap at least a part of the Sabohani. May overlap. When the Sabohani group notice is started, the display of the decorative design is reduced and displayed below the second reserved number display.

In the following FIG. 179 (2) -3, a red message display of "premier" is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, and it is notified that the premier production will be started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (3) -1, the super reach (swordsman reach) production is started before the premiere production, and the screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. There is. In addition, the message display "Swordsman Reach" is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ. Although at least a part of the swordsman of the enemy role overlaps with the red ninja navigator character NJ, at least a part of the navigator character NJ may overlap with the swordsman of the enemy role. Further, although at least a part of the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is overlapped with the swordsman of the enemy role, at least a part of the swordsman of the enemy role may be overlapped with the variable icon h0.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (3) -2, the premiere production is started from the middle of the swordsman reach production. The premier effect here is an effect in which the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is enlarged and displayed, and an image in which the character is riding a motorcycle and the red character V is combined is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen. , The image overlaps with the scene where the main character Yoshimune and the swordsman who plays the enemy are cut off, and the display of the swordsman reach production is more difficult to see than before the overlap. With the premiere production, the big hit will be confirmed or almost confirmed.

When the premiere production is completed, the image that has been displayed large in the center of the screen is reduced and displayed again as the variable icon h0 (FIG. 179 (3) -5). In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the scene in which the main character Yoshimune defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role is displayed with the characters "win", and the middle symbol is displayed in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in, and it is notified that "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative symbols. At least a part of the redisplayed variable icon h0 overlaps with the display of "decoration 2" which is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol.

FIG. 180 is a diagram showing a continuation of the examples shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 179.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (4) -1 following FIG. 179 (3) -5, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced and displayed under the second hold number display is restored and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is displayed in a state of temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation. .. Although no message display is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ, a message display saying "It's a big hit" may be added. The variable icon h0 is also displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (4) -2, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. The variable icon h0 is deleted at the timing of this confirmation display. Further, the red ninja navigation character NJ has returned to the white ninja navigation character NJ.

In addition, in FIG. 179 (1) -4 to FIG. 179 (1) -9, although the white ninja navigation character NJ is used, the notice animation by the mini game is executed instead of the animation of changing the icon. An animation that changes the icon may also play a mini-game that may or may not succeed. That is, if the mini game is successful, the white ninja navigation character NJ changes to the red ninja navigation character NJ, and if the mini game is unsuccessful, the white ninja navigation character NJ is changed to the red ninja navigation character NJ. The white ninja navigator character NJ remains the white ninja navigator character NJ.

Here, to summarize the animations that can be executed, it is an animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ, and the variable icon and the hold icon may be changed from the default mode to the notice mode (No. A). It is classified into an animation (animation) and an animation (for example, a preview animation) that has nothing to do with the mode change in the first place, and as a result, an animation that does not change from the default mode to the preview mode (animation B). can do. In addition, the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ, which always changes the variable icon and the hold icon from the default mode to the notice mode (Cth animation), has nothing to do with the mode change in the first place. It can also be classified into an animation (first animation) that is an animation that does not exist (for example, a preview animation) and that does not change from the default mode to the advance mode as a result. Further, by changing the display mode of the navigation character, it can be classified into a successful animation (Eth animation) and a failing animation (Fth animation). Further, even if they are the same preview animation, the preview animation that does not change the display mode of the navigation character (G animation) and the preview animation that does not change the display mode of the variable icon or the hold icon (H). It can also be classified into (animation). Further, there is also an animation (the first animation) in which the variable icon or the hold icon may be changed from the default mode to the notice mode without using the navigation character. Examples of the first animation include the animations shown in FIGS. 165 (a) to 165 (e), the animations shown in FIGS. 165 (A) to 165 (E), and the animations shown in FIGS. 165 (a) to 165 (a). An animation in which the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, such as the animation shown in (e), is applicable.

Here, the G-th animation and the E-th animation may be animations in which the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ is used in common, or a part (for example, the first part) may be used. (Including part) may be an animation performed in the same manner. Further, the G-th animation may be an animation in which the variable icon or the hold icon is not changed from the default mode to the notice mode.

In addition, the third animation and the D animation may be animations in which the red ninja navigation character NJ is used in common, and in addition, background images and some scenes may be used. It may be common, or the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, character or icon) displayed separately from the red ninja navigation character NJ may be common.

Further, the C-th animation and the D-th animation may be animations in which a part of the animation is performed in the same manner. Further, the C-th animation and the D-th animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

Further, the first animation and the third animation may be animations in which navigation characters are used in common, and in addition, background images and some scenes may be common in common. Alternatively, the display (for example, a character or an icon) displayed separately from the navigation character may have the same type, color, shape, or size.

Further, the first animation and the third animation may be animations in which a part is performed in the same manner. Further, the first animation and the third animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

Further, the first animation and the Hth animation may be animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, they may be common in that the navigation character is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, characters and icons) displayed separately from the navigation character are common. You may be.

Further, the D animation and the H animation may be animations in which a part of the animation is performed in the same manner. Further, the D animation and the H animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

Further, in the example of changing the hold icon in FIGS. 175 to 180, the variable icon may be changed instead of the hold icon, and in the example of changing the variable icon in FIGS. 175 to 180, the variable icon may be changed. You may change the hold icon.

Further, none of the examples shown in FIGS. 175 to 180 was an example of changing the icon of the mini item displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, but instead of the hold icon or the variable icon, the icon of the mini item Etc., various icons may be changed.

In the above description, "A game console provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons, and one of the plurality of types of icons is a hold of the first icon [for example, white (default). The icon h11, the white (default) variable icon h0, and the white meter rising item UpI icon], and one of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, red (look-ahead notice). The hold icon h11 of the aspect), the red variation icon h0, and the icon of the red meter rising item UpIr], and the display means has a first aspect [for example, a white (default) aspect]. It is a means capable of displaying the first animation using the display (hereinafter referred to as "first display") [for example, the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ], and the display means is the second. It is a means capable of displaying a second animation using the certain display [for example, the red ninja navigation character NJ] of the aspect [for example, the red aspect], and the first display is a decorative symbol variation display. Is a display that may be displayed during the period when is not performed [for example, during the stop display, during the demonstration, or during the jackpot game], and the first animation is the display of the first icon displayed. Animation that may be changed to the second icon [For example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 175 (11) -2 to (11) -6 "to FIG. (11) -7, FIG. 178 (11). ) -2 to the icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -9], and the second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 176 (11) -2 to the icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -9, and FIG. 178 (1) -2 to the icon change animation shown in FIG. A game table characterized in that the display is selected by the player from a plurality of types of displays [for example, FIG. 177 (0) -5 to FIG. (0) -8]. ] Was explained.

According to this game table, the player can be entertained by giving a notice on the display selected by the player.

Here, the first animation is an animation in which the displayed first icon may not be changed to the second icon, and the second animation is the displayed first icon. This is an animation that always changes the icon to the second icon.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display means may be a means for always displaying the first animation, or may be a means for always displaying the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed.

Also, "The first aspect is the default aspect, and the first aspect is most likely to be displayed than the other aspects of the certain display, including the second aspect. It is an aspect, and when the player selects the certain display, the first display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 177 (0) -6 to (0) -8]. Game table. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The above-mentioned display may be selectable even during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is performed [for example, FIGS. 177 (11) -2 to (11) -3. ], A game table featuring that. ] Was also explained. For example, it can always be selected in the period after the decorative symbol variation display is started and before the reach state is reached, but it may not be selectable in the period after the reach state is reached.

Further, the certain display may be a display that can be selected even during the period in which the decorative symbol variation display is being performed. That is, it may be selectable at any time during the entire period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed. Furthermore, the certain display may be a display that can always be selected. It should be noted that the certain display may be a display that is always selected during the period in which the decorative symbol variation display is being performed.

Further, "The certain display is a display that can be selected only when a certain condition is satisfied, and the certain condition is a condition that the demonstration display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 177 (0) -2]. A game table characterized by being. ] Was also explained.

Here, as the certain condition, a plurality of conditions may be prepared. For example, in addition to the condition that the demonstration display is being displayed, a condition that a certain jackpot game is in progress (for example, during a jackpot game with probability variation, during a jackpot game without probability variation, during a round, or during an interval between rounds). It may be a condition that the cumulative number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number of times, and the number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number of times without intervening the jackpot game. May be the condition.

Further, as the certain condition, only one condition may be prepared. One of the conditions may be a condition that the demonstration display is being displayed, a condition that a certain big hit game is being played, or a cumulative number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be a condition that the number of times of execution of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number of times without intervening the big hit game.

Further, the demonstration display is a display displayed in a state where the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. More specifically, it is a display that starts when a predetermined time elapses after the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed without holding the special symbol, and the symbol is the symbol in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Examples include a demo display and a video demo display in which an animation including the title of the game console is displayed. The still image demo display may be displayed instead of the moving image demo display. It should be noted that the certain display may be a display that is always selected only when a certain condition is satisfied.

In the above description, "A game console provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons, and one of the plurality of types of icons is a hold of the first icon [for example, white (default). The icon h11, the white (default) variable icon h0, and the white meter rising item UpI icon], and one of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, red (look-ahead notice). The hold icon h11 of the aspect), the red variation icon h0, and the icon of the red meter rising item UpIr], and the display means has a first aspect [for example, a white (default) aspect]. It is a means capable of displaying the first animation using the display (hereinafter referred to as "first display") [for example, the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ], and the display means is the second. It is a means capable of displaying a second animation using the certain display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display") [for example, red ninja navigation character NJ] of the aspect [for example, the red aspect]. The display means is a third animation that changes the first display to the second display [for example, the character change animation shown in FIGS. 176 (11) -4 to (11) -5, FIG. 177. (11) -11 to the character change animation shown in Fig. (11) -12, Fig. 178 (11) -4 to the character change animation shown in Fig. (11) -5, Fig. 179 (11) -4'to the same. The character change animation shown in FIG. It is a display that may be displayed in [Medium period], and the first animation may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 175 (Fig. 175). 11) -2 to the icon change animation shown in Fig. (11) -6'' to Fig. (11) -7, and Fig. 178 (11) -2 to the icon change animation shown in Fig. (11) -9]. Yes, the second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, the icon change shown in FIGS. 176 (11) -2 to (11) -9. Animation, icon change animation shown in FIGS. 178 (1) -2 to (1) -6, icon change animation shown in FIGS. 178 (11) -2 to (11) -9. , Fig. 179 (11) -4'to Fig. (11) -9'], and the second animation starts to be displayed after the display of the third animation is started. A game console characterized in that it is an animation [for example, an icon change animation shown in FIGS. 178 (1) -2 to (1) -6] that may be played. ] Was explained.

According to this game table, the certain display can be noticed.

Here, the first animation is an animation in which the displayed first icon may not be changed to the second icon, and the second animation is the displayed first icon. This is an animation that always changes the icon to the second icon.

Further, the second display may be displayed from the beginning in addition to the case where the second display is changed from the first display by the third animation. That is, the certain display may appear (start display) in the second aspect.

Further, the second animation may be an animation whose display is always started after the display of the third animation is started.

Further, the display of the second animation may be started before the display of the third animation is started. In this case, the first display is displayed, and the third animation displays a second display different from the second display of the second animation that was started earlier. The first display may be changed.

Further, the first display may be started after the display of the third animation is started. In this case, after the first display is displayed, a scene in which the first display is changed to the second display is displayed. Further, the first display may be started at the same time as the display of the third animation, or may be displayed before the display of the third animation is started. There may be.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. Further, the display means may be a means for always displaying the first animation, or may be a means for always displaying the second animation. Further, the first display may be a display that is always displayed during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed.

Further, "The third animation is a decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 176 (11) -1 to (11) -13. The same decorative symbol variation as the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 178 (11) -1 to 179 (11) -13 and the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 179 (11) -4'to (11) -9'. A game console characterized in that the display may start in the display. ] Was also explained.

The display of the third animation may always be started in the same decorative symbol variation display as the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started.

Further, "The third animation is a decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 177 (1) -1 to 178 (4) -2]. A game table characterized in that the display may be started in a decorative symbol variation display different from the above [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 177 (11) -9 to (11) -16]. ] Was also explained.

For example, the third animation may start to be displayed in the decorative symbol variation display before the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started, and the third animation may start to be displayed. The scene changed to the second display in the above and the second animation may be displayed in the same decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed in different decorative symbol variation displays. good. The display of the third animation may always be started in a decorative symbol variation display different from the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started.

Further, "The third animation is an animation in which a mini-game that may succeed or fail is played, and the mini-game succeeds and the first display is changed to the second display. , The display means is a means capable of displaying the fourth animation, in the fourth animation, the mini game is played, the mini game fails, and the first display is the second display. A game table characterized by being an anime that does not change to. ] Was also explained. The display means may be a means for always displaying the fourth animation.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the fifth animation, and the fifth animation is an animation that does not change the first display to the second display, and the fifth animation. The fifth animation is an animation related to a notice [for example, the animation shown in FIGS. 179 (1) -2 to (1) -9], and the fifth animation and the third animation have a certain matter [for example. For example, the point that the white (default) Ninja Navi character NJ is used] is a common animation. ] Was also explained.

Here, the fifth animation may be an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the second icon. Further, as an example of "a certain matter", a character appearing, a background image, a part of a scene, a display having the same color, shape, and size, and the like can be mentioned.

Further, the fifth animation and the third animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the fifth animation and the third animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle. Further, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice regarding a big hit. Further, it may be a notice (for example, a timer notice) that an effect indirectly connected to the big hit is executed without directly connecting to the big hit. The "directing" here may be a highly reliable SP reach directing of a big hit. That is, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice of a big hit. The display means may be a means for always displaying the fifth animation.

In the above description, "A game console provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons, and one of the plurality of types of icons is a hold of the first icon [for example, white (default). The icon h11, the white (default) variable icon h0, and the white meter rising item UpI icon], and one of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, red (look-ahead notice). The hold icon h11 of the aspect), the red variation icon h0, and the icon of the red meter rising item UpIr], and the display means has a first aspect [for example, a white (default) aspect]. It is a means capable of displaying the first animation using the display (hereinafter referred to as "first display") [for example, the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ], and the display means is the second. It is a means capable of displaying a second animation using the certain display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display") [for example, red ninja navigation character NJ] of the aspect [for example, the red aspect]. , The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period during which the decorative icon variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a jackpot game], and the first animation May change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 175 (11) -2 to FIG. (11) -6'' to FIG. (11). The icon change animation shown in -7 and the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 178 (11) -2 to (11) -9], and the second animation is the first icon displayed. Animation to change to the second icon [For example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 176 (11) -2 to (11) -9, the icon shown in FIGS. 178 (1) -2 to (1) -6. Change animation], the display means is a means capable of displaying a sixth animation using the first display, and the sixth animation displays the first icon displayed on the sixth animation. It is an animation that does not change to the second icon, and the sixth animation is an animation related to the notice [for example, the animation shown in FIGS. 179 (1) -2 to (1) -9]. A featured game console. ] Was explained.

Here, the sixth animation is an animation using the first display, but the first display may be an animation that does not change to the second display.

Further, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice regarding a big hit. Further, it may be a notice (for example, a timer notice) that an effect indirectly connected to the big hit is executed without directly connecting to the big hit. The "directing" here may be a highly reliable SP reach directing of a big hit. That is, the "notice" referred to here may be a notice of a big hit.

Further, the sixth animation may be an animation related to a tutorial, not an animation related to a notice. For example, it may be an animation explaining the production, or an animation explaining an operation method (for example, how to hit left or right).

Further, the sixth animation and the first animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, it is common in that the "first display" is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, characters and icons) displayed separately from the "first display". May be common.

Further, the sixth animation and the first animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the sixth animation and the first animation may be animations in which a part including the first portion is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display means may be a means for always displaying the first animation, or may be a means for always displaying the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. The display means may be a means for always displaying a sixth animation using the first display.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the seventh animation using the second display, and the seventh animation uses the displayed first icon as the second icon. The seventh animation is an animation related to a notice, and the seventh animation is more easily displayed than the sixth animation. Game table. ] Was also explained.

Here, the seventh animation and the second animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, it is common in that the "second display" is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, characters and icons) displayed separately from the "second display". May be common. Further, the seventh animation and the second animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the seventh animation and the second animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

In addition, the first animation and the second animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, it is common in that "a certain display" is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, character or icon) displayed separately from "a certain display". May be common. Further, the first animation and the second animation may be animations in which a part of the animation is performed in the same manner. Further, the first animation and the second animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation are animations in which certain matters are common. That is, at least, it is common in that "a certain display" is displayed. In addition, the background image and some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, character or icon) displayed separately from "a certain display". May be common. Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation may be partially performed in the same manner. Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same mode and may be performed in different modes from the middle.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the seventh animation using the second display.

In the above description, the game console is provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons, and one of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon. h11, a white (default) variable icon h0, and a white meter rising item UpI icon], and one of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, red (look-ahead notice). The hold icon h11 of the aspect), the red variation icon h0, and the icon of the red meter rising item UpIr], and the display means has a first aspect [for example, a white (default) aspect]. It is a means capable of displaying the first animation using the display (hereinafter referred to as "first display") [for example, the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ], and the display means is the second. It is a means capable of displaying a second animation using the certain display [for example, the red ninja navigation character NJ] of the aspect [for example, the red aspect], and the first display is a decorative symbol variation display. Is a display that may be displayed during the period when is not performed [for example, during the stop display, during the demonstration, or during the jackpot game], and the first animation is the display of the first icon displayed. Animation that may be changed to the second icon [For example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 175 (11) -2 to (11) -6 "to FIG. (11) -7, FIG. 178 (11). ) -2 to the icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -9], and the second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 176 (11) -2 to the icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -9, and FIG. 178 (1) -2 to the icon change animation shown in FIG. It is a means capable of displaying an eighth animation that does not use a certain display, and the eighth animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 165 (Fig. 165). A) to the animation shown in FIG. 165 (e), the animation shown in FIGS. 165 (A) to (E), and the animation shown in FIGS. 165 (a) to (e)]. The game table. ] Was explained.

Here, the eighth animation is an animation that always changes the displayed first icon to the second icon, and the eighth animation is the displayed first icon. May be an animation that may or may not be changed to the second icon.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display means may be a means for always displaying the first animation, or may be a means for always displaying the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during the period when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed. The display means may be a means for always displaying the eighth animation that does not use the certain display.

Further, "One or more icons may be displayed as the first icon, one or more icons may be displayed as the second icon, and the second icon may be displayed. A game table characterized in that it is an icon with higher reliability as a notice regarding a big hit than the first icon. ] Was also explained.

Here, the first animation may be an animation that may change a plurality of displayed first icons to the second icon, and the second animation is displayed. It may be an animation that changes a plurality of the first icons into the second icons. In addition, one or a plurality of icons may be always displayed as the first icon, and one or a plurality of icons may be always displayed as the second icon.

Further, "One of the plurality of types of icons is a third icon [for example, a blue (look-ahead notice mode) hold icon h11, a blue variable icon h0, and a blue meter rising item UpIb icon. ], And one or more icons may be displayed as the third icon, and the third icon is a more reliable icon as a notice of a big hit than the first icon. Yes, the second icon is an icon having a higher reliability as a notice regarding a big hit than the third icon, and the first animation uses the displayed first icon as the third icon. It is characterized in that it is an animation [for example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 175 (11) -2 to (11) -6'to FIG. Game table. ] Was also explained.

In addition, one or a plurality of icons may be always displayed as the third icon. Further, the first animation may be an animation that always changes the displayed first icon to the third icon.

Further, "The second animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon to the third icon. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the first invariant animation using the first display, and the first invariant animation displays the first display, although the first display is displayed. Animation that fails to change the displayed first icon to the second icon [For example, in FIGS. 175 (11) -2 to (11) -6 to (11) -7. A game table characterized by the fact that it is an animation of icon change failure. ] Was also explained.

Here, the first animation is an animation that may include a scene that succeeds in changing the displayed first icon to the second icon, and the second animation is , Is an animation including a scene that succeeds in changing the displayed first icon to the second icon.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the first particle animation using the first display.

Further, "the first invariant animation is the same animation as the first animation" in the middle [for example, FIGS. 175 (11) -2 to (11) -5]. Game table. ] Was also explained.

Here, the display means is a means capable of displaying a second invariant animation using the second display, and although the second invariant animation displays the second display, It may be an animation that fails to change the displayed first icon to the second icon. Furthermore, the second invariant animation may be the same animation as the second animation up to the middle. Alternatively, conversely, when the second display is displayed, the second animation may be displayed without fail. That is, when the second display is displayed, the first icon may be changed to the second icon without fail.

Further, even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed, and even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed. You may. Further, the failing animation may be an animation in which the effect display is displayed, and the display mode has not changed even though the effect display is displayed. That is, the animation in which the effect display is not displayed and the first icon does not change to the second icon may be excluded. However, the failing animation may include an animation in which the effect display is not displayed and the first icon does not change to the second icon.
Was also explained.

Further, "The display means is a means in which a hold icon may be displayed, the hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds, and the first icon is The first hold icon [for example, the white (default) hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 175 (11) -1 and the like], and the second icon is the second hold icon [for example, FIG. 176 (11)). A game table characterized in that it is a red (look-ahead notice mode) hold icon h1] shown in −8 or the like. ] Was also explained.

Further, "The display means is a means in which a variable icon may be displayed, the variable icon is an icon related to a decorative symbol variable display being executed, and the first icon is the first. Is the variation icon [for example, the white (default) variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 178 (1) -2 and the like], and the second icon is the second variation icon [for example, FIG. 178 (1) -5. A game table characterized in that it is a red variable icon h0] shown in the above. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "The decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the second animation is more final than the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the first animation. A game table characterized in that the big hit symbol mode may be easily displayed in a definite manner. ] Was also explained.

Here, the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the second animation is more final than the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the second icon changed by the first animation. The jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed in a definite manner.

Further, "The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays [for example, FIG. 175 (0) -1 to FIG. (4) -2]. A game table characterized by being. ] Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of times of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that may be displayed during the predetermined number of times of the decorative symbol variation display. The display may be between, or may be a display that may disappear temporarily.

Further, the second display may be a display that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. Further, the second display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of times of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that may be displayed during the predetermined number of times of the decorative symbol variation display. The display may be in between, or may be a display that may disappear temporarily. Further, the certain display may be a display that may be displayed over a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. Further, the certain display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of times of the decorative symbol variation display, or during the predetermined number of times of the decorative symbol variation display. However, it may be a display that may disappear temporarily. It should be noted that the first display may be a display that is always displayed straddling a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays.

In addition, "In a certain period, the first display may be displayed, and the certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the number of holds is 0 [for example, the figure. 177 (0) -1, Fig. (0) -8]. ] Was also explained.

Here, in a certain period, the second display may be displayed, and the certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the number of holds is 0. good. The first display may always be displayed during the certain period.

Further, "the game table is characterized in that one or more of the color, the pattern, the size, and the shape are different between the first aspect and the second aspect. ] Was also explained.

Therefore, only one of the colors, patterns, sizes, and shapes may be different, all may be different, or a combination of two or three may be different. May be good.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100]. ] Was also explained.

Here, the operation means provided at a position where the player can operate is provided, and the first aspect is an aspect including a display relating to the operation means, and during the display of the first display, When the operation means is operated, the display may change from the first display to the second display.

Further, before the display of the first animation is started, it may be notified that the displayed first icon is in a state where it is easily changed.

Further, one of the plurality of types of icons is a fourth icon, and the fourth icon is an icon in a display mode suggesting that the icon itself may change, and the fourth icon. Icon may change to the second icon in the animation using the certain display. The animation using the certain display may be the first animation, the second animation, or other animation.

Further, one of the plurality of types of icons is a fifth icon, and the fifth icon is an icon in a display mode indicating that the fourth icon has failed to change. The fourth icon may change to the fifth icon in the animation using the certain display. The animation using the certain display may be the first animation, the second animation, or other animation.

The display means is a means capable of displaying the second invariant animation using the second display, and the second invariant animation displays the second display although it is displayed. It may be an animation that fails to change the first icon to the second icon.

Here, on the contrary, when the second display is displayed, the second animation may be displayed without fail. That is, when the second display is displayed, the first icon may be changed to the second icon without fail.

Further, even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed, and even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed. You may.

Further, the second immutable animation may be the same animation as the second animation until the middle.

Further, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 200. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 181 to 200 are used only for the description of the examples shown in FIGS. Priority is given to the symbols shown in 181 to FIG. 200.

First, with reference to FIG. 181 (1), the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example will be described. At the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, and the normal figure hold number aa5. , The fourth symbol aa6 of the general drawing is displayed. Special figure 1 hold number aa1 is a display indicating the number of holds in special figure 1 by a number, special figure 2 hold number aa3 is a display showing the number of hold in special figure 2 by a number, and special figure 2 hold number aa5 is a display representing a normal figure. It is a display showing the number of holdings of. Further, a variable icon display area c capable of displaying a variable icon is provided in the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The right side of the variable icon display area c is the hold icon display area. In the example shown in FIG. 181 (1), the special figure 1 hold icon a1, a2, a3, a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1, b2, b3 Are displayed side by side in this order so as to alternate from the left. The pachinko machine 100 of this example is a winning order variable machine in which a mechanism for alternately winning a game ball at the special drawing 1 starting port and the special drawing 2 starting port is provided on the game board, and the hold is exhausted in the winning order. .. Further, a horizontally long rectangular display area d is provided at the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A tutorial display, a message display, or the like is displayed in the display area d, and a character string image of "preparing" is displayed when there is no particular content to be displayed.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 (1) to 181 (38). FIGS. 181 (1) to 181 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. FIG. 181 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 8", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 181 (2) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the fourth symbol are started as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). There is. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 displayed in the hold icon display area becomes the change icon c1 and moves to the change icon display area c. Then, the special figure 1 hold icon a2 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 move to the left.

FIG. 181 (3) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays prompting the player to operate the chance button 136.

FIG. 181 (4) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 181 (5) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be started, or the conversation notice display may not be started with a predetermined probability.

FIG. 181 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the character image of the grandfather (hereinafter referred to as "grandfather") g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 181 (7) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 181 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 181 (9) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the character image of the palace (hereinafter referred to as “the palace”) g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 181 (10) shows a state in which the palace g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to 181 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display the movement animation of the character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including the palace g1 and the grandfather g2.

FIG. 181 (11) shows a state in which the character name display (hereinafter, referred to as “character name display”) h1 including the character image of “Den” is started to be displayed. The character name display h1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h1 is moving to the left. FIG. 181 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 181 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 181 (14) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 181 (15) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the palace g1, and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the palace g1.

FIG. 181 (16) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the palace g1, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i1. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 181 (16), the character image of "horse" is displayed.

FIG. 181 (17) shows a state in which the serif display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 181 (17), the character string image of "morning" is displayed.

FIG. 181 (18) shows a state in which a serif display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 181 (18), a character string image of "morning weather is" is displayed.

FIG. 181 (19) shows a state in which the display of the serif display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of "morning weather is" and a symbol of "sun mark" are displayed as dialogue display.

FIG. 181 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed.

FIG. 181 (21) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 181 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. good.

FIG. 181 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the grandfather g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 181 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 181 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 181 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 181 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped.

FIG. 181 (28) shows a state in which the character name h2 including the character image of “old man” is started to be displayed. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 181 (29) shows a state in which the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 181 (30) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 181 (31) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 181 (32) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above the grandfather g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 181 (33) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the grandfather g2, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i2. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 181 (33), the character image of "O" is displayed.

FIG. 181 (34) shows a state in which the serif display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 181 (34), the character string image of "lunch" is displayed.

FIG. 181 (35) shows a state in which the serif display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 181 (35), a character string image of "the weather at noon" is displayed.

FIG. 181 (36) shows a state in which the display of the serif display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of "the weather at noon" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed as dialogue display.

FIG. 181 (37) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a after the conversation notice display is completed.

FIG. 181 (38) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c after the conversation notice display is completed. Although the following illustrations are omitted, in this example, the reach effect of "decoration 7" is started after this. The reach effect may not be started after the conversation notice display is completed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example has a first display (first serif notice display shown in FIG. 181 (19)) and a second display (second serif shown in FIG. 181 (36)). Notice display) can be displayed. The first display includes the palace g1 displayed in FIG. 181 (19), the balloon display i1, the dialogue display in the balloon display i1, and the character name display h1. The second display includes the old man g2, the balloon display i2, the dialogue display in the balloon display i2, and the character name display h2, which are displayed in FIG. 181 (36). The first display and the second display display the first conversation notice display. In addition, the first display and the second display of this example are notice displays of the change. Further, in this example, the first display is displayed after the grandfather g2 is displayed in FIGS. 181 (6) to (8). The old man g2 may be displayed before the display of the first display. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the player can expect that the second display may be displayed by notifying that the second display including the grandfather g2 will be displayed. It may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 (1) to 182 (38). FIGS. 182 (1) to 182 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 182 (1) to 182 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the palace g1 is displayed. The palace g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIGS. 182 (7) to 182 (10) show a state in which the palace g1 is moving to the left.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 182 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, before the dialogue display of the palace is displayed in FIG. 182 (19), the palace g1 is displayed from the beginning, and other characters such as the grandfather g2 are not displayed. In this way, the old man g2 may not be displayed before the display of the first display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 (1) to (38). FIGS. 183 (1) to 183 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 183 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 183 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the character image of the princess (hereinafter referred to as "princess") g3 is displayed. The princess g3 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 183 (24) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 183 (25) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 183 (26) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the grandfather g2 while the princess g3 is moving to the right. Old man g2 is moving to the right.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 183 (27) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (27) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 183 (36). According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the characters are different when the second display is displayed by giving a false notice to display the princess g3 that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 183 (36). It may be possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the player.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 (1) to (38). FIGS. 184 (1) to 184 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 184 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 184 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the princess g3 is first displayed. The princess g3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 184 (7) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 184 (8) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 184 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the palace g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 184 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 184 (10). According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the characters are different when the first display is displayed by giving a false notice to display the princess g3 that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 184 (10). It may be possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the player.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 (1) to (38). FIGS. 185 (1) to 185 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 185 (1) to (25) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (25), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 185 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the old man g2 is moving to the right. Princess g3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 185 (27) shows a state in which the princess g3 is stopped.

FIG. 185 (28) shows a state in which the character name h3 including the character image of “princess” is started to be displayed. The character name display h3 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 185 (29) shows a state in which the balloon display i3 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 is moving to the right.

FIG. 185 (30) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the right.

FIG. 185 (31) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the right.

FIG. 185 (32) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the left side of the princess g3.

FIG. 185 (33) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the princess g3, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i3. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 185 (33), the character image of "afternoon" is displayed. FIG. 185 (34) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 185 (34), a character string image of “afternoon weather” is displayed.

FIG. 185 (35) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 185 (35), a character string image of “afternoon weather” is displayed.

FIG. 185 (36) shows a state in which the display of the serif display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character image of "afternoon weather" and a symbol of "rain mark" are displayed as dialogue display.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 185 (37) and 185 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (37) and 181 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example has a first display (first serif notice display shown in FIG. 185 (19)) and a second display (second serif shown in FIG. 185 (36)). Notice display) can be displayed. The first display includes the palace g1 displayed in FIG. 185 (19), the balloon display i1, the dialogue display in the balloon display i1, and the character name display h1. The second display includes the princess g3, the balloon display i3, the dialogue display in the balloon display i3, and the character name display h3, which are displayed in FIG. 185 (36). The first display and the second display display the first conversation notice display. In addition, the first display and the second display of this example are notice displays of the change. Further, in this example, after the grandfather g2 is displayed in FIGS. 185 (6) to (8), the grandfather g2 is displayed in FIGS. 185 (23) to (25). ) Is a notice that does not appear in the conversation notice display. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, it is possible to surprise the player by making a different character when the conversation notice display is displayed by performing a hobby notice that displays the old man g2 that does not appear in the conversation notice display. , It may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 186 (1) to (38). FIGS. 186 (1) to 186 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 186 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 186 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the old man g2 is first displayed. The old man g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 186 (7) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 186 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 186 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the palace g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 186 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 186 (6) to (10), the character image changes twice during the character movement animation (during the movement display), and the movement display of the three character images is displayed. In this example, the grandfather g2, the princess g3, and the palace g1 are displayed in this order, but the princess g3, the grandfather g2, and the palace g1 may be displayed in this order. Further, the number of character images displayed during the moving display of the character image may be four or more.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 (1) to (38). FIGS. 187 (1) to 187 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 187 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the palace g1 is displayed. The palace g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 187 (7) shows a state in which the palace g1 is changed to the grandfather g2 while the palace g1 is moving to the left. Old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 187 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 187 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the palace g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 187 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (10) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 187 (6) to 187 (10), three characters make a round in the order of the character image, the palace g1, the grandfather g2, the princess g3, and the palace g1 during the character movement animation display. Is displayed. It should be noted that during the character movement animation display, four or more characters may be displayed so as to make one round, or one and a half rounds may be made. Further, a plurality of character images may be displayed so as to make a round during the character movement animation display shown in FIGS. 187 (23) to 187 (27).

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 (1) to (38). FIGS. 187 (1) to 187 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 187 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 188 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the palace g1 is displayed. The palace g1 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 188 (7) shows a state in which the palace g1 is changed to the grandfather g2 while the palace g1 is moving to the left. Old man g2 is moving to the left. It should be noted that the palace g1 may be changed to the grandfather g2 when the entire palace g1 shown in FIG. 188 (6) is not displayed.

FIG. 188 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the princess g3 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 188 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the grandfather g2 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 188 (10) shows a state in which the palace g1 is stopped after the grandfather g2 is changed to the palace g1 while the grandfather g2 is moving to the left. It should be noted that the grandfather g2 may change to g1 after or at the same time as the stop.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 188 (11) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (11) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 188 (6) to (10), three characters make a round in the order of the character image, the palace g1, the grandfather g2, the princess g3, the grandfather g2, and the palace g1 during the character movement animation display. Is displayed. The character may change in the order of princess g1, grandfather g2, and princess g3, and then change in the reverse direction in the order of princess g3, grandfather g2, and princess g1. During the character movement animation display, four or more characters may make a round and be displayed so as to change in the opposite direction to the round. Further, during the character movement animation display shown in FIGS. 188 (23) to (27), a display in which the character changes as shown in FIGS. 188 (6) to (10) may be displayed.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 (1) to (38). FIGS. 189 (1) to 189 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 189 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 189 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the old man g2 is first displayed. The old man g2 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 189 (7) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the old man g2 changes is displayed while the old man g2 is moving to the left. In this way, an animation in which the aspect of the grandfather g2 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 189 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the palace g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 189 (9) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the palace g1 changes is displayed while the palace g1 is moving to the left. In this way, an animation in which the mode of the palace 1 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the palace g1.

FIG. 189 (10) shows a state in which the palace g1 is stopped after the facial expression of the palace g1 is changed. An animation may be displayed in which the facial expression of the palace g1 changes after the palace g1 stops or at the same time as the palace g1 stops. Further, in this example, in the movement animation of the character, the display period of the palace g1 displayed in the conversation notice shown in FIG. 189 (19) is longer than the display period of the grandfather g2. As described above, in the movement animation of the character, the display period of the character displayed in the conversation notice display may be the longest.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 189 (11) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (11) to (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 189 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the grandfather g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 189 (24) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the old man g2 changes is displayed while the old man g2 is moving to the right. In this way, an animation in which the aspect of the grandfather g2 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 189 (25) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the old man g2 changes is displayed while the old man g2 is moving to the right. In this way, an animation in which the aspect of the grandfather g2 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the grandfather g2. FIG. 189 (26) shows a state in which an animation in which the facial expression of the old man g2 changes is displayed while the old man g2 is moving to the right. In this way, an animation in which the mode of the palace 1 changes may be displayed during the movement animation of the palace g1.

FIG. 189 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped. An animation may be displayed in which the facial expression of the grandfather g2 changes after the grandfather g2 stops or at the same time as the grandfather g2 stops.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 189 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (38) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. As in this example, a display in which the character's mode (for example, facial expression) changes may be displayed while the character's movement animation is displayed.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 (1) to 190 (40). FIGS. 190 (1) to 190 (40) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the state shown in FIG. 190 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 184 (36), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 190 (2) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 190 (3) shows a state in which "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 190 (4) shows a state in which a pseudo-ream decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208a. The decorative design of the pseudo-ren is displayed when the effect display of the pseudo-ren is performed. The pseudo-ream is an effect of performing a pseudo-variation as if the change display of the decorative symbol was performed a plurality of times during one special figure change game, and is a notice effect of the change. After the decorative symbol of the pseudo-ren is displayed, the second variation display of the decorative symbol (the second of the pseudo-ren) is started.

FIG. 190 (5) shows a state in which the second pseudo-ream has been started. Further, the movable body 700 has moved upward and stopped. Further, during the second execution of the pseudo-ream, "x2" is displayed in the display area d, and it is notified that the second pseudo-ream is being executed.

FIG. 190 (6) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays prompting the player to operate the chance button 136.

FIG. 190 (7) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 190 (8) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the second conversation notice display is started. The first conversation notice display is the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 190 (1). If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the second conversation notice display may be started, or the second conversation notice display may not be started with a predetermined probability. You may.

FIG. 190 (9) shows a state in which the second conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the princess g3 is first displayed. The princess g3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 190 (10) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 190 (11) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 190 (12) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 190 (13) shows a state in which the princess g3 is stopped. The character movement animations shown in FIGS. 190 (9) to (13) are shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to (10), 183 (6) to (10), 184 (6) to (10), and FIGS. 185 (6) to (10), FIGS. 186 (6) to (10), 187 (6) to (10), 188 (6) to (10), and 189 (6) to (10). An animation similar to the animation may be displayed.

FIG. 190 (14) shows a state in which the character name display h3 is started to be displayed. The character name display h3 appears from above the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 190 (15) shows a state in which the balloon display i3 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 is moving to the left.

FIG. 190 (16) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the left.

FIG. 190 (17) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the left.

FIG. 190 (18) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the right side of the princess g3.

FIG. 190 (19) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the princess g3, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i3. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 190 (19), a character image of "horse" is displayed.

FIG. 190 (20) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 190 (21), the character string image of "afternoon" is displayed.

FIG. 190 (21) shows a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 190 (21), a character string image of "afternoon weather" is displayed.

FIG. 190 (22) shows a state in which the display of the serif display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character string image of "afternoon weather" and a symbol of "rain mark" are displayed as dialogue display.

FIG. 190 (23) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed.

FIG. 190 (24) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 190 (25) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. good.

FIG. 190 (26) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the grandfather g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 190 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 190 (28) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 190 (29) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 190 (30) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped.

FIG. 190 (31) shows a state in which the character name h2 including the character image of "old man" is started to be displayed. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 190 (32) shows a state in which the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 is moving to the right.

FIG. 190 (33) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 190 (34) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 190 (35) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above the grandfather g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of the grandfather g2.

FIG. 190 (36) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the grandfather g2, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i2. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 190 (36), the character image of "O" is displayed.

FIG. 190 (37) shows a state in which the serif display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 190 (37), a character string image of "lunch" is displayed.

FIG. 190 (38) shows a state in which the serif display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 190 (38), a character string image of "the weather at noon" is displayed.

FIG. 190 (39) shows a state in which the display of the serif display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of "the weather at noon" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed as dialogue display. Further, the aspect of the balloon display i2 has changed from white to blue, and the aspect of the character name display h2 has changed from white to blue. The jackpot reliability is set higher for blue than for white. In this way, in the second conversation notice display, a display with high jackpot reliability may be displayed.

FIG. 190 (40) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c after the conversation notice display is completed. Although the following illustrations are omitted, in this example, the reach effect of "decoration 7" is started after this.

In this example, after the first conversation notice display (first conversation notice display) shown in FIG. 190 (1) is displayed, the second conversation notice display (second conversation notice display) is displayed as shown in FIG. 190 (39). Conversation notice display) is displayed. In this way, a plurality of conversation notice displays may be displayed within one special figure variation game. It should be noted that the higher the number of conversation notice displays, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 (1) to 191 (38). FIGS. 191 (1) to 191 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 191 (1) to 191 (15) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (15), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 191 (16) to 191 (18) show a state in which the movement display (movement animation) of the dialogue display is displayed. The serif display is moving from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the inside of the balloon display h1 on the left side. In this way, the movement animation of the dialogue display may be displayed.

FIG. 191 (19) shows a state in which the serif display is stopped in the balloon display h1.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 191 (20) to (32) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (20) to (32), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 191 (33) to 191 (35) show a state in which the movement display (movement animation) of the dialogue display is displayed. The serif display is moving from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the inside of the balloon display h2 on the left side. In this way, the movement animation of the dialogue display may be displayed.

FIG. 191 (36) shows a state in which the serif display is stopped in the balloon display h1.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 191 (37) and 191 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (37) and 181 (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the movement animation of the dialogue display is displayed. In this way, the movement animation of the dialogue display may be displayed.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 (1) to (38). FIGS. 192 (1) to 192 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 192 (1) to 192 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the old man g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 192 (7) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 192 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 192 (9) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the character image of the palace (hereinafter referred to as “the palace”) g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 192 (10) shows a state in which the palace g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 192 (6) to 192 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display the movement animation of the character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including the palace g1 and the grandfather g2.

FIG. 192 (11) shows a state in which the character name display (hereinafter, referred to as “character name display”) h1 including the character image of “Den” is started to be displayed. The character name display h1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 192 (12) shows a state in which the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 192 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 192 (14) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 192 (15) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the palace g1, and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the palace g1.

FIG. 192 (16) shows a state in which the dialogue display, which is the dialogue (line) of the palace g1, is started to be displayed in the balloon display i1. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 192 (16), a character image of "horse" is displayed.

FIG. 192 (17) shows a state in which the serif display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 192 (17), the character string image of "morning" is displayed.

FIG. 192 (18) shows a state in which the serif display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 192 (18), a character string image of "morning weather is" is displayed.

FIG. 192 (19) shows a state in which the display of the serif display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of "morning weather is" and a symbol of "sun mark" are displayed as dialogue display. In this example, as compared with FIG. 181 (19), the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 192 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

FIG. 192 (21) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing.

FIG. 192 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. good.

FIG. 192 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the grandfather g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time as the appearance of the old man g2, an animation is displayed in which the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of the old man g2 or after the appearance of the old man g2.

FIG. 192 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward. In addition, the old man g2 is displayed overlapping the palace g1 and a part of the balloon display h1.

FIG. 192 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward.

FIG. 192 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward.

FIG. 192 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped, the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are stopped.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 192 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (28) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the first display such as the grand j1 is moved at the start of the display of the second display such as the old man g2 in the conversation notice display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 (1) to (38). FIGS. 193 (1) to 193 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 193 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 192 (1) to (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 193 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the grandfather g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time as the appearance of the old man g2, an animation is displayed in which the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of the old man g2 or after the appearance of the old man g2.

FIG. 193 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward. In addition, the old man g2 is displayed overlapping the palace g1 and a part of the balloon display h1. FIG. 193 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward.

FIG. 193 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 has moved to the right, and the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display have stopped.

FIG. 193 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped.

In the states shown in FIGS. 193 (28) to (32), as in the states shown in FIGS. 181 (28) to (32), an animation in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 move to the left is displayed. In this example, the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are displayed overlapping with the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display. In this example, the moving animation of the second display such as the grandfather g2 in the conversation notice display overlaps with the first display such as the palace j1 and is displayed.

FIGS. 193 (32) to (35) show a state in which a serif display is displayed in the balloon display h2, similar to the state shown in FIGS. 181 (32) to (35).

FIG. 193 (36) shows a state in which the display of the serif display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of "the weather at noon" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed as dialogue display. In this example, the dialogue display in the balloon display h2 and the balloon display h2 is displayed so as to overlap the dialogue display in the balloon display h1 and the balloon display h1.

Since the states shown in FIGS. 193 (37) and 193 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 193 (37) and (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the second display of the old man g2 and the like in the conversation notice display overlaps with the first display of the palace j1 and the like.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 (1) to (38). FIGS. 194 (1) to 194 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 194 (1) to 194 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 194 (6) to 194 (10) show a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed as in FIGS. 181 (6) to (10). In this example, the display sizes of the old man g2 and the old man g1 are displayed in a larger size than the examples shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to (10).

FIGS. 194 (11) to 194 (19) show a state in which the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are displayed as in FIGS. 181 (11) to (19). In this example, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are displayed in a larger size than the examples shown in FIGS. 181 (11) to (19).

FIG. 194 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 showing an operation valid period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

FIG. 194 (21) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period shown by the meter image f2 is decreasing. FIG. 194 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. good.

FIG. 194 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the grandfather g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the same time as the appearance of the old man g2, an animation is displayed in which the display size of the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of the old man g2 or after the appearance of the old man g2.

FIG. 194 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and an animation in which the display size of the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced is displayed.

FIG. 194 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and an animation in which the display size of the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced is displayed.

FIG. 194 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 moves to the right, and an animation in which the display size of the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced is displayed.

FIG. 194 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped and the animation in which the display size of the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced is completed. The display sizes of the palace g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are the same as those shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to (36).

Since the states shown in FIGS. 194 (28) to 194 (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 181 (28) to (38), the description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the first display of the grandfather g1 etc. in the conversation notice display is enlarged and displayed until the second display of the grandfather g2 etc. is started, and the grandfather g1 etc. is displayed during the movement animation of the grandfather g2. The first display is reduced. In the state shown in FIG. 194 (36), a part of the balloon display h1 may be displayed overlapping with a part of the balloon display h2. In this case, the display size of the balloon display h1 is the balloon display. The display size may overlap with a part of h2.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 (1) to (38). FIGS. 195 (1) to 195 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. In FIGS. 195 (1) to 195 (38), the same effect as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 192 (1) to (38) is performed. Therefore, the detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example will be omitted.

FIG. 195 (1) shows the same state as in FIG. 192 (1).

FIG. 195 (2) shows a state in which the timer notice display j is started to be displayed. In the timer notice display j, a character string image of "Attention!" Is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame. The timer notice display j performs a countdown display for a predetermined time, and when the countdown reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect (for example, an operation of a movable body or a predetermined notice display) is performed. Before the countdown is started, a character string image of "Attention!" Is displayed in the timer notice display j.

FIGS. 195 (3) and 195 (4) show the same state as in FIGS. 192 (3) and 192 (4) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.

FIG. 195 (5) shows the same state as in FIG. 192 (5).

FIG. 195 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started as in FIG. 192 (6). In this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also started at the same time as the start of the conversation notice display. In this example, a 40-second countdown display is performed.

In FIGS. 195 (6) to 195 (19), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 192 (6) to (19), and in this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 195 (6) to (19), the timer notice display j is displayed so as to overlap with the characters of the lord g1 and the grandfather g2, the character name display h1, the balloon display i1, and the dialogue display. For example, in FIG. 195 (14) and later, the entire character name display h1 is displayed overlapping with the timer notice display j, and the character name display h1 is invisible.

FIGS. 195 (20) and 195 (21) show the same state as FIGS. 192 (20) and (21) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.

FIG. 195 (22) shows the same state as in FIG. 192 (5).

FIG. 195 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued as in FIG. 192 (23). Further, in FIG. 192 (23), the remaining time of the countdown display of the timer notice display j is 36.99 seconds.

In FIGS. 195 (24) to 195 (36), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 192 (24) to (36), and in this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 195 (24) to (36), the timer notice display j is displayed so as to overlap with the character of the grandfather g2, the character name display h2, the balloon display i2, and the dialogue display. For example, in FIG. 195 (30), the entire character name display h2 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display j, and the character name display h2 is invisible.

FIGS. 195 (37) and 195 (38) show the same state as in FIGS. 192 (37) and 192 (38) except that the timer notice display j is displayed. In this way, the timer notice display j may be displayed together with the conversation notice display. Instead of the timer notice display j, another display (ball removal error display, door opening error display, other notice display, hold icon change effect display) or the like may be displayed. Further, as shown in the timer notice display j, the length of the display period of the character movement animation shown in FIGS. 195 (6) to (10) is the length of the display period of the character movement animation shown in FIGS. It is shorter than the length of the display period of the conversation notice display including the display h1, the balloon display i1, and the dialogue notice display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 (1) to (38). FIGS. 196 (1) to 196 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. In FIGS. 195 (1) to 195 (38), the same effect as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 192 (1) to (38) is performed. Therefore, the detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example will be omitted.

FIG. 196 (1) shows the same state as in FIG. 192 (1).

FIG. 196 (2) shows a state in which the movable body k is moved to a position in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the movable body k is moved before the display of the conversation notice display is started. The movable body k may move back and forth in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, such as up, down, left, and right, or may perform a vibration operation. In this example, the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the start of the symbol variation display to the start of the reach effect.

FIGS. 196 (3) and 196 (4) show the same state as in FIGS. 192 (3) and 192 (4), except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIGS. 195 (3) and 195 (4), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.

FIG. 196 (5) shows the same state as in FIG. 192 (5).

In FIGS. 196 (6) to 196 (19), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 192 (6) to (19). At least a part of h1, the balloon display i1, and the dialogue display becomes invisible to the player.

FIGS. 196 (20) and 196 (21) show the same state as in FIGS. 192 (3) and 192 (4), except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIGS. 196 (20) and 196 (21), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.

FIG. 196 (22) shows the same state as in FIG. 192 (22).

FIG. 196 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued as in FIG. 192 (23). In FIGS. 196 (24) to (36), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 192 (24) to (36). At least a part of h1, h2, balloon display i1, i2, and dialogue display becomes invisible to the player.

FIG. 196 (37) shows the same state as in FIG. 192 (37) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 196 (38) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. When the reach effect is started, the movable body k moves from the position in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and returns to the initial position. In this way, the movement effect of the movable body k may be performed together with the conversation notice display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 (1) to (38). FIGS. 197 (1) to 197 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. In FIGS. 197 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 192 (1) to (38) is performed. Therefore, the detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example will be omitted.

FIG. 197 (1) shows the same state as that of FIG. 192 (1).

FIG. 197 (2) shows a state in which the pattern display m is displayed by the light guide plate arranged in front of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the pachinko machine 100 of this example, a light guide plate is arranged in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the pattern display m can be displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate. As shown in FIGS. 197 (2) to (37), the pattern display m is displayed so as to overlap the display on the decorative pattern display device 208. For example, as shown in FIG. 197 (36), the pattern display m is displayed so as to overlap with the first display such as the palace g1 and the second display such as the grandfather g2.

FIG. 197 (38) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. When the reach effect is started, the pattern display m is erased. In this way, the display by the light guide plate may be displayed together with the conversation notice display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 (1) to 198 (38). FIGS. 198 (1) to 198 (38) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since FIGS. 198 (1) to (5) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 198 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character image is displayed in a square frame, and the inside of the square frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The colors in the square frame are set to white, blue, and green in ascending order of jackpot reliability. In FIG. 198 (6), the inside of the square frame surrounding the grandfather g2 is displayed in white. The conversation notice display of this example is the same as the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 181 except that the character is displayed in the square frame.

FIG. 198 (7) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

FIG. 198 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in green.

FIG. 198 (9) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the palace g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. Tono g1 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding the palace g1 is displayed in blue.

FIG. 198 (10) shows a state in which the palace g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 199 (6) to 199 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display the movement animation of the character. The movement animation of the character in this example is a display including the palace g1 and the grandfather g2. The inside of the square frame surrounding the palace g1 is displayed in white. In this way, the inside of the square frame surrounding the character changes in the order of white, blue, green, blue, and white. The order of color changes can be set arbitrarily. This color change is performed during the character movement animation.

The states shown in FIGS. 198 (11) to 198 (21) are shown in FIGS. 181 (11) to (21) except that the palace g1 is surrounded by a square frame and the inside of the frame is white. ) Is the same as the state shown in), so the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 198 (22) shows a state in which the player is operating the chance button 136.

FIG. 198 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the grandfather g2 is displayed. The old man g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in white.

FIG. 198 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

FIG. 198 (25) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in green.

FIG. 198 (26) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving to the right. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue. FIG. 198 (27) shows a state in which the old man g2 is stopped. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

The states shown in FIGS. 198 (28) to (36) are shown in FIGS. 181 (28) to (36) except that the old man g2 is surrounded by a square frame and the inside of the frame is blue. ) Is the same as the state shown in), so the description thereof will be omitted.

198 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 181 (37) and (38). In this example, the character of the conversation notice display is displayed in the frame, and the inside of the frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The jackpot reliability is set by the color in the frame.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 (a1) to 199 (a20). FIGS. 199 (a1) to 199 (a20) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since FIGS. 199 (a1) to 199 (a5) show the same states as those shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 199 (a6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character and the character name display are started to be displayed at the same time. In FIG. 199 (a6), the old man g2 and the character name display h1 are moved to the left. Unlike the character, the character name display displays the character name of the conversation notice display from the beginning.

FIG. 199 (a7) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h1 are moving to the left. In addition, the balloon display i1 has started to be displayed.

FIG. 199 (a8) shows a state in which the grandfather g2, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 199 (a9) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the palace g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. The lord g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

FIG. 199 (a10) shows a state in which the palace g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. As described above, in the conversation notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

199 (a11) to (a13) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 181 (20) to (22).

FIG. 199 (a14) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character and the character name display are started to be displayed at the same time. In FIG. 199 (a12), the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the left.

FIG. 199 (a15) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moving to the right.

FIG. 199 (a16) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moving to the right. In addition, the balloon display i2 has started to be displayed.

FIG. 199 (a17) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right. FIG. 199 (a18) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are stopped. As described above, in the conversation notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h2 or the balloon display i2 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

199 (a19) and (a20) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 181 (37) and (38). As in this example, the movement animation of the character name display or the balloon display may be displayed during the movement animation of the character. Further, the balloon displays i1 and i2 may include the serif display from the beginning of the display.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 (b1) to (b20). FIGS. 199 (b1) to 199 (b20) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. Since FIGS. 199 (b1) to (b5) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 181 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 199 (b6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character and the character name display are started to be displayed at the same time. In FIG. 199 (b6), the old man g2 and the character name display h1 are moved to the left. Unlike the character, the character name display displays the character name of the conversation notice display from the beginning. Further, in this example, three square images are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction below the character. The insides of the three square images are displayed in white, blue, and green, respectively. At the time shown in FIG. 199 (b6), a square image on the left and a part of the square image in the middle are displayed. The square image on the left is white and the square image in the middle is blue. These square images also move to the left with the character.

FIG. 199 (b7) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h1 are moving to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 199 (b7), the left square image, the middle square image, and a part of the right square image are displayed. The left square image is blue, the middle square image is green, and the right square image is white. The display color of these square images changes as they move.

FIG. 199 (b8) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 199 (b8), the left square image is green, the middle square image is white, and the right square image is blue.

FIG. 199 (b9) shows a state in which the old man g2 is changed to the palace g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. The lord g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 199 (b9), the left square image is white, the middle square image is blue, and the right square image is green.

FIG. 199 (b10) shows a state in which the palace g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. In addition, the frame of the palace g1 is displayed surrounded by a white frame display. In this way, in the conversation notice display, a frame surrounding the character is displayed in one of the colors of the three squares displayed during the movement animation of the character. The display colors in the frame surrounding the character are white, blue, and green in ascending order of jackpot reliability.

199 (b11) to (b13) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 181 (20) to (22).

FIG. 199 (b14) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character and the character name display are started to be displayed at the same time. In FIG. 199 (b12), the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moved to the left. The inside of the character name display h2 is displayed in blue. Further, in this example, three square images are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction below the character. The insides of the three square images are displayed in white, blue, and green, respectively. At the time shown in FIG. 199 (b14), a square image on the right side and a part of the square image in the middle are displayed. The square image on the right is green and the square image in the middle is white. These square images also move to the right with the character.

FIG. 199 (b15) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moving to the right. At the time shown in FIG. 199 (b7), a square image on the right side, a square image in the middle, and a part of the square image on the left side are displayed. The square image on the right is white, the square image in the middle is green, and the square image on the left is blue. The display color of these square images changes as they move.

FIG. 199 (b16) shows a state in which the old man g2 and the character name display h2 are moving to the right. In addition, the balloon display i2 has started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 is displayed in blue. At the time shown in FIG. 199 (b16), the square image on the right is blue, the square image in the middle is white, and the square image on the left is green. The display color of these square images changes as they move.

FIG. 199 (b17) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right. At the time shown in FIG. 199 (b17), the square image on the right is green, the square image in the middle is blue, and the square image on the left is white.

FIG. 199 (b18) shows a state in which the old man g2, the character name display h2, and the balloon display i2 are stopped. In addition, the old man g2 is displayed with the inside of the frame surrounded by a blue frame display. In addition, the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are also displayed in blue. These display colors are white, blue, and green in ascending order of jackpot reliability.

199 (b19) and (b20) show the same state as shown in FIGS. 181 (37) and (38). The three square images displayed during the movement animation of the character are candidate display of the display color in the frame surrounded after the character is stopped. As in this example, display color candidates in the frame surrounded after the character is stopped may be displayed during the character movement animation.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 (a1) to 200 (a5). FIGS. 200 (a1) to 200 (a5) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. FIGS. 200 (a1) to 200 (a5) show movement animations of the characters shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to (10) and the like.

FIG. 200 (a1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is started. Old man g2 appears and is moving to the left.

FIG. 200 (a2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Old man g2 is moving to the left.

FIG. 200 (a3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. While moving to the left of the old man g2, the lord g1 is displayed. The palace g1 is displayed on the left side of the old man g2, and a part of the old man g2 is displayed overlapping with the old man g2. In addition, for example, the transmittance of g1 is displayed as 50%. Both the lord g1 and the grandfather g2 move to the left.

FIG. 200 (a4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. A part of the old man g2 is displayed overlapping with the old man g1. Further, the old man g2 is displayed, for example, with a transmittance of 50%. Both the lord g1 and the grandfather g2 move to the left.

FIG. 200 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is completed. The old man g2 is erased at the end of the movement animation.

As in this example, the number of characters may increase during the movement animation of the characters. In this example, the number of characters is increased by one, but may be two or more. Further, the character may be displayed with a transmittance of 1 to 99% during the movement animation of the character. Further, one character may be displayed so as to overlap the entire other characters.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 (b1) to (b5). FIGS. 200 (b1) to 200 (b5) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. 200 (b1) to (b5) show the character movement animations shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to (10) and the like.

FIG. 200 (b1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is started. Tono g1 and grandfather g2 have appeared and are moving to the left. The palace g1 is displayed on the left side of the old man g2, and a part of the old man g2 is displayed overlapping with the old man g2.

FIG. 200 (b2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Tono g1 and grandfather g2 are moving to the left. A part of the old man g2 is displayed overlapping with the palace g1.

FIG. 200 (b3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Tono g1 and grandfather g2 are moving to the left. A part of the palace g1 is displayed overlapping with the old man g2.

FIG. 200 (a4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Tono g1 and grandfather g2 are moving to the left. A part of the old man g2 is displayed overlapping with the palace g1.

FIG. 200 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is completed. The old man g2 is erased at the end of the movement animation.

As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation. Overlapping characters may alternate between one character and another.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 (c1) to 200 (c5). FIGS. 200 (c1) to 200 (c5) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. 200 (c1) to (c5) show movement animations of the characters shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to (10) and the like.

FIG. 200 (c1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is started. The lord g1, the grandfather g2, and the princess g3 have appeared and are moving to the left.

FIG. 200 (c2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Princess g3 has been erased. FIG. 200 (c3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. The old man g2 has been erased.

FIG. 200 (c4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Tono g1 is moving to the left.

FIG. 200 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is completed. The old man g2 is erased at the end of the movement animation.

As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, the characters may be erased one by one during the character movement animation, and one character may remain at the end.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 (d1) to (d5). FIGS. 200 (d1) to 200 (d5) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. 200 (d1) to (d5) show the movement animation of the character shown in FIGS. 181 (6) to (10) and the like.

FIG. 200 (d1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is started. The lord g1, the grandfather g2, and the princess g3 have appeared and are moving to the left.

FIG. 200 (d2) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Chibi princess g4 is displayed in place of palace g1, and ninja g5 is displayed in place of princess g3. The characters may be completely replaced from the beginning, or may be changed a plurality of times and the original character may be displayed again.

FIG. 200 (d3) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. Ninja g4 has been erased.

FIG. 200 (d4) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is displayed. The old man g2 has been erased.

FIG. 200 (a5) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character is completed. Princess Chibi g4 has stopped.

As in this example, multiple characters are displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, another character is displayed in place of one character during the character movement animation, then the characters are sequentially erased, and finally. One character may remain in. Further, a plurality of characters may be erased at one time.

FIG. 200 (e) shows a table used when determining the conversation notice display to be executed in the effect control process. For example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 181 is "conversation notice 1", and the conversation notice shown in FIG. 182 is "conversation notice 2". The pachinko machine 100 can select and execute an arbitrary conversation notice from a plurality of conversation notices. Further, for example, a plurality of conversation notices such as "conversation notice 1" and "conversation notice 2" can be combined and executed. Further, the pachinko machine 100 can display the dialogue notice display during the conversation notice display of this example, and can display the conversation notice display of this example in combination with the dialogue notice display.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is included in one conversation notice when any of a plurality of effects (not shown) shown in "***" of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 200 (e) is selected. It is possible to display any of the balloon displays of FIGS. 181-200 as the first balloon display and then display any of the balloon displays of FIGS. 181-200 as the second balloon display. be. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is included in one conversation notice when any of a plurality of effects (not shown) shown in "***" of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 200 (e) is selected. After displaying a balloon display in which a plurality of elements of any of the balloon displays of FIGS. 181 to 200 are combined as the first balloon display, any one of FIGS. 181 to 200 is displayed as the second balloon display. It is possible to display a balloon display that combines a plurality of elements of the balloon display. Further, the pachinko machine 100 has 3 or more as one conversation notice when any one of a plurality of effects (not shown) is selected in the “***” of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 200 (e). It is possible to display the balloon display of. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 displays a single symbol variation display when any of a plurality of effects (not shown) shown in "***" of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. 200 (e) is selected. It is possible to display two or three or more conversation notices during the period. Further, the pachinko machine 100 displays the balloon display or the conversation notice when the execution conditions of other effect display, error display, or movable body effect operation described in the embodiment or drawing are satisfied. And the operation can be performed.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 181 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a dialogue notice display. For example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 181 may be displayed during the display of the conversation notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 181 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute a preparatory notice effect and a timer advance notice effect. For example, the preparatory notice effect or the timer notice effect may be executed during the display of the conversation notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 181 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the meter increasing effect and the item giving effect shown in FIG. 59. For example, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect may be executed during the display of the conversation notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 181 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. 120. For example, like the balloon display f4 shown in FIG. 120 (k), the display size is different from the balloon displays f1 and f2 shown in FIGS. 120 (b) and 120 (e) (the display size is small and the display size is large). The display may be displayed to display the conversation notice display. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 181, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 181.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 181 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. 120. For example, as shown in FIGS. 120 (b) to 120 (f), in the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward, the movement distance of the balloon display f1 is longer than the movement distance of the balloon display f2. And the conversation notice display may be displayed. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 181, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 181.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 181 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. 120. For example, the movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is terminated at the time shown in FIG. 120 (e), and a part of the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap with other displays to give a conversation notice. The display may be displayed. The balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 181, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 181. The pachinko machine 100 may display the conversation notice display by stopping and displaying at least one of the balloon display i1 and the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 181 at a position where they overlap with another display.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 181 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the mode of the effect display shown in FIG. 120. For example, as shown in FIGS. 120 (b) to 120 (f), when the display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is started, a movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward is performed, and FIGS. 120 (r) to 120 (r) As shown in (t), when the display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 ends, the display of the balloon display starts and ends so that the movement animation of the balloon displays f1 and f2 moving to the right is performed. The movement direction of the balloon display may be different depending on the case of. The pachinko machine 100 may move at least one of the balloon display i1 and the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 181 in different directions at the start of display and at the end of display.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 181 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute a pseudo continuous effect. For example, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed during the display of the conversation notice display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 181 to 200.

(B1) A game table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a diagram). The conversation notice display shown in 181 (19), and one of the plurality of displays is the second display (for example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 181 (36)), which is the first display. The display is a display including the first line (for example, the morning weather is a "sunny mark"), and the first display is a display including the first character (for example, the palace g1). The second display is a display including a second line (for example, the daytime weather is a "cloudy mark"), and the second display is a display including a second character (for example, grandfather g2). The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed, and the second character may be displayed before the display of the first display. Game table.

According to the game console with this configuration, the player expects that the second display may be displayed by foretelling that the second display including the second character will be displayed. It may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(B2) The game console according to B1, wherein a third character (for example, princess g3) may be displayed before the display of the first display. ..

According to the game console with this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player by making a different character when the first display is displayed by giving a false notice to display the character that does not appear in the first display. , It may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(B3) In the game console according to B2, one of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 190 ()), and the third display is the third display. The display is a display including a third line (for example, the afternoon weather is a "rain mark"), and the third display is a display including the third character (for example, princess g3). A game table characterized in that the third display may be displayed after the second display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 190 (9)).

By making the third character appear in the third display instead of the second display, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be improved.

(B4) In the game console described in B3, one of the plurality of displays is the first conversation notice display (for example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 190 (1)), and the plurality of displays. The display of one of the displays is a second conversation notice display (for example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 190 (39)), and the first conversation notice display is a display including the first display. The game table is characterized in that the first conversation notice display is a display including the second display, and the second conversation notice display is a display including the third display.

According to the game console equipped with this configuration, the player's surprise can be surprised by making the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display appear in the second conversation notice display, which is a hobby of the player. May be improved.

(B5) In the game console according to B4, the second conversation notice display is displayed after the first conversation notice display is displayed during the period when one certain symbol variation display is displayed. A game table characterized by being played.

According to the game console equipped with this configuration, the player's surprise can be surprised by making the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display appear in the second conversation notice display, which is a hobby of the player. May be improved.

(B6) The game console according to any one of B1 to B5, and one of the plurality of displays is a first animation display (for example, a character movement animation). The first animation display is displayed before the display of the first display, the first animation display is a display including a movement display of a character, and the first animation display is the first animation display. A game table characterized in that the display includes characters, and the first animation display is a display that may include the second character.

According to the game console having this configuration, the second character is displayed in the first animation display, so that the player can expect that the first display may be performed by the second character. You may be able to do it.

(B7) In the game console according to B6, the first character and the second character are displayed at the same time at a certain timing in the display period of the first animation display. A featured game console.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, it may be possible to make the player infer which character the first display is displayed and entertain.

(B8) The game console according to B6 or B7, characterized in that, in the first animation display, the display start of the second character is before the display start of the first character. The game table.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, it may be possible to make the player think that the first display is displayed by the second character and entertain.

(B9) The game console according to any one of B6 to B8, and one of the plurality of displays is a second animation display (for example, a character movement animation). The second animation display is displayed before the display of the second display, the second animation display is a display including a movement display of the character, and the second animation display is the second animation display. A game table characterized in that the display includes characters, and the second animation display is a display that does not include the first character.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, there are cases where the character appearing in the first display can be made to appear and the player can play the game without awakening.

(B10) The game console according to B9, wherein the number of characters in the second animation display is smaller than the number of characters in the first animation display.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, it may be possible to entertain the player by increasing the accuracy rate of the character's prediction by the player by reducing the number of character candidates in the second display.

(B11) In the game console according to B9 or B10, the character first displayed in the second animation display is different from the character first displayed in the first animation display. A featured game console.

By reducing the number of character candidates in the second display, it may be possible to increase the accuracy rate of the character's prediction by the player and entertain the player.

(B12) The game console according to any one of B9 to B11, wherein the length of the display period of the first animation display is shorter than the length of the display period of the first display. A game table featuring.

(B13) The game console according to any one of B1 to B12, wherein the first display includes a first color (for example, white), and the second display and the display include the first color (for example, white). Is a display including a second color (for example, blue), and the reliability in the first color is different from the reliability in the second color, and is a display of the first display. A game table characterized in that a display including the second color may be displayed before.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, by notifying the reliability of the second display, the reliability when the second display is displayed can be expected, and the interest of the player can be improved. May be possible.

(B14) The gaming table according to B13, wherein the reliability in the second color is higher than the reliability in the first color.

According to the game console having such a configuration, it may be possible to expect the player to display the second display by increasing the reliability of the second display displayed later.

(B15) The game console according to any one of B1 to B14, wherein the first dialogue is displayed before the display of the first display.

According to the game console having this configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player can expect the first character to appear by the first line. You may be able to do it.

(B16) The game console according to any one of B1 to B15, the first display including the first name (for example, "Den"), and the first name. Is the name of the first character, and the game console is characterized in that the first name is displayed before the display of the first display.

According to the game console having this configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player can expect the first character to appear by the first name. You may be able to do it.

(B17) The game console according to any one of B1 to B16, provided with an operation means (for example, a chance button 136) that can be operated by a player, and the operation is performed during the display of the first display. A game table characterized in that the second display is displayed when the means is operated.

(B18) The game console according to any one of B1 to B17, wherein the second display is displayed after the first display is displayed.

(B19) The game console according to any one of B1 to B18, comprising a movable body (for example, a movable body k) that can be moved to a position overlapping the display means, and the first display. The game table is characterized in that the movable body may overlap with at least one of the second display.

(B20) In the game console according to any one of B1 to B19, a display overlaps with at least one of the first display and the second display. A game table characterized by having.

(B21) The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B20, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(B22) The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B20, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machines 1000 and 2000).

The first display may overlap with other displays, and the area where the first display overlaps with the second animation is such that the first display overlaps with the second display. It may be larger than the area to be wrapped. In this case, the second animation can be focused on by greatly overlapping the first display during the second animation, and the relevance to the first display is ensured during the display of the second display. You may be able to.

The area where the first dialogue is overlapped by the second animation may be larger than the area where the first dialogue is overlapped by the second display. In this case, the second animation can be focused on by greatly overlapping the first line during the second animation, and the relevance to the first line is ensured during the display of the second display. You may be able to.

There may be cases where the dialogue of the conversation notice does not match.

A plurality of characters may be started to be displayed in order in the first animation, and a certain character may be displayed a plurality of times in the first animation. In the first animation, a plurality of characters may be started to be displayed in order, and the order may go around in the first animation. In the first animation, a plurality of characters may be started to be displayed in order, and the order may be rewound at a certain timing in the first animation. In the first animation, a plurality of characters may be started to be displayed in order, and each character may perform the animation in the first animation. A plurality of characters may be displayed at the same time in the first animation, and the number of characters may be increased or decreased in the first animation. A plurality of characters may be displayed at the same time in the first animation, and a certain character may change in the first animation.

A plurality of characters may be displayed at the same time in the first animation, and the first display may be displayed after the characters are reduced by one or a plurality in the first animation. After the display of the second display, the reach effect corresponding to the second character may be shifted. A conversation notice display is performed for each pseudo-variation display, a first conversation notice display is performed in the first pseudo-variation display, and a second conversation is performed in the second pseudo-variation display after the first pseudo-variation display. A notice may be displayed. The movable body may operate for each pseudo-variation display, a part of the first conversation notice display may be overlapped with the movable body, and a part of the second conversation notice display may be overlapped with the movable body. A part of the first conversation notice display may overlap with the timer notice display, and a part of the second conversation notice display may overlap with the timer notice display.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 201 to 254, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 201 to 254 are used only for the description of the examples shown in FIGS. 201 to 254, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the drawings are shown in FIG. Priority is given to the reference numerals shown in 2001 to FIG. 254.

Next, an example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 203.

FIG. 201 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2.

FIG. 201A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial positions above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps with the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light in various light emitting patterns according to the effect. FIG. 201A shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the display area for the variable icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area includes a hold icon ab1 in the character mode of a merchant, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a look-ahead notice. Further, the right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the hold icon ac1 of the default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. In FIGS. 201 to 203, when the light emitting means provided in the movable bodies 1 and 2 is emitting light, it is shown in light black, and when the light emitting means is not emitting light, it is shown in white.

The display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In the front layer, the ball removal error display h111 by the character string "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer where the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer where the ball-out error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 are indicated by a gauge. The display h112 and the notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by the balloon of "Chance when reaching" and the "Den" character are displayed.

FIG. 201 (b) following FIG. 201 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are still in the initial positions and the respective light emitting means are emitting light.

Following FIG. 201 (b), FIG. 201 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1 moves from the initial position substantially forward in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 2 is located at the initial position. There is. Since the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 is a part of the decorative symbol, the number of reserved symbols aa5, a part of the fourth symbol aa6 of the tutorial, and the button notice display h110. It overlaps with a part of the ball removal error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a part of the notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Since the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays, or any one of these displays may be overlapped. It may not overlap with the display of.

Following FIG. 201 (c), FIG. 201 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is in the process of being deformed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 is moved downward.

FIG. 201 (e), which follows FIG. 201 (d), shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is completed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 is moved downward. When the movable body 1 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the variable icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal error display are newly displayed. The other part of h111 and the like are overlapped by the movable body 1. The movable body 1 may be deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays, or any of these displays. It may not overlap with the display of one.

In FIG. 201 (f) following FIG. 201 (e), the movable body 1 moves to the initial position after performing an operation of returning to the shape before deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. Indicates the state.

As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at the positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position, only the movable body 1 on the front side falls in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which the operation of transforming is performed. This production example may be performed as a look-ahead notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed.

FIG. 202 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2.

FIG. 202A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial positions above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps with the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light in various light emitting patterns according to the effect. FIG. 202A shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the display area for the variable icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area includes a hold icon ab1 in the character mode of a merchant, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a look-ahead notice. Further, the right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the hold icon ac1 of the default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

The display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In the front layer, the ball removal error display h111 by the character string "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer where the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer where the ball-out error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 are indicated by a gauge. The display h112 and the notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by the balloon of "Chance when reaching" and the "Den" character are displayed.

FIG. 202 (b) following FIG. 202 (a) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are still in the initial positions and the respective light emitting means are emitting light.

Following FIG. 202 (b), FIG. 202 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 2 moves from the initial position to substantially the front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1 is located at the initial position. There is. By locating the movable body 2 substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 is a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, and the button notice. It overlaps a part of the display h110, a ball removal error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a part of the notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Since the movable body 2 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays, or any one of these displays may be overlapped. It may not overlap with the display of.

Following FIG. 202 (c), FIG. 202 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is in the process of being deformed. Each of the pair of movable portions 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated clockwise by about 70 ° from the initial posture.

FIG. 202 (e), which follows FIG. 202 (d), shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is completed. Each of the pair of movable portions 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated clockwise by about 90 ° from the initial posture. As the movable body 2 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 and ab2 and another part of the button notice display h110 are newly overlapped by the movable body 2. The movable body 2 may be deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays, or any of these displays. It may not overlap with the display of one.

In FIG. 202 (f) following FIG. 202 (e), the movable body 2 moves to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. Indicates the state.

As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at the positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position, only the movable body 2 on the rear side is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which the operation of dropping and deforming is performed. This production example may be performed as a look-ahead notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect example shown in FIG. 201 is performed. In some cases, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily in the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 201 is performed than in the case where the effect is shown.

FIG. 203 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. FIG. 203A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial positions above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps with the movable body 2. Therefore, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies capable of emitting light in various light emitting patterns according to the effect. FIG. 203A shows a state in which the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the display area for the variable icon display. The left side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area includes a hold icon ab1 in the character mode of a merchant, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default mode. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a look-ahead notice. Further, the right side of the display area of the variable icon display is the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the hold icon ac1 of the default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

The display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In the front layer, the ball removal error display h111 by the character string "Please remove the ball" is displayed. In the layer between the layer where the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer where the ball-out error display h111 is displayed, the button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 are indicated by a gauge. The display h112 and the notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by the balloon of "Chance when reaching" and the "Den" character are displayed.

FIG. 203B, which follows FIG. 203A, shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are still in the initial positions and the respective light emitting means are emitting light.

FIG. 203 (c) following FIG. 203 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously start moving from the initial position and are simultaneously positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 hold number aa3, and the second of the special figure 2. 4 symbol aa4, number of reserved symbols aa5, part of fourth symbol aa6 of ordinary diagram, part of button notice display h110, ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and notice display (or tutorial display) h113 It overlaps with a part of. Further, since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays, and these displays may be overlapped. It may not overlap with the display of any one of them. The timing of the start of movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different. Further, even if the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are different, the movement end timings may be the same, or the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. However, the timing of the end of movement may be different.

FIG. 203 (d), which follows FIG. 203 (c), shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 30 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 is moved downward, and the pair of the movable body 2 is paired. Each of the movable parts 23 of the above is rotated clockwise by about 70 ° from the initial posture. The timing of starting the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

FIG. 203 (e), which follows FIG. 203 (d), shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operation is completed at the same time. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated clockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated counterclockwise by about 120 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 is moved downward, and the pair of the movable body 2 is paired. Each of the movable parts 23 of the above is rotated clockwise by about 90 ° from the initial posture. By deforming the movable bodies 1 and 2, a part of the hold icon ab1 to ab3, a part of the variable icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal The other part of the error display h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. Further, the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with the display other than these. It may not overlap with the display of any one of the displays of. The timing of the end of the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

In FIG. 203 (f) following FIG. 203 (e), after the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously perform the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation, the movable body 1 starts and ends moving to the initial position at the same time. It shows a state in which each of the light emitting means of 2 and 2 is turned off at the same time. The operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 returning to the shape before the deformation may be started at different timings or may be ended at different timings. Further, even if the start timing of the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 is different, the end timing may be the same, or the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. Even if the start timing of the operation of returning to the previous shape is the same, the end timing may be different. Further, the timing of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different, or the timing of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different. May be good. Further, even if the timing of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position is different, the timing of the end of the movement may be the same, or to the initial position of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. Even if the movement start timing is the same, the movement end timing may be different. The light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be turned off at different timings.

As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at the positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position, both movable bodies are simultaneously dropped in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which the operation of deforming at the same time is performed. This production example may be performed as a look-ahead notice, or may be performed as a notice of the change. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the effect example shown in FIG. 201 or the effect example shown in FIG. 202 is performed. It is preferable that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the production example shown in FIG. 201 or the production example shown in FIG. 202 is performed than when the production example is performed. There may be cases.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 204 to 212, a movable body 90 and an example of an effect using the movable body 90 will be described.

The movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 (a) is a schematic front view of the movable body 90, and FIG. 204 (b) is a schematic left side view of the movable body 90.

The movable body 90 includes the movable body 90a, the movable body 90b provided at the lower left of the movable body 90a, the motor m1 and the rotating shaft d1 for operating the movable body 90b, and the movable body 90c provided at the lower right of the movable body 90a. , And a motor m2 and a rotation shaft d2 for operating the movable body 90c. The movable body 90a has a plate-shaped horizontally long rectangular substrate mounting base portion 90a1, an LED substrate 90a2, and a cover portion 90a3. The movable body 90b has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90b1, an LED substrate 90b2, and a cover portion 90b3, and the movable body 90c has a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90c1, an LED substrate 90c2, and a cover portion. It has 90c3.

The LED substrates 90a2 of the movable body 90a are provided with light emitting diodes a11 to a35 arranged in an array of 3 rows and 6 columns (however, 2 rows and 1 column, 3 rows and 1 column, and 2 rows and 6 columns). , And no light emitting diode is provided in the 3rd row and 6th column). The LED substrate 90b2 of the movable body 90b is provided with light emitting diodes b1 to b4 along the outer circumference of the arc portion, and the LED substrate 90c2 of the movable body 90c is provided with the light emitting diodes c1 along the outer circumference of the arc portion. ~ C4 is provided. The light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) may be composed of light emitting diodes of all monochromatic colors (same color or different colors), or may be partly monochromatic light emitting diodes and some other full color LEDs. , All may be composed of full color LEDs. Further, a light source other than the light emitting diode may be used for the light emitting diode (a11 to c4) mounted on the movable body 90a.

The initial operation of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 205. FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (g) show step by step the initial operation of the movable body 90 performed when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on or the like. In FIGS. 205 to 211, the case where the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off is shown in white, and the case where they are turned on is shown in light black. Further, in FIGS. 205 to 211, the cover portions 90a3, 90b3, and 90c3 are not shown.

FIG. 205A shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The movable body 90 can be moved in the vertical direction by arm portions provided at both ends. The arm portions provided at both ends of the movable body 90 may be transparent, translucent, or colored, or may be capable of emitting light by arranging a light emitting die. A cable connected to the movable body 90 may be arranged behind the arm portion so as not to be visible to the player. Further, the character string "preparing" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 205 (a), FIG. 205 (b) shows that the movable body 90 is moved and located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c. It shows the state where the light emitting diode is lit. Further, the display of the character string "preparing" is overlapped by the movable body 90.

FIG. 205 (c) following FIG. 205 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °, and the movable body 90c is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting died overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 205 (d) following FIG. 205 (c) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 are each rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 205 (e) following FIG. 205 (d), all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 205 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 205 (d).

FIG. 205 (f) following FIG. 205 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 205 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 205 (d).

FIG. 205 (g) following FIG. 205 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

An example of the effect of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIGS. 206 (a) to 206 (n) show a stepwise example of an effect using the movable body 90.

FIG. 206A shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

In FIG. 206 (b) following FIG. 206 (a), after the movable body 90 has moved and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 have been removed. It shows the lit state. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

FIG. 206 (c) following FIG. 206 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 are each rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °, and the movable body 90c is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting died overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 206 (d) following FIG. 206 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 206 (e) following FIG. 206 (d), all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are rotated to return to their original postures. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 206 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 206 (d).

FIG. 206 (f) following FIG. 206 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 206 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 206 (d).

FIG. 206 (g) following FIG. 206 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

In FIG. 206 (h) following FIG. 206 (g), the movable body 90 is moved from the initial position and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 is emitted. It shows the state where the diode is lit. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

In FIG. 206 (i) following FIG. 206 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90b, the light of a part of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) overlapped by the movable body 90b becomes visible.

In FIG. 206 (j) following FIG. 206 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90b, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b becomes visible.

In FIG. 206 (k) following FIG. 206 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 206 (l) following FIG. 206 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90c, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a25, a34, a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c becomes visible, and the movable body 90 becomes visible. The light of all the light emitting diodes provided is visible.

FIG. 206 (m), which follows FIG. 206 (l), shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off and then the movable bodies 90b and 90c each return to their original postures at the same time. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 206 (l), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 206 (l). After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 206 (i) to 206 (l).

FIG. 206 (n), which follows FIG. 206 (m), shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position. It may be started after moving to.

As described above, although this production example is a production used as a notice of the change, it may also be used as a pre-reading notice. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 207 to 210 is performed.

An example of an effect example using a modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 204 will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIGS. 207 (a) to 207 (n) show step by step an effect example using a modified example of the movable body 90. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are configured to move in the vertical direction in the movable body 90a.

FIG. 207 (a) shows a modified example of the movable body 90 located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

In FIG. 207 (b) following FIG. 207 (a), after the movable body 90 has moved and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 have been removed. It shows the lit state. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

FIG. 207 (c) following FIG. 207 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 are simultaneously moved upward. By moving the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting died overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may move at different timings.

Following FIG. 207 (c), FIG. 207 (d) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 move further upward at the same time and stop at a target position. When the movable bodies 90b and 90c move upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a22 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped. The light of ~ a35 is visible.

Following FIG. 207 (d), FIG. 207 (e) shows a state in which all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 are turned off and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are moving downward at the same time. There is. By moving the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light emitting diodes a22 to a25 are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a13 and a14 are visible.

FIG. 207 (f) following FIG. 207 (e) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c are returned to their original positions at the same time. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to their original positions at different timings.

FIG. 207 (g) following FIG. 207 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

Following FIG. 207 (g), in FIG. 207 (h), the movable body 90 is moved from the initial position and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 is emitted. It shows the state where the diode is lit. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may light up, and among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, And a35) may be turned off.

Following FIG. 207 (h), FIG. 207 (i) shows a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b by moving only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 upward. The light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) becomes visible, and the light emitting diodes a11 and a12 are overlapped by the movable body 90b.

Following FIG. 207 (i), FIG. 207 (j) shows a state in which only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at a target position. When the movable body 90bc moves upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a13 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90b, and the light of the light emitting diodes a22 and a23 mounted on the movable body 90a is lighted. Is visible.

Following FIG. 207 (j), FIG. 207 (k) shows a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c by moving only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 upward. The light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) becomes visible, and the light emitting diodes a15 and a16 are overlapped by the movable body 90c.

Following FIG. 207 (k), FIG. 207 (l) shows a state in which only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at a target position. When the movable body 90c moves upward, the light emitting diodes a14 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90c, and the light of the light emitting diodes a24 and a25 mounted on the movable body 90a is lighted. Is visible.

Following FIG. 207 (l), FIG. 207 (m) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off and then the movable bodies 90b and 90c are returned to their original positions at the same time. ing. After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to their original positions at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be returned to their original positions. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original position so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 207 (i) to 207 (l).

Following FIG. 207 (m), FIG. 207 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position. It may be started after moving to.

As described above, although this production example is a production used as a notice of the change, it may also be used as a pre-reading notice. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 206 to 210 is performed.

An example of an effect example using a modified example of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 204 will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIGS. 208 (a) to 208 (n) show step by step an effect example using a modified example of the movable body 90. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are provided on the rear side of the movable body 90a.

FIG. 208 (a) shows a state in which a modified example of the movable body 90 is located at an initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

In FIG. 208 (b) following FIG. 208 (a), after the movable body 90 has moved and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 have been moved. It shows the lit state. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 is moved, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on while the movable body 90 is moving. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b3, c1 to c3) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

FIG. 208 (c) following FIG. 208 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 are each rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °, and the movable body 90c is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1, b2, c1 and c2) of the light emitting diodes of the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 208 (d) following FIG. 208 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 208 (e) following FIG. 208 (d), all the light emitting dides provided on the movable body 90 were turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c were rotated to return to their original postures. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 206 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 208 (d).

FIG. 208 (f) following FIG. 208 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to its original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 206 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 208 (d).

FIG. 208 (g) following FIG. 208 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

Following FIG. 208 (g), in FIG. 208 (h), the movable body 90 is moved from the initial position and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 is emitted. It shows the state where the diode is lit. It should be noted that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may light up before the movable body 90 moves, or all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b4, c1 to c4) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

In FIG. 208 (i) following FIG. 208 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90b, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 208 (j) following FIG. 208 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90b, the light of all the light emitting diodes b1 to b3 among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 208 (k) following FIG. 208 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 208 (l) following FIG. 208 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90c, the light of all the light emitting dides c1 to c3 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

FIG. 208 (m) following FIG. 208 (l) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off and then the movable bodies 90b and 90c each return to their original postures at the same time. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 208 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture shown in FIG. 208 (d). After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Further, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 208 (i) to 208 (l).

FIG. 208 (n), which follows FIG. 208 (m), shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be started while moving to the initial position. It may be started after moving to.

As described above, although this production example is a production used as a notice of the change, it may also be used as a pre-reading notice. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 206 to 210 is performed.

An example of the effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 204 will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIGS. 209 (a) to 209 (l) show an example of production using the movable body 90.

In FIG. 209 (a), the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the hold icon a1 in the default mode, a part of the hold icon a2 in the look-ahead notice mode, and a part of the variable icon ad1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 209 (b) following FIG. 209 (a), the definite display of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the hold icon a2 in the look-ahead notice mode, and a part of the variable icon ad2 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 209 (c) following FIG. 209 (b), the decorative symbol variation display due to the digestion of the hold icon a2 in the look-ahead notice mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative pattern display device 208, a part of the character string display of "press the button!", The button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, and the button operation notice effect is performed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the variation icon ad3 of the character mode of the merchant, a part of the character string display of "press the button!", The button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed by the movable body 90. It is overlapped.

In FIG. 209 (d) following FIG. 209 (c), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the sun's image is displayed. The image is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the variable icon ad1 of the merchant character aspect, and a part of the image of the sun are overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 209 (e) following FIG. 209 (d), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach effect is produced. Has been started. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative pattern and a part of the variable icon ad1 of the character aspect of the merchant are overlapped by the movable body 90.

Following FIG. 209 (e), in FIG. 209 (f), the SP reach effect display by the character display of the palace displaying the character string "Game!" Is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the SP reach effect display by the character display of the palace is overlapped by the movable body 90.

Following FIG. 209 (f), FIG. 209 (g) shows the decoration of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the SP reach effect is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The combination of symbols is reduced and a temporary stop display is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the character string of "winning" and the confrontation scene between the character of the palace and the enemy character are completed, and the effect display that the character of the palace wins is displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the production display that the character of the lord won is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 209 (h) following FIG. 209 (g), "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 209 (i) following FIG. 209 (h), the first R jackpot game effect display of the 15R special jackpot game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The jackpot stop symbol "decoration 7" is displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character string "1R" indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper right, and the payout during the jackpot game is displayed on the left. The character string of "80 balls" indicating the total number and the character string of "number of big hits: 1" indicating the number of big hits are displayed in the lower right. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the 1R jackpot game effect display is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 209 (j) following FIG. 209 (i), the character string “Dito” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the 15R special jackpot game is completed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the character string of "Dito" is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 209 (k) following FIG. 209 (j), the state shifts to the electric support state after the end of the jackpot game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variable display, a character string of "Right-handed!", A pattern indicating that right-handed is to be right-handed, a variable icon ad4, and a special figure 2 hold icon ac1 are displayed. .. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern variation display, a part of the character string "Right-handed!" A part of the icon ac1 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

In FIG. 209 (l) following FIG. 209 (k), the electric support state continues. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display, the character string of "door opening error", the character string of "ball full tank error", the variation icon ad5, and the special figure 2 hold icon ac2 of the look-ahead notice mode are displayed. A movable body 90 in a state in which the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative symbol variation display, a part of the character string of "door opening error", a part of the character string of "ball full tank error", a part of the variation icon ad5, and a special figure 2 hold icon of the look-ahead notice mode. A part of ac2 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

As shown in this effect example, the movable body 90 may be located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in various effects and gaming states. The movable body 90 may overlap all of the displays shown above, or the display overlapped by the movable body 90 may not overlap.

An example of the effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 204 will be described with reference to FIG. 210.

FIG. 210 (a) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 for the advance notice effect of the button operation, so that the advance notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 206 is performed. Shown. Even if the player does not operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the advance notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 206 may be performed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. .. The series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (a) may be used as a notice of the change or as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (a) is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (a) is not performed. May be done. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 206 to 210 is performed.

FIG. 210 (b) shows a state in which the advance notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 206 is performed after the end of the countdown by the advance notice effect of the countdown. The series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (b) may be used as a notice of the change or as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (b) is performed, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (b) is not performed. When the series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (b) is performed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (a) is performed. In the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (a) is performed, the jackpot symbol is finally determined as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 210 (b) is performed. It may be configured to be easily displayed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 206 to 210 is performed.

An example of modification of the appearance of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 204 at the initial position will be described with reference to FIG. 211. The movable body 90 is located behind the game plate 125 having the game nails.

FIG. 211A is an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30a at the initial position. The structure 30a has a flat plate shape, and has a horizontally long rectangular opening at a substantially central portion. The structure 30a is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 can be visually recognized through the opening of the structure 30a. It is possible. In some cases, a part of the movable body of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. In some cases, a part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

FIG. 211 (b) shows an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30b at the initial position. The structure 30b has a flat plate shape, and is provided with a vertically long rectangular notch in a substantially central portion. The structure 30b is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 are formed through the cutout portion of the structure 30b. It is visible. In some cases, a part of the movable body of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c. In some cases, a part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

FIG. 211 (c) shows an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30c at the initial position. The structure 30c is composed of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, the movable body 90 is invisible to the player because it overlaps with the structure 30c. By arranging the transmissive liquid crystal device in the structure 30c, the movable body 90 located behind the structure 30c may be easily visually recognized during non-display rather than during display in the transmissive liquid crystal device.

A modified example of the position and the moving motion of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 204 will be described with reference to FIG. 212.

FIG. 212A is a schematic view of the liquid crystal display device a208, the movable body 90, and the light emitting panel unit 919 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction in front of the liquid crystal display device a208 and behind the light emitting panel unit 919. The liquid crystal display device a208 and the light emitting panel unit 919 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be rotatable.

FIG. 212 (b) is a schematic view of the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. This example is an example in which the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208. The transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be rotatable.

FIG. 212 (c) is a schematic view of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. This example is an example in which the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction in the rear and front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208. The figure on the left side in FIG. 212 (c) shows the moving direction of the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial positions, the movable body 90 is located behind the movable liquid crystal display device c208, and the movable body 90 can move only in the vertical direction. The middle figure in FIG. 212 (c) shows a state in which the movable liquid crystal display device c208 is moved downward. The figure on the right side in FIG. 212 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 90 moves to the front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 after the movable liquid crystal display device c208 moves downward. When the movable body 90 is located in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208, the movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction. The movable liquid crystal display device c208 may be movable in the left-right direction or may be rotatable.

Next, an example of production using the structure 247 will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 223. The structure 247 used in the production examples of FIGS. 213 to 223 is a structure having a substantially circular shape on the front surface and a family crest pattern on the surface thereof, and can be moved in the vertical direction. Further, in FIGS. 213 to 222, the left side view shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 247, and the middle figure shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state of the left side figure, and the structure 247. It shows the case of seeing through. The figure on the right is an outline for determining whether or not a predetermined character display (for example, Sabohani's character display SB or sun display su1) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible depending on the angle of the player's line of sight. It is a figure. In the figure, the line of sight in which the player can visually recognize the predetermined character display is indicated by ◯, and the line of sight in which the player cannot visually recognize the predetermined character display is indicated by x. The shape and arrangement position of the structure 247 in this example are such that a predetermined character displayed behind the structure 247 has a predetermined line-of-sight angle (for example, a general sitting height (for example, a sitting height of 70 cm to 100 cm)). The angle of the line of sight in the player's normal gaming posture) may be calculated and designed so that it cannot be visually recognized. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 used in this example may be a movable liquid crystal display device or a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

FIG. 213 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 213 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 213 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 213 (a), in FIG. 213 (b), during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208, the Sabohani character display SB is displayed on the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 213 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. A part of the display SB can be visually recognized. In this example and the description of the player's line of sight in the example shown below, the term "substantially front" is defined as "substantially front" when the angle of the line of sight is within ± about 10 ° when the horizontal direction is 0 °. , Approximately diagonally above is defined as approximately diagonally above when the line-of-sight angle is + about 20 ° or more, and substantially diagonally below is defined as approximately diagonally below when the line-of-sight angle is −about 20 ° or less. Is not necessarily limited to these. In the explanation of the player's line of sight, substantially diagonally above means that the position of the line of sight is higher than substantially the front, and substantially diagonally below means that the position of the line of sight is lower than that of substantially the front.

In FIG. 213 (c) following FIG. 213 (b), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state of FIG. 213 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 213 (c), FIG. 213 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves upward. The upper body portion of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the state of FIG. 213 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is displaying the character of Sabohani. The entire SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 213 (d), FIG. 213 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

As described above, this example is an example in which the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved and displayed from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 214 to 222 is performed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol display device 208 does not move and display the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is at least one of upward, downward, left, right, and rotation. One or more movements may allow the player looking substantially from the front to see at least a portion of the Sabohani character display SB, which overlaps the structure 247. While moving and displaying the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position, the decorative symbol display device 208 moves at least one or more of upward, downward, left, right, and rotation. As a result, the player who is looking from substantially the front may be able to see at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani.

FIG. 214 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 214A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 214A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 214 (a), FIG. 214 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 214 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 214 (b), FIG. 214 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 214 (c), FIG. 214 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward. The lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the state of FIG. 214 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is displaying the character of Sabohani. The entire SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 214 (d), FIG. 214 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 214 (e), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved and displayed from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, and then it overlaps with the structure 247 again. This is an example of moving the display to the position where it is to be displayed. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 222 is performed.

FIG. 215 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247 and the structure 50t. The structure 50t is a structure composed of an opaque thin plate, and the title of the game table is displayed on the surface. The figure on the left side of FIG. 215 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 215 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 215 (a), FIG. 215 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 215 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 215 (b), FIG. 215 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 215 (c), FIG. 215 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 215 (d), FIG. 215 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern. In the state of FIG. 215 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 50t from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player who is looking from substantially diagonally below is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved and displayed from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, and then overlaps with the structure 50t. This is an example of moving to a position. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 216 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 216 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 216 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 216 (a), FIG. 216 (b) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. There is. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable icon ad1.

Following FIG. 216 (b), FIG. 216 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The lower right part of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247.

Following FIG. 216 (c), FIG. 216 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 216 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 216 (d), FIG. 216 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247.

As described above, in this example, the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved from the position where it does not overlap with the structure 247 to the position where it overlaps, and then the position where it does not overlap with the structure 247. This is an example of moving display to. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 217 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 217 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 217 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 217 (a), FIG. 217 (b) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. There is. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable icon ad1. Further, the character display SB of the Sabohani in this example is a display larger than the character display SB of the Sabohani shown in FIG. 216 and the like. Following FIG. 217 (b), FIG. 217 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The lower right part of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at the position where it overlaps with the structure 247, and the substantially upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 hold icon a3. ing.

Following FIG. 217 (c), FIG. 217 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The substantially lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 217 (d), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize the substantially upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 217 (d), FIG. 217 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further to the right. The entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247.

As described above, in this example, the movement display is performed from the position where the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change does not overlap with the structure 247 to the position where a part of the character display SB of Sabohani overlaps. This is an example of later performing a movement display at a position that does not overlap with the structure 247, and a part of the character display SB of Sabohani is an production example that is always visible to the player from a substantially front line of sight. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 218 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 218 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 218 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 218 (a), FIG. 218 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 218 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 218 (b), FIG. 218 (c) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire sun display su1 appears from the bottom of the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247. ing. The display su1 of the sun is a display used as a notice of the fluctuation. In the state of FIG. 218 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the sun display su1 and the character display SB of Sabohani, whereas the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above. Can visually recognize at least a part of the sun display su1 and at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

Following FIG. 218 (c), FIG. 218 (d) shows an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani throws the sun display su1 upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sun display su1 moves upward. Indicates the state in which the animation display is displayed. The substantially upper half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 hold icon a3.

In FIG. 218 (e) following FIG. 218 (d), the sun display su1 is upward while the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the animation display that moves to is displayed. The sun display su1 is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

As described above, in this example, after the character display SB of Sabohani and the sun display su1 used for the advance notice of the fluctuation are displayed at the positions where they overlap with the structure 247, only the sun display su1 is displayed at the structure 247. This is an example of moving the display to a position that does not overlap with. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 219 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 219 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 219 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 219 (a), FIG. 219 (b) shows the entire Sabohani character display SB and the sun at a position overlapping the structure 247 during display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Display The entire su1 is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun are displays used as a notice of the fluctuation. In the state of FIG. 219 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun, whereas the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above. Can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani and at least a part of the display su1 of the sun.

Following FIG. 219 (b), FIG. 219 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun move upward. The character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun are displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 219 (c), FIG. 219 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which only the sun display su1 moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially lower half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon a3. In the state of FIG. 219 (d), a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the sun display su1, and a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above can see the sun display su1. The whole can be seen.

In FIG. 219 (e) following FIG. 219 (d), the sun display su1 is further lowered while the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the animation display that moves to is displayed. The sun display su1 is displayed at a position that overlaps the structure 247. A player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the sun display su1, whereas a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above can see at least a part of the sun display su1. ..

As described above, in this example, after the character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun used for the advance notice of the fluctuation are displayed at the positions where they overlap with the structure 247, the character display SB of Sabohani and the display of the sun are displayed. This is an example in which the movement display is performed at a position where su1 does not overlap with the structure 247, and then the movement display is performed at a position where only the sun display su1 overlaps with the structure 247. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 220 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 220A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 220A, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to radiate out from the structure 247. The effect image ef1 is an effect image that covers the character display SB of Sabohani used as a notice of the fluctuation, and is a display accompanying the character display SB of Sabohani.

Following FIG. 220 (a), FIG. 220 (b) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, substantially the upper half of the character display SB of Sabohani at a position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. However, it is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and the effect image ef1 is moved and displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the state of FIG. 220 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, but can see a part of the effect image ef1, but from substantially diagonally above. The viewing player can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani and a part of the effect image ef1.

In FIG. 220 (c) following FIG. 220 (b), the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect image ef1 is displayed on the screen. It is displayed moving upward so that it appears from the bottom. In the state of FIG. 220 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 220 (c), FIG. 220 (d) shows a state in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves upward are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially upper body portion of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the state of FIG. 213 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is displaying the character of Sabohani. The entire SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 220 (d), FIG. 220 (e) shows a state in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the animation display in which the effect image ef1 moves further upward are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The character display SB of Sabohani and the effect image ef1 are displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved and displayed from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, but the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed. Is displayed at a position where is not overlapped with the structure 247, and the effect image ef1 accompanying the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where is not overlapped with the structure 247. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. May be good.

FIG. 221 shows three production examples using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 221A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, in FIG. 221 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol, and the character display h113 of the palace and the balloon display h114 of the character string "If you find a character, you have a chance!" Are the decorative symbols. It is displayed so that it partially overlaps. The balloon display h114 of the character string "If you find a character, chance!" Is a display for notifying the appearance of the character display SB of Sabohani, and the character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. Following FIG. 221 (a), FIG. 221 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. Further, the character string "Character is appearing!" Is displayed on the balloon display h114. The character string "Character is appearing!" May be displayed before the appearance of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed at the same time as the appearance, or may be displayed after the appearance. In the state of FIG. 221 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 221 (b), FIG. 221 (c) is an enlarged display of the Sabohani character display SB displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the character string "Character is expanding!" Is displayed on the balloon display h114. The character string "Character is being expanded!" May be displayed before the start of enlargement of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed at the same time as the start of enlargement, or may be displayed after the start of enlargement. In the state of FIG. 220 (c), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani.

As described above, in this example, before the character display SB of Sabohani used for the notice of the fluctuation is displayed at the position overlapping with the structure 247, the display for notifying that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed is displayed. After displaying the character display SB of Sabohani at the position where it overlaps with the structure 247, a display is performed to notify that the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed, and the position where it overlaps with the structure 247. This is an example in which the character display SB of Sabohani displayed in is enlarged and displayed, and a display is performed to inform that the character display SB of Sabohani is enlarged and displayed. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. May be good. Further, the larger the size of the enlarged Sabohani character display SB, the easier it is to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol.

The figure on the left side of FIG. 221 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 221 (A) shows the character display SB1 and the Sabohani 2 of the Sabohani 1 which is a notice display of the change at a position where the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the structure 247. The character display SB2 is displayed. In the state of FIG. 221 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2, whereas the player is viewed from substantially diagonally above. The player is able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and at least a part of the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change are displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. be. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. May be good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapping the structure 247, the easier it is to finally confirm the jackpot symbol.

The figure on the left side of FIG. 221 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In FIG. 221 (A), the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1, which is a notice display of the variation, is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. At a position overlapping the structure 50t, the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2 which is a notice display of the change is displayed. In the state of FIG. 221 (A), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2, whereas the player is viewed from substantially diagonally above. A player who is present can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1, and a player who is looking from substantially diagonally below can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change is structured. This is an example of displaying at a position overlapping the body 50t. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. May be good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapping the plurality of structures, the easier it is to finally confirm the jackpot symbol.

FIG. 222 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the structure 247. The figure on the left side of FIG. 222 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the normal figure 2 hold number aa3. The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the variable icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed. Further, FIG. 222A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

Following FIG. 222 (a), FIG. 222 (b) shows that, during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed so that it appears from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 222 (b), the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, while the player looking at the structure 247 from substantially diagonally above is the character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 222 (b), FIG. 222 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially in the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the intermediate decorative pattern. Following FIG. 222 (c), FIG. 222 (d) shows a state in which the structure 247 moves upward and is positioned so as to overlap the character display SB of Sabohani displayed in the substantially center of the screen. Is shown. In the state of FIG. 222 (d), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, but the player who is looking from substantially diagonally below is the character display SB of Sabohani. At least part of it is visible.

As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Sabohani used for the advance notice of the change is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247, then moved and displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247, and then the structure is displayed. This is an example in which the character display SB of Sabohani is overlapped by the structure 247 by moving the body 247. Further, this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 223 is performed. May be good. In this example, the structure 247 is moved after the movement display of the Sabohani character display SB, which is the notice display, but the Sabohani character display SB is always displayed in accordance with the movement display of the Sabohani character display SB. The structure 247 may be moved so as to overlap, or the structure 247 may be moved first, and the movement display of the character display SB of Sabohani may be performed later.

FIG. 223 shows an example of production using the structure 247. FIG. 223 (a) shows a state in which the effect image ef1 and the character display SB of Sabohani are displayed at a position where they overlap with the structure 247. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In FIG. 223 (b), the structure 247 is visually recognized from diagonally upper left to lower right. The player who visually recognizes the structure 247 from the front can visually recognize a part of the effect image ef1, but cannot visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 223 (b), the player who visually recognizes the structure 247 from diagonally upper left to lower right can visually recognize a part of the effect image ef1 and substantially the entire character display SB of Sabohani. is made of. By displaying the effect image ef1 in this way, it is possible to change the line of sight of the player who is visually recognizing from the front. In addition, the production of this example may be performed as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 213 to 222 is performed. May be good.

Next, an example of the effect using the hold icon and the variable icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 233. The arrows in the drawings of FIGS. 224 to 233 are for explaining the locus and the moving direction of the hold icon and the fluctuating icon, but the locus and the movement of the hold icon and the fluctuating icon on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be displayed as a display indicating the direction of.

FIG. 224 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. 224 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 224 (h) and (i) are produced after FIGS. 224 (a) to 224 (g), and FIGS. 224 (j) after FIGS. 224 (a) to 224 (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 (a) to 224 (i). FIG. 224 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 224 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 224 (b), which follows FIG. 224 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 224 (b), FIG. 224 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 224 (d) following FIG. 224 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 224 (e), which follows FIG. 224 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 224 (f) following FIG. 224 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be. Further, the notice display m1 may be a notice display for notifying that the operation effect display will be performed, or may be a notice display for notifying that the SP reach effect will be performed.

In FIG. 224 (g) following FIG. 224 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 224 (g), FIG. 224 (h) displays a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 224 (h), FIG. 224 (i) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement is completed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 (j) and 224 (k).

In FIG. 224 (j) following FIGS. 224 (a) to 224 (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 224 (g) is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. Then, the hold icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the notice display m1 is erased, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is erased. Alternatively, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

In FIG. 224 (k) following FIG. 224 (j), the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the pseudo continuous advance notice in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated is performed. Is. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed. When the hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.

FIG. 225 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. 225 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 225 (h) to 225 (j) are produced after FIGS. 225 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 225 (k) to 225 (k) after FIGS. 225 (a) to 225 (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (m) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 (a) to 225 (j). FIG. 225 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 225 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 225 (a), FIG. 225 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 225 (b), FIG. 225 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 225 (d) following FIG. 225 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 225 (e), which follows FIG. 225 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 225 (f) following FIG. 225 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. The pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 most recently has a vertically long rectangular hold icon (hereinafter, "going out hold icon") in which the character string "going out" is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3. "Is sometimes called.) Is displayed. In addition, instead of the hold icon while going out, a lighter-colored hold icon with a default shape may be used.

In FIG. 225 (g) following FIG. 225 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 225 (g), in FIG. 225 (h), a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 4- It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 225 (h), in FIG. 225 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation of returning to the pedestal before the movement is completed, and the pedestal is displayed on the pedestal. , The hold icon in the same mode as the notice display m1 is displayed so as to overlap with the hold icon while going out.

In FIG. 225 (j) following FIG. 225 (i), the on-going hold icon is erased on the decorative symbol display device 208.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 (k) to 225 (m).

In FIG. 225 (k) following FIGS. 225 (a) to 225 (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 225 (g) is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. Will be done. On the pedestal on which the on-going hold icon is displayed, a hold icon re-appearance animation is displayed in which the hold icon in the mode (default mode) of the notice display m1 overlaps with the out-of-home hold icon and reappears. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the notice display m1 is erased, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed before the notice display m1 is erased. Alternatively, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed after the notice display m1 is deleted.

In FIG. 225 (l) following FIG. 225 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is before moving. It shows the state displayed on the pedestal. FIG. 225 (m) shows a state in which the on-going hold icon is erased.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the notice display during the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol, the pseudo continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated is performed. In this example, a hold icon of another mode is temporarily displayed in place of the hold icon being moved. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed.

FIG. 226 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. 226 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 226 (h) and (i) are produced after FIGS. 226 (a) to 226 (g), and FIGS. 226 (j) after FIGS. 226 (a) to 226 (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (k) is shown.
<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 (a) to 226 (i). FIG. 226 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 226A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 226 (a), FIG. 226 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 226 (b), FIG. 226 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 226 (d) following FIG. 226 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 226 (e), which follows FIG. 226 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 226 (f) following FIG. 226 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, a temporary movement animation of the hold icon is displayed, in which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 temporarily moves to the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed. Further, in this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing the pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that the pseudo continuous notice is performed, or is used as a notice of the change. It may be a display that is displayed.

In FIG. 226 (g) following FIG. 226 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed most recently. It is displayed in. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 226 (g), FIG. 226 (h) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is moved to the original pedestal. Further, in the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

In FIG. 226 (i) following FIG. 226 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed, and the special figure 1 is shown. The hold icon a3 indicates the state displayed at the position before the movement. Further, the temporary movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 (j) and 226 (k).

In FIG. 226 (j) following FIGS. 226 (a) to 226 (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 226 (g) is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. The special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed on the pedestal, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears. The hold icon reappearance animation and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 move toward the original pedestal. A temporary movement animation is displayed. In this example, the hold icon that appears in the hold icon reappearance animation is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3, but the special figure 2 hold icon b3 becomes the hold icon that appears in the hold icon reappearance animation. It may appear to overlap. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be restarted before the notice display m1 is erased, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted when the notice display m1 is erased, or after the notice display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is erased. Alternatively, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

In FIG. 226 (k) following FIG. 226 (j), the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. Then, the temporary movement animation of the hold icon b3 of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 ends, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the pseudo continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated is performed. In this example, the hold icon on the right side is temporarily displayed instead of the hold icon being moved, and when the hold icon being moved returns to the original position, the temporarily displayed hold icon returns to the original position. .. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed.

FIG. 227 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. 227 shows an example of the pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 224 (h) and (i) are produced after FIGS. 227 (a) to 227 (g), and FIGS. 224 (j) after FIGS. 227 (a) to 227 (g). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 (a) to 227 (i). FIG. 227 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 227 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 227 (a), FIG. 227 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 227 (b), FIG. 227 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 227 (d) following FIG. 227 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 227 (d), FIG. 227 (e) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 227 (f) following FIG. 227 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display of Gase.

Following FIG. 227 (f), in FIG. 227 (g), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 227 (g), FIG. 227 (h) displays a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string "preparing" is still displayed.

Following FIG. 227 (h), FIG. 227 (i) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement is completed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 (j) and 227 (k).

In FIG. 227 (j) following FIGS. 227 (a) to 227 (g), the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 227 (g) is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the notice display m1 is erased. Recently, the hold icon re-appearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. Further, the stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character string "preparing" is still displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

In FIG. 227 (k) following FIG. 227 (j), the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the false notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the pseudo continuous advance notice that the decorative symbol variation display changes again is performed. There is no example.

FIG. 228 shows a stepwise example of the effect using the hold icon.

FIG. 228 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 228 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 228 (a), FIG. 228 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 228 (b), FIG. 228 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 228 (d), which follows FIG. 228 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 228 (e), which follows FIG. 228 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 228 (f) following FIG. 228 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

In FIG. 228 (g) following FIG. 228 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 228 (g), FIG. 228 (h) displays a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 228 (h), FIG. 228 (i) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement is completed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

FIG. 228 (j), which follows FIG. 228 (i), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 228 (k) following FIG. 228 (j), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

In FIG. 228 (l) following FIG. 228 (k), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 228 (l), FIG. 228 (m) displays a re-movement animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x3" indicating that the third pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 228 (m), FIG. 228 (n) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement is completed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. There is.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the notice display during the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol, the pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display changes again is repeated a plurality of times. This is an example of doing so. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed. When the hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.

FIG. 229 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the hold icon.

FIG. 229 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 229 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 229 (a), FIG. 229 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 229 (b), FIG. 229 (c) shows, in parallel with the end of the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 229 (d) following FIG. 229 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 229 (e), which follows FIG. 229 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 229 (f) following FIG. 229 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

In FIG. 229 (g) following FIG. 229 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 229 (g), FIG. 229 (h) displays a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 229 (h), FIG. 229 (i) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement is completed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

FIG. 229 (j) following FIG. 229 (i) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 229 (k) following FIG. 229 (j), the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

Following FIG. 229 (k), in FIG. 229 (l), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 229 (l), FIG. 229 (m) displays a re-movement animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 2 hold icon b3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x3" indicating that the third pseudo-variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 229 (m), FIG. 229 (n) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the re-movement animation is completed. There is.

As described above, this example is an example in which pseudo continuous notice using two different hold icons as the notice display m1 is performed a plurality of times in one fluctuation. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed. If the hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is insufficient, the variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.

FIG. 230 shows a stepwise example of an effect using the hold icon.

FIG. 230 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 230A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 230 (b), which follows FIG. 230 (a), shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 230 (b), FIG. 230 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 230 (d), which follows FIG. 230 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 230 (e), which follows FIG. 230 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 230 (f) following FIG. 230 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

In FIG. 230 (g) following FIG. 230 (f), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 230 (g), FIG. 230 (h) displays a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative pattern variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string "preparing" is still displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

FIG. 230 (i), which follows FIG. 230 (h), shows a state in which the advance notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed. ..

In FIG. 230 (j) following FIG. 230 (i), the reach effect by "decoration 4" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The character string "reach!" Is displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

In this way, in this example, when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated and the reach effect is started. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed.

FIG. 231 shows a stepwise example of the effect using the variable icon.

FIG. 231 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 231 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 231 (b) following FIG. 231 (a) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 231 (b), FIG. 231 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 231 (d) following FIG. 231 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 231 (e) following FIG. 231 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 231 (f) following FIG. 231 (e), the variable icon ad1 is changed from the variable icon display area 280 during the display of the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a moving animation that pops out and moves as a notice display m2 is displayed. The notice display m2 and the special variation icon ad1 have the same display mode. Further, the variable icon is not displayed on the pedestal of the variable icon display area 280. In this example, the notice display m2 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but it may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a look-ahead notice. You may.

In FIG. 231 (g) following FIG. 231 (f), the notice display m2 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m2 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

In FIG. 231 (h) following FIG. 231 (g), a moving animation of the notice display m2 returning to the position (pedestal) of the variable icon display area 280 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 4-decoration 4” is displayed. -It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 5" is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x2" indicating that the second pseudo-variation is being performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m2, the decorative symbol variation display may be restarted.

Following FIG. 231 (h), FIG. 231 (i) shows a state in which the movement animation in which the notice display m2 returns to the position of the variable icon display area 280 as the variable icon ad1 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

In this way, in this example, when the variable icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol, the pseudo continuous advance notice is performed in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates. .. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed. In addition, not only the variable icon in the default mode but also the variable icon in a mode other than the default mode may be used as the notice display m2 of this example. FIG. 232 shows a stepwise production example using the hold icon. Shown.

FIG. 232 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 232 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 232 (a), FIG. 232 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 232 (b), FIG. 232 (c) shows the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates that the augmentation animation is being displayed.

FIG. 232 (d) following FIG. 232 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 232 (e), which follows FIG. 232 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 232 (f) following FIG. 232 (e), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice display m1 is a display used as a look-ahead notice.

Following FIG. 232 (f), in FIG. 232 (g), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 5" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 232 (g), FIG. 232 (h) displays a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the stop display of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is displayed.

Following FIG. 232 (h), FIG. 232 (i) shows a state in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement is completed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

FIG. 232 (j) following FIG. 232 (i) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the hold icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the left and the hold icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208 are completed. ..

FIG. 232 (k), which follows FIG. 232 (j), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 232 (l) following FIG. 232 (k), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

In FIG. 232 (m) following FIG. 232 (l), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is being displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with "decoration 2" which is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 232 (m), FIG. 232 (n) displays a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the stop display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is displayed.

Following FIG. 232 (n), FIG. 232 (o) shows a state in which the advance notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement is completed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

FIG. 232 (p) following FIG. 232 (o) shows a state in which the next symbol variation is executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, the hold icon moves to the left, the hold icon moves animation, and the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208. The hold / change icon movement animation ends. There is.

FIG. 232 (q), which follows FIG. 232 (p), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 232 (r) following FIG. 232 (q), the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed. , 2 Shows a state in which a movement animation that jumps out of the hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode and are used as a notice of the change. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

In FIG. 232 (s) following FIG. 232 (r), the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8" is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which a collision animation colliding with the "decoration 7" temporarily stopped and displayed on 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with the "decoration 7" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 8" temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It may collide with all the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

Following FIG. 232 (s), FIG. 232 (t) displays a moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is finished and the decorative pattern variation display is displayed.

Following FIG. 232 (t), in FIG. 232 (u), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display m1 is set as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation of returning to the position before the movement is completed, and the “decoration 7” is shown. Reach production is done.

In this way, this example is an example in which a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display while the temporary stop display of the out-of-order symbol is displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the reach effect is developed. be. The notice display that appears the first time and the second time in this example is used as a look-ahead notice, and the notice display that appears the third time is used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the end than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 233 is performed.

FIG. 233 shows a stepwise example of the effect using the hold icon. FIG. 233 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. Further, the special figure 2 hold icon b2 is a hold icon in the form of a character of the palace. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 233 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, the hold icon in the form of the character of the palace may be used as a look-ahead notice.

Following FIG. 233 (a), FIG. 233 (b) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the form of the character of the palace is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 233 (b), FIG. 233 (c) shows the appearance of the character of the palace in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates a state in which the increasing animation of the hold icon b3 is displayed.

FIG. 233 (d), which follows FIG. 233 (c), shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 233 (e), which follows FIG. 233 (d), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 233 (f) following FIG. 233 (e), while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 2 hold icon b2 is a special figure. 1 and 2 Hold icon display area 280ab jumps out and moves as notice display c1, special figure 1 hold icon a3 jumps out of special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as notice display c2, and special figure 2 hold icon A movement animation is displayed in which b3 jumps out of the special drawings 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display c3. The notice displays c1 to c3, the special figure 2 hold icons b2 and b3, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 all have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b2, b3 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. In this example, the notice displays c1 to c3 are displays used as a notice of the change, but may be a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed. It may be a notice display, or it may also be used as a look-ahead notice.

In FIG. 233 (g) following FIG. 233 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 changes to the notice display c1', the notice display c2 changes to the notice display c2', and the notice display c3 changes to the notice display c2'. The notice display c3'indicates the changed state. The notice displays c1'to c3' are all in the same display mode, and are in a display mode in which the large-displayed character of the palace is fighting by pulling out the Japanese sword. In the decorative symbol display measure 208, while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is being displayed, the notice display c1'fights against the "decoration 4" which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. A battle animation in which the notice display c2'fights the "decoration 4" that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208b, and the notice display c3'fights the "decoration 5" that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed.

In FIG. 233 (h) following FIG. 233 (g), the notice display c1'changes to c1, the notice display c2' changes to c2, and the notice display c3' changes to c3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice display c3 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b3 at the position where the display c1 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b2, and the notice display c2 displayed the special figure 2 hold icon b3 at the position where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. The movement animations of the notice displays c1 to c3 that return to the position are displayed, and the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is redisplayed.

Following FIG. 233 (h), in FIG. 233 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b2, and the notice display c2 is the special figure 1 hold icon a3. The movement animation is completed in which the notice display c3 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b3. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the reach effect of "decoration 7" is executed.

In this way, in this example, when a plurality of hold icons collide with a plurality of decorative symbols as a plurality of notice displays during the temporary stop display of the detached symbol, the decorative symbol variation display is re-variated and the reach effect is started. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 224 to 232 is performed. If the number of hold icons used as the notice display in this example is insufficient, the variable icon may be used as the notice display.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 254.

FIGS. 234 (a) to 234 (c) show stepwise examples of effects using the balloon display.

FIG. 234 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 230A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 234 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace is displayed in the substantially center of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 234 (b) following FIG. 234 (a), the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 234 (c) following FIG. 234 (b), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed above the balloon display f1. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The width of the balloon display f1 and the width of the balloon display f2 are the same, and the height of the balloon display f1 and the height of the balloon display f2 are the same, but the width and the height are different. It may be different, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 and f2 in the following description.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 235.

FIGS. 235 (a) to 235 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 235 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 235 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 235 (a), FIG. 235 (b) is displayed so that the balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is also overlapped with the number of reserved symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary diagram.

Following FIG. 235 (b), FIG. 235 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left edge of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Shows the displayed state. The balloon display f1 does not display the character string displayed in the balloon part and the pattern of the clear mark until the state immediately before the stop display is displayed in the center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon part is displayed). So, after stopping and displaying at the center of the screen, the character string and the pattern of the sunny mark may be displayed in order from the beginning of the character string, or even if the character string and the pattern of the sunny mark are all displayed at once. good. Further, other balloon displays may have the same configuration.

Following FIG. 235 (c), in FIG. 235 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 235 (e) following FIG. 235 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the grandfather's character is displayed so as to appear from the right edge of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon display f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. In this example, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark on the balloon display f1 may overlap with the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but a part other than the pattern of the sunny mark may overlap with the balloon display f2. ..

FIG. 235 (e) shows a state in which the balloon display f1 is moved upward due to the appearance of the balloon display f2. In this example, the balloon display f1 is simultaneously moved to move upward and the balloon display f2 is moved to the left at the same time.

Following FIG. 235 (e), in FIG. 235 (f), a movement animation is performed in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the right edge of the screen moves to the left, is displayed substantially in the center of the screen, and the balloon f1 moves upward. A moving animation is performed to show the state displayed at the upper center of the screen.

Following FIG. 235 (f), FIG. 235 (g) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 235 (h) following FIG. 235 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon display f3 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2. In this example, the character string of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 may overlap with the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, but the portion other than the character string of the balloon portion may overlap with the balloon display f3. The width of the balloon display f3 is the same as the width of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and the height of the balloon display f3 is the same as the height of the balloon displays f1 and f2, but the width and the height are different. It may be different, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 to f3 in the following description.

Further, FIG. 235 (h) shows a state in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 are moved upward due to the appearance of the balloon display f3, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. Is shown. In this example, a movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 moves to the right are performed at the same time.

Following FIG. 235 (h), in FIG. 235 (i), a movement animation is performed in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the left edge of the screen moves to the right, is displayed in the substantially center of the screen, and the balloon f2 moves upward. The movement animation is performed, and it is displayed at the upper part of the center of the screen, and the balloon display f1 shows the state of being erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, after this frame, in the balloon display f2 of the grandfather character and the balloon display f3 of the princess character, the balloon display f3 may be erased after the balloon display f2 is erased, and the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 are displayed. It may be erased at the same time, or the balloon display f2 may be erased after the balloon display f3 is erased. Further, at least one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased before the reach symbol in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or the nth time of the pseudo continuous display (n is an arbitrary number). ) May be erased before the start, or may be erased before the temporary stop display is displayed. The balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased immediately on the spot, or may be erased so as to gradually become thinner and fade out on the spot, and are the same as the balloon display f1 of the character of the palace. After displaying the moving animation moving upward, it may be erased so as to come out from the upper edge of the screen, or it may be erased so as to come out from the direction at the time of each appearance. The same may apply to the balloon display described in the following drawings.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed. The balloon display described in this example and the following drawings includes a pattern of each configuration of the balloon display (weather mark (sunny mark, cloudy mark, rain mark), character string display, frame, character name display, character. In each of the facial images), at least a part of each configuration may be animated, only a part may be animated, or the whole may be animated. For example, an animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates may be displayed, an animation display in which the display of the character string blinks may be displayed, or an animation display in which the character makes a mouthful may be displayed. , The entire balloon display may be moved while displaying one or more of the animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates, the animation display in which the character string display blinks, and the animation display in which the character flutters. Further, the display of the character string may be displayed in order from the first character, and an animation display in which the character is lip-synching may be displayed during the period when the number of characters displayed in the character string is increasing. The animation display of each configuration of the balloon display may be a repeatable animation display in which the operations from the beginning to the end of the animation display are connected. For example, one animation display that rotates and returns to the original posture may be repeated, one animation display that returns to the original size after enlarging or reducing may be repeated, or the original animation display may be repeated after moving the position. One animation display returning to the position may be repeated, one blinking animation display may be repeated, or one animation display in which the gloss display moves or changes may be repeated. Further, a part of at least one animation display in each configuration of the balloon display may overlap with a part of other animations in each configuration of the balloon display. Further, the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each configuration of the balloon display may be transparent or translucent, only a part may be transparent or translucent, or the whole may be translucent.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 236.

FIGS. 236 (a) to 236 (m) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 236 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 236 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 236 (a), FIG. 236 (b) is displayed so that the balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is also overlapped with the number of reserved symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary diagram.

Following FIG. 236 (b), FIG. 236 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left edge of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Shows the displayed state.

In FIG. 236 (d) following FIG. 236 (c), a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 236 (e) following FIG. 236 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started.

In FIG. 236 (f) following FIG. 236 (e), the movement animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen.

Following FIG. 236 (f), FIG. 236 (g) is displayed so that the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character appears from the right edge of the screen after the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is interrupted. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Following FIG. 236 (g), FIG. 236 (h) shows a state in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the right edge of the screen is moved to the left by performing a movement animation and is displayed in the substantially center of the screen.

Following FIG. 236 (h), FIG. 236 (i) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

Following FIG. 236 (i), FIG. 236 (j) erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by the player pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. , The balloon displays f1 and f2 show a state in which a movement animation is being performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

In FIG. 236 (k) following FIG. 236 (j), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the movement animation moving above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the upper part of the screen. It is displayed.

Following FIG. 236 (k), FIG. 236 (l) is displayed so that the balloon display f3 by the character of the princess appears from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part.

Following FIG. 236 (l), FIG. 236 (m) shows a state in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the left edge of the screen is moved to the right by performing a movement animation, and is displayed in the substantially center of the screen.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 237.

FIGS. 237 (a) to 237 (m) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 237 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 237 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 237 (a), FIG. 237 (b) is displayed so that the balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol, and is also overlapped with the number of reserved symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary diagram.

Following FIG. 237 (b), FIG. 237 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left edge of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Shows the displayed state.

Following FIG. 237 (c), in FIG. 237 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 237 (e) following FIG. 237 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the grandfather's character is displayed so as to appear from the right edge of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon display f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 237 (e), FIG. 237 (f) shows a state in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the right edge of the screen is moved to the left by a moving animation, and is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. .. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 1. Since the balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1, the character string of "morning weather is" displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the pattern of the sunny mark and the frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but the face image of the character of the palace and the character image of "Den" are not hidden in the balloon display f2.

Following FIG. 237 (f), in FIG. 237 (g), after the movement animation for moving the balloon display f2 to the left is completed, the movement animation for moving the balloon display f1 upward is started. In FIG. 237 (g), when the balloon display f1 moves upward, the character string “morning weather” hidden by the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, the pattern of the sunny mark, and the frame portion of the balloon portion are shown. Approximately the upper half of is visible. At a certain timing between FIGS. 237 (f) and 237 (g), a part of the pattern of the sunny mark is displayed in the balloon portion of the balloon display f1, and the character string is not displayed. Become.

In FIG. 237 (h) following FIG. 237 (g), the movement animation moving upward of the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen.

Following FIG. 237 (h), FIG. 237 (i) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 237 (j) following FIG. 237 (i), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, in this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon display f2 and f3 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

Following FIG. 237 (j), FIG. 237 (k) shows a state in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the left edge of the screen is moved to the right by performing a movement animation, and is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. .. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon portion of the balloon display f3 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 2. Since the balloon display f3 has priority over the balloon display f2, the character string of "morning weather is" displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f2, the pattern of the cloudy mark, and the frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, but the face image of the old man's character and the character image of the "old man" are not hidden in the balloon display f3.

Following FIG. 237 (k), FIG. 237 (l) shows a state in which a movement animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed. In FIG. 237 (l), when the balloon display f2 moves upward, the character string "morning weather is" hidden by the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, the pattern of the cloudy mark, and the frame portion of the balloon portion. Approximately the upper half of is visible. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

In FIG. 236 (m) following FIG. 237 (l), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the movement animation moving above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen. Has been done.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

Next, two examples of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 238. 238 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 238 (n) to (q) are produced after FIGS. 238 (a) to (m), and FIGS. 238 (r) to 238 (r) after FIGS. 238 (a) to (m). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (t) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
FIG. 238 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 238 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 238 (a), in FIG. 238 (b), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 238 (b), FIG. 238 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

Following FIG. 238 (c), in FIG. 238 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 238 (e) following FIG. 238 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 238 (e), in FIG. 238 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

Following FIG. 238 (f), FIG. 238 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 238 (h) following FIG. 238 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

Following FIG. 238 (h), in FIG. 238 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

Following FIG. 238 (i), FIG. 238 (j) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 238 (k) following FIG. 238 (j), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f4 by the character of Sabohani is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f4 is a character image of "honey" displayed at a position where the character image of Sabohani and the character image of Sabohani overlap, and a character string and a pattern of "Lance when reaching reach" are displayed. It is a display including a blowout part. Further, the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f4 is configured to be substantially half of the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the like.

FIG. 238 (l), which follows FIG. 238 (k), shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is temporarily interrupted. The balloon part f4 that appeared from the lower part of the screen is stopped and displayed at the position where it has fully appeared, and the movement to the upper part of the balloon display f3 is also temporarily interrupted and stopped and displayed. Further, substantially the lower half of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper end of the screen.

In FIG. 238 (m) following FIG. 238 (l), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping the balloon display f2 on the decorative symbol display device 208. , Indicates a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

Following FIG. 238 (m), FIG. 238 (n) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f2 to f4 is restarted and the balloon display f5 appears from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f5 is a balloon portion in which the character image of "Gale" and the character string and pattern of "Gale" are displayed on the face image of the character of Gale and the face image of the character of Gale. It is a display that includes. Further, the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f5 is configured to be substantially twice that of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the like.

In FIG. 238 (o) following FIG. 238 (n), the balloon displays f3 to f5 are scrolled and erased so that the balloon display f3 comes out from the upper end of the screen. In FIG. 238 (p) following FIG. 238 (o), the balloon displays f4 and f5 are scrolled, and the balloon display f4 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

FIG. 238 (q), which follows FIG. 238 (p), shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated, and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The entire balloon display f5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.
<Example of pattern 2>
Following FIGS. 238 (a) to 238 (m), FIG. 238 (r) is displayed so that the balloon display f5 appears from the left edge of the screen, and the balloon display f2 to stop displayed in FIG. 238 (m). It shows a state in which a movement animation for moving f3 to the right at the same time is displayed. That is, in this example, after the effect of scrolling the balloon displays f1 to f4 upward in order, the effect of scrolling the balloon displays f2 to f5 to the right is performed.

In FIG. 238 (s) following FIG. 238 (r), the balloon display f2 to f5 is scrolled to the right, and the balloon displays f2 to f3 are erased so as to come out from the right edge of the screen at the same time. ..

FIG. 238 (t), which follows FIG. 238 (s), shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated, and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The entire balloon display f5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of pattern 2 of the above is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed.

Next, two examples of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 239. 239 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 239 (k) and (l) are produced after FIGS. 239 (a) to 239 (j), and FIGS. 239 (m) after FIGS. 239 (a) to 239 (j). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of (n) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
FIG. 239 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 239 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 239 (b) following FIG. 239 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 239 (b), FIG. 239 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 239 (d) following FIG. 239 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 239 (e) following FIG. 239 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 239 (e), in FIG. 239 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

Following FIG. 239 (f), FIG. 239 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 239 (h) following FIG. 239 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

Following FIG. 239 (h), in FIG. 239 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

Following FIG. 239 (i), FIG. 239 (j) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display at positions overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state in which a warning effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 239 (k) following FIG. 239 (j), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled downward.

FIG. 239 (l), which follows FIG. 239 (k), shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1 that reappears from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. After that, the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
Following FIGS. 239 (a) to 239 (j), FIG. 239 (m) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. Is deleted, and the balloon display f1'appears from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1', f2, and f3 are scrolled downward. The balloon display f1'is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo-ream chance!". It is a display including a part.

FIG. 239 (n) following FIG. 239 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1'and f2 is temporarily interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1'appearing from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially above the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. After that, the balloon displays f1'and f2 may be erased, and a pseudo continuous advance notice effect or reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. good.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of pattern 2 of the above is performed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 240.

FIGS. 240 (a) to 240 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 240 (a), in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 240A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 240 (b) following FIG. 240 (a), a balloon display f1'by the character of the lord appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figures 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed in. The balloon display f1'is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo-ream chance!". It is a display including a part. The balloon display f1'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 240 (b), FIG. 240 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 240 (d) following FIG. 240 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1'on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game is played. It shows a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge a person to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 240 (e) following FIG. 240 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1'moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 240 (e), in FIG. 240 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. Is performed, the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1'has stopped and displayed before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1'and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 240 (g) following FIG. 240 (f), the scroll display of the balloon display f1'and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps with the balloon display f1'and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at the positions to be displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 240 (h) following FIG. 240 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. While the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed, the movement animation in which f2 moves upward is performed, and at the same time, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f2 is not displayed and is erased above the position where the balloon display f1'is displayed. Further, by displaying the balloon display f1'with priority over the balloon display f2, when the balloon display f2 is moving behind the balloon display f1 in a scroll display, the balloon display f1 of the balloon display f2 is displayed. It may be configured so that the overlapping part of'is not displayed. In this case, since the face image of the grandfather character and the character image of the grandfather in the balloon display f2 do not overlap with the balloon display f1', they are scrolled to the position of the upper end of the screen. In this way, in this example, when a balloon display with high jackpot reliability appears, the balloon with low jackpot reliability is prioritized and deleted so that the balloon display with high reliability is left on the screen. It is configured.

In FIG. 240 (i) following FIG. 240 (h), the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed, and the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen is moved upward by performing a movement animation to display the balloon. f3 indicates a state in which the display is stopped at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. After that, the balloon displays f1'and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 241.

FIGS. 241 (a) to 241 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 241 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 241 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 241 (b) following FIG. 241 (a), a balloon display f1'by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed in. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 241 (b), FIG. 241 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 241 (d) following FIG. 241 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 241 (e) following FIG. 241 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. After the balloon display f2 by the old character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. In this example, since the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen and then the balloon display f1 moves upward, the balloon display f2 is substantially below the balloon display f1. Appears to overlap in half.

Following FIG. 241 (e), FIG. 241 (f) shows a movement animation in which substantially the lower half of the balloon display f1 overlaps with the balloon display f2, and both move upward. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 241 (g) following FIG. 241 (f), the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and there is a chance at a position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. In FIG. 241 (h) following FIG. 241 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are stopped and displayed. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap substantially the lower half of the balloon display f2. In this example, a part of the balloon part of the balloon display 1 (the character string of "Today's weather is", the pattern of the sunny mark, and the frame part of the balloon part) is the balloon part of the balloon display f2 ("Today's weather is"). Overlapping a part of the character string or the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame part of the balloon part, the balloon part of the balloon display 2 (the character string of "Today's weather" or the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame part of the balloon part) ) Is configured to overlap a part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 (the character string of "Today's weather", the pattern of the rain mark, and the frame part of the balloon part), but other than this. There may be cases. For example, the face images of the characters may overlap, the character images of the names of the characters may overlap, or the face images of the characters may overlap in the balloon part. There may be cases where the balloon portion overlaps with the character's face image, and there may be cases where the character image of the character's name overlaps with the balloon portion.

Following FIG. 241 (h), FIG. 241 (i) shows a position where a movement animation of moving the balloon displays f1 to f3 upward is performed and the upper end of the balloon portion f1 and the lower end of the balloon portion f3 fit on the screen. Indicates a state in which the movement animation of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is interrupted or ended. After that, the balloon displays f1 to f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. Further, in this example, two balloon displays are overlapped, but two or more balloon displays may be overlapped. For example, the larger the number of overlapped balloon displays, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. It may be. Further, in this example, the overlapping degree of each balloon display is configured to be equal, but the overlapping condition of each balloon display may not be equal. For example, the overlapping area of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be smaller or larger than the overlapping area of the balloon displays f2 and f3. Further, the balloon displays f1 and f2 may overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may not overlap, or the balloon displays f1 and f2 may not overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may overlap.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 242.

FIGS. 242 (a) to 242 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 242 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 242 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 242 (b) following FIG. 242 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 242 (b), FIG. 242 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 242 (d) following FIG. 242 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 242 (e) following FIG. 242 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the old character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 is reduced and then moved upward is displayed. Further, the balloon display f1 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The reduction of the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each configuration of the balloon display (weather pattern, character, frame, character name, character face image) may be reduced. Only a part may be reduced, the whole may be reduced, or the reduction ratio may be different for each configuration.

Following FIG. 242 (e), in FIG. 242 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 242 (g) following FIG. 242 (f), the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and there is a chance at a position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. In FIG. 242 (h) following FIG. 242 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f3 by the character of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 move upward is displayed. Further, although the balloon display f2 is configured to be reduced before moving upward, the balloon display f2 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The reduction degree of the balloon display f2 may be the same as or different from the reduction degree of the balloon display f1. Further, either one of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be reduced to be larger or smaller than the other, or the structure for reducing the balloon display f1 and f2 may be different from each other.

Following FIG. 242 (h), FIG. 242 (i) shows a state in which the animation of moving toward the balloon displays f2 and f3 is interrupted or terminated and the stop display is displayed. After that, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 243.

FIGS. 243 (a) to 243 (k) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 243 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 243 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 243 (b) following FIG. 243 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 243 (b), FIG. 243 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 243 (d) following FIG. 243 (c), the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 243 (e) following FIG. 243 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f1'by the character of the palace is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f1'is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo-ream chance!". It is a display including a part.

Following FIG. 243 (e), in FIG. 243 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. Is performed, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f1'indicates a state in which the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f1'are the same, they may be configured differently. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

Following FIG. 243 (f), FIG. 243 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f1'is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f1'. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 243 (h) following FIG. 243 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , An animation in which only the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, an animation is performed in which the balloon display f1'changes to the balloon display f1a. In the animation, as the balloon part of the balloon display f1'expands and the character string of the balloon part gradually disappears, the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a appears instead. .. In addition, the balloon display f1a is a balloon displaying the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the character string and the pattern of "SP reach confirmed". It is a display including a part. The height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a is approximately twice the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1. In this example, the old balloon display f1 is configured to move upward and be erased in response to a change in the new balloon display f1', but for example, it is moved to either the left or right direction and erased. It may be overlapped by the balloon display f1a that has changed without moving, or it may be erased so as to fade out on the spot.

Following FIG. 243 (h), FIG. 243 (i) is stopped and displayed so that the balloon display f1a fits within the frame of the screen.

Following FIG. 243 (i), FIG. 243 (j) displays a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 at positions overlapping the balloon display f1a on the decorative symbol display device 208. , Indicates a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 243 (k) following FIG. 243 (j), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The character string of "SP reach confirmed" is deleted and the character string of "full rotation reach confirmed" is displayed. The character string of "full rotation reach confirmation" is displayed so as to protrude from the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a. The character string of "full rotation reach confirmed" includes decorative symbols, character images of the palace, hold icons, variable icons, special figure 1 hold number aa1, special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, special figure 2 hold number aa3, and special figure. There may be a case where the display of the fourth symbol aa4 of 2 or the number of reserved symbols aa5, the display of the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure, the display of the character string in the tutorial display area tu1, or the display other than these is overlapped.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed. After that, the balloon display f1a may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 244.

FIGS. 244 (a) to 244 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 244 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 244 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 244 (b) following FIG. 244 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, the character display m3 of the princess is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen. The character display m3 of the princess overlaps with the fourth symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure hold number aa5, and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure. There is.

Following FIG. 244 (b), FIG. 244 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation moving to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the character in the palace of the balloon display f1.

In FIG. 244 (d) following FIG. 244 (c), the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed. In addition, an animation is displayed in which the princess character m3 moves to the right, and the princess character m3 overlaps substantially the entire face image of the character in the balloon display f1 and the character image of "Den". It is displayed to do. If the balloon display f1 is stopped until the player presses the chance button 136, the princess character m3 may also be configured to stop moving in the right direction.

In FIG. 244 (e) following FIG. 244 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. In addition, an animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 is displayed on the left character part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the left character part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to overlap.

Following FIG. 244 (e), in FIG. 244 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, the animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 overlaps the character part in the middle part of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 and the character part in the middle part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to do.

Following FIG. 244 (f), FIG. 244 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation that moves to the right, and the princess character m3 is the character part on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, the pattern part of the sunny mark, and the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap the character part on the right side and the pattern part of the cloudy mark. Further, the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the button notice display h110 and a part of the operation expiration date display h112.

In FIG. 244 (h) following FIG. 244 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, the animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 has a cloudy mark pattern on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f2 and rain on the right part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3. It is displayed so as to overlap the pattern part of the mark and a part of the face image of the grandfather character.

Following FIG. 244 (h), in FIG. 244 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, the princess character m3 is displayed with an animation moving to the right, and is erased so as to come out from the right edge of the screen. A part of the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the grandfather character. After that, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 245.

FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 245 (a) shows, in the leftmost region of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 245 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 245 (b) following FIG. 245 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, it shows a state in which the structure 247 has moved substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to see the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 245 (b), FIG. 245 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 245 (c), in FIG. 245 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player In FIG. 245 (e), following FIG. 245 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. By pressing, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character appears from the bottom of the screen. It is displayed to do. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 245 (e), in FIG. 245 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark.

Following FIG. 245 (f), FIG. 245 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

In FIG. 245 (h) following FIG. 245 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f2, the character string portion, a part of the cloudy mark pattern, and a part of the frame portion of the balloon display f3.

Following FIG. 245 (h), in FIG. 245 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and the rain mark of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

In this example, the balloon display is configured to move while the structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but while the structure 247 is located at the initial position. The balloon display may be configured to move, or the balloon display may be configured to move while the structure 247 overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 246.

FIGS. 246 (a) to 246 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 246 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 246 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 246 (b) following FIG. 246 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays light emitting a smiling character. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 246 (b), FIG. 246 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 246 (c), in FIG. 246 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are difficult to see.

In FIG. 246 (e) following FIG. 246 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the sunny mark, and the cloudy mark of the balloon displays f1 and f2.

Following FIG. 246 (e), in FIG. 246 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the sunny mark, and the cloudy mark of the balloon displays f1 and f2.

Following FIG. 246 (f), FIG. 246 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, the frame portion of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are difficult to see.

In FIG. 246 (h) following FIG. 246 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, the frame portion of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, a part of the rain mark pattern, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are difficult to see.

Following FIG. 246 (h), in FIG. 246 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a light emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs light emission display. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the frame portion, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and the rain mark of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the light emitting panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying light emission, but only while the light emitting panel is not displaying light emission. , The balloon display may be configured to move.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 247.

FIGS. 247 (a) to 247 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 247 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 247 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 247 (a), in FIG. 247 (b), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display overlaps the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

Following FIG. 247 (b), FIG. 247 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is over a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, the whole character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, and all the characters of "the lord". I'm wrapping.

In FIG. 247 (d) following FIG. 247 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is over a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, the whole character string part, a part of the pattern of the weather mark, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, and all the characters of "the lord". I'm wrapping.

In FIG. 247 (e) following FIG. 247 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, the character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character and the face image of the grandfather character, the character string of "lunch weather", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display overlaps almost all of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, a part of the character of "Den", and a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2. .. Following FIG. 247 (e), in FIG. 247 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, a part of the face image of the character of the palace, almost the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, the face of the grandfather character. It overlaps a part of the image.

Following FIG. 247 (f), FIG. 247 (g) shows a position in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, almost the entire part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the grandfather character, and the button notice display. It overlaps with all of h110 and operation expiration date display h112.

In FIG. 247 (h) following FIG. 247 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, the character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character and the face image of the princess character, the character string of "afternoon weather", and the pattern of the rain mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display overlaps with almost the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the old character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, and a part of the character image of "princess". There is.

Following FIG. 247 (h), in FIG. 247 (i), a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is performed. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f2 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2, a part of the cloudy mark pattern, a part of the face image of the grandfather character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, the entire character string, and the rain mark. A part of the picture of the princess, a part of the face image of the princess character, and a part of the character image of "princess" overlap.

In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the first display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display is displayed only while the first display is not displayed. May be configured to move. In addition, the first display is hold display, hold icon, variable icon, notice icon, icon area display, decorative symbol, fourth symbol, mini decorative symbol, notice display, look-ahead notice display, tutorial display, pseudo-continuous display, reach. Display, right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, jackpot display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, number of consecutive villas display, number of acquired balls display, number of acquired sheets display, volume adjustment display, It may be at least one of a light amount adjustment display, a button press display, an error display, a ball removal display, a door open display, and an abnormality occurrence display.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 248.

FIGS. 248 (a) to 248 (h) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 248 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 248 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 248 (a), in FIG. 248 (b), a balloon display f1'by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed in. The balloon display f1'displays the character image of the character of the palace, the character image of the character of the palace displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo-ream chance!". It is a display including a blowout part. The balloon display f1'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 248 (b), FIG. 248 (c) displays a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon a4 is newly displayed in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

Following FIG. 248 (c), in FIG. 248 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1'on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game is played. It shows a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge a person to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 248 (e) following FIG. 248 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2'by the old character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1'moves upward is displayed. In the balloon display f2', the character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the old man character and the face image of the old man character, the character string of "pending change", and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed. It is a display including the balloon part.

Following FIG. 248 (e), in FIG. 248 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1'moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2'appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. Animation is performed, the balloon display f1'is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2'is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2'is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1'was stopped before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1'and the moving speed of the balloon display f2' are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

Following FIG. 248 (f), FIG. 248 (g) shows a state in which the cloudy mark pattern displayed on the balloon display f2'is moving toward the special FIGS. 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. There is.

Following FIG. 248 (g), in FIG. 248 (h), the cloudy mark pattern displayed on the balloon display f2'is replaced with the special figure 1 hold icon a4 in the default mode and displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a4. Has been done. After that, the balloon displays f1'and f2' may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or the hold icon or the variable icon may be changed by the animation. May be good.

The production of this example is an example in which continuous advance notice is performed by the balloon display f1'and the balloon display f2'. The balloon display f1'is used for the notice of the change, and the balloon display f2'is used for the look-ahead notice. Further, in this example, the pattern of the cloudy mark displayed inside the balloon part of the balloon display is moved and displayed as a hold icon. The notice icon used may be moved to the inside of the balloon part and displayed, or the icon displayed inside the balloon part may be overwritten with the notice icon. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 249.

FIGS. 249 (a) to 249 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using the balloon display. Further, in FIGS. 249 to 251 the sub liquid crystal a208 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub liquid crystal b208 is provided on the right side.

In FIG. 249 (a), the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, and a normal figure hold number aa5. The fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 249 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 249 (a), FIG. 249 (b) is a balloon display by the character of the palace from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). At the same time that a part of f1 appears, it blows out from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal a208 (the part at the same height as the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed so that another part of the display f1 appears. A part of the balloon display f1 is a balloon part in which the character string "Morning weather is" and the pattern of the sunny mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f1 is the face image of the character of the palace and the palace. The character image of "Den" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon part are applicable.

Following FIG. 249 (b), FIG. 249 (c) shows that a part of the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and another part of the balloon display f1 in the sub liquid crystal a208 are simultaneously turned upward. A moving animation is displayed, indicating a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub liquid crystal a208 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen.

In FIG. 249 (d) following FIG. 249 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 249 (e) following FIG. 249 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation are valid on the decorative symbol display device 208. By erasing the deadline display h112, a part of the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 appears from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (the portion having the same height as the boundary portion between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed to do. A part of the balloon display f2 is a balloon part in which the character string "Morning weather is" and the pattern of the cloudy mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f2 is the face image of the grandfather character and the grandfather. The character image of "old man" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon part correspond to it.

Following FIG. 249 (e), in FIG. 249 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 that appears from the lower part of the screen is performed. A movement animation is performed in which a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal a208, a movement animation in which the other part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed to stop and display at the upper part of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal b208, the other part of the balloon display f2 is displayed. A movement animation that moves upward is performed and a stop display is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Following FIG. 249 (f), FIG. 249 (g) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 at positions overlapping a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed.

Following FIG. 249 (g), FIG. 249 (h) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation are valid on the decorative symbol display device 208. By erasing the deadline display h112, an animation is displayed in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a part of the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, the other part of the balloon display f1 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, on the sub liquid crystal c208, an animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. A part of the balloon display f3 is a balloon part in which the character string "Afternoon weather is" and a picture of a rain mark are displayed, and the other part of the balloon display f3 is a face image of a princess character and a princess. The character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon part correspond to it.

Following FIG. 249 (h), in FIG. 249 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f3 that appears from the lower part of the screen is performed. A movement animation is performed in which a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped before this. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, a movement animation in which the other part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed to stop and display at the upper part of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal a208, the other part of the balloon display f3 is displayed. A movement animation that moves upward is performed, and the display is stopped at the center of the screen.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 250.

FIGS. 250 (a) to 250 (i) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

In FIG. 250 (a), the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, and a normal figure hold number aa5. The fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 250A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Following FIG. 250 (a), FIG. 250 (b) is a balloon display by the character of the palace from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed that f1 appears. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 250 (c) following FIG. 250 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed, and the display stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 250 (d) following FIG. 250 (c), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 250 (e) following FIG. 250 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the old character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and the animation that the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed.

In FIG. 250 (f) following FIG. 250 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is moved upward. A movement animation of moving toward the screen is performed, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 stops and displays is the position where the balloon display f1 previously stopped and displays. Further, although the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 250 (f), FIG. 250 (g) temporarily suspends the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping the above, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 250 (h) following FIG. 250 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation are valid on the decorative symbol display device 208. By erasing the deadline display h112, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. Further, from the upper end of the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 that has already been erased is displayed so as to appear reduced according to the size of the sub liquid crystal b208.

In FIG. 250 (i) following FIG. 250 (h), the animation of moving toward the balloon displays f2 and f3 is continuously performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 is performed on the sub liquid crystal b208. Is animated to move downward, and the balloon display is displayed at the bottom of the sub liquid crystal b208 so as to be accumulated. As described above, the effect of this example is an effect of storing the balloon display erased by the decorative symbol display device 208 in the sub liquid crystal b208. When the sub liquid crystal b208 is full of balloon displays, the old balloon display may be deleted, the new balloon display may be deleted, or all the balloon displays may be deleted. You may want to erase half of the balloon display.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed. Further, in this example, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is configured to be smaller than the balloon display f1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is decorated. It may be configured to be larger than the balloon display f1 displayed on the symbol display device 208, or may be configured to have the same size.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 251.

FIGS. 251 (a) to 251 (m) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 251 (a) shows, on the sub liquid crystal a208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, the normal figure hold number aa5. The fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 251 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 251 (a), FIG. 251 (b) is based on the character of the palace from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (the same height as the boundary between the reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area in special figures 1 and 2). The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part.

Following FIG. 251 (b), FIG. 251 (c) shows a state in which a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208.

FIG. 251 (d) following FIG. 251 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, while the stop display is being displayed, the movement of the balloon display f1 of the sub liquid crystal b208 is also stopped.

In FIG. 251 (e) following FIG. 251 (d), the next variation is started, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is started.

In FIG. 251 (f) following FIG. 251 (e), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed on the sub liquid crystal b208, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen faces upward. A moving animation is being performed. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 251 (g) following FIG. 251 (f), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208.

In FIG. 251 (h) following FIG. 251 (g), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208.

Following FIG. 251 (h), FIG. 251 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 9" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 251 (h), even during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the balloon display f1 and f2 are continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208, and the balloon display f3 appears from the lower part of the screen. ..

In FIG. 251 (j) following FIG. 251 (i), the next variation is started, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208. Is continuing.

In FIG. 251 (k) following FIG. 251 (j), the balloon display f1 to f3 is continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208, and the balloon display f6 appears from the lower part of the screen. There is. The balloon display f6 is the character image of "Chibihime" displayed on the face image of the character of Chibihime and the character image of "Princess Chibi" and the character strings of "Evening weather" and "Is it reach?" It is a display including a balloon part in which a picture of a clear mark is displayed. The balloon display f6 of this example is a display used as a notice that reach will be performed in the fluctuation.

In FIG. 251 (l) following FIG. 251 (k), the balloon displays f1 to f3 and f6 are continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the lower part of the screen is erased. At the stage when the entire balloon display f6 that appeared from is displayed, the scroll display of the balloon displays f2, f3, and f6 is interrupted or terminated.

FIG. 251 (m) following FIG. 251 (l) shows a state in which the reach effect of "decoration 4" is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this way, this example is an example in which the balloon display continues to be displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. Further, even during the stop display of the decorative pattern, the effect of the balloon display may be continuously performed by the sub liquid crystal.

The production of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

FIG. 252 shows two examples of the effect using the hold icon step by step. 252 shows an example of a pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 252 (i) to 252 (k) are produced after FIGS. 252 (a) to 252 (h), and FIG. 252 (i') after FIGS. 252 (a) to 252 (h). An example of the pattern 2 for producing the effect of ~ (l') is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 252 (a) to 252 (k).

FIG. 252 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 252 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 252 (b) following FIG. 252 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the palace appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Following FIG. 252 (b), FIG. 252 (c) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Indicates the displayed state.

Following FIG. 252 (c), in FIG. 252 (d), a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player It shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed.

In FIG. 252 (e) following FIG. 252 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. Second, the second balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the two balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed. In addition, there may be a case where three or more same balloon displays are continuous.

Following FIG. 252 (e), FIG. 252 (f) shows a movement animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward. As described above, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

In FIG. 252 (g) following FIG. 252 (f), the scroll display of both balloon displays f1 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button 136 is imitated at a position overlapping with both balloon displays f1. The button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect is performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

In FIG. 252 (h) following FIG. 252 (g), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , An animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed, and just before both balloon displays f1 are erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Further, the balloon display f1b is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f1b shows the face image of the character of the palace, the character image of "Den" displayed on the face image of the character of the palace, and "when all are on people, it is foolish but wisdom." What you can see and underneath is a display that includes a balloon that displays the character string and pattern of "It is wise but foolish to see." Further, the balloon portion of the balloon display f1b has a size that does not fit on one screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 252 (i) following FIG. 252 (h) shows a state in which the upper end of the balloon display f1b is located at the upper end of the screen.

FIG. 252 (j) following FIG. 252 (i) shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is scrolled.

Following FIG. 252 (j), FIG. 252 (k) shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is scrolled until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 252 (i') to 252 (l').

FIG. 252 (i'), which follows FIGS. 252 (a) to 252 (h), shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon portion f1b is temporarily stopped. The scroll display of the balloon portion f1b may be stopped once or a plurality of times.

Following FIG. 252 (i'), FIG. 252 (j') shows on the decorative symbol display device 208 the operation expiration date display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and the operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. The state in which h112 is displayed is shown.

In FIG. 252 (k') following FIG. 252 (j'), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the scroll display of the balloon portion f1b that has been stopped is restarted. NS.

Following FIG. 252 (k'), FIG. 252 (l') shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is scrolled until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized. After that, the balloon display f1b may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. Further, the button notice effect may be performed every time the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is stopped, or the button notice effect may not be performed. In the scroll display of the balloon display f1b, all of the character strings of "When all of them are on top of a person, they look stupid and wisdom, and what is below are wisdom and wisdom." May be scrolled or not all scrolled. When all the character strings are scroll-displayed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where all the character strings are not scroll-displayed.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

Next, an example of producing a balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 253.

FIGS. 253 (a) to 253 (g) show a stepwise example of an effect using a balloon display.

FIG. 253 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4. The number of reserved normal figures aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the normal figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 280 for displaying the variable icon display, and the variable icon ad1 in the default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. To the right of the variable icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280 ab, and the special figure 1 hold icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed toward you. To the right of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string "preparing" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the content of the effect currently being performed or the content of the effect that is not currently performed may be displayed. Further, FIG. 253 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

Following FIG. 253 (a), FIG. 253 (b) is displayed so that two balloon displays f1 appear at the same time from the upper right and lower right of the screen, and an animation of moving to the left at the same speed is displayed. .. In the balloon display f1, the character image of "Den", the character string of "Morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed on the face image of the character of the palace and the face image of the character of the palace are displayed. It is a display including the blowout part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, three or more same balloon displays may appear at the same time.

Following FIG. 253 (b), FIG. 253 (c) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that balloon displays f2 and f3 appear at the same time from the right edge of the screen, and an animation of moving to the left at the same speed is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, two or more different balloon displays may appear at the same time. In addition, the balloon display f1 above and below has started an animation of moving to the left at the same speed.

Following FIG. 253 (c), FIG. 253 (d) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 253 (d), FIG. 253 (e) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

Following FIG. 253 (e), FIG. 253 (f) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and exits from the left end in the order of appearance. It is the state just before being erased. Further, in this example, an animation is performed in which all the balloon displays move in the same direction at the same speed, but an animation in which each of the balloon displays moves in a different direction at a different speed may be performed. In addition, the balloon display used for the notice of the change or the look-ahead notice may be moved in a different direction from the notice not used for the notice of the change or the look-ahead notice, or may be moved at a different speed. There may be cases.

Following FIG. 253 (f), FIG. 253 (g) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and exits from the left end in the order of appearance. It shows the state after being erased. After that, the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the variable icon changes may be performed. In this example, the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 that started to be displayed at the same time are displayed at the same time, but one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 precedes the other. The display may end at, or one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 may move faster than the other. Further, although the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 that started to be displayed at the same time are displayed at the same time, one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be displayed before the other, or the balloon may be displayed. One of the display f2 and the balloon display f3 may move faster than the other.

The effect of this example may be used as a look-ahead notice or as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 234 to 254 is performed.

Next, two examples of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 254.

FIG. 254 (a) is an example of an effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed while the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 254 (a) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is not moved when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. In this example, since the balloon display f1 overlaps with the balloon display f2, the dialogue of the character displayed on the balloon display f1 and the dialogue of the character displayed on the balloon display f2 cannot be visually recognized at the same time.

FIG. 254 (b) is an example of an effect when the balloon display f2 is displayed while the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 254 (b) is an example of moving the balloon display f1 upward when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. By moving the balloon display f1 upward, the dialogue of the character displayed on the balloon display f1 and the dialogue of the character displayed on the balloon display f2 may be visually recognized at the same time.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described.

(E1) A first movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, see FIG. 204), a second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and (for example, see FIG. 204), and a first light emitting means. (For example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, see FIG. 204), second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 204). In the game table, the first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 204), and the first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means. (For example, see FIG. 204), the first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 204), and in the first state, with the first light emitting means. One of the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)), and in the second state, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means Both do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (d)), and the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means is the same in both the first state and the second state. It is an aspect (see, for example, FIGS. 205 (b) and (d)), and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state (for example,). , (See FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (d))).

The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(E2) The game console according to e1, in which the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)), and in the first state, the above. A game table characterized in that the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)).

(E3) The game console according to e1 or e2, wherein the first light emitting means is a means that may overlap with a structure (for example, a structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 211 (c). )), A game table characterized by that.

(E4) The game console according to any one of e1 to e3, in which the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means in the initial state (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)). A game table characterized by that.

(E5) The game console according to any one of 1 to e4, wherein the first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from an initial state to the second state through at least the first state. A game table characterized in that there is (for example, see FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (d)).

(E6) The game console according to any one of e1 to e5, wherein the first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34). The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, a movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 204), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third. (For example, see FIG. 205 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 205 (d)). A game table characterized by that.

(E7) The game console according to any one of e1 to e6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (see, for example, FIG. 204). A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)).

(E8) The gaming table according to e7, characterized in that, in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 205 (d)). A game table to play.

(E9) The game console according to any one of e1 to e8, wherein the first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3) (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)). ), The game table is characterized in that, in the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the cover (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)).

(E10) The game console according to any one of e1 to e9, and the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example,). (See FIG. 205 (b)).

(E11) The game console according to any one of e1 to e10, and the second state is a state during non-operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 205 (c)). ~ (E)), a game table characterized by this.

(E12) The game console according to any one of e1 to e11, comprising a substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)), wherein the substrate emits light. It is a substrate having both the means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)), and the first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)). ), A game table featuring that.

(E13) The game table according to any one of e1 to e12, comprising a game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125), and the first movable means is rearward of the game board. A game table characterized in that it is a means that can be operated with (for example, see FIG. 211).

(E14) The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e13, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(E15) The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e13, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

It should be noted that the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both of the two states.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered with the first cover. -In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting. -The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered with separate covers. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided by the second movable means. -The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means. -The second light emitting means may be a means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be monochromatic LEDs, one may be a monochromatic LED and the other may be a full-color LED, and one may be. A high-brightness LED and the other may be an ordinary LED. A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display means after the display means has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device is provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count of the count notice. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may move according to the digestion of the hold icon suggesting the movement of the movable object. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the notice suggesting the operation of the movable object. -The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice or as a look-ahead notice. good.

(F1) First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, see FIG. 204), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and (for example, see FIG. 204), first light emitting means. (For example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, see FIG. 204), second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 204). In the game table, the first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 204), and the first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means. (For example, see FIG. 204), the first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 204), and in the first state, with the first light emitting means. One of the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)), and in the second state, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means Both do not overlap with the second movable means (see, eg, FIG. 205 (d)), and the first light emitting means is a means covered by a first cover (eg, cover portion 90a3) (eg, cover portion 90a3). (See FIG. 204 (b)), the second light emitting means is a means covered with the first cover (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)).

The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(F2) The game console according to f1, in which the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)), and in the first state, the above. A game table characterized in that the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)).

(F3) The game console according to f1 or f2, wherein the first light emitting means is a means that may overlap with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 211 (c). )), A game table characterized by that.

(F4) The game console according to any one of f1 to f3, wherein the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means in the initial state (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)). A game table characterized by that.

(F5) The game console according to any one of f1 to f4, wherein the first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from an initial state to the second state through at least the first state. A game table characterized in that there is (for example, see FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (d)).

(F6) The game console according to any one of f1 to f5, wherein the first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34). The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, a movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 204), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third. (For example, see FIG. 205 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 205 (d)). A game table characterized by that.

(F7) The game console according to any one of f1 to f6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (see, for example, FIG. 204). A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)).

(F8) The gaming table according to f7, characterized in that, in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 205 (d)). A game table to play.

(F9) The game console according to any one of f1 to f8, wherein the first movable means is a means having a second cover (for example, a cover portion 90b3) (for example, FIG. 204 (for example). b)), the game table is characterized in that, in the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second cover (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)).

(F10) The game console according to any one of f1 to f9, wherein the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example,). A game table characterized in that (see FIG. 205 (b)).

(F11) The game console according to any one of f1 to f10, and the second state is a state during non-operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 205 (c)). ~ (E)), a game table characterized by this.

(F12) The game console according to any one of f1 to f11, comprising a substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)), wherein the substrate emits light. It is a substrate having both the means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)), and the first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)). ), A game table featuring that.

(F13) The game table according to any one of f1 to f12, comprising a game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125), and the first movable means is rearward of the game board. A game table characterized in that it is a means capable of operating in (for example, see FIG. 211).

(F14) The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f13, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(F15) The game table according to any one of f1 to f13, wherein the game table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

It should be noted that the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both of the two states. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered with the first cover. -In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting. -The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one of them may be non-light emitting. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered with separate covers. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided by the second movable means. -The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means.

-The second light emitting means may be a means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be monochromatic LEDs, one may be a monochromatic LED and the other may be a full-color LED, and one may be. A high-brightness LED and the other may be an ordinary LED. -A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display means after the display means has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device is provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count of the count notice. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may move according to the digestion of the hold icon suggesting the movement of the movable object. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the notice suggesting the operation of the movable object. -The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice or as a look-ahead notice. good.

(G1) A game table including a first movable means (for example, a movable body 1) and a second movable means (for example, a movable body 1), wherein the first movable means is the first. (For example, an operation of moving downward) is a means capable of carrying out the operation (for example, an operation of moving downward) (see, for example, FIG. 201 (c)), and the second movable means is a second operation (for example, an operation of moving downward). (See, for example, FIG. 202 (c)), the initial position of the second movable means is located behind the initial position of the first movable means (eg, FIG. 201 (a). ), The position of the second movable means that executed the second operation is located behind the first movable means that executed the first operation (see, for example, FIG. 203 (c)). ), A game table featuring that.

The appearance of the second movable means can be changed depending on the positional relationship with the first movable means, and the player's interest may be improved.

(G2) In the game table according to g1, the direction in which the first movable means moves in the first operation is the same as the direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation. (For example, see FIG. 203 (c)).

It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means even during the execution of the second operation.

(G3) In the game table according to g1 or g2, in a state where at least a part of the first movable means and a part of the second movable means are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the second movable means. A game table characterized in that the other part is visible from the front.

It may be possible to change the appearance of the second movable means.

(G4) The game console according to any one of g1 to g3, provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the position of the display means is the position where the second operation is executed. A game table characterized in that it is located behind the position of the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 203 (c)).

It may be possible to change the appearance of the display means.

(G5) The game console according to g4, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a first error display (for example, display of a character string of "please pull out the ball") (for example, FIG. 203 (b)), at least a portion of the first error display may be overlapped by at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means (eg, FIG. 203 (c)). )), A game table characterized by that.

It may be possible to change the appearance of the first error display.

(G6) The game table according to g5, wherein the first error display is a ball-less display (see, for example, FIG. 203 (b)).

It may be possible to change the appearance of the ball-less display.

(G7) The gaming table according to any one of g1 to g6, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(G8) The game table according to any one of g1 to g5, wherein the game table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

In addition, the direction in which the first movable means moves in the first movement may be upward, leftward, rightward, or downward, and the first movement may be a fall, and the components in the front-rear direction and the like. The orientation may include at least one of a horizontal component and a vertical component. -The direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation may be upward, left, right, or downward, and the first operation may be a fall, which is a component in the front-rear direction or a left-right direction. The orientation may include at least one of the components of the above and the components in the vertical direction.
-Both the first operation and the second operation may be executed at the same time, one may be executed after the other is executed, or only one or the other may be executed. • After both the first and second movements have been performed, both the first and second movable means may return to their initial position at the same time, one returning and then the other. May be good. -While one of the first movable means and the second movable means operates and returns to the initial position, the other may operate. -During the first operation, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emitting effect, or may perform the same light emitting effect as the LED of the first movable means. -During the second operation, the LED of the first movable means may perform a light emitting effect, or may perform the same light emitting effect as the LED of the second movable means. -Even if the first movable means is located in front of the second movable means, the LED of the second movable means may produce a light emitting effect, or may perform the same light emitting effect as the LED of the first movable means. good.

(H1) First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) and (for example, see FIG. 204), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) and (for example, see FIG. 204), first light emitting means. (For example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) and (for example, see FIG. 204), second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) and (for example, see FIG. 204). In the game table, the first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 204), and the first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means. (For example, see FIG. 204), the first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 204), and in the first state, with the first light emitting means. One of the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)), and in the second state, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means Both do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (d)), and in the initial state, at least a part of the first movable means and the second movable means has a structure. A game table characterized in that it overlaps a body (eg, structure 30a) (see, eg, FIG. 211A).

The appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(H2) The game console according to h1, in which the first light emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)), and in the first state, the above. A game table characterized in that the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 205 (b)).

(H3) The game console according to h1 or h2, wherein the first light emitting means is a means that may overlap with a structure (for example, a structure 30c) (for example, FIG. 211 (c). )), A game table characterized by that.

(H4) The game console according to any one of h1 to h3, wherein the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means in the initial state (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)). A game table characterized by that.

(H5) The game console according to any one of h1 to h4, wherein the first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from an initial state to the second state through at least the first state. A game table, characterized in that there is (for example, see FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (d)).

(H6) The game console according to any one of h1 to h5, wherein the first movable means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34). The first movable means is a means having a third movable means (for example, a movable body 90c) (see, for example, FIG. 204), and in the first state, the third light emitting means is the third. (For example, see FIG. 205 (b)), and in the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 205 (d)). A game table characterized by that.

(H7) The game console according to any one of h1 to h6, wherein the second movable means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (see, for example, FIG. 204). A game table characterized in that, in an initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)).

(H8) The gaming table according to h7, characterized in that, in the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 205 (d)). A game table to play.

(H9) The game console according to any one of h1 to h8, wherein the first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3), and in an initial state, the first movable means. A game table characterized in that the light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the cover (see, for example, FIG. 205 (a)).

(H10) The game console according to any one of h1 to h9, wherein the first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example,). (See FIG. 205 (b)).

(H11) The game console according to any one of h1 to h10, and the second state is a state during non-operation of the first movable means (for example, FIG. 205 (c)). ~ (E)), a game table characterized by this.

(H12) The game console according to any one of h1 to h11, comprising a substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)), wherein the substrate emits light. It is a substrate having both the means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)), and the first movable means is a means having the substrate (see, for example, FIG. 204 (b)). ), A game table featuring that.

(H13) The game table according to any one of h1 to h12, comprising a game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125), and the first movable means is rearward of the game board. A game table characterized in that it is a means that can be operated with (for example, see FIG. 211).

(H14) The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h13, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(H15) The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h13, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

It should be noted that the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both of the two states. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered with the first cover. -In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may overlap with the structure. -The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting. -The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means may be a different light emitting mode in the first state and the second state, or one of them may be non-light emitting. -The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered with separate covers.

-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided by the second movable means. -The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means. -The second light emitting means may be a means that does not overlap with the second movable means in the initial state, the first state, and the second state. -Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be monochromatic LEDs, one may be a monochromatic LED and the other may be a full-color LED, and one may be. A high-brightness LED and the other may be an ordinary LED. -A movable display means may be provided, and the first movable means may move from the rear to the front of the display means after the display means has moved. A transmissive liquid crystal display device is provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device. A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count of the count notice. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may move according to the digestion of the hold icon suggesting the movement of the movable object. -At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the notice suggesting the operation of the movable object. -The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice or as a look-ahead notice. good.

(I1) A game table including a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) and a structure (for example, a structure 247).
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display (for example, the character display SB of Sabohani) at the first position (for example, the lower center of the display area) (see, for example, FIG. 213 (c)).
At least a part of the structure is located at a position overlapping a part of the display means (see, for example, FIG. 213), and the first display displayed at the first position is the structure. A game table characterized in that the display may overlap with (for example, see FIG. 213 (c)).

It may be possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of playing by changing the direction in which the game table is viewed, and to improve the interest of the player.

(I2) In the game console according to i1, the structure is a movable structure (see, for example, FIG. 222), and the first display displayed at the first position is the same. A game table characterized in that the display does not overlap with the structure after the structure is moved.

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I3) The game console according to i1 or i2, wherein the display means is a movable display means.
The game table, which is displayed at the first position, is a display that does not overlap with the structure after the display means is moved.

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I4) The game console according to any one of i1 to i3, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying the first display at a second position (for example, a central portion of a display area). The game table is characterized in that the first display displayed at the second position is a display that does not overlap with the structure (see, for example, FIG. 213 (e)).

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I5) In the game table according to i4, the first display may be displayed at the first position and then displayed at the second position (see, for example, FIG. 213). A game table featuring.

The appearance of the first display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I6) The game console according to any one of i1 to i5, wherein the first display is a notice display (see, for example, FIG. 213).

The appearance of the notice display can be changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

(I7) The gaming table according to any one of i1 to i6, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(I8) The gaming table according to any one of i1 to i6, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

In addition, ・ The first display may be a look-ahead notice display, a display including characters, an icon display, a hold icon display, or a variation. It may be an icon display, a character display, or an error display. -The first display displayed at the second position may overlap with the structure. -The first display displayed at the second position may overlap with the structure after the display means is moved. -The structure may be provided with display means, may be provided with an LED substrate, and may be movable. -The display means may be movable. -The structure may be a transmissive liquid crystal display, and the first display may be performed at the rear while the transmissive liquid crystal display is being displayed. -The structure may be a light emitting panel, and the first display may be made at the rear during the light emitting display of the light emitting panel.

(Drawing) -Example of moving the notice display from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it does not overlap-The notice display does not overlap from the first position where it overlaps the structure. Example of moving to the second position and then moving to the first position-The notice display overlaps with the structure. It does not overlap from the first position. After moving to the second position, it overlaps with the other structure. Move to 3rd position / Notice display does not overlap with structure Example / Notice display always overlaps from 4th position Moves to 1st position and then moves to 5th position Visible example-The notice display is displayed in the first position where it overlaps the structure, and the other notice display moves to the second position where it does not overlap.-The notice display is displayed in the second position, etc. Example of moving the notice display to the first position-Example of moving the notice display from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it does not overlap, and the effect display can be seen first-The notice display An example of giving a notice of the notice display before it is displayed at the first position that overlaps the structure, an example of the notice display appearing enlarged ・ The notice display is displayed at the second position, and the structure is moved or Example in which the notice display of the second position is hidden by the movement of the display means (j1) A game table provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display, wherein the display means is , A means capable of displaying a plurality of icons, one of the plurality of icons is a hold icon, and during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation by the icon (hereinafter, "first animation"). (For example, a moving animation of the notice display m1)), and after the display of the first animation, the first effect display (for example, the effect of pseudo continuous variation) in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed. A game table characterized in that it may be performed (see, for example, FIG. 224).

It may be possible to attract the player's attention to the decorative pattern variation display and improve the player's interest.

(J2) The game console according to j1, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon as a variable icon.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of hold icons and variable icons.

(J3) The game console according to j1 or j2, the first animation is an animation including a change display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 233 (f) and (g)). A game table characterized by that.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J4) The game console according to any one of j1 to j3, and the first animation is an animation including a movement display of the icon (for example, FIGS. 224 (f) to 224 (f) to (j4). i) Refer to), a game table characterized by. You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J5) The game console according to any one of j1 to j4, and the first animation is an animation including a reduction display of the icon (for example, FIGS. 224 (f), (f), (1). g) See),
A game table characterized by that.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J6) The game console according to any one of j1 to j5.
The first animation is an animation including an increase display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 224 (j) and 224 (k)).

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J7) The game console according to j6, wherein the increase display in one icon may be displayed a plurality of times (see, for example, FIG. 228).

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of one icon more.

(J8) The game console according to any one of j1 to j7.
The first effect display is a pseudo continuous variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 224 (h)).

In some cases, the decorative pattern variation display can attract the attention of the player.

(J9) The game console according to any one of j1 to j8.
The first effect display is a reach variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 230 (j)).

In some cases, the decorative pattern variation display can attract the attention of the player.

(J10) The game console according to any one of j1 to j9, wherein the first effect display is an operation effect display in the decorative symbol variation display. ..

In some cases, the decorative pattern variation display can attract the attention of the player.

(J11) The first game table according to any one of j1 to j10, when the icon is displayed in the icon display area (for example, special figures 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab). Animation is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 225 (f)), and during at least a part of the display period of the first animation, another display (for example, a character string of "preparing") is displayed in the icon display area. An icon) may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 225 (g)).

In some cases, the display of the icon display area can attract the attention of the player.

(J12) The game console according to any one of j1 to j11, and during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, animation by two or more of the icons (hereinafter, referred to as "second animation"). It may be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 233 (f)), and the first effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the display of the second animation (for example, FIG. 233 (h)). (See), a game table characterized by that.

You may be able to enjoy the behavior of two or more icons more.

(J13) The gaming table according to any one of j1 to j12, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

In addition, ・ The icon does not have to be moved and nothing is displayed in the original icon display area, the temporary icon display may be displayed instead, or other icons are moved (packed). It may be displayed. -If the icon is moved and then displayed again (returned) in the original icon display area, it may be displayed in an increased manner, may be displayed so as to overlap with another icon display, or may be displayed in another icon. May be displayed to dismiss. -The decorative symbol may change after the first animation, it may be erased (destroyed), it may shift from the shaking fluctuation display to the fluctuation display, or the special symbol may be temporarily stopped in the middle symbol. May be good. -The first effect display does not have to be performed after the first animation. -The first animation may be performed multiple times during one decorative symbol variation display. -The first animation may be performed multiple times with one icon during a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays. -An icon with a high degree of expectation may be easier to perform the first animation than an icon with a low degree of expectation, or vice versa. -The first animation may be easier to perform in the case of the hold full tank than in the case of the hold non-full tank, or vice versa. -A notice may be displayed suggesting that the first animation will be performed. -A count notice display (timer effect) suggesting the start time of the first animation may be performed. -The first animation may be performed when an icon (mini item) different from the hold icon or variable icon is digested. -The first animation may be performed when the result of the mini game is the first result.

(drawing)
-FIGS. 224 to 233 are examples in which the hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol during the shaking fluctuation of the detached symbol, and the decorative symbol variation display re-variates (pseudo-ream).
FIG. 225 is an example of displaying a temporary icon on the hold pedestal while the hold icon is moving. -Fig. 226 is an example of returning to the original position when the hold icon behind is packed and returned while the hold icon is moving.
-Fig. 227 is an example of a ghost effect that does not develop even if the hold icon collides.
FIG. 228 is an example in which the same hold icon performs the first animation a plurality of times with one fluctuation.
-Fig. 229 is an example in which different hold icons perform the first animation in one fluctuation.
FIG. 230 is an example of reaching after the first animation of the hold icon.
-Fig. 231 is an example in which the variable icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol.
-Fig. 232 is an example in which the same hold icon collides with each other over a plurality of fluctuations and develops into reach.
-Fig. 233 is an example in which a plurality of hold icons collide with a decorative symbol at the same time to reach.

(K1) A game table provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays, and one of the plurality of displays is displayed. , A first balloon display (for example, a balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 235 (f)), and one of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, a balloon display f2). (For example, see FIG. 235 (f)), and while the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (for example, FIG. 235 (for example). e)), at least a part of the first display area and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (see, for example, FIG. 235 (e)).

Since the player can visually recognize the second balloon display without changing the line of sight, he / she can concentrate on the game and improve the interest of the player.

(K2) The game console according to k1, the display means means the movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as "first movement animation" (for example, upward movement animation)). It is a displayable means (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (d) and (e)), and the first movement animation is displayed after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area. A game table characterized in that there are cases (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (d) and (e)).

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(K3) The game console according to k2, the display means is referred to as a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter, "second movement animation" (for example, a movement animation moving to the left). ) Is displayed, and the second balloon display is displayed after the second movement animation is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 235 (f)).

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(K4) The game console according to k2 or k3, which is referred to as another movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as a "third movement animation" (for example, a movement animation moving to the right)). The first balloon display is displayed in the first display area (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (b) and (c)), and the first movement animation and the third movement animation are the first movement animation. A game table characterized in that the direction in which one balloon display moves may be different (see, for example, FIG. 235).

It may be possible to raise the player's expectation by changing the direction of movement by the movement animation.

(K5) In the game console according to any one of k1 to k4, at least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (for example, FIG. 235 (e)), a game table characterized by the above.

In some cases, both the first balloon display and the second balloon display can attract the player's interest.

(K6) In the game console according to any one of k1 to k5, at least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (k6). For example, (see FIG. 235 (e)), a game table characterized by the above.

In some cases, the second balloon display in the foreground can attract the player's interest.

(K7) The game console according to any one of k1 to k6, the first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace), and the second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace). It is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace), and the character of the first balloon display and the character of the second balloon display may be the same (see, for example, FIGS. 252 (f) and 252 (g)). , A game table featuring that.

The balloon display of the same character may be continuously displayed to increase the player's expectation.

(K8) The game console according to any one of k1 to k7, provided with operating means (for example, chance button 136), and the operating means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed. In some cases, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (d) and 235 (e)).

It may be possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game.

(K9) The gaming table according to any one of k1 to k8, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(K10) The game console according to any one of k1 to k8, wherein the game console is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

It should be noted that the balloon display may be moved or disappeared while being overlapped with other displays (for example, notice, error display, ball-out display). -A part of the balloon display may disappear after the movement display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be heard at the same time or in order. -The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half. -It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played in reverse or the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed).

-A part of the redisplayed balloon display may have changed (the color may change to red, gold, or rainbow, or the characters may change to characters with high expectations). -When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with high expectation may remain and the other balloon display (balloon display with low expectation) may disappear preferentially. -The balloon display may be enlarged, or the characters in the balloon display may be displayed outside the frame of the balloon display. -The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means. -Character animation may be performed during the movement animation of the balloon display. -The balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations. -A balloon display may be used to give a pre-reading notice. -A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means is used as the other. The balloon display may be moved to, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

(drawing)
-Fig. 234 is an example of a conversation notice.
-Fig. 235 shows an example of a conversation notice.-The appearance animation moves horizontally, and the animation when a new balloon appears moves vertically (the animation of the new balloon and the animation of the old balloon move at the same time). -Fig. 236 is an example of a conversation notice-the appearance animation moves horizontally, and the animation when a new balloon appears is an example of vertical movement (an example of timing modification-an animation of a new balloon after an animation of an old balloon).
-Fig. 237 is an example of conversation notice-the appearance animation moves horizontally, and the animation when a new balloon appears is an example of vertical movement (example of timing modification-animation of old balloon after animation of new balloon).
-Fig. 238 is an example of a conversation notice, an example of the appearance animation moving vertically, and an example in which the size of the balloon is different from normal, half, and double.
-Fig. 239 is an example of a conversation notice, an example in which a disappeared character returns, and an example in which the content changes when the character returns.
-FIG. 240 is an example of a conversation notice-a specific balloon (for example, a balloon with a high degree of expectation) is not erased.
-Fig. 241 is an example of conversation notice and an example of overlapping balloons.
-Fig. 242 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which an old speech bubble is reduced.
-Fig. 243 is an example of a conversation notice, an example in which balloons of the same character are continuous, an example in which the balloon is enlarged, and an example in which the content of the balloon protrudes from the balloon.
-Fig. 244 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which the balloon moves while the notice character is moving.
-Fig. 245 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a balloon moves while a movable body is in operation.
FIG. 246 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a balloon moves while the light emitting panel in front of the display device emits light.
-Fig. 247 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which the balloon moves while the first display is displayed.
-Fig. 248 is an example of a conversation notice-a balloon is a look-ahead notice (the hold icon changes to a look-ahead icon).
-Fig. 249 is an example of a conversation notice-an example in which a character and a balloon are displayed on separate display means.
-FIG. 250 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a balloon moves to another display means.
-Fig. 251 is an example of a conversation notice and an example in which a balloon is displayed over a plurality of fluctuations.

(L1) A game table provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays, and one of the plurality of displays is displayed. , A first balloon display (for example, a balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 235 (f)), and one of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, a balloon display f2). (For example, see FIG. 235 (f)), and while the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (for example, FIG. 235 (for example). e)), while the second balloon display is being displayed, the first balloon display may be displayed in the second display area (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (e) and (f)). A game table characterized by that.

By displaying the first balloon display in a different display area even while the second balloon display is being displayed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the relationship between the two balloon displays, so that the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the player's interests. Can be improved.

(L2) The game console according to l1, the display means means the movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as "first movement animation" (for example, upward movement animation)). It is a displayable means (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (d) and (e)), and the first movement animation is displayed after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area. A game table characterized in that there are cases (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (d) and (e)).

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(L3) The game console according to l1 or l2, wherein the display means is a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter, "second movement animation" (for example, a movement animation moving to the left)). The second movement animation is displayed, and then the second balloon display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 235 (f)). The stand.

In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(L4) In the game console according to any one of l1 to l3, at least a part of the first balloon display and at least a part of the second balloon display may overlap (for example, FIG. See 235 (e)),
A game table characterized by that.

In some cases, both the first balloon display and the second balloon display can attract the player's interest.

(L5) In the game console according to any one of l1 to l4, at least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (l5). For example, (see FIG. 235 (e)), a game table characterized by the above.

In some cases, the second balloon display in the foreground can attract the player's interest.

(L6) The game console according to any one of l1 to l5, the first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace), and the second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace). It is a display including a character (for example, a character of a palace), and the character of the first balloon display and the character of the second balloon display may be the same (see, for example, FIGS. 252 (f) and 252 (g)). , A game table featuring that.

The balloon display of the same character may be continuously displayed to increase the player's expectation.

(L7) The game console according to any one of l1 to l6, provided with operating means (for example, chance button 136), and the operating means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed. In some cases, the second balloon display may be started to be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 235 (d) and 235 (e)).

It may be possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game.

(L8) The game console according to any one of l1 to l7, and one of the plurality of displays is a third balloon display (for example, balloon display f5) (for example, FIG. 238 (q)), while the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the third balloon display may start to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 238 (n)). The width of the first balloon display and the width of the second balloon display are the same, and the width of the first balloon display and the width of the third balloon display are different (see, for example, FIG. 238 (q)). ), A game table featuring that.

By changing the width of the balloon display, it may be possible to increase the player's expectation.

(L9) The gaming table according to any one of l1 to l8, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(L10) The game console according to any one of l1 to l8, wherein the game console is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

It should be noted that the balloon display may be moved or disappeared while being overlapped with other displays (for example, notice, error display, ball-out display). -A part of the balloon display may disappear after the movement display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be heard at the same time or in order. -The size of the balloon display may be the same as that of the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half. -It may be redisplayed after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be played in reverse or the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed). -A part of the redisplayed balloon display may have changed (the color may change to red, gold, or rainbow, or the characters may change to characters with high expectations). -When displaying a new balloon display, the balloon display with high expectation may remain and the other balloon display (balloon display with low expectation) may disappear preferentially.

-The balloon display may be enlarged, or the characters in the balloon display may be displayed outside the frame of the balloon display. -The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means. -Character animation may be performed during the movement animation of the balloon display. -The balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of fluctuations. -A balloon display may be used to give a pre-reading notice. -A balloon display may be performed by the second display means, a balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means is used as the other. The balloon display may be moved to, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

Each event (each effect) may be executed in series or in parallel.

It should be noted that each event (each effect) can be a combination of a part or all of a certain event (a certain effect) and a part or all of another event (another effect).

Each event (each effect) may be executed in series or in parallel.

Each event (each effect) may only be executed in series.

Each event (each effect) may only be executed in parallel.

Here, serial execution means that a certain event (a certain effect) ends and then another event (another effect) starts, and parallel execution means a certain event (or another effect). It suffices if there is a state in which an event (another effect) and another event (another effect) are performed at the same time. And the end timing can be combined as appropriate.

Further, each event (each effect) may be configured to be executable in parallel and / or serially only in a certain state, or may be configured to be executable without distinguishing between states. ..

A certain state may be a state of transition by a player operation or a state of transition without a player operation (for example, a state of transition after a player operation without a player operation). In that case, it may be the final opportunity or the first opportunity.)

Here, "transition without relying on player operation" may be a transition based on a lottery, a transition corresponding to a control state, or a combination of both. It may be.

Here, the "lottery" may be a lottery related to the advantage to the player, or may be a lottery not related to the advantage to the player.

Here, the "control state" may be a state related to the advantage to the player or a state not related to the advantage to the player (for example, the control state 1 and the control state 2). Therefore, the advantage to the player may be different or may not be different.)

To specifically explain the states in which the advantages to the player are different, in the case where there are the control state 1 and the control state 2, if the advantage is different by staying in the control state N itself, the staying itself In the case of, the advantage is not different, and there may be a difference in the advantage after staying, and any of them may be used.

The image used in the explanation of each figure (each event (each production)) is an image for explanation, and of course, another image may be used, for example, an image of a lord (male character). It is also possible to replace it with an image of a princess (female character).

Further, even if the image explaining a certain effect and the image explaining another effect are the same image, the image explaining the other effect is replaced with another image, and then the image is described as a certain effect. It is also possible to perform other effects in parallel and / or in series.

Further, when the image explaining a certain effect and the image explaining another effect are the same image, it is not possible to execute them in parallel and / or in series, but to execute them alternately. May be good.

In addition to the cases where the images are the same, there are cases where the timings are the same (for example, both are in the process of super reach) and the locations are the same (for example, both are on hold display areas), but the same applies in this case as well.

Specifically, even if the timing is the same, for example, the first half and the second half of the super reach may be executed in series, and even if the locations are the same, they may be executed in parallel at different locations. It may be executed in series with the first half and the second half of Super Reach at the same place.

Each event (each effect) is realized by a certain means (effect means). A certain means (effect means) may be composed of a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices). Each event (each effect) performed by each of the plurality of devices (plurality of effect devices) may be performed by one device (effect device). Each event (each effect) performed by one device (effect device) may be performed by a plurality of devices (plurality of effect devices). The devices (effect devices) include display devices such as the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, movable bodies 700, 702, and the like. Movable body can be mentioned.

In addition, each event (each effect) may be described by taking one device (effect device) as an example. For example, in the case of notification, it is applied to another device (effect device) capable of notification. Is possible. Further, for example, in the case of notification, it may be configured to be feasible with a plurality of devices (plurality of effect devices). Further, in the case where a plurality of devices (plurality of effect devices) are configured to be feasible, a part or all of the characteristics of a certain notification may be applied to each of the plurality of devices (plurality of effect devices). Each configuration in each event (each effect) may be merely an example, and even if only one of each event (each effect) has a configuration, the other configuration may be provided. It may be possible to combine after complementing the above, or it may be possible to combine after deleting a certain configuration provided only on one side. Further, the combination may be denied due to the difference in configuration.

FIGS. 255 to 270 are diagrams showing stepwise change effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIGS. 255 to 270 is an example of the effect executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the effect example shown in FIGS. 255 to 270 is shown in another drawing. Various effects can also be performed. Further, in FIGS. 255 to 270, the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N may be used instead of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, the second decorative symbol display device 208L may be used. The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown. Further, in FIGS. 255 to 270, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 255 to 270 represent common components when the same reference numerals as those used so far are used. Moreover, even if different codes are used, they may be common in terms of technical ideas. That is, as a technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 14 to 158 and the technical idea shown in other drawings to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 255 to 270, and the technical idea thereof. Conversely, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 255 to 270 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 158 and other technical ideas shown in the drawings. At that time, those having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced.

Although the description in FIGS. 255 to 270 can be applied to any of the production examples in this specification, it is preferably applied to the production examples described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 158.

FIG. 255 is a diagram showing some examples in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. ..

In the example shown in FIGS. 255 (A1) to (A8), first, in FIG. 255 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration”). 2 ”-“ Decoration 3 ”-“ Decoration 2 ”) is stopped and displayed. A second decorative symbol having a size smaller than that of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (A1).

Further, the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (A1). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The variable icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1 formed on the pedestal hs0. In this production example, the position of the icon display area HN1 is shown by being surrounded by a broken line for convenience, but it is actually invisible. Further, the icon display area HN1 is an area in which the variable icon can execute the standby animation, and the same applies to the icon display area HN1 in FIGS. 151 to 270. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord may be displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items may be performed.

Further, in FIG. 255 (A1), the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is 4, and the first holding icon h11, the second holding icon h12, the third holding icon h13, and the fourth holding icon h14 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. ing. Both hold icons are in the default (white) display mode. That is, at least a part of each hold icon is displayed in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (A1), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that.

Further, FIG. 255 (A1) is a state in which the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon is erased.

In FIG. 255 (A2), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. , The icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the first variable icon h01. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first variable icon h01 are the default (white) display modes. This variable icon is also displayed in white, at least in part. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (A2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. In FIG. 255 (A3), a second variable icon h02 different from the first variable icon h01 appears from the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and falls in the vertical direction. .. The second variable icon h02 in this production example has the same size as the first variable icon h01, but is different in color and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 255 (A4) to (A6), the second variable icon h02 continuously falls and overlaps with a part of the first variable icon h01. Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (A6), when all of the second variable icon H02 overlaps with all of the first variable icon h01, the first variable icon h01 is deleted as shown in FIG. 255 (A7). The second variable icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and it is shown that the variable icon is changing from the default display mode to the notice display mode (blue display mode).

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 255 (A3) and ended immediately before the figure (A7), or while the second variable icon h02 is moving and displayed (the figure (A3)). ) ~ Fig. (A6)) can be regarded as an animation that is performed only. While the icon change animation is being displayed, the first decorative symbol may be erased and the variable display may be performed only in the second decorative symbol, or the second decorative symbol may be erased and the variable display may be performed only in the first decorative symbol. May be done. Further, the period during which the decorative symbol is erased may be the entire period during which the icon change animation is being displayed, or may be a part of the period.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (A8). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the variable icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice. In this production example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 255 (A1) to 255 (A8) described above, the second variable icon h02 appears in addition to the first variable icon h01, and the variable icon in the default display mode is changed to the first color. This is an example of changing with the frequency (probability) of the first A.

Next, the examples shown in FIGS. 255 (B1) to (B8) will be described focusing on the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 255 (A1) to (A8), and duplicated explanations will be omitted. There is. In the following description, the description overlapping with the examples shown in FIGS. 255 (A1) to (A8) may be omitted, but the description in the examples shown in FIGS. 255 (A1) to (A8) may be omitted. Is true. In the example shown in FIGS. 255 (B1) to (B8), FIGS. (B1) to (B4) are the same as those in FIGS. 255 (A1) to (A4) described above. The appearance of the second variable icon h02 falling is shown. Subsequently, in FIG. 255 (B5), after all of the second variable icon h02 overlaps with all of the first variable icon 01, the icon display area HN1 is further dropped in the vertical direction, and the display screen is displayed. It is shown that the frame out is started from the lower end of. After that, FIGS. 255 (B6) to 255 (B7) show that the second variable icon h02 is completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the variable icon does not change. If the display mode of the variable icon does not change from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h02, the second variable icon h02 may pass behind the first variable icon h01. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (B8), the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect fails. In this effect example, the hold change effect fails and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

In the example shown in FIGS. 255 (C1) to (C8), first, in FIG. 255 (C1), the decorative symbol display device 208 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration”). 2 ”-“ Decoration 3 ”-“ Decoration 2 ”) is stopped and displayed. A second decorative symbol having a size smaller than that of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (C1).

Further, the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (C1). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The variable icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1 formed on the pedestal hs0. In this production example, the position of the icon display area HN1 is shown by being surrounded by a broken line for convenience, but it is actually invisible. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the character of the lord may be displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items may be performed.

Further, in FIG. 255 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 4, and the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, the third hold icon h13, and the fourth hold icon h14 in special figure 1 are displayed. ing. In this production example, only the second hold icon h12 out of the four hold icons is displayed in blue, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, but all the other hold icons are displayed by default (white). It is an aspect. The second hold number display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (C1), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 4, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. It has been notified that.

Further, FIG. 255 (C1) is a state in which the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon is erased.

In FIG. 255 (C2), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. , The icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the first variable icon h01. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, but the other hold icons h12, h13 and the first variable icon h01 are the default (white) display modes. This variable icon is also displayed in white, at least in part. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (C2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified.

In FIG. 255 (C3), a second variable icon h02 different from the first variable icon h01 appears from the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and falls in the vertical direction. .. The second variable icon h02 in this production example has a size larger than that of the first variable icon h01, and has a different color, and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 255 (C4) to (C6), the second variable icon h02 continuously falls and overlaps with a part of the first variable icon h01. Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (C6), when a part of the second variable icon H02 overlaps the entire first variable icon h01, the second variable icon h02 is reduced as shown in FIG. 255 (C7). When it is displayed and becomes the same size as the first variable icon h01, the first variable icon h01 is erased, the second variable icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the variable icon is changed from the default display mode to the notice display mode. It is shown that the display mode is changing to (blue display mode). In this production example, as shown in FIG. 255 (C6), the second variable icon h02 is displayed in a large size and overlaps with the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that the second variable icon h02 overlaps with the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the notice, and the second variable icon h02 overlaps with the notice display.

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 255 (C3) and ended immediately before the figure (C7), or while the second variable icon h02 is moving and displayed (the figure (C3)). ) ~ Fig. (C6)) can be regarded as an animation that is performed only.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (C8). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the variable icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice. In this production example, a pending change effect in which the display mode of the variable icon changes is performed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. May be good. This also applies to the following description.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 255 (C1) to 255 (C8) described above, the second variable icon h02 appears in addition to the first variable icon h01, and the variable icon in the default display mode is changed to the first color. This is an example of changing with the frequency (probability) of the first A.

Next, the examples shown in FIGS. 255 (D1) to (D8) will be described focusing on the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 255 (C1) to (C8), and duplicated explanations will be omitted. There is. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 255 (C1) to FIG. (C8), a part of the hold icons was set as the advance notice display mode, but in the production examples shown in FIGS. , All hold icons are the default display mode. In the example shown in FIGS. 255 (D1) to (D8), FIGS. (D1) to (D4) are the same as those in FIGS. 255 (C1) to (C4) described above. It is shown that the second variable icon h02, which is larger in size than the first variable icon h01, falls. Subsequently, in FIG. 255 (D5), after a part of the second variable icon h02 overlaps the entire first variable icon h01, the second variable icon h02 is reduced and displayed in the vertical direction without being animated. It is shown that the fall is further performed and the frame out is started from the lower end of the display screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 255 (D6) to (D7), the second variable icon h02 was completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the variable icon did not change. There is. If the display mode of the variable icon does not change from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h02, the second variable icon h02 may pass behind the first variable icon h01. Further, after a part of the second variable icon h02 overlaps with all of the first variable icon h01, an animation is performed in which the second variable icon h02 is reduced and displayed, and then the second variable icon h02 is displayed at the lower end of the display screen. You may frame out from. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (D8), the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect fails.

As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 255 are examples in which the variable icon is targeted, but the hold icon may be targeted in some cases.

Further, as the embodiment of the second variable icon h02, blue has been described as an example, but other colors such as green and red may be used, or other patterns may be used. That is, a plurality of types of modes are prepared as modes for expressing the player's advantage and the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, the lowest aspect is the white or unpatterned aspect (A aspect), the blue or diagonal line pattern aspect (B aspect), the green or diamond pattern aspect (C aspect), the red or the like. The pattern becomes higher in the order of the lattice pattern (D), the golden or vertical line pattern (E), and the iridescent or horizontal line pattern (F) becomes the highest. .. Although a plurality of types of modes are prepared for each of the variable icon and the hold icon, each mode is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. 255. That is, the white color in the example described with reference to FIG. 255 may be replaced with blue color. For example, the first variable icon h01, which has a white display mode, may have a blue display mode or a green display mode. Further, the first variable icon h01, which was a white display mode, may be a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, the blue color in the example described with reference to FIG. 255 may be replaced with white or green. The modes can be broadly divided into green and diamond-shaped patterns (the first aspect) and the following aspects (the first group, which is a group of the A aspect, the B aspect, and the C aspect), and red and red. It can be divided into the above-mentioned aspect (the second group which is a group of the D aspect, the E aspect, and the F aspect) of the lattice pattern (the D aspect). Here, the mode belonging to the first group cannot be changed to the mode belonging to the second group, and the mode belonging to the second group cannot be changed to the mode belonging to the first group. On the other hand, it may be possible to switch the modes within the first group and also to switch the modes within the second group. Further, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's advantage and the expectation of the big hit may be expressed by the difference in size and number. Further, the advantage of the player is that it is easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probabilistic state or / and a time saving state), that the premier production is likely to be started, or that the jackpot confirmation production is started. It may be easy. It also includes the fact that it is easy to perform an effect that indirectly connects to the jackpot without directly connecting to the jackpot. For example, the SP reach effect with high reliability of the jackpot may be started, or another notice with high reliability of the jackpot may easily appear. The matters relating to the embodiments described in this paragraph are the same in the previous examples and in the subsequent examples.

Further, the mode of each icon may be the mode of the entire icon (entire area) or the mode of only a part (partial area) of the icon.

Further, in all the examples described with reference to FIG. 255, the normal notice by the variable icon whose display mode has changed was a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice. Further, even if the pending change effect in which the display mode of the variable icon changes fails, it may be a big hit, or it may be always missed.

FIG. 256 is a diagram showing some other examples in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. Is. The production examples shown in FIGS. 256 (A1) to (A8), the production examples shown in FIGS. 256 (B1) to (B8), the production examples shown in FIGS. 256 (C1) to (C8), and the production examples shown in FIGS. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 256 (D1) to 256 (D8), the mode of the icon display area in which the variable icon is displayed is formed in a rectangular frame, and the icon display area is displayed to the player. HN2 is visible. Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 256 (A1) to (A8), examples of effects shown in FIGS. 256 (B1) to (B8), examples of effects shown in FIGS. 256 (C1) to (C8), and FIG. 256. The production examples shown in FIGS. (D1) to FIG. (D8) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 255 (A1) to (A8) and FIGS. It is the same as the effect example shown in (B8), the effect example shown in FIGS. 255 (C1) to (C8), and the effect example shown in FIGS. 255 (D1) to (D8). Here, in the effect shown in FIG. 256 (D5), if the hold change effect fails, the second variable icon h02 may be displayed behind the icon display area HN2.

FIG. 257 is a diagram showing another example in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed.

First, an example of the effect shown in FIGS. 257 (A1) to 257 (A8) will be described. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 257 (A1) to 257 (A2) are shown in FIG. 255 (A1) except that the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. ) Is the same as the production shown in). Here, the navigation characters YM shown in FIGS. 257 (A1) to 257 (A2) are displayed in a display mode wearing a blue kimono. That is, at least part of it is displayed in blue. In other words, the whole may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, the part of the kimono) may be displayed in blue. This navigation character YM is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. This point will be described in detail later. The navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture facing the front. The navigation character YM may continue to be displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

In FIG. 257 (A3), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1, pulls out the sword, and swings it. It changes to a pose. Then, a second variable icon h02 different from the first variable icon h01 appears above the navigation character YM, and an animation showing how to move toward the icon display area HN1 is started. The second variable icon h02 in this production example has the same size as the first variable icon h01, but is different in color and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 257 (A4) to 257 (A6), the second variable icon h02 continues to move to the icon display area HN1 and overlaps with a part of the first variable icon h01. It is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 257 (A6), when all of the second variable icon H02 overlaps with all of the first variable icon h01, the first variable icon h01 is deleted as shown in FIG. 257 (A7). The second variable icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and it is shown that the variable icon is changing from the default display mode to the notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, it is shown that the first variable icon h01 in the default display mode is replaced with the second variable icon h02, which is the same display mode (blue display mode) as the kimono of the navigation character YM. In other words, it may be said that the display mode of the navigator character YM suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon after the change. At this time, the navigation character YM ends the icon change animation and returns to the initial posture.

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 257 (A3) and ended immediately before the figure (A7), or while the second variable icon h02 is moving and displayed (the figure (A3)). ) ~ Fig. (A6)) can be regarded as an animation that is performed only.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (A8). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the variable icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice. In this production example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 257 (A1) to 257 (A8) described above, the second variable icon h02 appears in addition to the first variable icon h01, and the variable icon in the default display mode is changed to the first color. This is an example of changing with the frequency (probability) of the first A.

Next, the examples shown in FIGS. 257 (B1) to (B8) will be described focusing on the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 257 (A1) to (A8), and duplicated explanations will be omitted. There is. In the following description, the description overlapping with the examples shown in FIGS. 257 (A1) to (A8) may be omitted, but the description in the examples shown in FIGS. 257 (A1) to (A8) may be omitted. Is true. In the example shown in FIGS. 257 (B1) to (B8), FIGS. (B1) to (B4) are the same as those in FIGS. 257 (A1) to (A4) described above. It is shown that the second variable icon h02 moves to the icon display area HN1. Subsequently, in FIG. 257 (B5), after all of the second variable icon h02 overlaps with all of the first variable icon h01, the icon display area HN1 is not limited to the icon display area HN1 and falls downward, and the frame is out from the lower end of the display screen. Is shown to start. After that, FIGS. 257 (B6) to 257 (B7) show that the second variable icon h02 is completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the variable icon does not change. If the display mode of the variable icon does not change from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h02, the second variable icon h02 may pass behind the first variable icon h01. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (B8), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect fails. In this effect example, the hold change effect fails and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description. Next, an example of the effect shown in FIGS. 257 (C1) to 257 (C8) will be described. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 257 (C1) to (C2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 257 (A1) to (A2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 257 (C3), the navigation character YM, which was in the initial posture, starts the icon change animation, faces the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1, pulls out the sword, and swings it. It changes to a pose. Then, a second variable icon h02 different from the first variable icon h01 appears above the navigation character YM, and an animation showing how to move toward the icon display area HN1 is started. The second variable icon h02 in this production example has a size larger than that of the first variable icon h01, is different in color, and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 257 (C4) to 257 (C6), when a part of the second variable icon h02 overlaps the entire first variable icon h01, as shown in FIG. 257 (C7), The second variable icon h02 is reduced and displayed to the same size as the first variable icon h01, the first variable icon h01 is deleted, the second variable icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the variable icon is the default. It is shown that the display mode of the above is changed to the notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, it is shown that the first variable icon h01 in the default display mode is replaced with the second variable icon h02, which is the same display mode (blue display mode) as the kimono of the navigation character YM. In other words, it may be said that the display mode of the navigator character YM suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon after the change. At this time, the navigation character YM ends the icon change animation and returns to the initial posture. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 257 (C6), the second variable icon h02 is displayed in a large size and overlaps with the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. Further, when the hold icon is displayed in the notice display mode, the hold icon in this notice display mode may overlap with the second variable icon h02.

The icon change animation described above may be considered to have started from FIG. 257 (C3) and ended immediately before the figure (C7), or while the second variable icon h02 is moving and displayed (the figure (C3)). ) ~ Fig. (C6)) can be regarded as an animation that is performed only.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (C8). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the variable icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice. In this production example, a pending change effect in which the display mode of the variable icon changes is performed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. May be good. This also applies to the following description.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 257 (C1) to 257 (C8) described above, the second variable icon h02 appears in addition to the first variable icon h01, and the variable icon in the default display mode is changed to the first color. This is an example of changing with the frequency (probability) of the first A.

Subsequently, the examples shown in FIGS. 257 (D1) to (D8) will be described focusing on the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 257 (C1) to (C8), and duplicated explanations will be omitted. There is. In the example shown in FIGS. 257 (D1) to FIG. (D8), FIGS. (D1) to (D4) are the same as those in FIGS. 257 (C1) to (C4) described above. It is shown that the second variable icon h02, which is larger in size than the first variable icon h01, moves toward the icon display area HN1. Subsequently, in FIG. 257 (D5), after a part of the second variable icon h02 overlaps with all of the first variable icon h01, the second variable icon h02 falls downward without being reduced and displayed. , It is shown that the frame out is started from the lower end of the display screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 257 (D6) to (D7), the second variable icon h02 was completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the variable icon did not change. There is. If the display mode of the variable icon does not change from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h02, the second variable icon h02 may pass behind the first variable icon h01. Further, after a part of the second variable icon h02 overlaps with all of the first variable icon h01, an animation is performed in which the second variable icon h02 is reduced and displayed, and then the second variable icon h02 is displayed at the lower end of the display screen. You may frame out from. Further, in this production example, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture after the second variable icon h02 is framed out. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (D8), the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect fails.

As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 257 are examples in which the variable icon is targeted, but the hold icon may be targeted in some cases.

In each of the examples described with reference to FIG. 257, the normal notice by the variable icon whose display mode has changed was a false notice, but it may be a big hit and a true notice. Further, even if the pending change effect in which the display mode of the variable icon changes fails, it may be a big hit, or it may be always missed.

FIG. 258 is a diagram showing some other examples in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. Is. In addition, the production example shown in FIGS. 258 (A1) to (A8), the production example shown in FIGS. 258 (B1) to (B8), the production example shown in FIGS. 258 (C1) to (C8), and the production example shown in FIGS. In the production example shown in FIGS. 258 (D1) to 258 (D8), the mode of the icon display area in which the variable icon is displayed is formed in a rectangular frame, and the icon display area is displayed to the player. HN2 is visible. Production examples shown in FIGS. 258 (A1) to (A8), production examples shown in FIGS. 258 (B1) to (B8), production examples shown in FIGS. 258 (C1) to (C8), and FIG. 258. The production examples shown in FIGS. (D1) to (D8) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 257 (A1) to (A8), and the production examples shown in FIGS. Since it is the same as the production example shown in (B8), the production example shown in FIGS. 257 (C1) to (C8), and the production example shown in FIGS. 257 (D1) to (D8), the description thereof will be omitted. .. Here, in the effect shown in FIG. 258 (D5), if the hold change effect fails, the second variable icon h02 may be displayed behind the icon display area HN2.

In FIGS. 259 (A1) to 259 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 259 (A1) to 259 (A2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 255 (A1) to (A2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (A3), a frame change animation is started, a first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears, and is gradually reduced and displayed. ing. As shown in FIGS. 259 (A3) to 259 (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while gradually reducing the display. In this production example, during the period when the frame change animation is displayed, the first decorative symbol is erased and the variable display is performed only in the second decorative symbol, but the second decorative symbol is erased and the first decoration is performed. Variable display may be performed only on the symbol. Further, the period during which the decorative symbol is erased may be the entire period during which the frame change animation is displayed, or may be a part of the period. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first variable icon h01, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area HIS are also reduced in accordance with the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. At this time, a copy of the hold frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy change icon h01'as a copy of the first change icon h01 is displayed on the copy of the hold frame UI. At the same time, the copy hold icons h11', h12', h13' are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. The copy variable icon h01'may or may not execute the standby animation in the variable icon display area HN1. Further, the first variable icon h01 may or may not execute the standby animation during at least a part of the period during which the frame change animation is displayed. Further, the first variable icon h01 may or may not execute the standby animation during at least a part of the period in which the reduced display is displayed after the frame change animation is executed. The same applies to the execution and post-execution of the frame change animations in FIGS. 255 to 270.

When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, the first frame image FL1 starts moving to the left as shown in FIG. 259 (A6). Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (A7), a state in which the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen is shown. The second frame image FL2 includes the display of the hold frame UI including the change icon (second change icon h02) and three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), similarly to the first frame image FL1. However, the second frame image FL2 includes a second variable icon h02 different from the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1, and the display mode is also a blue display mode. .. On the other hand, the display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. After that, as shown in FIGS. 259 (A7) to 259 (A12), the first frame image FL1 is framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the second frame image FL2 moves toward the center of the display screen. do. At this time, there is a period in which both the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it reaches a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and is at a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. Further, the second variable icon h02 may or may not execute the standby animation during at least a part of the period in which the reduced display is displayed. Further, the variable icon of both or one of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 may or may not perform a standby animation. The same applies to the reduced display in FIGS. 255 to 270.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 259 (A11) to 259 (A12), the second frame image FL2 is completely moved to the center of the display screen, while the first frame image FL1 is continuously moved to the left and displayed. Frame out from the screen. After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (A13) starts the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variable icon h02, and thereafter, it is shown in FIGS. 259 (A13) to (A15). As shown, the second frame image FL2 is enlarged and displayed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy variable icon h01'and the copy hold icons h11', h12', and h13'overlap with the second frame image FL2, making it difficult to see.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (A15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the second. It is shown that the variable icon is changed to the variable icon h02, and the variable icon is changed from the default display mode to the notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, in this production example, it is shown that the pending change notice is successful by switching the frame image.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (A16). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the variable icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice. In this production example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. Further, in this effect example, the first frame image FL1 is translated and framed out, and the second frame image FL2 is translated and framed in. Rotating in the direction (may be right), the first frame image FL1 rotates to the left and disappears in the left depth direction, and the second frame image FL2 appears from the right depth direction and goes to the left. It may be an indication of a mode of rotating to. This also applies to the following description.

In FIGS. 259 (B1) to 259 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 259 (B1) to (B9) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 259 (A1) to (A9), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, after the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are displayed side by side in FIG. 259 (B9), they move to the left of the display screen, respectively. As shown in B10), a third frame image FL3 different from the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 is framed in from the right side of the display screen so as to be adjacent to the right side of the second frame image FL2. Like the first frame image FL1, the third frame image FL3 includes a display of a hold frame UI including a variable icon (third variable icon h03) and three hold icons (hold icons h31, h32, h33). However, the third frame image FL3 includes a third variable icon h03 different from the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1 and the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2. The display mode is the same default display mode as that of the first variable icon h01. Further, the display modes of the hold icons h31, h32, and h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all default display modes. After that, as shown in FIGS. 259 (B10) to (B12), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the third frame image FL3 is the display screen. Move towards the center of. At this time, a period in which both the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed occurs, and a period in which both the second variable icon h02 and the third variable icon h03 are displayed occurs. Further, the third variable icon h03 may or may not execute the standby animation during at least a part of the period in which the reduced display is displayed. Further, the variable icon of both or one of the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 may or may not perform a standby animation. The same applies to the reduced display in FIGS. 255 to 270.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 259 (B11) to 259 (B12), the movement of the third frame image FL3 to the center of the display screen is completed, while the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 continue to the left. Move in the direction and frame out from the display screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (B13) starts the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variable icon h03, and thereafter, it is shown in FIGS. 259 (B13) to (B15). As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy variable icon h01'and the copy hold icons h11', h12', and h13'overlap with the third frame image FL3, making it difficult to see.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (B15), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the third. It is shown that the variable icon is changed to the variable icon h03, and the variable icon changes from the default display mode to the default display mode.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259 (B16), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the third variable icon h03 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect fails. In this effect example, the hold change effect fails and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

In FIGS. 260 (A1) to 260 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 260 (A1) to (A16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 259 (A1) to (A16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 259 (A1) to 259 (A16), except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 260 (B1) to 260 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 260 (B1) to (B16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 259 (B1) to (B16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 259 (B1) to 259 (B16), except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 261 (A1) to 261 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 261 (A1) to 261 (A16), the mode of the icon display area in which the variable icon is displayed is formed in a rectangular frame, and the icon is displayed to the player. The display area HN2 is visible. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 261 (A1) to (A16) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIGS. 259 (A1) to (A16), except that the aspect of the icon display area is different.

In FIGS. 261 (B1) to 261 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 261 (B1) to 261 (B16), the mode of the icon display area in which the variable icon is displayed is formed in a rectangular frame, and the icon is displayed to the player. The display area HN2 is visible. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 261 (B1) to (B16) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIGS. 259 (B1) to (B16), except that the aspect of the icon display area is different.

In FIGS. 262 (A1) to 262 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 262 (A1) to 262 (A16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 261 (A1) to (A16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 261 (A1) to 261 (A16) except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 262 (B1) to 262 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 262 (B1) to (B16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 261 (B1) to (B16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 261 (B1) to (B16) except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 263 (A1) to 263 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 263 (A1) to 263 (A2) are different from the display mode of the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, except that the display mode is a display mode wearing a white kimono. Since the effects are the same as those shown in FIGS. 257 (A1) to 257 (A2), the description thereof will be omitted. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a white kimono is the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (A3), the first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 263 (A3) to (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while gradually reducing the display. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first variable icon h01, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 displayed in the navigation character YM and the hold icon display area HIS are also reduced according to the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. Will be done. At this time, a copy of the hold frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy change icon h01'as a copy of the first change icon h01 is displayed on the copy of the hold frame UI. At the same time, the copy hold icons h11', h12', h13' are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. A copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed.

When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, the first frame image FL1 starts moving to the left as shown in FIG. 263 (A6). Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (A7), a state in which the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen is shown. Like the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a hold frame UI including a variable icon (second variable icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode like the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. Further, the display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. In this production example, the display mode of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 is the default display mode (wearing a white kimono), but even if it is a display mode wearing a blue kimono. good. After that, as shown in FIGS. 263 (A7) to (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left. At this time, there is a period in which both the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it reaches a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and is at a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 263 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, the navigation included in the first frame image FL1 which was the initial posture. The character YM and the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 start the icon change animation, respectively, face the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02, and change to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung. do. Then, waves are oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM, and at least a part of the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1 and at least a part of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 are generated. , Each of which is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, and the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are more difficult to see than before being covered by the effect image Eh0. The first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. After that, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02, which were the default (white) display modes before being covered by the effect image Eh0, have the same display modes as the kimono of the navigation character YM, respectively. It has changed to the blue display mode. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. The mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change. In this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 is the display mode of the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 after the change. Is suggested (notice).

When the effect image Eh0 is erased and the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image are displayed as shown in FIGS. 263 (A9) to (A10). FL2 resumes moving to the left. After that, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 263 (A10), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially set at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the posture.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 263 (A11) to (A12), the second frame image FL2 is completely moved to the center of the display screen, while the first frame image FL1 is continuously moved to the left and displayed. Frame out from the screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (A13) starts the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variable icon h02, and thereafter, it is shown in FIGS. 263 (A13) to (A15). As shown, the second frame image FL2 is enlarged and displayed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy variable icon h01'and the copy hold icons h11', h12', and h13'overlap with the second frame image FL2, making it difficult to see.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (A15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the second. It is shown that the variable icon is changed to the variable icon h02, and the variable icon is changed from the default display mode to the notice display mode (blue display mode). That is, in this production example, it is shown that the pending change notice is successful by switching the frame image.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (A16). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the variable icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice. In this production example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

In FIGS. 263 (B1) to 263 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 263 (B1) to (B9) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 263 (A1) to (A9), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 263 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 disappears and the first variable icon h01 And the second variable icon h02 appears, but neither the first variable icon h01 nor the second variable icon h02 has changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, it is shown that the notice production by the icon change animation has failed. After that, when the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left as shown in FIGS. 263 (B9) to (B10). Resume the movement of. After that, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 263 (B10), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially set at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the posture.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 263 (B11) to (B12), the second frame image FL2 is completely moved to the center of the display screen, while the first frame image FL1 is continuously moved to the left and displayed. Frame out from the screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (B13) starts the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variable icon h02, and thereafter, it is shown in FIGS. 263 (B13) to (B15). As shown, the second frame image FL2 is enlarged and displayed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, it is shown that the copy variable icon h01'and the copy hold icons h11', h12', and h13'overlap with the second frame image FL2, making it difficult to see.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (B15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the second. It is shown that the variable icon is changed to the variable icon h02, and the variable icon changes from the default display mode to the default display mode.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (B16), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the second variable icon h02 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect fails. In this effect example, the hold change effect fails and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

In FIGS. 264 (A1) to 264 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 264 (A1) to (A16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 263 (A1) to (A16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 263 (A1) to (A16) except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 264 (B1) to 264 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 264 (B1) to (B16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 263 (B1) to (B16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 263 (B1) to (B16) except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 265 (A1) to 265 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 265 (A1) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (A1) to (A8), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 which was the initial posture. Of the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 starts the icon change animation, faces the second variable icon h02, and turns the sword. It changes to a pose that you pull out and swing. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 does not start the icon change animation in the initial posture. Then, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2, and at least a part of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, and the second The variable icon h02 is more difficult to see than before it was covered with the effect image Eh0. The second variable icon h02 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. After that, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the second variable icon h02, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to the blue display mode, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. It's changing. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. The mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change. In this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second variable icon h02 after the change. It becomes a thing.

When the effect image Eh0 is erased and the second variation icon h02 is displayed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left as shown in FIGS. 265 (A9) to (A10). Resume the move. After that, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 265 (A10), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially set at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the posture. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 265 (A11) to 265 (A16) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 265 (A11) to (A16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (A11) to (A16), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 265 (B1) to 265 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 265 (B1) to (B8) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 263 (B1) to (B8), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 265 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the second frame image FL2 of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 Disappears and the second variable icon h02 appears, but the second variable icon h02 has not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, it is shown that the notice production by the icon change animation has failed. After that, when the second variation icon h02 is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 265 (B9) to (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume moving to the left. After that, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 265 (B10), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially set at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the posture. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 265 (B11) to 265 (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 265 (B11) to (B16) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 263 (B11) to (B16), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 266 (A1) to 266 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 266 (A1) to (A16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 265 (A1) to (A16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 265 (A1) to 265 (A16), except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 266 (B1) to 266 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. The production examples shown in FIGS. 266 (B1) to (B16) are the production examples shown in FIGS. 265 (B1) to (B16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. It is the same as the production example shown in FIGS. 265 (B1) to (B16) except that the copy of the UI is not displayed.

In FIGS. 267 (A1) to 267 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Since the effect shown in FIG. 267 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 263 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (A2), the hold of the special figure 1 is digested, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. , The icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the first variable icon h01. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first variable icon h01 are the default (white) display modes. This variable icon is also displayed in white, at least in part. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (A2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (A2), the character "Attention!" Is displayed on the timer notice display TM to notify that the timer display countdown is started. Further, the timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (A3), the first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 267 (A3) to (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while gradually reducing the display. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first variable icon h01, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 displayed in the navigation character YM and the hold icon display area HIS are also reduced according to the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. Will be done. At this time, a copy of the hold frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy change icon h01'as a copy of the first change icon h01 is displayed on the copy of the hold frame UI. At the same time, the copy hold icons h11', h12', h13' are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. A copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 267 (A4), the timer display is displayed on the timer notice display TM, and the countdown of the timer display is started. That is, in this timer advance notice effect, a certain advance notice effect is started after 40 seconds. At the timing shown in FIG. 267 (A4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM is "39.99", and the timer display countdown is continuously performed. Further, although the timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap the first frame image FL1, it may be displayed so as to overlap the first frame image FL1.

When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, the first frame image FL1 starts moving to the left as shown in FIG. 267 (A6). Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (A7), a state in which the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen is shown. Like the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a hold frame UI including a variable icon (second variable icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode like the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. At this time, the first variable icon h01 and the hold icons h11 to h13 included in the first frame image FL1 overlap with the timer notice display TM, and are more visible than the state in which the timer notice display TM is not displayed. It is said to be difficult. Further, the display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. After that, as shown in FIGS. 267 (A7) to (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it reaches a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and is at a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. At the timing shown in FIG. 267 (A9), the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows "36.00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 which was the initial posture. Of the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 starts the icon change animation, faces the second variable icon h02, and turns the sword. It changes to a pose that you pull out and swing. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 is overlapped by the timer notice display TM and is difficult to see, but the icon change animation is not started in the initial posture. Then, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2, and at least a part of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, and the second The variable icon h02 is more difficult to see than before it was covered with the effect image Eh0. The second variable icon h02 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh0. After that, the effect image Eh0 disappears, and the second variable icon h02, which was the default (white) display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to the blue display mode, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigator character YM. It's changing. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (notices) the display mode of the variable icon h0 after the change. The mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change. In this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the second variable icon h02 after the change. It becomes a thing.

When the effect image Eh0 is erased and the second variation icon h02 is displayed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left as shown in FIGS. 267 (A9) to (A10). Resume the move. After that, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 267 (A10), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially set at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the posture. Further, when the second frame image FL2 moves to the left, the second frame image FL2 is displayed overlapping with the timer notice display TM, and is considered to be more difficult to see than the state where the timer notice display TM is not overlapped. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 267 (A10), the hold icons h21 to h23 are overlapped by the timer notice display TM, making it difficult to see. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 267 (A10), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows "35.00". After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 267 (A11) to (A16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 267 (A11) to (A16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (A11) to (A16) except that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues. Since it is the same as the above, the description thereof will be omitted. In this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is performed over the next symbol variation display, and when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, a pseudo continuous effect starts. .. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 267 (A16), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows “32.00”.

In FIGS. 267 (B1) to 267 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 267 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 267 (A1) to (A9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 267 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the second frame image FL2 of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 Disappears and the second variable icon h02 appears, but the second variable icon h02 has not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, it is shown that the notice production by the icon change animation has failed. After that, when the second variation icon h02 is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 267 (B9) to (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume their movement to the left. After that, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave motion has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 267 (B10), the wave motion may still be oscillated, or the navigation character YM is initially set at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to the posture. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 267 (B11) to 267 (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 267 (B11) to (B16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (B11) to (B16) except that the timer display is counted down in the timer notice display TM. Since it is the same as the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 268 (A1) to 268 (A16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Since the effect shown in FIG. 268 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 263 (A1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (A2), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. , The icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the first variable icon h01. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first variable icon h01 are the default (white) display modes. This variable icon is also displayed in white, at least in part. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black edge line) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (A2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been notified. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (A2), the character "Attention!" Is displayed on the timer notice display TM to notify that the timer display countdown is started. Further, the timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (A3), it is shown that the first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 268 (A3) to 268 (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while gradually reducing the display. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first variable icon h01, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 displayed in the navigation character YM and the hold icon display area HIS are also reduced according to the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. Will be done. At this time, a copy of the hold frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and a copy change icon h01'as a copy of the first change icon h01 is displayed on the copy of the hold frame UI. At the same time, the copy hold icons h11', h12', h13' are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. A copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 268 (A4), the timer display is displayed on the timer notice display TM, and the countdown of the timer display is started. That is, in this timer advance notice effect, a certain advance notice effect is started after 40 seconds. At the timing shown in FIG. 268 (A4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM is "39.99", and the timer display countdown is continuously performed. Further, although the timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap the first frame image FL1, it may be displayed so as to overlap the first frame image FL1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 268 (A4) to 268 (A5), it is shown that the navigation character YM overlaps with the timer notice display TM.

When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, the first frame image FL1 starts moving to the left as shown in FIG. 268 (A6). Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (A7), a state in which the second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen is shown. Like the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 is a hold frame UI including a variable icon (second variable icon h02), three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode like the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. The second variable icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 overlap with the timer notice display TM, and are considered to be more difficult to see than the state in which the timer notice display TM is not displayed. ing. Further, the display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. After that, as shown in FIGS. 268 (A7) to (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it reaches a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and is at a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1. At the timing shown in FIG. 268 (A9), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows "36.00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (A9), when all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed, they are included in the first frame image FL1 which was the initial posture. Of the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 starts the icon change animation, but it overlaps with the timer notice display TM. , The situation is said to be difficult to see. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 has not started the icon change animation in the initial posture. In this production example, the icon change animation that overlaps with the timer notice display TM and is performed in the second frame image FL2 cannot be visually recognized, but when the icon change animation is completed, the display mode is the default (white). The second variable icon h02 changes to a blue display mode, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 268 (A9) to (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume their movement to the left. Then, as shown in FIG. 268 (A10), the second variable icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are visible. The navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture, but it overlaps with the timer notice display TM, and the state cannot be visually recognized. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (A10), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows "35.00". After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 268 (A11) to 268 (A16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 268 (A11) to (A16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (A11) to (A16) except that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues. Since it is the same as the above, the description thereof will be omitted. In this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is performed over the next symbol variation display, and when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, a pseudo continuous effect starts. .. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (A16), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows “32.00”.

In FIGS. 268 (B1) to 268 (B16), both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is a figure which shows another effect pattern. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 268 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 268 (A1) to (A9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 268 (B9) in this production example, the icon change animation is performed in the second frame image FL2, which overlaps with the timer notice display TM, and the state cannot be visually recognized, but the second variation. The icon h02 has not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, it is shown that the notice production by the icon change animation has failed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 268 (B9) to (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resume their movement to the left. Then, as shown in FIG. 268 (B10), the second variable icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are visible. The navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture, but it overlaps with the timer notice display TM, and the state cannot be visually recognized. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (B10), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows "35.00". After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 268 (B11) to 268 (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 268 (B11) to 268 (B16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (B11) to (B16) except that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM continues. Since it is the same as the above, the description thereof will be omitted. In this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is performed over the next symbol variation display, and when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, a pseudo continuous effect starts. .. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (B16), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM continues, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM shows "32.00".

FIG. 269 is a diagram showing another effect pattern in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. .. The effects shown in FIGS. 269 (A1) to 269 (A12) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 260 (A1) to (A12), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 269 (A12), after the first frame image FL1 is completely framed out, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (A13) is different from the second frame image FL2. It is shown that the third frame image FL3 of the above is framed in and moved to a position adjacent to the second frame image FL2. Like the second frame image FL2, the third frame image FL2 includes a display of a hold frame UI including a variable icon (third variable icon h03) and three hold icons (hold icons h31, h32, h33). However, the third frame image FL3 includes a third variable icon h03 different from the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2, and the display mode is also a red display mode. .. On the other hand, the display modes of the hold icons h31, h32, and h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2. It has become. After that, the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 start moving to the left, and as shown in FIGS. 269 (A14) to (A15), the second frame image FL2 is on the left side of the display screen. While framed out from, the third frame image FL3 moves toward the center of the display screen. At this time, there is a period in which both the second variable icon h02 and the third variable icon h03 are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 269 (A15) to 269 (A16), the third frame image FL3 is stopped and displayed when it reaches the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the second frame image FL2 is on the left. Continue moving in the direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 269 (A17), the second frame image FL2 is framed out from the display screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (A18) starts the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variable icon h03, and thereafter, it is shown in FIGS. 269 (A18) to (A20). As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (A20), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the third. It is shown that the variable icon is changed to the variable icon h03, and the variable icon is changed from the default display mode to the notice display mode (red display mode). That is, in this production example, it is shown that the pending change notice is successful by switching the frame image.

Due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon, the big hit notice (normal notice) in the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being performed is given, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (A21). Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (third variable icon h03) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the variable icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice. In this production example, the hold change effect is performed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed. This also applies to the following description.

FIG. 270 is a diagram showing another effect pattern in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. .. The effects shown in FIGS. 270 (A1) to 270 (A6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 260 (A1) to (A6), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed and the first frame image FL1 starts moving to the left as shown in FIG. 270 (A6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (A7) From the right side of the display screen, a state in which a second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 is framed in is shown. The second frame image FL2 in this production example includes the display of the hold frame UI including the change icon (second change icon h02) and three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), and the second The second variable icon h02 and the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the frame image FL2 all have the same default display mode as the first frame image FL1. On the other hand, in the second frame image FL2 in this production example, the background color is not the default background color (for example, white) as in the first frame image FL1, but the background color of the notice (for example, blue). It functions as a big hit notice. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the advance notice effect is performed by changing the elements other than the variable icon. After that, as shown in FIGS. 270 (A7) to 270 (A12), the first frame image FL1 is framed out from the left side of the display screen, while the second frame image FL2 moves toward the center of the display screen. do. At this time, there is a period in which both the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed. The second frame image FL2 moves at a moving speed faster than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it reaches a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and is at a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, it is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed of the first frame image FL1.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 270 (A11) to 270 (A12), when the second frame image FL2 completes the movement to the center of the display screen, only the first frame image FL1 continues to move to the left. Frame out from the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 270 (A12), after the first frame image FL1 is completely out of frame, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (A13) has a third frame image different from the second frame image FL2. It is shown that the FL3 is framed in and moved to a position adjacent to the second frame image FL2. Like the second frame image FL2, the third frame image FL3 includes a display of a hold frame UI including a variable icon (third variable icon h03) and three hold icons (hold icons h31, h32, h33). The third variable icon h03 and the hold icons h31, h32, and h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all in the default display mode. On the other hand, the third frame image FL3 in this production example has a different background color from the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, and has a red background color. The red background color in the third frame image FL3 is the background color of the notice, and is a background color with higher jackpot reliability than the blue background color. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the advance notice effect is performed by changing the elements other than the variable icon. After that, the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 start moving to the left, and as shown in FIGS. 270 (A14) to 270 (A15), the second frame image FL2 is on the left side of the display screen. While framed out from, the third frame image FL3 moves toward the center of the display screen. At this time, there is a period in which both the second variable icon h02 and the third variable icon h03 are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 270 (A15) to 270 (A16), the third frame image FL3 is stopped and displayed when it reaches the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the second frame image FL2 is on the left. Continue moving in the direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 270 (A17), the second frame image FL2 is framed out from the display screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (A18) starts enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variable icon h03, and thereafter, it is shown in FIGS. 270 (A18) to 270 (A20). As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (A20), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, so that the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the third. It is shown that the variable icon h03 is changing. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the background color is changed by switching the frame image, and a notice is given by this. In this production example, the notice is given by changing the display mode other than the variable icon, but the display mode of the variable icon may be further changed.

In this production example, due to the change in the background color, a big hit notice (normal notice) in the currently performed variable display of the decorative symbol is given, but the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 270 (A21) is performed. In the device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and then the final display is confirmed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (third variable icon h03) is deleted. In addition, when the background color is changed, when the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon may be deleted and the background color may be returned to the default display mode. In this production example, the background color is changed and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed, but the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed.

In the above description,
"A game table equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
The display means can display an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter, referred to as "variation icon [for example, first variation icon h01 shown in FIG. 255 (A3), second variation icon h02, etc.]"). Means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the variable icon in a certain display area [for example, the icon display area HN1 shown in FIG. 255 (A3)] in the display area in the display means [for example, FIG. 255]. As shown in (A3), the first variable icon h0 is displayed in the icon display area HN1 etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying the two variable icons (hereinafter, referred to as "two variable icons").
One of the two variable icons is the first variable icon [for example, the first variable icon h01 shown in FIG. 255 (A3)].
One of the two variable icons is a second variable icon [for example, a second variable icon h02 shown in FIG. 255 (A3)].
The second variable icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 255 (A3), the second variable icon h02 is in an area other than the icon display area HN1. Displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game table, it is possible to make various effects by the fluctuation icon, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the variable icon, or may be one that can display other than the variable icon. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the variable icon, or may not display the variable icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the variable icon in a certain display area in the display means, or may be a display means other than the variable icon in a certain display area in the display means. It may also be displayable. Further, the display means may always display the variable icon in a certain display area in the display area of the display means, or display the variable icon in a certain display area in the display area of the display means. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying the variable icon only in a certain display area in the display area of the display means, or may be a display area other than a certain display area in the display area of the display means. It may also be capable of displaying a variable icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only two variable icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the two variable icons. Further, the display means may be one that always displays two variable icons, or may not display two variable icons.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying three or more variable icons.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first variable icon and the second variable icon, or may be capable of displaying variable icons other than the first variable icon and the second variable icon. It may be. Further, the display means may always display the first variable icon and the second variable icon, or may not display the first variable icon and the second variable icon. May be good.

Further, the second variable icon may be displayed only in a display area different from a certain display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the display area different from the certain display area. It may be an icon. Further, the second variable icon may always be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area, or may not be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area. There may be.

In addition, the second variable icon may be displayed in a certain display area.

In addition, "an animation in which the second variable icon moves during the period in which the first variable icon is displayed (hereinafter," the second moving animation [for example, in FIGS. 255 (A3) to (A6)) The icon change animation shown and the movement display of the second frame image FL2 in the frame change animation shown in FIGS. 260 (A7) to (A15)] ”) may be displayed. Game table. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, the movement animation of the second variable icon can be used to diversify the effect of the variable icon, and it may be possible to improve the expectation for the big hit.

Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animations other than the first moving animation may also be displayed. Further, the first moving animation may be displayed without fail, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

Further, "There is a case where the second variable icon is displayed in the certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as" first case ") [for example, FIG. 255]. (A3) -The second variable icon h02 may be displayed in the icon display area HN1 after the icon change animation shown in the figure (A6) is displayed]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the second variable icon in a certain display area, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icon, and it may be possible to further improve the expectation for the big hit.

Here, the second variation icon may be displayed only in a certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed, or the second variation after the second moving animation is displayed. The icon may be displayed in a display area other than a certain display area. Further, the second variable icon may always be displayed in a certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed, or the second variable icon may be displayed after the second moving animation is displayed. It may not be displayed in the area.

Further, only the second variable icon may be displayed in a certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed, or the second variable icon may be displayed after the second moving animation is displayed. Variable icons other than may be displayed in a certain display area.

Also, the second variable icon may be displayed in a certain display area only after the second moving animation is displayed, and the second may be displayed other than after the second moving animation is displayed. The variable icon of may be displayed in a certain display area.

Further, "In the first case, the size of the second variable icon displayed in the certain display area is the size of the second variable icon displayed during the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. The size of the second variable icon h02 in the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 255 (C3) to 255 (C6) is different from the size of the variable icon. A game table characterized by being larger than the size of the icon. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, by making the size of the second variable icon different, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icon, and it may be possible to further raise the expectation for the big hit. The size of the second variable icon displayed in a certain display area may be smaller than the size of the second variable icon displayed during the period when the second moving animation is displayed. It may be large.

Further, "The second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed [for example, FIGS. 255 (A4) to the same". As shown in FIG. (A6), the second variable icon h02 overlaps the first variable icon h01 while the icon change animation is displayed]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, by overlapping the variable icons, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icons, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit.

Here, the second variable icon may overlap only with the first variable icon during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, or the second moving animation is displayed. The second variable icon may overlap with something other than the first variable icon during at least a part of the period being set. In addition, the second variable icon may always overlap with the first variable icon during at least a part of the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed, or the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed. The second variable icon may not overlap with the first variable icon for at least a part of the period.

In addition, only the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, or the second moving animation is displayed. A variable icon other than the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon during at least a part of the period.

In addition, the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon only during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, or the second moving animation is displayed. The second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon during a period other than at least a part of the period.

In addition, the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon during a part of the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed, or the second mobile animation is displayed. The second variable icon may overlap the first variable icon during the entire period.

Further, "The second variable icon may overlap with the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 255 (C6), the icon. A game table characterized in that the second variable icon h02 overlaps with the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the look-ahead notice during the display of the change animation]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, by overlapping the second variable icon and the notice display, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icon, and it may be possible to expect that the change may be a big hit.

Here, the second variable icon may overlap only with the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or during the period during which the second animation is displayed. The second variable icon may overlap with a display other than the notice display during at least a part of the period. Also, the second variable icon may always overlap the notice display during at least a part of the period when the second animation is displayed, or at least a part of the period when the second animation is displayed. The second variable icon may not overlap the notice display during the period.

In addition, only the second variable icon may overlap the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or at least during the period during which the second animation is displayed. A variable icon other than the second variable icon may overlap with the notice display during a part of the period.

In addition, the second variable icon may overlap with the notice display only during at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or at least during the period during which the second animation is displayed. The second variable icon may overlap with the notice display during a period other than a part of the period.

In addition, the second variable icon may overlap with the notice display during a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, or the entire period during which the second animation is displayed. The second variable icon may overlap with the notice display.

Further, "The second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed [for example, FIG. 255 (C6). ), The second variable icon h02 overlaps the first hold icon h11 and the first variable icon h01 in the look-ahead notice display mode during the display of the icon change animation],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, by overlapping the second variable icon with the first variable icon and the notice display, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icon, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit. be.

Here, the second variable icon may overlap only with the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, or the second moving. The second variable icon may overlap with a display other than the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period in which the animation is displayed. Further, the second variable icon may always overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed, or the second mobile animation is displayed. The second variable icon may not overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period.

Further, only the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed, or the second mobile animation may be displayed. A variable icon other than the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period in which is displayed.

In addition, the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display only during at least a part of the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed, or the second mobile animation may be displayed. The second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during a period other than at least a part of the period in which is displayed.

In addition, the second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during a part of the period during which the second mobile animation is displayed, or the second mobile animation is displayed. The second variable icon may overlap with the first variable icon and the notice display during the entire period of the period.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying the first decorative symbol variation display [for example, the variation display of the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 260 (A2)] according to the execution of the symbol variation display. The display means is a means capable of displaying a second decorative symbol variation display [for example, a variation display of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 260 (A2)] according to the execution of the symbol variation display, and the first display means. The decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display are different decorative symbol variation displays, and the first decorative symbol is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. In some cases, only one of the variable display and the second decorative symbol variable display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 260 (A3) to (A15), a frame change animation. During the period when is displayed, the first decorative symbol is erased and only the variable display by the second decorative symbol is performed]. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player can concentrate on the movement animation by displaying only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display during the movement animation of the variable icon. May be possible.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. Display other than the above may also be displayable. Further, the display means may always display the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or display the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or other than the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. The display of may also be displayable. Further, the display means may always display the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or display the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. It may not be the one that may not be.

In addition, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed only during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. In some cases, one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display may be displayed during a period other than at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. In some cases, only the decorative pattern variation display may be displayed. In addition, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is always displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. Alternatively, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is not displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display may be displayed during a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. It may be present, or only one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed during the entire period during which the second moving animation is displayed. In some cases.

In addition, "an animation in which the first variable icon moves (hereinafter," movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in the first moving animation [for example, FIGS. 260 (A3) to A12) Etc.] ”) may be displayed.
The display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 260 (A3) to (A15), the first frame. After the movement display of the image FL1 is started, the movement display of the second frame image FL2 is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying a plurality of moving animations of the fluctuating icons, it is possible to make various effects by the fluctuating icons, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuations may be a big hit.

Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animations other than the first moving animation may also be displayed. Further, the first moving animation may be always displayed, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

Further, only the display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started. Display other than the animation display may also be started. Further, the display of the second moving animation may always be started after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started. It may not be started.

In addition, "an animation in which the first variable icon moves (hereinafter," movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in the first moving animation [for example, FIGS. 260 (A3) to A12) Etc.] ”) may be displayed. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, the movement animation of the first variable icon can be used to make various effects by the variable icon, and it may be possible to expect that the variation may be a big hit.

Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animations other than the first moving animation may also be displayed. Further, the first moving animation may be always displayed, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a certain display [for example, the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 264], and the certain display is a display capable of displaying in a plurality of types of display modes. One of the plurality of types of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a white kimono shown in FIG. 264 (A1)], and the plurality of types of display modes are displayed. One of the modes is a second display mode [for example, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono shown in FIG. 257 (A1)], and the first moving animation is displayed. The moving display of the certain display of the first display mode is displayed during at least a part of the period.
A game table characterized in that the moving display of the certain display of the second display mode is displayed during at least a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying the degree of expectation of a big hit during the period of the moving animation of the variable icon, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icon, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit. be.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a certain display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than a certain display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a certain display, or may not display a certain display.

Further, a certain display may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. Further, a certain display may be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes without fail, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

Further, a certain display may be capable of displaying only the first display mode and the second display mode, or may display a display mode other than the first display mode and the second display mode. It may be. Further, a certain display may always be displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode. You may.

In addition, the moving display of a certain display of the first display mode may be displayed during a part of the period during which the first moving animation is displayed, or the period during which the first moving animation is displayed. A moving display of a display of the first display mode may be displayed during the entire period of.

Further, the moving display of a certain display of the second display mode may be displayed during a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, or the period during which the second moving animation is displayed. A moving display of a display of a second display mode may be displayed during the entire period of.

Further, "after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variable icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [for example, FIGS. 260 (A2) to FIG. As shown in A3), when the movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation is started, the first variable icon h01 is moved and displayed in a display area different from the icon display area HN1]. A game table featuring. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying the first variable icon in a display area different from a certain display area, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icon, and it is expected that the fluctuation may be a big hit. You may be able to do it.

Here, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variable icon may be displayed only in a display area different from a certain display area, or the display of the first moving animation is started. After that, the first variable icon may be displayed in a display area other than a certain display area. Further, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first variable icon may always be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area, or the display of the first moving animation is started. Later, the first variable icon may not be displayed in a display area other than one display area.

Further, the first variable icon may be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area only after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the display of the first moving animation is started. In addition to the latter, the first variable icon may be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area.

In addition, "In the execution of one symbol variation display, after changing from the first state to the second state, the second state changes to the third state (hereinafter," the second case "". The first state is a state in which only the first change icon of the two change icons is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 260 (A5), the first change. A state in which only the first variable icon h01 of the icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 is displayed], and the second state is a state in which both of the two variable icons are displayed [ For example, as shown in FIG. 260 (A9), a state in which both the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed], and the third state is the two variable icons. The state in which only the second variable icon is displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 260 (A12), only the second variable icon h02 of the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 is displayed. State, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, by changing the number of variable icons, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icons, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit.

Here, during the execution of one symbol variation display, there may be a case where the state changes from the first state to the second state and then from the second state to the third state, or once. During the execution of the symbol variation display, there may be a case where the state changes from the first state to the second state and then does not change from the second state to the third state. In addition, during the execution of one symbol variation display, the state may change from the second state to the third state only after the change from the first state to the second state, or once. During the execution of the symbol variation display, there may be a case where the second state is changed to the third state other than after the first state is changed to the second state. Further, only during the execution of one symbol variation display, there may be a case where the state changes from the first state to the second state and then from the second state to the third state, or once. Even when the symbol variation display is not being executed, the state may change from the first state to the second state and then from the second state to the third state.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a third variable icon [for example, the third variable icon h03 shown in FIG. 269 (A17)], and the third variable icon is the first variable icon. It is a variable icon different from the variable icon, and the third variable icon is a variable icon different from the second variable icon, and after the second case, the third to fourth states. After the state of, the fourth state may be changed to the fifth state, and the fourth state is a state in which the second variation icon and the third variation icon are displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 269 (A14), a state in which both the second variable icon h02 and the third variable icon h03 are displayed, etc.], and the fifth state is the second. A state in which only the third variation icon of the variation icon and the third variation icon is displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 269 (A17), of the second variation icon h02 and the third variation icon h03. A game table characterized in that, such as a state in which only the third variable icon h03 is displayed. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, by changing the number of variable icons, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icons, and it may be possible to expect that the fluctuation may be a big hit.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third variable icon, or may be capable of displaying variable icons other than the third variable icon. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the third variable icon, or may not display the third variable icon.

Further, the third variable icon may be partially different from the first variable icon, or may be completely different.

Further, the third variable icon may be partially different from the second variable icon, or may be completely different.

In addition, after the second case, the third state may change to the fourth state, and then the fourth state may change to the fifth state. After that, after changing from the third state to the fourth state, there may be a case where the fourth state does not change to the fifth state. Further, after the second case, the fourth state may change to the fifth state only after the third state changes to the fourth state, and the second case may change. In addition to after becoming, there may be a case where the state changes from the third state to the fourth state and then changes from the fourth state to the fifth state. Further, only after the second case, the third state may be changed to the fourth state, and then the fourth state may be changed to the fifth state, or the second state may be changed. In addition to the case, there may be a case where the state changes from the third state to the fourth state and then changes from the fourth state to the fifth state.

In addition, "In at least a part of the period in which the two variable icons are displayed, there is a period in which neither of the two variable icons is displayed in the certain display area [for example, in FIG. 260 (A9). As shown, the game console is characterized in that none of the variable icons are displayed in the icon display area HN1 during the period in which the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed]. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the variable icon is not displayed in a certain display area, it is possible to make various effects by the variable icon, and it may be possible to expect that the variable may be a big hit.

Here, in a part of the period in which the two variable icons are displayed, there may be a period in which neither of the two variable icons is displayed in a certain display area, or the two variable icons are displayed. During the entire period of the period, there may be a period in which neither of the two variable icons is displayed in a certain display area.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon relating to the hold of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" hold icon [for example, hold icon h11, h12, h13, etc. shown in FIG. 260 (A2)] "). Yes, the period during which the two variable icons are displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 260 (A7) to (A10), the period during which the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed, etc. ], The number of the pending icons [for example, six, etc.] is the number of the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 before the two variable icons are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 260 (A6)]. A game table characterized in that the number of the held icons is larger than the number of the held icons [for example, three or the like] in the period in which only the first variable icon h01 is displayed. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make various effects by changing the number of hold icons.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the hold icon, or may be one that can display a display other than the hold icon. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the hold icon, or may not display the hold icon.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon relating to the hold of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" hold icon [for example, hold icon h11, h12, h13, etc. shown in FIG. 260 (A2)] "). Yes, the display means can display a display (hereinafter, referred to as "numerical hold display [for example, a second hold number display shown in FIG. 260 (A2)]") for displaying the number of holds of the symbol variation display in numbers. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 260 (A7) to (A10), during the period when the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed. , The number of holdings in the special figure 1 in the second holding number display indicates “3”, etc.] indicates the number of the holding icons during the period in which the two variable icons are displayed [for example, FIG. 260 (A7)). -As shown in the figure (A10), during the period when the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 are displayed, six hold icons are displayed, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make various effects by changing the number of hold icons.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the hold icon, or may be one that can display a display other than the hold icon. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the hold icon, or may not display the hold icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number hold display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number hold display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the number hold display, or may not display the number hold display.

In addition, "At least a part of the period in which the movement display of the hold icon is displayed and the second movement animation is displayed in at least a part of the period in which the first moving animation is displayed. A game table characterized in that the movement display of the hold icon is displayed during the period. ] Was also explained.

According to this game console, there are cases where the hold icon can be used for various effects. Here, the movement display of the hold icon may be displayed during a part of the period during which the first moving animation is displayed, or during the entire period during which the first moving animation is displayed. , The move display of the hold icon may be displayed.

In addition, the movement display of the hold icon may be displayed during a part of the period during which the second moving animation is displayed, or during the entire period during which the second moving animation is displayed. The move display of the hold icon may be displayed.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1]. ] Was also explained.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1) A game table provided with an image display means, the image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one type of display among the plurality of types of displays is displayed. It is the first display, the first display is a display for notifying the time until a certain effect is performed, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display. Yes, the second display is a display that may foretell that the time until the certain effect is started will change, and the second display is displayed during the display of the first display. A game table characterized by being played.

Here, the "certain effect" may be an effect by a display and effect movable means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa writer, and a light guide plate).

(Appendix 2) In the game console described in Appendix 1, when the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display changes after the second display is displayed. A game table characterized by being configured.

Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 3) The game console according to Appendix 1 or 2, wherein the image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means, and is one of the plurality of image display means. Is a first image display means, one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means, and the second image display means is the first image. A game table characterized in that it is configured to be in front of the display means.

(Appendix 4) In the game console described in Appendix 3, the second display may be displayed in the second image display means, and the second display is displayed. A game table characterized in that the first image display means may be overlapped by the image display means of the above.

(Appendix 5) Even when the game console described in any one of the appendices 1 to 4 and the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced. A featured game table.

(Appendix 6) The gaming table according to any one of Appendix 1 to 5, characterized in that a display different from the second display is displayed after the timer reaches 0. The stand.

(Appendix 7) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 6, wherein the display of the second display is easier to hit the jackpot than the case where the display is not displayed.

(Appendix 8) The display of one of a plurality of types of the game console according to any one of the appendices 1 to 7, is a third display, and the above-mentioned certain effect is A game table characterized in that it is the third display displayed by the image display means, and the display of the substitute sign is an effect display.

(Supplementary Note 9) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 7, further comprising effect movable means, the effect movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations, and the plurality of types of the effect movable means. A game table characterized in that one type of motion is a staging motion, and the certain staging is a staging motion by a staging movable means.

Here, an operation other than the effect operation may be executed, and examples of the operation other than the effect operation include an operation at power-on, an initial position return operation, and an evacuation operation. Further, the effect movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be, for example, the one provided on the frame (front door).

(Appendix 10) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 9, wherein when the certain effect occurs, it is easier to hit a big hit than when it does not occur. ..

(Appendix 11) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 10, and a hot effect display is displayed between the time when the first display is displayed and the time when the second display is displayed. A game table characterized by being played.

(Appendix 12) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 11, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note 13) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 11, wherein the game console is a slot machine.

(Appendix 14) A game table provided with image display means, wherein the image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first. One effect display, one type of display among the plurality of types of displays is a second effect display, and the period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach. The period display is a display for notifying the timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing"), and the period is displayed before the first timing is reached. A game table characterized in that the display may be erased.

Here, the period in which the period display is displayed is not limited to the reach, but may be fluctuating or a big hit. Further, even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not in the second reach.

(Appendix 15) In the game console according to Appendix 14, the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third effect display, and the period display displays the third effect display. A game table characterized in that the period display is hidden during the display of the third effect display because the timing to be displayed may not be notified.

Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, error notification such as a ball removal error, notification indicating the firing position, notification other than an error such as notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card, light emission by the LED, and production operation by the accessory. May be done. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by the period display. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed does not have to be notified by the period display.

(Appendix 16) In the game console described in Appendix 15, the third effect display may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as “big hit symbol variation”) in which the result of the hit / fail determination is a jackpot. A game table characterized by a certain production display.

(Appendix 17) In the game console described in Appendix 16, the third effect display may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as “missing symbol variation”) in which the result of the hit / fail determination is incorrect. A game table characterized in that a certain effect display is configured such that the jackpot symbol variation is displayed more frequently than the lost symbol variation.

(Supplementary Note 18) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 15 to 17, further comprising an effect movable means, the effect movable means is a means that may perform an effect operation, and the third effect. A game table characterized in that the electric power movable means may perform the effect operation during the display of the display.

(Supplementary Note 19) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 18, wherein the period display becomes easily visible after the period display is hidden. Stand.

(Supplementary Note 20) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 19, wherein the period display is hidden until a certain period during the reach ends.

(Appendix 21) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 14 to 19, wherein the period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach. ..

(Appendix 22) The game console according to any one of the appendices 14 to 21, and the period display notifies the timing of displaying the second effect display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timing"). A game table characterized by the fact that it is a display to be displayed.

Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location for notifying the chance up may be fixed in response to the reach, such that when a certain reach occurs, the chance up is notified three times, and when another reach occurs, the chance up is notified twice. If this is the case, the notification may be made three times, and at other times, the notification may be made only once. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of "not notifying too much", or may be more likely to come off. Further, the susceptibility to a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of notified timings. Further, the larger the number of chance-ups, the easier it is to win a big hit, or the smaller the number of chance-ups, the easier it is to win a big hit.

(Supplementary Note 23) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 22, wherein the image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means, and is among the plurality of image display means. One image display means is a first image display means, one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means, and the first image display means is. It is an image display means that may display the period display, and the second image display means is an image display means that may perform an effect operation, and the second image display means displays the period. A game table characterized in that at least a part of it may overlap.

(Appendix 24) The gaming table according to any one of Appendix 14 to 23, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 25) A game table provided with image display means, wherein the image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first. It is one effect display, the display of one type of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display, and the display of one type of the plurality of types of displays is the third display. Yes, the period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach, and the period display is a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, "first timing"). The display is characterized in that at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display before the first timing is reached. A game table to play.

(Appendix 26) A game table provided with display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying the first display, and at least a part of the first display is displayed according to the passage of time. The mode changes at the first speed, the display means is a means capable of displaying the second display, and with the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display is the second. A game table characterized in that the first speed and the second speed are different depending on the speed.

(Appendix 27)
The game console according to Appendix 26, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one type of the display of the plurality of types of displays is a time display, and the time is displayed. The display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode of the time display changes according to the passage of time within a certain period, and the display of one of the time displays is the first display. The display of one of the time displays is the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 28) The gaming table according to Appendix 26 or 27, wherein the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display.

(Appendix 29) The game console according to any one of the appendices 26 to 28, wherein the first display is a display in which the display mode changes until the first time elapses, and the second display is described in the second display. The display is a display in which the display mode changes until the second time elapses. When the first time elapses, the third display is displayed, and when the second time elapses, the fourth display is displayed. Is displayed, which is a game table.

Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Further, the third display may have higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have higher reliability than the third display.

(Appendix 30) The game console according to any one of the appendices 26 to 29, wherein the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first type of display, and the first type of display is described above. A game table characterized in that there are the first display and the second display as types of display.

Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

(Appendix 31) In the game console according to Appendix 30, the first type of display is a timer notice display, and the display of one of the plurality of types is the first. The timer advance notice display is a display for notifying the time until the first effect display is displayed.

(Appendix 32) The game console according to Appendix 30, which is provided with operating means, the first type of display is an operation valid period display, and the operation valid period display is the operation means. A game console characterized in that it is a display indicating the period during which the operation of is valid.

(Appendix 33) In the game console according to Appendix 30, the first type of display is a period display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display. It is an effect display, and the period display is a display that may notify the timing at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing"). The game console is characterized in that the first timing is notified between the start and the end of the first period.

(Appendix 34) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 26 to 33, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 35) A game table provided with display means, the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one type of display among the plurality of types of displays is a countdown display. Yes, the countdown display is an effect in which notification of the time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter, referred to as "time notification") may be executed, and the time notification is executed by the countdown display. In this case, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode, and when the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display is the first display. A game table characterized in that the mode may change from the mode to the second display mode.

(Appendix 36) In the game console according to Appendix 35, the first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in the first display size, and the second display mode. The aspect is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in the second display size, and the game table is characterized in that the second display size is larger than the first display size.

(Appendix 37) The gaming table according to Appendix 35 or 36, wherein the countdown display is displayed in the first display mode when the display of the countdown display is started.

(Appendix 38) The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 37, and when the countdown display is displayed, the game table always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. A game table featuring.

(Appendix 39) The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 37, which is displayed in the second display mode rather than in the first display mode as it is. A game table characterized in that the jackpot symbol is easily confirmed and displayed in the end.

(Appendix 40) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 35 to 39, wherein the countdown display is started and ended within a period of one symbol variation display. ..

(Appendix 41) In the game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 40, when the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves. A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 42) The gaming table according to Appendix 41, wherein the time notification by the countdown display is continued even while the countdown display is moving.

(Appendix 43) The gaming table according to Appendix 41, wherein the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted while the countdown display is moving.

(Appendix 44) In the game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 43, when the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display. The countdown display is erased after the notification indicating that the time is 0 is performed and the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is performed by the countdown display. A game table characterized by being configured.

(Appendix 45) The gaming table according to Appendix 44, wherein when the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden.

(Supplementary note 46) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 35 to 45, which may not change to the second display mode.

(Supplementary note 47) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 35 to 46, wherein the display means is composed of a plurality of display means, and the display means of one of the plurality of display means is , A first display means, one of the plurality of display means is a second display means, and the first display means displays the countdown display of the first display mode. A game table characterized by being played.

(Supplementary note 48) The game console according to Appendix 47, wherein the countdown display of the second display means may be displayed by the second display means.

(Appendix 49) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 35 to 48, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note 50) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 35 to 48, wherein the game console is a slot machine.

(Appendix 51) A game table provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display, and the first display is a period. It is a display, and the first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, and one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display. The second display is a notice display, the first display is a display for notifying the first timing, and the first timing is the second display. It is a timing at which the display may be started, and the first display may be erased after the first display is started and before the first timing is reached. A featured game table.

(Appendix 52) The game console according to Appendix 51, one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display, the third display is an effect display, and the third display is the third display. The display is a display different from the second display, and the third display may be displayed before the first timing is reached, and the first display is the third display. A game table characterized in that the display does not notify the timing at which the display is started, and the first display is erased during the display of the third display.

(Appendix 53) The gaming table according to Appendix 52, wherein the third display is a notice display.

(Appendix 54) In the game console described in Appendix 53, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the case where the third display is displayed than in the case where the third display is not displayed. , A game table featuring that.

(Supplementary Note 55) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 52 to 54, comprising an effect movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements, and one of the plurality of types of movements is the first. The first operation is an effect operation, and the first operation may be performed during the display of the third display.

(Supplementary Note 56) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 51 to 55, which is configured so that the first display is displayed again after the first display is erased. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 57) The game console according to the appendices 51 to 55, wherein the first display is not displayed until a certain period of time elapses after the first display is erased. A game table characterized by being.

(Appendix 58) In the game console according to any one of the appendices 51 to 55, the first display is restarted by the elapse of a certain period after the first display is erased. A game console characterized by being configured to be displayed.

(Supplementary Note 59) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 51 to 58, wherein the certain period is a period during which super reach is being executed.

(Appendix 60) The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 59, one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display, and the fourth display is an effect display. The fourth display is different from the second display, and the first display may also notify the second timing, which is different from the second timing. , A game table characterized in that the fourth display is a timing at which the display may be started.

(Appendix 61) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Note 51 to 60, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix 62) A game table provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display, and the first display is a countdown. It is a display including a display, and the countdown display is a display that may include a timing notification, and the timing notification is a notification that a certain effect is performed by updating the display of the countdown display. The game table is characterized in that, during the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

(Appendix 63) The gaming table according to Appendix 62, wherein the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.

(Appendix 64) In the game console according to Appendix 63, the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size, and the second display mode is displayed. The display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size, and in the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is used. A game table characterized by the fact that is larger.

(Supplementary note 65) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 62 to 64, and when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is displayed in the first display mode. A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 66) The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 65, and during the display of the countdown display, the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. A game table characterized by the fact that it always changes.

(Supplementary note 67) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 62 to 65, the first display mode is more than the case where the first display mode does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. A game table characterized in that when one display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.

(Supplementary note 68) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 62 to 67, characterized in that the display of the first display is started and ended during the execution of one symbol variation display. The game table.

(Supplementary note 69) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 62 to 68, wherein the first display is a display in which the display position may change.

(Appendix 70) In the game console according to Appendix 69, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes. A game table characterized by that.

Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at the first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at the second position. It may be a game table to play.

(Appendix 71) In the game console according to Appendix 69 or 70, the first display may be a movement display, and the movement display changes the display position of the first display. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix 72) The gaming table according to Appendix 71, wherein the update display of the countdown display is continued even while the movement display is being displayed.

(Appendix 73) The gaming table according to Appendix 71, wherein the update display of the countdown display is interrupted during the display of the movement display.

(Supplementary note 74) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 62 to 73, wherein the countdown display is a time countdown display.

(Appendix 75) In the game console according to Appendix 74, the timing notification notifies that it is time to perform the certain effect by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. A game table characterized by being a notification.

(Appendix 76) The game console according to Appendix 74 or 75, characterized in that the countdown display is erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. A game table to play.

(Appendix 77) The game console according to Appendix 76, one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display, and the second display is not included in the certain effect. It is a display, and when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is configured to be erased after the second display is displayed. Game table.

(Supplementary note 78) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 62 to 77, wherein the display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means, and is one of the plurality of display means. Is a first display means, one of the plurality of display means is a second display means, and when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, A game table characterized in that the first display is displayed on the first display means.

(Appendix 79) The gaming table according to Appendix 78, wherein the first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means. ..

(Supplementary Note 80) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 62 to 79, wherein the game console is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note 81) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 62 to 79, wherein the game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A1) A game table provided with display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays, and the meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first. It is a meter display, one of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display, the first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states, and the first meter is displayed. One of the plurality of types of states in the display is the first state, and one of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is the third state. The meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state, and the fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states, and the fourth meter display is The state of one of the plurality of types of states in the fourth state is the fourth state, and the state of one of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is the sixth state. The meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state, and when the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, the meter display is said to be The expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state, and the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state. A game table characterized in that when the state changes, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state.

(Appendix A2) In the game console according to Appendix A1, the degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is such that the first meter display is the first state. A game table characterized in that it is higher than the expectation of changing from the third state to the third state.

(Appendix A3) The game console according to Appendix A1 or A2, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol, and the first meter display is displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped. A game table characterized in that it is a display that may be displayed.

(Appendix A4) The gaming table according to any one of the appendices A1 to A3, wherein the fourth meter display is a display that is started to be displayed in the fourth state. Stand.

(Appendix A5) The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A4, and one of the plurality of states in the first meter display is the second state, and the first state. One meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state, and the first meter display is a display that changes from the second state to the third state. The first meter display may start displaying in the first state, and the first meter display may start displaying in the second state. There is a certain display, and the expectation of a big hit is higher when the first meter display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state. A featured game console.

(Appendix A6) The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A5, one of the plurality of types of displays is the first icon, and the first meter display is the above-mentioned. When the first icon is displayed the first number of times, the display changes from the first state to the third state, and in the fourth meter display, the first icon is the second. The display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state by displaying the number of times of the above, and the second number of times is less than the first number of times. Game table to play.

(Appendix A7) The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A6, one of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display, and the third state in the first meter display. Is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on which the third state is displayed, and the sixth state in the fourth meter display is the sixth state. The game table is characterized in that it is in a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in which the state of is displayed.

(Appendix A8) In the game console according to Appendix A7, in the second state of the first meter display, the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the second state is displayed. The fifth state of the fourth meter display is the case where the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the fifth state is displayed. The game table is a display state indicating that there is, and the jackpot display is more likely to be displayed when the fifth state is displayed than when the second state is displayed.

(Appendix A9) The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A8, one of the plurality of types of effects is a pseudo-ream effect, and the pseudo-ream notice is the first. The display may start when the meter display of the above changes to the third state, and the pseudo-continuous notice may start to be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. A game table characterized by a certain display.

(Appendix A10) The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A9, one of the plurality of types of displays is an operation promotion display of the operation means, and the operation promotion display is an operation promotion display. , The display may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation promotion display starts when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. A game table characterized in that it is a display that may be displayed.

(Appendix A11) The game console according to any one of the appendices A1 to A10, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects, and one of the plurality of types of effects is produced. Is an effect, the certain effect is an effect in which the jackpot display is likely to be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the certain effect is displayed, and the certain effect is the first effect. The display may be started when the meter display changes to the third state, and the certain effect may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. A game table characterized by being a production.

(Appendix A12) A game console provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, one of the plurality of types of displays is a period display, and one of the plurality of types of displays. Is the first effect display, one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display, and the period display is a display that notifies the start of a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. Yes, the period display is a display for notifying the first timing during the display of the reach effect display, and the first timing is the first effect display during the display of the reach effect display. Is a timing at which there is a possibility that A game table characterized in that the notice display may be displayed before the start of the period is notified.

(Appendix A13) In the game console according to Appendix A12, the period display is a display including a cursor display, and the cursor display is a third position from a second position (start position) through a first position. By moving to the position (end position) of, the start to the end of the first period is notified, and the second position is a position before the first position. The first position is a position before the third position, and when the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that the first timing is reached. , A game table featuring that.

(Appendix A14) In the game console described in Appendix A13, the period display is a display in which a chance-up display (first chance-up display) may be displayed, and the chance-up display is the above-mentioned. It is a display for notifying that the first effect display has been started at the first timing, and when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the first position is displayed. A game table characterized in that the chance-up display is displayed at a corresponding display position.

(Appendix A15) The gaming table according to any one of the appendices A12 to A14, wherein the period display is a display that may perform a movement display.

(Appendix A16) The gaming table according to Appendix A15, wherein the movement display is performed before the start of a certain period is notified by the period display.

(Appendix A17) The gaming table according to Appendix A15 or A16, wherein the display position of the period display changes when the movement display is performed.

(Appendix A18) The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A17, and the notice display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and the display of one of the plurality of display modes may be displayed. The mode is the first display mode, one of the plurality of display modes is the second display mode, and the notice display is displayed in the second display mode. However, the game table is characterized in that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed (in the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed) than when it is displayed in the first display mode.

(Appendix A19) In the game console according to Appendix A18, the case where the notice display is displayed in the second display mode is more than the case where the notice display is displayed in the first display mode. A game table characterized in that the first effect display is likely to be started when one timing is reached.

(Appendix A20) The game console according to Appendix A18 or A19, characterized in that the notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode. Game table.

(Appendix A21) The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A20, and the period display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and the display of one of the plurality of display modes may be displayed. The aspect is a third display mode (for example, a default meter), one of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, a red meter), and the period display is the first. A game table characterized in that when it is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when it is displayed in the third display mode.

(Appendix A22) In the game console according to Appendix A21, the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode depending on the display mode of the notice display. A game table characterized by the fact that you do not know.

(Appendix A23) In the game console according to Appendix A21 or A22, when the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the notice display is displayed in the first display mode. A game table characterized in that the period display is more likely to be displayed in the fourth display mode than in the case.

(Appendix A24) In the game console according to any one of the appendices A21 to A23, when the notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the notice display is the second display. A game table characterized in that the period display is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode than when displayed in the mode.

(Appendix A25) The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A24, one of the plurality of types of displays is the second notice display, and the notice display is the first notice display. A game table characterized in that it is a notice display, and the second notice display may give a notice that the first notice display will be displayed.

(Appendix A26) In the game console described in Appendix A25, the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed as compared with the case where the first notice display is not announced by the second notice display. Is easy to hit big
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A27) The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A26, in which the notice display is displayed before the period display is displayed, the period display is displayed. A game table characterized in that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the notice display is not displayed before.

(Supplementary Note A28) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A12 to A27, wherein the notice display is a display performed by at least a part of the period display.

(Supplementary Note A29) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A12 to A27, wherein the notice display is different from the period display.

(Appendix A30) The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A29, and the period display is displayed by notifying that the reach effect display will be displayed by the notice display. A game table characterized by being foretold.

(Appendix A31) The gaming table according to any one of Appendix A12 to A30, wherein the notice display may be performed with the same symbol variation display as the period display. ..

(Appendix A32) In the game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A31, the notice display may be performed on the symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display on which the period display is performed. A game table characterized by being.

(Supplementary Note A33) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A12 to A32, wherein the notice display also displays a period during which the symbol stop display is performed.

(Supplementary Note A34) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A12 to A32, wherein the notice display is hidden during the period when the symbol stop display is performed.

(Appendix A35) The game console according to any one of the appendices A12 to A34, wherein the notice display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display. Game table.

(Supplementary Note A36) The game table is characterized in that the notice display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started.

(Appendix A37) A game table provided with a display means, wherein the display means may display a first display, and the first display is a case where a certain effect is started. It is a display for notifying a certain timing, and the display means is a means in which the display of A may be displayed as a certain effect, and the timing at which the display of A is started (hereinafter, "" A game table characterized in that, in "the first timing"), the first display may be displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display. Here, a certain effect may be the display of A. In addition, the display of the P-th display may be started as a certain effect.

(Appendix A38) In the game console according to Appendix A37, the first display is a period display, and the period display may display the first display in a certain period. It is a display for notifying a certain timing, and at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes according to the passage of time of a certain period, and the display mode changes at least a part of the period display. The timing when the display of A is started is notified.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A39) In the game console according to Appendix A38, the period display is a display in which the display B may be displayed, and the display A is displayed at the timing A. A game table characterized in that the above-mentioned second display is displayed.

(Appendix A40) In the game console according to Appendix A37, the first display is a timer display, and the timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the first display is displayed. The display mode of at least a part of the timer display changes according to the passage of time, and when the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the first display is displayed. A featured game console.

(Appendix A41) The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A40, and when the timing of the A is reached, the display of the A may be displayed, and the display of the A may be displayed. A game table characterized in that the display A may not be displayed when the timing is reached.

(Appendix A42) The gaming table according to any one of the appendices A37 to A40, wherein the display of the A is always displayed when the timing of the A is reached. Stand.

(Appendix A43) The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A42, wherein the display means is a means for displaying a second display, and the second display is the first display. A game table characterized in that it is a display foretelling that one display will be displayed.

(Appendix A44) In the game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A43, the first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed, and when the movement display is performed, the movement display is performed. A game table characterized in that the display position of the first display changes.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A45) The gaming table according to Appendix A44 is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time. The game table is characterized in that the movement display may be performed after the display of is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.

(Appendix A46) The game console according to Appendix A44, which is configured such that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time. The game table, characterized in that the movement display may be performed while at least a part of the display mode of the display is changing.

(Appendix A47) In the game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A46, when the display of the A is displayed at the timing of the A, the first display is displayed. A game table characterized in that at least a part of the display of is overlapped.

(Appendix A48) In the game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A47, when the display of the A is displayed at the timing of the A, the first display is hidden. A game table characterized in that the first display is displayed in an area that overlaps at least a part of the area where the first display was displayed.

(Appendix A49) The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A48, wherein the display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means, and is among the plurality of types of image display means. One image display means is a first image display means, one of the plurality of types of image display means is a second image display means, and the second image display means is. , The means provided in front of the first image display means, the first display is displayed by the first image display means, and the second display is displayed by the second image display means. A game table characterized by being displayed.

(Appendix A50) The game console according to Appendix A49, the second image display means is a means that may perform an effect operation, and the first display is displayed by the first image display means. When the first timing is reached, the second image display means may perform the previous period effect operation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note A51) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A37 to A50, comprising operating means, and the first display of A is a display relating to the operating means. Game table.

(Appendix A52) The game console according to any one of the appendices A37 to A51, wherein the display means is a means in which the display C may be displayed as a certain effect, and the display means of the C. A game table characterized in that the C-th display may be displayed at a timing when the display is started (hereinafter, referred to as "C-th timing").

(Supplementary Note A53) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A37 to A52, wherein the game console is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note A54) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A37 to A52, wherein the game console is a slot machine.

(Appendix A55) A game table provided with a display means, wherein the display means may display a first display, and the first display is a timing at which a certain effect is started. The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

(Appendix A56) In the game console according to Appendix A55, the first display is a period display, and the period display is a timing at which a certain effect may be started in a certain period. (Hereinafter referred to as "a certain timing"), the display mode of at least a part of the period display changes according to the passage of time in a certain period, and at least a part of the period display. A game table characterized in that the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified during the change of the display mode of the above.

(Appendix A57) In the game console according to Appendix A56, the period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed, and when the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the said certain effect is started. A game table characterized in that the second display is displayed.

(Appendix A58) In the game console according to Appendix A55, the first display is a timer display, the timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and according to the passage of time. The game table is characterized in that when at least a part of the display mode of the timer display is changed and the change of at least a part of the display mode of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.

(Appendix A59) In the game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A58, when the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started, and the certain timing is reached. In that case, the game table is characterized in that the certain effect may not be started.

(Supplementary Note A60) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A55 to A58, wherein the certain effect is always started when the certain timing is reached.

(Appendix A61) The game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A60, wherein the display means is a means for displaying a second display, and the second display is the first display. A game table characterized in that it is a display foretelling that one display will be displayed.

(Appendix A62) In the game console according to any one of the appendices A55 to A61, the first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed, and when the movement display is performed, the movement display is performed. A game table characterized in that the display position of the first display changes.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A63) The gaming table according to Appendix A62 is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time. The game table is characterized in that the movement display may be performed after the display of is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.

(Appendix A64) The gaming table according to Appendix A62 is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time. The game table, characterized in that the movement display may be performed while at least a part of the display mode of the display is changing.

(Appendix A65) In the game table according to any one of the appendices A55 to A64, the display of the first display is started in the first symbol variation display among the plurality of symbol variation displays. In the second symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation displays, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified, and the first symbol variation display is prior to the second symbol variation display. A game table characterized in that it is a symbol variation display performed in.

(Appendix A66) The game console according to Appendix A65, which is configured to change at least a part of the display mode of the first display according to the passage of time in a certain period. A game table characterized in that, in the second symbol variation display, the certain period is started, and in the first symbol variation display, the display mode of the first display does not change.

(Appendix A67) The game console according to Appendix A65, which is configured to change at least a part of the display mode of the first display according to the passage of time in a certain period. A game table characterized in that the certain period is started in one symbol variation display.

(Appendix A68) The first symbol variation display according to the appendix A67, from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display. A game table characterized in that the display mode of the display is not changed.

(Appendix A68) The first symbol variation display according to the appendix A67, from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display. A game table characterized in that at least a part of the display mode may be changed.

(Appendix A69) The game console according to Appendix A65, wherein the display means may display a second display, and the second display displays the first display. The game table is a display for notifying that, and the second display is a display that may be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

Here, the second display may be displayed in the second symbol variation display. Further, the second display may always be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

(Appendix A70) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary A55 to A69, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note A71) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A55 to A69, wherein the game console is a slot machine.

(Appendix A72) A game table provided with a display means, wherein the display means may display a first display, and the first display is a case where a certain effect is started. It is a display for notifying a certain timing (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain timing”), and at least a part of the first display is displayed according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started. The mode may change, and the first display may change the display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started. A game table characterized in that a notice may be displayed.

(Appendix A73) In the game console according to Appendix A72, the first display is a period display, the period display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and the time of a certain period. The game is characterized in that at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes according to the progress of the period display, and the certain timing is notified during the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display. Stand.

(Appendix A74) In the game console according to Appendix A73, the period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed, and when the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the operation is started. A game table characterized in that the second display is displayed.

(Appendix A75) In the game console according to Appendix A72, the first display is a timer display, the timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and according to the passage of time. The game table is characterized in that when at least a part of the display mode of the timer display is changed and the change of at least a part of the display mode of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.

(Appendix A76) In the game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A75, when the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started, and the certain timing is reached. In that case, the game table is characterized in that the certain effect may not be started.

(Supplementary Note A77) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A72 to A75, wherein the certain effect is always started when the certain timing is reached.

(Appendix A78) The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A77, wherein the display means is a means for displaying a second display, and the second display is the first display. A game table characterized in that it is a display foretelling that one display will be displayed.

(Appendix A79) In the game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A78, the first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed, and when the movement display is performed, the movement display is performed. A game table characterized in that the display position of the first display changes.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A80) The movement of the game console according to Appendix A79, after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed. A game table characterized in that it may be displayed.

(Appendix A81) The gaming table according to Appendix A79, wherein the movement display may be performed while at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changing.

(Appendix A82) The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A81, and the notice display gives a notice of the time until the certain effect displayed by the first display is started. A game table characterized by being a display.

(Supplementary Note A83) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A72 to A82, comprising operating means, and the notice display is a display relating to the operating means.

(Appendix A84) The game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A83, and the time from the advance notice display to the start of the certain effect by the first display is notified. A game table characterized by being played.

(Appendix A85) The display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the passage of time until a certain effect is started in the game console according to any one of the appendices A72 to A84. A game table characterized in that a notice display is always performed by the first display before the change is performed.

(Appendix A86) The gaming table according to any one of the appendices A72 to A85, and when the first display is displayed, the said according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started. A game table characterized in that a change in a display mode of at least a part of the first display is started.

(Appendix A87) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary A72 to A86, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note A88) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A72 to A86, wherein the game console is a slot machine.

(Appendix A89) A game table provided with a display means, wherein the display means may display a first display, and the first display is a certain effect is started. It is a display that notifies a certain timing (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain timing"), and the display means is a means that a second display may be displayed, and the second display is a means. , It is a display foretelling that the first display is displayed, and a plurality of the second displays (hereinafter, referred to as "plurality of second displays") may be displayed. The game table.

(Appendix A90) In the game console according to Appendix A89, the first display is a period display, and the period display is a display that notifies the certain timing in a certain period, or The display mode of at least a part of the period display changes according to the passage of time of the period display, and the certain timing is notified during the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display. A featured game table.

(Appendix A91) In the game console according to the appendix A90, the period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed, and when the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the said certain effect is started. A game table characterized in that the second display is displayed.

(Appendix A91) In the game console according to Appendix A89, the first display is a timer display, the timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and according to the passage of time. The game table is characterized in that when at least a part of the display mode of the timer display is changed and the change of at least a part of the display mode of the timer display is completed, the certain effect is started.

(Appendix A92) In the game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A91, when the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started, and the said certain timing and the said certain timing. A game table characterized in that, in that case, the certain effect may not be started.

(Supplementary Note A93) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A89 to A91, wherein the certain effect is always started when the certain timing is reached.

(Appendix A94) In the game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A93, the first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed, and when the movement display is performed, the movement display is performed. A game table characterized in that the display position of the first display changes.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A95) The gaming table according to Appendix A94 is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time. The game table is characterized in that the movement display may be performed after the display of is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed.

(Appendix A96) The gaming table according to Appendix A94 is configured so that at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with the passage of time. The game table, characterized in that the movement display may be performed while at least a part of the display mode of the display is changing.

(Appendix A97) The gaming table according to any one of the appendices A89 to A96, wherein when the second display is displayed, the first display is always displayed. Stand.

(Appendix A98) The gaming table according to any one of the appendices A89 to A96, characterized in that when the second display is displayed, the first display may be displayed. Amusement table to play.

(Appendix A99) The game console according to any one of the appendices A89 to A98, the second display is a display in preparation, and the display of the plurality of older brothers is a plurality of displays. It is a preparation display, one of the plurality of preparation displays is the first preparation display, and the display of one of the plurality of preparation displays is the second preparation display. The game table is a display, wherein the first preparing display is a display displayed before the second preparing display.

(Appendix A100) In the game console according to Appendix A99, after the first preparation display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the first preparation display (hereinafter, "first timer display"). ) Is displayed, and after the second preparing display is displayed, the timer display corresponding to the second preparing display (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display”) is displayed, and the above. A game table characterized in that the first timer display is configured to be displayed before the second timer display. Here, one timer notice may be displayed for a plurality of preparation displays.

(Appendix A101) In the game console according to Appendix A99, after the first preparation display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the first preparation display (hereinafter, "first timer display"). ) Is displayed, and after the second preparing display is displayed, the timer display corresponding to the second preparing display (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display”) is displayed, and the above. A game table characterized in that the first timer display may be displayed before the second timer display.

(Supplementary Note A102) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A89 to A101, wherein the game console is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note A103) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A89 to A101, wherein the game console is a slot machine.

(Appendix A104) A game table provided with display means, wherein the display means may display a first display, and the first display is a timing at which a certain effect is started. The display mode for at least a part of the first display may change depending on the passage of time until the certain effect is started. A notice may be given before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the passage of time until the start, and the notice is the same as the first display. A game table characterized in that it is a notice for notifying that at least a part of the display mode changes will be started.

(Appendix A105) In the game console according to Appendix A104, the first display is a period display, and the period display may start the certain effect in a certain period. It is a display for notifying the timing (hereinafter, referred to as "certain timing"), and the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified during the change of at least a part of the display mode of the period display. A featured game table.

(Appendix A106) In the game console according to the appendix A105, the period display is a display in which the second display may be displayed, and when the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the said certain effect is started. A game table characterized in that the second display is displayed.

(Appendix A107) In the game console according to Appendix A104, the first display is a timer display, and the timer display is a timing at which the certain effect is started (hereinafter, "a certain timing"). The game table is characterized in that, when at least a part of the display mode of the timer display is changed, the certain effect is started.

(Appendix A108) In the game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A107, when the certain timing is reached, the certain effect may be started, and the certain timing is reached. In that case, the game table is characterized in that the certain effect may not be started.

(Supplementary Note A109) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note A104 to A107, wherein the certain effect is always started when the certain timing is reached. (Appendix A110) The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A109, wherein the display means may display a second display, and the second display is the first display. It is a display that announces that the display of
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A111) The gaming table according to any one of the appendices A104 to A110, the first display is a display in which a movement display may be performed, and when the movement display is performed, the movement display is performed. A game table characterized in that the display position of the first display changes.

Here, the movement display may or may not be performed without fail.

(Appendix A112) The movement of the game console according to Appendix A111, after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed. May be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A113) In the game console according to Appendix A111, the movement display may be performed while at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changing.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A114) The game console according to any one of the appendices A104 to A113, and the notice is a notice display by the first display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A115) The display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, which is the game console according to any one of the appendices 104 to A114. A game characterized in that a false notice may be given before the change is made, and even if the false notice is given, the change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display is not started. Stand.
(Appendix A116) The display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, which is the game console according to any one of the appendices 104 to A115. A game table characterized in that a notice is given before the change is made.

(Appendix A117) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary A104 to A116, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note A118) The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes A104 to A116, wherein the game console is a slot machine.

(Appendix A119) When the game console is provided with an effect means capable of executing the timer effect, and the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It is an effect configured so that an effect (hereinafter referred to as "a certain effect") is started, and at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game. A game table characterized by being.

(Appendix A120) The game console according to Appendix A119, wherein the jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games, and the timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one round game. A game table characterized by being there.

(Appendix A121) The game console according to Appendix A119, wherein the jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games, and the timer effect may be executed over two or more round games. A game table characterized by a certain production.

(Appendix A122) In the game console according to Appendix A120 or A121, the timer display is a display configured to indicate the certain time by subtracting from the initial value after displaying the initial value. Yes, the display indicating a certain time is a display indicating a time when the timer display becomes 0, and the timer display in a certain timer effect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer effect") is the initial stage. The value indicates the first time, the first timer effect may be executed over the first number of round games, and the first timer effect is the second number of times. It may be executed over a round game, the second number of times is more than the first number of times, and the first number of times is one or more times. Game table to play.

(Appendix A123) The game console according to Appendix A120 or A121, in which one round game is configured to end when the first time elapses, and the timer display displays an initial value. After that, the display is subtracted from the initial value and configured to indicate the certain time, and the display indicating the certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0. A game table characterized in that a second time may be displayed as an initial value, and the second time is shorter than the first time.

(Appendix A124) The game console according to any one of the appendices A119 to A123, and the certain effect is started without displaying the timer display (hereinafter, "first case"). This is an effect, and the certain effect is an effect in which the timer display is started with a display indicating a certain time (hereinafter, referred to as "second case"). The certain effect in the first case is an effect executed in the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect"), and the certain effect in the second case is a second effect. A game table characterized in that the first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects. ..

(Appendix A125) The game console according to Appendix A124 is configured so that the timing at which the second effect can be started is likely to be earlier than the timing at which the first effect can be started. A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A126) In the game console according to Appendix A124 or A125, the first effect may be executed as the certain effect in the second case, and in the second case, the first effect. A game table characterized in that the timing at which one effect is executed and the timing at which the second effect is executed are different.

(Supplementary Note A127) The game console according to Supplementary Note A119 to A126, wherein the certain effect is a definite effect for notifying the player that an advantageous privilege is given.

(Appendix A128) The game console according to Appendix A127, which cites any one of Appendix A124 to A126, and the finalized effect notifies that the hold includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit. When the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in the hold is one, one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. If the number of big hit symbol variation displays included in the hold is two or more, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. A game table characterized by being configured in.

(Appendix A129) The game console according to any one of the appendices A124 to A126, and the certain effect is an effect suggesting that a player may be given an advantageous privilege. The second effect is more likely to be given a privilege advantageous to the player than the first effect, and the first effect is given a privilege advantageous to the player. There is a case where it is performed as a final effect for notifying that (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), and the first effect is not the final effect (hereinafter, referred to as "second case"). ), And the second effect is a definite effect that notifies the player that an advantageous privilege is given, and the second case is more than the first case. A game table characterized by being configured so that the production can be easily performed.

(Appendix A130) The game console according to any one of the appendices A119 to A129, and the timer display is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is displayed. A game table characterized in that the timer display may be displayed to indicate a certain time during execution.

(Appendix A131) The game console according to Appendix A130, and the timer effect is configured to be executed in one symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "third case"). The game table is characterized in that the certain effect in the third case is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed.

(Appendix A132) In the game console according to Appendix A119, the timer display is displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed is being executed. A game table characterized in that it is configured so that it may be displayed to indicate the time.

(Appendix A133) In the game console according to Appendix A132, the timer display is configured to start a display change to indicate the certain time when a certain condition related to the game is achieved. , The display indicating the certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is completed according to the timing when the certain condition is achieved. A game table characterized in that, depending on the timing at which a certain condition is achieved, a display indicating the certain time may be displayed during the execution of the jackpot game.

(Appendix A134) The game console according to Appendix A119, A132 or A133, and as the certain effect, an effect suggesting a game state after the jackpot game is completed (hereinafter, referred to as "11th effect"). ) May be executed, and as the above-mentioned certain effect, an effect (hereinafter referred to as "12th effect") for notifying that a symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the hold is executed. The certain effect may be executed even when the timer display does not indicate the certain time, and the timer may be executed during the execution of the jackpot game. A game table characterized in that the eleventh effect is more easily executed than the twelfth effect when the display does not indicate the certain time.

(Appendix A135) A game table provided with an effect means capable of executing a timer effect, and the timer effect is a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It is an effect configured so that an effect (hereinafter referred to as "a certain effect") is started, and at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is configured so that an effect (hereinafter referred to as "fourth effect") suggesting that an advantageous privilege is given to the player may be executed during the execution of the jackpot game. The fourth effect is an effect that may be executed when the certain effect is executed at least once or more.

(Supplementary Note A136) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note A119 to A135, wherein the effect means is a display means.

(Appendix A137) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A136, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix A138) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A137, wherein the certain time is a time indicating that the remaining time of the timer is 0. ..

(Appendix A139) The game console according to any one of Supplementary A119 to A138, wherein the certain effect is an effect that can be executed even at an interval during execution of the jackpot game. Stand.

(Appendix A140) A game table provided with an effect means capable of executing a timer effect, and the timer effect is a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It is an effect configured to start an effect (hereinafter referred to as "a certain effect"), and a timer effect is performed at least during execution of the symbol variation display, and a new effect is performed after the symbol variation display is completed. A game table characterized in that the certain effect may be performed during a period in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

(Appendix A141) A game console including a display means and an operation means, the display means is a means on which an operation display may be displayed, and the operation display is a display relating to the operation means. The display means is a means in which a timer display may be displayed, and the timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the operation display is displayed, and the timer display is , At least a part of the timer display changes according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed, and the operation display may be displayed after the timer display is displayed. A game table characterized by being there.

(Appendix A142) In the game console according to Appendix A141, the first timer display may be displayed as the timer display, and at least a part of the display of the first timer display is changed. Then, when the first time elapses as a certain time, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed, and the second timer display may be displayed as the timer display. When the second time elapses as a certain time after the change of at least a part of the display of the second timer display is started, the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed, and the operation display may be displayed. A game table characterized in that the second time is longer than the first time.

(Appendix A143) The game console according to Appendix A141 or A142, comprising a second operating means, the operating means is the first operating means, and the operating display is the first. It is an operation display, and the display means is a display in which a second operation display may be displayed, and the second operation display is a display related to the second operation means. A game table characterized in that, during the display of the timer display, the second operation display may be displayed after a certain time until the operation display is displayed.

(Appendix A144) In the game table according to any one of the appendices A141 to A143, when the operation means is operated while the timer display is being displayed, the display mode of the timer display changes. A game table characterized by having.

(Appendix A145) In the game console according to any one of the appendices A141 to A144, the display mode is changed according to the passage of a certain time until the operation display is displayed by the timer display. A game table characterized in that the display mode of the timer display may change in such a case.

(Appendix A146) The game console according to any one of the appendices A141 to A145, the display means is a means on which a notice display may be displayed, and the notice display is a timer notice. A game table characterized in that it is a display that announces that it will be displayed.

(Appendix A147) In the game console according to any one of the appendices A141 to 146, whether the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed or the lost symbol mode is finally confirmed is determined by the symbol. It is configured to be determined by a jackpot determination performed at the start of fluctuation, the result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display, and the jackpot determination is a start provided on the game board. It is configured to be determined according to the result of a big hit lottery using a random number acquired when a game ball enters the mouth, and the probability of being judged as a big hit in the big hit lottery (hereinafter, "big hit probability"). ) Is predetermined, and the jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display.

(Appendix B1) A game console including an operating means provided at a position where a player can operate the game and an effecting means capable of executing a plurality of effects, and the operating means are in a plurality of states. The state of one of the plurality of states is the first state, and the state of one of the plurality of states is the second state of the plurality of effects. One of the productions is the first production, one of the plurality of productions is the second production, and one of the plurality of productions is the third production. The first effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation means in the first state, and the second effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect. The second effect is not an effect that encourages the operation of the operation means, the third effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect, and the third effect is the second effect. It is an effect of urging the operation of the operation means in the state of One of the patterns is a second pattern, and the first pattern is a pattern including the start of the second effect after the start of the first effect. The second pattern is a pattern including the start of the third effect after the first effect is started, and is more than the case where the certain effect by the first pattern is executed. Also, the game table is characterized in that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the certain effect is executed by the second pattern.

(Appendix B2) In the game console described in Appendix B1, one of the plurality of effects is a fourth effect, and the fourth effect is the operating means in the third effect. The fourth effect is an effect that may be started after the second effect is executed, and the fourth effect is being executed. A game table characterized in that it is a suggestive effect regarding the correctness of the symbol variation display.

(Appendix B3) The game console according to Appendix B1 or B2, wherein the first pattern is the second pattern even when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. The third effect is not started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect in the second pattern.

(Appendix B4) In the game console according to Appendix B3, the second effect is started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect in the second pattern. A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B5) The game console according to any one of the appendices B1 to B4, one of the plurality of effects is the fifth effect, and one of the plurality of patterns. The pattern is a third pattern, the third pattern is a pattern including the start of the third effect after the start of the fifth effect, and the fifth effect is A game table characterized in that the fifth effect mode and the third effect mode are different modes.

(Appendix B6) The game console according to Appendix B5, wherein the third effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "third display") is displayed. The fifth effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "fifth display") is displayed, and in the third display and the fifth display, the fifth effect. A game table characterized by a larger display.

(Appendix B7) In the game console according to Appendix B5 or B6, the third effect is an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "thirteenth display") is displayed. Including, the fifth effect includes an effect of displaying a display imitating the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "fifteenth display"), the thirteenth display and the thirteenth display. At least one of the effect displays surrounding the display is displayed in the thirteenth color, and at least one of the fifteenth display and the effect display surrounding the fifteenth display is the fifteenth display. A game table displayed in color, wherein the thirteenth color and the fifteenth color are different colors.

(Appendix B8) The game console according to any one of the appendices B1 to B7, one of the plurality of patterns is a fourth pattern, and the fourth pattern is the fourth pattern. In the second pattern, the effect is not started at the timing when the first effect is started, and the fourth pattern is the third pattern at the timing when the third effect is started in the second pattern. A game table characterized by the fact that it is a pattern in which the production of is started.

(Appendix B9) The game console according to any one of the appendices B1 to B7, one of the plurality of patterns is a fourth pattern, and the fourth pattern is the fourth pattern. It is a pattern including a pattern in which a sixth effect is started after one effect is started, and the sixth effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect, and the first effect. Is an effect of selecting whether the third effect is started or the sixth effect is started as the effect after the first effect is executed. Stand.

(Appendix B10) The gaming table according to Appendix B9, wherein the sixth effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means in the first state.

(Appendix B11) In the game console according to Appendix B9 or B10, when the operating means is not operated in the first effect, the sixth effect is performed after the first effect is completed. A game table according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B11 (Appendix B12), wherein the effect means stocks an effect that encourages the operation of the operation means. It is a means capable of executing an effect suggesting that the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "stock effect"), and the stock effect is an effect capable of stocking an effect that encourages the operation of the operation means once or a plurality of times. The stock effect is an effect in which the stock is reduced in connection with the execution of the effect that encourages the operation of the operating means, and the first pattern is a pattern in which one stock is reduced in the stock effect, and the second pattern. The pattern of is a game table characterized in that one stock is reduced in the stock production.

(Appendix B13) In the game console according to any one of the appendices B1 to B12, when the operating means is not operated in the first effect, the above-mentioned after the first effect is completed. A game table characterized by the start of the second production.

(Appendix B14) A game console provided with a plurality of operating means provided at a position where a player can operate and a production means capable of executing a plurality of effects, and is one of the plurality of effects. The production is the first production, one of the plurality of productions is the second production, and one of the plurality of productions is the third production. One effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the first operation means, and the second effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, and the second effect. Is not an effect that encourages the operation of the first operating means, but the third effect is an operation response effect of the first operating means in the first effect, and the third effect is the effect. It is an effect that encourages the operation of the second operating means, and a certain effect is an effect having a plurality of patterns, one pattern of the plurality of patterns is the first pattern, and the plurality of patterns. One of the patterns is a second pattern, and the first pattern is a pattern including the start of the second effect after the start of the first effect. The second pattern is a pattern including the start of the third effect after the start of the first effect, as compared with the case where the certain effect by the first pattern is executed. A game table characterized in that a jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the certain effect is executed by the second pattern.

(Appendix B14-1) A game console provided with a plurality of operating means provided at positions that can be operated by a player and an effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects, and among the plurality of effects. One production is the first production, one of the plurality of productions is the second production, and one of the plurality of productions is the third production. One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means, one of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means, and the first effect is The second effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, and the second effect is the second effect. It is an effect that does not include an effect that encourages the operation of one operation means, the third effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, and the third effect is the effect. It is an effect that encourages the operation of the second operation means, and the execution of the first effect is started as compared with the case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started. A game table characterized in that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the execution of the third effect is started after the game has been performed.

(Appendix B15) A game console provided with a display means, the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon (hereinafter, referred to as a “variable icon”) relating to a symbol variation display being executed, and the display means is a means. , A means capable of displaying the variable icon in the first display area of the display areas in the display means, and the display means displays two said variable icons (hereinafter, referred to as “two variable icons”). It is a displayable means, one of the two variable icons is the first variable icon, and one of the two variable icons is the second variable icon, the second. The variable icon of is displayed in a display area different from the first display area.

(Appendix B16) In the game console according to Appendix B15, the movement animation of the second fluctuation icon (hereinafter, referred to as “second movement animation”) is displayed during the display period of the first fluctuation icon. A game table characterized by the fact that it may occur.

(Appendix B17) The gaming table according to Appendix B16, characterized in that the second variable icon may be displayed in the first display area after the second movement animation. Stand.

(Appendix B18) The size of the second variable icon displayed in the first display area after the second movement animation in the game console according to the appendix B16 or B17 is the size of the movement animation. A game console characterized in that it differs from the size of the second variable icon during at least a portion of the period.

(Appendix B19) In the game console according to any one of the appendices B16 to B18, the second variable icon is the first variable icon during at least a part of the period of the second moving animation. A game table characterized by the fact that it may overlap with.

(Appendix B20) In the game console according to any one of the appendices B16 to B19, the second variable icon may overlap with the notice display during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation. be,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B21) The game console according to any one of the appendices B16 to B20, wherein the second variable icon is the first variable icon during at least a part of the period of the second moving animation. A game table characterized in that it may overlap with the above-mentioned notice display.

(Appendix B22) The gaming table according to any one of the appendices B16 to B21, in which only one decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation. A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B23) The game console according to any one of the appendices B16 to B22, and only one mini decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation. A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B24) The gaming table according to any one of the appendices B16 to B23, wherein the decorative symbol variation display and the mini decorative symbol variation display are displayed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation. A game table characterized in that only one of them is displayed.

(Appendix B25) In the game console according to any one of the appendices B15 to B24, the movement animation of the first variable icon (hereinafter, referred to as "first movement animation") may be displayed. A game table characterized by being there.

(Appendix B26) The game console according to the appendix B25, which cites any one of the appendices B16 to B24, and the second movement animation may be started after the start of the first movement animation. A game table featuring that.

(Appendix B27) The game console according to Appendix B25 or B26, which cites any one of Appendix B16 to B24, and the display means can display the first display indicating the first jackpot expectation. As a means, the movement display of the first display is performed during at least a part of the period of the first movement animation, and the display means displays a second display indicating the second jackpot expectation. A game table that is a possible means, wherein the movement display of the second display is performed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation.

(Appendix B28) The game console according to any one of the appendices B25 to B27, which cites any one of the appendices B16 to B24, and is described above during at least a part of the period of the first moving animation. A game table characterized in that the movement display of the hold icon is performed, and the movement display of the hold icon is performed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation.

(Appendix B29) The game console according to any one of the appendices B25 to B28, in which the first variable icon changes to a display area different from the first display area after the start of the first movement animation. A game console characterized by being displayed.

(Appendix B30) The game console according to any one of Supplementary B15 to B29, and the variable icon is displayed in the first display area during at least a part of the display period of the two variable icon display periods. A game table characterized by not being played.

(Appendix B31) The game console according to any one of the appendices B15 to B30, in which the number of the variation icons increases from 1 to 2 and then decreases to 1 during the period of 1 decoration symbol variation display. A game table characterized by having.

(Appendix B32) The game console according to any one of the appendices B15 to B31, and during the period of 1 decorative symbol variation display, the number of the variation icons increases from 1 to 2 and then decreases to 1. A game table characterized in that after the decrease, it may increase to 2 and then decrease to 1.

(Supplementary Note B33) The game console according to any one of Supplementary note B15 to B32, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon, and the hold icon of the hold icon during the display period of the two variable icons. The game table is characterized in that the number is larger than the number of the held icons before the display of the two variable icons.

(Appendix B34) The game console according to any one of the appendices B15 to B33, the display means is a means capable of displaying the number hold display, and the number of holds indicated by the number hold display is the above 2. A game console characterized in that the number is less than the number of held icons during the display period of the two variable icons.

It should be noted that the above description of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be the variable display of the symbol (more specifically, the special symbol), and the description of the stop display of the decorative symbol is the symbol (more specifically). Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

In addition, "may be" in the above may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", and "○○ is possible" in the above. It may be replaced with "must be XX".

FIG. 271 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 271, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 into the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

In addition, the mode in which the above-mentioned display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 may be adopted, and further, the mode in which the touch panel is provided on the display means 903. You may. That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 903 can function as an operating means. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, the continuous stroke operation, or the long press operation by the touch panel, or when the long press auto continuous press function is in the effective state, the touch panel. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous striking function. Further, in some productions, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press auto-striking function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to be activated more or less. .. Further, there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured so as not to be effective in many cases, or may be configured to be small in number. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 271 encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine to use the enclosed ball as a launching ball and pays out the ball. May be executed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotating machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 272. Here, FIG. 272 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 272 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 272), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor. In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three medals are valid and three medals are bet, the five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no medal insertion is required) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up. The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states like the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Further, an ornament (not shown) may be provided on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The game console according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 273 (a), "a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008. However, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 3C, electronic data that realizes the present invention. It may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the present invention, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data according to the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 3B has an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through the mobile phone line, and data related to the acquired game (book). It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). It is provided with a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the above, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. In the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D, an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game ( It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, it may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D via an Internet line.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home-use game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as the recording medium for recording the game program.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a rock game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendices, etc. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, and appendices, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, when the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in any of the above embodiments is applied to the configurations of the other embodiments, the range of the game can be further expanded. There is.

The game console according to the present invention may be applied to a game console typified by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Inner frame 120 Speaker 160 Chance button 208 Decorative pattern display device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 227 Meter increase entrance 228 Normal figure start port 230 1st special figure start Port 232 2nd special figure Start port 234, 235 Variable winning port 300 Main control unit 400 1st sub control unit 418 Various lamps 500 2nd sub control unit

Claims (7)

Display means and
Operation means and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first effect setting display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the effect adjustment display.
The first effect setting display is a display related to the effect setting.
If the operating means is operated while the effect adjustment display is displayed, the effect adjustment is possible.
There is a case where the first effect setting display is displayed during the display of the effect adjustment display (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
Even if the operating means is operated in the first case, the effect adjustment is impossible.
When the variable display is started in the first case, the effect adjustment display is deleted.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
The effect adjustment display is a display related to volume adjustment.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
The effect adjustment display is a display related to brightness adjustment.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the second effect setting display.
The second effect setting display is a display related to a plurality of the effect settings.
When the first effect setting display is displayed on the display means, the settings that can be selected in the second effect setting display after the first effect setting display is erased increase.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 4.
The setting of the second effect setting display is a setting that can be selected in a certain state that is more advantageous than the normal state.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

Images